City of Eau Claire WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS …web.ci.eau-claire.wi.us/WWTF/EAU CLAIRE WWTF IMPROVEMENTS... · 2012-12-28 · donohue & associates, inc. table of

Donohue & Associates, Inc.3311 Weeden Creek Road

Sheboygan, WI 53081Phone: 920.208.0296Fax: 920.208.0402

Donohue Project No.: 12026www.donohue-associates.com

December 2012

PROJECT MANUALVOLUME 2

City of Eau Claire

WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITYIMPROVEMENTS – PHASE 2

Eau Claire, Wisconsin

http://www.donohue-associates.com/

Donohue & Associates3311 Weeden Creek RoadSheboygan, Wisconsin 53081Phone: 920-208-0296Fax: 920-208-0402

Project No. 12026

PROJECT MANUAL

CITY OF EAU CLAIRE

PROJECT NO. 2012-66WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS

PHASE 2

EAU CLAIRE, WISCONSIN

VOLUME 2

Donohue & Associates, Inc. TABLE OF CONTENTSProject No. 12026 1

PROJECT MANUAL

CITY OF EAU CLAIRE

PROJECT NO. 2012-66WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY IMPROVEMENTS

PHASE 2

EAU CLAIRE, WISCONSIN

VOLUME 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS

OFFICIAL NOTICE TO BIDDERS ......................................................................... 00100-1 to 00100-2

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ............................................................................ 00200-1 to 00200-11

STATE FORMS .................................................................................................... 00300-1

Contract Utilization of DBE Environmental Improvement Fund .................. 2 Pages

DBE Solicitation Guidance EIF ................................................................. 2 Pages

EIF MBE/WBE/SBRA Contracts Worksheet ............................................. 4 Pages

Disadvantage Business Enterprise Program DBE Subcontractor Form ..... 3 Pages

Wisconsin DNR Required Contract Conditions ......................................... 1 Page

WAGE RATES ..................................................................................................... 00305-1

State of Wisconsin, Department of Workforce DevelopmentDepartmental Order ................................................................................. 1 Page

Prevailing Wage Determination & Associated Documents ........................ 39 Pages

Davis Bacon Wage Rates ........................................................................ 55 Pages

BID FORM............................................................................................................ 00410-1 to 00410-17

DISCLOSURE OF OWNERSHIP .......................................................................... 00420-1

BID BOND ............................................................................................................ 00430-1 to 00430-2

NOTICE OF AWARD ............................................................................................ 00510-1 to 00510-2

AGREEMENT....................................................................................................... 00520-1 to 00520-10

NOTICE TO PROCEED........................................................................................ 00550-1

PERFORMANCE BOND....................................................................................... 00610-1 to 00610-3

PAYMENT BOND ................................................................................................. 00615(A)-1 to00615(A)-3

GENERAL CONDITIONS ..................................................................................... 00700-1 to 00700-68

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ....................................................................... 00800-1 to 00800-16

SPECIFICATIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS Donohue & Associates, Inc.2 Project No. 12026

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 01110 – Summary of Work .................................................... 01110-1 to 01110-12

Figures to Section 01110.................................................... 4 Pages

Section 01210 – Allowances .............................................................. 01210-1 Section 01230 – Alternates ................................................................ 01230-1 to 01230-2 Section 01270 – Unit Prices ............................................................... 01270-1 to 01270-3 Section 01295 – Schedule of Values .................................................. 01295-1 to 01295-2 Section 01315 – Project Meetings ...................................................... 01315-1 to 01315-3 Section 01321 – Construction Photographs ........................................ 01321-1 to 01321-2 Section 01325 – Progress Schedule (Critical Path Method) ................ 01325-1 to 01325-3 Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures............................................... 01330-1 to 01330-6 Section 01455 – Testing Laboratory Services..................................... 01455-1 to 01455-2 Section 01520 – Construction Facilities .............................................. 01520-1 to 01520-5 Section 01575 – Environment Protection ............................................ 01575-1 to 01575-4 Section 01615 – Material and Equipment ........................................... 01615-1 to 01615-5 Section 01668 – Testing Electrical Systems ....................................... 01668-1 to 01668-9 Section 01735 – Alteration and Demolition Procedures ...................... 01735-1 to 01735-6 Section 01740 – Cleaning .................................................................. 01740-1 to 01740-2 Section 01745 – Disinfection of Potable Water Mains ......................... 01745-1 to 01745-3 Section 01785 – Operation and Maintenance Data ............................. 01785-1 to 01785-18 Section 01789 – Project Record Documents ...................................... 01789-1 to 01789-3 Section 01810 – Instructional Services ............................................... 01810-1 to 01810-4 Section 01812 – Testing Tanks and Reservoirs .................................. 01812-1 to 01812-3 Section 01815 – Testing Piping Systems ........................................... 01815-1 to 01815-4 Section 01816 – Electrical System Demonstration.............................. 01816-1 Section 01820 – Systems Demonstrations ......................................... 01820-1 to 01820-6

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION

Section 02100 – Digester Restoration and Modifications .................... 02100-1 to 02100-4 Section 02200 – Site Preparation ....................................................... 02200-1 to 02200-3 Section 02270 – Erosion Control and Site Stabilization ...................... 02270-1 to 02270-4 Section 02310 – Grading ................................................................... 02310-1 to 02310-4 Section 02315 – Excavation and Backfill ............................................ 02315-1 to 02315-6 Section 02316 – Trenching and Backfill.............................................. 02316-1 to 02316-8 Section 02504 – Site Utilities Systems ............................................... 02504-1 to 02504-6 Section 02510 – Water Distribution .................................................... 02510-1 to 02510-6 Section 02530 – Sewer Pipe Materials and Installation ....................... 02530-1 to 02530-5 Section 02535 – Buried Biogas Piping Systems ................................. 02535-1 to 02535-3 Section 02630 – Manholes, Catch Basins and Inlets .......................... 02630-1 to 02630-5 Section 02730 – Crushed Aggregate Base Course ............................. 02730-1 to 02730-3 Section 02740 – Asphalt Pavement.................................................... 02740-1 to 02740-4 Section 02770 – Concrete Curb and Gutter ........................................ 02770-1 to 02770-5 Section 02775 – Concrete Sidewalks ................................................. 02775-1 to 02775-5 Section 02831 – Chainlink Fences and Gates .................................... 02831-1 to 02831-6 Section 02920 – Lawn ....................................................................... 02920-1 to 02920-5

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

Section 03200 – Concrete Reinforcement .......................................... 03200-1 to 03200-4 Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete ............................................ 03300-1 to 03300-14 Section 03400 – Precast Concrete ..................................................... 03400-1 to 03400-6 Section 03530 – Concrete Topping .................................................... 03530-1 to 03530-3 Section 03610 – Nonshrink Grout ...................................................... 03610-1 to 03610-2


DIVISION 4 – MASONRY

Section 04210 – Brick Masonry .......................................................... 04210-1 to 04210-5 Section 04220 – Concrete Unit Masonry ............................................ 04220-1 to 04220-5 Section 04900 – Masonry Restoration ................................................ 04900-1 to 04900-5

DIVISION 5 – METALS

Section 05500 – Metal Fabrications ................................................... 05500-1 to 05500-11 Section 05520 – Aluminum Handrail and Railing ................................ 05520-1 to 05520-3 Section 05530 – Bar Grating .............................................................. 05530-1 to 05530-3

DIVISION 6 – WOOD AND PLASTICS

Section 06525 – Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Grating ...................... 06525-1 to 06525-4

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 07130 – Sheet Membrane Waterproofing .............................. 07130-1 to 07130-5 Section 07210 – Building Insulation.................................................... 07210-1 to 07210-3 Section 07215 – Foamed-In-Place Masonry Insulation ....................... 07215-1 to 07215-2 Section 07532 – Polyurethane Foam Roofing..................................... 07532-1 to 07532-4 Section 07920 – Joint Sealants .......................................................... 07920-1 to 07920-6

DIVISION 8 – DOORS AND WINDOWS

Section 08100 – Steel Door Frames ................................................... 08100-1 to 08100-4 Section 08120 – Aluminum Doors and Frames ................................... 08120-1 to 08120-6 Section 08200 – Wood Doors ............................................................ 08200-1 to 08200-4 Section 08220 – Fiberglass Doors and Frames .................................. 08220-1 to 08220-3 Section 08330 – Sectional Overhead Doors ....................................... 08330-1 to 08330-4 Section 08331 – Overhead Coiling Doors ........................................... 08331-1 to 08331-4 Section 08411 – Aluminum – Framed Entrances and Storefronts ....... 08411-1 to 08411-5 Section 08520 – Aluminum Window Frames ...................................... 08520-1 to 08520-3 Section 08700 – Door Hardware ........................................................ 08700-1 to 08700-8 Section 08800 – Glass and Glazing ................................................... 08800-1 to 08800-5

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

Section 09510 – Acoustical Ceilings ................................................... 09510-1 to 09510-2 Section 09671 – Resinous Flooring .................................................... 09671-1 to 09671-4 Section 09840 – Sound Absorbing Wall Panels .................................. 09840-1 to 09840-2 Section 09960 – Coatings .................................................................. 09960-1 to 09960-11 Section 09963 – Polyurea Coatings ................................................... 09963-1 to 09963-4



DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

Section 10155 – Baked Enamel Steel Toilet Compartments ............... 10155-1 to 10155-3 Section 10445 – Door Signs............................................................... 10445-1 to 10445-2 Section 10520 – Fire Extinguishers .................................................... 10520-1 Section 10800 – Toilet Room Accessories ......................................... 10800-1 to 10800-2

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

Section 11240 – Lime Slurry and Delivery System ............................. 11240-1 to 11240-13

Schedule 1 to Section 11240 ............................................ 1 Page Section 11241 – Corporation Stop…………………….. ........................ 11241-1 to 11241-3 Section 11245 – Automatic Self-Cleaning Strainer ............................. 11245-1 to 11245-4 Section 11284 – Stainless Steel Gates............................................... 11284-1 to 11284-14 Section 11287 – Portable Electric Operator ........................................ 11287-1 to 11287-2 Section 11310 – Vertical Turbine Pumping Equipment ....................... 11310-1 to 11310--8 Section 11311 – Screw-Centrifugal Pumping Equipment .................... 11311-1 to 11311-7 Section 11312 – Submersible Propeller Pumping Equipment ............. 11312-1 to 11312-8 Section 11313 – Recessed Impeller Centrifugal Pump ....................... 11313-1 to 11313-7 Section 11314 – Air Operated Diaphragm Pumping Equipment .......... 11314-1 to 11314-6 Section 11315 – Submersible Centrifugal Pumping Equipment .......... 11315-1 to 11315-11 Section 11316A – Double Disc Pumping Equipment .......................... 11316A-1 to 11316A-6 Section 11316B – Double Disc Pumping Equipment .......................... 11316B-1 to 11316B-6 Section 11317 – Dry-Pit Centrifugal Pumps ........................................ 11317-1 to 11317-8 Section 11318 – Rotary Lobe Pumping Equipment ............................. 11318-1 to 11318-7 Section 11319 – Progressing Cavity Pumping Equipment .................. 11319-1 to 11319-8 Section 11331 – Screenings Washing and Compacting ...................... 11331-1 to 11331-8 Section 11337 – Automated Brush Weir, Baffle and Launder Cleaning Device ...................................................... 11337-1 to 11337-5 Section 11338 – Final Settling Equipment .......................................... 11338-1 to 11338-11 Section 11339 – Current Density Baffles ............................................ 11339-1 to 11339-4 Section 11345 – Chemical Feed System ............................................ 11345-1 to 11345-8 Section 11350 – Sludge Screen ......................................................... 11350-1 to 11350-7 Section 11352 – Sludge Thickening Equipment .................................. 11352-1 to 11352-14 Section 11354 – Polymer Feed Equipment......................................... 11354-1 to 11354-7 Section 11370A – High Speed Turbo Compressor Equipment ............ 11370A-1 to

11370A-9 Section 11370B – High Speed Turbo Compressor Equipment ............ 11370B-1 to

11370B-9 Section 11370C – High Speed Turbo Compressor Equipment ............ 11370C-1 to 11370C-8 Section 11372 – Air Compressors ...................................................... 11372-1 to 11372-6 Section 11376 – Coarse Bubble Aeration Systems ............................. 11376-1 to 11376-8 Section 11377 – Fine Bubble Aeration Systems ................................. 11377-1 to 11377-11 Section 11380 – Nozzle Sludge Mixing Systems w/Schedule 1 .......... 11380-1 to 11380-9 Section 11381 – Submersible Mixing Equipment ................................ 11381-1 to 11381-6 Section 11382 – Linear Motion Digester Mixing Equipment ................ 11382-1 to 11382-5 Section 11383 – Hyperbolic Mixing Equipment ................................... 11383-1 to 11383-6 Section 11387 – Digester Gas Treatment System .............................. 11387-1 to 11387-10


Section 11388 – BioGas Safety Equipment ........................................ 11388-1 to 11388-10 Section 11390 – Waste Gas Burner ................................................... 11390-1 to 11390-6 Section 11391 – Refrigerated Wastewater Sampling Equipment ........ 11391-1 to 11391-7 Section 11395 – Digester Gas Holder Cover ...................................... 11395-1 to 11395-6 Section 11396 – Fixed Steel Digester Cover ...................................... 11396-1 to 11396-6 Section 11800 – Activated Carbon System......................................... 11800-1 to 11800-13 Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels ....................................... 11990-1 to 11990-29

Schedule 1 to Section 11990 ............................................ 1 Page

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS

Section 12345 – MFG Steel Laboratory Casework KLS ...................... 12345-1 to 12345-10 Section 12510 – Control Room Consoles ........................................... 12510-1 to 12510-6

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Section 13121 – Metal Wall and Roof Panels ..................................... 13121-1 to 13121-3 Section 13124 – Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Builiding ..................... 13124-1 to 13124-5 Section 13128 – Extruded Flat Aluminum Cover System .................... 13128-1 to 13128-5 Section 13129 – Geodesic Structures ................................................ 13129-1 to 13129-3 Section 13200 – Biofilter System ........................................................ 13200-1 to 13200-7 Section 13205 – Fuel Tanks............................................................... 13205-1 to 13205-9 Section 13215 – Chemical Storage Tanks .......................................... 13215-1 to 13215-8 Section 13216 – Chemical Containment Pallets ................................. 13216-1 to 13216-2 Section 13217 – Tote Storage racks .................................................. 13217-1 to 13217-2 Section 13400 – Process Instrumentation and Control ....................... 13400-1 to 13400-11 Section 13402 – Process Control System (PCS) ................................ 13402-1 to 13402-78 Section 13423 – Analysis Instrumentation .......................................... 13423-1 to 13423-12 Section 13424 – Flow Instrumentation................................................ 13424-1 to 13424-5 Section 13425 – Level Instrumentation............................................... 13425-1 to 13425-7 Section 13426 – Pressure Instrumentation ......................................... 13426-1 to 13426-6 Section 13427 – Temperature Instrumentation ................................... 13427-1 to 13427-4 Section 13429 – Miscellaneous Field Devices .................................... 13429-1 to 13429-2 Section 13431 – Control Panel Construction ...................................... 13431-1 to 13431-6 Section 13441 – Miscellaneous Control Panel Devices ...................... 13441-1 to 13441-9 Section 13450 – Programmable Logic Controller ................................ 13450-1 to 13450-5 Section 13451 – Small Programmable Logic Controllers .................... 13451-1 to 13451-3 Section 13452 – Computer Equipment ............................................... 13452-1 to 13452-6 Section 13453 – Operator Interface Unit ............................................ 13453-1 to 13453-2 Section 13454 – SCADA Software ..................................................... 13454-1 to 13454-3 Section 13455 – Plant Communications ............................................. 13455-1 to 13455-11 Section 13456 – Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ........................ 13456-1 to 13456-2 Section 13481 – Field Instrumentation ............................................... 13481-1 to 13481-16 Section 13482 – Process Control System – IO List ............................. 13482-1 to 13482-3

Schedule 1 to Section 13842 ............................................ 10 Pages

Section 13483 – Process Control System – PCS Equipment .............. 13483-1 to 13483-2 Section 13491 – Process Control System – Configuration Services .... 13491-1 to 13491-9 Section 13492 – Process Control System – Testing ........................... 13492-1 to 13492-4 Section 13494 – Process Control System – Training .......................... 13494-1 to 13494-2 Section 13495 – Process Control System – O&M Data ...................... 13495-1 to 13495-4



DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS

Section 14500 – Horizontal and Inclined Troughing Belt Conveyors ... 14500-1 to 14500-6 Section 14620 – Manual Hoists .......................................................... 14620-1 to 14620-2 Section 14630 – Bridge Cranes.......................................................... 14630-1 to 14630-2 Section 14650 – Hoisting Equipment .................................................. 14650-1 to 14650-3

DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

Section 15060 – Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Anchors ..................... 15060-1 to 15060-8 Section 15083 – Mech Insulation ....................................................... 15083-1 to 15083-6 Section 15140 – Heating Pumps ........................................................ 15140-1 to 15140-7 Section 15190 – Piping and Equipment Identification ......................... 15190-1 to 15190-7 Section 15200 – Process-Mechanical Piping Systems ........................ 15200-1 to 15200-12 Section 15210 – Ductile Iron Piping.................................................... 15210-1 to 15210-6 Section 15215 – Type 304 Stainless Steel Piping ............................... 15215-1 to 15215-7 Section 15216 – Type 316L Stainless Steel Piping ............................. 15216-1 to 15216-6 Section 15220 – Steel Pipe ................................................................ 15220-1 to 15220-4 Section 15240 – Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping ............................... 15240-1 to 15240-3 Section 15241 – Chlorinated Poyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Piping ........... 15241-1 to 15241-4 Section 15242 – PVC Double Containment Piping ............................. 15242-1 to 15242-5 Section 15243 – Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Hose ................................. 15243-1 to 15243-2 Section 15250 – Pipe Sleeves and Seals ........................................... 15250-1 to 15250-2 Section 15251 – Couplings and Service Saddles ............................... 15251-1 to 15251-3 Section 15252 – Rubber Expansion Joints ......................................... 15252-1 to 15252-2 Section 15254 – Stainless Steel Expansion Joints.............................. 15254-1 to 15254-4 Section 15280 – Valves w/ Schedule 1 and 2 ..................................... 15280-1 to 15280-30 Section 15350 – Natural Gas Piping Systems .................................... 15350-1 to 15350-4 Section 15400 – Plumbing Systems ................................................... 15400-1 to 15400-22 Section 15465 – Bladder Tank ........................................................... 15465-1 to 15465-3 Section 15530 – Refrigerant Piping Systems ...................................... 15530-1 to 15530-5 Section 15550 – Digested Sludge Heat Exchanger ............................ 15550-1 to 15550-4 Section 15560 – Generator Piping ..................................................... 15560-1 to 15560-4 Section 15575 – Breeching and Stacks .............................................. 15575-1 to 15575-2 Section 15626 – Packaged Firebox Boiler .......................................... 15626-1 to 15626-5 Section 15627 – Condensing Boiler ................................................... 15627-1 to 15627-6 Section 15670 – Condensing Units .................................................... 15670-1 to 15670-4 Section 15704 – Hydronic Specialties ................................................ 15704-1 to 15704-10 Section 15709 – Plate and Frame Heat Exchanger ............................ 15709-1 to 15709-4 Section 15710 – Hydronic Specialties ................................................ 15710-1 to 15710-4 Section 15750 – Packaged Air Conditioning Equipment ..................... 15750-1 to 15750-4 Section 15765 – Electric Heating Terminals ....................................... 15765-1 to 15765-3 Section 15768 – Hot Water Heating Units .......................................... 15768-1 to 15768-2 Section 15785 – Air Handling Units .................................................... 15785-1 to 15785-5 Section 15800 – Ductwork Cleaning ................................................... 15800-1 to 15800-7 Section 15810 – Metallic Ductwork..................................................... 15810-1 to 15810-6 Section 15830 – Power and Gravity Ventilators .................................. 15830-1 to 15830-7 Section 15835 – Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Centrifugal Fans ........ 15835-1 to 15835-7 Section 15860 – Duct Accessories ..................................................... 15860-1 to 15860-4 Section 15870 – Variable Air (VAV) Boxes ......................................... 15870-1 to 15870-3 Section 15875 – Outlets and Inlets ..................................................... 15875-1 to 15875-4 Section 15896 – Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Ductwork and Dampers 15896-1 to 15896-9 Section 15905 – Temperature Control Systems ................................. 15905-1 to 15905-36


Section 15980 – Testing Adjusting and Balancing .............................. 15980-1 to 15980-3

DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

Section 16030 – Electrical Power System Studies .............................. 16030-1 to 16030-4 Section 16060 – Grounding ............................................................... 16060-1 to 16060-6 Section 16070 – Supporting Devices .................................................. 16070-1 to 16070-3 Section 16075 – Electrical Identification ............................................. 16075-1 to 16075-6 Section 16120 – Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less) ................ 16120-1 to 16120-9 Section 16124 – Medium Voltage Cable ............................................. 16124-1 to 16124-6 Section 16128 – Electric Pipe Tracing ................................................ 16128-1 to 16128-4 Section 16130 – Cabinets, Boxes, and Fittings................................... 16130-1 to 16130-7 Section 16135 – Underground Ducts and Manholes ........................... 16135-1 to 16135-7 Section 16136 – Raceways ................................................................ 16136-1 to 16136-10 Section 16140 – Wiring Devices ......................................................... 16140-1 to 16140-5 Section 16150 – Electric Motors ......................................................... 16150-1 to 16150-6 Section 16210 – Electric Service ........................................................ 16210-1 Section 16231 – Packaged Engine Generator Systems ...................... 16231-1 to 16231-14 Section 16262 – Uninterruptible Power Supply Systems .................... 16262-1 to 16262-10 Section 16274 – Medium Voltage Transformers ................................. 16274-1 to 16274-4 Section 16284 – Matrix Harmonic Filter System ................................. 16284-1 to 16284-4 Section 16285 – Surge Protective Device .......................................... 16285-1 to 16285-5 Section 16343 – Metal Englosed Pad Mounted Switchgear ................ 16343-1 to 16343-8 Section 16344 – Medium Voltage Switchgear..................................... 16344-1 to 16344-10 Section 16414 – Disconnects, Fuses and Circuit Breakers ................. 16414-1 to 16414-6 Section 16425 – Variable Frequency Drive Equipment ....................... 16425-1 to 16425-7 Section 16430 – Switchgear .............................................................. 16430-1 to 16430-12 Section 16433 – Paralleling Switchgear ............................................. 16433-1 to 16433-15 Section 16442 – Panelboards ............................................................ 16442-1 to 16442-5 Section 16443 – Motor Control Centers.............................................. 16443-1 to 16443-7 Section 16461 – Dry Type Transformers (1000 V and Less) ............... 16461-1 to 16461-4 Section 16511 – Interior Lighting ........................................................ 16511-1 to 16511-10 Section 16521 – Exterior Lighting ....................................................... 16521-1 to 16521-6 Section 16770 – Security Access Control System .............................. 16770-1 to 16770-3 Section 16780 – CCTV System .......................................................... 16780-1 to 16780-5 Section 16827 – Paging Systems ....................................................... 16827-1 to 16827-5 Section 16851 – Fire Alarm Systems ................................................. 16851-1 to 16851-12 Section 16900 – Biogas Cogeneration System ................................... 16900-1 to 16900-15

APPENDIX

DIVISION 10

SPECIALTIES

Donohue & Associates, Inc. BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTSProject No. 12026 10155-1

SECTION 10155BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes water closet compartments and screens

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings.

B. Samples for initial Selection: Submit manufacturer’s standard color samples for each distincttype of panel system required.

C. Manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Maintenance data.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Products and finished installations to be used by handicappedpersons must comply with requirements of ANSI A117.1.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Use manufacturer’s instructions and data to determine anchorage requirements for panelsystems. In a timely manner, distribute to affected installers of related work those systemcomponents and anchorage devices provided by panel manufacturer for incorporation in toother work.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PANEL SYSTEMS

A. Compartments: Provide compartments fabricated of partitions and erected using the followingpanel systems at locations indicated on the drawings.

1. Steel over honeycomb core, with baked enamel finish, floor anchored and overheadbraced.

B. Screen Systems at Urinals: Provide screens using the following panel systems at locationsindicated on the drawings:

1. Steel over honeycomb core, with baked enamel finish, wall hung.

2.02 PANEL MATERIALS

BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS Donohue & Associates, Inc.10155-2 Project No. 12026

A. Steel over Honeycomb Core – Baked Enamel Finish:

1. Steel Sheets: ASTM A591, Coating Class C, galvanized – bonderized:

a. Minimum sheet thickness for panels: 20 gauge.b. Minimum sheet thickness for pilasters: 16 gaugec. Minimum sheet thickness for doors: 22 gauge

2. Core Material: Manufacturer’s standard sound-deadening honeycomb3. Panel Fabrication: Use single steel sheet for each face plate and laminate both face

plates under pressure to core material. At full length of panel perimeter, form edges ofeach face plate to interlock directly with opposing face plate, or form edges to receiveadditional molding strip. If molding strip is used, provide one continuous molding strip foreach panel edge. Provide manufacturer’s standard neatly-made and finished corners.

a. Minimum finished thickness:

1) Panels: 1 inch, unless otherwise indicated.2) Pilasters: 1-1/4 inch3) Doors: 1 inch.

b. Internal anchorage reinforcement: Galvanized steel sheet, minimum 12 guage.c. Internal tapping reinforcement: Galvanized steel sheet minimum 14 gauge.d. Finish: Provide baked rust-inhibiting prime coat and a minimum of two

electrostatically-applied coats of thermosetting baked enamel.

4. Panel colors: Selected by Engineer, after contract award, from manufacturer’s completeset of standard colors.

5. Hardware, accessories, and mounting brackets: Manufacturer’s standard styles. Thefollowing material will be acceptable: Chromium-plated nonferrous cast alloy (“Zamac”).

6. Manufacturers: Products of the following manufacturers, provided they comply withrequirements of the contract documents, will be among those considered acceptable:

a. Accurate Partitions Corporationb. All American Metal Corporationc. American Sanitary Partition Companyd. Flush-Metal Partition Companye. General Partitions Manufacturing Companyf. Global Steel Products Corporationg. Knickerbocker Partition Corporationh. Metpar Corporationi. Monarch Toilet Partition, Inc.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide hardware and accessories as necessary to properly install panel systemsindicated.

1. Hinge: Self closing, pivot type hinge, recess-mounted within door; adjustable to permitdoor to rest at any angle.

2. Latch for compartments: Surface-mounted type, with emergency access feature. Providestop and keeper with rubber bumper.

3. Combination coat hook with rubber bumper: Provide unit of sufficient length to preventcompartment door from striking installed toilet accessories.

4. Leveling and anchorage devices: Rust resistant steel devices as recommended by panelmanufacturer for installation of panels in conditions indicated.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. BAKED ENAMEL STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTSProject No. 12026 10155-3

5. Pilaster Shoes: ASTM A167 (type 302/304) minimum 20 gauge stainless steel, finish tomatch compartment hardware. Minimum shoe height: 3 inches.

6. Fasteners: Tamper resistant, rust proof, exposed fasteners as recommended by panelmanufacturer for installation of panels and hardware in conditions indicated. Finish tomatch hardware.

7. Overhead bracing: Antigrip headrail bracing fabricated from continuous extrudedaluminum, clear anodized finish.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Perform installation in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, except where morerestrictive requirements are shown, specified, or are necessary for project conditions.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. DOOR SIGNSProject No. 12026 10445-1

SECTION 10445DOOR SIGNS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Engraved plastic laminate door signs.

B. Refer to Division 16 sections for identification requirements of electrical and instrumentationwork, not work of this section.

C. Refer to Division 15 for identification requirements of piping and equipment, not work of thissection.

1.02 DEFINITIONS


B. FS: Federal Specification.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals not required.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identificationdevices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similarservice for not less than 5 yrs.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field, colors,and viewing angles of identification devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Badger State Industries.

B. Allen Systems, Inc.

C. Brady (W.H.) Company, Signmark Division.

D. Marking Services, Inc.

E. Industrial Safety Supply Company, Inc.

F. Seton Name Plate Corporation.

2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS

DOOR SIGNS Donohue & Associates, Inc.10445-2 Project No. 12026

A. The wording on the signs shall match the room name shown on the drawings.

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations with OWNER.

2.03 ENGRAVED PLASTIC LAMINATE SIGNS

A. Engraving stock melamine plastic laminate complying with FS L-P-387A(1) in sizes required,engraved with engraver’s standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, white withblack core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fasteningexcept where adhesive mounting necessary because of substrate.

B. Thickness: 1/8-inch.

C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws except contact type permanent adhesivewhere screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.

D. 1 in. high letters.


3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces requiring painting or other finish, installidentification after completion of finishing and painting.

3.02 DOOR SIGNS

A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign, matching existing, on each new interior doors in theAdministration Building – Structure 300.

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Install plumb and level, securely anchored to door.

D. Mounting height and location: As required by accessibility regulations. Coordinate with Owner.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices and doors.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. FIRE EXTINGUISHERSProject No. 12026 10520-1

SECTION 10520FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide fire extinguishers, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and properinstallation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data:

1. Manufacturer's information and specifications and other data needed to provecompliance with the specified requirements.

2. Mounting instructions.

B. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01330.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Provide ten (10) multi-purpose chemical bracket mounted fire extinguishers with UL rating of10A-80B:C, 20 pound capacity.

B. Provide manufacturer’s standard wall-mounting bracket for each fire extinguisher.

C. Service, charge, and tag each fire extinguisher not more than five calendar days prior to theDate of Substantial Completion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceeduntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures,anchoring all components firmly into position for long life under hard use.

B. Locate extinguishers where directed by the Owner and the Fire Department official.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIESProject No. 12026 10800-1

SECTION 10800TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide toilet room accessories for each restroom, as specified herein, and as needed for acomplete and proper installation.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ADA: American Disability Act

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide Data: Manufacturers information and specifications.

B. Mounting instructions.

C. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Provide the following products of Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company, or equal.Coordinate with OWNER to match products used elsewhere on site.

1. Toilet paper dispensers: Double roll, surface mounted, stainless steel.2. Paper towel dispensers: Folded paper, surface mounted, stainless steel.3. Liquid soap dispensers: Wall mounted, push type soap valve, stainless steel.4. Grab bars: ADA Compliant 1-1/4 inch outside diameter, stainless steel.

2.02 MIRRORS

A. Provide 24 inch square - 1/4 inch polished plate glass or float glass mirrors, with clear coatedaluminum frames.

2.03 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and properinstallation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceeduntil unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES Donohue & Associates, Inc.10800-2 Project No. 12026

A. Install each item in its proper location, firmly anchored into position, level and plumb, and inaccordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and ADA requirements.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 11

EQUIPMENT

Donohue & Associates, Inc. LIME SLURRY AND DELIVERY SYSTEMProject No. 12026 11240-1

SECTION 11240LIME SLURRY AND DELIVERY SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. One complete hydrated lime storage, makeup, and delivery system as specified in thisSection.

2. See Schedule 1 to Section 11240: Discrete Data Requirements to SCADA.

B. If Owner selects Alternate 4, provide Lime Silo No. 2 and all associated equipment, piping, wiring,and controls as shown on Drawings and specified in this Section.

1. Equipment Tag Numbers with an * indicate items associated with Alternate 4.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers

C. The Work of this Section shall comply with the current editions of the following codes:

1. Uniform Building Code2. National Electrical Code

D. Commercial Standards:

1. ASTM A 36 Specification for Structural Steel2. ASTM A 283 Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel

Plates, Shapes and Bars3. AISI 8620 Alloy Steel, Hot Rolled and Cold Finished4. ASTM A48 Iron Castings5. SSPC-SP No. 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning6. ANSI/ASME B20.1 Safety Standards for Conveyors and Related Equipment

E. System Supplier's Standards:

1. Conveyor Equipment System Suppliers Association (CEMA) standards2. American Gear System Suppliers Association (AGMA) standards3. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standards4. National Electrical System Supplier's Association (NEMA)

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Work of this Section includes:

1. One complete Hydrated Lime systems, each system shall include:

a. Lime Storage Silo, Lime Feeder, Prep Tank, Slurry Aging Tank, Slurry Pump and DeliverySystems, Acid Wash System, Air Compressor System, and complete electrical controlsand instrumentation as described herein.

LIME SLURRY AND DELIVERY SYSTEM Donohue & Associates, Inc.11240-2 Project No. 12026

b. The Lime System Supplier shall be responsible for the overall performance of the Systemand all components.

c. One Lime System Supplier shall be made responsible for furnishing the Work of thisSection, but without altering or modifying the Contractor’s responsibilities under theContract Documents.

d. Coordinate design, assembly, testing, and installation.

B. Basis of Design:

1. Prep Tank shall dilute the slurry to a predetermined concentration set point, selected within therange of 7 percent to 20 percent, utilizing the direct weight measurement of lime and water viaload cells. The slurry concentration shall be within + or – 0.5 percent point of the set point (i.e.9.5 percent - 10.5 percent for a 10 percent slurry concentration setting).

2. System designed to receive hydrated lime, delivered by bulk pneumatic trucks and stored instorage silos. The system shall discharge the hydrated lime at a controlled rate withoutbridging, clogging, or flooding of the Prep Tank. The Prep Tank shall control the water andlime addition to provide a hydrated lime slurry at the specified concentration and quantity. TheSlurry Aging Tanks shall store the hydrated lime slurry for pumping by the lime slurry pumps.

3. Slurry Aging Tank shall provide the specified storage volume. The Lime System Supplier shalldemonstrate by submission of calculations that the slurry tank meets the required capacity.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit Product Data in sufficient detail to confirm compliance with requirements of thisSection. Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings in one complete submittal package. Partialsubmittals are unacceptable.

B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cut sheets and product specifications containing descriptive information and drawingsof lime slurry and delivery system equipment and their components for all equipmentspecified.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for lime slurry anddelivery system equipment.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Show power and control connections and distinguish betweenfactory-installed and field-installed wiring.

3. Electrical drawings including panel arrangement drawings, catalog cuts, and a P&ID diagramfor the entire system

4. Drawings including capacities and sizes, anchor bolt plan, parts nomenclature, material listand outline dimensions.

5. Drive and motor sizes and specifications.6. Design loading to be transmitted to foundation or supports.

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of Lime System Supplier’s factory production and final tests indicatingcompliance of lime slurry and delivery system equipment with referenced standards.

2. Certified reports of field tests and observations.


E. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.

F. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:

1. Operating instructions and maintenance data for materials and products for inclusion in O&MManual.

2. Lime System Supplier's written instructions for periodic tests of lime slurry and delivery systemequipment in service.

3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.


A. Lime System Supplier Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing equipment of types andcapacities indicated that have record of successful in-service performance.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain lime slurry and delivery system components from singlemanufacturer (Lime System Supplier) with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall berepresentative product built from components that have proven compatibility and reliability and arecoordinated to operate as unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver lime slurry and delivery system equipment and system components to their final locationsin protective wrappings, containers, and other protection that shall exclude dirt and moisture andprevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is madesafe from such hazards.

B. Store lime slurry and delivery system equipment in clean, dry location.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:

1. Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as described below, packaged withprotective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents.

a. One Lime Slurry Prep Tank Mixerb. One Lime Slurry Aging Tank Mixerc. One Impeller and Liner for Lime Slurry Pumpd. One Solenoid Valve for Prep Tank Inlet/Discharge Valves

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. RDP Technologies, Inc.

B. Chemco

2.02 EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION

A. Lime Storage Silos:

1. Provide two 14-foot diameter factory welded, skirt supported, storage silos each capable ofstoring 5,600 cubic feet of useable hydrated lime based upon a bulk density of 45 pounds percubic foot for structural design in accordance with ANSI/ASCE 7088. The silo storage straight


side shall extend to grade to form a support skirt and to enclose the chemical feed equipmentinstalled beneath the silo discharge cone. The support skirt will have an upper equipmentroom to house the feeder and lime slurry prep tank and a lower equipment room to house theslurry aging tank and pumping equipment.

2. Silo shall be designed for local Seismic Zone, wind velocity, and roof load of 50 pounds persquare foot.

3. The silo is to be of all welded carbon steel construction. All welds must be full penetration andperformed by an AWS certified welder. The welder’s certificate must be submitted to theengineer upon request.

4. The silo shall be designed for center fill and center discharge. Dynamic loads present due to“mass flow” effect shall not be imposed on silo walls.

5. The silo design shall take into consideration the pressure due to pneumatic loading of the siloand vacuum due to withdrawal of the product. 0.25 pounds per square inch working pressureand 0.03 pounds per square inch vacuum.

6. The silo shall have a 60 degree cone bottom terminating in an 8-foot diameter flanged bottomopening.

7. Epoxy type foundation anchors sized per Lime System Supplier and provided by Contractor.

8. The silo roof shall have a 10 degree slope and include the following:

a. 20-inch diameter manway with an 8-inch pressure vacuum relief valve.b. Target box mounting flange, 14-inch or larger outer diameter.c. Radar level:

1) Mounting flange.2) Located as shown on Drawings, one per silo.3) Sitrans LR460 manufactured by Siemens.4) 120 Volt single phase power.5) Flange openings, gaskets, zinc plated fasteners, interior protection shields of carbon

steel.

d. High level switch mounting flange.e. Dust collector mounting flange and pulse-jet type dust collector with filter area no less

than 340 square feet of polyester filter media with 3 horsepower (HP) motor.f. 8-foot diameter, 3 HP bin activator fitted to bottom of silo.g. Two lifting lugs.

9. The upper equipment room shall be designed to enclose and support the lime feeder andprep tank equipment. The upper equipment room shall include the following:

a. Exhaust fan mounting flange.b. Checker-plate floor with equipment support beams.

10. The lower equipment room shall be designed to enclose and support the slurry aging tank andpumps. The lower equipment room shall include the following:

a. 6-foot x 6-foot 8-inch double door opening.b. Exhaust fan mounting flange.c. Water supply connection.d. Slurry discharge connection.


e. Compressed air connection.f. Equipment support beams.g. Anchor ring with necessary hold-down channels.

11. Furnish a spiral stairway inside the skirt of the silo for access to the upper equipment roomfrom the lower equipment room.

a. The spiral stairs shall be complete with aluminum handrail, aluminum stair treads, andaluminum steel stringer.

b. The stair treads will be bolted to studs that are welded to the silo wall.c. The access opening in the upper equipment room floor shall be surrounded by an

aluminum handrail assembly.

12. Furnish a ladder and cage assembly for access to the silo roof from grade.

a. The ladder assembly with bolted cage shall have 16-inch long rungs constructed of ¾-inch round bar welded to stringers.

b. Ladder brackets shall be used to bolt the ladder assembly to the silo wall.c. The ladder and cage assembly shall be galvanized.d. Platforms, if required, shall be provided at intervals not exceeding 30-feet in height and

shall be provided with galvanized grating and handrails.

13. Furnish a handrail assembly and toe board around the perimeter of the silo roof.

a. 4-inch high, two-rail system, 4-inch high aluminum kickplate.b. Mill finished aluminum.c. Bolted to silo.

14. Silo Skirt Accessories (per silo):

a. Unit Heater:

1) Two 15 kilowatt (kW) unit heaters.2) 910 cubic feet per minute (CFM).3) 51,200 British thermal units (BTU) per hour.4) Two SPST built-in thermostats, range 45 degrees Fahrenheit (F) to 90 degrees F.5) Horizontally mounted.6) 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz (Hz).

b. Motorized Damper:

1) Two aluminum frame dampers.2) 23 inch square opening.3) 115 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz.4) Interlock motorized damper with shutter mounted exhaust fan.

c. Two painted steel bird screens for motorized damper opening.d. Exhaust Fan:

1) Two shutter mounted exhaust fans.2) 1,625 CFM (free air).3) 18 inch diameter aluminum fan blades protected by guard with silver metallic vinyl

finish.4) Mount in 19 inch square opening.5) Two SPST thermostats, 115 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hz.


e. One double door opening, provided with flashing ring to accommodate flashing requiredbetween Silo and Alkalinity Building.

f. Six 100 watt incandescent light fixtures, wall mounted, vapor tight.g. Air Compressor:

1) One, two stage design air compressor. SpeedAire Model 1WD582) 460 volt, 3 phase, 5 horsepower motor.3) Splash lubricated cast iron compressor and finned intercooler.4) Safety relief valve, pressure control, pressure switch, and filter regulator.5) 16.5 CFM capacity at 175 pounds per square inch (PSI).6) 80 gallon vertical receiver.7) Automatic programmable electric drain valve, 120 volt field connection to compressor

receiver.8) Refrigerated dryer with integral re-heater to produce 38 degrees F pressure dew

point. 25 CFM capacity at 175 PSI, 120 volt, SpeedAire model 3YA51.

h. Power required for all silo skirt accessories provided by distribution panels in Structure435.

i. Insulation shall be 2-inch Arma Tuff Plus II as manufactured by Armaflex. See Section07210.

15. Storage Silo Fill Pipe:

a. 4 inch, Schedule 40 steel with 90 degree, 4 foot radius long sweep replaceable wearbackelbows.

b. Located at target box on top of bin.c. Located no further than 4 feet from unloading control panel.d. Dust cap and limit switch assembly for control of dust collector operation.e. NEMA 4 limit switch.

16. Inlet Target Box:

a. Mounted on top of silo to reduce velocity of lime conveyed and allow lime to drop intostorage silo in an even pattern.

b. Removable cap on target box to provide access for cleaning on conveying pipe withremovable top lid.

c. Minimum 1 foot 2 inch diameter by 2 foot 2 inch high.d. Fill line and target box shipped loose, installed by Contractor.

17. Bin Vent Filter:

a. Torit Model TBV Pulse-jet bin vent filter system manufactured by Donaldson Company,Inc.

b. Contains product within bin or silo while discharging air displaced by product filing silo.c. Air-to-media ratio of 3:1.d. Plenum model filter.e. Torit Bin Vent complete with filter cartridges, cleaning system hardware, installation and

maintenance manual, and replacement parts list.

1) 12 gauge HRS bolted and welded construction.2) Pulse jet pipework,3) ¾ inch diaphragm valves and blowpipes,4) Pilot solenoid valves,5) 4 inch square by 3/16 inch wall tubing compressed air manifold,6) Venturis to enhance cleaning,7) Top service door with prop brackets and safety latch.


8) 1 inch National Pipe Thread (NPT) compressed air connection for attachment ofclean and dry compressed air at 90 to 100 PSIG and temperature not exceeding 150degrees F.

f. No tools required to replace filter.g. Filter cartridges pre-assembled in vertical configuration and serviced from outside on top

of unit and on clean side of filter.h. Product entrained in storage container while filling shall enter at bottom of tilter and collect

on outside surface of filter cartridge.i. Clean air shall pass through filter media and escape through back of filter or exhaust fan.j. Collector cleaning system controlled by solid state printed circuit cleaning control.

1) Progressively energize pilot solenoid valves.2) Diaphragm valve send pulse of 90 to 100 PSIG compressed air into blowpipe.3) Pulse discharged from air manifold through diaphragm valves, blowpipes, and filter

venturis into filter cartridge.4) Product shall fall into storage container.

k. Dust collector and gaskets shipped loose, installed by Contractor.

18. Bin Activator:

a. Vibrating type mounted on opening of storage silo.b. Eliminates bridging, jamming, segregation, ratholing, and shall insure positive continuous

flow of chemicals on first-in, first-out basis.c. Minimum 8 inch diameter plain opening at discharge.d. Gyrated type hopper with eccentric weights mounted so vibration is applied perpendicular

to channel flow.e. Vibrating bottom shall be hung from bin with rubber-bushed steel hangers and connected

to bins with reinforced butyl sleeve to prevent transmitting vibrations to bin.f. Vibration generated by motor-driven eccentric type oil lubricated gyrator.g. Totally enclosed, non-ventilated (TENV) motor enclosure.h. Continuous operation during feed cycle.i. Flex connection on discharge spout suitable for connection to screw feeder.

B. Lime Feeders:

1. Equipment Summary:

a. 2,600 pounds per hour hydrated lime capacity to Prep tank.b. Carbon steel construction.c. 2 HP motor.

2. Includes all equipment, supports, and appurtenances necessary for operation of feeder.3. Feeder includes but is not limited to drive unit, inlet flexible connector, maintenance gate,

discharge chute, and supports.4. Screw shall be minimum of 6 inches in diameter mounted in fully enclosed casing.5. Tail bearings shall be flanged external ball bearing with grease fitting and external lip type

plate seal.6. Feeder discharge chute shall isolate screw feeder from Prep Tank and load cell assembly.7. Provide discharge chute with air operated vibrator, which shall run after each lime filling

sequence.8. Feeder cover shall be provided with a plug switch to detect a plugged condition and stop

Feeder.9. Feeder motor shall be directly connected to speed reducer which is directly connected to

feeder screw.


C. Slurry Prep Tanks


a. Shall prepare 6 gallons per minute (GPM) to 15 GPM of 10 percent hydrated lime slurry.b. 304 Stainless Steel construction with 2-B finish.c. 200 gallon tank capacity.d. 2 HP mixer motor.e. ½ HP washdown pump.f. 10 cubic feet per minute (CFM) at 90 PSI air and 45 GPM water supply.

2. Tank Design:

a. Tank shall be self supporting on the load cell assembly and shall be shipped completewith all accessories specified.

b. All connections to the tanks shall be as specified by the Lime System Supplier in order toallow for the load cell system to operate properly.

c. Tanks shall include an inlet damper valve, which shall automatically open and close uponthe start and completion of the lime addition cycle.

d. Inlet damper shall be controlled by an air operated control valve. Inlet damper shall beinstalled and tested by Lime System Supplier prior to shipment.

e. Tank shall be furnished with an access opening located on top of unit. The accessopening shall be complete with a cover, which shall fit securely over the opening. Covershall be gasketed to contain steam and dust.

f. Discharge valve on bottom of tank shall automatically control tank draining. A separatedrain opening shall be provided for maintenance and cleaning of the tank.

g. Tanks shall include a dust arrestor, which shall be located either externally on tank wall orinternally directly beneath the access opening.

h. Dust arrestor shall have a minimum 3 inch opening to remove the dust from tank. Thedust arrestor shall include a separate spray nozzle to quench the steam and remove thedust from tank. Dust arrestor shall be provided with a solenoid valve, which shallautomatically control the operation of unit.

i. Tank shall include a wash down system consisting of multiple spray nozzles, which shallclean inside of tank both during water addition and the dilution step as part of each batchof lime slurry produced.

3. Mixer Assembly:

a. Mixer assembly on tank shall be mounted and tested by Lime System Supplier prior toshipment.

b. Mixer motor directly connected to speed reducer.

4. Load Cell Assembly:

a. Tanks shall be mounted on load cell assembly, which shall weigh tank contents andcontrol operation of dilution process.

b. Load cell assembly shall consist of three load cells as part of support assembly. LimeSystem Supplier shall make all final adjustments to weighing assembly prior to the systembeing placed in to operation.

5. Washdown Pump:

a. Provide Washdown Pump to circulate acid solution while cleaning Prep Tank.b. When required Prep Tank shall be filled with water and a powdered form of sulfamic or

muriatic acid shall be added to full tank.


c. Mixer is energized removing scale from the Prep Tank interior.d. Washdown Pump shall recirculate solution through 3/8” spray nozzles located at Prep

Tank perimeter to clean the Tank’s cover and interior components.e. Solution shall be discharged to Aging Tank for cleaning.f. After cleaning, fresh water shall be introduced, cleaning Prep Tank interior and flushing

Washdown Pump tubing.

6. Solenoid Air Valves:

a. Install to a mounting frame provided by Lime System Supplier.b. Frame shall be located above the Prep Tank such that electrical devices shall be isolated

from the slurry batch operation.c. Provide and install air piping and flexible tubing from these devices to manifolds and

valves located at Prep Tank.

D. Slurry Aging Tanks:


a. 400 gallon tank capacity.b. 304 Stainless Steel construction with 2-B finish.c. 2 HP mixer motor.

2. Tank Design:

a. Tanks shall be furnished with an access cover located on top of unit. Cover shall begasketed to contain steam and dust.

b. Flange connection for the slurry pump at bottom of tank. A separate drain opening shallbe provided for maintenance and cleaning of tank.

3. Mixer Assembly:

a. Tank shall include a mixer assembly, which shall be mounted and tested by Lime SystemSupplier prior to shipment.

b. Mixer assembly shall consist of a motor directly connected to a speed reducer.c. Speed reducer shall be grease lubricated and directly connected to mixer shaft assembly.

4. Load Cell Assembly:

a. Tank shall be provided with a single load cell, which shall monitor tank weight and providea continuous level signal. Lime System Supplier shall make all final adjustments tomonitoring components prior to the system being placed in to operation.

E. Slurry Pump and Slurry Delivery System:


a. Pump 7 percent to 20 percent lime slurry.b. Capacity of 54 GPM at 41 feet total dynamic head.c. 5 HP motor.

2. Slurry Pump:

a. A separate Lime Delivery System shall be provided for each Lime System to deliver 15GPM of a 10 percent hydrated lime solution to plant process.


b. System shall operate as a continuous 2 inch inner diameter tubing feed loop pumped at arate of 54 GPM from which two Lime Delivery Assemblies shall draw from.

c. System shall consist of the following:

1) One slurry pump mounted adjacent to each Slurry Aging Tank.2) Galigher Horizontal Rubber Lined Slurry Pump.3) 480 volt, 3 phase motor, V-Belt drive.4) Pump seals shall be self-sealing and require no plant water.5) Pump shall be provided with an Onyx Pressure sensor to detect high loop pressure.

3. Lime Delivery Assemblies (435-M-S1T1, -S1T2, -S2T1*, -S2T2*):

a. Two Lime Delivery Assemblies shall be provided for each separate loop, dosing from 1.5to 7.5 GPM and each consists of the following:

1) One, 1 inch, Badger Meter, M Series non-contacting flow meter (435-FE/FIT-S1T1, -S1T2, -S2T1*, -S2T2*).

2) Flow meter shall be the wafer type and provide a 4-20mA signal back to Lime SystemControl Panel.

3) One, 1 inch electrically actuated pinch valve.4) Valve shall be an Onyx Valve series CER to infinitely adjust or shut off flow of lime to

the plant process.5) Valve shall receive a 4-20 mA signal from Lime System Control Panel.6) Valve shall be provided with an integral base, which shall anchor directly to basin.

b. Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing 2 inch inner diameter industrialPVC hose (see Section 15243) and support system and installing the Lime DeliveryAssemblies.

c. Lime System Supplier shall provide a Lime Delivery Assembly mounted at delivery point.Slurry tubing and valving not described above, from Pump to Lime Delivery Assemblyshall be provided by Contractor.

2.03 LIME SYSTEM CONTROL PANELS (435-LCP-5501, -5502*)

A. Panel Construction:

1. Two control panels shall be furnished to control the operation of each Lime System.2. Panels shall be manufactured in a UL approved shop.3. Panels shall be inspected, approved and labeled prior to shipment in accordance with UL 508

requirements.4. Panels shall be a single NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure.5. Provided to control all motors, valves, switches and control functions for Lime System

equipment and provide proper interlocking of equipment.6. The control panels shall provide the following functions:

a. On/off control and starter for each electric motor.b. Concentration set point and dosing flow.c. Status of all valves, motors and electrical devices.

B. Panel Specifications:

1. Equipment control, both automatic and manual, shall be via selector switches andProgrammable Logic Controller (PLC).

2. PLC shall be the CompactLogix as manufactured by Allen-Bradley.3. Numeric Interface shall be mounted on face of control panel for selection of concentration and

dosing flow.


4. Interface shall be in accordance with Section 13453 – OIU, which interfaces a PLC.5. In Manual Mode, each piece of equipment shall be independently controlled without interlocks

to other equipment (except personnel and equipment safety).6. In the Automatic mode, each piece of equipment shall be interlocked for completely

automated slurry routines.7. Communications from PLC with plant SCADA shall be through Allen Bradley Ethernet / IP.8. Modem shall be provided to allow remote access to the PLC, via a telephone line.

2.04 LIME TRUCK UNLOADING PANELS (435-CS-5501, -5502*)

A. Panel Construction:

1. Lime Truck Unloading Panels (LTUP) shall be provided, to control operation of each limetruck unloading system and provide proper interlocking of equipment.

2. Control panels shall be manufactured and assembled in a UL registered shop.3. All components (relays, breakers, pilot devices etc.), wiring and labeling shall be Lime System

Suppliers standard to meet UL requirements.4. Prior to shipment, all control panels shall be inspected, approved and labeled in accordance

with UL 508A requirements.5. Lime Truck Unloading Panels (LTUP) shall provide the following functions:

a. Hand-Off-Auto control of the dust collector fan motor.b. Level indication and alarm.

6. Lime filling station is utilized to facilitate loading of lime into the silo.7. An independent contractor shall deliver lime from a bulk truck that utilizes its own pneumatic

delivering system.8. Truck shall connect to the "EVER-TITE" cast iron adapter on fill pipe. Operation of dust

collector initiated when cap is removed from fill pipe.9. Removal of the cap on the fill pipe moves the limit switch, which initiates operation of dust

collector.10. Dust collector fan shall continue to run as long as the fill pipe cap is removed.11. After the truck has delivered entire load of lime, driver shall remove hose from fill pipe.12. Replacement of cap initiates shutdown sequence.13. 480 volt, 30 amp, 3 phase, 60 Hz.14. Control panel shall have the following minimum features in addition to the previously described

functions and controls:

a. Wall mount NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure with integral safety disconnect switch.b. Motor Starter for the Dust Collector Fan.

2.05 COATINGS

A. All steelwork shall be sandblasted to SSPC-SP6, followed by one coat of Tnemec 66-1211 EpoxyPrimer at 3.0 to 5.0 mils D.F.T. Intermediate and finish painting shall be done in the field byContractor.

B. The Silo exterior and skirt area shall be sandblasted to SSPC-SP 6 followed by one coat of EpoxyPrimer at 3.0 to 4.0 mils D.F.T. The interior of the Silo shall be mill finished; without sandblastingor painting.

C. Stainless steel, bronze, and nonmetallic surfaces shall not be coated.

D. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease.



3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install lime slurry and delivery system equipment in accordance with Lime System Supplier'swritten instructions.

B. All sections and loose items shall be match-marked prior to shipping.

C. Lime System Supplier shall furnish a complete, pre-assembled system.

1. All equipment contained in skirted area of silo shall be factory installed, wired, piped, andtested prior to delivery to job site.

D. Factory assembly shall include all pipe and wire as specified below:

1. Factory pre-wiring shall include all wire and conduit from Lime System Control Panel to allcomponents within the silo skirt. Factory pre-wiring shall also include all conduit and wire forall components located on silo exterior and roof, including dust collector, silo level devices,and Lime Truck Unloading Panel.

2. Factory pre-piping shall include all compressed air, water, and slurry piping from connectionsin silo skirt to respective equipment located within skirt. Factory pre-piping shall also includecompressed air piping from silo skirt to silo roof for dust collector.

E. The system shall be factory tested prior to shipment to jobsite. The Lime System Supplier shallmake all necessary arrangements and cover costs for Engineer’s representative to witness factorytesting of lime system.

F. The contractor shall be responsible for re-installing equipment that the Lime System Suppliercould not ship assembled as an integral part of the system due to shipping restrictions.

1. These items shall be identified on the manufacturer’s approval drawings and consist of thetruck fill line assembly components, silo roof access ladder and cage components, silo roofhandrail components, silo level devices, dust collector, load cells, and silo space heater.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide equipment identification marker complete with equipment name and tag number inaccordance with Section 15190. Coordinate field location with Engineer.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Lime System Supplier's Field Services:

1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be present atjobsite or classroom designated by Owner for man-days indicated, travel time excluded, forassistance during plant construction, plant startup, and training of Owner's personnel for plantoperation. Include:

a. 1 man-day for Installation Services.b. 1 man-day for Instructional Services.c. 1/2 man-day for Post Startup Servicesd. 1 man-day for inspection, checking, and adjusting equipment.e. 3 man-days for startup and field testing for proper operation.


2. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation,maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system-related areas other thanwastewater treatment process. See Section 01615.

3. In addition to the services specified above, provide Lime System Supplier’s services asrequired to successfully complete systems demonstration as specified in Section 01820.

3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Equipment shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory operation withoutcausing excessive noise, vibration, and overheating. Field testing shall be performed by anexperienced field representative of the Lime System Supplier of each major item of equipment,who shall certify the installation and shall confirm in writing that equipment and controls have beenproperly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation.

B. The System shall be capable of running fully automatic, demonstrating the ability to dilute to apredetermined slurry concentration, as defined in 1.04.B Basis of Design. The System shall betested over a three day period, running 72 continuous hours without any adjustments made byoperating personnel, demonstrating the ability to meet the requirements of these specifications.During the 72 hour performance test, the Slurry Concentration Set-Point shall be varied each dayto demonstrate the Systems ability to adjust to input variable changes. Two random samples shallbe taken each day, until the System has reached a steady state operating condition, for a total ofsix samples. The samples shall be tested by the plant laboratory, for total solids concentrationlisted below in the following table. All samples shall comply with the requirements listed herein.

Number of Batches Slurry Concentration Set Point2 20 percent2 15 percent2 10 percent

C. If the system fails to perform as described in the specifications, the Contractor shall have fourweeks to make corrections and demonstrate compliance. If after that time the systems cannotperform, the Contractor shall within three months remove the failed System and provide a Systemthat meets the requirements of the specifications at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

Eau Claire, WIRDP# 2011057

RDP to Plant Interface Map(PRELIMINARY)

DISCRETE DATA TO SCADADescription AB Logix Tag (ADDRESS) RANGE UNITSSystem batching in auto Scada_Producer_dint[0].0 0 or 1 bitSystem auto stopping after this batch Scada_Producer_dint[0].1 0 or 1 bitWater fill mode Scada_Producer_dint[0].2 0 or 1 bitLime fill mode Scada_Producer_dint[0].3 0 or 1 bitDischarge mode Scada_Producer_dint[0].4 0 or 1 bitLime silo bin activator running Scada_Producer_dint[0].5 0 or 1 bitLime feed screw running Scada_Producer_dint[0].6 0 or 1 bitPrep tank mixer running Scada_Producer_dint[0].7 0 or 1 bitSlurry aging tank mixer running Scada_Producer_dint[0].8 0 or 1 bitSlurry loop pump running Scada_Producer_dint[0].9 0 or 1 bitLime inlet valve opened Scada_Producer_dint[0].10 0 or 1 bitLime inlet valve closed Scada_Producer_dint[0].11 0 or 1 bitFeed water solenoid valve open Scada_Producer_dint[0].12 0 or 1 bitCleaning water solenoid valve #1 open Scada_Producer_dint[0].13 0 or 1 bitCleaning water solenoid valve #2 open (T.B.D.) Scada_Producer_dint[0].14 0 or 1 bitDust arrestor water solenoid valve open Scada_Producer_dint[0].15 0 or 1 bitDischarge valve opened Scada_Producer_dint[0].16 0 or 1 bitDischarge valve closed Scada_Producer_dint[0].17 0 or 1 bitPrep tank full Scada_Producer_dint[0].18 0 or 1 bitPrep tank empty Scada_Producer_dint[0].19 0 or 1 bitSlurry aging tank empty Scada_Producer_dint[0].20 0 or 1 bitSlurry aging tank full Scada_Producer_dint[0].21 0 or 1 bitPrecision dosing slurry pinch valve is cleaning Scada_Producer_dint[0].22 0 or 1 bit

Lime silo bin activator fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].0 0 or 1 bitLime feed screw fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].1 0 or 1 bitSlurry prep tank mixer fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].2 0 or 1 bitSlurry aging tank mixer fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].3 0 or 1 bitSlurry loop pump fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].4 0 or 1 bitLime feed screw discharge plugged Scada_Producer_dint[1].5 0 or 1 bitSlurry loop high pressure fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].6 0 or 1 bitLime inlet valve open fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].7 0 or 1 bitLime inlet valve close fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].8 0 or 1 bitDischarge valve open fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].9 0 or 1 bitDischarge valve close fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].10 0 or 1 bitWater inlet fault by weight Scada_Producer_dint[1].11 0 or 1 bitLime inlet fault by weight Scada_Producer_dint[1].12 0 or 1 bitDischarge fault by weight Scada_Producer_dint[1].13 0 or 1 bitBatch scale high alarm Scada_Producer_dint[1].14 0 or 1 bitCumulative scale too high to continue fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].15 0 or 1 bitControl panel in emergency stop Scada_Producer_dint[1].16 0 or 1 bitPanel supply power failure Scada_Producer_dint[1].17 0 or 1 bitPanel common fault alarm Scada_Producer_dint[1].18 0 or 1 bitPrecision dosing slurry pinch valve flow fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].19 0 or 1 bitSettled water manhole slurry pinch valve flow fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].20 0 or 1 bitLime silo dust collector running Scada_Producer_dint[1].21 0 or 1 bitLime silo dust collector fault Scada_Producer_dint[1].22 0 or 1 bitLime silo high level Scada_Producer_dint[1].23 0 or 1 bit

FLOATING POINT DATA TO SCADADescription AB Logix Tag (ADDRESS) UNITSPrep tank weight Scada_Producer_real[0] lbsPrep tank volume Scada_Producer_real[1] galPrep tank % total volume Scada_Producer_real[2] 0-100%Slurry aging tank weight Scada_Producer_real[3] lbsSlurry aging tank volume Scada_Producer_real[4] galSlurry aging tank % total volume Scada_Producer_real[5] 0-100%Lime used since last reset Scada_Producer_real[6] lbsPrep tank live % concentration Scada_Producer_real[7] %% concentration setpoint for current batch Scada_Producer_real[8] %Prep tank lime live weight Scada_Producer_real[9] lbsPrep tank water live weight Scada_Producer_real[10] lbsPrep tank scale buildup weight Scada_Producer_real[11] lbsPrecision dosing slurry pinch valve % open Scada_Producer_real[12] 0-100%Precision dosing slurry pinch valve slurry dose rate Scada_Producer_real[13] mg/lPrecision dosing slurry pinch valve slurry flow rate Scada_Producer_real[14] gpmPrecision dosing slurry pinch valve CAO delivery rate Scada_Producer_real[15] lbs/hrLime silo level (0-100% Full) Scada_Producer_real[16] 0-100%

FLOATING POINT DATA FROM SCADADescription AB Logix Tag (ADDRESS) UNITSClarifier raw water flow rate (0-?MGD) Scada_Consumer_real[0] gpm

LIME SYSTEM PLC DATA

Eau ClaireWWTP Page 1 of 1

11240 Schedule 1SCADA I/O Mapping

Donohue & Associates, Inc. CORPORATION STOPProject No. 12026 11241-1

SECTION 11241CORPORATION STOP

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Corporation Stops.2. Accessories.


A. Design and Performance Requirements:

1. Removable chemical injector for injecting neat solutions into process piping.2. Injector shall be capable of inserting and removing with process piping under pressure.3. Construction suitable for 12.5 percent concentration Sodium Hypochlorite and 33 percent

concentration of Ferric Chloride.4. Install corporation stop at 3 or 9 o’clock positions only.5. Design suitable for injecting into the following process pipes:

a. 20-inch RAS located in Solids Building – Structure 455:

1) Chemical: Sodium Hypochlorite (SHC)2) Solution flow rate: 33.9 gallons per hour (gph)3) Process pipe pressure: 50 pounds per square inch (psi)4) Process pipe flow rate: up to 7,200 gpm5) Process media: Return Activated Sludge (RAS)6) Process pipe material: Class 53 Glass lined ductile iron

b. 6-inch TPSD located in Thickener Building – Structure 500:

1) Chemical: Ferric Chloride (FeCl)2) Solution flow rate: 16 gph3) Process pipe pressure: 35 psi4) Process pipe flow rate: 25 gpm5) Process media: Thickened Primary Sludge (TPSD)6) Process pipe material: Class 53 Glass lined ductile iron

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for corporation stops specified.

CORPORATION STOP Donohue & Associates, Inc.11241-2 Project No. 12026

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for corporationstops.

D. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.

E. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:


2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of corporation stops in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing equipment of types andcapacities indicated that have record of successful in-service performance.


A. Deliver corporation stops to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers, and otherprotection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from construction operations.Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store corporation stops in clean, dry location.

1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. Two (2) Saf-T-Seal Tips.

2. Provide special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.3. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and clearly labeled and identified with the name and

number of the equipment to which they belong.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Saf-T-Flo.

B. Or Equal.

2.02 CONSTRUCTION

A. Assembly consisting of the following components:

1. ¾-inch national pipe thread (NPT) chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) Ball Valve.2. CPVC Solution Tube Adaptor.3. CPVC Packing Nut with 300 series compression O-ring.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. CORPORATION STOPProject No. 12026 11241-3

4. Stainless Steel Safety Chain and Restraint Hook:

a. One safety chain and hook set shall prevent withdrawal of solution tube past corporationstop. Length shall be preset by manufacturer for closure of corporation stop beforewithdrawal of solution tube.

b. One safety chain and hook set with shorter chain length, or other locking device, toprevent accidental release of solution tube from process pipe while under pressure.

5. 3/8-inch Schedule 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Solution Tube of suitable length to extendthrough pipe tapping means and into process pipe as specified herein.

6. Saf-T-Seal tip install at end of Solution Tube.

a. Material: Vitonb. Shall help resist or eliminate premature mixing conditions and tip clogging.c. Opens under position solution flow.d. Closes to negative flow or when process pipe pressure is higher than solution tube feed

pressure.

7. 3/8-inch PVC Spring Loaded Ball Check Valve, includes:

a. Hastelloy C-276 (or high grade) Spring.b. Teflon Ball.c. Viton Seals.

8. Polypropylene Hose Barbs with Stainless Steel Torque Hose Clamps.9. ½-inch ID Polyester Reinforced PVC Braided Clear Tubing; 8-foot length.10. ½-inch PVC True Union Vented Ball Valve with Viton Seals to connect to supply piping.

2.03 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming, and finish coating of ferrous metalcomponents prior to shipment.

B. Coatings shall comply with Section 09960.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install corporation stops in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION



A. Manufacturer's Field Services:


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. AUTOMATIC SELF-CLEANING STRAINERSProject No. 12026 11245-1

SECTION 11245AUTOMATIC SELF-CLEANING STRAINER

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Two 6-inch automatic self-cleaning strainers for interior, non-buried application (510-M-5921,and -5922).

2. Backwash valves (510-FV-5921 and -5922).3. Provide W3 Strainer No. 1 and No. 2 Control Stations (510-LCP-5921, -5922) in accordance

with Section 11990.

1.02 REFERENCES


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data and Shop Drawings:

1. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 in sufficient detail to confirm compliance with theDrawings and this Section.

2. Submittal shall, at a minimum, include the items listed below.

a. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.b. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

B. Test Results:


C. Instructional Services Documentation:


D. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:



A. Manufacturer shall provide all products specified in this Section.

1.04 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty in accordance with the special warranty requirements in SC-13.07.

AUTOMATIC SELF-CLEANING STRAINERS Donohue & Associates, Inc.11245-2 Project No. 12026

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. All equipment and parts shipped to the job site shall be properly protected from the elements sothat no damage or deterioration occurs from the time of delivery to the time when the installation iscomplete and the units are placed into operation.

B. Manufacturer shall define the requirements to properly protect the equipment and parts shipped tothe job site.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 AUTOMATIC SELF-CLEANING STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. S.P. Kinney Engineers, Inc.2. Fluid Engineering

2.02 AUTOMATIC SELF-CLEANING STRAINERS – S.P. KINNEY ENGINEERS, INC.

A. Design

1. Strainer consists of cylindrical drum with a number of threaded holes containing strainingmedia.

2. Drum supported on rotating shaft fitted with bearings.3. Drum contained in a body having a vertical backwash slot opening adjacent to the drum

surface.4. Backwash to occur when a row of media passes vertical backwash slot opening and cleaned

water in strainer flows backwards through media to strainer drain.5. To be installed in horizontal pipeline.6. Design for continuous removal of suspended particles.7. Provide capability to adjust clearance between backwash slot and drum with two lock nuts.8. Provide knife like edge on backwash slot to shear debris.9. Provide inspection cover for inspecting media.10. Bolted flange cover.11. Drain connection furnished with automatic control of backflushing provided with electrically

operated control ball valve (510-FV-5921 and -5922) actuated by a timer and a pressuredifferential switch provided by others. Provide mounting plate for installation of pressuredifferential switch provided by others. Valves shall be powered from LCP.

12. Maximum operating pressure is 150 pounds per square inch gauge.13. Hydrostatic test pressure is 225 pounds per square inch gauge.14. Media shall be Delrin disc with 1/16 inch tapered hole.15. Maximum clean screen headloss of 0.6 pounds per inch per square gauge at flow of 600

gallons per minute for 6-inch strainer.16. Provide 3/4 horsepower, 230/460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz, TEFC motor for each strainer.17. Provide (P11) pressure differential switches (510-PDSH-5921, -5922) in accordance with

Section 13426.18. Provide pressure gauges (510-P-5921A, -5921B, -5922A and 5922B) in accordance with

Section 13426.19. Provide starter in LCP.

B. Construction:

1. Main body shall be cast iron.2. Cover shall be cast iron.3. Drum shall be cast iron.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. AUTOMATIC SELF-CLEANING STRAINERSProject No. 12026 11245-3

4. Shaft shall be carbon steel, ceramic coated at packing area.5. Retaining rings shall be Delrin.6. Inspection window cover shall be steel/full face gasket.7. Packing shall be Chevron pressure seal.

2.03 AUTOMATIC SELF-CLEANING STRAINERS – FLUID ENGINEERING

A. Design:

1. Backwash to occur by flow reversal at the port/straining element. Debris shall effectively bevacuumed from full length of straining element by vigorous reverse fluid flow into hollow port.

2. To be installed in horizontal pipeline.3. Design for continuous removal of suspended particles.4. Bolted flange cover.5. Provide single backwash connection and drain blow-off connection.6. Drain connection furnished with automatic control of backflushing provided with electrically

operated control valve (510-FV-5921 and -5922) actuated by a timer and a pressuredifferential switch provided by others. Provide mounting plate for installation of pressuredifferential switch provided by others. Valves shall be powered from LCP.

7. Maximum operating pressure is 150 pounds per square inch gauge.8. Hydrostatic test pressure is 225 pounds per square inch gauge.9. Maximum clean screen headloss of 0.6 pounds per square inch gauge at flow of 600 gallons

per minute for 6-inch strainer.10. Provide steel support legs for bolting to concrete or steel base.11. Straining element shall be reversed rolled slotted wedge wire screen designed with 1/16th inch

openings.12. Wide or flat cross section of wedge wire shall face direction of flow providing for continuous

smooth flat surface to trap debris.13. Straining media shall be free of pockets, tubes, and collector bars.14. Provide drive shaft and hollow port assembly fitted with all necessary bearings and seals.15. Drive arm and hollow port assembly including adjustable accelerator plate shall be free

running at maximum speed of two rpm and shall not contact screen surface.16. Port assembly shall be factory and field adjustable for positive effective cleaning and shear

capability.17. Drive shaft shall be supported at top with roller bearings located in double reduction gear

reducer and at bottom with water lubricated guide bearing.18. Provide 3/4 horsepower, 230/460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz, TEFC motor for each strainer.19. Provide (P11) pressure differential switches (510-PDSH-5921, -5922) in accordance with

Section 13426.20. Provide pressure gauges (510-P-5921A, -5921B, -5922A and 5922B) in accordance with

Section 13426.21. Provide starter in LCP.

B. Construction:

1. Main body shall be cast iron.2. Cover shall be cast iron.3. Flanged inlet and outlet connections conforming to ANSI B16.5.4. Straining element shall be 304 stainless steel.5. All internal parts shall be 304 stainless steel.6. Packing shall be Chevron pressure seal.

2.04 COATINGS


AUTOMATIC SELF-CLEANING STRAINERS Donohue & Associates, Inc.11245-4 Project No. 12026

B. Coatings shall comply with Section 09960 System 8.

2.05 MOTORS

A. Provide motors in accordance with Section 16150.

2.06 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide an adequate quantity of Manufacturer-approved lubricants to conform with theManufacturer-defined preventative maintenance practices through the warranty period.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approvedsubmittals.

B. Provide equipment identification marker complete with equipment name and tag number inaccordance with Section 15190. Coordinate field location with Engineer.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service:


a. 1 man-day for Installation Services.b. 1 man-day for Instructional Services.c. 1 man-day for Post Startup Services


3. In addition to the services specified above, provide manufacturer’s services as required tosuccessfully complete systems demonstration as specified in Section 01820.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. STAINLESS STEEL GATESProject No. 12026 11284-1

SECTION 11284STAINLESS STEEL GATES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Weir Gates2. Stop Gates / Stop Logs3. Slide Gates4. Gate Operators5. Gate Accessories.

B. Provide gates as specified in Stainless Steel Gate Schedule.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer

B. GPM: Gallons per Minute

C. UHMWPE: Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials

B. AWWA: American Water Works Association



1. Conform to AWWA C561 for full aperture shutoff or C513 open channel except as modified.2. Proportion for stresses occurring during continuous operation and for additional stresses

occurring during fabrication or installation.

B. Field Leakage Criteria:

1. Seating Head: Leakage shall not exceed 0.1 gallon per minute per foot of periphery underdesign head conditions.

2. Unseating Head: Leakage shall not exceed 0.2 gallon per minute per foot of periphery underdesign head condition.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


STAINLESS STEEL GATES Donohue & Associates, Inc.11284-2 Project No. 12026

B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for gates specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for gates.2. Wiring Diagrams: Show power and control connections and distinguish between

factory-installed and field-installed wiring.3. Stainless Steel Gate Schedule. Identify all gates by type number, pipeline, location, joint type,

manufacturer, and model or catalog number.

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofgates with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of gates in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.



B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain gate components from single manufacturer withresponsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built from components thathave proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit as evidenced byrecords of prototype testing.


A. Deliver gates and system components to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers,and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from constructionoperations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store equipment in clean, dry location.

C. Manufacturer shall define the requirements to properly protect the equipment and parts shipped tothe job site.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide spare parts necessary to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years. At aminimum, one bronze operating nut of each size shall be provided.

B. Provide special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.


C. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and labeled with the name and number of the equipmentto which they belong.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Rodney Hunt Company

B. Golden Harvest, Inc.

C. Whipps, Inc.

D. Hydro Gate

E. Fontaine

2.02 STAINLESS STEEL WEIR GATES

A. General:

1. This Section includes design, materials of construction, fabrication, and supply of stainlesssteel weir gates as shown on Drawings and as indicated in the Stainless Steel Gate Schedule.

2. Gates shall be self-contained or non self-contained weir type with disc arranged to lower toopen with guides designed to mount on face of concrete wall.

3. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all gates and operators shall conform toapplicable requirements of AWWA C561, latest edition.

B. Materials:

1. Disc Skin Plate: A276, Type 304L Stainless Steel2. Frame and Guides: A276, Type 304L Stainless Steel3. Seals: UHMWPE4. Seats: UHMWPE5. Retainer Bars and Fasteners: A276, Type 304L Stainless Steel6. Stems: A276, Type 304L Stainless Steel7. Stem Couplings: A276, Type 304L Stainless Steel8. Stem Guides: A276, Type 304L Stainless Steel9. Frame, Yoke, Stem Guides,

Pedestal, Wall Brackets, Slide: A276, Type 304L Stainless Steel10. Guides, Side & Bottom Seals,

Stem Guide Liner: UHMWPE ASTM D-402011. Compression Cord: Silicon or Nitrile, ASTM D200012. Operator Housing: Type 304 Stainless Steel13. Gasket: EPDM ASTM D-393514. Stem Cover: Polycarbonate ASTM D-393515. Lift Nut, Couplings: Manganese bronze ASTM B584 UNS-C86500

C. Performance:

1. Leakage: Weir gates shall be substantially watertight under design head conditions. Leakageshall not exceed 0.05 U.S. gallon per minute per foot of seal periphery under design seatinghead and 0.1 U.S. gallon per minute per foot of seal periphery for design unseating head.


2. Design Head: Weir gates shall be designed to withstand design head (maximum design headshall be taken as height of slide unless otherwise shown in Stainless Steel Gate Schedule).

3. Seal Performance Test: Weir gate’s sealing system shall be tested through a cycle test in anabrasive environment and shall show leakage requirements are still obtained after 25,000cycles with minimum deterioration.

D. Disc / Slide:

1. Flat plate reinforced with structural or formed members welded to plate.2. Limit deflection of gate to 1/720 of span or 1/16-inch, whichever is less.3. Working design stresses shall not exceed lesser of 40 percent yield strength or 25 percent

ultimate strength of material.4. Disc components shall have minimum material thickness of ¼-inch.5. Slide shall consist of flat plate reinforced with formed plates or structural members to limit its

deflection to 1/720.

E. Frame:

1. Consists of guides, invert member, operator yoke welded or bolted together to form rigid one-piece frame.

2. Frame components shall have a minimum material thickness of ¼-inch.3. Guides shall one-piece or be sandwiched type construction built up of plates, angles, and

formed shapes and shall comply with design requirements specified in AWWA C561.4. Guide slot shall engage disc plate a minimum of 7/8-inch.5. Guides shall extend beneath opening a sufficient amount to completely support disc in fully

down or open position.6. Invert member shall be angle welded to guides across invert of opening and up both sides.7. Hollow bulb J-seal or self-adjusting UHMWPE seal shall be attached to angle with stainless

steel strips and attaching bolts.8. Yoke members shall be designed for output of gate hoist and shall be arranged to permit

removing disc from frame.9. Gate frame shall be constructed of structural members or formed plate welded to form a rigid

one-piece frame.10. Frame shall be of the flange back design, suitable for mounting on concrete wall.11. Guide slot shall be made of UHMWPE.12. Guides shall be of such length as to retain and support at least two thirds of vertical height of

slide in fully open position.

F. Seals:

1. “J” type seals shall be attached to frame if necessary to restrict leakage to following limits:

a. Under design seating head (measured from gate invert), leakage shall not exceed 0.1gallon per minute per foot of seating perimeter.

b. Under design unseating head (measured from gate invert), leakage shall not exceed 0.2gallon per minute per foot of seating perimeter.

2. Bottom and side seals shall be made of UHMWPE of the self-adjusting type.3. Continuous compression cord shall ensure contact between UHMWPE guide and gate in all

positions.4. If “J” type seals are utilized, UHMWPE bearing strips shall be mounted inside the guides on

the upstream and downstream sides of the disc.5. Sealing system shall maintain efficient sealing in any position of slide and let water flow only in

open part of gate.

G. Stems:


1. Stem threads shall be of the machine cut or rolled, full depth Acme type polished to a 16microinch finish or better. Stems shall be designed to transmit in compression a minimum of 2times the rated output of hoist at 40 pounds effort on crank or handwheel.

2. Stems shall have a minimum diameter of 1½-inches and shall be constructed of solid roundbar.

3. L/r ratio of unsupported stem shall not exceed 200.4. Stem guides, where required to limit unsupported stem length, shall be UHMWPE or bronze

bushed.5. Dual Operators: Gates having widths in excess of 48 inches and equal to or greater than 2

times their height shall be provided with two lifting devices or gear boxes connected by atandem shaft for simultaneous operation. All gates with gate openings of 84 inches wide orwider shall be provided with two lifting devices or gearboxes and a tandem shaft.

6. Operating stem shall be of stainless steel designed to transmit in compression at least twotimes rated output of operating manual mechanism with 40 pounds effort on crank orhandwheel.

7. Stem shall have slenderness ration (L/r) less than 200. Threaded portion of stem shall havemachine cut or rolled threads of full depth Acme type.

8. Where hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric operator is used, stem design force shall not be lessthan 1.25 times output thrust of hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder, with pressure equal tomaximum working pressure of supply or 1.25 times output thrust of electric motor in stalledcondition.

9. For stems in more than one piece and with diameter or 1¾-inches and larger, differentsections shall be joined together by stainless steel or solid bronze couplings. Stems withdiameter smaller than 1 ¾-inches, shall be pinned to extension tube or plain bar.

10. Couplings shall be internally threaded and keyed or bored and pined and shall be of greaterstrength than the stem.

11. Stem guides shall be fabricated from Type 304L stainless steel.12. Guide shall be equipped with UHMWPE bushings.13. Guides shall be adjustable and shall be spaced in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendation.14. L/r ratio shall not be greater than 200.

H. Stem Covers:

1. Rising stem gates shall be provided with clear rigid plastic stem covers to provide indication ofgate position, permit inspection of stem threads, and protect stem from contamination.

2. Vent holes shall be provided to prevent condensation.3. Stem cover shall have cap and condensation vents as well as a clear Mylar position indicating

tape. Tape shall be field applied to stem cover after gate has been installed and positioned.

I. Operator:

1. Benchstand hoists shall be sized to permit operation of gate under full operating head withmaximum effort of 40 pounds on crank or handwheel.

2. Hoist nut shall be manganese bronze conforming to ASTM B584 C86500.3. Hoist nut shall be supported on ball or roller bearings.4. Lubrication fitting shall be provided for lubrication of hoist bearings without disassembly of

hoist.5. Suitable seals shall be provided to prevent entry of foreign matter.6. Direction of handwheel or crank rotation to open gate shall be clearly and permanently

marked on hoist.7. All bearings and gears shall be totally enclosed in weather tight housing. Pinion shaft of

crank-operated mechanisms shall be constructed of stainless steel and supported by ball,roller, or needle bearings.


8. Each manual operator shall be designed to operate gate under maximum specified seatingand unseating heads by using maximum effort of 40 pounds on crank or handwheel, and shallbe able to withstand, without damage, an effort of 80 pounds.

9. Pedestals shall be fabricated from 304L stainless steel and shall have a 3/8-inch minimumthick base plate and operator mounting plate.

10. Crank shall be removable and fitted with corrosion resistant rotating handle.11. Maximum crank radius shall be 15 inches and maximum handwheel diameter shall be 24

inches.

2.03 STAINLESS STEEL STOP GATES / STOP LOGS

A. General:

1. Equipment under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in properoperating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data,instructions and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless exceptions arenoted by Engineer.

2. Stop logs shall be supplied with all necessary parts and accessories indicated on drawings,specified or otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation, and shall belatest standard product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of stop logs which willseal in one direction.

B. Materials:

1. Disc, Reinforcements: ASTM A240, Type 304L Stainless Steel2. Frame, Log, Reinforcements,

Bottom Seal Retainer: ASTM A-240, Type 304L Stainless Steel3. Guide: ASTM D-4020, UHMWPE4. Seals: ASTM D4020, UHMWPE or ASTM D-2000, EPDM5. Fasteners: ASTM A276 or ASTM F593 and F594 GR1 for Type 304

and GR2 for Type 316 Stainless Steel

C. Performance:

1. Stop logs shall be substantially watertight under design head conditions.2. Leakage shall not exceed 0.1 U.S. gallon per minute per foot of periphery for rated seating

and unseating head.

D. Design:

1. Stop gate or stop log frame shall consist of guides and invert member welded or boltedtogether to form a rigid one-piece frame.

2. Frame shall be made of stainless steel structural shapes or channels.3. Frame shall be suitable for mounting on concrete wall, embedding in channel, or installation

inside existing channel.4. Guides shall be one-piece or sandwiched-type construction built up of plates, angles, and

formed shapes.5. Guide slot shall engage disc plate a minimum of 7/8-inch.6. Disc shall be flat plate reinforced with structural shapes welded to plate.7. Logs shall consist of flat plate reinforced with formed plates or structural members to limit

deflection to 1/360 of gate span or 1/16-inch, whichever is less, under design head.8. Disc shall be equipped with handles for use in raising and lowering.9. Handles shall be formed U-shaped stainless steel bars which shall be welded to disc.10. Hand holes through plate shall not be acceptable.11. Gates wider than 24 inches shall be provided with two handles.


12. Seal shall be attached to the frame with stainless steel fasteners and shall be attached to thelog by means of UHMWPE retainer guide and stainless steel fasteners.

13. Bottom seal shall be attached to the frame with stainless steel fastners or the log with astainless steel retainer and stainless steel fasteners.

14. Lifting Device:

a. When required, stainless steel lifting device shall be supplied for each log width.b. Width of lifting device shall be same as long channel.c. Device shall be equipped with device to allow releasing of stop log from operating floor.

This device shall grab log automatically.

2.04 STAINLESS STEEL SLIDE GATES

A. Gates:

1. Construct disc of A276, Type 304L stainless steel as specified in Stainless Steel GateSchedule.

2. Reinforce with A276, Type 304L stainless steel welded to plate. Disc and reinforcement shallhave minimum material thickness of ¼-inch.

a. Extend reinforcing ribs into guides or vertically adjacent to guides.b. Overlap seating surface of guide.c. Designed for maximum deflection of 1/720th of its span or 1/16-inch whichever is less,

under design head.

3. Mount molded resilient rubber seal on bottom of disc or flush-bottom seal mechanicallyfastened to bottom frame of invert member.

a. Provide flush bottom closure.b. Shape seal to produce seating surface ¾-in. wide, minimum.c. Vertical face of seal shall contact seating surface of guides to properly seal corners.

4. Side Seals: Provide resilient bulb seals or self-adjusting UHMWPE seals in frame.

B. Guides:

1. Construct guides of A276, Type 304L stainless steel as specified in Stainless Steel GateSchedule. Guides and frame shall have minimum material thickness of ¼-inch.

2. Frame shall be integral unit of brake form and structural shapes, rigidly assembled to formwaterway openings.

3. Weld guides to form rigid, self-contained frame.

a. Frame invert shall form seating surface for resilient seal mounted on disc or frame.b. Guides extending above operating floor shall be sufficiently strong so further reinforcing

not required.c. Yoke shall support operating bench stand.d. Design yoke so disc and stem can be removed without disconnecting yoke.e. Form yoke by two angles or channels welded at top of guides to provide one-piece rigid

frame.

4. Provide replaceable, UHMWPE seats in guides. All seats and seals shall be mechanicallyfastened and shall be field replaceable.

a. Seats shall contact both faces of disc.C. Stem covers:


1. Transparent, lexan or butyrate plastic, vented pipe stem cover and cap to provide indication ofgate position, permit inspection of stem threads, and protect stem from contamination.

2. Provide stem covers with OPEN/CLOSE designators on clear Mylar pressure sensitiveadhesive tape, suitable for outdoor application.

2.05 ELECTRIC ACTUATOR (furnished by gate manufacturer)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Auma2. Rotork

B. General:

1. Provide electric hoisting mechanism operation for gates as indicated in Stainless Steel GateSchedule.

2. Requirements for Open/Close, Non-Continuous Modulating and Continuous Modulatingelectric actuators.

3. Provide Open/Close electric actuators as indicated in Stainless Steel Gate Schedule.

C. Design Requirements:

1. Furnished and sized by gate manufacturer.2. Self-contained, packaged-unit.3. For non-self-contained units provide stainless steel or ductile iron pedestal to place input shaft

approximately 36 inches above floor. Level pedestal with grout pad and fasten pedestal tosurface.

4. Electric motor double-reduction gear type consisting of motor controls, gearbox, geared limitswitches, torque switches, and manual override with de-clutching level.

5. Torque output no less than 1.5 times the required operating torque.6. Self-locking.7. Operate gate from full open to full closed, or the reverse, at a gate travel speed of 12 inches

per minute. Modulating service gates shall not exceed travel speed of 6 inches per minute.8. Removable from gate without taking gate out of service.9. Designed for mounting and running in any position.10. Mechanical visual position indicator.11. Ambient temperature rating: negative 40 degrees Fahrenheit to 150 degrees Fahrenheit.12. Where noted in Stainless Steel Gate Schedule, provide Explosion Proof actuators suitable for

Class I, Division 1 Group C and D Hazardous.

D. Construction:

1. Gearbox totally enclosed and sealed.2. Gearbox shall have oil or grease lubricated gears and shafts of heat-treated alloy steel and

bronze, supported throughout by anti-friction ball or roller bearings and permanently lubricatedat the factory.

3. Electrical components factory wired, except devices located remote from actuator.4. Integral terminal strips for field wiring connections.5. Separately sealed terminal compartment for remote control connections.6. Heater and thermostat for humid and low temperature environment.7. NEMA 4X enclosure for motor, gearing, switches, and wiring terminals, NEMA 7 where

indicated explosion proof.

E. Manual Operation:


1. Engageable manual override.2. Manual operation possible by both handwheel and portable electric operator specified in

Section 11287.3. Safety interlock feature to prevent motor operating when manual override engaged.4. Failure of the motorized gearing shall not prevent manual operation.

F. Motor:

1. Nameplate hp as required and defined by gate and actuator manufacturer shall not exceedmaximum horsepower in Stainless Steel Gate Schedule unless approved by Engineer.

2. 460 volt, 3-phase, 60 hertz3. Constant speed4. Reversible5. Continuous duty cycle for Modulating electric actuators.6. Standard duty cycle for Open-Close electric actuators.7. Where noted in Stainless Steel Gate Schedule, provide Explosion Proof actuator motor

suitable for Class I, Division 1 Group C and D Hazardous.

G. Control:

1. Reversing motor controller (solid-state for continuous modulation).2. Control power transformer.3. Automatic reset thermal overload relay.4. Current-sensing motor overload relay or automatic phase correction single phase protection.5. OPEN/STOP/CLOSE local control pushbuttons.6. Remote OPEN/STOP/CLOSE position control (non-continuous modulation).7. Remote 4-20mAdc position control (continuous modulation).8. Timer to Inhibit/Limit the Motion/Duty Cycle (continuous modulation).9. Deadband adjustment of Process/Feedback signal deviation (continuous modulation).10. OPEN/CLOSE position indicating lights or LEDs.11. Pad-lockable STOP/LOCAL/REMOTE switch.12. Automatic double acting geared limit switches.13. Limit switches geared directly to the operating gear train, independently adjustable, and

capable of being adjusted to trip at any point between full open and full closed.14. Adjustable travel limit switches factory set to full open and full closed positions.15. Automatic double-acting torque switches.16. Torque switches or torque sensing operate during the complete gate cycle to protect the gate

from excessive loads in either travel direction.17. Unpowered contacts for indication of REMOTE, OPEN and CLOSED status, rated at 5 amps

at 120 vac.

H. Remote Position Indication (see P&ID for requirements):

1. Integral position transmitter, internally powered, producing a 4-20 mA output in directproportion to gate position for connection to an external instrument loop. Position transmittershall use a multi-turn, conductive plastic potentiometer rated for 10-20 million cycles.

2. Full closed position shall correspond to 4 mA.3. Capable of driving a minimum external load impedance of 350 ohms.

2.06 GATE ACCESSORIES


A. Manually Operated Floor Stands

1. Maximum effort of 40 pounds shall be required to unseat gate and maximum of 25 pounds tooperate gate after it is unseated.

2. Enclosed gear type with crank capable of manual operation or by means of portable electricoperator.

3. Provide single or double gear reduction, depending upon lifting capacity required.4. Steel or cast iron gears with machine cut teeth designed for smooth operation.5. Mount gearing and lift nut in cast aluminum or ductile iron housing and support with fabricated

304L stainless steel pedestal to place stainless steel input shaft approximately 36 inchesabove floor.

6. Provide lubrication fittings in gear housing to permit lubrication of gears and bearings.7. Removable cast aluminum crank arm with revolving brass or nylon grip.8. Handwheel shall be provided in vertical position.9. Provide rising stem gates with Butyrate or lexan cover, unless noted otherwise.

B. LIFTING MECHANISM

1. Provide gates for manual or hoisting mechanism operation as indicated in Stainless Steel GateSchedule.

a. Provisions for manual operation shall be, reinforced lifting clevis hole, single lift or liftinglug as indicated in Stainless Steel Gate Schedule. Reinforced lifting clevis hole shallconsist of 1” dia lifting hole with extra thickness welded to gate before drilling hole in orderto provide additional surface area clevis pin will contact.

b. Hoisting Mechanism: Handcrank or handwheel.

1) Handcrank: Capable of operation by crank or portable electric operator.2) Provide 2 adjustable bronze stop collars on stems of manually operated gates to set

open and closing settings.3) Bottom of gate in full open position to be at or above top of gate elevation when fully

closed.4) Hoist shall be sized to permit operation of gate under full operating load with a

maximum effort of 40 pounds on the crank or handwheel.5) Handwheel or handcrank operator centerline shall be no more than 3 feet-6 inches

above operating floor, unless otherwise noted. Provide remote drive on self-containedgates as indicated in Stainless Steel Gate Schedule.

c. When in closed position, gates shall seat flush with bottom and be provided withcompressible resilient seal mounted on disc or frame. Specially mold and design seal toproduce wide sealing surface.

d. Provide stainless steel operating stem attached to disc with stainless steel or bronze stemconnector. Stem shall have minimum diameter of 1½-inches.

e. Where gate width is in excess of 48 inches and equal to or greater than twice gate height,provide multiple operating stems. Mechanically interconnect multiple operating stems toprovide uniform gate operation. Where electrically actuated, provide actuator installationbracket. Coordinate position of actuator, handwheel, and controls with Engineer.

1) For Dual Stem application, provide bevel gearboxes with electric actuator mounted toone of the gearboxes or mount the electric actuator and intermediate gearbox to drive


bevel gearboxes. Actuator installed where any part of actuator extends beyondoutside width of gate frame into walkway area is not acceptable.

2) Provide flexible couplings and an extruded aluminum or Type 304L stainless steelshaft or tubing with stainless steel connecting bolts.

3) Coat exposed portion of bevel gearbox shaft connecting to actuator gearbox to protectfrom corrosion. Coat shaft in accordance with Section 09960. Protect bevel gearshaft seal from coating. Once connected, provide thin film of grease at shaft and sealinterface to protect small area not covered by coating.

4) Provide removable corrosion resistant guard to prevent contact with rotating shaftassembly.

5) All fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

2.07 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming, and finish coating of equipment inplant or field.

B. Prior to substantial completion, examine coated surfaces and retouch or refinish surfaces (withsame coating material) to leave in condition acceptable to Engineer.

C. Coatings shall comply with Section 09960.

D. Stainless steel surfaces shall not be coated. All weld burn and slag shall be mechanicallypassivated in accordance with ASTM A380 to provide a uniform finish.

E. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install gates in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Installation of all parts shall be done by Contractor in a workmanlike manner and in accordancewith detailed technical installation procedures supplied by gate manufacturer. It shall beContractor’s responsibility to handle, store, and install gate operating mechanism and accessoriesin strict accordance with manufacturer’s drawings and recommendations.

C. Equipment provided under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed inproper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data,instructions and recommendations of equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted byEngineer.

D. Gates and operators shall be supplied with all necessary parts and accessories indicated onDrawings, specified or otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation.

E. Gates shall be shop inspected for operation before shipping.

F. Install gates in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations and approvedsubmittals.

G. Electric actuator orientation and positioning, or rotation of various component heads on actuatormay be required to be adjusted in the field after, or during, installation. Contractor shall coordinate


with Engineer in positioning actuator to allow best access to controls and allow handwheel to be inlowest position possible and accessible with portable actuator.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide equipment identification marker complete with equipment name and tag number inaccordance with Section 15190. Coordinate field location with Engineer




a. 3 man-days for Installation Services.b. 1 man-day for Instructional Services.c. 1 man-day for Post Startup Services



3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. After installation is complete, test and demonstrate operation of equipment in accordance withSection 01820. In addition to services specified above, provide Supplier’s or Manufacturer’s fieldservices as required to successfully complete systems demonstrations in accordance with Section01820.

B. After installation has been completed, test sluice gates under normal operating conditions inpresence of Engineer.

C. Repair leaks or other imperfections found upon testing.


STAINLESS STEEL GATE SCHEDULE

Tag Number

OpeningSize

(inches byinches) Material

DesignHead fromCenterline

(feet) Operator InstallationMaxHP Notes

431-G-091A1

432-G-092A1

48” W

X

18” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Seated

2 ft

Gate-MountedOpen - Close

ElectricActuator

Embedded

Self-Contained

Flush Bottom

1.5 Opening Invert: 775.00Operating Floor: 777.00

431-G-091A2

432-G-092A2

96” W

X

18” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Seated

2 ft


ElectricActuator

Embedded

Self-Contained

Flush Bottom


431-G-091E1

84” W

X

22” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Seated

3 ft

Gate-MountedModulating

ElectricActuator

SurfaceMounted 1.5

Downward Opening Weir Gate

Opening Invert: 775.00Operating Floor: 777.00

431-G-101A3

431-G-101A4

431-G-101F1

432-G-122A3

432-G-122A4

432-G-122F1

96” W

X

84” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Seated

5 ft


ElectricActuator

SurfaceMounted

Wall Bracket5



431-G-101A5

432-G-122A524”

Diameter

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Unseated

4 ft

Gate-Mounted

*VerticalHandwheelOperator w/2-inch Nut

Pipe FlangeMounted NA

Mounted to Pipe Flange


431-G-101E1

432-G-122E124”

Diameter

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Unseated

4 ft

Gate-Mounted

*VerticalHandwheelOperator w/2-inch Nut

Weld FlangeMounted NA

Mounted to Pump


431-G-111A6

432-G-132A6

96” W

X

18” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Seated

2 ft


ElectricActuator

Embedded

Self-Contained

Flush-Bottom


431-G-111A7

432-G-132A7

120” W

X

18” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Seated

2 ft


ElectricActuator

Embedded

Self-Contained

Flush-Bottom


432-G-132C1

432-G-132C2

126” W

X

18” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Seated

2 ft


ElectricActuator

Embedded

Flush-Bottom

Self-Contained



STAINLESS STEEL GATE SCHEDULE

Tag Number

OpeningSize

(inches byinches) Material

DesignHead fromCenterline

(feet) Operator InstallationMaxHP Notes

431-G-111A8

432-G-132A8

96” W

X

96” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Seated

4 ft


ElectricActuator

SurfaceMounted 5



431-G-111D1

432-G-131F2

69” W

X

69” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Seated

4 ft


ElectricActuator

Embedded

Self-Contained

2 Opening Invert: 768.50Operating Floor: 777.00

445-G-1701A

445-G-1701B

445-G-1702A

445-G-1702B

445-G-1703A

445-G-1703B

87” W

X

18” H

Type 304Stainless

Steel

Unseated

2 ft


ElectricActuator

Embedded

Self-Contained

Flush Bottom

1.5


Top of Frame shall be 42-inchesabove operating floor. Provideintermediate cross bar at 21-inches above operating floor.Gate frame shall serve ashandrail.

* Indicates handwheel-operated gearbox or handcrank-operated gearbox, compatible with portable electric operator specified in Section 11287.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PORTABLE ELECTRIC OPERATORProject No. 12026 11287-1

SECTION 11287PORTABLE ELECTRIC OPERATOR

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Portable electric operator.



1. Electric operator shall be suitable for operation of Stainless Steel Gates specified inSection 11284.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 in sufficient detail to confirm compliance withthe Drawings and this Section.



B. Instructional Services Documentation:


C. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:





A. All equipment and parts shipped to the job site shall be properly protected from the elementsso that no damage or deterioration occurs from the time of delivery to the time when theinstallation is complete and the units are placed into operation.

B. Manufacturer shall define the requirements to properly protect the equipment and partsshipped to the job site.

PORTABLE ELECTRIC OPERATOR Donohue & Associates, Inc.11287-2 Project No. 12026

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PORTABLE ELECTRIC OPERATOR

A. Quantity: 1

B. Electric drill type mounted on tripod.

C. Operated from 115 volt, single-phase power supply. Provide with minimum 15-foot cord andplug.

D. Reversing.

E. Overload release clutch to release instantly at preset torque.

F. ON-OFF switch held in during operation, OFF when released.

G. Vertical height adjustment to align with input pinion shaft of actuator to be operated.

H. Tripod adjustable from 32 – 54 inches, minimum.

I. Provide adapters to allow use with geared gate operators and valves shown on Drawings.Coordinate with gate and valve manufacturers.

2.02 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming, and finish coating of equipmentprior to shipment.

B. Coatings in accordance with Section 09960.



2.03 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts necessary to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years.


C. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and labeled with the name and number of theequipment to which they belong.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11310-1

SECTION 11310VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. W-1 Dewatering Well Pump No. 1 (510-P-2701). Provide motor for existing pump.2. W-2 Dewatering Well Pump No. 2 (455-P-2702).3. W-4 Dewatering Well Pump No. 4 (500-P-2704).4. W-5 Dewatering Well Pump No. 5 (500-P-2705).5. W-6 Dewatering Well Pump No. 6 (510-P-2706).6. W-7 Dewatering Well Pump No. 7 (510-P-2707). Provide motor for existing pump.


A. Scope

1. This Section includes an open lineshaft turbine pump with above ground discharge;bearings to be lubricated by the water being pumped.

2. Pumping equipment shall be designed and furnished in accordance with the latestHydraulic Institute and AWWA Standards for an open lineshaft turbine pump.

3. Pumps, motors, and all other specified accessories and appurtenances shall befurnished by the pump manufacturer to insure compatibility and integrity of the individualcomponents, and to provide the specified warranty for all components.

B. Design and Performance Requirements:

1. Pumping equipment shall comply with Vertical Turbine Pump Schedule to Section11310.

2. Adequately size motor horsepower so each pump is non-overloading throughout entirepump performance curve.

3. Equipment shall be free from shock, vibration, cavitation, overheating, and noise whileoperating at specified conditions.

4. Equipment shall be capable of continuous operation without damage while operatingunder load.

5. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily replaced,and suitable for service specified.

6. Total dynamic head shall be measured at the discharge of the pump and shall includevelocity head and vertical static head from the minimum water level to the centerline ofthe pump.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to confirm compliance withrequirements of this Section. Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings in one completesubmittal package. Partial submittals will not be reviewed.

B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Submit shop drawings and product data of all system components. Shop drawings andproduct data shall include the following features:

VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11310-2 Project No. 12026

a. Manufacturer's specification data and descriptive literature.b. Performance data.c. Head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency curves from shut-off to

maximum capacity of pump.d. Head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency for points specified in the

Vertical Turbine Pump Schedule.e. Show head, capacity, horsepower demand, and pump efficiency for frequencies of

60, 50, 40, and 30 Hz for adjustable speed drive pumps.f. Motor shall be in accordance with Section 16150. The following data shall be

submitted for each motor:

1) Designation2) Horsepower3) Phases4) Voltage5) Load amperes6) Service factor7) Frequency8) Motor Code9) Thermal protection10) Efficiency at full, ½ , and ¼ loads

f. Wiring diagrams.g. Proposed coating system. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.h. Recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation, and start-up.i. Detailed layout and other drawings required for proper installation.j. Procedures for proper installation.k. Quantity and type of spare parts being supplied. Spare parts shall be that needed to

maintain the equipment in service for a period of 2 years. Include a list of specialtools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.

l. Location of parts-supply facilities, service crews, and repair facilities.

C. Pump Manufacturer’s Special Warranty.

D. Submit above in accordance with Section 01330.


1. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.2. Operation and maintenance manual submittal shall be complete in one comprehensive

submittal. Individual submittals for components of systems will not be reviewed.3. Start-up of system will not be permitted until O&M Data has been submitted and

approved by ENGINEER. The submittal shall include any field modifications.

F. Test Results:

1. Submit factory certified performance curves to ENGINEER’S design office.2. Submit factory certified results of hydrostatic test to ENGINEER’S design office.3. Do not ship pumps to site until factory test results approved.


A. To ensure proper operating system(s), pump manufacturer shall provide all productsspecified in this Section.


B. A factory authorized service center shall perform start up and training.

1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS AND MODEL NUMBERS

A. Goulds

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Suitable for application specified in the Vertical Turbine Pump Schedule and as specifiedbelow:

1. Flanges: ASTM A48, class 30.2. Impellers: Bronze in accordance to ASTM B584, C83600.3. Bowls: Close-grained cast iron in accordance to ASTM A48 CL30.4. Shaft: 416 Stainless Steel in accordance to ASTM A582.5. Shaft couplings: 416 Stainless Steel in accordance to ASTM A582.6. Wear Rings: Bronze in accordance to ASTM B505, C932007. Lineshaft: 416 Stainless Steel in accordance to ASTM A582.8. Lineshaft bearing: Neoprene.9. Suction bell: Cast iron.10. Discharge head: Cast iron.11. Drive shaft: 416 Stainless Steel in accordance to ASTM A582.12. Packing box: Cast iron.13. Packing gland: Cast iron.14. Packing box blushing: Bronze.15. Packing gland nuts and bolts: Stainless steel.16. Vaned grating basket: Stainless steel.

2.03 PUMP FABRICATION

A. Bowl Assembly:

1. Flanged type construction.2. Free from sand holes, blowholes, or other faults.3. Accurately machined and fitted to close tolerances.4. Shall be capable to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of 1.5 times the pressure at the

rated flow or 1.25 times the shutoff head, which ever is greater.5. Bowl interior shall be coated with glass enamel (or equal) for maximum efficiency and

wear protection.6. Bowls shall be designed with smooth waterways for maximum efficiency.7. All intermediate bowls shall be of identical design.8. All impellers shall be supported by bearings on the suction and discharge sides.

B. Impellers:


1. One-piece construction and free from defects.2. Impellers shall be the enclosed type.3. Waterways through the impeller shall have smooth contours, devoid of sharp corners, to

promote maximum efficiency.4. Accurately cast, machined, and filed for optimum performance and minimum vibration.5. Balanced and secured to the shaft by means of a bronze drive collet.6. Adjustable by means of a top shaft-adjusting nut.

C. Shaft:

1. Precision ground and polished with surface finish better than 40 RMS.

D. Wear Rings:

1. Provided at the impellers and bowls so that clearances can be maintained throughout thelife of the rings and minimize recirculation.

2. Impeller and bowl wear rings shall be radial-type.3. Wear rings shall be attached to the impellers and bowls using an interference fit and

positively secured for anti-rotation.

E. Column Assembly-Open Lineshaft:

1. Column:

a. Column pipe shall be flanged and furnished in sections not exceeding a nominallength of 10 ft.

b. Column flange faces shall be parallel and machined for rabbet fit to permitalignment.

c. Column to have bronze bearing retainer machined to ensure proper alignment ofrubber bushing bearings.

2. Lineshaft:

a. Lineshaft shall be of ample size to transmit the torque and operate the pump withoutdistortion or vibration.

b. Lineshaft shall be coupled with extra-strong threaded couplings, machined from solidsteel bar.

c. Fitted with 416 stainless steel replaceable sleeves at each bearing and shall conformto AISI 304 material.

3. Bearing:

a. Interior of bearing shall be grooved. Grit and other particles wash into the groovesand are flushed away.

b. A bronze shell shall cover the exterior of neoprene bearing.

F. Discharge Head Assembly:

1. Discharge Head:

a. Shall be of sufficient design to support the entire weight of the pump and driver.b. Above ground outlet shall be flanged to match 24-inch ANSI class 125 or class 150

for steel.


c. Discharge head shall be cast iron and specifically designed to elevate the dischargehead natural frequency above the operating speed.

d. A drive shaft of the same material as the lineshaft shall extend through the sealingassembly of the discharge head and be coupled to a motor shaft.

e. Packing box shall be rated for 175 psi.f. Discharge head openings shall be fitted with guards to prevent access to the rotating

shaft and/or coupling.

G. Motor:

1. Conform to Section 16150.2. WP1 enclosure.3. 1180 RPM vertical hollow shaft motor for W-1 Dewatering Well Pump No. 1 (510-P-

2701) and W-7 Dewatering Well Pump No. 7 (510-P-2707) with a non-reverse ratchet toprevent reverse rotation of the rotating elements.

a. Coordinate with existing Layne & Bowler pump components.

4. 1800 RPM vertical hollow shaft motor for W-2 Dewatering Well Pump No. 2 (455-P-2702), W-4 Dewatering Well Pump No. 4 (500-P-2704), W-5 Dewatering Well Pump No.5 (500-P-2705) and W-6 Dewatering Well Pump No. 6 (510-P-2706) with a non-reverseratchet to prevent reverse rotation of the rotating elements.

5. Thrust bearing shall carry the weight of all rotating parts and the maximum hydraulicthrust load, under all conditions of operation. Calculated L10 life shall be no less than8800 hours.

6. Provisions shall be made for momentary upthrust equal to 30% of the rated down thrust.7. The motor shall be premium efficiency, 1.15 service factor, and suitable for use on 460

v, 3-phase, 60 Hz electric service.8. Motor shall be inverter duty.

2.04 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming and finish coating of ferrousmetal components in plant prior to shipment.

B. Coatings shall comply with System 27 of Section 09960.

2.05 SPARE PARTS

A. Two SS basket strainers for suction bell.

2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Certified Performance Test(s):

1. Perform on each pump in accordance with test requirements of Hydraulic InstituteAmerican National Standard for Vertical Pump Tests. Acceptance criteria shall be inaccordance with level “A”.

2. Determine capacity, head, brake horsepower and hydraulic efficiency.3. Test each pump at minimum of 7 points including shutoff, at rated capacity specified,

and at flow rate greater than maximum capacity specified in Vertical Turbine PumpSchedule.

4. Prepare and submit certified performance curves.5. Test actual assembled pumps to be provided. Results of prior tests on similar or

identical pumps are not acceptable.

B. Factory Certified Hydrostatic Test(s):


1. Perform on each pump in accordance with acceptance criteria of the Hydraulic InstituteAmerican National Standard for Vertical Pump Tests.

2. Minimum test pressure shall be 1.5 times pump shutoff head.3. Prepare and submit report of results.4. Test actual assembled pumps to be provided. Results of prior tests on similar or



3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with pump manufacturer’s written instructions and approvedsubmittals.


A. Manufacturer’s Field Services:

1. Representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at Project Site orclassroom designed by OWNER for minimum workdays specified below, travel timeexcluded, for assistance during construction and post-startup Include minimum of:

a. 2 workdays for Installation Services.b. 1 workday for Instructional Services.c. 2 workdays for Post-Startup Services.

2. Supplier of manufacturer shall direct services specific to system and equipmentoperation, maintenance, and troubleshooting. See Section 01615.

3. In addition to services specified above, provide manufacturer’s services as required tosuccessfully complete system demonstration as specified in Section 01820.


VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPSCHEDULE TO SECTION 11310

Name of Pump(s) W-2 Dewatering Well Pump No. 2W-4 Dewatering Well Pump No. 4W-5 Dewatering Well Pump No. 5W-6 Dewatering Well Pump No. 6

Tag Number(s) 455-P-2702, 500-P-2704, 500-P-2705, 510-P-2706Number of Pumps 4Fluid Pumped Ground Water

Motor Horsepower 15Maximum RPM 1800

Discharge 8” diameterMotor Voltage 460vAdjustable Speed Pumps Adjustable Speed DrivePerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds Maximum Speed (rpm) 1800Design Operating Point 1

Capacity (gpm) 1,000Total Dynamic Head (ft) 30Minimum efficiency 77.0%Maximum NPSHr (ft) 16

Maximum Operating Point at Maximum SpeedCapacity (gpm) 1,300Total Dynamic Head (ft) 20

Minimum Shutoff HeadTotal Dynamic Head (ft) 47


VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPSCHEDULE TO SECTION 11310

Name of Pump(s) W-1 Dewatering Well Pump No. 1 (Existing Pumpwith New Motor)W-7 Dewatering Well Pump No. 7 (Existing pumpwith New Motor)

Tag Number(s) 510-P-2701, 510-P-2707Number of Pumps 2Fluid Pumped Ground Water

Motor Horsepower 15Maximum RPM 1200

Discharge 8” diameterMotor Voltage 460vAdjustable Speed Pumps Adjustable Speed Drive

END OF SECTION


Donohue & Associates, Inc. SCREW-CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11311-1

SECTION 11311SCREW-CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. RAS Pump Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 (455-P-2401, -2402, -2403, and -2404)2. Digester Recirculation Pumps No. 1, 1/2, 2, and 3 (510-P-3401, -3412, -3402, -3503)



1. Pumping equipment shall comply with Schedule(s) of this Section.2. Single-passage, clog-free pump, utilizing screw-centrifugal impeller.3. Suitable for pumping return activated sludge (RAS) and digester sludge (DS) containing

rags and other fibrous material without plugging.4. Equipment shall be free from shock, vibration, cavitation, overheating, and noise while

operating at specified conditions.5. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicated

and replaced, and suitable for service specified.6. Pump shall be sized for operating in a continuous, non-submerged conditions.7. Adequately size motor horsepower so each pump is non-overloading throughout entire

pump performance curve.

1.03 SUBMITTALS





B. Test Results








SCREW-CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11311-2 Project No. 12026




PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Wemco - Hydrostal

B. Hayward Gordon

2.02 PUMP

A. Single passage, clog-free pump utilizing a screw-centrifugal impeller.

B. Overall pump design shall combine high efficiency, low required NPSH, large solid passage,and the ability to handle rags or other fibrous material without plugging.

C. Hydraulic design of impeller shall combine the action of a positive displacement screw withthe action of a single-vane centrifugal impeller to provide a single non-bifurcated flowstreamwith only gradual changes in flow direction.

1. Leading edge of impeller vane shall blend into the impeller body in such a way that anyrag or other fibrous material caught on the leading edge and folded over both sides ofthe vane will be unfolded and released as the textile follows the flowstream through thepump.

2. Impeller flange or impeller shall contain a spiral groove on the rear face so that anysolids in the pumped media are discharged from the space between the backplate andthe rear of the impeller.

D. Geometry of the impeller and suction piece shall be conical, so any axial adjustment of theimpeller will cause the clearance between the impeller and suction piece to change uniformlyalong the entire length of the impeller.

E. Suction and discharge flanges shall be drilled to meet ANSI 125-lb bolting.

F. Cast Iron Construction:

1. Pump volute, backplate, and suction piece: ASTM A 48, Class 30 cast iron.2. Impeller: Nodular iron, ASTM A 536-60-06. Statically and dynamically balanced.3. High-Chrome Suction Liner:

a. The suction shall have an independently replaceable suction liner of Hi Chrome,ASTM A-532.

b. Type A III and shall be externally adjustable to compensate for wear by means ofthree stainless steel regulating screws.

c. Each adjusting screw shall incorporate a mechanism for positively advancing,positively retracting and positively locking the position of the suction liner so that thenecessary running clearances between the liner and impeller can be maintained for


optimum hydraulic efficiency without the need to disassemble the pump and/orpiping.

G. Bearing Housing:

1. Cast iron, ASTM A 48, Class 30.2. Back pull out design so that bearing housing and impeller can be removed without

disconnecting casing from suction and discharge piping.3. Steel shaft provided with bearings capable of taking all mechanical and hydraulic loads.4. Minimum B10 bearing life of 100,000 hours at Rated Flow Condition specified under

Operation Criteria.5. Stuffing box isolated from contaminants in pumped media.

H. Shaft Sealing – Hayward Gordon.

1. Flushless mechanical seal system designed to required no clean water flushing. The sealshall be split type mechanical seal with buna O-rings, silicone carbide faces and 316stainless steel metal parts. The cartridge seal shall be pre-assembled and pre-testes sothat no seal setting or adjustments are required. Any springs used to push the faces ofthe seals together must be shielded from the pumped fluid to prevent binding or hang-upof the seal.

2. Seal shall be similar to a Chesterton 442 single mechanical split seal with silicon carbidefaces.

3. Spiral Trac throat bushing version D/A made of 416 stainless steel shall be provided.

I. Shaft Sealing - Wemco.

1. Tandem mechanical seal arrangement requiring no external flush.2. Seal nearest bearing shall utilize carbon/ceramic faces within an oil chamber that is an

integral part of the bearing frame. Isolate seal cooling oil from bearing frame.3. Seal nearest impeller shall be stainless steel or rubber bellows-type construction,

attached to rotating face and clamped to shaft to prevent contaminants from contactingstainless steel springs that load seal face. Solid tungsten-carbide rotating face runningagainst solid silicon-carbide stationary face.

4. Tandem mechanical seal arrangement requiring no external flush.

J. Mounting:

1. Horizontal mounting with direct-coupled motor to pump or belt drive as indicated onSchedule(s) of this Section.

2. Pump and motor arrangement as shown on Drawings.3. Common pump and motor base constructed of minimum 3/8-inch thick fabricated steel

reinforced to support full weight of pump and motor.4. Belt drive pumps:

a. Base shall be furnished with a separate, adjustable motor base to allow motor to bemoved for V-belt tensioning and alignment.

b. All drive components shall be capable of delivering 1.5-times the rated horsepowerof the motor installed.

c. Motor sheave shall be of the adjustable type to allow for speed adjustment withoutthe need to change the sheave.

d. Furnished with a fiberglass belt guard, meeting the requirements of OSHA.

5. Direct-coupled pumps:

a. Provide a flexible spacer coupling between motor shaft and pump shaft


b. Provide approved fiberglass coupling guard to safely enclose the coupling.

2.03 MOTOR

A. Horsepower and requirements as specified in Schedule(s) of this Section.

B. 460 v, 3-ph, 60 Hz

C. Enclosure: TEFC.

D. 1.0 minimum service factor.

E. NEMA B designed for continuous duty.

F. Moisture resistant, Class F insulation rated for 155oC.

G. Thermal sensors shall be used to monitor stator temperatures. The stator shall be equippedwith three thermal switches embedded in the end coils of the stator winding.

H. Conform to requirements of Section 16150.

2.04 CONTROLS

A. Control Station (455-CS-2401, -2402, -2403, -2404, 510-CS-3401, -3402, -3412, and -3503)provided under Division 13.

B. Variable Speed Drive (455-VFD-2401, -2402, -2403, and -2404) provided under Division 16.

2.05 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming, and finish coating of equipmentprior to shipment.

B. Coatings shall comply with Section 09960, System 8.



2.06 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts necessary to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years,including but not limited to the items listed below.

1. One (1) set of bearings per pump model.2. Four (4) mechanical seals per pump model.3. Four (4) drive belts per pump model.






1. Perform on each pump in accordance with test requirements of Hydraulic InstituteAmerican National Standard for Submersible Pump Tests. Acceptance criteria shall bein accordance with level “A”.

2. Determine capacity, head, brake horsepower and hydraulic efficiency.3. Test each pump at minimum of 7 points including shutoff, at rated capacity specified,

and at flow rate greater than maximum capacity specified in Schedules of this Section.4. Prepare and submit certified performance curves.5. Test actual assembled pumps to be provided. Results of prior tests on similar or



1. Perform on each pump in accordance with acceptance criteria of the Hydraulic InstituteAmerican National Standard for Submersible Pump Tests.

2. Minimum test pressure shall be 1.5 times pump shutoff head.3. Prepare and submit report of results.4. Test actual assembled pumps to be provided. Results of prior tests on similar or



3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittals.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION




1. Representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at the job site orclassroom designated by Owner a minimum of three separate occasions for theminimum workdays specified below, travel time excluded.

a. 1 workdays for Installation Servicesb. ½ workday for Instructional Servicesc. ½ workday for Post-Startup Services

2. After installation is complete, test and demonstrate operation of equipment inaccordance with Section 01820. In addition to services specified above, provideSupplier’s or Manufacturer’s field services as required to successfully complete systemsdemonstrations in accordance with Section 01820.

3. Supplier or Manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation,maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system related areas other thanwastewater treatment process. See Section 01615.


SCREW-CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 1

Name of Pump(s) RAS Pump Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4Tag Number(s) 455-P-2401, -2402, -2403, and -2404Number of Pumps Four (4)Fluid Pumped Return Activated Sludge from Final Settling TanksSuction and Discharge Size 8 inchMaximum Motor Horsepower (1) 40Maximum Full Load Amps 36.1Motor Voltage 480 v, 3-phase, 60 hzMaximum RPM 1,800Drive Direct coupledConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speed

Maximum Speed (rpm) 1,800Design Operating Point 1 (Minimum Operating Condition)

Capacity (gpm) 1,388Head (ft) 20

Design Operating Point 2 (Maximum Operating Condition)Capacity (gpm) 2,382Head (ft) 37

Operating Point along Pump Curve at 100% speed - Shut-offCapacity (gpm) 200Head (ft) 105

Operating Point along Pump Curve at 100% speed - at Run-outCapacity (gpm) 2,700Head (ft) 35

Note: Items listed above including horsepower and sizing is for “A” manufacturer. If “B” or “C” manufacturer requires higher horsepoweror alternate sizing, then Contractor shall provide at no additional cost all electrical changes and motor.


SCREW-CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 2

Name of Pump(s) Digester No. 1, 1/2, 2 RecircPump

Digester No. 3 Recirc Pump

Tag Number(s) 510-P-3401, -3412, -3402 510-P-3503Number of Pumps Three (3) One (1)Fluid Pumped Digested Sludge (DS) from

Primary Digesters No. 1 and 2Digested Sludge (DS) fromPrimary Digester No. 3

Fluid Percent Solids 2-5% 2-5%Fluid pH 6.5 – 9.0 6.5 – 9.0Impeller Diameter (in) 8.875 8.875Suction and Discharge Size 4 inch 4 inchMinimum Spherical SolidsSize (in.)

3 inches 3 inches

Maximum MotorHorsepower (1)

7.5 7.5

Motor Voltage 480 v, 3-phase, 60 hz 480 v, 3-phase, 60 hzMaximum RPM 1450 1550Drive Belt Driven Belt DrivenConstant or Variable Speed Constant ConstantPerformance Requirement at Rated Speed

Maximum Speed (rpm) 1450 1550Design Operating Point 1 (Minimum Operating Condition)

Capacity (gpm) 350 350Head (ft) 28 35

Operating Point along Pump Curve at design speed - Shut-offCapacity (gpm) 75 80Head (ft) 50 57

Operating Point along Pump Curve at design speed - at Run-outCapacity (gpm) 700 750Head (ft) 8 9

Note: Items listed above including horsepower and sizing is for “A” manufacturer. If “B” or “C” manufacturer requires higherhorsepower or alternate sizing, then Contractor shall provide at no additional cost all electrical changes and motor.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11312-1

SECTION 11312SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. RAS Denitrification Pump 1 and 2 (431-P-1011, 432-P-1212).2. Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump 1 and 2 (431-P-1021 and 432-P-1222).3. Pump Monitoring Module.4. Pump Removal Mechanism and Pipe Flange Adapter.

1.02 REFERENCES




1. Pumping equipment shall comply with Schedules of this Section.2. Equipment shall be suitable for pumping municipal wastewater.3. Equipment shall be suitable for continuous operation at all operating speeds specified without

external cooling fluid.4. Adequately size motor horsepower so each pump is non-overloading throughout entire pump

performance curve.5. Design motor for up to 15 evenly spaced starts per hour.6. Equipment shall be free from shock, vibration, cavitation, overheating, and noise while

operating at specified conditions.7. Motor housing shall be air filled to provide dissipation of heat, permanent bearing lubrication

and prevent airborne moisture contamination.8. Design equipment for continuous submergence under water without loss of watertight integrity

to depth of 57 ft.9. Design equipment for removal and reinstallation of pumps without need to enter tank and

without removal of fasteners.10. Design pump removal guide mechanism and pipe flange adaptor for installation and removal

of pump.11. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicated and

replaced, and suitable for service specified.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for pumping equipment specified.

SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMPING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11312-2 Project No. 12026

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for pumpingequipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofpumping equipment with referenced standards.

2. Certified reports of field tests and observations.3. Factory Certified Performance Test(s):

a. Perform on each pump in accordance with test requirements of Hydraulic Institute LevelA.

b. Determine capacity, head, brake horsepower and hydraulic efficiency.c. Test each pump at minimum of 6 points including shutoff, at rated capacity specified, and

at flow rate greater than maximum capacity specified in Schedules of this Section.d. Prepare and submit certified performance curves.e. Test actual assembled pumps to be provided. Results of prior tests on similar or identical

pumps are not acceptable.




2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of pumping equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.



1. Emergency Service: System manufacturer maintains service center capable of providingtraining, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs at Project site with 48 hoursmaximum response time.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain pumping equipment system components from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver pumping equipment and system components to their final locations in protective wrappings,containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage fromconstruction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store pumping equipment in clean, dry location.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flygt.

B. KSB.

2.02 PUMPING EQUIPMENT

A. Pump shall be capable of handling screened wastewater. Pump shall be able to be raised orlowered and shall be easily removed for inspection or service without the need for personnel toenter the basin.

B. Pump with appurtenances and cable shall be capable of continuous submergence under waterwithout loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 57 ft.

C. Pump shall be of the integral design, close-coupled, submersible type. All components includingmotor shall be capable of continuous underwater operation.

D. Pump shall be capable of continuous operation completely unsubmerged for two hours.

E. Pump casing shall be A276 Type 316 stainless steel. Impeller shall be A48 Class 40B cast iron.Lubricant housing cover plate shall be corrosion resistant plastic. All exposed nuts and bolts shallbe stainless steel.

F. Motor

1. Conform to requirements of Section 16150. Motors for pumps with adjustable frequencydrives shall be inverter duty rated NEMA MG1, Part 31.

2. Pump motor shall be squirrel cage, induction, shell-type design, housed in an air-filled,watertight chamber.

3. Stator winding shall be insulated with a moisture resistant Class F insulation rated for atemperature of 180 degrees Celsius.

4. Stator shall be insulated by the trickle impregnation method with a minimum fill factor of 95percent.

5. Motor shall be designed for continuous duty, capable of sustaining a maximum of 15 evenlyspaced starts per hour. Rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be made of aluminum.

G. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with Nitrilerubber or Viton O-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplished by metal-to-metalcontact between machined surfaces. This will result in controlled compression of the O-ringswithout requiring a specific torque limit.

H. Propeller shall be of 316 stainless steel dynamically balanced, non-clogging backward curveddesign. Each blade shall be laser cut and welded to the hub and tested to ensure that thepropeller is properly balanced. Propeller shall be capable of handling solids, fibrous materials,heavy sludge and other matter found in normal sewage applications. Propeller shall be sized tomeet flow rate requirements as specified in Schedules to this Section.

I. Cable Entry


1. Cable entry housing shall be an integral part of the back plate. Cable entry shall have adouble set of elastomer grommets in order to ensure a redundant system in event of a cableentry seal failure. Cable entry shall be comprised of two cylindrical elastomer grommets, eachflanked by washers and a ferrule designed with close tolerance fit against the cable outsidediameter and the entry inside diameter.

2. Assembly shall bear against a shoulder in the stator casing opening and be compressed by agland nut threaded into it.

3. Junction chamber and motor compartment shall be separated by a terminal board which shallprotect the motor interior from foreign material gaining access into the pump top.

J. Bearings shall have a minimum L-10 rated life of 100,000 hours. Outboard propeller bearing shallbe an angular contact bearing. Motor shaft end shall be supported by two bearings. A rollerbearing shall take up the radial loads while an angular contact bearing shall take up the axialloads.

K. Thermal sensors shall be used to monitor stator temperatures. The stator shall be equipped withthree thermal switches embedded in the end coils of the stator winding.

L. The pump assembly shall incorporate a jet ring 360 degrees around the propeller. Maximumclearance between propeller tip and jet ring shall be 1-1/2 inches.

M. Each pump shall be provided with two sets of lapped and face type mechanical seals running inlubricant reservoirs for cooling and lubrication.

1. Mechanical seals shall contain both stationary and positively driven rotary tungsten carbideface rings unless otherwise specified.

2. Only seal faces of the outer seal assembly and its retaining clips shall be exposed to thepumped media. All other components shall be contained in the lubricant housing.

2.03 PUMP REMOVAL SYSTEM

A. Pump supplier shall provide a pipe mounted discharge connection. Discharge connection shall beconstructed of 316 stainless steel and shall have a 24-inch ANSI bolt pattern. Contactor shallsupply discharge pipe with 24-inch ANSI flange for pump at one end and 24-inch flange for pipemounted slide gate on the other end. Discharge connection shall require 2-inch schedule 40 guiderails. Pump supplier shall supply 316 stainless steel upper guide bracket and any necessaryintermediate guide brackets. Provide anchor bolts and necessary accessories for completesystem. System shall comply with design and performance requirements and as specified. Anyoffset spacers for guide brackets shall be included and shall be constructed of 316 SS.

B. Provide 316 stainless steel handle option for ease of hooking pump with lifting mechanism.

C. Guide system - Provide two Type 316 stainless steel guide rails, upper and intermediate guidebrackets as recommended by pump manufacturer for connecting rail(s) to structure, and slidebracket for connecting pump to guide rail(s). Guide cables in lieu of guide rails are not acceptable.

1. Guide rail diameter and thickness as recommended by pump manufacturer.2. Provide upper guide rail bracket with integral hooks on both sides of guide plate that fastens to

structure.3. Contractor to verify elevations during submittal process.

D. Grip-Eye Lifting System: Furnish pump lifting-chain positive-recovery system consisting of thefollowing:

1. Provide Grip-Eye System or equal for each pump.


2. Provide high tensile strength proof-tested Type 316 stainless steel chain, minimum 10 links, ofrequired capacity to lift pump. Connect short-length of lifting chain to lifting bail of submersiblepump.

3. Provide length of Type 316 Stainless Steel guide cable (wire-rope) connected to short-lengthof lifting chain to extend min. 5-feet beyond top of wet well.

a. Guide cable shall be suitably sized to support chain and length of cable hanging.b. Connecting link between guide cable and chain shall be sized to allow grip-eye to slip over

to access chain links.c. Ends of cable shall not be frayed. Weld or epoxy ends to prevent fraying.d. Contractor shall coil additional length at top of wet well and use Type 316 stainless steel

wire to hold coil shape.e. If no hooks are provided with upper guide bracket, Contractor shall provide Type 316

stainless steel hook at top of wet well from which to hang guide cable. Type 316 stainlesssteel wire tie coil to hook.

f. At free end of guide cable attach plastic tag or stainless steel tag with the words “NOTFOR LIFTING PUMP” stamped into tag. Grip-Eye shall be able to slip over attached tagwithout interference.

4. Furnish forged Grip-Eye of stainless steel, provided separately to connect to the end of thelifting cable or chain of Owner’s pump lifting device.

5. Grip-Eye shall be sized per pump manufacturer’s recommendation.6. Provide miscellaneous hardware for installation, including shackles to connect short-length of

lift chain to pump lifting bail and link to connect short-length of lift chain to guide cable.Material: Type 316 Stainless Steel.

E. Anchor bolts: Stainless Steel. Comply with pump manufacturer’s requirements and in accordancewith Section 05500

2.04 PUMP MONITORING MODULES

A. Pump monitor shall provide dual function monitoring for both over-temperature via bi-metal,thermistor, or RTD sensor and seal failure via moisture sensor or float switch. Only low-voltageleakage system allowed.

B. Each module shall provide LED’s for alarm status (one for each fault indication), power LED aswell as Test and Reset push buttons.

C. Module shall provide independent 100 ma, 24VAC or 5A, 210 VAC rated Form C outputs for bothover-temperature and seal failure. Module must have a 24 VAC or 24-240 VAC input power range,a 2.8 watt power consumption, and must be UL approved.

2.05 CONTROLS

A. Control Station (431-CS-1011, 431-CS-1021, 432-CS-1212, and 432-CS-1222) provided underDivision 13.

B. Variable Speed Drive (436-VFD-1011, 436-VFD-1021, 436-VFD-1212, and 436-VFD-1222)provided under Division 16

2.06 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming and finish coating of ferrous metalcomponents in plant prior to shipment. Coatings shall comply with Section 09960.


B. Protective Coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09960 of the Specifications.

C. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease until installation.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install pumping equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION








3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. After installation has been completed, test pumps under normal operating conditions in presenceof Engineer.


SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMP SCHEDULE 1

Name of Pump(s) RAS Denitrification Pump 1 and 2Tag Number(s) 431-P-1011 and 432-P-1212Number of Pumps TwoFluid Pumped Return Activated Sludge

Maximum Motor Horsepower 10Maximum Full Load Amps 16Maximum RPM 580

Blade Angle 3 degrees Mounting Pipe Flange MountMotor 460 Volt, 3-Phase, 60 HertzConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds

Maximum Speed (rpm) 580Design Operating Point at Maximum Speed

Capacity (gpm) 5,566Total Dynamic Head (ft) 3

ElevationsPump Centerline 763.00Top of Walkway 777.00

Note: Items listed above including horsepower and sizing is for “A” manufacturer. If “B” or “C” manufacturer requires higher horsepower oralternate sizing, then Contractor shall provide at no additional cost all electrical changes and motor.rpm = revolutions per minutegpm = gallons per minuteft = feet


SUBMERSIBLE PROPELLER PUMP SCHEDULE 2

Name of Pump(s) Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump 1 and 2Tag Number(s) 431-P-1021 and 432-P-1222Number of Pumps TwoFluid Pumped Mixed Liquor

Maximum Motor Horsepower 10Maximum Full Load Amps 16Maximum RPM 580Blade Angle 3 degreesMounting Weld Pipe Mount

Motor 460 Volt, 3-Phase, 60 HertzConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds

Maximum Speed (rpm) 580Maximum Operating Point at Maximum Speed


ElevationsPump Centerline 763.00Top of Walkway 777.00


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. RECESSED IMPELLER CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11313-1

SECTION 11313RECESSED IMPELLER CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Primary Sludge Pump No. 1, 2, 3 and 4 (420-P-2101, -2102, -2103, -2104)

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. NPT: National Pipe Thread

B. TEFC: Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled

C. RPM: Revolutions per Minute

D. GPM: Gallons per Minute

1.03 REFERENCES


B. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction

C. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials

D. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association

E. NFPA: National Fire Prevention Association



1. Equipment shall comply with the Recessed Impeller Centrifugal Pump Schedule.2. Orientation of pump volute, discharge location and side motor is located on shall be as shown

on Drawings.3. Motor horsepower shall be sized so pump is non-overloading throughout entire pump

performance curve.4. Equipment shall be free from shock, vibration, cavitation, overheating and noise while

operating at specified conditions.5. Equipment shall be designed for continuous operation.6. Equipment shall be horizontal, severe-duty, non-clogging, vortex-type slurry pumping units

designed to 5% primary clarifier sludge originating from screened municipal wastewater.7. Flow path clearances within the pump shall be equal to or greater than the discharge

diameter.8. Pumps shall resist wear from abrasive slurries and maintain hydraulic performance as wear

occurs.

RECESSED IMPELLER CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11313-2 Project No. 12026

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for recessed impeller centrifugal pumping equipmentspecified.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for recessedimpeller centrifugal pumping equipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofrecessed impeller centrifugal pumping equipment with referenced standards.

2. Test each pump in the manufacturer’s facility in accordance with the test code of the HydraulicInstitute and as specified in this Section. Perform factory certified performance test and factorycertified hydrostatic test.

3. Pumps shall not be shipped to the site until factory test results are submitted to and approvedby Engineer.

4. Perform hydrostatic test at a minimum pressure of 1.5 times pump shutoff head.5. Perform performance test at the specified speed over the specified range of flow rate and

head. Test each pump at a minimum of eight operating conditions including shutoff, thespecified flow rates, and a flow rate greater than the maximum specified flow rate.

6. Certified reports of field tests and observations shall include the following information:

a. Raw data sheets.b. Certified test curves for each tested speed showing:

1) Hydraulic efficiency2) Input power in kilowatts3) Wire to water efficiency4) Brake horsepower5) Flow versus head6) Vibrometer readings7) Temperature readings8) Amperage readings




2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of recessed impeller centrifugal pumpingequipment in service.





B. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL).

1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)Regulation 1910.7.

2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code (NEC), Article 100.

C. Regulatory Requirements:

1. The manufacturer of recessed impeller centrifugal pumping equipment shall comply with therequirements of the ISO 9001 Quality and ISO 14001 Environmental Management Systems, andsuch compliance shall be verified by an independent certification agency approved by theInternational Organization for Standardization. Documentation shall be submitted for approvalshowing compliance with this requirement prior to the shipping of the equipment.

D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain recessed impeller centrifugal pumping equipment fromsingle manufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product builtfrom components that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate asunit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver recessed impeller centrifugal pumping equipment to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.

B. Store recessed impeller centrifugal pumping equipment in clean, dry location.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. Lubrication, not including amount required for start-up.b. Two (2) sets of belts.

2. Provide special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.3. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and labeled with the name and number of the

equipment to which they belong.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Weir Power & International, ,Wemco- Model C

B. Fairbanks Morse- Model 4500C

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Suitable for application specified in the Recessed Impeller Centrifugal Pump Schedule.

1. Pump case: Ni-Hard material conforming to ASTM Designation A532-75 Class I, Type A,650 Brinell, minimum.

2. Removable suction piece: Ni-Hard material conforming to ASTM Designation A532-75Class I, Type A, 650 Brinell, minimum.

3. Impeller: Ni-Hard material conforming to ASTM Designation A532-75 Class I, Type A, 650Brinell, minimum.

4. Wearplate: Ni-Hard material conforming to ASTM Designation A532-75 Class I, Type A,650 Brinell, minimum.

5. Bearing housing: Cast iron, ASTM A48CL-25.6. Shaft: Steel, ASTM A108, Grade 1141.7. Shaft sleeve: Stainless steel, ASTM A 582, Type 4168. Rotational sealing ring: Tungsten carbide Grade VC 8059. Stationary sealing ring: Silicon carbide10. Seal spring: SAE 1095 carbon steel, ASTM A-682 heat-treated to Rockwell C hardness of

45, minimum.11. Metal corrosion/abrasion covering: Viton12. O-rings: Viton13. Seal chamber: Hi-chrome iron, ASTM A-532, 600 Brinell, minimum.14. Fasteners: Stainless steel, Type 316.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Pump case:

1. Pumps shall be equipped with slotted raised-face flanges to receive 125 pound standardbolting.

2. Integral case slots shall be cast in to fasten the case to the bearing housing and intake foreasy case removal.

B. Impeller:

1. Impeller shall be mounted out of the flow path so solids are not required to flow through theimpeller.

2. Impeller shall be designed such that the deepest portion of the vane is not located at the vanetips and a thick-sectioned rim surrounds the tips.

3. Impeller shall provide as-new or better pumping performance as wear occurs.4. Impeller shall preferentially direct flow to a sacrificial, independently replaceable suction piece.5. Suction shall be easily assessable and replaceable, without the need to disassemble any other

component of the pump.

C. Bearing housing:

1. Shaft shall be protected throughout the packing area by a removable shaft sleeve.2. Bearings shall be oil bath lubricated.


3. Oil reservoir shall be sealed at both ends to prevent entrance of foreign matter.4. Thrust bearings shall consist of three angular contact ball bearings for protection from

thrust loads.5. Bearing housing shall be equipped with a pressure-venting device, oil fill, and oil drain

taps.6. Provide built-in sight glass to check proper oil level.7. Bearings shall be rated for a minimum B10 life of 100,000 hours.

D. Packing:

1. The stuffing box shall contain graphite impregnated acrylic packing rings and Teflon lantern ringarranged for water lubrication. The packing shall be retained with a bronze split packing gland.Any leakage shall be retained within a drainable reservoir integral with the bearing housing andtapped with a 3/4-inch NPT hole for connection of the seal water drainage piping.

E. Mounting- Belt Driven:1. Horizontal mounting with V-belt drives.2. Provide a common pump/motor base suitably reinforced to support the full weight of pump

and motor.3. Provide a separate, adjustable motor base so that the motor position can be adjusted for

V-belt tensioning.4. Provide belts and sheaves to drive the pump at the speed necessary to meet the rated

conditions.5. Provide stationary control variable speed T.B. Woods type “SVS” that allows a speed

change of +50/-50 rpm from the design speed by means of an adjustment to the motorsheave when the drive is not in operation.

6. Provide fiberglass belt guard to safely enclose the V-belt.

2.04 FASTENERS

A. Manufacturer shall provide all necessary fastening hardware including expansion anchors andanchor bolts.

2.05 MOTOR

A. Motor as specified in the Recessed Impeller Centrifugal Pump Schedule.

B. Motor enclosed shall be TEFC.

C. Inverter duty rated, NEMA MG 1, Part 31.

D. Motor shall conform to requirements of Section 16150.

2.06 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer shall be responsible for surface preparation, priming and finish coating of equipmentprior to shipment.






3.01 EXAMINATION

A. The recessed impeller centrifugal pumping equipment shall be factory assembled and factory runtested prior to shipment. Control panels shall be factor tested prior to shipment.

B. Contractor shall examine the recessed impeller centrifugal pumping equipment upon delivery.Contractor shall touch-up all shipping damage to the paint and stainless steel at the time ofdelivery inspection.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install recessed impeller centrifugal pumping equipment in accordance with manufacturer's writteninstructions.

B. All equipment shall be lubricated prior to start-up.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION









PUMP SCHEDULE

Name of Pump(s) Sludge Pump No. 1, 2, 3 and 4Tag Number(s) 420-P-2101, -2102, -2103 and -2104Number of Pumps FourFluid Pumped Primary clarifier sludge

Maximum Motor Horsepower 20Maximum Full Load Amps 24.8Maximum rpm 1175

Discharge 3-inch Suction 3-inchMotor 460 Volt, 3-Phase, 60 HertzMinimum Spherical Solids Size 3-inchConstant or Adjustable Speed Adjustable Speed

Performance Requirement at Rated Speeds Maximum Speed (rpm) 1175

Design Operating Point 1Capacity (gpm) 100Total Dynamic Head (feet) 54.5

Design Operating Point 2Capacity (gpm) 280Total Dynamic Head (feet) 46

Maximum Operating Point at Maximum SpeedCapacity (gpm) 360Total Dynamic Head (feet) 44

Minimum Shutoff HeadTotal Dynamic Head (feet) 58

rpm = revolutions per minutegpm = gallons per minute

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. AIR OPERATED DIAPHRAGM PUMP EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11314-1

SECTION 11314AIR OPERATED DIAPHRAGM PUMP EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. TPSD Pump Nos. 1 and 2 (500-P-2301 and -2302).2. Sludge Transfer Pump No. 2 (510-P-3614).3. Local Control Panels (500-LCP-2301, -2302, and 510-LCP-3614)4. Ball check valves, solenoid valves (500-FV-2301E, -2301R, -2302E, -2302R, 510-FV-3614E,

and -3614R), air filters, exhaust air mufflers, air pressure regulators, and pressure gauges.5. Pulsation dampeners (500-PI-2301S and -2302S, 500-PIT-2301D and -2302D, 510-PI-3614S,

510-PIT-3614D).6. Moisture detection (500-AE/ASH-2301, -2302 and 510-AE/ASH-3614).7. Pressure indication on AHP system (500-PI-2301E, -2301R, -2302E, and -2302R and 510-PI-

3614E and -3614R).

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials.

B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.



1. Pumping equipment shall comply with Air Operated Diaphragm Pump Schedule(s) to Section11314.

2. Equipment shall be suitable for pumping primary sludge and digested sludge at variousconcentrations.

3. Equipment shall be continuous, unattended operation without damage to the pump whendischarge line is closed.

4. Equipment shall operate dry without damage.5. Equipment shall be self-priming.6. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicated and

replaced, and suitable for service specified.7. Design of equipment shall not require removal of pump from process piping for routine

maintenance or diaphragm replacement.8. Minimum peak velocity at all pumping rates shall be adjustable to 5 feet per second at the

discharge flange.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

AIR OPERATED DIAPHRAGM PUMP EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11314-2 Project No. 12026

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for air operated diaphragm equipment specified.2. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for air operateddiaphragm equipment.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of air operated diaphragm equipment inservice.




1. Emergency Service: System manufacturer or manufacturer representative maintains servicecenter capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs at Projectsite with 48 hours maximum response time.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain air operated diaphragm equipment system components fromsingle manufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product builtfrom components that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate asunit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver air operated diaphragm equipment and system components to their final locations inprotective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture andprevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is madesafe from such hazards.

B. Store air operated diaphragm equipment in clean, dry location.


1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One diaphragm per pump model.b. Exhaust mufflers, two per pump.



equipment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ramparts

B. Dorr Oliver ODS Pumps

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Suitable for application specified in Air Operated Diaphragm Pump Schedule(s) to Section 11314and as specified below:

1. Pump casing and all wetted parts: Ductile Iron, ASTM A30 with a minimum tensile strength of30,000 pounds per square inch or ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12.

2. Diaphragm and Gaskets: heavy duty Nordel.3. Ball check valves: Nordel ball check valves4. Suction and discharge: ANSI 125 pound.5. Pump Lining: Nordel for ferric chloride applications.

B. Provide materials of construction suitable for ferric chloride applications as indicated in AirOperated Diaphragm Pump Schedule(s) to Section 11314.


A. General:

1. Pump shall operate such that on the suction and discharge stroke, the diaphragm shall beactuated by air or air cylinder and not by mechanical means.

2. Suction and discharge check valves shall be ball check type with quick-opening yoke andreplaceable seats.

3. Pump shall be such as to allow accessibility to the internal parts by removing the upper bodyassembly only.

4. Provide permanently mounted hinge to enable pump top works to safely hinge from bottombowl assembly providing unobstructed full view and access to pump interior.

5. Stroke indication rod, housed in a clear polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tube, shall be mounted on thetop of air cylinder.

B. Air System:

1. Provide air header system to each pump as indicated on Drawings and described herein.2. Properly size and provide 3-way solenoid valves, two per pump (one for suction stroke, one for

discharge stroke); 500-FV-2301E, -2301R, -2302E, -2302R, 510-FV-3614E, and -3614R).Provide NEMA 4X enclosure, stainless steel body, spring return, and fail to vent solenoid.

3. Properly size and provide air strainer, exhaust air mufflers,100 pounds per square inchpressure gauges, and ball valve.

4. Pressure gauges shall be in accordance with Section 13426.5. Exhaust air mufflers shall muffle the sound to 85 decibels. Equipment Manufacturer shall

guarantee performance of the exhaust muffler when the pump is operating properly.6. Air piping and fittings shall be Type 316 stainless steel and shall be in accordance with Section

15216. Valves shall be in accordance with Section 15280.


C. Moisture Sensors (500-AE/ASH-2301, -2302, and 510-AE/ASH-3614):

1. Provide air header assembly with moisture detector probe.2. Conductive probe shall sense presence of excessive moisture above diaphragm.

D. Proximity Switches:

1. Provide two 24 Vdc proximity switches to indicate the top of the stroke and the bottom of thestroke.

2. The output of the switches is sent to the local control panel (LCP).3. The proximity switch shall be a three wire switch, two wires for power and one wire for signal.4. Proximity switches shall be actuated by the stroke indicator.

E. Pulsation Dampeners/Stabilizers:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Blacoh-Sentry.

2. BUNA-N nitrogen charged, bladder-type pulsation stabilizers mounted on suction anddischarge piping of each pump.

3. Body shall be constructed of carbon steel.4. 5-gallon capacity.5. 275 pounds per square inch maximum pressure.6. Provisions to prevent bladder extension.7. 150 pounds per square inch, standard flanges.

2.04 CONTROLS

A. Provide Local Control Station (500-LCP-2301, -2302, and 510-LCP-3614) in accordance withSection 11990.

2.05 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming, and finish coating of equipment priorto shipment.

B. Provide in accordance with Section 09960.




3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install air operated diaphragm equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION









3.04 DEMONSTRATION


B. Supplier or Manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation, maintenance,troubleshooting, and equipment and system related areas other than wastewater treatmentprocess. See Section 01615.


AIR OPERATED DIAPHRAGM PUMP SCHEDULE

Name of Pump(s) TPSD Pump Nos. 1 and 2 Sludge Transfer Pump No. 2Tag Number(s) 500-P-2301 and -2302 510-P-3614Number of Pumps Two OneFluid Pumped Thickened Primary Sludge w/

Ferric ChlorideThickened Digested Sludge

Discharge 4 4 Suction 4 4Performance Requirement at Rated Speeds

Maximum Strokes per Minute 40 30Design Operating Point 1

Capacity (gpm) 20 70Total Dynamic Head (ft) 159 180Air Requirements (scfm) 20 100

Note: Items listed above including sizing is for “A” manufacturer. If “B” manufacturer requires higher horsepower or alternate sizing, thenContractor shall provide at no additional cost all electrical changes and motor.rpm = revolutions per minutegpm = gallons per minuteft = feetscfm = standard cubic feet per minute

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11315-1

SECTION 11315SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Basin Drain Pump (455-P-2001)2. Filtrate Pump Nos. 1 and 2 (455-P-5601 and -5602)3. Filtrate Sample Pump (455-P-5631)4. Filtrate Equalization Sample Pump (455-P-5641)5. Pump removal mechanism for each pump.6. Controls-related equipment for each pump.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.

B. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials.

C. NEC: National Electrical Code.

D. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association.



1. Pumping equipment shall comply with Submersible Centrifugal Pump Schedule(s) in Section11315.

2. Equipment shall be suitable for pumping materials indicated in Submersible Centrifugal PumpSchedule(s).

3. Equipment shall be suitable for continuous operation at maximum fluid temperature of 104degrees Fahrenheit (F) at all operating speeds specified and without external cooling fluid.

4. Motor horsepower of each pump shall be non-overloading throughout entire pumpperformance curve.

5. Design motor for up to 15 evenly spaced starts per hour.6. Equipment shall be free from shock, vibration, cavitation, overheating, and noise while

operating at specified conditions.7. Motor housing shall be air filled to provide dissipation of heat, permanent bearing lubrication

and prevent airborne moisture contamination.8. Equipment shall be continuous operation without damage while operating under load and

unsubmerged.9. Design equipment for continuous submergence under water without loss of watertight integrity

to depth of 65-feet.10. Design equipment for removal and reinstallation of pumps without need to enter wet well and

without removal of fasteners.11. Design pump removal guide mechanism and permanently mounted discharge connection

elbow so no part of pump bears on wet well structure.12. Connection of pump to permanently mounted discharge elbow shall not leak.13. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicated and


SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11315-2 Project No. 12026

14. Entire pumping unit, including pump, motor and power cable assembly, monitoring equipment,and pump removal system shall be suitable for installation in Class I, Division 1 or 2, Group Dhazardous classified locations as approved by Factory Mutual. Locations specified inSubmersible Centrifugal Pump Schedule(s) in Section 11315.

15. Casing shall be end suction with centerline discharge.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for submersible centrifugal equipment specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for submersiblecentrifugal equipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofsubmersible centrifugal equipment with referenced standards.

2. Certified reports of field tests and observations.3. Pump supplier shall provide model tested station design to assure trouble-free pump

operation.




2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of submersible centrifugal equipment inservice.






B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain submersible centrifugal equipment system components fromsingle manufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product builtfrom components that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate asunit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver submersible centrifugal equipment and system components to their final locations inprotective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture andprevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is madesafe from such hazards.

B. Store submersible centrifugal equipment in clean, dry location.


1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One set of bearings for each pump model.b. One mechanical seal set for each pump model.c. One gasket set complete for each pump model.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flygt.

B. KSB

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Suitable for application specified in Submersible Centrifugal Pump Schedule(s) in Section 11315and as specified below:

1. Pump case: Cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B C.I.2. Motor housing: Cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B C.I.3. Impeller: Cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B C.I.4. Seal housing: Cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B C.I.5. Discharge base elbow: Cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 35B C.I.6. Pump/motor shaft: ASTM A479 S43100T or A276 Type 420 Stainless Steel7. O-rings: Viton or NBR.8. Fasteners: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316.9. Lower seal faces: Tungsten-carbide (rotating seal ring) versus Tungsten-carbide.10. Upper seal faces: Silicon or Tungsten-carbide (rotating seal ring) versus Tungsten-carbide.11. Guide rails and brackets: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316.


12. Lift chain or cable: Stainless steel, Type 316 Stainless Steel.13. Power/control cable: chloropene rubber or neoprene.14. Anchor bolts: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316. See Section 05500.


A. General:

1. Provide metal-to-metal contact machined surfaces.2. Machine and fit mating surfaces with O-rings where watertight sealing is required. All mating

surfaces shall be flame proof joints with special labyrinth joint to prevent flame or spark travelto pumped media.

3. Rectangular cross sectioned gaskets, elliptical O-rings, grease, or secondary sealingcompounds are not acceptable.

4. Pump with attached rail guides and discharge sealing flange.

B. “N” Impeller (Flygt):

1. Non-clog type, semi-open, multi-vane, back swept design passing minimum spherical solidsize specified in Submersible Centrifugal Pump Schedule(s) in Section 11315.

2. Impeller design shall handle solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge, rag-laden and othermatter found in waste water.

3. Leading edges shall be mechanically self-cleaned upon each rotation across a spiral groovelocated on volute bottom.

4. Internal volute bottom shall provide effective sealing between pump volute and impeller.5. Sharp spiral grooves shall provide shearing edges across which each impeller vane leading

edge shall cross during its rotation in order to remain unobstructed.6. Clearance between internal volute bottom and impeller leading edges shall be adjustable.7. Impeller vanes shall have screw-shaped leading edges hardened to Rockwell (Rc) 45.8. Balance statically and dynamically.9. Impellers shall be locked to the shaft.10. All impellers shall be coated with an alkyd resin primer

C. Impeller (KSB):

1. Non-clog type, single or multi-vane (maximum 3 vanes), passing minimum spherical solid sizespecified in Submersible Centrifugal Pump Schedule(s) in Section 11315.

2. Impeller design shall handle solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge, rag-laden and othermatter found in waste water.

3. Balance statically and dynamically.4. Impellers shall be keyed to the shaft.5. All impellers shall be coated with an acrylic dispersion zinc phosphate primers.6. Impeller wear rings shall be stainless steel. Casing wear rings shall be hardened stainless

steel to 45 Rockwell.

D. Shaft:

1. Provide common pump/motor shaft. Pump shaft shall be extension of motor shaft. Pumpshaft and motor shaft with connection coupling is not acceptable.

E. Shaft Seals:

1. Provide 2 totally independent mechanical seals each with its own independent spring system,installed in tandem, with an oil chamber between seals.

2. Provide 1 stationary and 1 positively driven rotating seal ring for each seal.3. Easily inspected and replaced.


4. Shall not require maintenance or adjustment.5. Shall not depend on direction of rotation for sealing.6. Shall not rely on pumped media for sealing.7. Lower seal shall be replaceable without disassembly of seal chamber or use of special tools.8. Pump-out vanes shall be present on backside of impeller to keep contaminants out of seal

area.9. Provide seal leak detection probe in motor housing.10. Provide drain and inspection plug with positive anti-leak seal easily accessible external to

pump.

F. Bearings:

1. Heavy-duty single row to provide minimum L-10 life of 100,000 hours at axial and radialloadings while operating at specified operating conditions.

G. Motor:

1. Horsepower as specified in Submersible Centrifugal Pump Schedule(s) in Section 11315.2. 480v, 3-ph, 60 Hz.3. Minimum motor efficiency of 85 percent at 100 percent of full load.4. 1.15 minimum service factor per NEMA Standards.5. Inverter duty rated, NEMA MG 1, Part 31.6. Moisture resistant, Class H insulation rated for 180 degrees Celsius (C).7. Use trickle impregnation method using Class F monomer-free polyester to fill voids in

windings. Shall meet 95 percent fill factor. Multiple step dip and bake-type stator insulationprocess is not acceptable.

8. Explosion proof rated for Class 1, Division 1 or 2 area where specified in SubmersibleCentrifugal Pump Schedule(s) in Section 11315.

9. Suitable for continuous operation at 40 degrees C over ambient temperature.10. Provide electrical motors in accordance with Section 16150.

H. Cooling system: Provide motor cooling to comply with design and performance requirements.

I. Power/Control Cable:

1. Size in conformance with National Electric Code (NEC) standards.2. Provide watertight cable entry seal to comply with design and performance requirements.3. Provide length to connect to splice box without splicing.

2.04 PUMP MONITORING MODULES

A. Pump monitoring modules and sockets to be installed under Division 13 of the Project Documentsfor all pumps listed in the Schedule(s) for Section 11315.

B. Pump monitor shall provide dual function monitoring for both over-temperature via bi-metal,thermistor, or RTD sensor and seal failure via moisture sensor or float switch. Only low-voltageleakage system allowed.

C. Each module shall provide dual color (red/green) light-emitting diodes (LED) for alarm status (onefor each fault indication), power LED as well as Test and Reset push buttons.

D. Module shall provide independent 100 ma, 24 Volt AC or 5 amps, 210 Volt AC rated Form Coutputs for both over-temperature and seal failure. Module shall have a 24 Volt AC or 24-240 VoltAC input power range, a 2.8 watt power consumption, and shall be UL approved.


2.05 PUMP REMOVAL SYSTEM

A. Provide guide rail, pump mounting base, discharge base elbow, and lifting chain and cable forpump removal. Provide anchor bolts and accessories for complete system. System shall complywith design and performance requirements and as specified. See Section 05500.

B. Guide system - Provide two Type 316 stainless steel guide rails, upper and intermediate guidebrackets as recommended by pump manufacturer for connecting rail(s) to structure, and slidebracket for connecting pump to guide rail(s). Guide cables in lieu of guide rails are not acceptable.

1. Guide rail diameter and thickness as recommended by pump manufacturer.2. Provide upper guide rail bracket with integral hooks on both sides of guide plate that fastens to

structure.3. Contractor to verify elevations during submittal process.

C. Discharge base elbow:

1. Provide for automatic, leak-tight connection to pump discharge.2. ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flange for connection to piping.3. Provide for connection of guide rails.

D. Grip-Eye Lifting System: Furnish pump lifting-chain positive-recovery system consisting of thefollowing:

1. Provide Grip-Eye System or equal for each pump.2. Provide high tensile strength proof-tested Type 316 stainless steel chain, minimum 10 links, of

required capacity to lift pump. Connect short-length of lifting chain to lifting bail of submersiblepump.

3. Provide length of Type 316 Stainless Steel guide cable (wire-rope) connected to short-lengthof lifting chain to extend min. 5-feet beyond top of wet well.

a. Guide cable shall be suitably sized to support chain and length of cable hanging.b. Connecting link between guide cable and chain shall be sized to allow grip-eye to slip over

to access chain links.c. Ends of cable shall not be frayed. Weld or epoxy ends to prevent fraying.d. Contractor shall coil additional length at top of wet well and use Type 316 stainless steel

wire to hold coil shape.e. If no hooks are provided with upper guide bracket, Contractor shall provide Type 316

stainless steel hook at top of wet well from which to hang guide cable. Type 316 stainlesssteel wire tie coil to hook.

f. At free end of guide cable attach plastic tag or stainless steel tag with the words “NOTFOR LIFTING PUMP” stamped into tag. Grip-Eye shall be able to slip over attached tagwithout interference.

4. Furnish forged Grip-Eye of stainless steel, provided separately to connect to the end of thelifting cable or chain of Owner’s pump lifting device.

5. Grip-Eye shall be sized per pump manufacturer’s recommendation.6. Provide miscellaneous hardware for installation, including shackles to connect short-length of

lift chain to pump lifting bail and link to connect short-length of lift chain to guide cable.Material: Type 316 Stainless Steel.

E. Anchor bolts: Stainless Steel. Comply with pump manufacturer’s requirements and in accordancewith Section 05500.

2.06 CONTROLS


A. Control Station (455-CS-2001, -5601, and -5602) provided under Division 13.

B. Variable Speed Drive (455-VFD-2001, -5601, and -5602) provided under Division 16

2.07 COATINGS







1. Perform on each pump in accordance with test requirements of Hydraulic Institute (HI – LevelA).

2. Determine capacity, head, brake horsepower and hydraulic efficiency.3. Test each pump at minimum of 6 points including shutoff, at rated capacity specified, and at

flow rate greater than maximum capacity specified in Submersible Centrifugal PumpingEquipment Schedule(s).

4. Prepare and submit certified performance curves.5. Test actual assembled pumps to be provided. Results of prior tests on similar or identical



1. Perform on each pump.2. Minimum test pressure shall be 1.5 times pump shutoff head.3. Prepare and submit report of results.4. Test actual assembled pumps to be provided. Results of prior tests on similar or identical



3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install submersible centrifugal equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION









3.04 DEMONSTRATION




SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMP SCHEDULE 1

Name of Pump(s) Filtrate Pump Nos. 1 and 2Tag Number(s) 455-P-5601 and -5602Number of Pumps TwoFluid Pumped GBT Filtrate and Gravity Thickener Overflow

Maximum Motor Horsepower 15Maximum Full Load Amps 22Maximum RPM 1,750

Discharge 6 inch Suction FloodedMotor 480 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzMinimum Spherical Solids SizeConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds

Maximum Speed (rpm) 1,750Operating Point

Capacity (gpm) 400Total Dynamic Head (ft) 50Minimum efficiency 50

Design Operating PointCapacity (gpm) 900Total Dynamic Head (ft) 35Minimum efficiency 74

Maximum Operating Point at Maximum SpeedCapacity (gpm) 1800Total Dynamic Head (ft) 10





Name of Pump(s) Basin Drain PumpTag Number(s) 455-P-2001Number of Pumps OneFluid Pumped Aeration Basin and Secondary Clarifier Contents


Discharge 8 Suction FloodedMotor 460 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzMinimum Spherical Solids SizeConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds



Design Operating PointCapacity (gpm) 2,200Total Dynamic Head (ft) 55Minimum efficiency 79

Maximum Operating Point at Maximum SpeedCapacity (gpm) 3,800Total Dynamic Head (ft) 26





Name of Pump(s) Filtrate Sample PumpFiltrate Equalization Sample Pump

Tag Number(s) 455-P-5631 and -5641Number of Pumps TwoFluid Pumped GBT Filtrate Treated with Ferric Chloride

Maximum Motor Horsepower 2.7Maximum Full Load Amps 7.5Maximum RPM 3,290

Discharge 2 Suction FloodedMotor 460 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzMinimum Spherical Solids Size 2 inchConstant or Variable Speed Constant SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds


Capacity (gpm) 20Total Dynamic Head (ft) 40Minimum efficiency 13

Design Operating PointCapacity (gpm) 60Total Dynamic Head (ft) 30Minimum efficiency 24

Maximum Operating Point at Maximum SpeedCapacity (gpm) 120Total Dynamic Head (ft) 13



END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. DOUBLE DISC PUMPING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11316A-1

SECTION 11316ADOUBLE DISC PUMPING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Filtrate Equalization Pump (455-P-5611).2. Vacuum and discharge pressure sensors and switch assemblies.3. Pulsation dampeners.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. NPT: National Pipe Thread.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act.


A. Design Requirements:

1. Pumping equipment shall comply with the Double Disc Pump Schedule(s) to Section 11316A.2. Equipment shall be suitable for pumping fluid as specified in the Double Disc Pump

Schedule(s) to Section 11316A.3. Equipment shall be continuous, unattended operation.4. Equipment shall operate dry without damage.5. Equipment shall be self-priming.6. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, and suitable for service

specified.7. Design of equipment shall not require removal of pump from process piping for routine

maintenance or diaphragm replacement.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for double disc pumping equipment specified.2. Motor data in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating system in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for double discpumping equipment.


DOUBLE DISC PUMPING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11316A-2 Project No. 12026

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofdouble disc pumping equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of double disc pumping equipment inservice.




B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain double disc pumping equipment system components fromsingle manufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product builtfrom components that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate asunit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver double disc pumping equipment and system components to their final locations inprotective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture andprevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is madesafe from such hazards.

B. Store double disc pumping equipment in clean, dry location.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Penn Valley Pump Co. as specified in Section 11316A.

B. Penn Valley Pump Co. as specified in Section 11316B.

C. Alfa Laval by Verder, Inc. as specified in Section 11316B.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Suitable for application specified in the Double Disc Pump Schedule(s) to Section 11316A and asspecified below:

1. Housing: Class 30 Cast Iron housings with soft PVC lining on all internal surfaces.2. Discs: High tensile neoprene, with multiple layers of fabric for longevity and strength.3. Disc connecting rods: High tensile aluminum.


4. Trunnions: Fabric-reinforced neoprene5. Clack Valve: Neoprene with multiple layers of fabric encapsulating a rigid core.6. Shaft: Hardened high-tensile stainless steel.7. Cams: High tensile, cast bronze alloy.8. Frame and Base: 304 stainless steel.9. Pump shall incorporate a “Maintain-in-Place” design that does not require pump removal from

frame or disconnecting of piping for maintenance.

B. Provide materials of construction suitable for ferric chloride applications as indicated in DoubleDisc Pump Schedule(s) to Section 11316A.


A. General:

1. Pump shall be a simplex heavy duty, double disc, positive displacement type.2. Pump shall have three housings, horizontally spit with hinged housings, to allow access to the

internal components.3. Pump shall operate dry without damage.4. Pumping action shall be achieved by two reciprocating discs attached to connecting rods

driven by a rotating shaft and eccentric cams.

B. Pump Housing:

1. Disc shall be mounted to the connecting rod by a hardened, high strength, stainless steel stubshaft.

2. Flexible trunnions shall seal the pump fluid chamber.

C. Suction Port:

1. A 4-inch, two-piece “swan neck” style port shall convey flow to the suction housing to minimizedebris buildup.

2. Clack valve shall be full port, have an integral O-ring, and shall be integrally mounted to the‘swan neck’. The mounting face shall be machined.

D. Drive Assembly:

1. Drive shaft shall be stainless steel and minimum 1-3/8 inch diameter, withstanding a deadhead situation.

2. The shaft shall be mounted on four self-aligning, sealed bearings. The eccentric cams shallbe pinned or keyed to the shaft. Bearings shall not require grease lubrication.

3. The pump shall be V-belt driven consisting of 2 groove Type B arrangement.4. The pulley ratios shall be sized to provide the maximum pump speed listed in the Double Disc

Pump Schedule(s) and to provide the required torque generated between the pump and themotor.

5. Provide OSHA approved, 304 stainless steel guards and covers.

E. Mounting:

1. Pump and V-belt assembly shall be mounted on a side motor mounting frame. .2. Mount pump and V-belt assembly on a common sub base manufactured from 2-inch square

tubing. Base shall be of sufficient gusseted, reinforcing, and braces to withstand loads andresist wearing and buckling at all times. Cap ends of tubing with black plastic plugs.


F. Pulsation Dampeners:

1. Provide on the suction and discharge lines.2. Pulsation dampener shall be mounted on a 4 inch flanged spool piece.3. The main tube shall be 6 inch diameter, schedule 40 carbon steel pipe with fully welded end

cap, completely lined with soft PVC for chemical resistance.4. Provide pulsation dampener assembly with a 1 inch flanged connection located at the top,

suitable for connection with the vacuum and pressure switch assembly.5. 60 pounds per square inch maximum pressure.6. 150 pounds per square inch, standard flanges.

G. Motor:

1. Motor shall be 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) inverter dutytype.

2. Motor shall conform to requirements in Section 16150.3. Maximum motor size as specified in Double Disc Pump Schedule(s) in this Section.

H. Vacuum and Pressure Protection:

1. Pressure sensor and switch shall be mounted to the top of the suction and discharge pulsationdampeners.

a. 455-PI/PSL-5611S and -5611D.

2. Provide pressure sensors with diaphragm seals on the discharge pulsation dampener.PVP420, Red Valve42/742 or equal: 1 inch NPT, PVC body, EDPM elastomeric sensing tube,glycerine filled. The process pressure is sensed through a 360-degree elastomeric tube,where glycerine transfers pressure to the gauge and switch.

3. Provide vacuum sensors with diaphragm seals on the suction pulsation dampener. PVP420,Red Valve42/742 or equal: 1 inch NPT, PVC body, EDPM elastomeric sensing tube, glycerinefilled. The process pressure is sensed through a 360-degree elastomeric tube, whereglycerine transfers pressure to the gauge and switch.

4. The vacuum assembly, on the suction pulsation dampener, shall be fitted with a 2-1/2 inchstainless steel 30 inch Mercury – 30 pounds per square inch gauge and an adjustable vacuumswitch factory set at 10 inch Mercury: Ashcroft, Barksdale, or equal.

5. The pressure assembly, on the discharge pulsation dampener, shall be fitted with a 2-1/2 inchstainless steel 0 – 60 pounds per square inch gauge and an adjustable pressure switch factoryset at 30 pounds per square inch: Ashcroft, Barksdale, or equal.

6. All assembly fittings shall be 316 stainless steel.7. Provide assemblies with capability to be cleaned in place by air from an air compressor.

Assembly shall have a PVC ball valve mounted to the top of the sensor, where the other end isfitted with a universal, quick acting coupling suitable for the application.

2.04 CONTROLS

A. Control Station (455-CS-5611) provided under Division 13.

B. Adjustable Speed Drive (455-VFD-5611) provided under Division 16

2.05 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation and priming of equipment in plant prior toshipment. Coatings shall comply with Section 09960.


B. Contractor to provide final coating. Match equipment with connected piping after installation.Coatings shall comply with Section 09960.

C. Final coating shall not cover nameplate on pump.

D. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease until installation.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install double disc pumping equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION





a. 1 man-day for Installation Services.b. 1/2 man-day for Instructional Services.c. 1/2 man-day for Post Startup Services




DOUBLE DISC PUMP SCHEDULE

Name of Pump(s) Filtrate Equalization PumpTag Number(s) 455-P-5611Number of Pumps OneFluid Pumped GBT Filtrate Treated with Ferric Chloride

Maximum Motor Horsepower 5Maximum Full Load Amps 6.83Maximum Motor RPM 1,160

Discharge 4-inch Suction 4-inchMotor 460 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzConstant or Adjustable Speed Adjustable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds

Maximum Pump Speed (rpm) 280Design Operating Point

Capacity (gpm) 100Total Dynamic Head (ft) 38


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. DOUBLE DISC PUMPING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11316B-1

SECTION 11316BDOUBLE DISC PUMPING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Filtrate Equalization Pump (455-P-5611).2. Vacuum and discharge pressure sensors and switch assemblies.3. Pulsation dampeners.

1.02 DEFINITIONS


1.03 REFERENCES

A. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act.



1. Pumping equipment shall comply with the Double Disc Pump Schedule(s) to Section 11316B.2. Equipment shall be suitable for pumping fluid as specified in the Double Disc Pump

Schedule(s) to Section 11316B.3. Equipment shall be continuous, unattended operation.4. Equipment shall operate dry without damage.5. Equipment shall be self-priming.6. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, and suitable for service

specified.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for double disc pumping equipment specified.2. Motor data in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating system in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for double discpumping equipment.


DOUBLE DISC PUMPING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11316B-2 Project No. 12026

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofdouble disc pumping equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of double disc pumping equipment inservice.




B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain double disc pumping equipment system components fromsingle manufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product builtfrom components that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate asunit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver double disc pumping equipment and system components to their final locations inprotective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture andprevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is madesafe from such hazards.

B. Store double disc pumping equipment in clean, dry location.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Penn Valley Pump Co. as specified in Section 11316A.

B. Penn Valley Pump Co. as specified in Section 11316B.

C. Alfa Laval by Verder, Inc. as specified in Section 11316B.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Suitable for application specified in the Double Disc Pump Schedule(s) to Section 11316B and asspecified below:

1. Housing: Class 30 Cast Iron,housing with soft PVC lining on all internal surfaces.2. Discs: High tensile neoprene, with multiple layers of fabric for longevity and strength.3. Disc connecting rods: High tensile aluminum.


4. Trunnions: Fabric-reinforced neoprene5. Clack Valve: Neoprene with multiple layers of fabric encapsulating a rigid core.6. Shaft: Hardened high-tensile stainless steel.7. Cams: High tensile, cast bronze alloy.8. Frame and Base: Epoxy coated carbon steel.

B. Provide materials of construction suitable for ferric chloride applications as indicated in DoubleDisc Pump Schedule(s) to Section 11316B.


A. General:

1. Pump shall be a simplex heavy duty, double disc, positive displacement type.2. Pump shall have three housings, horizontally spit, to allow access to the internal components.3. Pump shall operate dry without damage.4. Pumping action shall be achieved by two reciprocating discs attached to connecting rods

driven by a rotating shaft and eccentric cams.

B. Pump Housing:

1. Disc shall be mounted to the connecting rod by a hardened, high strength, stainless steel stubshaft.

2. Flexible trunnions shall seal the pump fluid chamber.

C. Suction Port:

1. A 4-inch, one-piece “swan neck” style port shall convey flow to the suction housing to minimizedebris buildup.

2. Clack valve shall be full port.

D. Drive Assembly:

1. Drive shaft shall be stainless steel and minimum 1-3/8 inch diameter, withstanding a deadhead situation.

2. The shaft shall be mounted on three or four self-aligning, sealed bearings. Eccentric camsshall be pinned or keyed to the shaft. Bearings shall not require grease lubrication.

3. The pump shall be V-belt driven consisting of 2 groove Type B arrangement.4. The pulley ratios shall be sized to provide the maximum pump speed listed in the Double Disc

Pump Schedule(s) and to provide the required torque generated between the pump and themotor.

5. Provide OSHA approved, Epoxy coated carbon steel guards and covers.

E. Mounting:

1. Pump and V-belt assembly shall be mounted on a side motor mounting frame.2. Mount pump and V-belt assembly on a common sub base manufactured from 2-inch square

tubing. Base shall be of sufficient gusseted, reinforcing, and braces to withstand loads andresist wearing and buckling at all times. Cap ends of tubing with black plastic plugs.

F. Pulsation Dampeners:

1. Provide on the suction and discharge lines.2. Pulsation dampener shall be mounted on a 4 inch flanged spool piece.3. The main tube shall be 6 inch diameter, schedule 40 carbon steel pipe with fully welded end

cap, completely lined with soft PVC for chemical resistance


4. Provide pulsation dampener assembly with a 1 inch flanged connection located at the top,suitable for connection with the vacuum and pressure switch assembly.

5. 60 pounds per square inch maximum pressure.6. 150 pounds per square inch, standard flanges.

G. Motor:

1. Motor shall be 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz, totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) inverter dutytype.

2. Motor shall conform to requirements in Section 16150.3. Maximum motor size as specified in Double Disc Pump Schedule(s) in this Section.

H. Vacuum and Pressure Protection:

1. Pressure sensor and switch shall be mounted to the top of the suction and discharge pulsationdampeners.

a. 455-PI/PSL-5611S and -5611D.

2. Provide pressure sensors with diaphragm seals on the discharge pulsation dampener.PVP420, Red Valve42/742 or equal: 1 inch NPT, PVC body, EDPM elastomeric sensing tube,glycerine filled. The process pressure is sensed through a 360-degree elastomeric tube,where glycerine transfers pressure to the gauge and switch.

3. Provide vacuum sensors with diaphragm seals on the suction pulsation dampener. PVP420,Red Valve42/742 or equal: 1 inch NPT, PVC body, EDPM elastomeric sensing tube, glycerinefilled. The process pressure is sensed through a 360-degree elastomeric tube, whereglycerine transfers pressure to the gauge and switch.

4. The vacuum assembly, on the suction pulsation dampener, shall be fitted with a 2-1/2 inchstainless steel 30 inch Mercury – 30 pounds per square inch gauge and an adjustable vacuumswitch factory set at 10 inch Mercury: Ashcroft, Barksdale, or equal.

5. The pressure assembly, on the discharge pulsation dampener, shall be fitted with a 2-1/2 inchstainless steel 0 – 60 pounds per square inch gauge and an adjustable pressure switch factoryset at 30 pounds per square inch: Ashcroft, Barksdale, or equal.

6. All assembly fittings shall be 316 stainless steel.7. Provide assemblies with capability to be cleaned in place by air from an air compressor.

Assembly shall have a PVC ball valve mounted to the top of the sensor, where the other end isfitted with a universal, quick acting coupling suitable for the application.

2.04 CONTROLS


B. Adjustable Speed Drive (455-VFD-5611) provided under Division 16

2.05 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation and priming of equipment in plant prior toshipment. Coatings shall comply with Section 09960.

B. Contractor to provide final coating. Match equipment with connected piping after installation.Coatings shall comply with Section 09960.

C. Final coating shall not cover nameplate on pump.

D. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease until installation.



3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install double disc pumping equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION









DOUBLE DISC PUMP SCHEDULE

Name of Pump(s) Filtrate Equalization PumpTag Number(s) 455-P-5611Number of Pumps OneFluid Pumped GBT Filtrate Treated with Ferric Chloride

Maximum Motor Horsepower 5Maximum Full Load Amps 6.83Maximum RPM 1,160

Discharge 4-inch Suction 4-inchMotor 460 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzConstant or Adjustable Speed Adjustable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds

Maximum Speed (rpm) 450Design Operating Point



END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. DRY-PIT CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11317-1

SECTION 11317DRY-PIT CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Low Pressure W3 Pump Nos. 1 and 2 (510-P-5801 and -5802).2. W3 Pump Nos. 1, 2, 3, and 4 (510-P-5901, -5902, -5903 and -5904).3. Pump accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

B. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacture’s Association

C. ANSI: American National Standards Institute



1. Pumping equipment shall comply with Schedules in Section 11317.2. Equipment shall be suitable for pumping secondary treated wastewater effluent.3. Equipment shall be suitable for continuous operation at all operating speeds specified.4. Adequately size motor horsepower so each pump is non-overloading throughout entire

pump performance curve.5. Equipment shall be free from shock, vibration, cavitation, overheating, and noise while

operating at specified conditions.6. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicated

and replaced, and suitable for service specified.7. Pumps shall be horizontal end suction, centrifugal type with flexible connections.

1.04 SUBMITTALS









DRY-PIT CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11317-2 Project No. 12026



B. Provide three year manufacturer’s warranty.




PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANFACTURERS

A. Goulds Pumps 3196i

B. Aurora Pumps

C. Fairbanks Morse Pumps

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Suitable for application specified in Schedules 1, 2 to 3 in Section 11317 and as specifiedbelow:

1. Pump case: Ductile iron or Cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 20.2. Motor housing: Steel.3. Impeller: Ductile iron or Cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 20.4. Seal housing: Ductile iron or Cast iron, ASTM A-48, Class 20.5. Pump shaft: Carbon steel SAE 1045.6. Shaft sleeve: 316 Stainless steel.7. O-rings: BUNA-N.8. Fasteners: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316.9. Mechanical Seal: John Crane 4610.

a. Stationary seal: Silicon carbideb. Rotating face: Silicon carbidec. Flexible members: Buna-Rubberd. Spring and other metallic parts: Stainless steel

10. Anchor bolts: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 316. See Section 05500.


A. Casing:

1. Volute type, bolted to adapter, with recessed lock fit to insure alignment.2. No stud or bolt holes are tapped through casing to liquid ways. Tapping openings

provided for priming, venting and draining. Piping connection to be as shown per pumpdata sheets.


3. ANSI standard dimensions.4. Adjustable bearing frame to maintain proper clearance.

B. Impeller:

1. Fully open cast in one piece.2. All impellers are to be statically balanced to insure smooth operation, also hydraulically

balanced.3. Impeller to thread on to shaft.

C. Bearing Frame:

1. Designed to optimize L-10 bearing life.2. Oil cooling.

D. Shaft Sleeves:

1. To be shouldered on shaft near impeller and covers full length of shaft from impeller hubthrough seal to protect shaft from contact with liquid.

E. Stuffing Box:

1. Stuffing box cover shall be made of close grained cast iron with integral stuffing box andshall be designed to accept either packing or mechanical seal.

2. A single mechanical seal shall be installed in the stuffing box. Seal shall be John Crane4610 or equal.

F. Coupling:

1. Pump shaft and motor shaft shall be connected with Rexford Omega coupling.

G. Motor:

1. Totally enclosed fan cooled.2. Horsepower as specified in Schedules 1, 2 and 3 in Section 11317.3. 480 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz.4. 1.15 minimum service factor per NEMA Standards.5. Inverter duty rated.6. Moisture resistant, Class F insulation rated for 180oC.7. NEMA B designed for continuous duty.8. Provide a thermal sensor (510-TSH-5901, -5902, -5903, and -5904) for each pump

imbedded in windings to provide signal for alarm and shutdown at high motortemperature.

9. Provide in accordance with Section 16150.

H. Equipment Base

1. Pump/motor assembly shall be mounted to constructed-in-place concrete base.2. Each mounting or attachment point shall be complete with a vibration isolation pad. The

pad will be in two parts, a 1/4 inch base layer followed by a 5/8 inch upper layer and be anominal 2 inch x 2 inch square size for pump/motor combinations weighing up to 1,500pounds.

3. The mounting or hold down bolts at each base attachment point shall be stainless steeland shall be complete with washer of appropriate size made of the same material andthickness as the 5/8 inch upper layer pad.


I. Flexible Connectors

1. Reducing eccentric or concentric flexible pump connectors shall be provided to relievestrain on the pumps and eliminate transmission of vibration as shown on the ProjectDrawings.

2. The body of the connector shall be constructed of multiple layers of neoprene andreinforcement cord. The connectors shall be rated for 200 pounds per square inch gaugeSee Section 15252.

2.04 CONTROLS

A. Variable Speed Drive (510-VFD-5901, -5902,- 5903, and -5904) provided under Division 16.

2.05 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming, and finish coating of ferrousmetal components prior to shipment.


C. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holds with protective grease until installation.

2.06 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts necessary to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years,including but not limited to the parts listed below.

1. One seal for each sized pump.


C. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and clearly labeled and identified with the name andnumber of the equipment to which they belong.

D. Provide an adequate quantity of Manufacturer-approved lubricants to conform with theManufacturer-defined preventative maintenance practices through the warranty period.


3.01 INSTALLATION





1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall bepresent at jobsite or classroom designated by Owner for man-days indicated, travel timeexcluded, for assistance during plant construction, plant startup, and training of Owner'spersonnel for plant operation. Include:




3. In addition to the services specified above, provide manufacturer’s services as requiredto successfully complete systems demonstration as specified in Section 01820.

B. After installation has been completed, test pumps under normal operating conditions inpresence of Engineer.


SCHEDULE 1 TO SECTION 11317DRY-PIT CENTRIFUGAL PUMPING EQUIPMENT

Name of Pump(s) W3 Pump Nos. 1 and 2Tag Number(s) 510-P-5901 and -5902Number of Pumps 2Fluid Pumped Plant Effluent Water (Non-Potable)Goulds Model Number 3196i

Motor Horsepower (1) 50 HpRPM 3,500

Discharge 2-inchSuction 3-inchMinimum Spherical Solids Size (in.) 0.375 inchFull Motor Load Amps 56 ampsPump Installation Classification Non-Rated AreaConstant or Adjustable Speed Adjustable SpeedDesign Operating Point –

Maximum Speed (rpm) 3,500Capacity (gpm) 300Head (ft) 260Minimum Efficiency (%) 63NPSHr (ft) * 13

Maximum Operating PointCapacity (gpm) 520Head (ft) 110NPSHr (ft) * 25.5

Minimum Operating PointCapacity (gpm) 100Head (ft) 270

Notes: (1) Listed horsepower is for “A” listed manufacturer. If “B” listed manufacturer requires higherhorsepower, then Contractor to provide at no additional cost all electrical changes and motor.* Approximaterpm = revolutions per minuteft = feetgpm = gallons per minuteHp = horsepoweramps = amperesnos. = numbers



Name of Pump(s) W3 Pump Nos. 3 and 4Tag Number(s) 510-P-5903 and -5904Number of Pumps 2Fluid Pumped Plant Effluent Water (Non-Potable)Goulds Model Number 3196i

Motor Horsepower 20 HpRPM 3,500

Discharge 1-inchSuction 1.5-inchMinimum Spherical Solids Size (in.) 0.344 inchFull Motor Load Amps 23 ampsPump Installation Classification Non-Rated AreaConstant or Adjustable Speed Adjustable SpeedDesign Operating Point –


Maximum Operating PointCapacity (gpm) 190Head (ft) 160NPSHr (ft) * 20

Minimum Operating PointCapacity (gpm) 20Head (ft) 270NPSHr (ft) * 3

Notes: (1) Listed horsepower is for “A” listed manufacturer. If “B” listed manufacturer requires higher horsepower, then Contractor toprovide at no additional cost all electrical changes and motor.* Approximaterpm = revolutions per minuteft = feetgpm = gallons per minuteHp = horsepoweramps = amperesnos. = numbers



Name of Pump(s) Low Pressure W3 Pump Nos. 1 and 2Tag Number(s) 510-P-5801 and -5802Number of Pumps 2Fluid Pumped Plant Effluent Water (Non-Potable)Goulds Model Number 3196i

Motor Horsepower 10 HpRPM 1,800

Discharge 3-inchSuction 4-inchMinimum Spherical Solids Size (in.) 1.125 inchFull Motor Load Amps 12.5 ampsPump Installation Classification Non-Rated AreaConstant or Adjustable Speed Adjustable SpeedDesign Operating Point –


Maximum Operating PointCapacity (gpm) 580Head (ft) 24NPSHr (ft) * 10

Minimum Operating PointCapacity (gpm) 100Head (ft) 55NPSHr (ft) * 4

Notes: (1) Listed horsepower is for “A” listed manufacturer. If “B” listed manufacturer requires higher horsepower, then Contractor toprovide at no additional cost all electrical changes and motor.* Approximaterpm = revolutions per minuteft = feetgpm = gallons per minuteHp = horsepoweramps = amperesnos. = numbers

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. ROTARY LOBE PUMPING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11318-1

SECTION 11318ROTARY LOBE PUMPING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. WAS GBT Feed Pump Nos. 1 and 3 (455-P-2501 and -2503).2. DSD GBT Feed Pump Nos. 1 and 2 (510-P-3601, -3602)

B. If Owner selects Alternate 5, provide the following:

1. WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 2 (455-P-2502).2. Associated equipment, piping, wiring, and controls as shown on Drawings and specified in this

Section.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. AISI: American Iron and Steel Institute.

B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.

C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.



1. Pump shall be positive displacement, rotary lobe type.2. Pumping equipment shall meet requirements of and comply with Rotary Lobe Pump

Schedule(s) at the end of this Section.3. Equipment shall be suitable for pumping a mixture of secondary scum and waste activated

sludge (WAS) at solids concentrations up to 1%.4. Rotary Lobe Pumps shall be designed abrasion resistant.5. All fluid-wetted parts including mechanical seal shall be replaceable through the quick release

front cover without disassembly of the pump unit or connecting pipe system.6. Pumps with seal water requirements are not acceptable.7. Pumps shall be designed to temporarily run dry.8. Pumps shall operate in either direction.9. Sludge pumping equipment shall be suitable for continuous operation at all operating speeds

specified.10. Motor horsepower shall be non-overloading throughout entire pump performance curve.11. Equipment shall be free from shock, vibration, cavitation, overheating, and excessive noise

while operating at specified conditions.12. Equipment shall be continuous operation without damage while operating under load.13. Design equipment so parts are readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicated

and replaced, and suitable for service specified.

ROTARY LOBE PUMPING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11318-2 Project No. 12026

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for rotary lobe equipment specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for rotary lobeequipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofrotary lobe equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of rotary lobe equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.




B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain rotary lobe components from single manufacturer withresponsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built from components thathave proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit as evidenced byrecords of prototype testing.


A. Deliver rotary lobe equipment and system components to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.


B. Store rotary lobe equipment in clean, dry location.


1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. Two rotor replacement kits per pump model.b. Two mechanical seal replacement kits per pump model.c. Two O-ring replacement kits per pump model.d. One replacement drive belt for each pump belt driven pump furnished.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Borger.

B. Vogelsang.

2.02 PUMP CONSTRUCTION

A. General:

1. Gearbox and intermediate chamber oil drain shall be easily accessible with side mounted drainscrew.

2. Suction and discharge connections shall be 150-pound flanges with bolt hole dimensions andspacing to ANSI standards.

3. All cast iron parts shall be free from sand holes, blow holes, and other defects.

B. Pump Casing and Protection Plates:

1. Shall be manufactured from Cast Iron, ASTM A48 grade 40, with a minimum hardness of 264Brinell.

2. Rear of pump casing and front cover shall be protected with replaceable wear plates with aminimum hardness of 550 Brinell.

3. Front cover protection plate shall be reversible.4. Pump casing shall be equipped with radial pump casing protection plates with a hardness of

550 Brinell.5. Quick release cover shall be held in place by four eye nuts.

C. Rotors:

1. Rotors shall be tri-lobe or quad-lobe, screw-type design.

a. Tri-lobe rotors shall have lobe tips that are individually replaceable. Tips shall be cast ironcore coated with abrasion-resistant Buna-N Durometer hardness 72.


b. Quad-lobe rotors shall have solids cast iron cores coated with abrasion-resistant Buna-NDurometer hardness 72. Rotor core geometry shall be the same as that of the finishedrotor.

c. Rotors shall be keyed to shaft with cylindrical bore.d. Length of rotor shall not exceed its diameter, stacking lobes is not acceptable.

D. Shafts:

1. Shaft shall be non-sludge wetted.2. Rotor/shaft connection shall not come in contact with the pumped fluid.3. Rotor/shaft connection shall be oil-lubricated fed from an intermediate chamber to ensure an

oil exposure of the entire shaft.4. Shafts shall be carbon steel ASTM A293.

E. Mechanical Seal:

1. Pumps shall be fitted with maintenance free mechanical seals with hardened Duronit V ortungsten carbide seal faces.

2. Seals shall be operating in a common oil-filled intermediate chamber (Quench for lubricationand cooling). Purge systems for the seals are not acceptable.

3. Design of the pump shall allow removal and replacement of the seal via the front cover.

F. Gearbox / Timing Gear / Bearings:

1. Bearings and timing gear shall be located in a common oil-filled cast iron gearbox, fitted with abuilt in sight class to monitor oil level.

2. Timing gear shall maintain non-contact between the rotors.3. Bearing life to be designed for L-10 bearing life rating of 100,000 hours.

G. Pump and Drive Base:

1. Pump and drive shall be fitted on a common base made of hot dipped galvanized steel.2. Provide suitable bolt and grout holes to facilitate mounting at the side.

H. Motor and Drive Unit:

1. Each unit shall consist of a pump / geared motor configuration with a piggyback or directcoupled configuration as identified in Rotary Lobe Pump Schedules.

2. Direct coupled pumps shall be supplied with an in-line reducer.3. Piggyback configured pumps shall be fabricated such that motor is installed on a dedicated

frame above the pump housing in such a way as to allow access to all points of the pump. Unitshall be provided with a belt and sheave assembly designed to deliver a minimum of 150% ofthe rated output of the connected motor. Provide OSHA approved belt guard.

4. Motor horsepower and speed shall be as specified in Rotary Lobe Pump Schedules.5. 3 phase, 60 Hertz, 460 volt, TEFC.6. Inverter duty, 1.15 safety factor, Class F Insulation.7. Provide thermistors in each phase.8. Motor shall be in accordance with Section 16150.

2.03 CONTROLS

A. Control Station (455-CS-2501, -2502, -2503, 510-CS-3601, and -3602) provided under Division 13.

B. Variable Speed Drive (455-VFD-2501, -2502, -2503, 510-VFD-3601, and -3602) provided underDivision 16.

2.04 COATINGS





3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install rotary lobe equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION








3.04 DEMONSTRATION



ROTARY LOBE PUMP SCHEDULE 1

Name of Pump(s) WAS GBT Feed Pump Nos. 1, 2, and 3Tag Number(s) 455-P-2501, -2502, and -2503Number of Pumps ThreeFluid Pumped Waste Activated Sludge

Maximum Motor Horsepower 25Maximum Full Load Amps 33.7Maximum RPM 1,800

Discharge 10 Suction 10Motor 480 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzDrive Arrangement Direct CoupledConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds

Maximum Speed (rpm) 285Design Operating Point 1


Design Operating Point 2Capacity (gpm) 700Total Dynamic Head (ft) 35



ROTARY LOBE PUMP SCHEDULE 2

Name of Pump(s) DSD GBT Feed Pump Nos. 1 and 2Tag Number(s) 510-P-3601, -3602Number of Pumps TwoFluid Pumped Digested Sludge

Maximum Motor Horsepower 25Maximum Full Load AmpsMaximum Motor RPM 1,800

Discharge 6 Suction 6Motor 480 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzDrive Arrangement Piggyback, Belt DrivenConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds

Design Operating Point 1Capacity (gpm) 250Total Dynamic Head (ft) 80Maximum Speed (RPM) 153

Design Operating Point 2Capacity (gpm) 500Total Dynamic Head (ft) 90Maximum Speed (RPM) 266


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMP EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11319-1

SECTION 11319PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMP EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. TWAS Pump No. 1 (455-P-3001)2. TDSD Pump (455-P-4503)3. Thermal Sensors (455-TSH-3001 and -4503)4. Optical Shaft Revolution Counter (455-QT-3001, and -4503)5. Seal Water Pressure Switches (455-PSL-3011 and -4513)6. Seal Water Isolation Valves (455-FV-3011 and -4513)


1. TWAS Pump No. 2 (455-P-3002)2. Thermal Sensors (455-TSH-3002)3. Optical Shaft Revolution Counter (455-QT-3002)4. Seal Water Pressure Switches (455-PSL-3012)5. Seal Water Isolation Valves (455-FV-3012)6. Associated equipment, piping, wiring, and controls as shown on Drawings and specified in this

Section.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act



1. Pump shall be positive displacement, progressing cavity type with gear joint or a positivelysealed and lubricated pin joint drive train.

2. Pumping equipment shall comply with the Progressing Cavity Pump Schedule(s).3. Equipment shall be suitable for thickened waste activated sludge (TWAS) at solids

concentrations up to 6 percent, and thickened digested sludge (TDSD) at solidsconcentrations up to 7 percent.

4. Motor horsepower shall be sized so each pump is non-overloading throughout entire pumpperformance curve.


6. Equipment shall continuously operate without damage while operating under load.7. Design equipment so parts are readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicated

and replaced, and suitable for service specified.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMP EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11319-2 Project No. 12026


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for progressing cavity equipment specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for progressingcavity equipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofprogressing cavity equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of progressing cavity equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.




B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain progressing cavity equipment system components fromsingle manufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product builtfrom components that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate asunit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver progressing cavity equipment and system components to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.

B. Store progressing cavity equipment in clean, dry location.



1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One complete pump.b. One complete set of O-rings, gaskets, and seals per pump model.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Moyno Industrial Products.

B. Netzsch.

C. Seepex.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Suitable for application specified in the Progressing Cavity Pump Schedules and as specifiedbelow.

1. Suction Housing: thick-walled cast iron.2. Bearing Housing: thick-walled cast iron.3. Rotor: Alloy steel, SAE 1045, ASTM A331-90, grade 4150 cold finish with yield strength

greater than 55,000 pounds per square inch plated with 0.01-inch of hard chrome or 316stainless steel Duktil Coated (1250 Vickers Hardness).

4. Stator: Nitrile 100, 70 Durometer hardness chemically bonded to high strength steel tube.5. Gear joints: Machined of alloy steel, SAE 1045, ASTM 331-90, grade A8620.6. Pin joints: High speed steel, air hardened to 60-65 HRc.7. Connecting rod: Machined of alloy steel, SAE 1045, ASTM 331-90, grade A8630.8. Drive shaft: Machined from carbon steel, SAE 1045, ASTM A519-90, grade MT1020, yield

strength of 32,000 pounds per square inch.


A. General:

1. All cast iron parts shall be free from sand holes, blow holes, and other defects.2. Suction connection for TWAS Pump Nos. 1 and 2 as well as TDSD Pump shall be flanged for

connection to discharge hopper provided by Contractor; coordinate requirements withContractor if dimensions are different from that shown in Progressing Cavity Pump Schedule.

3. Discharge connections shall be flanged with bolt hole dimensions and spacing to ANSIstandards.


B. Pump:

1. Suction housing shall include two inspection ports, 180 degrees apart, to permit access to thesuction housing interior without disconnecting the feed chute.

C. Rotor:

1. Rotor shall be of one-piece (two-stage) construction with integrally machined rotor head.2. Rotors cut to length with welded rotor heads shall not be acceptable.3. Rotor shall have single helix design.

D. Stator:

1. Stators shall be double helix (two-stage) design and chemically bonded to the inside of acarbon steel tube.

2. The opening of the stator, on the suction side of the pump, shall be beveled to at least a 30degree angle from the vertical to lesson entrance losses.

3. Stator shall be rigidly fastened to the suction housing and discharge flange by one of thefollowing methods:

a. Stator shall be molded with a seal integral to the stator elastomer preventing the metalstator tube and the bonding agent from the elastomer from contacting the pumped liquid.

b. Fasten stator to pump with four thru-bolts.

4. Stators shall be manufactured to size. Stators made in long lengths and cut to size are notacceptable.

5. Seal ends of stator tube at the suction and discharge to prevent the material being pumpedfrom contacting the stator tube.

E. Bearings:

1. Bearing shall be integral to the pump or gear/motor, designed for all loads imposed byspecified service.

2. Bearings shall be grease lubricated, tapered roller or ball bearing type with diverging pressureangles to maximize shaft stability.

3. Bearings shall be designed for a minimum B-10 life of 100,000 hours under maximumoperating conditions and shall not require periodic lubrication.

4. Bearings shall be protected from contaminates by means of a bearing cover plate bolted tothe bearing housing.

F. Drive Components:

1. Drive:

a. Drive shaft shall be of solid drive shaft design to avoid clocking and / or trapping of solids,which could interrupt movements of connecting rod or disturb seal of rear gear joint or aconnecting rod that shall be of the rigid, splined design, connecting the gear joints of thedrive shaft and eccentrically moving rotor.

b. Connecting rod shall also serve as a conveyor assembly to move the pumped materialfrom the suction housing to the pumping elements.

c. Connecting rod shall be constructed of machined alloy steel.d. All diameters of connecting rod are to be concentric to within +/- 0.003 inches TIR.e. Extend auger tube suction housing to rotor/stator for open throat pump.


f. To ensure positive feed to pumping elements and prevent product recirculation withinsuction housing, connecting rod auger shall feed through a “void area” extension ofsuction housing. The length of extension (void area) between suction housing hopper andpumping elements must not be less than 25 percent of total connecting rod length. Augermust penetrate entire length of void area and shall over feed pumping element by 15-30percent to provide positive product feed to pumping elements.

2. Gear Joints:

a. Gear joints shall be grease or oil lubricated, crown gear type constructed of machinedalloy steel. Sealed gear type joint, factory lubricated with oil and sealed from pumpedmaterial is acceptable.

b. Gear joint shall be totally enclosed and protected by a wire reinforced elastomeric seal.c. Mechanical components of gear joint assembly shall be designed to operate for 10,000

hours at manufacturers published maximum speeds and pressures.

3. Bushed Pin Joints:

a. Each pump rotor shall be driven through a positively sealed and lubricated pin joint. Thepin joint shall have replaceable bushings, constructed of air-hardened tool steel of 57-60HRc, in the rotor head and coupling rod.

b. Joint shall be grease lubricated with a high temperature (450 F), PTFE filled syntheticgrease, covered with Buna N sleeve and positively sealed with hose clamps constructedof 304 stainless steel.

c. Stainless steel shell shall cover the rotor side universal joint assembly to protect theelastomer sleeve from being damaged by tramp metals or glass.

d. Universal joints shall carry a separate warranty of 10,000 operating hours.

4. Drive shaft:

a. Shaft shall be of one-piece construction through the bearings and shaft seal area.b. Drive shaft shall be plated with 0.01-inch of hard chrome.

G. Stuffing Box:

1. The stuffing box shall be equipped with a split packing gland and split Teflon lantern ring topermit repacking of the pump without removing the bearings or drive shaft components.

2. Fittings shall be provided for grease lubrication of the packing.3. Seal water system for 6-10 gal/hr flush with clean filtered water for each pump. System shall

include Y-strainer, pressure gauge, ball valve, pressure regulator valve, and pressure switch(455-PSL-3011, -3012, and -4513).

H. Pump and motor shall be mounted on a common fabricated steel base.

I. Motors:

1. 460 Volt, 3-phase, 60 Hertz.2. Maximum horsepower and speed as stated in Progressing Cavity Pump Schedule(s).3. Inverter duty rated.4. Provide motors Class F insulation, totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor for each pump to

achieve specified capacity and not exceed Code G starting characteristics.5. Gearbox/Gearmotor shall be coupled to the pump shaft with suitable coupling for torque

required. Close-Coupled / Flange Mounted designs are not acceptable.6. Motor shall conform to requirements of Section 16150.


7. Motors shall be suitable for use with adjustable frequency drives provide under Section 16425. Provide torque, horsepower and speed requirements and additional information required toadjustable frequency drive manufacturer.

8. Size to prevent overheating and damage to motor when operating over entire range ofspecified operating conditions.

9. Provide a thermal sensor (455-TSH-3001, -3002, and -4503) for each pump imbedded inwindings to provide signal for alarm and shutdown at high motor temperature.

2.04 OPTICAL SHAFT REVOLUTION COUNTER

A. Provide optical shaft revolution counter mounted on TWAS Pump Nos. 1 and 2 (455-QT-3001 and-3002).

B. Provide optical shaft revolution counter mounted on TDSD Pump (455-QT-4503).

C. Optical shaft revolution counter shall count shaft revolutions and provide 4-20 mA DC signalrelative to pump speed.

D. Signal shall be used to approximate flow with a conversion utilizing volume approximation of 90gallons per 100 revolutions.

2.05 CONTROLS

A. Control Station (455-CS-3001, -3002, and -4503) provided under Division 13.

B. Variable Speed Drive (455-VFD-3001, -3002, and -4503) provided under Division 16.

C. RUN DRY PROTECTION: The stator shall be fitted with a sensor sleeve and thermistor sensor. Acontroller shall also be provided and shall be installed by the contractor in the motor controlcenter. The controller shall monitor the stator temperature and activate a shutdown and alarmsequence if the stator temperature reaches the adjustable limit on the controller. The controllershall include a manual local and remote reset function. Input to the controller shall be1x115VAC/60 Hz.

2.06 COATING


B. Provide coatings in accordance with Section 09960.


D. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease. Manufacturer is responsiblefor surface preparation, priming, and finish coating of ferrous metal components prior to shipment.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install progressing cavity equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION


A. Provide equipment identification marker complete with equipment name and tag number inaccordance with Section 15190. Coordinate field location with Engineer







3.04 DEMONSTRATION



PROGRESSING CAVITY PUMP SCHEDULE

Name of Pump(s) TWAS Pump Nos. 1 and 2TDSD Pump

Tag Number(s) 455-P-3001, -3002, and -4503Number of Pumps Three plus One SpareFluid Pumped Thickened Waste Activated Sludge

Thickened Digested SludgeMaximum Motor Horsepower 25Maximum Full Load Amps 28Maximum RPM 900

Discharge 8 Suction 16 inches by 50 inchesMotor 460 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzMotor Mounting Belt DriveMinimum Spherical Solids SizeConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speeds

Maximum Speed (rpm) 190Design Operating Point



END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SCREENINGS WASHING AND COMPACTING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11331-1

SECTION 11331SCREENINGS WASHING AND COMPACTING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Screenings Washer/Compactor No. 1 (405-M-0501) shall be a fully automatic screeningswasher and compactor for the reduction of organic content, moisture and volume from rawscreenings material removed from the incoming wastewater flow by mechanical screens.Screenings washer/compactor manufacturer shall be responsible for providing a completeand operable system.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. AGMA: American Gear Manufacturers Association

B. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association

C. AFBMA: American Federation of Bearing Manufacturers Association

D. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

E. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

F. AWS: American Welding Society

G. SSPC: Steel Structures Painting Council, American National Standards Institute

H. UL: Underwriters Laboratory


A. Screenings Washer/Compactor shall be a self-contained, hopper-fed system that washes,compacts and dewaters raw wastewater screenings.

B. During normal loading conditions, the Screenings Washer/Compactor shall be operated in aforward-reverse sequence. Screenings shall be transported from inlet hopper to washing zonewhere wash water is injected through the hollow shaft screw and into the screenings. The screwshall then reverse and bring the screenings out of the washing zone. This adjustable washingprocess shall be repeated a minimum of nine times to ensure thorough cleaning of the screeningsmaterial.

C. During peak loading conditions, the washing press shall automatically switch to operate only in theforward direction to handle the larger amount of screenings.

D. All system components shall be suitable for operation in a Class I, Division I, Group D hazardousenvironment.

1. Performance Requirements2. Continuous throughput capacity: up to 99 cubic feet per hour.3. Batch service throughput capacity: up to 33 cubic feet per hour.4. Washing/compacting shall produce screenings with no visible fecal matter and no free water.5. Washing shall remove organic material from screenings and allow the organic material to be

SCREENINGS WASHING AND COMPACTING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11331-2 Project No. 12026

drained back to the waste stream.6. Wash water usage shall not exceed 19 gallons per minute at a minimum 35 pounds per

square inch or maximum 60 pounds per square inch.7. Washed/compacted screenings shall be capable of passing the EPA Paint Filter Test.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for Screenings Washer/Compact specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Proposed coating system. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.4. Performance data.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for ScreeningsWasher/Compactor.


3. Control sequencing and logic. Provide to Systems Integrator also.



2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of Screenings Washer/Compactor inservice.

3. The amount and specification for any lubricant required.4. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.









A. Deliver Screenings Washers/Compactors to their final locations in protective wrappings,containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage fromconstruction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store Screenings Washer/Compactor in clean, dry location.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. Two nylon replacement brushesb. One (1) solenoid valve

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Vulcan Industries, Inc.- Model EWP 250/1200

B. Huber Technologies, Inc.- Model WAP, Size 4

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Inlet Hopper: 304 stainless steel

B. Screw Housing, Legs and Channel Bracket: 304 stainless steel

C. Housing Drain Screen: 1/2-inch thick, 304 stainless steel wedge wire.

D. Screw/Shaft (Vulcan): Alloy Steel

E. Screw/Shaft (Huber): stainless steel

F. Screw Flights: 3/4-inch thick, steel bar with minimum Brinell hardness of 200.

G. Auger Screw Trailing Edge Brush: Nylon Bristle with stainless steel backing.

H. Drain Pan: 304 stainless steel

I. Discharge Pipe: 11-gauge 304 stainless steel

J. Discharge Support Leg: 304 stainless steel

K. Spray Wash System Components: 304 stainless steel

L. Manual Ball Valves and Threaded Unions: 316 stainless steel

M. Solenoid Valves: 304 stainless steel

N. Fasteners: 304 stainless steel


2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Inlet Hopper

1. Designed to direct screenings material from screenings conveyor into ScreeningsWasher/Compactor inlet housing.

2. Bottom flange for connection to washer/compactor inlet hopper flange.3. Any slope angle associated with inlet chute shall not be less than 67 deg from horizontal.4. Front of inlet chute shall have removable access cover of maximum size allowed by height

and width of inlet chute.5. Top and side of openings shall be rounded and ground smooth.6. Bottom edge shall be folded over toward inside to eliminate potential for sharp edge. Fold

shall be pinched tight to prevent accumulation of screenings underneath.7. Removable access cover shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Provide two handles for removal

and latching system which does not require tools.8. Provide resilient seal on back side of cover to seal cover to inlet chute to prevent leakage.

B. Screw Housing

1. Outlet flange shall incorporate standard ANSI B16.1 10-inch pipe flange bolt pattern forconnection of discharge pipe. The outlet flange shall have a minimum thickness of 7/16-inches. The drive end inlet flange shall have a minimum thickness of 9/16-inches.

2. The dewatering section shall incorporate anti-rotation bars around the completecircumference to contain the screenings material and prevent rotation of the screenings duringthe dewatering process.

3. Counter sunk perforations shall be provided in the dewatering zone to allow removal of thefiltrate during compaction.

4. Wash water inlets shall be provided on top of the washing zone and on the top of thedewatering zone.

5. Removable cover over dewater zone shall be held in place by a latching system and equippedwith a resilient seal to form a watertight seal with the screw housing.

6. Wedge wire section shall be constructed of ½-inch thick profiled bars and have 2 millimeterlinear openings. Round or slotted perforated holes in the drainage area are specificallyexcluded.

7. Entire housing shall be supported by fabricated legs of length required to meet target heightsshown on Drawings.

a. Leg supporting driven end of washing press shall be supported by channel wall bracketprovided by screenings washer/compactor manufacturer.

b. Both support legs shall be same length and provided with flat mounting surfaces/flangesin the event equipment is relocated.

c. Coordinate channel wall bracket to accommodate flat mounting surface of support leg.

C. Hollow Shaft Screw

1. The hollow shaft screw shall have a minimum outside diameter of 8 ½-inches. Shaft shallhave a nominal outside diameter of 2-1/2 inches and perforations located in the washing zoneto allow wash water to be injected into screenings.

2. After fabrication, the screw shall be precision machined to ensure that it is concentric along itslength.

3. Distance between flights shall allow efficient transport of screenings into the washing,compaction, and dewatering zones. Screw flights shall have a minimum thickness of ¾-inch.

4. Brush shall be attached to screw with setscrews in the drainage area to help prevent debrisfrom blinding the drain. To reduce wear on the brush, the design shall be such that the screwshall not be allowed to rest in the press housing.


5. Screw shall be fully supported and cantilevered off of the thrust bearing.

D. Thrust Bearing

1. Independent, axial thrust bearing shall be flange mounted to the drive and flange mounted tothe press body.

2. Thrust bearing shall fully support the screw and handle the load created during compactionand reversal of the screw.

3. The thrust bearing shall have fabricated 304 stainless steel housing and shall use self-aligningdouble tapered roller bearings located between two sets of double lip seals.

4. O-ring seal shall be mounted in a machined groove on the face of the bearing to seal againstthe press body. Screw shall be cantilevered off the thrust bearing to prevent the screw fromresting inside the screw housing. Setscrews located external on the thrust bearing shall allowfield adjustment of the screw should it come out of alignment.

E. Drive Assembly

1. Shaft mounted gear motor assembly.2. Provide right angle gear assembly.3. Gear shall be AGMA Class II service, minimum 94% efficiency.4. Provide close-coupled connection between gear and hollow shaft screw.5. Axial thrust bearing shall be attached to drive unit with flanged connection.6. Bearing box shall be sealed on screw side.7. Minimum output torque rating of 18,500 inch-pounds at 16 revolutions per minute.

F. Drain Pan

1. Mounted to bottom of screw housing along its full length.2. The drain pan shall incorporate a resilient seal along its top edge to form a watertight seal with

the screw housing.3. Slope towards the 3-inch drain at the drive end.4. Equipped with flushing nozzle on dewatering end.5. Held in place by a latching system allowing fast and easy removal.

G. Discharge Pipe

1. Designed to transport washed, compacted screenings to container as shown on the Drawings.2. Mounted to washer/compactor pipe flange.3. Construct pipe with configuration and discharge height shown on Drawings.4. Provide adjustable height support leg where top of leg shall be fastened to discharge pipe with

encompassing pipe clamp to allow leg placement to vary along inclined pipe. Bottom of legshall be two parts with vertical slots and bolts to allow for at least 8-inches of verticaladjustment. Provide bottom leveling plate.

5. Support leg shall be designed to carry cantilevered portion of discharge pipe to provideclearance between support leg and centerline of discharge as shown on Drawings.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Sharp corners of all cut and sheared edges shall be ground smooth.


2.05 FASTENERS

A. Provide all necessary fastening hardware including expansion anchors and anchor bolts inaccordance with Section 05500.

2.06 MOTOR

A. Screw Drive

1. 5 hp, 1800-rpm, 480 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz, reversing2. Suitable for operation in Class I, Division 1, Group D hazardous environment.3. Motor shall be in accordance with Section 16150.

B. Motor shall be supplied with temperature sensors suitable for Explosion Proof areas ratedClass I, Division 1, Group C and D Hazardous Locations. Furnish motor protection relay tointerface to the PTC sensors. Motor protection relays shall provide un-powered contact tointerlock operation in the event of high motor temperature. Configure and adjust motorprotection relays after installation for proper operation as part of start-up services.

C. Provide current sensing relay for installation in the MCC by Contractor. Current sensing relayshall provide un-powered contact for its interlock operation in event of high motor current.Configure and adjust current sensing relay after installation for proper operation as part ofstart-up services.

2.07 WASHWATER SYSTEM

A. Provide Washwater Valves No 1, 2, 3 and 4 for Screenings Washer/Compactor No. 1.

B. Water shall be controlled by 120 volt, single-phase, normally closed solenoid valves.

1. Suitable for operation in Class 1, Division 1, Group D hazardous environment.

C. On same stanchion in which associated Control Station is mounted for ScreeningsWasher/Compactor, mount vendor supplied wash water header.

D. Provide common washwater header to supply washwater valves with 1-inch washwaterconnection on one end and pressure gauge on other.

1. Provide isolation ball valves between header and solenoid valves.2. Provide threaded unions between isolation ball valve and solenoid valve for ease of

removal.3. Provide sufficient length of clear flexible nylon reinforced pressure tubing to extend from

each washwater valve to associated washwater connection on washing press.4. Provide stainless steel compression clamps or bands to fasten tubing to washwater

components5. Wash water supply pressure from building is 120 pounds per square inch. Provide

pressure regulator and water hammer arrester as required.


2.08 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Screenings washer/compactor will be controlled through a PLC provided under another sectionof the Project Manual. Washer/compactor manufacturer shall provide operating descriptionsand ladder logic for integration into the plant control system.

B. Provide detailed operating description for all equipment supplied within this Section. Operatingdescription shall reference names, device tags, and instrumentation tags as shown on theapplicable P&IDs and shall be consistent with the functional description provided in Section13402, Process Control System.

C. The intent is to provide sufficient detail to allow programming of the controlling PLC so thatwashers operate as recommended by the manufacturer and as prescribed in Section 13402,Process Control System. Controlling PLCs and related programming are not included in thisSection.

D. Describe the following:

1. Usage of all control signals monitored and controlled by controlling PLC.2. Detailed sequence of operation for all components included in this Section.3. Recommended initial control and alarm set points.4. Scaling and set point information for all control signals associated with equipment included

in this Section.

E. Control Stations

1. Provide a NEMA 7 local control station for each washer/compactor.2. The control station and valve manifold shall be stanchion mounted with 304 stainless steel.3. Each control station shall consist of the following:

a. Hand-Off-Auto switchb. Forward-Off-Reverse switchc. Batch initiate push-buttond. Emergency stop push-button.

4. The local controls and solenoid valves shall be factory wired to a terminal strip locatedinside the local control station.

5. The washwater valve manifold shall include:

a. Four (4) brass body, explosion-proof, solenoid valvesb. Four (4) manual 316 stainless steel ball valvesc. Pressure gauges (405-PI-0502, 405-PI-0503)

6. The solenoid valves shall be activated by the PLC in the main control panel to providewash water intermittently during cleaning and flushing cycles.

2.09 COATINGS





D. All stainless steel components and subassemblies shall be acid passivated after welding.

E. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease.


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. The Screenings Washer/Compactor shall be factory assembled and factory run tested prior toshipment. Control panels shall be factor tested prior to shipment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install Screenings Washer/Compactor in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION





a. 2 man-day for Installation Services.b. 1 man-day for Instructional Services.c. 1 man-day for Post Startup Servicesd. 1 man-day for on-site Programming Start-up Assistance



END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. AUTOMATED BRUSH WEIR, BAFFLE, ANDLAUNDER CLEANING DEVICE

Project No. 12026 11337-1

SECTION 11337AUTOMATED BRUSH WEIR, BAFFLE, AND LAUNDER CLEANING DEVICE

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Materials, equipment, and components included but not limited to:

a. Attachment Assembly.b. Mainframe.c. Brush Arms.d. Brushes.e. Brush Bridge.


A. General Design Requirements:

1. The automated brush system shall be designed:

a. For the removal of algae and debris in the 115-foot diameter Final Settling Tank Nos. 1, 2,and 3 (Structures 451, 452, and 453).

b. Brushes shall make contact with the following surfaces:

1) Inner Side and Outer Side of Baffle.2) Inner Side and Outer Side of Weir.3) Top Spillway Surface.4) Inner Launder Wall.5) Launder Bottom.6) Outer Launder Wall.

c. To work from the power of the final settling tank drive motor without noticeable torqueincreases.

d. To stall without damaging surfaces.e. With an engaged position for cleaning and a disengaged position allowing the system to

ride idle around the tank.

2. Installation of brush cleaning systems shall be coordinated between manufacturer of finalsettling mechanisms and brush cleaning systems manufacturer.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for brush cleaning system specified.

AUTOMATED BRUSH WEIR, BAFFLE, ANDLAUNDER CLEANING DEVICE

Donohue & Associates, Inc.

11337-2 Project No. 12026

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data brush cleaningsystem.




2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of brush cleaning system in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.




A. Deliver brush cleaning systems to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers, andother protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from constructionoperations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store brush cleaning system in clean, dry location.

1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One complete set of brushes for each automated brush system.


number of the equipment to which they belong

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ford Hall.

2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Special Requirements:

1. Avoid the following problem areas:

a. Walkway Support.b. Water/Wastewater Piping.c. Baffle Brackets; use L-shaped bracket, no exceptions.


Project No. 12026 11337-3

d. Bolt Protrusions; bolts shall not protrude more than ¼-inch past the nut.e. Skimmer Arm; shall be able to support an additional 100 lbs. and shall be of constant

elevation.f. Baffle and Weir shall be at least 8-inches apart. If launder has tangential weir (i.e.

multisided launder) then the distance between weir and baffle ideally should be 8” atthe closest and 12” at the farthest.

g. Minimum 18-inches clearance between the top of baffle and the lowest point of thewalkway. If weir/baffle or launder has radial variance greater than 4-inches (i.e. multi-sided inboard launder) this clearance must be a minimum of 24-inches.

h. Concrete surfaces shall be as smooth as possible to allow maximum brush life.

B. Attachment Assembly:

1. Shall provide a means of attaching the automated brush system to the skimmer arm and/orrake truss so as not to interfere with any other operations of the final settling tank mechanism.

2. Shall be constructed of 304 Stainless Steel.

C. Mainframe:

1. Shall be constructed of 304 Stainless Steel.2. Designed to slip easily into the Attachment Assembly and be tightened in position with the use

of set screws.3. Designed so that Brush Arms can be positioned at any point on the Mainframe.

D. Brush Arms:

1. Shall be constructed of 316 Stainless Steel.2. Installation of the brush arms to allow for cleaning of surfaces, mentioned in this Section, and

to allow for the following:

a. Flexibility to clean effluent surfaces within a 4-inch radial variance.b. To allow Brush Holder to be adjusted telescopically so that a maximum number of Brush

Arm adjustments are possible.c. To be located opposite the Mainframe end, a Brush Holder attachment allowing for the

insertion of a brush.d. A component that allows for each brush arm to be “locked out” or disengaged.e. To have a means of connecting the arm to the Mainframe so as to provide sufficient force

to remove algae and debris.

E. Brush Holder:

1. Shall be constructed of 316 Stainless Steel.2. A Brush Holder shall be aligned with each of the following surfaces:

a. Both sides of the baffle.b. Both sides of the weir.c. Each of the effluent launder surfaces.

3. Each brush shall:

a. Consist of a “bolted clamp design” to allow for the easy insertion and removal ofBrushes.

b. Include a factory-supplied brush suitable for prolonged exposure to wastewaterenvironment.

c. Contain a Shear Safety Component.

AUTOMATED BRUSH WEIR, BAFFLE, ANDLAUNDER CLEANING DEVICE


11337-4 Project No. 12026

F. Shear Safety Component:

1. Each Brush holder shall contain a Shear Safety Component having a frangible point designedto break when subjected to a force exceeding an optimum predetermined stress value.

2. The stress value on each Shear Safety Component shall be low enough to release the BrushHolder to forgo any damage to Brush Cleaning unit and/or Skimmer equipment but be highenough to allow standard operation of Brush cleaning system.

G. Brushes:

1. Shall easily slip into the Brush Holder and provide the cleaning means necessary to removealgae and debris from their respective surfaces.

2. Construction shall be as follows:

a. Brush backing shall be of durable plastic able to withstand continuous exposure tosunlight, seasonal temperature changes, and corrosive elements found in wastewater.

b. Brush bristles shall be polypropylene with adequate trim length, density, and stiffness forextended continuous use.

c. Brushes shall be cut and shaped appropriately so as to clean their respective surfaceswithout binding.

3. Replacement Brushes shall be stocked by the manufacturer to the exact dimensions and willbe available for purchase. Average Brush life is approximately one (1) year.

H. Brush Bridge:

1. Provides a "Bridge" over the effluent hole, on which to travel, to the automated brush systemLaunder Brush Assembly.

2. Shall be constructed of 304 Stainless Steel.

I. Spring Assemblies:

1. Each Brush Arm requires spring tension to bias the Brush Arm with the Brush Holder andBrushes into tight engagement with the appropriate effluent surface to be cleaned. The SpringAssemblies shall include the following:

a. A minimum of one Spring Assembly of 316 stainless steel for each Brush Arm.b. Spring Assemblies shall consist of two stainless steel springs and one stainless steel

guide.c. Each spring shall be composed of 316 stainless steel wire with a minimum diameter of

0.95 inch and a minimum of 260 active coils per spring length.d. Spring coils shall have a mean diameter of 0.655 inches. A minimum inner coil

diameter of 0.56 inch and an outer diameter of 0.75 inch are required of each stainlesssteel spring.

e. Springs shall have a minimum initial spring tension of 6.68 pounds-force and a maximumof 10.02 pounds-force with a minimum load tolerance of 18.44 pounds-force.

J. Lock In/Lock Out Design:

1. Each Automated Brush System shall be designed with an engaged or locked in position forcleaning and a disengaged or locked out position for riding idle around the tank.

2. Each Brush Arm will have a Lock Out Hook permanently mounted to the Brush Arm thatcorresponds to a Lock Out Ring, which allows disengagement of the individual Brushes. TheLock Out Ring is mounted to a Lock Out Boss that is attached parallel to the Mainframe.


Project No. 12026 11337-5

3. Each Automated Brush System shall be designed so that the entire Brush system can bedisengaged or individual Brush Arms can be disengaged allowing for customized cleaning ofweir and effluent surfaces.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install brush cleaning systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION








END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. FINAL SETTLING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11338-1

SECTION 11338FINAL SETTLING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes materials, equipment, and components for Final Settling Tank Nos. 1, 2, and 3included but not limited to:

1. Clarifier Drive Units (451-M-1801, 452-M-1802, and 453-M-1803).2. Walkway and Platform.3. Influent and Sludge Removal Equipment.

a. Stationary Center Influent Column.b. Energy Dissipating Inlet.c. Feedwell.d. Drive Cage.e. Sludge Suction Header and Manifold.

4. Scum Removal:

a. Scum Skimmer Assembly.b. Scum Beach / Trough.c. Scum Flushing Valve provided by Contractor.d. Anti-Rotation Scum Baffle.

5. Effluent Removal:

a. Weir.

B. Equipment specified herein shall be the end products of a single manufacturer in order to achievestandardization for operation, maintenance, spare parts, and service.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction

B. AGMA: American Gear Manufacturers Association


D. AWS: American Welding Society

E. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act


A. Provide center feed-peripheral effluent type hydraulic removal collector in an existing concrete finalsettling tanks with the following approximate geometry.

1. Tank diameter to be 115 feet.2. Tank side water depth to be 15 feet.3. Tank freeboard to be 2.5 feet.4. Floor slope to be one inch per foot.

FINAL SETTLING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11338-2 Project No. 12026

B. Design Criteria

1. Total flow to Final Settling Tanks:

Parameter Minimum Average Maximum PeakEffluent Flow (MGD) 2.5 6.82 13.65 30Return Flow (MGD) 4.9 4.9 10.2 10.2Mixed Liquor Flow (MGD) 6.5 11.7 23.85 40.2

2. Hydraulics shall be designed to handle (per basin):

Parameter Minimum Average Maximum PeakEffluent Flow (MGD) 0.83 2.27 4.55 10Return Flow (MGD) 1.63 1.63 3.4 3.4Mixed Liquor Flow (MGD) 2.17 3.9 7.95 13.4

3. Maximum headloss for header: 1.75 feet.4. Minimum flow velocity in header: 1.25 feet per second5. Minimum header orifice diameter 1.75 inch6. Manifold diameter: 6-foot 4-inches7. Center Pier diameter: 36 inch8. Influent Well size: 24-foot 6 inch diameter by 6-foot depth9. Effluent Trough Dimensions: 2-foot 9-inches wide by 2-foot 9-inches deep10. Drive:

a. Internal gear pitch diameter: 36 inches minimumb. Ball race diameter 42 inches minimumc. Motor Horsepower 0.75 Horsepower, 460 Volt, 3-Phase, 60 Hertzd. AGMA rated torque 35,000 foot-pounds. with 1.25 safety factore. Speed 0.03 revolutions per minute

11. Installation of brush cleaning systems shall be coordinated between manufacturer of finalsettling mechanisms and brush cleaning systems manufacturer.

12. Installation of current density baffles shall be coordinated between manufacturer of finalsettling mechanisms and current density baffles manufacturer.

13. Mechanism for Final Settling Tank No. 1 shall rotate counter-clockwise.14. Mechanism for Final Settling Tank Nos. 2 and 3 shall rotate clockwise.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for final settling equipment specified.2. Written certification that the proposed drive meets AGMA standards. Drive mechanism

calculations prepared by a registered professional engineer shall be submitted for approvalalong with published torque value of the proposed drive.

3. Provide the following AGMA design parameters per AGMA 2001:


a. Pitch diameter of pinion and spur gear (inches).b. Face width of narrowest of two matting gears (inches).c. Pitch line velocity of pinion (feet per minute).d. Allowable bending stress (Sat) of pinion and spur gear material (pounds per square inch).e. Allowable contact stress (Sac) of pinion and spur gear material (pounds per square inch).f. Geometry factor (J) for bending.g. Geometry factor (I) for pitting resistance.h. Load distribution factors Cm and Km.i. Dynamic factors Cv and Kv.j. Life factors Cl and Kl at 420,000 cycles of the main gear.k. Number of teeth.l. Reliability factors, Cr and Kr equal to or greater than 1.0.

4. Complete test procedure for torque testing the collector mechanism for the AGMA torquespecified.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for final settlingequipment.


3. Complete assembly drawing of the collector components giving:

a. Type of material used for each component.b. Dimension, thickness and weights of each component.c. Header details giving orifice diameter, distance from center and cross section of header at

each orifice.d. Manifold seal detail.

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance offinal settling equipment with referenced standards.

2. Certified reports of field tests and observations.3. Field Dye Performance Test:

a. Performance data verifying proposed header design proportionately removes sludge fromentire tank bottom.

b. Test site and testing laboratory shall be identified along with test methods and apparatusused.

c. Data shall be from an existing multiple orifice system incorporating tapered header widthoperating under the following conditions:

1) Minimum 70-foot diameter basin with minimum 10-foot side water depth.2) Flow and pressure head within header shall be recorded at each orifice while header

rotates.3) Return sludge concentrations not less than 5,000 milligrams per liter with not less

than 1 million gallons per day with maximum withdrawal rate at least 3 timesminimum.

4) Maximum header velocity of 3.0 to 4.5 feet per second.5) Maximum header headloss at maximum flow not less than 1.0 foot.6) Actual pick-up of sludge shall be in close agreement with the ideal pick-up curve for

uniform removal based on floor area swept.7) Calculations will not be an adequate substitute for dye verification data.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of final settling equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.




B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain final settling equipment components from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver final settling equipment and system components to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.

B. Store final settling equipment in clean, dry location.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


2. Provide spare parts necessary to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years,including but not limited to the parts listed below.

a. Ten shear pins.b. One set of manifold seals.c. One set of column seal and wear blocks.d. One set of squeegees.e. One set of header gaskets.f. One roll of rubber stripping (25-foot roll).g. One shaft seal.h. One retaining ring.i. One O-ring seal.j. One dust shield.k. One condensate and oil drain valve.




PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Siemens Water Technologies.

B. Walker Process

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Sludge Collector Mechanism

1. Provide a center pier supported, siphon feed design with peripheral overflow.2. Provide a center drive mechanism that supports and rotates a structural steel cage to which is

attached a Unitube sludge collection header and manifold.3. The header shall be parallel to the tank floor and have a series of inlet orifices such that the

entire tank bottom is swept clean in a single revolution.4. The header shall be designed to uniformly remove sludge in proportion to the area swept with

the removal of a larger volume of sludge at greater distances from the tank center.5. Sludge shall be transported through the header to the center manifold, with removal being

accomplished by hydrostatic pressure.6. Fabricated steel structures shall be shipped in the largest sub-assemblies permitted by carrier

regulations, properly matchmarked and identified for ease of field erection.

B. Structural Members

1. Structural steel to conform to ASTM A36.2. Structural steel components shall have minimum thickness of ¼-inch.3. All welding to conform to American Welding Society Standard AWS D1.1. Structural support

members shall be shop welded for bolted field assembly. Field welding shall be limited tobridge splices and tack welding of skimmer connections after final positioning.

4. Design components so that stresses developed do not exceed allowable stresses, as definedby current AISC standards when designed for the AGMA rated torque.

5. Panel lengths and member sizes shall be selected such that slenderness ratios do not exceed200 for compression and 240 for tension. For strength, the controlling member force shall beused to determine member size.

6. Maximum deflection in a span under combined live and dead loads shall not exceed L/360.

C. Drive Mechanism:

1. Manufacturers:

a. DBS Manufacturing, Model D42-BE.

2. The drive mechanism shall consist of an electric motor, a primary reduction unit, anintermediate reduction unit, and an enclosed final reduction unit consisting of pinion and anintegral gear/bearing. All components are directly coupled, eliminating chains and V-belts. Thedrive unit output torque shall be limited by a torque overload protection device.

3. The primary reduction unit shall be mounted on top of the intermediate gear reducer withdirect shaft coupling.

a. The primary reduction unit shall use helical gearing and be permanently grease


lubricated.b. The primary reduction unit shall transmit torque to the input shaft of the intermediate gear

reducer through a shear pin.c. The L10 life of the primary gearbox bearings shall be in excess of 100,000 hours at

continuous torque rating of the drive unit.

4. The intermediate gear reduction unit shall be mounted on top of the final reduction unit andproperly registered to maintain accurate centers for the final gearing. It shall have sufficientbearing capacity to fully support the pinion gear without a lower support bearing. The L10 life ofthe intermediate reduction unit bearings shall be in excess of 100,000 hours at continuoustorque rating of the drive unit.

5. Final reduction unit:

a. The final reduction unit housing shall be manufactured from A36 steel plate. All weldsshall conform to applicable specifications of the ASME. After welding, all mounting andmating surfaces shall be machined to insure proper fit and alignment of the drive pinionand mating gear.

b. The base plate on which the gear and bearing is mounted shall be flat within 0.005 inch.The steel plate to which the intermediate pinion drive gearbox is mounted shall be aminimum of 1.5 inch thick.

c. The final reduction unit gear shall be machined to AGMA grade 6 or higher. Gear teethshall have a core hardness of 250 to 300 BHN, and be induction hardened to 55 RC.

d. The final reduction unit pinion shall be made of heat-treated alloy steel and shall bemounted on the output shaft of the intermediate reduction gearbox. The pinion teeth shallbe induction hardened to 55 to 60 Rc.

e. The bearing shall have a seal to prevent contamination of the bearing raceway. Thebearing shall have a L10 life in excess of 100 years.

6. Electric motor: The drive motor shall be Mill and Chemical duty, TEFC, 1.15 Service Factor,Class F insulation. Provide motor in accordance with Section 16150.

7. Torque indication and overload protection:

a. The torque overload protection device shall be attached to the primary reduction unit, andactivated by the torque reaction of the primary reduction unit.

b. The torque load of the drive unit shall be indicated on a stainless steel 6 inch diametertorque gauge in ft-lbs (451-WI-1801, 452-WI-1802, 453-WI-1803).

c. The overload protection device shall have two switches per drive (451-WSH-1801A, -1801B, 452-WSH-1802A, -1802B, 453-WSH-1803A, and -1803B), which mayindependently energize an alarm circuit and motor cutoff circuit when the load of themechanism reaches the customer specified torque settings.

d. The switches shall be enclosed in a NEMA 4X housing.e. In addition to alarm and cutoff, the drive unit is also protected by a shear pin.

8. Corrosion prevention:

a. All fabricated steel parts will be abrasive blast cleaned to SSPC 10, near white finish.b. All external surfaces of fabricated parts shall be coated with one layer of Tnemec

Omnithane Series 1 modified aromatic polyurethane primer, 2.5 to 3.5 mils dry filmthickness and one layer of Tnemec Endura-Shield Series 73 semi-gloss aliphatic acrylicpolyurethane, 2 to 5 mils dry film thickness.

c. The standard color is gray.

9. Design and manufacturing standards: All calculations of gear and bearing life shall be made inaccordance with the latest AGMA and AFBMA standards. Welding fabrication and design arein accordance with the latest AWS standards. Power train calculations of all components areavailable upon request in accordance with specification details listed above.


10. All lubrication shall be of the totally enclosed oil bath and grease design.

D. Flocculating Baffles (Siemens):

1. Provide inlet baffles to promote effective mixing and tapered flocculation.2. Flow shall impinge three overlapping vertical target baffles in secession with a series of four

increasing port areas.3. Design to provide a “Gt” (t in seconds) value in the well not exceeding 6,000 with a velocity

gradient “G” within the well not exceeding 65 feet per second per foot at a minimum watertemperature of 10 degrees Celsius at maximum influent flow.

4. Provide horizontal shelf baffles to prevent downward movement in flocculation zone.5. Baffles shall bolt to center cage and well support beams.6. The baffles shall be fabricated from minimum 3/16-inch thick steel plate.7. Hydraulic calculations shall be provided showing dimensional characteristics, port area,

velocity, headloss, and mixing intensity.

E. Energy Dissipating Inlet Well (Walker):

1. Provide energy dissipating inlet well designed to provide efficient adjustable hydraulic controland distribution of flow entering the tank.

2. Inlet shall consist of an internal distribution box and an outer well.3. Centrally located distribution box shall be fabricated from minimum ¼-inch carbon steel plate,

supported by and rotate with drive cage.4. Distribution box shall have multiple ports with adjustable tangentially opposing diffusion gates to

provide balanced inlet diffusion. Provide gates at 4-foot spacing between gates.5. Outer Well Size: 20-foot – 6 Inches diameter by 6-feet deep.6. Energy Dissipating Well Size: 10-foot diameter by 3-feet deep.7. Fabricate from 3/16-inch steel plate.8. Outer well shall be supported either from drive cage or from access bridge.

F. Influent Feedwell

1. The influent well fabricated from 3/16-inch steel plate sections supported from the drive cageor bridge extensions.

2. Incorporate steel stiffeners at the top and bottom to maintain shape and rigidity.3. Feedwell shall be of adequate size to diffuse the flow into the tank at a uniform flow through

velocity.4. Feedwell shall be designed to be submerged 2-1/2-inches at peak flow.

G. Center Pier

1. A cylindrical ¼-inch thick steel plate center pier shall support the drive, collector mechanismand access bridge.

2. Top of pier to have a drive mounting plate set plumb with the centerline.3. Drive to be positioned, leveled and grouted in place on top of pier with a non-shrink grout.4. Manufacturer to provide minimum eight 1-inch diameter anchor bolts and steel template/grout

shield to accurately locate anchors.5. Center pier shall serve as the influent pipe.6. Center pier shall have a minimum of four overflow areas at its upper end to diffuse flow into

the influent well. The maximum velocity through the center pier ports shall not exceed 1.75feet/second.

H. Sludge Collection Header

1. Provide a fully tapered, rectangular-shaped Unitube header varying in cross section from amaximum near the tank center to a minimum at the outer wall.


2. Fabricate header from ¼-inch thick steel plate and hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.Provide steel plate counterweights not exceeding 50 pounds each as necessary for properequipment balance. Field welding of galvanized header or supports will not be allowed.

3. Longitudinal cross sectional axis to be mounted at an angle of 45 degrees to tank bottom totrap sludge.

4. Provide a 2-inch fluidizing vane as an integral part of header.5. Attach flexible squeegee to fluidizing vane provided with 1-inch vertical adjustment.6. Manufacturer to size and space header inlet orifices at regular intervals not exceeding 30-

inches.7. Orifice design to be proportionate to the volume of sludge withdrawn from the entire tank floor

at all flows.8. Provide header flange with silicone seal for bolted connection to center manifold. Provide

horizontal header support from cage through steel tie-bars with adjustable galvanized clevisassembly and locknuts.

9. Sludge withdrawal by means of individual riser pipes or stepped header construction will notbe acceptable.

I. Center Cage, Truss Arm and Manifold

1. Center cage to be of a continuous all-welded construction made up of structural steelmembers having a minimum thickness of ¼-inch.

2. Provide a truss arm opposite the Unitube header for skimmer support.3. Truss arms to be constructed of ¼-inch minimum thickness members pinned at the base and

connected to the center cage through adjustable galvanized clevis assemblies with locknutsrequiring no tie-bar supports.

4. Provide a cylindrical manifold with two seals for bolted connection to the sludge collectionheader and bottom of cage. A bottom seal plate shall be furnished by the equipmentmanufacturer securely anchored to the floor and grouted in place after final adjustment.

J. Access Bridge

1. Provide a bridge of pony truss construction extending from the tank wall to the center platform.2. Provide a bridge extension to provide access to the far side of the drive mechanism.3. Bridge to be designed for the dead load and a live load of 50 pounds per square foot, with a

deflection not exceeding 1/360 of the span.4. Provide a 3-foot wide walkway of 1-1/4-inch by 3/16-inch aluminum grating extending over the

entire bridge length.5. Provide a double handrail consisting of 1-1/2-inch diameter, Schedule 40 mechanical

aluminum pipe for rails and posts along both sides of the bridge and bridge extension.6. Provide a 4-inch high aluminum toe plate along both sides of bridge and bridge extension.7. Provide a minimum 10-foot by 8-foot rectangular platform to provide working clearance

around the drive.

K. Surface Skimmer

1. Provide one "full radius" skimmer consisting of scum blade, hinged wiper assembly and scumtrough.

2. Support the scum blade along its length with structural "A" frames bolted to the truss arm at12-foot maximum spacing.

3. Mount the hinged wiper assembly on the outer end of the scum blade to form a pocket fortrapping scum.

4. The wiper assembly shall maintain continual contact and proper alignment between scumblade, outer scum baffle, and scum trough.

5. The wiper blade shall have a wearing strip on its outer end which contacts the scum baffle andneoprene strip on its inner and lower edges which contact the scum trough.

6. All springs, pivot points and threaded fasteners shall be constructed of 18-8 stainless steel.


7. The scum trough and beach shall be fabricated of ¼-inch thick steel plate, supported from thetank wall.

8. Scum trough shall be 6-feet wide with an overall length of 4-feet-9-inches along the scumbaffle consisting of beach plate, inner radius baffle, hopper and 6-inch discharge pipe.

9. Beach plate to slope at a nominal incline of 1-3/4-inch per foot to a point 5-inches below themaximum water elevation.

10. The submerged trough shall continue on a horizontal run for an additional 4-feet along thescum baffle. An inner radius baffle extending 9-inches below and 3-inches above maximumwater level shall run from the trough to the end of the submerged shelf.

L. Scum Flushing Valve (Provided by Contractor):

1. Provide Type 316 stainless steel, quarter turn full-port ball valve.2. Support valve from scum beach to allow water from final settling tank to enter scum beach

when valve is opened. Provide miscellaneous piping and fittings as necessary.3. Mount valve and operator at elevation below skimmer arm to avoid interference with skimmer.4. Provide aluminum tee wrench with 18-inch handle, and sufficient length to extend 6-inches

above top rail of bridge handrail to valve operator. Provide end of wrench with means tooperate valve lever below water surface. Modify valve actuator as required to mate with end oftee wrench.

5. Provide aluminum or stainless steel handrail mounted brackets for tee wrench storage.

M. Anti-rotation Scum Baffle

1. Stationary anti-rotational scum baffle shall be designed to trap scum as the rotating skimmerblade approaches. The scum baffle shall direct the trapped scum outward toward the scumtrough.

2. The anti-rotational scum baffle shall consist of a structural steel support angle hung from asupport beam, 3/8-inch thick by 12-inches wide neoprene baffle and ¼-inch thick steel backingbar.

N. Effluent Launder, Weirs, and Scum Baffles:

1. Fabricate weirs from 3/16-inch thick by 9-inch fiberglass reinforced plastic.2. Weir shall have 90 degree, 3-inch deep "V" notches spaced 6-inches on center.3. Fabricate scum baffle from ¼-inch thick by 12-inch fiberglass reinforced plastic.4. Fabricate launder from ¼-inch fiberglass reinforced plastic.5. Fabricate supports and brackets from stainless steel.6. All welds shall be continuous fillet welds each side or continuous full penetration groove

welds.7. All bolted connections shall be made with ½-inch diameter 316 stainless steel bolts, nuts, and

1 ½-inch washers unless otherwise noted.8. Conform to details shown on Drawings.

2.03 FASTENERS


B. All bolts and fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel.

C. Manufacturer shall provide steel template and grout shield to accurately locate anchors and allowfor grouting beneath the pier and manifold seal plate after plumbing.

2.04 CONTROLS


A. Control Station (451-CS-1801, 452-CS-1802, and 453-CS-1803) provided under Division 13.

2.05 MATERIALS AND COATINGS

A. All components shall be fabricated from A36 carbon steel.

B. All components shall be blast cleaned and prime painted in the shop.

C. Manufacturer shall be responsible for surface preparation, priming, and finish coating of ferrousmetal components prior to shipment.

D. Coatings shall comply with Section 09960.E. Stainless steel, bronze, and nonmetallic surfaces shall not be coated.

F. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install final settling equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. The Contractor shall install the clarifier as shown on the Drawings.

C. The Contractor shall plumb, adjust for true plane of rotation, grout beneath center pier, manifoldseal plate and drive unit and grout the floor in accordance with the manufacturer'srecommendations.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION





a. 3 man-days for Installation Services.b. 2 man-days for Instructional Services.c. 1 man-day for Post Startup Services



3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Torque Test:


1. Test by anchoring both sludge collector arms of one collector.2. Start collector drive to demonstrate the structure's ability to withstand loads resulting from at

least 120 percent of clarifier drive design torque.3. Demonstrate proper operation of high torque alarm and cut-off.4. Repeat test to verify results.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. CURRENT DENSITY BAFFLESProject No. 12026 11339-1

SECTION 11339CURRENT DENSITY BAFFLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Final settling tank density current baffles designed to intercept density currents formed nearthe final settling tank periphery and diverting the associated flow back into the mainclarification volume on existing 115-foot diameter Final Settling Tank Nos. 1, 2, and 3(Structure Nos. 451, 452, and 453).

1.02 REFERENCES




1. Designed to intercept density currents formed near final settling tank periphery and divertassociated flow back into main clarification volume.

2. A method of interconnecting baffle panels shall be provided such that the entire assemblyforms a rigid structure capable of supporting its own weight plus snow and wind loads in theevent the tank is out of service.

3. Baffles shall be designed to withstand a buoyant force load equal to the weight of the waterdisplaced from the volume beneath the baffle.

4. Panels shall be curved to follow the curvature of the final settling tank.5. Panels shall be designed such that adjacent panels fit together without overlapping or

cutting.6. Installation of current density baffles shall be coordinated between manufacturer of final

settling mechanisms and current density baffles manufacturer.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for current density baffles specified.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for current densitybaffles.

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofcurrent density baffles with referenced standards.

CURRENT DENSITY BAFFLES Donohue & Associates, Inc.11339-2 Project No. 12026





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of current density baffles in service.





A. Deliver current density baffles system components to their final locations in protective wrappings,containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage fromconstruction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store current density baffles in clean, dry location.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


2. Provide spare parts necessary to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. NEFCO, Inc.

B. Warminster Fiberglass Co.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Materials used shall be suitable for use in long-term submergence in wastewater.

B. Each baffle panel shall be molded of fiberglass reinforced plastic with the following minimumcharacteristics:

1. Tensile strength (ASTM D 638): Minimum 14,000 pounds per square inch (psi).2. Flexural strength (ASTM D 790): Minimum 24,000 psi.3. Flexural Modulus (ASTM D 790): Minimum 1,400,000 psi.4. Barcol hardness (resin-rich surface) (ASTM D2583): 60 minimum, average.5. Water absorption (ASTM D 570): 0.2 percent at 24 hours.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. CURRENT DENSITY BAFFLESProject No. 12026 11339-3

6. Heat distortion point (ASTM D 648): 175 degrees Fahrenheit.7. Coefficient of thermal expansion, average (ASTM D 696): 0.0000105 inch per inch per

degree Fahrenheit.

C. Nominal thickness of baffle shall be ¼-inch.

D. Brackets shall be constructed of same composition as baffle segments.

E. Fasteners: Stainless steel, Type 316

2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Density current baffle system shall consist of a series of baffle panels that are attached to thefinal settling tank effluent launder as shown on the Drawings to form an inclined shelf-likesurface around the entire inner periphery of the tank.

B. Panels shall be a maximum of 8-feet in length. Inclination angle of baffle shall be 30 degreesas measured from horizontal and horizontal projection of baffle shall be defined by thefollowing equation:

Horizontal Projection (inches) = 24 inches + 0.4 inches per foot x (tank diameter, feet – 30inches)

C. Provision shall be made to attach the panels to the final settling tank launder wall and supportthem at the proper angle using a triangular panel bracket. For inboard launders, the baffleshall be designed to fasten to the trough face at the lower inboard corner of the trough wherethe bracket will extend beneath the trough and fasten to the underside of the trough.

D. Panel and bracket shall be molded as an integral unit with adequate stiffeners. Only onebracket is required per panel.

E. A specially formed “free-end” bracket shall be provided to support the free end of the last panelwhere the run of panels is interrupted by an obstruction.

F. Panels may be cut as required to fit around obstructions.

G. The angled working surface of each baffle shall be sufficient in pitch and width to divert the flowand to create a self-cleaning action of the baffle itself.

H. Provision shall be made to vent gases that may form beneath the baffle through the installationof vents located in the panel.

I. The upper surface of the baffle shall be reinforced with one layer of veil and a minimum of 2-ozof chopped strand roving. Mounting bracket and stiffening flange shall have one layer of 24-ozof woven roving. No other glass product is permitted between these layers.

J. Upper surface of panel shall be smooth and no glass fibers shall be exposed. Product shall befree from voids, dry spots, cracks, or crazes.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Resin coat all cut edges and drilled holes for baffle segments and fiberglass mountingbrackets.

2.05 FASTENERS

CURRENT DENSITY BAFFLES Donohue & Associates, Inc.11339-4 Project No. 12026


2.06 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation and application of first coat (prime coat) ofequipment prior to shipment.

B. Contractor shall provide finish coats at Project Site. Finish coat products shall be manufactured bysame manufacturer of first coat (prime coat).




3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install current density baffles in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.







END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMSProject No. 12026 11345-1

SECTION 11345CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. SHC Metering Pump Nos. 1 and 2 (455-P-1901 and -1902).2. Filamentous Metering Pump (455-P-1903).3. Variable Speed Drives.4. Controls Related Equipment.5. Polyethylene Tubing.6. Dilution Water Control System.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. NPT: National Pipe Thread

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association



1. Positive displacement, peristaltic type tubing pump with brushless variable speed motor, non-spring loaded roller assembly located in pumphead, integral tube failure detection system, andflexible tubing with attached connection fittings.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. Pumping equipment shall comply with Chemical Feed System Schedule.2. Equipment shall be suitable for continuous operation at maximum fluid temperature of 104

degrees F at all operating speeds specified and without external cooling fluid.3. Adequately size motor horsepower so each pump is non-overloading throughout entire pump

performance curve.4. Design motor for up to 15 evenly spaced starts per hour.5. Equipment shall be free from shock, vibration, cavitation, overheating, and noise while

operating at specified conditions.6. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicated and


C. Pump and accessories shall be suitable for chemical being pumped:

1. Sodium Hypochlorite:

a. Concentration: 12.5 percentb. Specific Gravity: 1.175

CHEMICAL FEED SKID SYSTEMS Donohue & Associates, Inc.11345-2 Project No. 12026

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for chemical feed equipment specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for chemical feedequipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofchemical feed equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of chemical feed equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.




B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chemical feed equipment system components from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver chemical feed equipment and system components to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.


B. Store chemical feed equipment in clean, dry location.

C. Manufacturer shall define the requirements to properly protect equipment and parts shipped to jobsite.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One check valve rebuild kit per chemical feed system as identified in Chemical FeedSystem Schedule(s).

b. Provide one spare diaphragm, suction valve, discharge valve, balls, and seals perchemical feed system as identified in Chemical Feed System Schedule(s).

c. Supply four spare tube elements of the specified size per pump.d. Supply one spare pumphead assembly and rotor.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Watson Marlow, 520 Series.

B. Blue-White Industries.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Suitable for application specified in the Peristaltic Hose Pump Schedule.


A. Metering Pump:

1. Pumps shall be positive displacement peristaltic type complete with spring-loaded pumphead,self-contained variable speed drive, and flexible extruded tube as specified.

2. Peristaltic pumping action is created by the compression of the flexible tube between thepumphead rollers and track, induced forward fluid displacement within the tube by the rotationof the pump rotor, and subsequent vacuum-creating restitution of the tube.

3. Pumps shall be dry self-priming, capable of being run dry without damaging effects to pump ortube, and shall have a maximum suction lift capability of up to 30 feet vertical water column.Maximum pressure rating: 100 pounds per square inch.

4. Pump shall not require the use of check valves or diaphragms and shall not require dynamicseals in contact with the pumped fluid. Process fluid shall be contained within pump tubingand shall not directly contact any rotary or metallic components.

5. Flow shall be in the direction of the rotor rotation, which can be reversed and shall beproportional to rotor speed.


B. Pump Head:

1. Pumphead shall consist of a fixed track, a hinged guard door, and spring-loaded roller rotorassembly. Pump tubing shall be in contact with the inside diameter of the track through anangle of 180 degrees. At all times, one roller shall be fully engaged with the tubing providingcomplete compression and preventing back flow or siphoning. Tube occlusion and springtension shall be factory set to accommodate 2.4 millimeter wall thickness tubing and shall notrequire adjustment.

2. Pumphead guard shall be transparent for the purpose of viewing direction of rotation. Whenclosed, the pump head guard shall seal against the pump track for leak containment andcontrolled waste through the pump head waste port in the event of a tube failure. For operatorand environmental safety, pumps in which the direction of rotation cannot be visually verifiedand/or do not have a controlled waste port are not acceptable.

a. Pumphead Assembly

1) Pump Track Geometry must have a minimum 96.6 millimeter swept diameter througha minimum track angle of 180 degrees.

2) Provide high corrosion/impact materials as specified:

Track Construction: polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) Guard Construction: hinged impact-resistant polycarbonate breakaway guard, tool

un-lockable for operator safety. Rotor Construction: polyphenylene sulfide (PPS)

b. Rotor Assembly

1) Provide rotor assembly that ensures gradual tube occlusion and compensates fortube tolerance:

Twin spring-loaded roller arms located 180 degrees apart, each fitted with stainlesssteel helical springs and compressing roller for occlusion of the tube twice perrotor revolution.

Compressing Rollers: 316SS with low friction stainless steel bearings and PTFEseals, minimum diameter of 18 millimeters.

Provide non-compressing guide rollers constructed of corrosion resistant Nylatron.

2) Clutch: Equip rotor with a central handgrip hub and manually activated clutch todisengage the rotor from the drive for manual rotor rotation during tube loading.Clutch shall automatically reengage rotor to gearbox upon one complete revolution.

3) Mounting: To prevent slip, the rotor assembly shall be axially secured to the doggedoutput shaft of the gearmotor via a slotted collet and central retaining screw.

4) Pumpheads requiring disassembly or special tools for tube changing are notacceptable.

C. Pump Tube Assembly:

1. Pump shall be supplied with a Load Sure tubing element with molded fittings, which shall beself-locating when fitted into the pumphead. Tube element shall be in contact with the insidediameter of the track (housing) through an angle of 180 degrees and be held in place on thesuction and discharge by the element fittings. The tubing shall be replaceable without the useof tools and with no disassembly of the pumphead. To achieve maximum service life, pumpheads with a track angle of less then 180 degrees and/or without tube elements are notacceptable.

2. Load Sure Element shall be constructed with either Marprene or Sta-Pure tubing with malePVDF Quick Release Connectors.


3. Supply One tube element of the specified size per pump.4. Supply Two, one-meter long flexible reinforced PVC hoses for connection of pump to suction

and discharge process lines. Flexible hose shall have a PVDF female Quick Release fittingfor connection to the Loadsure Element and male Quick Release fitting for connection to NPTadaptor with built in shut off valve for ease of maintenance and connection to process lines.

5. Supply Two Quick Release to ½” NPT Adaptors

D. Drive System:

1. Rating: Continuous 24 hour operation, 40 degree Celcius ambient.2. Supply: 110-120 volt 50/60 Hertz and 220-240 volt 50/60 Hertz, 1-Phase field switchable.

Supply nine-foot length mains power cord with standard 115 volt three-prong plug.3. Maximum drive power consumption: 135VA.4. Enclosure: NEMA 4X5. Housing: Pressure cast aluminum with Alocrom pre-treatment and exterior grade corrosion

resistant polyester powder coat. By nature of the environmental conditions, unpaintedhousings, including 316 stainless steel, are not acceptable.

6. Pumps must meet the following minimum requirements for operator interface functionality.

a. Backlit graphical LCD capable of up to four lines of text with up to 16 characters per line todisplay pump speed, running status, flow rate, and programming instructions.

b. Keypad for start, stop, speed increment, speed decrement, forward/reverse direction,rapid prime, and programming.

c. Menu driven on screen programming of manual or auto control, flow and remote signalcalibration, and general programming.

d. Programmable “Auto Restart” feature to resume pump status in the event of poweroutage interruption.

e. Programmable “Keypad Lock” to allow operator lockout of all keys except emergencystart/stop.

f. Programmable “Maximum Speed” to allow operator to set the maximum speed of thepump within 0.1-220 revolutions per minute.

7. Supply auto control features to meet the following minimum functionality requirements for usewith the SCADA system. All control signal features must be located internally to the pump.

a. Remote Control Inputs

1) Speed Control:

Primary Analog 4-20mA or 0-10VDC speed input, with input signal trimmable andspeed scaleable over any part of the drive speed range.

Secondary Analog 4-20mA or 0-10VDC scaling input, with input signal trimmable andprogrammable scaling factor.

Provisions for alternative remote accessory potentiometer (if supplied by others) forprimary speed control or secondary speed scaling.

2) Start/Stop Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic or dry contact- Configurablecommand sense allowing open to equal run or open to equal stopped.

3) Forward/Reverse Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic or dry contact.4) Auto/Man Mode Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic or dry contact.5) Leak Detector Run/Stop Control: via 5V TTL, 24V industrial logic, or dry contact.


b. Status Outputs

1) Four relay contacts rated for a 30 VDC with a maximum load of 30W, NO or NCsoftware configurable to indicate the following:

Running/Stopped status Forward/Reverse status Auto/Manual status General Alarm status Leak Detected status

2) Speed output – Analog 4-20mA or 0-10 VDC

c. Accepts RS485 data protocol.d. Termination: supply screw down terminals suitable for up to18 AWG field wire and

accessible through four glanded cable entry points on the pump.

8. Drive motor- brushless DC motor with integral gearbox and tachometer feedback.

a. Speed Control Range of 2200:1 from 0.1 to 220 revolutions per minute plus or minus 0.1revolutions per minute throughout the range.

b. Closed loop microprocessor controlled drive with pulse width modulation at speeds above35 revolutions per minute and synchronous mode with magnetic field rotation controlbelow 35 revolutions per minute.

c. Circuitry complete with temperature and load compensation and protection.

9. Mounting: Drive shall be self-supporting and shall not require anchoring.10. Leak Detection- Pump manufacturer shall supply float-type leak sensor mounted to the drain

port of the pump head for leak detection and pump shut down in the event of a tubing failure.

2.04 POLYETHYLENE PIPE OR TUBING

A. General:

1. Provide tubing compatible with chemical being pumped.

B. Material:

1. Pipe: ASTM D2239, AWWA C901 Pressure Class 160, DR 9.2. Tubing: ASTM D2737, AWWA C901 Pressure Class 160, DR 9.3. All joints shall be fusion welded.

2.05 CONTROLS

A. Control Panel (455-LCP-1901) provided under Division 13.

2.06 COATINGS





3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical feed equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION








3.04 DEMONSTRATION




CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM SCHEDULE

Name of Pump(s) SHC Metering Pump Nos. 1 and 2,Filamentous Metering Pump

Tag Number(s) 455-P-1901, -1902, and -1903Number of Pumps ThreeFluid Pumped Sodium Hypochlorite

Concentration (Percent by Volume) 12.5Specific Gravity 1.175

Maximum Suction Lift (ft) 30Motor Horsepower N/AMotor Voltage 120Constant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedTube Connection, M/NPT ½ inchTube Material Marprene IIInstallation Floor MountMaximum Operating Point at Maximum Speed

Capacity (gph) 40Total Dynamic Head (psi) 10

rpm = revolutions per minutegph = gallons per hourpsi = pound per square inchft = feet

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SLUDGE SCREENProject No. 12026 11350-1

SECTION 11350SLUDGE SCREEN

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Sludge screens No. 1 and 2 (405-M-2201 and -2202) shall be designed in a single operationto continuously screen solids from raw primary clarifier sludge. Sludge screens shall becapable of removing floating, particulate and fibrous material and dewatering and compactingthe screenings before discharging the material in a single operation.

2. Sludge Screen No. 1 and 2 Control Panel (405-LCP-2201 and -2202)3. Sludge Screen No. 1 and 2 Pneumatic Panel

B. If owner selects Alternate 2, provide Sludge Screen No. 2 and all associated equipment, piping,wiring. Provide Sludge Screen No. 2 with a 5 millimeter screen.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. VAC: Volts Alternating Current

B. MCP: Motor Circuit Protector

1.03 REFERENCES


B. AISC: American Institute of Steel Construction


D. ASPC: American Structures Painting Council

E. AFBMA: Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association

F. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association

G. NFPA: National Fire Prevention Association

H. AWS: American Welding Society


A. Performance Requirements:

1. Average flow per screen: 100 gallons per minute2. Maximum wastewater flow per screen: 264 gallons per minute3. Maximum dry solids loading at peak flow: 5%4. Maximum pressure drop through unit: 12 pounds per square inch5. Inlet size: 4 inches6. Outlet size: 4 inches7. Screen opening size: 3 millimeters8. Compaction zone opening size: 2 millimeters

SLUDGE SCREEN Donohue & Associates, Inc.11350-2 Project No. 12026

9. Location rating: Class 1, Division 1, Group D10. Sludge screen shall be capable of operation without liquid in pipeline for up to 5 minutes

without damage to unit.11. Sludge screen shall consist of two piece housing with solids screening and compacting zones,

drive unit, screw, adjustable retention discharge cone, closed discharge section, and sludgeprobe to monitor sludge leaks in discharge section.

12. Compacted solids shall be dewatered to a range of 35 to 45 percent solids by weight.13. Design shall permit removal and replacement of internal screen and rotating parts without

removing housing from system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for sludge screen specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for sludge screen.2. Wiring Diagrams: Show power and control connections and distinguish between

factory-installed and field-installed wiring.

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofsludge screen with referenced standards.


E. Submit in accordance with Section 01330



2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of sludge screen in service.3. Lubrication instructions.4. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.







C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain sludge screen from single manufacturer with responsibilityfor entire system. Unit shall be representative product built from components that have provencompatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit as evidenced by records ofprototype testing.


A. Deliver sludge screen to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers, and otherprotection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from construction operations.Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store sludge screen in clean, dry location.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One (1) discharge end bearing.b. One (1) package gasket material.c. One (1) set of shaft seals.d. One (1) automatic greasing device.e. One (1) spare screw and 5 millimeter screen for screening zone.f. Provide special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement and maintenance.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Huber Technology, Inc.

B. Hydro International

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Sludge Screen:

1. Tube Housing: 304 Stainless Steel2. Support Structure: 304 Stainless Steel3. Screening Zone Screw (hardened guiding edges): 304 Stainless Steel4. Screening Zone Sieve (5.0 mm perforations): 304 Stainless Steel5. Compaction Zone Screw: 304 Stainless Steel6. Compaction Zone Sieve (3.0 mm perforations): 304 Stainless Steel7. Fasteners: 304 Stainless Steel8. Gear Reducer: Cast Iron, ASTM A48, Class 309. Discharge Chute: 12 Gauge, 304 Stainless Steel


2.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Screening Zone1. Screening zone shall be equipped with flanged inlet and outlet connections.2. Flanges shall be slip flange type with welded face ring.3. Flanges shall be equipped with slotted holes for mating to 150 lb flanged fitting.4. Screening section housing shall be stationary with rigid feet for mounting to platform in

screening area.5. Provide conical shaped 3 millimeter perforated screen within tube housing. Sieve shall taper

gradually from maximum diameter at sludge inlet to minimum diameter at inlet to compactionzone.

6. Spiral screw shall be driven by direct coupled gearmotor attached at inlet end of screeningzone.

B. Pressing Zone

1. Tube housing shall contain cylindrical shaped 3 millimeter perforated screen which surroundspress zone spiral screw.

2. Screening and pressing housings shall be two sections with flanged connections to allow foreasy opening and easy access to internal components of sludge screen.

3. Support compaction zone on four adjustable casters for easy movement during maintenanceand inspection.

4. Internal screen shall be comprised of two sections, one in screening zone and one incompaction zone of each unit. Both screen sections shall align along the horizontal axisforming a continuous sieve when two halves of screen housing are flanged together.

5. Internal auger shall be comprised of two sections, one in screening zone and one incompaction zone of each unit. Auger sections shall be coupled with a keyed shaft when bothhalves of screen housing are flanged together.

6. Sludge screen auger shall be supported at solids discharge end by roller bearing. No otherbearings shall be required. Auger drive shaft at drive end shall be supported by screen drive.

7. Provide restriction plate between screening and pressing zone restricting sludge flow intopressing zone area.

C. Solids Discharge Area:

1. Provide inspection door on top and solids discharge opening on bottom of solids dischargearea.

2. Provide flange for attaching to flexible funnel tube. Fasten with stainless steel band clamps.3. Provide automatic pneumatic solids retention cone and pneumatic cylinders.4. Adjustable retention cone shall automatically adjust screen based on variations in compressed

solids.5. Provide sludge moisture probe in discharge section to monitor loss of plug resulting in sludge

break through.6. Provide heating element to prevent condensation on sludge moisture probe which would

otherwise cause nuisance alarms and shutdown.

D. Drive:

1. A gear box support flange with a minimum thickness of 0.7 inches shall be welded to thescreen section end of the screenings transport tube for attachment of the drive assembly.

2. The basket mechanism and transport screw shall be driven by a shaft mounted geared motor. The geared motor shall have a minimum service factor of 1.0.

E. Stuffing box seal shall consist of Teflon-graphite packing material, stuffing box retainer gland, andlubrication ring. Two lip seals shall be provided at drive end of auger drive to control leaking.


F. Bolt stationary section to platform framework.

G. Provide discharge chute from sludge screen to existing screenings lugger box.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Each Sludge Screen shall be equipped with the following sensors and gauges:

1. Pressure transducer (405-PIT-2201) to transmit the inlet zone pressure to the control panel.2. Pressure gauge (405-PI-2201) to monitor the pressure in the outlet zone. Gauge shall be

rated 0-60 pounds per square inch.3. Moisture sensor (405-AE/ASH-2201) to detect screenings plug failure in the screenings

discharge area. Provide with a coiling wire for ease of removal of the pressing zone.4. Pressure instrumentation provided shall be in accordance with Section 13426.

2.05 FASTENERS

A. Provide all necessary fastening hardware including anchor bolts.

2.06 COATINGS




2.07 MOTOR

A. Screen is to be driven by an explosion proof, minimum 3 horsepower, 460 vac, 3 phase, 60 Hzmotor. Provide motor in accordance with Section 16150.

B. Drive unit shall be constant speed helical gear reducer directly mounted to drive shaft.

C. Motor shall be rated for continuous duty.

D. Motor shall be suitable for occasional wash down.

E. Provide motor in accordance with Section 16150.

2.08 CONTROL

A. Provide all controls necessary for the fully automatic operation of the screen, including:

1. NEMA 4X main control panel2. NEMA 4X pneumatic panel

B. The electrical control system shall provide for automatic control of the screen via preset pressurelevels using pressure transducers mounted in the sludge screen inlet and outlet sections. Adifferential pressure level shall be monitored across the screen section via the two (2) inlet andoutlet section mounted pressure transducers.

C. Sludge Screen Control Panel (405-LCP-2201) provided in accordance with Section 11990.


D. Pneumatic Panel

1. Provide a NEMA 4X stainless steel pneumatic panel. Panel shall be suitable for stanchionmounting.

2. Provide the pneumatic panel with the following items:

a. Fittings and coiled pneumatic hosesb. Two (2) Pressure reducing valvesc. Pressure switchd. Microfiltere. Pressure gaugef. Manual valveg. Electro-pneumatic transducer

3. The air pressure supplied to the pneumatic rams shall be continuously adjusted based on thedrive load of the main drive motor.

4. When the inlet pressure drops below the starting pressure, the system shall begin anautomatic shutdown sequence.


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. The sludge screen shall be factory assembled and factory run tested prior to shipment. Controlpanels shall be factory tested prior to shipment.

B. Contractor shall examine the sludge screen upon delivery. Contractor shall touch-up all shippingdamage to the paint and stainless steel at the time of delivery inspection.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install sludge screen in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the field to ensure compliance of equipment dimensionswith the drawings. Contractor shall notify Engineer of significant deviations.

C. Manufacturer shall supply anchor bolts for the equipment. Contractors shall install the anchorbolts in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Contractor shall coat all stainless steel bolts and nut threads with a non-seizing compound prior tofinal assembly.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION









3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Contractor shall verify the floor is level prior to installation. If the floor is not level, install on 1-inchgrout pads to account for unevenness in floor.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SLUDGE THICKENING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11352-1

SECTION 11352SLUDGE THICKENING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Gravity Belt Thickeners (GBT):

a. WAS GBT No. 1 (455-M-2801*)b. DSD GBT (455-M-4403)

2. Polymer Mixing Valve Assemblies (455-M-2851 and -4453)3. Control Stations:

a. WAS GBT Control Station No. 1 (455-CS-2801)b. DSD GBT Control Station (455-CS-4403)

4. Control Panels:

a. WAS GBT Control Panel No. 1 (455-LCP-2801)b. DSD GBT Control Panel (455- LCP-4403)

5. Washwater Systems.6. Belt Align and Tensioning System7. Power Unit (455-M-2811 and -4413)8. Accessories.


1. WAS GBT No. 2 (455-M-2902)2. Polymer Mixing Valve Assembly No. 2 (455-M-2952)3. WAS GBT Control Station No. 2 (455-CS-2902)4. Power Unit (455-M-2912)5. Associated equipment, piping, wiring, and controls as shown on Drawings and specified in this

Section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. GBT: Gravity Belt Thickener

B. Solids Capture: The percent of the feed solids that remain in the thickened end product on aweight basis. For purposes of this specification, "Capture" is defined as:

% Capture = (C/F) [(F-E)/(C-E)] x 100%

Where: C = Thickened Sludge Total Solids (% TS)

F = Feed (% TSS); excluding dilution from polymer solution flow

E = Filtrate (% TSS); excluding dilution from polymer solution and belt wash waterflows

C. Polymer Consumption: To be based on 100% active polymer.

SLUDGE THICKENING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11352-2 Project No. 12026

1.03 REFERENCES

A. AGMA: American Gear Manufacturers Association

B. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers


D. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

E. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

F. NEC: National Electrical Code

G. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Act


A. Salvage items from Structure 510:

1. WAS GBT No. 1 (455-M-2801*)2. Instrumentation:

a. 455-LSH-2801*b. 455-WS-2801*c. 455-ZS-2801A*d. 455-ZS-2801B*e. 455-TSH-2801*f. 455-HS-2801A*g. 455-HS-2801B*

3. Equipment Tag Numbers with an * indicate salvaged items.4. See Drawing 009-N-28 for salvaged items.5. Contact Ashbrook Representative:

Chris BoydPhone: (281) 615-8989Email: [email protected]

6. Provide the following new equipment for existing WAS GBT No. 1:

a. One Retrofit Stainless Steel Washbox Assembly.b. One Retrofit Side Mounted Hydraulic Unit.c. One Control Panel (455-LCP-2801) and Control Station (455-CS-2801) with PLC

Program.d. One Lot Site Labor.e. One Lot Inbound Freight.


1. WAS GBT No. 2 (455-M-2902)2. Polymer Mixing Valve Assembly No. 2 (455-M-2952)3. WAS GBT Control Station No. 2 (455-CS-2902)4. WAS GBT Control Panel No. 2 (455-LCP-2902)5. Power Unit (455-M-2912)6. High Sludge Level Switch (455-LSH-2902)


7. Belt Broken Switch (455-WS-2902)8. Kill Switches (455-HS-2902A and -2902B)9. Pressure Control Valve (455-PCV-2912)10. Pressure Gauge (455-PI-2912)11. Low Pressure Switch (455-PSL-2912)12. GBT Washwater Valve No. 2 (455-FV-2902)13. Belt Misalignment Switches (455-ZS-2902A and -2902B)14. Thermal Sensor (455-TSH-2902)15. Associated equipment, piping, wiring, and controls as shown on Drawings and specified in this

Section

C. Design Criteria:

1. GBT shall extract water from sludge after conditioning of sludge with polymer solution.2. 2-meter gravity belt thickener for thickening waste activated sludge, secondary scum, and

digested sludge.3. Provide complete belt thickener sludge thickening systems consisting of, but not limited to,

following main components:

a. Structural frame and base plates.b. Sludge conditioning system and feed assembly.c. Drainage pans.d. Gravity dewatering zone.e. Belt wash system.f. Automatic hydraulic belt aligning system.g. Automatic hydraulic belt tensioning system.h. Scraper blades.i. Filter belts.j. Bearings, roller, and shafts.k. Electric motors and variable speed drive systems.

D. Performance Requirements:

1. Thickener performance shall meet performance as specified in the Belt ThickenerPerformance Schedule in this Section.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for sludge thickening equipment specified.2. Motor data in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating Systems in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for sludgethickening equipment.



D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofsludge thickening equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of sludge thickening equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.




B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain sludge thickening equipment system components fromsingle manufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product builtfrom components that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate asunit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Items to be shipped as complete assemblies except where partial disassembly is required bytransportation regulations or for protection of components.

B. Deliver sludge thickening equipment and system components to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.

C. Store sludge thickening equipment in clean, dry location.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One belt.b. Two rubber seals.c. One wear strip.d. Eight scraper blades.e. 75 percent of chicanes.

2. Provide special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance3. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and clearly labeled and identified with the name and



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ashbrook Simon-Hartley LLC

2.02 GRAVITY BELT THICKENER

A. Materials:

1. Structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36.2. Iron castings shall conform to ASTM A48 and shall be of a class suitable for the purpose

intended.3. All metal components in contact with polyelectrolyte or sludge shall be Type 316 stainless

steel.4. All fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.5. Carbon steel plates, shapes, brackets, etc. shall have a minimum thickness of ¼-inch and

shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance to Section 09960.

B. Performance:

Belt Thickener Performance Schedule

Item Waste ActivatedSludge

Feed Solids Concentration (% Dry Weight Solids) 1.0Feed Solids Volatile Solids Content (%) 80Feed Solids pH 6.0 – 9.0Minimum Hydraulic Capacity (GPM) 500Minimum Solids Throughput (lbs dry weight solids / hour) 2,500Minimum Thickened Sludge Concentration (% Dry Weight Solids) 5Minimum Solids Capture (%) 95Maximum Active Polymer Usage (lbs Dry Weight Polymer / Ton DryWeight Sludge) 12

% = percentGPM = gallons per minutelbs = pounds/ = per


Belt Thickener Performance ScheduleItem Digested SludgeFeed Solids Concentration (% Dry Weight Solids) 3.0Feed Solids Volatile Solids Content (%) 80Minimum Hydraulic Capacity (GPM) 500Minimum Solids Throughput (lbs dry weight solids / hour) 2,500Minimum Thickened Sludge Concentration (% Dry Weight Solids) 6.5Minimum Solids Capture (%) 97Maximum Active Polymer Usage (lbs Dry Weight Polymer / Ton DryWeight Sludge) 12

% = percentGPM = gallons per minutelbs = pounds/ = per

C. Polymer Mixing Valve Assembly (455-M-2851, -2952, and -4453):

1. Provide Polymer Mixing Valve Assemblies or sludge conditioning systems, designed toefficiently mix polymer with sludge and to flocculate sludge for optimum thickening.

2. Polymer Mixing Valve Assembly shall be mounted upstream of thickener and consist of thefollowing components:

a. Flow splitting manifold.b. Four port vortex polymer injection ring.c. In-line, non-clog, variable orifice mixer.

3. In-Line Mixer:

a. Shall be a flanged, cast housing.b. Provide adjustable orifice plate, with shaft and o-ring seal, connected to an externally

mounted lever and counterweight with removable side plate for inspection and cleaning.c. Open throat area of mixer shall be fully adjustable downward and shall open automatically

to prevent clogging.d. Position of counterweight on externally mounted orifice plate lever shall be fully

adjustable.e. Allow for adjustment of mixing energy, regardless of mounting angle, while unit is in

operation.f. The use of modified check valves, static mixers or mixers requiring a tank and motor

driven propeller are not acceptable.g. Mixer shall automatically open to allow solids, which are larger than the preset opening, to

pass through the mixer without clogging and then return to the preset position.h. O-ring shall be rubber. Counterweight and lever arm shall be hot-dipped galvanized cast

iron. All other part shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel.i. Connecting fittings shall be 125-pound ANSI flanges.

4. Flow-Splitting Polymer Manifold:

a. Manifold inlet shall be fitted with ¾-inch male hose fitting connection.b. Four manifold outlets shall be fitted with ½-inch male hose fittings.c. Four polymer injection ring inlets shall be fitted with ½-inch male hose fittings.d. Provide 4-foot length of ¾-inch clear flexible tubing.e. Provide length(s) of ½-inch clear, flexible tubing as required to connect flow-splitting

manifold outlets to polymer injection ring inlets. Provide stainless steel clamps.


5. Energy of mixing polymer and sludge shall be adjustable and independent of thickeneroperating.

6. Polymer and sludge shall be instantaneously mixed (less than 1.0 second at 60 gallons perminute) by sludge conditioning system.

7. Polymer addition systems which utilize tanks with mixers or inject polymer directly into sludgeline are not acceptable.

8. After sludge/polymer mixing, flocculation time shall be adjustable. Adjustment of flocculationtime may require disassembly of components. Flocculation may occur in properly designedpipe work approved by manufacturer.

9. Retention time at maximum flow rates shall 20 seconds at a minimum to ensure flocculation.

D. Retention tank and feed chute:

1. Retention tank and feed chute shall be removable for ease of maintenance and cleaning andshall have guides to evenly distribute and minimize turbulence and destruction of flocculatedsludge over entire width gravity dewatering belt.

2. Retention tank and feed chute shall be Type 316 stainless steel with a minimum of 11 gaugethickness.

3. Sludge inlet shall be ANSI 8-inch 150-pound raised face flange.

E. Framework:

1. Design:

a. Properly braced to withstand loads to limit frame deflection not to exceed 0.010-inch atmid-span.

b. Framework shall have a minimum bending stress safety factor under maximum load of8.53 at 40PLI.

c. Maximum load shall be based on the forces from the rollers and belt tension.d. Facilitate leg mounting installation on concrete foundation, as shown on drawings.

2. Construct from welded ASTM A36 structural steel I-beams or formed channels, with minimumthickness of 3/8 inch and minimum web/wall thickness of 1/4 inch.

3. Bolts shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch.4. All welding shall conform to the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code.5. Machine joints and interconnection faces.6. Construct to allow easy access and visual contact with internal components of gravity belt

thickener.7. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A-123, 4 to 7 mils thickness.

F. Gravity Drainage Section:

1. Gravity drainage section shall be fitted with an inlet distributor to accept sludge from sludgeconditioning system and evenly distribute conditioned sludge over the effective width of themoving filter belt.

2. Contain sludge within belt area by Type 316 stainless steel barriers, minimum 14-gaugethickness, equipped with replaceable rubber seals to prevent leakage.

3. Effective drainage area shall be defined as the belt width between sludge containment barrierstimes the belt length where drainage actually occurs. Minimum effective gravity drainage areashall be 89 square feet.

4. Support filter belt within gravity drainage section with corrosion resistant slotted grid plate tofacilitate filtrate removal.

5. Grid plate shall be Type 316 stainless steel with replaceable high density polyethylene wearbars spaced maximum 2 ½-inch on center along length of zone.

6. Wear bars constructed of fiberglass, other high-friction materials, or table rollers, whichrequire maintenance due to coatings and bearings are not acceptable.


7. Grid shall be minimum 2-inch wider than width of belt and so designed to reduce belt wear.8. Provide readily removable, high density polyethylene furrowing devices (chicanes) to furrow

conditioned sludge to facilitate drainage.9. Provide 7-8 rows of plows arranged in lateral rows along length of gravity dewatering section.10. Chicanes shall promote sludge dewatering and insure even distribution of material across the

entire filter belt width.11. Configure chicanes in alternating rows of compression, division, and displacement.12. Chicanes shall be designed to permit horizontal and lateral adjustment and to lift individual

rows free from engagement with solids and lock in raised position for cleaning while beltthickener continues to operate.

13. Manufacturer shall demonstrate individual chicanes shall allow a 1-inch vertical obstruction onthe belt to pass under them without damage.

14. All surfaces of chicanes, and other devices, contacting the filter cloth shall be a material softerthan the filter belt and prevent abrasions of the belt surface.

15. Design of chicane shall allow replacement of worn contact areas without replacing chicane inits entirety.

16. Chicane materials of construction: Carbon steel, hot dip galvanized (4-7 mil) hardware withhigh density polyethylene or HDPU chicane element.

17. Fasteners shall be Carbon steel, hot dip galvanized (4-7 mil).

G. Drainage System:

1. Adjustable Ramp:

a. Provide adjustable ramp adjacent to discharge end of thickening unit which causesthickened sludge to ascend the ramp prior to discharge.

b. Ramp shall be fitted with replaceable Doctor Blades as described below.c. Ramp shall extend across working width of belt, adjacent to discharge end of the unit, and

set at sufficient height and angle to create optimum backward rolling action of sludge.d. Ramp angle shall be adjustable from 10 degrees to 45 degrees. Ramp shall be

adjustable while machine is in operation with one man without the use of tools.e. Ramp shall be designed so location of leading edge of doctor blade with respect to belt

remains the same regardless of ramp angle.f. Ramp assembly shall be designed for easy, quick removal from the sludge path.g. All wetted components of the assembly shall be fabricated of polyethylene or 316

stainless steel.h. Leading edge shall be designed so location, with respect to the belt, remains the same

regardless of ramp’s angle of inclination.

2. Adjustable Dam Assembly:

a. Provide adjustable dam assembly at the discharge end of the thickening unit to retard thedischarge of the sludge, thus increasing retention time, and eliminating puddling of wateron the surface of the thickened sludge blanket.

b. Fabricated from 316 stainless steel.c. Dam shall be adjustable in both angle and distance off the belt while the machine is in

operation. Adjustment shall be by one man without the use of tools.d. Dam shall be easily removable.

H. Rollers:

1. End shafts and plates shall be welded in place or forged end construction.2. Rollers shall be supported by bearings.

3. Construction:


a. Rollers shall be constructed of carbon steel and coated as specified or shall beconstructed entirely of Type 316 stainless steel.

b. One-piece forge shafts and end plates.c. Shaft – ASTM A572 Grade 50 Type 2.d. Roller Shells – ASTM A53.e. Roller Shaft – Cold Drawn Carbon Steel, AISC 8620.f. Shell and Radial Vanes – ASTM A36.g. Drive rollers coated with ¼-inch minimum Buna-N.

4. All rollers shall be designed for a maximum deflection at mid-span of 0.05-inch when undermaximum roller loading conditions. The maximum stress shall be less than 1/5 of the yieldstrength of the material when under maximum roller loading conditions.

5. All rollers shall be coated with 0.25-inch of BUNA N rubber. Non-drive rollers coated with 25-mil thermoplastic nylon is also acceptable. Coatings shall extend down the end plate and tothe point of insertion into bearing housing. Carbon steel roller surfaces shall not be exposed tosludge or moisture.

6. BUNA N coating shall have the following properties:

a. Tensile strength, ASTM D-412 2,500 pounds per square inchb. Tear strength, die C, ASTM D-624 250 pounds per square inchc. Elongation at break, ASTM D-412 160 percentd. Hardness, Shore A, ASTM D-676 90

I. Bearing:

1. Roller shafts shall be equipped with heavy-duty greasable type, self-aligning roller bearings insealed, splash-proof, horizontal split case, pillow block housings.

2. Bearings shall be attached to the shaft in a direct mount/shrink-fit fashion.3. All bearings shall have a nominal L10 life rating of 1,000,000 hours calculated using

ANSI/AFBMA Standard 11-1990.4. Bearing lubrication shall be performed through a monel or Type 316 stainless steel standard

grease fitting mounted on the bearing housing.5. The roller bearing journals shall be turned 75-milimeters to accept direct mounted 75-

milimeters bore bearings.6. Bearings shall be externally mounted with grease fittings extended to face of thickener frame.

All bearings shall be greasable while unit is operating.7. Lubrication shall not be required more often than once every six months.8. All hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel.9. Bearing seal in pillow block shall be nonmetallic construction with a carrier/flinger which

rotates with the roller shaft.10. Provide secondary labyrinth seal between carrier/flinger and bearing housing.11. Roller side of bearing housings minimum double sealed and roller shaft with splash deflector

to provide water and grime seal.12. Provide split case bearing housing with two or four mounting bolts for each housing to frame of

belt thickener or solid pillow block housings with a gasketed end cap. Housing shall allow forthe changing of the bearings without changes in the factory alignment of the roller.

J. Belt Instrumentation:

1. Provide high sludge level switch (455-LSH-2801*, -2902, and -4403) to shutdown equipmentand activate alarm at gravity belt thickener control panel in event of high sludge level on thebelt.

2. Provide belt broken switch (455-WS-2801*, -2902, and -4403) to shutdown equipment andactivate alarm at gravity belt thickener control panel in event of a broken belt.


3. Provide two kill switches (455-HS-2801A*, -2801B*, -2902A, -2902B, -4403A, and -4403B),mounted to either side of the Gravity Belt Thickener to shutdown equipment and activate alarmat gravity belt thickener control panel in event of an operator emergency.

K. Belt Wash System:

1. Provide a filter belt wash station for the gravity belt thickener.2. System shall consist of a spray pipe, fitted with spray nozzles, contained within a fabricated

housing which encapsulates a section of each belt. Housing and nozzle assembly shall beremovable to facilitate cleaning.

3. Belt wash system shall be suitable for use with non-potable city water supplied at a pressure of90 pounds per square inch. Maximum washwater consumption shall not exceed 45 gallonsper minute.

4. House belt wash pipe and nozzles in Type 316 stainless steel, minimum 14 gauge thickness,housing encapsulating upper and lower part of belt to contain spray and mist. Synthetichousings are not acceptable. Spray housing:

a. Belt shall not function as part of housing.b. Allow easy access for cleaning nozzles without housing disassembly.c. Housing shall be sealed against belt with rubber or brush type seals which are

replaceable without disassembly of wash station.d. Seals shall be removable without disassembly of housing.

5. Spray Header:

a. Nozzle spray pattern and spacing shall be designed such that spray from adjacentnozzles overlap on the belt surface. Spray piping and nozzles shall be stainless steel.

b. Belt wash station shall extend over the full width of the filter belt by a minimum of twoinches.

c. Spray header shall be equipped with external handwheel which actuates an internalstainless steel brush. One full turn of the handwheel shall cause bristles to enter thenozzles, and dislodge solid particles.

d. Provide means at end of spray header to flush loosened solids. Provide normally closedstainless steel ball valve piped to discharge in containment area. Route discharge pipe farenough under machine towards containment area drain to prevent splashing of personnelopening drain valve. Drain pipe shall not rest on sloped containment area floor, supportfrom machine.

e. Belt washing shall be performed after the cake has been discharged from the belt.

6. Provide Pressure Control Valve (455-PCV-2811, -2912, and -4413). See P&ID for generalarrangement.

a. Provide so 95 pounds per square inch washwater pressure is not exceeded.

7. Provide Pressure Gauge (455-PI-2811, -2912, and -4413) and Low Pressure Switch (455-PSL-2811, -2912, and -4413). See P&ID for general arrangement.

a. Provide pressure gauge in accordance with Section 13426. Gauge range shall be 0-160pounds per square inch.

b. Provide pressure switch in accordance with Section 13426. Low pressure switch shallalarm at 90 pounds per square inch. Switch and connections shall be suitable forwashdown area. Factory route wire on machine to common control junction box.

c. Provide diaphragm seal in accordance with Section 13426. Materials of constructionsuitable for plant effluent.

d. Provide stainless steel full-port isolation ball valves.


e. Do not support assembly from pressure pipe tap. Mount to member of machine ifnecessary. Use stainless steel shapes and fasteners.

f. Coordinate location of pressure gauge and switch assembly with Engineer during shopdrawing review. Remote mount assembly as required or directed by Engineer, forunobstructed view and easy access.

8. Provide GBT Washwater Valve (455-FV-2801, -2902, and -4403) to isolate spray header whenbelt does not require cleaning. Valve shall be solenoid valve type in accordance with Section15280.

L. Belt Alignment and Tensioning System:

1. Belt alignment and tensioning system shall be either a pneumatic or a hydraulic system thatautomatically aligns the belt and controls tension, provide one as specified below.

2. Hydraulic System:

a. Provide thickener with one complete hydraulic tracking and tensioning system to ensurereliable operation.

b. All hydraulic piping shall be rigidly and firmly anchored to structural frame of thickener.c. All hydraulic lines shall be sized according to intended use and operating pressure with a

safety factor of 10.d. Press mounted hydraulic system shall include power unit, all piping, control panels,

solenoid valves, gauges and controls necessary for system operation.e. Power Unit (455-M-2811, -2912, and -4413):

1) Provide dedicated hydraulic power system to provide pressurized oil for steering andtensioning.

2) Variable volume pressure compensated pump3) Motor: 1.0 horsepower maximum, 1800 revolutions per minute, TEFC, NEMA B,

conform to Section 16150.4) System pressure gauge5) Tension control/relieving valve6) Tension system pressure gauge7) Breather type filler cap8) Return filter9) Level sight gauge10) Thermometer

f. All items consisting of the power unit shall be mounted on thickener frame including a 1-gallon type 316 stainless steel oil reservoir.

g. Power unit shall be easily accessible from side of frame.h. Provide NEMA 4X pressure switch to sense low pressure and provide signal to shut the

entire system.

3. Design belt tracking system to minimize belt and roller wear and extend working life of filterbed.

4. Fabricate tracking device of stainless steel to continually monitor lateral movement andposition of both edges of belt.

5. Provide positioning element to actuate pivoting movement necessary to maintain proper beltalignment.

6. Provide automatic control unit with sensor paddle on edge of belt.7. Transmit position of belt edge from sensor paddle to automatic control unit which regulates

position of regulating roll.8. Provide backup NEMA 4X limit switches on both sides of belt to detect tracking system failure.


9. Provide belt misalignment switches (455-ZS-2801A*, -2801B*, -2902A, -2902B, -4403A, and -4403B) to shutdown equipment and activate alarm at belt press control panel in event of beltover-travel.

10. Hydraulically or pneumatically adjusted belt tensioning assembly shall permit adjustment withthickener in operation

a. Hydraulic: Provide tension rollers with hydraulic cylinders at each end.b. Pneumatic: Belt tension adjustment shall be through bellows type actuators acting on the

take-up roller bearings.

11. Transverse rack and pinion mechanical interlocks shall be provided to synchronize rollalignment and provide even tension across the width of the belt in the event of unevendistribution or belt stretching.

12. Tensioning struts and rack and pinion devices shall be composed of 316L stainless steel orhigh strength nylon composite.

13. Belt tensioning system shall accommodate at least 3 percent increase (not less than 24-inches) in belt length.

14. Belt tension shall be infinitely variable and shall be adjustable without shutdown of thickener.

M. Belt Alignment and Tensioning System:

1. Belt and rollers shall be driven by variable frequency drive unit to achieve infinitely anduniformly variable speed adjustment while the thickener is in operation. Drive roller speedreduction shall be obtained by means of a helical-bevel mounted gear reducer.

2. Belt-drive motor:

a. Maximum 5 hp, 1800 rpm, TEFC, NEMA B motor.b. 480v, 3ph, 60Hzc. Inverter, severe duty rated.d. AGMA Class II rated.e. Belt speed range minimum 10 to maximum 95 feet per minute.f. Class F insulation.g. Service factor shall be 1.4 or greater.h. Provide motor in accordance with Section 16150 and 16425.

3. Provide a thermal sensor (455-TSH-2801*, -2902, and -4403) imbedded in windings to providesignal for alarm and shutdown at high motor temperature.

N. Filter Belt:

1. Belt shall be seamed and fabricated of monofilament polyester, wear-resistant plasticmaterials, or combination monofilament polyester and stainless steel material.

2. Mesh design shall be selected for optimum thickening of the sludge to be processed withminimum binding of the filter bed.

3. Belt selection shall be determined by manufacturer based on testing of sludge during start-up.4. Belt and connecting splice shall be designed for a minimum tensile strength equal to five times

the normal maximum dynamic tension to which the belt is subjected. Splice shall be designedto fail before the belt and shall be constructed of Type 304 stainless steel.

5. Belt shall have a minimum life of 2,000 hours continuous operation at the rated designconditions. Minimum belt life shall include belts damaged due to manufacturing defects andthe splice.

6. Belts shall be designed for ease of replacement with a minimum thickener down time.

O. Doctor Blades:


1. Doctor blade shall be mounted so that thickened sludge shall be continuously removed fromthe belt at the discharge of the gravity zone.

2. Blade shall be wider than the belt.3. Blade shall be constructed of ultra high molecular weight polyethylene and shall be

replaceable and designed to wear before the filter belt.4. Blade shall be affixed to a hot dipped galvanized counter weight assembly with a Type 304

stainless steel holder.5. Blade and assembly shall be fabricated with sufficient stiffness so that the blade does not

warp, distort or bow under normal service conditions.6. Blade and mounting assembly shall be designed to be quickly released and locked in position

away from contact with the belt for cleaning and maintenance.7. Blade shall have a manual lever on both sides of thickener.

P. Drainage Pans:

1. Pans shall be supplied to contain all filtrate within the thickener without splashing and preventre-wetting of the sludge.

2. Minimum 14 gauge, Type 316 stainless steel construction and fasteners.3. Locate pans for easy access during cleaning and such that the moving belt does not come into

contact with the pans under any condition.4. Pipe discharge separately to drainage basin below thickener and to minimize splashing.5. Filtrate on DSD GBT shall be piped separately from washwater.6. Drain connection to be self-venting to prevent overflow.7. Provide flanged connection(s) on pan for connection to drain piping.

2.03 CONTROLS

A. Gravity Belt Thickener Control Station (455-CS-2801, -2902, and -4403):

1. Provide in accordance with Section 11990.2. To be located on grating adjacent to Gravity Belt Thickener.

B. Gravity Belt Thickener Control Panel (455-LCP-2801, -2902, and -4403):

1. Provide in accordance with Section 11990.2. To be located in Electrical Room.

2.04 COATINGS


B. Coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09960.


D. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holds with protective grease


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install sludge thickening equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION






a. 5 man-days for Installation Services.b. 3 man-days for Instructional Services.c. 3 man-days for Post Startup Services



END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. POLYMER FEED EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11354-1

SECTION 11354POLYMER FEED EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. WAS GBT Polymer Feed System No. 2 (500-M-3102).2. DSD GBT Polymer Feed System (500-M-3103).3. Polyethylene Tubing.4. Integrated equipment package to automatically meter, dilute, activate, and feed polymer to the

gravity belt thickeners.5. Provide ancillary equipment and controls required for a complete and operable system.6. Spare parts and accessories.


1. WAS GBT Polymer Feed System No. 1 (500-M-3101).2. Associated equipment, piping, wiring, and controls as shown on Drawings and specified in this

Section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS




1. Continuous feed of emulsion polymer from the polymer storage drums shall be by means ofpolymer feed assembly consisting of progressing cavity pumps with variable speed drives andmix chamber assembly with rotameters, solenoid valve, and static mixer designed to diluteemulsion polymer solution to 0.1 percent for feed to point of application.

2. All components of the polymer feed assembly including pumps, speed controllers, mixassemblies, motors, and dilution water system shall not exceed 36 inch wide by 24 inch deepby 68 inches high. Components requiring adjustment or maintenance shall be mounted forease of accessibility. Unit shall be pre-plumbed and pre-wired. Skid shall be 304 stainlesssteel and fork truck compatible.

3. Neat polymer metering pump shall be progressing cavity type. Diaphragm type is notacceptable.

4. Designed to produce polymer solution with polymer-to-water solution concentrations between0.25 percent and 1.0 percent.

5. Shall produce a completely homogenous diluted polymer, fully activated, without “fish-eyes”and without degradation of the polymer molecules.

6. Equipment shall be delivered to site factory wire and mounted on portable compact skid.7. Polymer dilution/feed unit shall automatically meter, dilute, activate and feed liquid polymer

and water.

POLYMER FEED EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11354-2 Project No. 12026

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for polymer feed equipment specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for polymer feedequipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofpolymer feed equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of polymer feed equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with 01785.




B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain polymer feed equipment system components from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver polymer feed equipment and system components to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.


B. Store polymer feed equipment in clean, dry location.


1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One liquid polymer pump.b. Three mechanical seals.c. Three motor couplings.d. Three pressure relief valves.e. Three O-Rings.f. One mixing chamber.g. Three check valves, mixing chambers.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Prominent

B. Acrison

C. Fluid Dynamics

D. Velodyne

2.02 POLYMER SOLUTION FEED SYSTEMS

A. General:

1. Mounting hardware: 304 stainless steel.2. Plumbing: Scheduel 80 polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nylon, stainless steel.3. Mixing chamber: PVC, acrylic, stainless steel.4. Maximum working pressure of 100 pounds per square inch gauge.

B. Liquid Polymer Pump:

1. Positive displacement, progressing cavity neat polymer metering pump for emulsion polymerwith variable speed control.

2. Pump polymers with apparent viscosities of up to 45,000 centipoise (cps).3. Pumping range of pump for 35 percent active emulsion polymer shall be 0.5 to 10 gallons per

hour.4. Rotors shall be 316 stainless steel.5. Stators shall be Viton.6. Pumps shall have a mechanical seal.


7. Pump Motor:

a. Pumps shall be driven by a 3/4 maximum horsepower, 1,750 revolutions per minute, 0-90volt DC.

b. Washdown duty, totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV).

8. Pumps and motors shall be direct-coupled to gear reducers.9. Variable speed shall be provided by an SCR controller.10. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) with an AC motor is acceptable.11. Discharge pressure switch or pressure relief valve and gauge assembly for pump shutdown on

high pressure.12. Provide calibration chamber mounted to frame with PVC isolation ball valves for measuring

emulsion polymer. Calibrate in milliliters and construct of clear PVC with slip on cap and ½-inch NPT vent connection.

C. Mixing Chamber Assembly:

1. Provide mechanical or non-mechanical mixing chamber to mix polymer and water.2. Mechanical Mixing Chamber:

a. Provide multi-zone mixing chamber to mix polymer and water with sufficient energy.b. Mixing chamber shall have a motor driven impeller that shall create high fluid sheer.c. Solution shall undergo tapered mixing intensity slope as it exits initial sheer zone and

passes through second zone, isolated by baffle.d. Polymer activation efficiency shall be consistent over the dilution water range.e. Mixing chamber shall include a stainless steel injection check valve with PVC body.f. Impeller shall be driven by a washdown duty motor.

1) Maximum 1 horsepower2) Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motor3) Minimum 3,450 revolutions per minute4) Motor shall be direct-coupled to impeller shaft.5) Conform to Section 16150.

3. Non-Mechanical Mixing Chamber:

a. Provide water booster pump to achieve consistent performance and avoid pluggingstaging chambers. Provide ability to flush and drain each chamber.

b. Provide hydrodynamic, blending device to dilute and activate emulsion, dispersion andsolution type polymer with viscosities up to 75,000 cps. and active contents up to 75percent.

c. The liquid polymer activation chamber's mixing energy shall be staged such that itprovides for high, non-damaging mixing energy over the full operating range of the systemwhich then dissipates through concentric chambers.

d. Provide integral water control device, which shall also produce mixing energy by creating apressure drop across its orifice.

1) Device shall be constructed of stainless steel and brass.2) Device shall be designed to allow orifice replacement without disassembly of other

parts of system.3) System shall be designed for use with non-potable dilution water.

e. Provide mixing chamber drain valve with ½ inch fitting plumbed to the nearest hub drain.f. Mixing chamber shall have a maximum rated pressure of 150 pounds per square inch.g. Provide bronze, adjustable-range pressure relief valve on mixing chamber with a range of 50 to 175 pounds per square inch.


h. At no time shall polymer be exposed to excessive shear. Systems which are "retentiontime dependent" - a system which is prone to induce insufficient or excessive mixingenergy depending on flow rate and the subsequent retention time in the mixing chamber,or which utilize conventional static mixers, mixing blocks, eductors or flash mixers, shallnot be considered. All components that require periodic maintenance shall be readilyaccessible.

D. Dilution Water Control System:

1. Dilution water shall be split into two steams.

a. Primary water flow shall be non-potable water (100-1,100 gallons per hour) and shallsupply the mixing chamber.

b. Secondary water flow shall be non-potable water (100-1,100 gallons per hour) and shallbe used to post dilute the activated polymer stream.

c. Static mixer shall blend post dilution water stream with polymer solution prior to exitingunit.

2. Provide electric solenoid valve for on/off control of total dilution water flow to unit.3. Provide rotameter type flowmeter and flow control valve for each for each dilution water

stream to mix chamber.4. Provide pressure reducing valve with adjustable output pressure of 10 to 75 pounds per

square inch gauge. Watts Regulator model U5 or U5B, or equal.5. Provide low pressure switch or flow switch to shutdown unit and alarm on low dilution water

pressure.6. Dilution water and solution output connections shall be 304 stainless steel unions connected to

chassis.

2.03 POLYETHYLENE PIPE OR TUBING

A. General:

1. Provide tubing compatible with chemical being pumped.

B. Material:

1. Pipe: ASTM D2239, AWWA C901 Pressure Class 160, DR 9.2. Tubing: ASTM D2737, AWWA C901 Pressure Class 160, DR 9.3. All joints shall be fusion welded.

2.04 CONTROL EQUIPMENT

A. Provide Polymer Solution System Control Panel for each unit.

1. A control panel integral to the systems frame shall be provided. The enclosure shall be ratedNEMA 4X and constructed of FRP. The control panel shall consist of all digital displays,potentiometers, switches, lights, relays, and other control devices required for a completeoperable system. The control panel and all components shall be industrial duty. All skidmounted electrical components interconnected to the control panel shall terminate atnumbered and labeled terminal blocks. The terminal blocks shall be sized for 14 gauge wire.Wires shall be neatly run through wire race-way and numbered with shrink tubing type labels.Adhesive labels shall not be used. The control panel shall be positioned such that there are noobstructions in front of the control panel per related NFPA requirements.

2. Power: 120 Volt AC, 1 Phase, 60/50 Hertz.3. A circuit breaker on the main control circuit and on each motor shall be provided as

manufactured by Allen Bradley. Fuses shall not be used for circuit protection.


4. Operator Interface – Discrete Selector Switch:

a. System ON / OFF(reset) / Remoteb. One-Turn Potentiometer – Mixer Speedc. Ten-Turn Potentiometer – Progressive Cavity Metering Pump Control

5. Status / Alarm Indicators:

a. Main Power ONb. Display of Metering Pump Ratec. Low Water Pressure Alarm

6. Inputs (signals by others):

a. Remote Start / Stop (discrete dry contact)b. Pacing Signal Based on Process Flow (4-20mA)

7. Outputs:

a. System Running (discrete dry contact)b. Remote Mode (discrete dry contact)c. Common Alarm (discrete dry contact)

B. Provide circuitry to accommodate signals as shown on Drawings.

2.05 COATINGS





3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install polymer feed equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION





a. 1/2 man-day for Installation Services.b. 1 man-day for Instructional Services.


c. 1/2 man-day for Post Startup Services



3.04 DEMONSTRATION



END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. HIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11370A-1

SECTION 11370AHIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Aeration Blower Nos. 1, 2, and 3 (436-M-1401, -1402, and -1403).

B. Provide high speed turbo compressors complete with the following:

1. Inlet Filter Housing.2. Inlet and Outlet Silencers.3. Blow-Off Valves.4. Back Flow Barrier.5. Air Foil Bearings.6. Acoustic Sound Enclosure.7. Instrumentation (See 009-N-15).8. Local Control Panel (436-LCP-1501, -1502, and -1503).9. Master Control Panel (436-MCP-1401).10. Accessories.11. Spare Parts.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Performance Codes:

1. ASME PTC 10: Performance Test Code on Compressors and Exhausters, 1997

B. Standard References:

1. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers



1. All parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.2. Compressors shall be single-stage radial centrifugal design utilizing oil free, airfoil bearings.3. Provide blow-off valve, local control panel, all safety controls integrated high speed

electromotor, frequency converter, monitoring system and sound isolation enclosure allmounted on common base plate.

4. Compressors shall utilize variable speed control for continuous flow control and poweroptimization according to changes in process and ambient conditions.

5. Compressors shall be designed for heavy, continuous, industrial service and be capable ofstarting a minimum of 60 times per hour.

6. Operate within specified vibration levels without overloading the drive motor.7. Operate without sign of distress when operating at specified operating point and off design

conditions.8. Have a pressure-volume curve, which extends from the design system pressure to the upper

system surge pressure with a continuously rising pressure characteristic.9. Will not surge at or above flow rates corresponding to specified surge pressure.10. The maximum input motor horsepower shall not exceed specified nameplate horsepower

when operating at design flows at 40 degrees Fahrenheit (F).

HIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11370A-2 Project No. 12026

11. Deliver oil-free air.

B. High speed turbo compressors shall comply with performance requirements listed in Schedule(s)to Section 11370A.

C. Each compressor shall provide of a turndown to 50 percent of maximum flow rate over the entiretemperature range.

D. Critical Speed: The critical speed of the rotor shall be a minimum of 20 percent above theoperating design speed.

E. Vibration: Maximum unfiltered peak-to-peak radial or axial vibration displacement shall not exceed1.25 mils at all operating speeds when measured at each point on compressor, motor, or itsfurnished base.

F. Noise: Free field sound pressure level without accessories shall not exceed 85 decibels (dbA) ateach point within 3 feet of each compressor and motor assembly when operating at design speedand specified air flow rates.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for high speed turbo compressor equipment specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for high speedturbo compressor equipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofhigh speed turbo compressor equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of high speed turbo compressorequipment in service.






B. General:

1. Manufacturer shall provide all products specified in this Section.2. Compressor manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in design and

manufacture of specified compressors.3. Conduct certified performance testing on each compressor as outlined below. Engineer may

witness all or part of the testing.4. Tests shall be conducted using the actual compressors being supplied.5. All tests shall be conducted at the manufacture’s factory.6. If the certified factory tests indicate noncompliance with the requirements of these contract

documents, the compressors shall be reworked and retested at the manufacturer’s expenseuntil complacence with the specification is attained.

C. Impeller Balance/Vibration Test:

1. Conduct static balancing of impeller units prior to compressor shaft assembly.2. Conduct dynamic balancing of complete compressor rotor assembly.3. Provide certified test report for each unit, including:

a. Date and place of the dynamic balancing.b. Type of balancing machine used (make and model).c. Methods used to achieve final balance (grinding, drilling, end milling, etc.).

D. Maximum vibration amplitude shall be when operating at maximum design speed.

E. Performance Tests:

1. Performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASME PTC 10. Compressors shallbe factory tested to verify flow and wire power at design conditions as well as two additionalflows located in the table below. Test results must indicate performance within 1% on powerand 4% on flow.

2. The blower manufacturer shall confirm guaranteed design wire-to-air (“wire”) kilowatt (kW)values shown below at the time of bid. The wire-to-air kW shall include all losses associatedwith the blower unit and all mechanical and electrical accessories and appurtenancesincluded with the blower package at all specified operating points (such devices include thecooling system, motor, intake filter, controls assembly and variable frequency drive). Thecompleted table will be considered the basis of the Power Guarantee and all relatedrequirements as specified herein.

The guaranteed design wire-to air kW shall be proven by measuring each guarantee pointduring the ASME PTC-10 factory tests. Should the factory tests show that the actual wire-to-airkW is more than the guaranteed design wire-to-air kW, the Contract price shall be adjusted asfollows:Adjusted Contract Price = Contract Price – ($30,000 times C)Where:C = Sum of Evaluated kW for each Design Point in Column D


Evaluated kW for Each Design Point = Evaluation Factor (EF) times (Actual kW(Column A) –Guaranteed Design kW (Column B)

Guaranteed Wire Power table:DesignPoint

Inlet Airflow Rate(SCFM)

Outlet pressure(PSIG)

Inlet Pressure(PSIA)

InletTemperature

(deg. F)

RelativeHumidity %

Wire to Air Powerper blower (kW)

EvaluationFactor

Wire to AirPower per

blower (kW)1 6000 11 14.257 85 90 264 0.15 39.62 5000 11 14.257 85 90 215 0.50 107.53 4000 11 14.257 85 90 176 0.25 44.04 3000 11 14.257 85 90 141 0.10 14.1

Total Power conumption 205.2Note: Performance is based on inlet conditions of blower core, and accounting for electrical and mechanical losses. Tolerance of 4% on Flow, and 1% on Powerapplies.

3. Perform performance tests at the factory. A written statement that the compressorperformance meets the specified performance requirements shall be included as a part of thesubmitted certified test report.

4. Conduct performance testing in conformance with the above standards and as supplementedby the requirements specified herein:

a. Conduct performance tests at 9 test points on each compressor. Two of these pointsshall bracket the rated point.

b. Conduct performance tests at additional points at test conditions equivalent to the fullrange between specified compressor operating limits.

5. In addition to the data specified above, each test report shall contain the following:

a. A copy of certified efficiency data from 50 percent to 100 percent full load for the drivemotor shall be furnished.

b. Data showing performance at rated speed versus discharge pressure from lowest systempressure to maximum pressure. The performance shall be shown in terms of standardcubic feet per minute and brake horsepower required at the input shaft of the compressor. The data shall be for the inlet conditions specified in this section and corresponding tooperation at rated inlet conditions and maximum inlet density. Surge points shall beindicated.

F. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain high speed turbo compressor equipment from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver high speed turbo compressor equipment and system components to their final locations inprotective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture andprevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is madesafe from such hazards.

B. Store high speed turbo compressor equipment in clean, dry location.


1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:



a. One complete set of fuses for each model.b. One complete set of main air filters for each model.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. APG-Neuros as specified in Section 11370A.

B. ABS Pumps Inc. – High Speed Tech OY LTD as specified in Section 11370B.

C. Aerzen USA Corporation as specified in Section 11370C.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Blowers shall be of the Bump Foil Air Bearing type and shall not require oils or lubricants foradequate operation. Leaf or Layered style bearings are unacceptable.

B. Blowers shall be capable of variable speed operation with a minimum turndown of fifty percent(50%) and shall use an integral variable frequency drive. Each blower shall be capable ofoperating continuously and satisfactorily at any point between the minimum and maximum flowswithout any surge, vibration, hunting, or excessive heating of bearings or motor.

C. Blowers shall be designed to operate at optimum specific speed in order to maximize adiabaticefficiency and reduce motor speed. Maximum efficiency is achieved at 95% of full load.

D. Complete blower packages shall be UL Listed, with no exception. UL Listing nameplate to be onpackage exterior. UL listing must be for the complete package.

E. No special foundations shall be required for installation.

F. All elastomeric materials for couplings, valves, etc., shall be rated for a minimum 250° Ftemperature.

2.03 HIGH SPEED BLOWERS

A. Each blower shall be designed to maintain a minimum rise to surge margin of 2.5 psig away fromsurge at any point in its capacity range.

B. Blower impellers shall be of the backswept three dimensional high efficiency configurationdesigned using Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) milled from forged aluminum alloy Type7075, with first lateral critical speed at least 120 percent of the maximum allowable operatingspeed. The impeller shall be mounted directly to the motor shaft and shall be statically anddynamically balanced.

C. Bearings shall be sized for a minimum of expected ten (10) years between major overhauls.

D. Each blower shall be supplied with a sound enclosure covering the entire blower package. The


sound enclosure shall be designed for easy inspection and maintenance of all blower packagecomponents. Quick release panels shall provide easy and quick access for routine maintenance ofthe blower and the package components. Hinged doors must be supplied for all panels heavierthan 50 lbs. The blower package enclosure shall protect against falling water, condensation anddust. Electrical components, instrumentation and instrument connections shall not be mounted orinterface with moving panels of the sound enclosure.

E. Blowers shall not allow heat caused by motor or electrical cooling to be exhausted into the blowerroom. Blower and integral VFD shall not require any external cooling devices such as cooling fansor external glycol cooling.

F. Each blower shall be supplied with built in vibration isolating mounts. The blower manufacture shallbe responsible for attenuating noise and vibration in the blower package such that no specialinstallation base shall be required nor shall any vibration from the blower package be transmittedto the floor or intake and discharge base or the piping.

G. Blowers may be placed on a concrete equipment pad and may be anchored to the pad using 316SS anchor bolts or threaded rods. Manufacturer shall provide the specification for anchor bolt orthreaded rod for the Contractor’s information. Contractor shall furnish and install the Manufacturerspecified anchor bolts.

2.04 APPURTENANCES

A. Each blower package shall include an 18-inch EPDM flexible connector to be installed on thedischarge aeration piping prior to the main air header. The flexible connectors shall be sized for astandard pipe diameter and shall prevent the transmission of noise and vibrations and allow forslight misalignments on the pipe-work between the blower package and the piping. The flexibleconnector shall be suitable for the maximum operating temperature and pressure ratings of theequipment in the air stream.

B. Each blower package shall include a 20-inch EPDM flexible connector to be installed on the inletaeration piping prior to the inlet of the blower package. The flexible connectors shall be sized for astandard pipe diameter and shall prevent the transmission of noise and vibrations and allow forslight misalignments on the pipe-work between the blower package and the piping.

C. Each blower shall be supplied with one14-inch wafer-style, dual plate check valve that shall beinstalled on the discharge line immediately following the discharge cone. Check-valve will becarbon steel body, Aluminum Bronze Disc, Stainless Steel 316 Spring and Viton Seat. Check valveshall meet API 594 standard, ANSI 150 lb.

D. Each blower shall be supplied with an 18-inch manually operated discharge valve. Valve shall belug or wafer type, cast iron body, Stainless steel 316 disc, Stainless Steel 316 Stem, EDM seatsuitable for air service and temperature requirements.

E. Each blower shall be equipped with an integrated blow-off valve actuated by blower pressure.

F. The blow-off valve discharge shall be supplied with a properly sized blow-off silencer.

G. Each blower shall be provided with an integrated combination intake/inlet filter/silencer system.Intake, filter and silencer performance losses shall be included by the blower vendor in the blowerperformance calculation. The intake/inlet filter/silencer system shall be integrated into the overallblower and enclosure design and shall fit within the enclosure.

H. The filter media must have an efficiency of 90% by weight per ASHRAE 52-76 with synthetic dustequivalent to separation > 95% @ 10 microns. Filter element shall be removable withoutdisconnecting the inlet duct and shall be washable by maintenance personnel as a preventative


maintenance procedure.

I. Each blower shall be equipped with the following integrated instrumentation:

1. Inlet differential Pressure sensors for filter monitoring2. Discharge differential Pressure sensor3. Inlet and Discharge Temperature sensors4. Bearing Temperature sensor5. Motor Temperature sensor6. Vibration sensor

2.05 MOTORS

A. Each blower shall be supplied with a high speed Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor (PMSM)driven by a variable frequency drive operating on 460/480 Volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hertz input power.Induction or Brushless DC Motors shall not be acceptable.

B. The maximum allowable motor horsepower shall be as specified.

C. The motor shall have a 1.15 service factor. The motor shall be able to start under the startingconditions required. Blower manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating the starting torquerequirement of the blower and the motor. Certified tests shall be submitted to the Engineer prior toshipment of the equipment.

D. Each blower motor shall be of the PMSM type that has no physical connection between stator andshaft, therefore eliminating brushes, slip rings or break resistors. The PMSM must be combinedwith a Sine Wave Filter (Sinus Filter) and Input Line Reactor.

E. Additional requirements for the blower motors are:

1. Enclosure: TE (Totally Enclosed).2. Insulation: Epoxy coated Class H rated to 180° C (356° F).3. Stator Temperature monitoring: internal thermocouple embedded in motor windings with triple

redundancy.4. Maximum Ambient temperature: 115° F.5. Minimum Ambient temperature: 20° F.6. Duty: Continuous.7. Bearings: Bump-Foil type Air Bearings.8. Standards: Conform to latest issue of IEEE, ANSI, and NEMA.9. Grounding: There shall be a grounding lug attached to the blower scroll.

2.06 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE

A. Each blower shall be equipped with a high efficiency UL listed VFD (Variable Frequency Drive) with97% efficiency at full rated motor speed and power. VFD Manufacturer shall be KEB America.

B. Each VFD shall be supplied with a passive harmonic filter that reduces the THD (Total HarmonicDistortion) to <8% in compliance with IEEE 519 rating. The harmonic filters shall be supplied byArteche, Mirus International or approved equal. Harmonic filter shall be mounted inside the blowerroom or MCC.

C. Each VFD shall have a sinusoidal filter on its output consisting of an L (inductor) and C (capacitor)filter.

D. Each VFD shall have an integrated user interface that includes field bus connection and freeavailable support software. Provide control of VFD via touch screen control panel and PLC.


2.07 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

A. Provide controls, including but not limited to, Local Control Panel (436-LCP-1501, -1502, and -1503) and Master Control Panel (436-MCP-1401), in accordance with Section 11990.

2.08 COATINGS






3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install high speed turbo compressor equipment in accordance with manufacturer's writteninstructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION









HIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR SCHEDULE A

Name of Compressors Aeration Blower Nos. 1, 2, and 3Tag Number(s) 436-M-1401, -1402, and -1403Number of Compressors ThreeFluid Pumped Low Pressure Air


Discharge 14 Suction 20Motor 480 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedDesign Conditions

Design Flow Rate (scfm) Each 6,000Minimum Flow Rate (scfm) Each 3,000Discharge Pressure (psig) 11Inlet Temperature (deg F) 85Elevation above mean sea level (ft) 850Relative Humidity (%) 90

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. HIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11370B-1

SECTION 11370BHIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY




1. Inlet Filter Housing.2. Inlet and Outlet Silencers.3. Blow-Off Valves.4. Back Flow Barrier.5. Magnetic Bearings.6. Acoustic Sound Enclosure.7. Instrumentation (See 009-N-15).8. Local Control Panel (436-LCP-1501, -1502, and -1503).9. Master Control Panel (436-MCP-1401).10. Accessories.11. Spare Parts.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. Performance tests will be conducted in accordance with ISO 5389 ("Turbocompressor’sperformance test code") and VDI 2045 ("Acceptance and Performance Tests on TurboCompressors and Displacement Compressors"), Part 1 and Part 2. Measuring of mass flow ismade according to VDI 2041 ("Orifice Plates and Nozzles for Special Applications"), chapter5.2 with a ISA 1932 nozzle, made according to DIN 1952 and ISO 5167 standard("Measurement of fluid flow by means of orifice plates, nozzles and venturi tubes inserted incircular cross-section conduits running full").





1. All parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.2. Compressors shall be single-stage radial centrifugal design utilizing oil free, magnetic

bearings.3. Provide blow-off valve, local control panel, all safety controls integrated high speed



5. Compressors shall be designed for heavy, continuous, industrial service and be capable ofstarting/stopping a minimum of 60 times per hour.

6. Operate within specified vibration levels without overloading the drive motor.

HIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11370B-2 Project No. 12026

7. Operate without sign of distress when operating at specified operating point and off designconditions.

8. Have a pressure-volume curve, which extends from the design system pressure to the uppersystem surge pressure with a continuously rising pressure characteristic.

9. Will not surge at or above flow rates corresponding to specified surge pressure.10. The maximum input motor horsepower shall not exceed specified nameplate horsepower

when operating at design flows at 40 degrees Celsius (C).11. Deliver oil-free air.12. When blower is not “Called to Run,” the variable frequency drive shall be at 0 Hertz.

B. High speed turbo compressors shall comply with performance requirements listed in Schedule(s)to Section 11370B.





1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for high speed turbo compressor equipment specified.2. Motor data. Per Manufacturer’s Standards.3. Coating systems. Per Manufacturer’s Standards.

C. Shop Drawings:



D. Test Results:












B. General:










1. Performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with ISO 5389. Compressors shall befactory tested to verify flow and wire power at design conditions as well as two additional flowslocated in the table below. Test results must indicate performance within 1% on power and 4%on flow.

2. The blower manufacturer shall confirm guaranteed design wire-to-air (“wire”) kilowatt (kW)values shown below at the time of bid. The wire-to-air kW shall include all losses associated


with the blower unit and all mechanical and electrical accessories and appurtenancesincluded with the blower package at all specified operating points (such devices include thecooling system, motor, intake filter, controls assembly and variable frequency drive). Thecompleted table will be considered the basis of the Power Guarantee and all relatedrequirements as specified herein.

The guaranteed design wire-to air kW shall be proven by measuring each guarantee pointduring the ISO 5389 factory tests. Should the factory tests show that the actual wire-to-air kWis more than the guaranteed design wire-to-air kW, the Contract price shall be adjusted asfollows:Adjusted Contract Price = Contract Price – ($30,000 times C)Where:C = Sum of Evaluated kW for each Design Point in Column DEvaluated kW for Each Design Point = Evaluation Factor (EF) times (Actual kW(Column A) –Guaranteed Design kW (Column B)

Guaranteed Wire Power tableDesignPoint




InletTemperature

(deg. F)

RelativeHumidity %


EvaluationFactor


blower (kW)1 6000 11 14.257 85 90 264 0.15 39.62 5000 11 14.257 85 90 215 0.50 107.53 4000 11 14.257 85 90 176 0.25 44.04 3000 11 14.257 85 90 141 0.10 14.1








b. Data showing performance at rated speed versus discharge pressure from lowest systempressure to maximum pressure. The performance shall be shown in terms of standardcubic feet per minute and input horsepower required at the input to the variable frequencydrive of the compressor. The data shall be for the inlet conditions specified in this sectionand corresponding to operation at rated inlet conditions and maximum inlet density. Surgepoints shall be indicated.







1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:





PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS




2.02 COMPRESSOR FABRICATION

A. High-speed unit shall consist of an integrated turbo compressor – electric motor combination, withthe following components:

1. Impeller and Spiral Volute Casing

a. The impeller shall be shaped from a solid forged piece of high-strength forged aluminumalloy on a numerical machining center using CAM technology. Semi-open impeller designwith 3 dimensional shaped blades individually optimized to the design range of thecompressor. The impeller shall be mounted directly to the motor shaft without a couplingor keyway and have a labyrinth and O-ring seal arrangement.

b. The spiral volute casing with vertical intake and horizontal discharge connection shall bemade of high-strength cast-aluminum alloy A1Si7Mg-T6 (T6=Heat treatment stage).Intake and discharge flanges shall be in accordance with DIN 2576, PN 10.

c. The compressor inlet inducer shall be made of A1Si7Mg-T6 and be integral to the unit.d. The impeller shall be of the standard design configuration and not specifically designed

for a specific duty point.

2. High-Speed Electric Motor


a. An air-cooled, variable-speed compatible, high frequency electric induction motor shall bedesigned for high-speed service.

b. The motor shall be 480 volt 3-phase, high speed induction motor with Class F windinginsulation, soft start, thermal sensors, and thermal protection surveillance software builtinto the integral variable frequency drive.

c. The impeller shall be mounted directly the upper motor shaft, with the motor cooling fanmounted directly to the opposite end of the motor shaft. The motor shaft shall be verticallymounted, be supported by magnetic bearings that provide a smooth vibration free variablerotation speed. The motor-compressor unit shall be mounted to welded steel base/framewith elastic mountings.

3. Magnetic Bearings

a. Continuous rotor position control shall be accomplished by active electromagnet bearings. The magnetic bearings shall consist of two radial and two axial magnetic bearings withtwo continuous rotor position measurement sensors controlled by an active magneticbearing controller. No mechanical contact between moving surfaces, no friction and nowearing of parts. Oil lubrication will not be accepted.

b. The magnetic bearing controller shall be an MBC-12 having a maximum input power of 1kilowatt. The power supply shall be 3 phase, 60 Hertz, 480 volt. Bearing clearances shallbe able to be adjusted and verified by Service personnel. The MBC shall log the last 10events/faults.

c. Provide integral uninterruptable power supply to keep bearings energized until backupgenerator power is available.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. General:

1. All accessories listed in this specification section are to be supplied by the compressormanufacturer as part of the compressor system to ensure system compatibility. Each specifiedaccessory shall be furnished as completely assembled as possible and installed for eachcompressor.

B. Blow Off Valve:

1. The blow off valve shall be an integral part of the compressor to protect it during start up andshut down conditions. It shall be an electro-pneumatically controlled plug type valve that iscontrolled by each compressors control system.

2. The blow off valves shall be mounted on the compressor, be sufficiently sized to handle theflow and pressures seen during start up and shut down and have the following materials ofconstruction:

a. Body – Galvanized Steelb. Plug – Aluminumc. Seal – Viton

C. Expansion Joints:

1. An expansion joint shall be provided in suction piping near the compressor inlet. An expansionjoint shall be provided immediately after the outlet silencer of each compressor. It shall be ofthe bolt on metal bellows type having carbon steel flanges and 304 Stainless Steel bellows.

D. Inlet Filter Box:


1. The filter should be a single-stage filter system having rectangular filter elements mounted inthe vertical position shall be provided for each compressor as indicated on the plan and asspecified below. The filter elements shall be easily removed through a hinged access doorlocated on the side of the filter housing. Each filter system shall be adequately sized for the airflow rate of each compressor.

2. The filters shall be pocket Camfil Hi-Cap having a high density microfine glass fiber filtermedium suitable for high efficiency filtration that meets the EN 779:2002:G4 standards that ismounted on a galvanized steel frame with a hook and lever arrangement for easyreplacement.

3. Each filter system shall include the framework, housing, access door, and adapters that shallbe of stainless steel construction. The access door shall be sealed to prevent air infiltrationand be sufficiently sized to allow easy access to the filters. The housing shall be of single wallconstruction. Filter adapters are also to be supplied to transition from the rectangular filter-housing outlet to the round inlet air pipe.

E. Inlet Silencer:

1. An inlet silencer shall be provided for each compressor. Each inlet silencer shall beadequately sized for each compressor.

2. The inlet silencer shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel and have the following noiseabsorption values given below. It shall be of dual wall construction with a layer of Mineral Woolbetween the inner and outer wall of sufficient thickness to achieve the following performance.

Octave Band (Hertz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000Insertion Loss (Decibels) 3 7 19 35 37 40 33 22

F. Inlet Scrap Trap:

1. Provide a 316 stainless steel screen in the input pipe located between two flanges to keep anylarge pieces of debris larger than 0.08-inch from entering into the compressor.

G. Outlet Silencer:

1. An outlet silencer shall be provided for each compressor. Each outlet silencer shall beadequately sized for each compressor.

2. The outlet silencer shall have flanged connections, be constructed of galvanized steel andhave the following noise absorption values given below. It shall be of dual wall constructionwith a layer of Mineral Wool between the inner and outer wall.


H. Check Valves:

1. A check valve shall be provided for each compressor. It shall be installed in the dischargepipe to prevent back flow.

2. The check valve shall be a high performance wafer type non-slam flapper check valve with acast CF8M body, a cast CF8M clam type plate, a CF8M hinge pin, a metal to metal sealingsurface, a minimum temperature rating of 302 degrees F (150 degrees C) and have amaximum pressure loss of 0.075 pounds per square inch.

I. Shut Off Valve:


1. Provide manual short body butterfly shut off valve for each compressor. Shutoff valve shall begeared for ease of operation. It shall be installed in discharge pipe to isolate compressor fromprocess.

2. Shut off valves shall be mounted between two pipe flanges and operate from negative 14degrees F to positive 266 degrees F. Provide the following materials of construction:

a. Body – Cast Ironb. Disc – 316 Stainless Steelc. Shaft – 420 Stainless Steeld. Seal – Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer (EPDM)

J. Air Pressure and Temperature Gauges:

1. Provide pressure monitoring in inlet and outlet piping for each compressor powered fromMCP.

2. Provide temperature sensors in accordance with Section 13427 in inlet piping and temperaturesensor on motor for each compressor powered from MCP.

K. Blow Off and Motor Cooling Silencer:

1. A blow off and motor cooling silencer shall be provided for each compressor. Each silencershall be adequately sized for the specified airflow rate for each compressor.

2. The silencers shall have flanged inlet and outlet connections, be constructed of galvanizedcarbon steel and have the following maximum operation noise absorption values.


2.04 CONTROLS

A. Provide controls, including but not limited, to Local Control Panel (436-LCP-1501, -1502, and -1503) and Master Control Panel (436-MCP-1401), in accordance with Section 11990.

2.05 COATINGS


B. Stainless steel, bronze, and nonmetallic surfaces shall not be coated.

C. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease.


3.01 INSTALLATION


3.02 IDENTIFICATION









HIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR SCHEDULE B



Discharge 12 Suction 16Motor 480 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedDesign Conditions

Flow Rate (scfm) Each 6,000Minimum Flow Rate (scfm) Each 2,700Discharge Pressure (psig) 11Inlet Temperature (deg F) 85Elevation above mean sea level (ft) 850Relative Humidity (%) 90

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. HIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11370C-1

SECTION 11370CHIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY




1. Inlet Filter Housing.2. Inlet and Outlet Silencers.3. Blow-Off Valves.4. Back Flow Barrier.5. Air Foil Bearings.6. Acoustic Sound Enclosure.7. Instrumentation (See 009-N-15).8. Local Control Panel (436-LCP-1501, -1502, and -1503).9. Master Control Panel (436-MCP-1401).10. Accessories.11. Spare Parts.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. ASME PTC 10: Performance Test Code on Compressors and Exhausters, 1997





1. All parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.2. Compressors shall be single-stage radial centrifugal design utilizing oil free, air foil bearings.3. Provide blow-off valve, local control panel, all safety controls integrated high speed



5. Compressors shall be designed for heavy, continuous, industrial service and be capable ofstarting a minimum of 60 times per hour.

6. Operate within specified vibration levels without overloading the drive motor.7. Operate without sign of distress when operating at specified operating point and off design

conditions.8. Have a pressure-volume curve, which extends from the design system pressure to the upper

system surge pressure with a continuously rising pressure characteristic.9. Will not surge at or above flow rates corresponding to specified surge pressure.10. The maximum input motor horsepower shall not exceed specified nameplate horsepower

when operating at design flows at 40 degrees Fahrenheit (F).

HIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11370C-2 Project No. 12026

11. Deliver oil-free air.

B. High speed turbo compressors shall comply with performance requirements listed in Schedule(s)to Section 11370C.





1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for high speed turbo compressor equipment specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:



D. Test Results:







3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE




B. General:










1. Performance tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASME PTC 10. Compressors shallbe factory tested to verify flow and wire power at design conditions as well as two additionalflows located in the table below. Test results must indicate performance within 1% on powerand 4% on flow.

2. The blower manufacturer shall confirm guaranteed design wire-to-air (“wire”) kilowatt (kW)values shown below at the time of bid. The wire-to-air kW shall include all losses associatedwith the blower unit and all mechanical and electrical accessories and appurtenancesincluded with the blower package at all specified operating points (such devices include thecooling system, motor, intake filter, controls assembly and variable frequency drive). Thecompleted table will be considered the basis of the Power Guarantee and all relatedrequirements as specified herein.

The guaranteed design wire-to air kW shall be proven by measuring each guarantee pointduring the ASME PTC-10 factory tests. Should the factory tests show that the actual wire-to-airkW is more than the guaranteed design wire-to-air kW, the Contract price shall be adjusted asfollows:Adjusted Contract Price = Contract Price – ($30,000 times C)Where:C = Sum of Evaluated kW for each Design Point in Column D


Evaluated kW for Each Design Point = Evaluation Factor (EF) times (Actual kW(Column A) –Guaranteed Design kW (Column B)

Guaranteed Wire Power tableDesignPoint




InletTemperature

(deg. F)

RelativeHumidity %


EvaluationFactor


blower (kW)1 6000 11 14.257 85 90 264 0.15 39.62 5000 11 14.257 85 90 215 0.50 107.53 4000 11 14.257 85 90 176 0.25 44.04 3000 11 14.257 85 90 141 0.10 14.1








b. Data showing performance at rated speed versus discharge pressure from lowest systempressure to maximum pressure. The performance shall be shown in terms of standardcubic feet per minute and brake horsepower required at the input shaft of the compressor. The data shall be for the inlet conditions specified in this section and corresponding tooperation at rated inlet conditions and maximum inlet density. Surge points shall beindicated.






1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:






PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS




2.02 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Discharge spool and elbow shall be ASTM A 36 steel.

B. Flexible joints shall be 316 stainless steel.

C. Blow off discharge silencer shall be ASTM A 36 steel.

D. Blow off valve shall be an aluminum casting alloy or copper casting alloy body.

E. Split disk check valves shall have a cast iron body, stainless steel disc, and Viton seat.

F. Compressor impeller shall be 17-4 pH hardened stainless steel.

2.03 EQUIPMENT:

A. Motor/Aerodynamic Parts:

1. Each compressor motor shall be of the PMSM (Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor) type.2. Each impeller shall be of the backswept three dimensional high efficiency configuration and

rotor system with first lateral critical speed at least 120% of the maximum allowable operatingspeed.

3. The motor shall be able to start under 5% of electric current at design condition.4. Insulation of PM motor shall be Epoxy coated Class H.5. Rotor shall be supported by non-contacting air foil bearings. Leaf type bearings are not

acceptable.6. Electric Standards shall conform to latest issue of IEEE, ANSI, and NEMA.7. The motor shall have a 1.15 service factor. The motor shall be able to start under the starting

conditions required. Compressor manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating thestarting torque requirement of the compressor and the motor. Certified tests shall be submittedto the Engineer prior to shipment of the equipment.

8. Nameplate: NEMA standard stainless steel.


B. Compressors:

1. Each compressor shall be high efficiency turbo compressors with integral permanent magnetsynchronous motor that shall operate on 460/480 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz input power.Induction motors are not acceptable.

2. Compressors shall be capable of variable speed operation.3. Heated air from the motor and inverter shall not be mixed with intake fresh air.4. Compressors shall be of air-foil bearing design and shall not require any water or oil to cool or

lubricate any part of the compressor-motor integral design.5. Impeller material shall be 17-4 pH stainless steel. Impellers shall have the following material

properties:

a. Modulus of elasticity: 28.5 E (psix10-6)b. Yield Stress: 165 ksic. Ultimate Strength: 175 ksi

6. Airfoil bearings must be sized for a minimum of 10 years operation or 20,000-30,000 startsand stops.

7. Noise emission from the compressor package shall not exceed 85 dBA within ± 2 DBAtolerance at the machine location inside the compressor room.

8. The compressor package vibration levels shall be low enough that it shall not require any floorgrouting or anchoring for adequate operation.

9. Each compressor shall be equipped with a sound enclosure covering the entire package. Thesound enclosure shall be designed for easy inspection and maintenance of all compressorpackage components. The compressor enclosure shall protect against falling water,condensation and dust.

10. Each compressor enclosure shall be provided with a filtered inlet for air to enter thecompressor and the compressor motor for cooling. A separate filtered inlet shall be providedfor air cooling of the VFD and CPU. All cooling shall be accomplished with ambient air only.

11. No special foundations shall be required for installation.12. Each compressor shall be certificated by NRTL(Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory)

with appropriate UL standards.

C. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD):

1. Each compressor shall be equipped with a high-frequency integral inverter for motor speedcontrol.

2. Each VFD shall have a support/warehouse/assembly operation in the USA for manufacturing,support and provision of replacement parts.

3. Each compressor shall be equipped with a high efficiency VFD (Variable Frequency Drive)tested to the UL standard with 97% efficiency at full rated motor speed and power.

4. Each VFD shall be supplied with passive harmonic filter that reduces the THD (Total HarmonicDistortion) to < 12% in compliance with IEEE 519 rating.

5. Each VFD shall have a sinusoidal filter on its output consisting of a L (inductor) and C(capacitor) filter.

6. Each VFD shall have an integrated user interface that includes field bus connection and freeavailable support software.

7. VFD control shall be based upon constant motor current, not constant rpm.8. The VFD shall be of high-frequency design, capable of running continuously at 1000 hertz.

“Standard” or “Off-the-shelf” 60 hertz designs that require significant modification to run athigher frequencies are not acceptable.

9. The compressors shall be capable of variable speed operation with a minimum turndown of50 percent (50%). Each compressor shall be capable of operating continuously and


satisfactorily at any point between the minimum and maximum flows without any surge,vibration, or excessive heating of bearings or motor.

D. Accessories:

1. The compressor package sound enclosure shall be designed for permanent indoorinstallation.

2. Operator shall not be required to reach over any component of the compressor package toperform maintenance.

3. Each compressor package shall have flexible connector located at the discharge of thepackage. The flexible connectors shall be sized for a standard pipe diameter and shallprevent the transmission of noise and vibrations from the compressor package into the piping. The expansion joint shall be suitable for the maximum operating temperature and pressureratings of the equipment in the air stream. Provide stainless steel restraining bolts andhardware.

4. Blow-off valve which is actuated by the discharge air pressure, shall be located inside thecompressor package, and supplied by the compressor manufacturer.

5. Compressor manufacturer shall be responsible for attenuating noise and vibration in thecompressor package such that no installation base shall be required nor shall any vibrationfrom the compressor package be transmitted to the piping. Compressor shall be set on a flatconcrete slab.

6. Each compressor shall be supplied with one check valve that shall be installed on thedischarge line. Check valve shall be of split disk, wafer type. Provide wafer or threaded steelbody, split disc type check valve for mounting in compressor discharge piping. Furnish valvewith 304 SS spring and Viton seat

7. Each compressor must be supplied with an isolation valve. Valve shall be lug type, iron body,stainless steel disc, suitable for air service and temperature requirements. Provide wafer body,resilient-seated, lever operated, tight closing butterfly valve for positively isolating thecompressor from discharge manifold piping. Furnish with cast iron body, ductile iron disc,EPDM seat. Valves to have gear operator and handwheel.

8. Inlet Vacuum Gauge: Provide differential pressure gauge to indicate pressure drop through theair filter or equal.

2.04 CONTROLS

A. Provide controls, including but not limited to, Local Control Panel (436-LCP-1501, -1502, and -1503) and Master Control Panel (436-MCP-1401), in accordance with Section 11990.

2.05 COATINGS






3.01 INSTALLATION



3.02 IDENTIFICATION








HIGH SPEED TURBO COMPRESSOR SCHEDULE C



Discharge 16” Suction 20”Motor 480 volt, 3-phase, 60 HertzConstant or Variable Speed Variable SpeedDesign Conditions

Flow Rate (scfm) Each 6,000Minimum Flow Rate (scfm) Each 2,700Discharge Pressure (psig) 11Inlet Temperature (deg F) 85Elevation above mean sea level (ft) 850Relative Humidity (%) 90

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. AIR COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11372-1

SECTION 11372AIR COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Rotary screw air compression unit (510-M-6002).2. Air receivers.3. Filters.4. Refrigerated dryer (510-M-6011).5. Accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association

B. CAGI: Compressed Air & Gas Institute

C. ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers



1. Compressor shall be tested as a completely assembled, piped, and wired unit.2. Compressor and motor characteristics shall be as indicated in Table 1.3. Maximum brake-horsepower (BHP) shall not exceed 100% of motor nameplate rating.4. Compressor shall be capable of continuous full flow operation 24 hr/day at rated capacity and

pressure.5. System control voltage shall be 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 hertz. Dryer voltage shall be 115 volt, 1

phase, 60 hertz.6. Compressor package shall be suitable for use in 40oF to 104oF ambient temperature range.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to confirm compliance withrequirements of this Section. Submit Product Data and Shop Drawings in one completesubmittal package. Partial submittals are unacceptable.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation drawings and specifically prepared technical data, including design capacities.2. Specially prepared wiring diagrams unless standard wiring diagrams are submitted with

Product Data.3. Shop Drawings for control equipment. Include narrative functional description.

C. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for each product component specified in this Section.

AIR COMPRESSOR EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11372-2 Project No. 12026

2. Standard wiring diagrams unless wiring diagrams are specially prepared and submitted withShop Drawings.

3. Catalog cuts and product specifications for control equipment.4. Pressure relief valve sizing calculations.5. Proposed coating system. Submittal information shall be in accordance with Section 09805.




1.04 MAINTENANCE

A. Furnish following spare parts for each compressor.

1. One oil filter.2. One air/oil separator kit.3. Three air filters.4. Lubricating oil (1 fill).

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 ROTARY SCREW AIR COMPRESSION UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Compair.2. Ingersoll-Rand.3. Gardner Denver.4. Kaeser.

B. Rotary Compressor:

1. Air compressor shall be a single stage, oil flooded, air-cooled rotary screw compressorcompletely pre-piped and with pre-wired control system panel.

C. Air End:

1. Single stage, heavy duty, flood lubricated, asymmetrical lobe, totally encapsulated rotaryscrew type.

2. Unit equipped with tapered roller bearings on the discharge end and cylindrical roller bearingson the inlet end for high load carrying capacity.

3. Standard fill is SULLUBE. A biodegradable, 8,000 hour fluid.4. Air end to carry a 5 year warranty.

D. Drive Motor:

1. Provide motors as specified in Table 1.2. NEMA motor connects directly to the compressor male rotor through a gear drive

arrangement. Motor and compressor have a positive alignment through machined matingmembers.

3. Motors shall be TEAO.4. Motor shall be 4 pole (1800 revolutions per minute).5. Motor insulation shall be Class “F”. Class “B” is unacceptable.6. Motor efficiency shall comply with Section 16150.


7. Five year warranty.

E. Lubrication:

1. Lubrication shall be accomplished by inherent pressure differential and without the use of anoil pump.

2. Lubrication system shall be provided with a full flow 5 micron oil filter and oil cooler to assurecooling and filtering of the lubricant prior to reaching the air end.

3. Provide thermostatic oil-mixing valve to assure proper oil temperature and preventcondensation.

4. Compressors shall be filled with a synthetic biodegradable lubricant rated for 8,000 hours atnormal operating conditions.

F. Separator System:

1. Shall consist of a separate first stage reservoir utilizing a shotgun and baffle design toseparate oil from the air.

2. Second stage of separation shall be a replaceable wrapped separator element which will limitoil carryover to no greater than 2 parts per million by weight at 100 pounds per square inchgauge full load operation measured at the discharge of the separator and less than 1 parts permillion measured at the package final discharge.

3. System to include pressure relief valve and automatic blowdown valve with muffler.4. Separator housing to be designed such that no piping or lines need to be disconnected to

replace element.

G. Piping:

1. Encapsulated design to virtually eliminate external piping.2. All control lines shall be of non corrosive construction

H. Oil Cooler / Aftercooler:

1. Coolers shall be air cooled with heat exchanger.2. Coolers shall not have a medium approach temperature greater than 15 F.3. Coolers to have a five year warranty.

I. Inlet Air Filter:

1. Heavy duty, dry-type inlet filter capable of removing 99.9% of all airborne particulate 0.2micron and larger.

J. Starters:

1. Starter(s) shall comply with requirements of Division 16.2. Full voltage 230 volts/460 volts magnetic with 120 volt control circuit transformer, terminal

strip, dual control with "Manual-Off/Reset-Auto" switch and full three phase overloadprotection.

3. Starter enclosure shall be NEMA 4X.4. Provide a minimum of 2 normally open and 1 normally closed contacts.

K. Drive:

1. NEMA motor connects directly to the compressor male rotor through a gear drivearrangement. Motor and compressor have a positive alignment through machined matingmembers. A sturdy steel base facilitates mounting to customer receiver tank or flat surface.


L. Compressor Control Panel:

1. Inlet modulation is standard. Load/Unload controls can be used as an option. In themodulation mode the regulating valve controls the inlet valve, which allows the machine to runcontinuously without shutting down. In the load/unload position, loading will occur atapproximately 35 pounds per square inch below the unload setting. The system pressureswitch controls the inlet control valve, allowing the machine to load/unload by activating theunload solenoid valve, which directs air to the inlet control valve. The inlet control valve closesthe inlet and blows a sump air pressure to atmosphere, reducing receiver pressure andminimizing no-load power consumption when on manual. Automatic selection will stop andstart the compressor responding to the pressure switch setting. Compressor sump/dischargetemperature gauge and line pressure gauge.

2. Protective shutdowns:

a. Air/Fluid high discharge temperature switch, motor overlaod protection, and sumppressure relief valve.

M. Enclosure:

1. Compressor shall be plastic of the clam shell type.2. Enclosure shall be sound insulated, and compressor shall have a maximum full load noise

level in accordance with CAGI/Pneurop test code as indicated in Table 1.3. Compressor and motor shall be isolated from frame with rubber vibration isolators.4. Compressor frame shall be isolated from the floor by rubber vibration pads. No special

foundation shall be required.

N. Compressor Control:

1. Include magnetic starters with three phase overload protection. Include motor starters incontrol panel.

2. Compressor shall have automatic dual control. Compressor shall automatically load afterstarting.

3. Include controls for automatic control of compressor sequencing. Sequencing shall provideautomatic periodic change of lead, lag, lag-lag compressors, and provide for re-sequencingbased on failure of a compressor.

4. Compressor shall cut in and cut out as indicated in Table 1.

2.02 REFRIGERATED DRYER

A. Refrigerated dryer to adhere to CAGI Standard ADF100 Class H: 33 to 39 degree pressuredewpoint at 100oF and 100 pounds per square inch gauge inlet, 100oF ambient, 100% inlet relativehumidity, and 5 pounds per square inch differential maximum pressure drop.

B. Refrigerated dryer shall have a high maximum inlet temperature of 140oF and maximum ambienttemperature of 122oF. High maximum operating pressure is 232 pounds per square inch gauge.

C. Air to air heat exchangers shall be tube in tube made of copper.

D. Environmentally friendly ER134a refrigerant shall be used.

2.03 FILTERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Zander Series X.


2. Sullair Series MPH and MPF.3. Hankison Grade Series.

B. Single stage particulate and coelescing filtration system rated for 150 pounds per square inchgauge working pressure.

C. Particulate retention of 1.0 parts per million and oil retention of 0.01 parts per million at 100 poundsper square inch gauge and 70 F.

D. Housing shall be of powder coated, aluminum construction.

E. Filter:

1. 99.9999% efficiency at 1.0 and 0.01 micron.2. Particulate retention of 1.0 parts per million and oil retention of 0.01 parts per million at 100

pounds per square inch gauge and 70 F.3. Differential Pressure Indicator and Liquid Level Site Glass.4. Audible warning from pressure relief hole sounds if any attempt is made to remove bowl while

under pressure.

F. Particulate and coalescing filters suitable for the air flows and inlet pressure indicated shall beprovided.

G. Built-in automatic drain.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Stainless steel flexible metal hose with galvanized steel MPT ends shall be provided for installationin each air compressor discharge piping.

2.04 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer responsible for surface preparation, priming and finish coating of equipment in plantor field. System shall be compatible and in accordance with Section 09960, System #7.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals.

1. Control equipment including control panel and remote devices wired by Contractor. Complywith Division 16.








TABLE 1AIR COMPRESSOR SCHEDULE

Compressor CharacteristicsUnit Tag Nos. 510-M-6002Type Rotary ScrewCompressor Cooling, Air or Water AirOperating Pressure, psig 125Capacity at Operating Pressure,scfm

102

Cut-In Pressure, psig 125Cut-Out Pressure, psig 150Max. Noise Level at 3 ft, dB(A) 72Electric Motor CharacteristicsHorsepower 25Voltage/Phase 460/3Rated Speed, rpm 1740Service Factor 1.15Housing Type TEAONOTES:nos. = numberspsig = pounds per square inch gaugerpm = revolutions per minutemax. = maximumft = feet

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. COARSE BUBBLE AERATION SYSTEMSProject No. 12026 11376-1

SECTION 11376COARSE BUBBLE AERATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Coarse bubble, fixed header aeration systems for Aeration Basin – Train 1 and Train 2(Aerobic Zone 1D, 1E, and 1F) and ML Channel.

a. Fixed header aeration systems

1) Stainless steel drop pipes.2) Stainless steel manifolds and air distributors.3) Stainless steel diffusers.4) Stainless steel supports and anchors.5) Bolts, nuts and gaskets for aeration system flange connections.

2. All aeration equipment shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer and at the samelocation.

1.02 DEFINITIONS


B. MIG: Metal Inert Gas

C. NPT: National Pipe Thread

D. PSI: Pounds per Square Inch

E. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride

F. SCFM: Standard Cubic Feet per Minute

G. TIG: Tungsten Inert Gas

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers

B. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials


A. General Design Requirements:

1. System shall evenly diffuse air throughout respective basins/tanks for all specified conditions.2. Diffusers shall operate throughout specified airflow range and be designed for an airflow rate

of 200 percent of the maximum airflow rate.3. Diffusers shall create a rolling action in the channel to maintain the suspension of solids in the

waste stream.

COARSE BUBBLE AERATION SYSTEMS Donohue & Associates, Inc.11376-2 Project No. 12026

B. General Requirements:

1. Aerobic Zone 1D:

a. Type of System - Stainless Steel Diffuser, Fixed Headerb. Channel dimensions = 52-feet-6-inches long by 5-feet-9-inches widec. Maximum water depth = 20.00 ft

2. Aerobic Zone 1E:

a. Type of System - Stainless Steel Diffuser, Fixed Headerb. Channel dimensions = 80-feet long by 5-feet-9-inches widec. Maximum water depth = 20.00 ft

3. Aerobic Zone 1F:

a. Type of System - Stainless Steel Diffuser, Fixed Headerb. Channel dimensions = 24-feet-6-inches long by 5-feet-9-inches widec. Maximum water depth = 20.00 ft

4. ML Channel:

a. Type of System - Stainless Steel Diffuser, Fixed Headerb. Channel dimensions = 208-feet long by 6-feet widec. Maximum water depth = 6.00 ft

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for coarse bubble aeration systems specified.2. Manufacturer's specification data and descriptive literature.3. Performance data.4. Provide details of construction and field installation.5. Proposed coating system. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.6. Recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation, and start-up.7. Procedures for proper installation.8. Quantity and type of spare parts being supplied. Spare parts shall be that needed to maintain

the equipment in service for a period of 2 years. Include a list of special tools required forchecking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.

9. Location of parts-supply facilities, service crews, and repair facilities.10. Certified diffuser headloss curves.11. Certified headloss calculation including all losses in diffuser drop pipes, air distributor and air

main (to blowers).12. Performance data including oxygen transfer calculations.13. Certified oxygen transfer performance curves.


C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for coarse bubbleaeration systems.


3. Include aeration grid system layout, cross-section, and diffuser spacing, dimensions andelevations for each basin and/or tank.

4. Drawings showing plan, elevations and appropriate cross sections of basin and/or tank and allequipment.

5. Detailed layout and other drawings required for proper installation.6. Materials of construction.7. Include details of support system.

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofcoarse bubble aeration systems with referenced standards.

2. Certified reports of field tests and observations.3. Certified Oxygen Transfer Performance Curve(s)

a. Submit certified oxygen transfer performance curves to demonstrate capability of theaeration equipment to meet the specified oxygen transfer requirements.

b. Base oxygen transfer curves on the following criteria:

1) A minimum of 3 tests for each specified condition in complete accordance withASCE Clean Water Test Procedure (latest edition).

2) Conduct tests by an independent aeration testing firm in a full scale aeration testtank (minimum of 200 square feet) at the specified submergence and water depthwith a diffuser density equivalent to the specified tank configuration. Diffuserdensity is defined as the ratio of the total tank surface area to the total activediffuser surface area.

3) Conduct shop test with air rate and mass rate of oxygen transfer directlyproportional to the ratio of the shop test tank volume and the design tank volume.

4) Plot of pounds of oxygen per day per 1000 cubic feet of tank volume versus air per1000 cubic feet of tank volume in tap water at 14.7 psia, 20 degrees Celsius andzero dissolved oxygen at the specified submergence.

c. Certify and stamp all curves by a Professional Engineer.d. Submit curves for all specified conditions for approval by the Engineer prior to

manufacturing aeration equipment.




2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of coarse bubble aeration systems inservice.





B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain coarse bubble aeration systems components from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver coarse bubble aeration systems components to their final locations in protective wrappings,containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage fromconstruction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store coarse bubble aeration systems in clean, dry location.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. Stainless Steel Coarse Bubble Channel Aeration:

1) Four Diffuser Assemblies.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 STAINLESS STEEL COARSE BUBBLE CHANNEL AERATION

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Sanitaire Corporation, D-24 diffusers

B. Materials and Fabrication:

1. Stainless Steel – Pipe, Fittings and Supports

a. Fabricate all welded parts and assemblies from sheets and plates of 304L stainlesssteel with a 2D finish conforming to ASTM A240, 554, 774, 778.

b. Fabricate non-welded parts and flanges from sheets, plates or bars of 304 stainlesssteel conforming to ASTM A240 or ASTM A276.

c. Provide drop legs, manifolds and headers of the diameter shown on the Drawings withdimensional tolerances conforming to ASTM A554 and fabrication procedures inaccordance to ASTM A774 & A778.

d. Air distribution headers shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.109-inches.e. Diffuser connectors shall be from cast 316L stainless steel.f. All flanges and bolt assemblies shall be of stainless steel.g. Welds & Welding Procedure

1) Weld in the factory with ER 316L filler wire using MIG, TIG or plasma-arc inert gaswelding processes. Provide a cross section equal to or greater than the parentmetal.

2) Provide full penetration butt welds to the interior surface with gas shielding ofinterior and exterior of joint.

3) Continuously weld both sides of face rings and flanges to eliminate potential forcrevice corrosion.


h. Corrosion Protection and Finishing

1) Clean all welded stainless steel surfaces and welds after fabrication by using thefollowing procedure:

2) Pre-clean all outside weld areas to remove weld splatter with stainless steelbrushes and/or deburring and finish grinding wheels.

3) Finish clean all Interior and exterior welds and piping by full immersion pickling andrinse with water to remove all carbon deposits and contaminants to regenerate auniform corrosion resistant chromium oxide film per ASTM A380 Section 6.2.11,Table A2.1 Annex A2 and Section 8.3.

2. Natural Rubber – Furnish all fixed and expansion joint O-ring gaskets of naturalrubber/SBR with a Shore A durometer of 45 plus or minus 5.

C. Aeration Equipment:

1. Drop Pipes:

a. Provide stainless steel drop pipes from the isolation valve at the air main connection tothe drop pipe connection on the manifold.

b. Provide a stainless steel Van Stone style flange with a 150 pound bolt pattern for thetop connection.

c. Provide a stainless steel band clamp coupling with gasket for the lower drop pipe tomanifold connection.

d. Support drop pipe from upper connection.

2. Fabricate manifold and air distribution headers in sections up to 41 feet in length.

a. Provide eccentric reducers for changes in diameter for constant invert elevation.b. Provide 8 inch diameter and smaller headers with removable end caps and 10 inch

diameter and larger headers with welded end caps.

3. Join sections of manifold or air distribution headers with flanged joints or expansion joints.Design individual header sections for rotation independent of adjacent sections foralignment purposes during installation.

a. Provide flanged joints consisting of face rings, rotating ring flanges, bolts and gaskets.b. Provide expansion joints consisting of a welded flanged expansion barrel, “O” ring

gasket, “O” ring locking flange and hardware to accommodate + 2 inch of movement.

4. Furnish expansion/contraction system for all headers designed for temperature range of125 degrees Fahrenheit consisting of simple and fixed supports and expansion joints.

a. Lengths of header can extend up to 80 feet from restraining point without an expansionjoint.

b. Limit maximum distance between restraining points on a continuous length of headerto 120 feet maximum.

c. Provide an expansion joint on continuous lengths of header between two restrainingpoints.

d. Provide simple supports to restrain header from buoyant uplift forces in compliancewith support this Section.

e. Provide fixed supports in compliance with support this Section.


1) Limit movement to prevent expansion joint blow apart and transmit expansionforces from the header to the fixed support stand.

2) Provide a mechanical link to connect the header and fixed support stand.3) Reinforce the header at the attachment point of the mechanical link.

5. Diffuser Connectors

a. Factory weld to the invert centerline of the air header.b. Design diffuser connectors for two diffusers.c. Furnish PVC plugs for all unused diffuser connectors.d. Provide connectors of length appropriate to the header diameter and positioned so that

air exiting the diffusers clears the header.e. Design header and diffuser connectors as follows:

1) Reinforce the connector header weld joint by providing gussets continuouslywelded between the vertical side wall of the header and the connector ends to limitlong term flexure failure. Minimum gusset thickness is 0.125 inch.

2) Weld connector to the header with a full penetration butt weld to minimize potentialfor crevice corrosion between header and connector. Use of fillet welds at theconnection between the diffuser connector and header is NOT permitted.

3) Resist a vertical dead load applied to the threaded end of the connector thatresults in a bending moment of 1000 inch-pounds without exceeding 24,000 psidesign stress in any part of the header wall or connector.

4) Header wall thickness for unreinforced connectors shall be 0.109-inchesminimum.

6. Support System:

a. All supports shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel.b. Supports- Provide each section of manifold and air distributor with a minimum of two

supports.c. Limit maximum support spacing to 8 feet.d. Design all supports to allow for thermal expansion and contraction forces over a

temperature range of 125 degrees Fahrenheit and to minimize stress build up in thepiping system.

e. Design supports to be adjustable without removing the air distributor from the support.f. Design supports to allow for complete removal from the tank to facilitate installation of

additional headers and in-tank maintenance.g. Manifold Support – 6 inch diameter and larger:

1) Design supports to include hold down guide straps, support structure and anchorbolts.

2) Design guide straps with a 2-inch minimum width to eliminate point load onmanifold and minimize binding.

3) Design support for 2 inches plus or minus vertical adjustment for leveling ofmanifold.

4) Attach supports to tank floor with two stainless steel anchor bolts.

h. Air Distributor and Manifold Supports – 4-inch diameter.

1) Provide guide and fixed type supports to allow expansion/contraction.2) Design supports with hold down straps, support structure and anchor bolt.3) Design support for 1 ½-inch (plus or minus) vertical adjustment for leveling air

distributor to plus or minus 1/4 inch.


4) Guide straps to have 1 ½-inch wide top and bottom contoured bearing surface withchamfered edges to minimize binding and resistance to movement of air distributorunder full buoyant uplift load.

5) Design strap with 1/8-inch clearance around distributor so strap is self-limiting andcannot be over tightened.

6) Fixed straps to have 1 ½-inch wide top and bottom contoured bearing surface withpunched burrs to positively grip the air distributor when tightened.

7) Design strap to be self-limiting to prevent stressing the distributor if the clamp isovertightened.

8) Attach supports to tank floor with one stainless steel anchor bolt.

7. Air Diffusers:

a. Provide diffusers as shown on Drawings. Arrangement and spacing shall be asrecommended by Manufacturer.

b. Provide diffuser inlet end cap with ¾-in, Schedule 80, NPT male pipe threadconnection, and integral hex head nut.

c. Locate exit ports discharging air into liquid on horizontal planes at two levels. Airexiting through ports shall be sheared into relatively small bubbles.

d. Provide deflector device below full length and width of each diffuser to direct liquidbeing aerated along diffuser’s outlet walls. Deflector shall also prevent rags and othermaterial from wrapping around or entering diffuser.

e. Design diffusers to provide full wide ban aeration. Release air uniformly alongminimum 2-foot band beyond each side of air distribution header. Diffuser shall alsohave a minimum uniform air release perimeter of 48-inches. Air exiting from diffusersshall clear air header.

f. Provide diffusers of proven nonclog design with no flexible or moving parts, consistingof balancing nozzle with orifice insert, inverted air reservoir, air exit ports, cast end capat inlet end, and full length deflector.

g. Provide balancing nozzle, with ¾-in NPT male pipe connection and removable andinterchangeable acetal orifice inserts to ensure uniform air flow among diffusers.Design orifice inserts to provide minimum of 2.5 times headloss in header.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install coarse bubble aeration systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install equipment in accordance with Section 15065.

C. Layout and install support anchors in accordance with equipment manufacturer'srecommendations and anchor setting plan.

D. Level aeration system such that all diffusers connected to a header are within plus or minus ¼-inchof a common horizontal plane.





a. 1/2 man-day for Installation Services.b. 1/2 man-day for Instructional Services.c. 1/2 man-day for Post Startup Services



SCHEDULE 1

Location Aerobic Zone1D

Aerobic Zone1E

Aerobic Zone1F ML Channel

System Type Stainless SteelWide Band

Coarse BubbleAerationSystem

Stainless SteelWide Band






Number ofGrids per Basin 3 5 1 12

Number ofDiffusers perGrid

4 4 4 4

Average AirflowRate (SCFM) 40 60 20 200

SCFM: Standard Cubic Feet per Minute

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. FINE BUBBLE AERATION SYSTEMSProject No. 12026 11377-1

SECTION 11377FINE BUBBLE AERATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Fine bubble, membrane disc fixed header aeration systems for Aeration Basin - Train 1(Structure 431) and Aeration Basin - Train 2 (Structure 432).

a. Stainless steel drop pipes.b. PVC manifolds and air distributors.c. Diffuser holders and retainer rings.d. Stainless steel supports and anchors.e. Bolts, nuts and gaskets for aeration system flange connections.f. Air distributor purge systems.g. Membrane disc diffusers and O-ring gaskets.

2. All aeration equipment shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer and at the samelocation.

1.02 DEFINITIONS


B. MIG: Metal Inert Gas

C. PSI: Pounds per Square Inch

D. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride

E. SCFM: Standard Cubic Feet per Minute

F. TIG: Tungsten Inert Gas

1.03 REFERENCES


B. ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials


A. General Design and Performance Requirements:

1. System shall evenly diffuse air throughout respective channel and/or tank for all specifiedconditions.

2. Diffusers shall operate throughout specified airflow range and be designed for an airflow rateof 200% of the maximum airflow rate.

FINE BUBBLE AERATION SYSTEMS Donohue & Associates, Inc.11377-2 Project No. 12026

B. Aeration Basin – Train 1 (Structure 431),

1. Selector Zones 1D, 1E, and 1F - General Requirements:

a. Type of System: Membrane Disc Fixed Headerb. Number of Basins: 3c. Basin Volume: 12,500 gallons per basind. Pass Dimensions: 25 feet long by 25 feet wide per basine. Maximum Pass Water Depth: 20 feet per basinf. Average Pass Water Depth: 20 feet per basin

2. Aerobic Zones 1A, 1B, and 1C – General Requirements:


C. Aeration Basin – Train 2 (Structure 432),

1. Selector Zones 2D, 2E, and 2F - General Requirements:


2. Aerobic Zones 2A, 2B, and 2C – General Requirements:


1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for fine bubble aeration systems specified.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for fine bubbleaeration systems.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance offine bubble aeration systems with referenced standards.

2. Certified reports of field tests and observations.3. Submit certified oxygen transfer performance curves to demonstrate capability of the aeration

equipment to meet the specified oxygen transfer requirements.4. Base oxygen transfer curves on the following criteria:

a. A minimum of 3 tests for each specified condition in complete accordance with ASCEClean Water Test Procedure (latest edition).

b. Conduct tests by an independent aeration testing firm in a full scale aeration test tank(minimum of 200 square feet) at the specified submergence and water depth with adiffuser density equivalent to the specified tank configuration. Diffuser density is definedas the ratio of the total tank surface area to the total active diffuser surface area.

c. Conduct shop test with air rate and mass rate of oxygen transfer directly proportional tothe ratio of the shop test tank volume and the design tank volume.

d. Plot of pounds of oxygen per day per 1000 cubic feet of tank volume versus air per 1000cubic feet of tank volume in tap water at 14.7 psia, 20 degrees Celsius and zero dissolvedoxygen at the specified submergence.

5. Certify and stamp all curves by a Professional Engineer.6. Submit curves for all specified conditions for approval by the Engineer prior to manufacturing

aeration equipment.




2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of fine bubble aeration systems in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.



B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain coarse bubble aeration systems components from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver fine bubble aeration system components to their final locations in protective wrappings,containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage fromconstruction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store fine bubble aeration system in clean, dry location.

1.08 MAINTENANCE


A. Extra Materials:


a. 20 Membrane Disc Diffusers.b. 20 Diffuser Retainer Rings.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sanitaire.

B. Aquarius.

C. Siemens.

D. EDI.

2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Stainless Steel – Pipe, Fittings and Supports

1. Fabricate all welded parts and assemblies from sheets and plates of 316L stainless steel witha 2D finish conforming to ASTM A240, 554, 774, 778.

2. Fabricate non-welded parts and flanges from sheets, plates or bars of 316L stainless steelconforming to ASTM A240 or ASTM A276.

3. Welds & Welding Procedure

a. Weld in the factory with ER 316L filler wire using MIG, TIG or plasma-arc inert gas weldingprocesses. Provide a cross section equal to or greater than the parent metal.

b. Provide full penetration butt welds to the interior surface with gas shielding of interior andexterior of joint.

c. Continuously weld both sides of face rings and flanges to eliminate potential for crevicecorrosion.

4. Corrosion Protection and Finishing - Clean all welded stainless steel surfaces and welds afterfabrication by using the following procedure:

a. Pre-clean all outside weld areas to remove weld splatter with stainless steel brushesand/or deburring and finish grinding wheels.

b. Finish clean all interior and exterior welds and piping by full immersion pickling and rinsewith water to remove all carbon deposits and contaminants to regenerate a uniformcorrosion resistant chromium oxide film per ASTM A380 Section 6.2.11, Table A2.1 AnnexA2 and Section 8.3.

B. Natural Rubber – Furnish all fixed and expansion joint O-ring gaskets of natural rubber/SBR with aShore A durometer of 45 plus / minus 5.

C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) – Pipe and Fittings


1. Produce all PVC pipe and fittings from PVC compound with a minimum tensile strength of7000 psi.

2. Provide lower drop pipe, manifold and air distributors as follows:

Diameter Wall Thickness ASTM Standard4-inch SDR 33.5 D3915, 30346-inch and Larger Schedule 40 D1784, 1785, 2466

3. Design air distributors and manifolds to withstand 125 degrees Fahrenheit mean walltemperature.

4. Add two parts by weight of titanium dioxide per 100 parts of resin to PVC compounds formanifolds, air distributors, joints and PVC diffuser assembly components to minimizeultraviolet light degradation. PVC piping shall consist of 2 percent average TiO2 content withminimum sampling concentration of 0.5 percent TiO2.

5. Factory solvent weld all PVC joints.

D. EPDM - Membrane Disc Diffusers and Gaskets

1. Manufacture circular membrane diffuser discs with integral O-ring of EPDM synthetic rubbercompound with precision die formed slits. Thermoplastic materials (i.e. plasticized PVC orpolyurethane) are not acceptable.

2. Add carbon black to the material for resistance to ultraviolet light.3. Design diffuser as one piece injection molded part with a minimum thickness of 0.080 inches

for 9 inch diameter unit.4. Limit the maximum tensile strength of the diffuser to 10 psi when operating at 2.4

SCFM/square foot of material. Furnish proportionately thicker material for larger diameter discdiffusers to limit the maximum tensile stress and to resist stretching.

5. Produce diffusers free of tears, voids, bubbles, creases or other structural defects.6. Furnish diffuser material to meet the following:

Item Values / Units ASTM StandardBase Polymer EPDM D573UV Resistance Carbon BlackSpecific Gravity 1.25 or lessDurometer – Minimum 58 percent plus/minus 5 percent D2240Modulus of Elasticity 500 psi D412Ozone Resistance(72 hours: 40 degreesCelsius parts per million perhour)

No cracks at 2X magnification D1171, Test A

Tensile Strength 1200 psi D412Elongation (Percent)

Retained 70 hours at100 degrees Celsius

Minimum at break

75 Percent Maximum

350 Percent

D573

D412

7. Quality Control – Test diffuser using primary sampling criteria outlined in Military Standard105E.

E. Provide all flanges for attachment of stainless steel to carbon steel with a follower flange designhaving a drilling conforming to Standard for 150-pound flanges.

F. Furnish all nuts, bolts and washers including anchor bolts in 316 stainless steel. Anchor bolts forsupport systems shall be epoxy adhesive anchor bolts as recommended by manufacturer and inaccordance with Section 05500.


2.03 AERATION EQUIPMENT

A. Drop Pipes:

1. Provide stainless steel drop pipes from the isolation valve, or as shown on Drawings, at the airmain connection to the drop pipe connection on the manifold.

2. Provide a stainless steel Van Stone style flange with a 150-pound bolt pattern for the topconnection.

3. Provide a stainless steel band clamp coupling with gasket for the lower drop pipe to manifoldconnection.

4. Support drop pipe from upper connection.

B. Manifolds:

1. Provide PVC manifolds for connection to the air distribution headers.2. Fabricate manifolds with 4-inch diameter fixed threaded union or flanged joints for connection

to the air distributors.3. Design manifold, distributor connections and supports to resist thrust generated by

expansion/contraction of the air distributors over a temperature range of 125 degreesFahrenheit.

4. Connect manifolds with fixed threaded union or flanged joints to prevent rotation or blow apart.5. Support manifold with minimum two stainless steel supports.

C. Air Distributors and Diffuser Holders:

1. Provide 4-inch diameter air distributors perpendicular to the air manifold.2. Fabricate distributors with single 9-inch disc diffuser holders solvent welded to the crown of the

air distributor for complete air seal and strength. Saddle mount assembly is also acceptable.Diffuser holders shall be installed by manufacturer. Field installation of diffuser holders willnot be acceptable.

3. Design distributors and holders to resist a dead load of 200 pounds applied vertically to theouter edge of the diffuser holder.

4. Provide 4-inch diameter threaded removable end caps complete with gasket, threadedcoupling and end plate for clean out at the end of each distributor.

D. Air Distributor and Manifold Connection Joints

1. Join air distributor sections with positive locking fixed threaded union or flange type joints for allsubmerged header joints to prevent blow apart and rotation.

2. Design threaded union joints with spigot section connected to one end of the distributionheader, a threaded socket section connected to the mating distribution header, an “O” ringgasket and a threaded screw on retainer ring. Solvent welding shall be done in the factory.

3. Design flanged joints with 125-pound drilling angle face ring, follower flange and stainlesssteel hardware.

4. Provide adjustable fixed PVC flange joints and type 316L stainless steel bolts, nuts, andwashers. Bolts shall be a minimum 5/16-inch. PVC flanges shall be minimum 7/32-inch wallthickness.

E. Support System:

1. All supports shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel.2. Provide each section of manifold and air distributor with a minimum of two supports.3. Limit maximum support spacing to 8 feet.4. Design all supports to allow for thermal expansion and contraction forces over a temperature

range of 125 degrees Fahrenheit and to minimize stress build up in the piping system.


5. Design supports to be adjustable without removing the air distributor from the support.6. Design supports to allow for complete removal from the tank to facilitate installation of

additional headers and in-tank maintenance except anchor bolts.7. Manifold Support – 6 inch diameter and larger

a. Design supports to include hold down guide straps, support structure and anchor bolts.b. Design guide straps with a 2-inch minimum width to eliminate point load on manifold and

minimize binding.c. Design support for 2-inches plus or minus vertical adjustment for leveling of manifold.d. Attach supports to tank floor with two stainless steel anchor bolts.

8. Air Distributor and Manifold Supports – 4-inch diameter.

a. Provide guide and fixed type supports to allow expansion/contraction.b. Design supports with hold down straps, support structure and anchor bolt.c. Design support for 1 ½-inch (plus or minus) vertical adjustment for leveling air distributor

to plus or minus ¼-inch.d. Guide support

1) Guide straps to have 1 ½-inch wide top and bottom contoured bearing surface withchamfered edges to minimize binding and resistance to movement of air distributorunder full buoyant uplift load.

2) Design strap with 1/8-inch clearance around distributor so strap is self-limiting andcannot be over tightened.

e. Fixed supports

1) Fixed straps to have 1 1/2-inch wide top and bottom contoured bearing surface withpunched burrs to positively grip the air distributor when tightened.

2) Design strap to be self-limiting to prevent stressing the distributor if the clamp is overtightened.

f. Attach supports to tank floor with one stainless steel anchor bolt.

F. Liquid Purge Assembly

1. Liquid Purge System - Provide a liquid purge system to drain the entire submerged aerationpiping system for each aeration grid including airlift purge eductor line and control valve.

G. Flexible Membrane Disc Diffuser Assemblies

1. Furnish diffuser assemblies including diffuser, diffuser gasket, holder, retaining ring and airflow control orifice.

2. Membrane Diffuser

a. Incorporate an integral check valve into the membrane diffuser.b. Design and test diffusers for a dynamic wet pressure (DWP) of 12 inches plus or minus 20

percent water column at 1.0 SCFM/diffuser and 2-inches submergence.c. Visual Uniformity – Observe diffusers for uniform air distribution across the active surface

of the diffuser at 1.0 SCFM/diffuser and 2-inches submergence. Active surface is definedas the perforated horizontal projected area of the diffuser.

d. Quality Control – Test diffuser using primary sampling criteria outlined in Military Standard105E.

3. Diffuser Holders Support Plate and Retainer Rings


a. Design holder with air flow control orifice and plenum chamber below the diffuser. Holderto provide peripheral support for the diffuser.

b. Diffuser Support Plate – Provide a support plate to form an air plenum under the diffuserand support for the membrane when the air is off.

c. Design retainer ring to seal the diffuser and O-ring in the holder to prevent air leakagearound gasket.

d. Design retainer ring threads with minimum cross section of 1/8-inch and allow for onecomplete turn to engage threads.

H. Anchor Bolts

1. Anchor bolts shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel.2. Design anchor bolts for embedment in 4,000 psi concrete with a pullout safety factor of 4.3. Provide epoxy adhesive anchor bolts in accordance with Section 05500 of the Project

Specifications.

2.04 COATINGS





3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install fine bubble aeration systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.




a. 2 man-days for Installation Services.b. 1 man-day for Instructional Services.c. 2 man-days for Post Startup Services



3.03 DEMONSTRATION

A. After installation is complete, test and demonstrate operation of equipment in accordance withSection 01820. In addition to services specified above, provide Supplier’s or Manufacturer’s field


services as required to successfully complete systems demonstrations in accordance with Section01820.

SCHEDULE 1 – TRAIN 1 AND 2 SELECTOR ZONES

Location*SelectorZone 1D

Structure 431

SelectorZone 1E

Structure 431

SelectorZone 1F

Structure 431

SelectorZone 2D

Structure 432

SelectorZone 2E

Structure 432

SelectorZone 2F

Structure 432System Type Fine Bubble

Membrane Disc– Fixed Header

Fine BubbleMembrane Disc– Fixed Header






150 150 150 150 150 150

MinimumNumber of AirDistributionheaders per Grid

10 10 10 10 10 10

Maximum AirRate per Diffuser(SCFM)

3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5

Minimum AirRate per Diffuser(SCFM)

0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5

Minimum DropPipe Diameter(inches)

6 6 6 6 6 6

MaximumPressure at Topof Drop (PSIG)

9.46 9.46 9.46 9.46 9.46 9.46

Clean WaterMinimum SOTE(Percent)**

34 34 34 34 34 34

Average AirflowRate (scfm) 75 75 75 75 75 75

Maximum AirflowRate (scfm) 325 325 325 325 325 325

PSIG – Pounds Per Square Inch GaugeSCFM – Standard Cubic Feet Per MinuteSOR – Standard Oxygen RequirementSOTE – Standard Oxygen Transfer Efficiency% - Percentlb O2/day – Pounds of Oxygen per Day*NOTE – There are 2 Aeration Basins. Each basin has 3 Selector Zone grids and 6 Aeration Basin Grids.


SCHEDULE 2 – TRAIN 1 AERATION ZONES

Location*Aerobic

Zone 1A-1Structure 431

AerobicZone 1A-2

Structure 431

AerobicZone 1B-1

Structure 431

AerobicZone 1B-2

Structure 431

AerobicZone 1C-1

Structure 431

AerobicZone 1C-2









600 470 370 285 180 180


9 7 6 6 6 6


3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5


0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5


8 6 6 6 6 6


9.46 9.46 9.46 9.46 9.46 9.46

Clean WaterAverage LoadingMin. SOTE(Percent)**

38 38 37 37 35 35

Average LoadingSOR (lb O2/day)per Grid

6,285 5,040 4,025 3,020 1,675 1,675

Clean WaterMaximumLoading Min.SOTE (Percent)**

34 34 34 33 32 32

MaximumLoading SOR (lbO2/day) per Grid

16,725 13,380 10,700 8,025 4,450 4,450



SCHEDULE 3 – TRAIN 2 AERATION ZONES

Location*Aerobic

Zone 2A-1Structure 432

AerobicZone 2A-2

Structure 432

AerobicZone 2B-1

Structure 432

AerobicZone 2B-2

Structure 432

AerobicZone 2C-1

Structure 432

AerobicZone 2C-2









600 470 370 285 180 180


9 7 6 6 6 6


3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5


0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5


8 6 6 6 6 6


9.46 9.46 9.46 9.46 9.46 9.46

Clean WaterAverage LoadingMin. SOTE(Percent)**

38 38 37 37 35 35

Average LoadingSOR (lb O2/day)per Grid

6,285 5,040 4,025 3,020 1,675 1,675

Clean WaterMaximumLoading Min.SOTE (Percent)**

34 34 34 33 32 32

MaximumLoading SOR (lbO2/day) per Grid

16,725 13,380 10,700 8,025 4,450 4,450


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. NOZZLE SLUDGE MIXING SYSTEMSProject No. 12026 11380-1

SECTION 11380NOZZLE SLUDGE MIXING SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Two complete sludge mixing systems consisting of floor mounted mixing nozzleassemblies and mixing pumping equipment. One system shall be furnished with anabove sludge surface scum busting nozzle

a. Digester Mixing Pump No. 3 (523-P-3303).b. Sludge Storage Tank Mixing Pump No. 4 (524-P-3304).



1. Nozzles shall be designed to produce a homogeneous mixture inside the tank and toprevent solids deposition for Digester No. 3 and Sludge Storage Tank No. 4 of propertiesshown below:

a. Tank Material: Concreteb. Nominal Diameter: 100-ftc. Nominal Side Water Depth: 32-ftd. Nominal Volume: 1,900,000 gallons

2. Equipment shall be suitable for mixing thickened digested sludge with a solidsconcentration up to 6.0%. System serving Digester No. 3 will predominantly handle 3%solids digested sludge.


4. Design equipment so parts readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicatedand replaced, and suitable for service specified.

1.03 SUBMITTALS





B. CFD Results:

1. Submit factory certified CFD model(s) for tank of similar geometry, solids concentration,and conditions to show how manufacturer’s mixing equipment with the number ofnozzles provided, in conjunction with nozzle orientation, flow and head conditions willcreate a mixing pattern suitable to mix the tank contents.

NOZZLE SLUDGE MIXING SYSTEMS Donohue & Associates, Inc.11380-2 Project No. 12026







1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty in accordance with the special warranty requirements in SC-13.07.




PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. JetMix Vortex Mixing System

B. Rotamix Mixing System

C. Hydraulix Process Mixing System

D. No Substitutes Permitted

2.02 MIXING NOZZLE SYSTEM

A. General:

1. Location and quantity of nozzles shall be determined by Manufacturer. Contractor shallcoordinate piping layout with Manufacturer.

2. Direction of nozzles shall be set at time of installation per manufacturer’srecommendations based on CFD modeling.

B. JetMix Nozzle System:

1. Nozzles:

a. Nozzle assemblies consist of single nozzle construction.b. Shall be ASTM A532 Class II, Type C Chrome iron with a minimum hardness of

450/550 Brinell throughout the entire nozzle wall.c. Discharge angle shall be 5-deg below horizontal.d. Shall incorporate flow control vanes to reduce nozzle turbulence and improve discharge

pattern. 12” taper length is not considered equal to flow control vanes.


e. Nozzle shall have 6-inch diameter, van Stone style, flange connection allowing foradjustment in alignment of 360 degrees. Quick disconnect or victaulic type couplings arenot acceptable.

f. Nozzle construction shall be of an eccentric design and create a downward force toenhance the sweeping pattern across the tank floor, while preventing solids buildup.

C. Rotamix Nozzle System:

1. Nozzles:

a. Nozzle assemblies consist of single and double nozzle construction.b. Shall be ASTM A536 glass-lined cast ductile iron.c. Minimum 1-inch nominal wall thickness or greater to protect against scratchy

conditions.d. Design shall be a long straight taper length of at least 12-inches.e. Nozzles shall have 6-inch diameter flange connection allowing for adjustment in

alignment of 360 degrees. Quick disconnect to victaulic type couplings are notacceptable.

2. Assembly Fittings:

a. Shall be ASTM A536 glass-lined cast ductile iron, with 150-lb flanged pipingconnection.

3. Base:

a. Shall be fabricated carbon steel, with ¾-inch mounting holes for 5/8-inch anchorbolts.

4. Anchor Bolts:

a. Shall be 5/8-inch diameter, and of sufficient length to support thrust loads fromnozzles.

b. 316 stainless steel construction.

5. Glass Lining:

a. Internal porcelain coating suitable for thickened waste activated sludge. Metalpreparation shall follow Manufacturer’s recommended procedures.

b. Glass coating shall form an integral molecular chemical/mechanical bond with thebase metal. Bond shall withstand a metal yield of 0.001 inch/inch without damage ofthe glass.

c. Minimum thickness of 0.01-inch.d. Hardness exceeding 5 on the Mohs scale.e. Density of 2.5 – 3.0 grams per cubic centimeter.f. Withstand instantaneous thermal shock of 350-deg F without defects.g. Weight loss less than 3 millagrams per square inch when tested in accordance to

ASTM C283-54.h. No visible loss of surface gloss after immersion in 8% sulfuric acid at 148-deg F for

a period of 10-minutes.i. Pin holes, crazing, or fish scale shall be limited to 0.01% of the total glass surface.

D. Hydraulix Nozzle System:

1. Nozzles:


a. Each nozzle shall be of 0.50 inch, 304 stainless steel construction, lined with 0.50inch ASTM D2240 rubber coating. Nozzle shape shall provide a long straight taperlength of at least 12 inches.

2. Assembly Fittings:

a. Shall be ASTM D2240 rubber lined cast ductile iron with 150 pound flanged pipeconnections.

3. Base:

a. Shall be fabricated of carbon steel, with ¾-inch mounting holes for 5/8-inch anchorbolts.

4. Anchor Bolts:

a. Shall be 5/8-inch diameter, and of sufficient length to support thrust loads fromnozzles.

b. 316 stainless steel construction.

5. Rubber Lining:

a. All assemblies shall be lined with RS-40001 rubber coating. Material shall beresistant to temperature, abrasion, wastewater fluids and gases, grease build-up,struvite deposits and attack from salts and acids.

b. Surface preparation, application and curing shall be in complete accordance withcoating system manufacturer’s procedures.

c. Lining system shall have a minimum thickness of 0.50 inches.d. Rubber material shall have a minimum tensile strength of 3000 PSI, rated for 180°F

service temperature and have a minimum hardness rating of 60-65 Shore-A.

2.03 PUMPS

A. Manufacturers:

a. Wemco (Provided with JetMix Vortex Mixing System)b. Vaughan (Provided with Rotamix Mixing System)c. Hayward Gordon (provided with Hydraulix System)

B. General:

1. Pump shall be horizontal-mount, belt driven, non-clog, chopper type design for pumpingthickened activated sludge with solids concentration up to 6.0%.

2. Materials entering the pump shall be chopped/macerated and conditioned by the pump.3. Equipment shall comply with the Schedule 1 of this Section, flow and head conditions to

be verified by Manufacturer.4. Motor horsepower shall be sized so pump is non-overloading throughout entire pump

performance curve.5. Equipment shall be designed for continuous operation.6. Pumps shall resist wear from abrasive slurries and maintain hydraulic performance as

wear occurs.7. Suction and discharge flanges shall be drilled to meet ANSI 150 class bolting.

C. Materials:

1. Pump case and back plate: Ductile Cast Iron, ASTM A533 or Cast Iron A48.


2. Inlet manifold: 150-lb. standard inlet flange, cleanout, 1/4"-inch NPT suction pressuretap, drain connection and mounting feet.

3. Impeller: cast alloy steel, ASTM A148 hardened to a minimum of 60 Rockwell C.4. Cutter Bar and Teeth: T1 alloy plate steel hardened to a minimum of 60 Rockwell C.5. Cutter Nut and Upper Cutter: cast alloy steel, ASTM A148 hardened to a minimum of 60

Rockwell C.6. Bearing Housing: Ductile Cast Iron, ASTM A536.7. Shaft: Steel, AISI 4140 heat treated.8. Fasteners: Stainless steel, Type 316.

D. Pump Fabrication:

1. Pump case and Back Pull-Out Plate:

a. Shall be semi-concentric design with first half of circumference being cylindricalbeginning after pump outlet. The remaining circumference spiraling outward toflanged centerline discharge.

b. Back pull-out design shall incorporate jacking bolts for adjustment of impeller-to-cutter bar clearance.

c. Back pull-out design shall allow removal of pump components without requiringdisconnection from piping.

d. All water passages shall be smooth and free of blowholes and imperfections.e. Backplate shall be sealed to the bearing frame with O-rings for external adjustment

of the impeller-bar clearance.f. Backplate shall incorporate the raised face portion of the seal labyrinth to engage the

machined grooves in the rotating impeller.

2. Inlet Manifold:

a. Pump assembly mounted horizontally with 150-lb inlet flange.b. Shall include cleanout, drain connection, and mounting feet.

3. Impeller:

a. Impeller shall be semi-open type with pump out vanes to reduce seal area pressure.b. Chopping/maceration of materials shall be accomplished by action of cupped and

sharpened leading edges of impeller blades moving across cutter bar at intakeopenings.

c. Maximum clearance between impeller and cutter bar shall be 0.015-in and shall beexternally adjustable by means of adjustment screws.

d. Impeller shall be dynamically balanced.e. Impeller shall be keyed or threaded to the shaft and shall have no axial adjustments

or set screws.

4. Cutter Bar:

a. Shall be recessed into pump bowl.b. Shall be replaceable.c. Shall extend diametrically across entire funnel shaped pump suction opening to

within 0.05-inches of the cutter nut.

5. Cutter/Deflector Nut:

a. Impeller shall be secured to shaft using a cutter/deflector nut.b. Nut shall be designed to cut stringy materials and prevent binding.


6. Cutting Teeth/Upper Cutter:

a. Shall be threaded or bolted into the back pull-out adapter plate above the impeller.b. Shall be designed to cut against pump-out vanes and impeller hub, reducing and

removing stringy materials from seal area.

7. Bearings:

a. Provide two back-to-back mounted single row angular contact ball bearings to takeup shaft thrust in both directions.

b. Bearings shall be rated for a minimum B10 life of 100,000 hours.

8. Bearing Housing:

a. Bearing housing shall be machined with piloted bearing fits for concentricity of allcomponents.

b. Bearings shall be oil-bath lubricated with ISO Gr. 46, or heavier, turbine oil.c. Provide built-in sight glass to check oil level.d. Oil reservoir shall be sealed at both ends with Viton double lip seals to prevent

entrance of foreign matter.

9. Mechanical Seal:

a. Mechanical seal shall be flushless, requiring no seal flush.b. Seal shall be cartridge-type and shall be pre-assembled and pre-tested so no

settings or adjustments are required.c. Seal shall be made of 316 stainless steel containing Viton O-rings and tungsten

carbide seal faces. Cartridge shall include a heat treated seal sleeve and a ductileiron seal gland.

d. Any springs used to push the seal faces together must be shielded from the pumpedfluid.

e. The mechanical seal shall be lubricated and cooled by a separate oil chamber. Theoil chamber shall have a 10-psi pressure relief valve.

f. The area between the seal oil chamber and the bearing oil chamber shall be ventedand drained to prevent contamination of the bearing.

10. V-Belt Drive:

a. Provide a “stationary control” variable speed drive complete with belts and sheaves. Sheaves shall be Woods 100 rpm adjustable sheaves and shall be factory set at 50rpm either direction from specified pumping rate.

b. Drive shall provide means to adjust speeds while drive is not operating.c. Provide enclosed and approved metal belt guard.

11. Mounting:

a. Provide mounting as indicated in Schedule 1 to Section 11380.b. Provide a common pump/motor base suitably reinforced to support the full weight of

pump and motor.c. Provide an adjustable motor base so that motor position can be adjusted for coupling

installation and alignment.

E. Fasteners:

1. Manufacturer shall provide all necessary fastening hardware including expansionanchors and anchor bolts.


F. Motors:

1. Motor as specified in Schedule 1 of Section 11380.2. 460 V, 3-phase, 60 Hz.3. Maximum horsepower: 100.4. Motor rpm: 1,800.5. Motor shall conform to requirements of Section 16150.6. Size to prevent overheating and damage to motor when operating over entire range of

specified operating conditions.7. Embed three thermal switches (523-TSH-3303 and 524-TSH-3304) in windings, one per

phase, to provide high temperature shutdown protection. Wire switches in series tocontrol panel. Provide motor protection/status relay module, specific to sensors used.

8. Provide motor with heavy duty eye-bolts for lifting.

2.04 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming, and finish coating of ferrousmetal components prior to shipment.


2.05 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts necessary to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years,including but not limited to the parts listed below.

1. Total of one (1) cutter bar.2. Total of one (1) impeller.3. One (1) set of O-rings and gaskets per mixing system.4. One (1) slurry seal per mixing system.



D. Provide an adequate quantity of Manufacturer-approved lubricants to conform with theManufacturer-defined preventative maintenance practices through the warranty period asdefined in the special warranty requirements in SC-13.07.


3.01 INSTALLATION






1. Representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at the job site orclassroom designated by Owner a minimum of three separate occasions for theminimum workdays specified below, travel time excluded.

a. 3 workdays for Installation Servicesb. 1 workday for Instructional Servicesc. 3 workdays for Post-Startup Services

2. After installation is complete, test and demonstrate operation of equipment inaccordance with Section 01820. In addition to services specified above, provideSupplier’s or Manufacturer’s field services as required to successfully complete systemsdemonstrations in accordance with Section 01820.



SCHEDULE 1SLUDGE STORAGE MIXING PUMP

Name of Pump(s) Sludge Storage Tank Mixing Pump No. 3Digester Mixing Pump No. 4

Tag Number(s) 523-P-3303, 524-P-3304Fluid Pumped Digested SludgeMaximum Motor Horsepower 100Minimum Suction and Discharge Size 14/12Mounting HorizontalMotor Voltage 460 v, 3-phase, 60 hzConstant or Adjustable Speed Adjustable SpeedPerformance Requirement at Rated Speed

Maximum Pump Speed (rpm)Design Operating Point (Wemco-JetMix)

Capacity (gpm) 5,700Head (ft) 40Minimum Efficiency (%)

Shutoff Head (Wemco-JetMix)Head (ft)

Design Operating Point (Vaughan-Rotamix)Capacity (gpm) 7,000Head (ft) 40RPM 675

Shutoff Head (Vaughan-Rotamix)Head (ft) 58

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SUBMERSIBLE MIXING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11381-1

SECTION 11381SUBMERSIBLE MIXING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Filtrate Equalization Mixer (455-M-5621).2. Mixer supports / alignment masts.


A. Performance Requirements:

1. Provide submersible mixer for Filtrate Equalization Tank (Structure 455).2. Tank shall contain filtrate from Digested Sludge gravity belt thickening.3. Each mixer shall be capable of the following performance:

Parameter Units ValueNumber of Mixers 1Maximum Mixer Speed Revolutions per Minute 900Motor Volts / Phase / Hertz 460/3/60Maximum Motor Speed Revolutions per Minute 900Maximum Nominal Motor Horsepower Horsepower 4Full Load Amps Amps 6.8Minimum Submergence, Maximum Value Inches 33

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for submersible mixing equipment specified.2. Motor data. Submit in accordance with Section 16150.3. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for submersiblemixing equipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofsubmersible mixing equipment with referenced standards.

2. Mixer thrust shall be certified using ISO 21630 thrust test.

SUBMERSIBLE MIXING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11381-2 Project No. 12026

3. Minimum thrust required will be 318 Newtons.4. Certified reports of field tests and observations.




2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of submersible mixing equipment inservice.

3. Submit in accordance with 01785.




B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain submersible mixing equipment system components fromsingle manufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product builtfrom components that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate asunit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver submersible mixing equipment and system components to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.

B. Store submersible mixing equipment in clean, dry location.


1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One set of bearings.b. One mechanical seal set.c. One complete gasket set.d. One set of impeller wear rings.e. One set of casing wear rings.

2. Provide special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.3. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and clearly labeled and identified with name and

number of equipment to which they belong.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flygt.

B. KSB

2.02 MIXER FABRICATION

A. General:

1. Submersible, direct drive, axial mixer suitable for mixing of filtrate from gravity belt thickeneddigested sludge with a sliding guide bracket integral to the mixer unit.

2. Mixer shall be Factory Mutual certified for operation in a Class 1, Division 2, Groups Denvironment.

3. Mixer shall be able to be raised and lowered and shall be easily removable for inspection orservice without the need for personnel to enter the tank.

4. Mixer, with cables and appurtenances, designed for continuous submergence under waterwithout loss of watertight integrity to a depth of 50-feet.

5. All metal components in contact with the mixed media shall be 304 stainless steel.

B. Propeller:

1. Constructed of type 420 stainless steel.2. Shall be of welded construction with non-clogging backward curved design and dynamically

balanced.3. Propeller shall handle solids, fibrous materials, heavy sludge and other matter found in

sewage applications.

C. Shaft:

1. Shaft shall be of 316L stainless steel construction.2. Shaft seals shall have dual seals to isolate oil in housing from surrounding liquids.

D. Bearings:

1. Bearings shall be rated for 100,000 hours of operation, L-10 rated life.2. Bearings shall have inner and outer races of metal construction.3. Outboard propeller bearing shall be an angular contact bearing.4. Motor shaft shall be supported by two bearings.5. Roller and angular contact ball bearing shall take up the axial and radial loads.6. Angular contact ball bearing shall take up axial loads.7. Bearings shall be pre-loaded by bearing loading nut located on motor end of shaft.

E. Oil Housing:

1. Oil housing shall contain two compartments consisting of an inner and an outer section withfour ports to connect and facilitate oil flow.

2. Oil housing cover plate shall be of corrosion resistant composite.

F. Casing:

1. Stainless steel Type 304 construction designed to prevent moisture from entering motorcompartment.

2. Provide 304 stainless steel guide bracket designed to mount on support mast.


G. Mechanical Seals:

1. Provide two sets of lapped end face type mechanical seals in oil reservoirs. Face rings shallbe of corrosion resistant tungsten or silicon carbide material. Only seal faces of outer sealassembly and its retaining clips shall be exposed to mixed media.

2. Mechanical seals shall not require maintenance or adjustment, but be accessible to check andreplace.

H. Motor:

1. 460 volt /3-phase. Minimum service factor of 1.15.2. See System Description for motor horsepower.3. Stator windings shall be of Class H insulation rated for 180 degrees Celsius (C) and insulated

by trickle impregnation method with Class F monomer-free polyester resin.4. Multi-pole motor shall be directly connected to the propeller.5. Suitable for Class I, Division 2 hazardous environment.6. Conform to Section 16150.7. Designed for continuous duty.8. Sized to prevent overheating with stator cooled by surrounding mixed media.9. Designed for 10 evenly spaced starts per hour.10. Rotor bars and short circuit rings shall be aluminum.

I. Elastomers:

1. All mating surfaces where watertight sealing is required shall be machined and fitted with adouble set of Nitrile rubber or Viton O-rings. Fitting shall be such that sealing is accomplishedby metal-to-metal contact between machined surfaces.

J. Controls:

1. Pump monitor shall provide dual function monitoring for both over-temperature via bi-metal,thermistor, or RTD sensor and seal failure via moisture sensor or float switch. Only low-voltage leakage system allowed.

2. Each module shall provide LED’s for alarm status (one for each fault indication), power LEDas well as Test and Reset push buttons.

3. Module shall provide independent 100 ma, 24VAC or 5A, 210 VAC rated Form C outputs forboth over-temperature and seal failure. Module must have a 24 VAC or 24-240 VAC inputpower range, a 2.8 watt power consumption, and must be UL approved.

K. Cable entry:

1. Cable entry shall be an integral part of the back plate.2. Designed for submerged service to prevent moisture from entering motor compartment under

all operating conditions.3. Provide length of power cable to reach splice box.4. Provide double set of elastomer grommets.5. Comprise of two cylindrical elastomer grommets, each flanked by washers and ferrule

designed with close tolerance fit against cable outside diameter and entry inside diameter.6. Assembly shall bear against a shoulder in stator casing opening and be compressed by a

gland nut threaded into it.7. Interaction between the gland nut and the ferrule shall move the grommet along the cable

axially instead of with a rotary motion.8. The junction chamber and motor compartment shall be separated by a terminal board which

shall protect the motor interior from foreign material gaining access into the mixer top.


9. Connection shall be made between the threaded compressed type binder post thus securelyaffixing the cable wires to the terminal board, rendering the motor compartment leak prooffrom liquid which may enter the terminal compartment.

L. Mast Assembly:

1. Contractor shall install mixer mast furnished by mixer manufacturer.2. Mast shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel.3. Provide mixer with a minimum of 50-foot 316 stainless steel lifting cable.4. Provide 316 stainless steel wall brackets (upper, intermediate, and lower) of the quantity and

locations recommended by manufacturer. See plans for tank depth.5. Provide cable holders and power cable support grips as recommended by manufacturer.6. Mast assembly shall allow for rotation of mast to allow mixing flexibility.

2.03 CONTROLS


2.04 COATINGS




D. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holds with protective grease.

E. Contractor shall store equipment inside a building for protection against corrosion.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install submersible mixing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION









3.04 DEMONSTRATION



END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. LINEAR MOTION DIGESTER MIXING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11382-1

SECTION 11382LINEAR MOTION DIGESTER MIXING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Linear motion type digester mixing equipment for mixing sludge in anaerobic digesters.(521-M-3201, 522-M-3202).

2. Temperature Switch (521-TSH-3201, 522-TSH-3202).



1. Provide linear motion type mixers to homogeneously mix the contents of the anaerobicdigester as shown on Drawings.

2. Mixers shall thoroughly mix tank contents and prevent stratification.3. Mixers to be installed on new fixed steel digester covers.4. Provide load bearing and unit mounting requirements to digester cover Manufacture for

covers specified in Section 11396.5. Mixers suitable for installation outdoors.6. Support mixers as required from digester covers.7. Equipment provided for each mixer shall include the hydro-disk, lubrication systems, seal

tube, mounting base, cam drive system, gas dome, and accessories.8. The mixer drive head assembly shall be removable as a unit without varying the normal

sludge level or gas pressure within the digesters.9. Wearing parts readily accessible for inspection, repairs, and replacement.10. Mixers shall resist wear from mildly abrasive slurries and maintain hydraulic performance

as wear occurs.11. Mixer and motor shall be rated for continuous duty.12. All equipment rated for Class I, Division 1, Group D, Hazardous Location.


1. System shall be capable of mixing a digester of 60 feet diameter, 21.25 feet sidewaterdepth, and 7 feet center cone depth.

2. Mixing equipment shall provide mixing energy in order to maintain thermal homogeneity,provide intimate microorganism and nutrient contact and sufficient turbulence to preventscum accumulation.

3. Mixing shall be accomplished with one (1) mixer per digester.4. Capable of mixing anaerobic digested sludge, 1 percent to 6 percent solids

concentration.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


LINEAR MOTION DIGESTER MIXING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11382-2 Project No. 12026



a. Manufacturer's specification data and descriptive literature.b. Equipment installation of similar sized facilities.c. Performance data. Mixer performance based on hydraulic data obtained from full

scale tests certified for accuracy by independent engineer. Submit copy ofcertification.

d. Shop drawings will not be approved without general arrangement drawings showinginstallation details, materials of construction, dimensions, loads on supportingstructures and anchor bolt locations. Plan and section layout drawings showingmixer installation relative to digester in which installed.

e. Submit structural calculations for mixer loads imposed on cover. Calculations shallinclude reaction forces, loads, torsion loads for the mixer operating in either direction,and any cyclic loads. Calculations shall be stamped by a Registered ProfessionalEngineer.

f. Submit detailed drawing of mixing mounting requirements to be coordinated withFixed Steel Digester Cover Manufacturer specified in Section 11396.

g. Motor shall be in accordance with Section 16150. The following data shall besubmitted for each motor:

1) Designation2) Horsepower3) Phases4) Voltage5) Load amperes (FLA)6) Service factor7) Frequency8) Motor Code9) Thermal protection10) Efficiency at full, ½ , and ¼ loads

f. Wiring diagrams.g. Interface diagrams.h. Proposed coating system. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.i. Recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation, and start-up.j. Detailed layout and other drawings required for proper installation.k. Procedures for proper installation.l. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and

maintenance.m. Location of parts-supply facilities, service crews, and repair facilities.

C. Test Results:

1. Submittal shall include at least one (1) full-scale field performance mixer tracer test reportusing Lithium Chloride tracer. Such test will have been previously conducted on aninstallation in a single digester of at least 80 feet in diameter. Lithium chloride shall be addedin sufficient quantity to achieve a concentration of at least 2 mg/l as Lithium in each digesterto initiate each tracer test. Analysis for Lithium shall be made on at least forty (40) separatesamples taken over a thirty (30) consecutive day test period with a minimum of twelve (12)samples taken during the first twenty-four (24) hours of the tracer test. During the tracer testthe general digester process shall be monitored and data recorded on qualitativeparameters such as volatile acids, volatile solids destroyed, gas production and content,


alkalinity, pH, flow rate, total suspended solids, temperature, etc. The results of these testsshall indicate high mixing efficiency with active volumes of 90% or greater.

2. The mixer manufacturer shall include as an integral part of the submittal, a 3-D modelcomputational fluid dynamics (CFD) mixing analysis for the specific configuration of thetanks where the mixer(s) will be installed. Any interference for the occurrence of the normalmixing patterns such as columns, and any other significant support structures shall beincluded in the 3-D model of the tank being analyzed. The mixing analysis shall simulate theaddition of a known amount of tracer fluid that will be dispersed through the tank as anindication of adequate mixing. The values obtained by this analysis shall closely follow therecommended parameters for mixing of a digester tank.

D. Submit above in accordance with Section 01330.


1. Operating instructions and maintenance data for materials and products for inclusion inO&M Manual.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of rotary lobe equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.


A. To ensure proper operating system(s), manufacturer shall provide all products specified inthis Section.




1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. 2 Sets – Wear Platesb. 1 Set – Cam-Follower Assemblyc. 1 Set – Linear Rail Assemblyd. 1 Set – Lower Bearing Bushings and Seals



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ovivo USA, LLC, Type LM.

LINEAR MOTION DIGESTER MIXING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11382-4 Project No. 12026

2.02 MIXING EQUIPMENT

A. General Design:

1. Materials:

a. All Structural Steel: ASTM A36b. Steel members in with continuous or intermittent contact with liquid shall be minimum

¼” thick.

2. Fabrication:

a. Shop fabrication and welding of structural members shall be in accordance with latestedition of Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1 of American Welding Society.

b. All welded connections shall develop full strength of connected elements.c. All joined or lapped surfaces shall be completely seal welded. Intermittent welding

not allowed.d. All steel design shall be in accordance with latest edition of AISC Manual of Steel

Construction, and latest edition of International Building Code.e. All sharp projections of cut or sheared edges shall be ground to a radius.

B. Mixer Drive:

1. The motor drive assembly shall consist of an explosion-proof motor, and a helical bevel gearbox driving a cam-scotch-yoke mechanism that vertically moves the hydro-disk shaft.

2. Provide a minimum of 72-inch outside diameter hydro-disk mounted at the end of the verticaldrive shaft. The design shall create a vertical “up and down” motion of the hydro-diskproducing a turbulent “liquid-core” of micro and macro eddy currents that extend through itsrange of motion and the tank contents. The mixing hydro-disk shall be constructed of Type304 stainless steel.

3. Motor:

a. Max 7.5 HP, 460V, 3 Phase, 60 Hz, 1.15 service factor.b. 1750 RPM.c. Explosion proof; rated for Class I, Division 1, Group C and D Hazardous Location.d. Class F insulation.e. Provide thermostats in each phase. Provide normally closed dry contact (521-TSH-

3201, 522-TSH-3202).f. Electric motors shall be in accordance with Section 16150.

C. Seal Tube:

1. The seal tube shall be welded to the mixer mounting flange in a gas-tight connection. Themounting base shall be designed to support the entire weight of the linear motion mixer.

D. Mounting Port/Gas Dome:

1. The mixer manufacturer shall supply a detailed drawing of mounting requirements of Mixerto the digester cover Manufacturer specified in Section 11396 identifying loading andattachment requirements at the gas dome.

2.03 FASTENERS

A. All bolts and fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel.


2.04 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer responsible for surface preparation, priming and finish painting or coating ofequipment delivered to the plant.

1. All submerged iron and steel surfaces shall be shop cleaned per SSPC-SP10, near whiteblast.

2. All non-submerged surfaces shall be shop cleaned per SSPC-SP6, commercial clean.3. Non-submerged exterior surfaces shall be coated in accordance with Section 09960,

System 9.4. Submerged surfaces shall be coated in accordance with Section 09960, System 7.

B. Contractor shall field paint any existing digester cover areas disturbed by the addition ofreinforcing and the added reinforcing in accordance with Section 09960.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for field touch-up painting.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install mixer in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittals.



1. Representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at the job site orclassroom designed by Owner for minimum workdays specified below, travel timeexcluded, for assistance during construction, startup, and post-startup Include minimumof:

a. 1 workday for Installation Services.b. 1 workday for Instructional Services.c. 1 workday for Startup Services.d. ½ workday for Post-Startup Services.

3. Supplier or Manufacturer shall direct services specific to system and equipmentoperation, maintenance, and troubleshooting. See Section 01615.

4. In addition to services specified above, provide Manufacturer’s services as required tosuccessfully complete system demonstration as specified in Section 01820.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. HYPERBOLIC MIXING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11383-1

SECTION 11383HYPERBOLIC MIXING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Mixer 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 1E, and 1F (431-M-1001A, -1001B, -1001C, -1001D, -1001E, -1001F).2. Mixer 2A, 2B, 2C, 2D, 2E, and 2F (432-M-1202A, -1202B, -1202C, -1202D, -1202E, -1202F).3. Mixer Removal System.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacture’s Association


A. General Requirements:

1. Provide hyperbolic mixers complete with all accessories and appurtenances as shown on theDrawings and specified herein, and as needed for a complete installation.

2. Mixers shall be of the non-clogging, vertical shaft, hyperboloid-body type.3. The mixer and its appurtenances shall be specifically designed for continuous duty operation

in a submerged application in a biological reactor. The mixers shall not overload the motors atany point within the operating limits recommended by the mixer manufacturer.

4. The mixer shall be designed with no submerged bearings and with a dry installed motor. Theentire weight of the mixers shall be supported by bridges / walkways.


1. The mixers shall be capable of completely mixing each selector zone as required to meet therequirements of the performance test outlined below. Each test will be conducted in thepresence of the Engineer and the Owner. The performance requirements presented belowdefine the minimum mixing capacity of each mixer. If additional mixing capacity is required tomeet the performance test requirements, the Contractor shall provide the necessaryequipment at no additional cost to the Owner.

2. Provide hyperbolic mixers for each Selector Zone of Aeration Basin – Train 1 (Structure 431)and Train 2 (Structure 432).

3. Basins shall contain wastewater mixed liquor of a solids concentration of not more than 1percent by weight.

4. Each mixer shall be capable of the following performance:

Mixer configuration HyperbolicMixer Body One, with 8 integral transport ribsSludge Volume Index Minimal 80 l/kgMaximum mixer body speed 18 RPMZone Size:

Length 25 ftWidth 25 ftDepth 20 ft

Motor Horsepower: 2 HpMotor Type: Squirrel Cage, Induction typeMotor Efficiency: NEMA MG1 Premium EfficiencyDesign: Design B

HYPERBOLIC MIXING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11383-2 Project No. 12026

Duty: Continuous, designed for a minimum of ten startsper hour.

Insulation: Class FVoltage: 460V, 3 Ph., 60 Hz.Service Factor: 1.15 (The motor service factor shall not be used in

sizing the motors)

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for mixing equipment specified.2. Bearing life calculations.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for mixingequipment.


3. Submit electrical load calculations, rated power, rated input power, shaft power curve and itsrelationship to percent solids, recommended position and depth of the mixers in the tank,minimum distances from tanks walls and bottom requirements.

4. Submit general arrangement and assembly drawings indicating:

a. Construction details and dimensional drawings.b. Structural requirements which include support base and anchor bolt requirements.c. Operating weight distribution.d. Installation requirements requiring coordination with the Contractor.

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofmixing equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of mixing equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.





B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain mixing equipment system components from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver mixing equipment and system components to their final locations in protective wrappings,containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage fromconstruction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store mixing equipment in clean, dry location.

1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:


a. One set of rubber buffers per installed mixer type.b. One shaft holder for each shaft diameter supplied.

2. All lubricating oils required for the first year of operation shall be provided. The productssupplied shall be factory prefilled, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Spare parts shall be identical to and interchangeable with similar parts installed.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Invent Environmental Technologies, Inc.

2.02 MIXER CONSTRUCTION

A. General:

1. Each mixer assembly shall consist of a dry installed heavy-duty speed reducer with hollowshaft, electric motor, baseplate, composite fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) shaft, andcomposite hyperbolic mixer body.

2. The bottom of the hyperbolic mixing body should not exceed 12” above the basin floor, orinstalled diffusers. No diffusers are to be installed under the mixer or within 12 inches of theouter diameter of the mixer body.

3. Mixers shall be capable of handling biological activated sludge with a solids concentration ofless than 1.0 percent solids with a SVI of minimal 80 l/kg., and shall be designed to preventsettlement in the tanks and to re-suspend biological material on the tank bottom.


4. The Mixer shall be supplied with the Invent HyperPitch for surface scum or foam re-entrainment, no surface vortex shall be generated.

5. The mixer should be designed as a vertical shaft mixer, with a dry installed motor. Duringoperation the mixer should not generate any upward forces on the bridge construction.

6. The mixer should have a steady stationary flow pointed downward parallel to the mixer shaft.The highest speeds and turbulent fluctuations should be produced in the bottom area. On thewater surface, no or little surface turbulence should appear.

B. Gear Drive:

1. The gear drive assembly for each mixer shall consist of parallel-shaft helical gear box andmotor as designed by SEW Eurodrive.

2. The gear drive assembly shall have a high-quality corrosion protection coating, robust weatherprotective hood, and PTC resistor for thermal protection of the motor.

3. The gear box housing shall be cast iron covered with an acrylic coating, having a thickness ofat least 6.0 mil. The gear box shall be connected to the mounting base using a flangeconnection with 316 additional stainless steel nuts and bolts.

4. The gear box speed shall not exceed 18 rpm. The calculated lifetime L10 of the bearingsshall exceed 100,000 hours.

5. The drive motors shall be a squirrel cage induction motor, 460 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 1,800 RPM,Class F insulation.

6. The motors shall be equipped with a weather protection hood.7. The motors shall be equipped with integral thermal overloads mounted in the motor windings.8. The hollow shaft shall be covered and sealed with a special hollow shaft cap.9. Mineral oil ISO 220 viscosity or synthetic oil shall lubricate the gear section.

C. Mounting Base:

1. The mounting base of each mixer shall consist of a gear base plate mounted in rubber buffersconnected permanently to the bridge/supports by bolted connection. The plate shall be ableto be leveled using the threaded bolts, which can be adjusted in height.

2. The rubber buffers shall absorb start-up torque, prevent any transfer of vibrations to the bridgeand constitute the galvanic separation of the mixer from its surroundings.

3. The mounting base shall be a fastening set for the concrete bridge/walkway with threadedrods and chemical anchors which are permanently anchored to the concrete.

D. Shaft:

1. The drive shaft of the mixer shall be made from FRP.2. At the top end of the mixer shaft, there shall be a tappet for the connection to the gear hollow

shaft.3. At the lower end there, shall be a flange connection to the mixer body itself.4. All bolted connections shall utilize 316 stainless steel hardware.

E. Hyperboloid Mixer Body:

1. Each hyperboloid mixer body shall be manufactured of FRP and be a streamlined stress-freebody without any mounted or fitted parts.

2. The transport ribs which accelerate the flow shall be integrated in the mixer body (INVENT -Evolution 6 design).

3. The mixer body shall be coated with a special gel coat to provide a polished surface.4. The hyperboloid mixer shall have laminated stainless steel insert nuts.

2.03 CONTROLS


A. Control Station (431-CS-1001A, -1001B, -1001C, -1001D, -1001E, -1001F, 432-CS-1202A, -1202B, -1202C, -1202D, -1202E, and -1202F) provided under Division 13.

2.04 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming and finish coating of ferrous metalcomponents in plant prior to shipment. Coatings shall comply with Section 09960.

B. Protective Coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09960 of the Specifications.

C. Coat machined or bearing surfaces and holes with protective grease until installation


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install mixing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3.02 IDENTIFICATION





a. 2 man-days for Installation Services.b. 1 man-day for Instructional Services.c. 1/2 man-day for Post Startup Services



3.04 DEMONSTRATION

A. Performance Test:

1. Prior to start of the performance tests, fill the zones to the maximum water elevation with testwater (plant effluent).

2. Run the mixer for one hour. Demonstrate each mixer:

a. Is free of overheating of any parts.b. Is free of all objectionable vibration, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.c. Is free of overloading of any parts.

3. Via the Control Station(s), verify mixer functions.4. Record amperage draw.


5. Continue operating the mixer for 24 hours without overheating, excessive vibration oroverloading.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. DIGESTER GAS TREATMENT SYSTEMProject No. 12026 11387-1

SECTION 11387DIGESTER GAS TREATMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. H2S Removal Vessel (510-M-3801).2. Gas Compression and Moisture Removal System (510-M-3811).3. Chiller (510-M-3812).4. Siloxane Removal Vessels (510-M-3821 and 510-M-3822).5. Condensate No-Gas-Loss Drains.6. Gas Compression/Moisture Removal Control Panel (510-LCP-3811).



1. System shall be designed to filter, compress, cool, reheat, and dry flow range of 33-210 scfm of digester gas.

2. Estimated inlet gas characteristics are as follows:

a. 60% Methaneb. 40% Carbon Dioxidec. 800 ppm Hydrogen Sulfided. 5 ppm, siloxanee. 95 F, maximumf. 100% RH, saturatedg. 0-10”WC inlet pressure

3. Manufacturer shall field test digester gas for a minimum of the following properties priorto design of system. Submit copy of results to Engineer.

a. Methane contentb. Siloxane concentrationc. Hydrogen sulfide concentration

4. Required outlet gas characteristics are as follows:

a. 2-psig gas pressure at outlet of skid, adjustable between 1 and 3 psig. Pressurerequirements shall be coordinate with engine-generator system furnished underSection 16900. If the “C” Supplier is selected (Fabco), the engine-generator willrequire a 5-psig supply pressure.

b. 80 F as required to maintain a maximum relative humidity of 25% at design leavingdewpoint temperature.

c. 40°F dewpoint temperature.d. 3-micron maximum particulate size.e. 10 ppm Hydrogen Sulfide, maximum.f. 0.1 ppm siloxane, maximum.

DIGESTER GAS TREATMENT SYSTEM Donohue & Associates, Inc.11387-2 Project No. 12026

5. The H2S Removal system shall be designed for an estimated media change-out of 150days based on an operating flow rate of 210 scfm.

6. The Siloxane Removal system shall be designed for an estimated media change-out of70 days based on an operating flow rate of 210 scfm.

7. All equipment mounted on the Gas Compression and Moisture Removal Skid and thecondensate no-gas-loss drains shall be rated for Class I, Division 1, Group D, HazardousLocations.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General:




a. Manufacturer's specification data and descriptive literature.b. Equipment installation of similar sized facilities.c. Performance data.d. Results of the field test digester gas analysis.e. Shop drawings will not be approved without general arrangement drawings showing

installation details, materials of construction, dimensions, loads on supportingstructures and anchor bolt locations.

f. Motor shall be in accordance with Section 16150. The following data shall besubmitted for each motor:

1) Designation2) Horsepower3) Phases4) Voltage5) Load amperes (FLA)6) Service factor7) Frequency8) Motor Code9) Thermal protection10) Efficiency at full, ½ , and ¼ loads

f. Wiring diagrams.g. Interface diagrams.h. Proposed coating system. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.i. Recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation, and start-up.j. Detailed layout and other drawings required for proper installation.k. Procedures for proper installation.l. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and

maintenance.m. Location of parts-supply facilities, service crews, and repair facilities.

C. Submit field test results of the digester gas.


D. Instructional Services Documentation:





A. To ensure proper operating system(s), manufacturer shall provide all products specified inthis Section.




PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Unison Solutions, Inc.

B. Applied Filter Technology

2.02 HYDROGEN SULFIDE REMOVAL SYSTEM

A. Hydrogen Sulfide Removal Media Vessel: (510-M-3801)

1. Vessel Dimensions:

a. 10 foot diameterb. 10 foot straight sidec. Dished top and bottomd. 24-in top manway, 8 inch minimum projectione. 24-in side manway

2. Rated for 5 psi pressure and 2 psi vacuum.3. 304 stainless steel.4. Inlet and outlet connections shall be 8 inch 150-lb ANSI flanges.5. Vessel top shall be furnished with a platform to allow access to the top hatch. Platform

shall be surrounded by an aluminum handrail system and provided with ladder access.Ladder height shall be partial height as required to gain access from the grade level ofthe structure while the vessel is installed below grade, see plans for elevationaldifferences.

6. Fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel.7. Provide all internal supports and grating for media.8. Vessel(s) shall be free-standing on four 304 stainless steel legs, bottom of legs shall

have plates for being bolted to the concrete pad.9. Provide two top vents. One vent shall include a stainless steel ball valve capped and the

other a pressure/vacuum relief valve to be sized by the Manufacturer.


10. Provide mist eliminator/moisture separator to be installed directly upstream of vessel asrecommended by media Manufacturer.

11. Provide 2” connection on the bottom of the vessel for connection to the condensate drain.

B. Hydrogen Sulfide Removal Media:

1. Provide SulfaTreat CHP media for vessel.

2.03 GAS COMPRESSION AND MOISTURE REMOVAL SYSTEM (510-M-3811)

A. General:

1. With the exception of the H2S Removal System, Siloxane Removal System, Chiller, andGas Compression/Moisture Removal Control Panel, all components shall be factorymounted to a common skid.

2. All skid mounted electrical components shall be prewired to one of two NEMA 7junctionboxes.

3. Skid mounted system shall first filter and remove water droplets through two parallelFilter/Moisture separators (each sized for half capacity); increase pressure with a gasblower (two installed, one stand-by); cool, dehumidify, and reheat through a common gasto gas and gas to glycol heat exchanger; return gas to the suction side of blower througha flow control valve; discharge skid at required pressure; and remove particulatesfollowing the siloxane removal vessels.

4. Fabricated skid shall be mounted on a common steel frame and shall be no larger than12 feet x 8 feet and no taller than 9 feet.

5. Piping Connections:

a. All piping connections shall be terminated within 1’-0” of the skid edge.b. 8 inch flanged digester gas inlet to skid from hydrogen sulfide removal vessel.c. 4 inch flanged digester gas inlet to skid from siloxane removal vessels.d. Two 4 inch flanged digester gas outlet from skid, one to siloxane removal vessels

and one to the consumers.e. Two 1-½ inch flanged glycol connections to Chiller.f. Two ½ inch flanged condensate drain line from skid.g. Three 1 inch flanged, vent lines from skid.h. One 3 inch flanged pressure relief vent from skid.i. Skid shall be provided with isolation valves at digester gas inlets, digester gas

outlets, digester gas outlet and reheat bypass of heat exchanger, glycol supply andreturn connections, heat exchanger drain, and condensate drain connections to eachFilter Moisture Separator.

B. Blower Inlet Moisture/Particulate Filter and Siloxane Removal Final Particulate Filter:

1. The blower inlet moisture/particulate filter and siloxane removal final particulate filter shallconsist of the following:

a. Two mounted upstream of the gas blower and one mounted downstream of thesiloxane vessels.

b. 99% removal of 3 micron and larger particulates and liquid droplets.c. Materials of construction will be 304L stainless steel.d. 150# ANSI B16.5 side inlet and outlet connections.e. Fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel.f. Cleanable polypropylene structured mesh element.g. P transmitter across the filter element.h. Sight glass for liquid level indication.i. Level switch above the condensate drains to warn of failure.


j. Bottom drain with no gas loss drip trap, manual bypass, strainer and piping.

C. Gas Blower: (510-M-3841, -3842)

1. Provide two gas blowers, one duty, one stand-by.2. Gas blower shall be a rotary lobe positive displacement model with history of usage on

sour gas applications. The gas blower shall consist of the following:

a. Belt driven 10-Hp 480V, 3pH, 60Hz explosion proof, inverter duty electric motor.b. Motor speed shall be controlled by a VFD.c. Motor in accordance with Section 16150.d. Cast iron casing.e. Inlet and discharge flex connectors.f. Discharge silencer.g. Discharge check valve.h. Discharge pressure safety valve.i. Inlet and discharge isolation valves.

D. Dual Core Heat Exchanger:

1. The dual core heat exchanger shall feature a gas/gas aluminum plate/fin core and agas/glycol finned tube core. The dual core heat exchanger shall consist of the following:

a. Within the heat exchanger, the gas shall be cooled to 40ºF and re-heated to 80ºF.b. Aluminum fins on stainless steel tubes.c. Mounted in single 304 stainless steel housing.d. All condensation generated during cooling shall be removed inside the heat

exchanger housing by means of gravity.e. Level switch mounted on the housing to warn of drain failure.f. RTD mounted on the housing to verify the coldest temperature that the gas reaches.g. Bottom drain with no gas loss drip trap, manual bypass, strainer and piping.

E. Chiller:

1. The chiller shall be an air condensed, packaged unit suitable for outdoor installation. Thechiller shall be designed for the minimum and maximum ambient conditions at the site.The chiller shall consist of the following:

a. Sizing of the chiller shall be determined by the heat load of the gas/glycol heatexchanger.

b. This heat load shall include latent heat as well as sensible heat.c. Maximum full load amp rating: 25.d. A UL labeled NEMA 4 control panel shall contain all of the equipment necessary for

safe operation of the glycol chiller. Panel shall include:

(1). Fused disconnect.(2). Touch screen HMI.(3). Allen Bradley PLC for refrigeration circuit control.(4). Ethernet communication with gas conditioning system electrical control panel.

e. Air cooled condenser unit.f. Condenser coil poly-coated for corrosion resistance. All copper piping shall be

heresite coated.g. 35°F glycol delivery temperature.h. Single compressor with unloading capacity down to 20% load.


i. Refrigeration circuit shall include: filter drier, liquid line solenoid valve, liquid line shut-off valve, sight glass/moisture indicator, unloading solenoid valve and electronicexpansion valve.

j. R-410A refrigerant.k. Glycol circulation pump sized for 100% capacity. Pump shall be end suction type of

stainless steel construction.l. Chiller water circuit shall be provided with isolation valves at chiller and at gas

handling skid connections.m. Copper lines heresite coated.n. Stainless steel evaporator.o. Powder coated support structure.p. Chiller shall utilize propylene glycol/water mixture.q. Manufacturer to supply refrigerant and glycol solution for chiller system of volume

required to fill chiller, heat exchanger, and piping as depicted on Plans.

F. Gas Recirculation:

1. A modulating valve shall be provided to allow excess gas to flow from the discharge ofthe system back to the inlet. This valve shall be controlled by monitoring the deliverypressure of the system.

2. V-port ball valve.3. Type 7 explosion proof actuator.

G. Instrumentation:

1. All instrumentation provided on the skid shall be designed for gas service and shall berated for use in Class 1, Division1, Group C/D hazardous location. Instrumentation shallbe in accordance with Division 13 Specifications. At a minimum, the followinginstrumentation shall be provided:

a. Level switches at each condensate no-gas-loss drain.b. Differential pressure transmitter across blower inlet moisture/particulate filter.c. RTD’s at each gas temperature change point.d. RTD to monitor glycol temperature.e. Temperature Gauges at each temperature gas and glycol change point.f. Pressure Gauges at each pressure gas change point.g. Blower Discharge Pressure Transmitter.h. Delivery Pressure Transmitter.

H. Piping:

1. All piping shall be minimum Type 304/304L schedule 10S stainless steel in IPS standardsizes.

a. All piping 2 inches and smaller may be threaded or 150# ANSI B16.5 flanged, butthreaded piping shall be a minimum of Schedule 40.

b. All piping 2 inches and larger shall be welded with 150# ANSI B16.5 flangedconnections.

c. Fabricated in accordance with ASME B31.3.d. Fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel.

I. Valves:

1. All valves 3 inches and larger shall be butterfly valves with cast iron bodies, stainlesssteel disk and stem, and Viton seats. Butterfly valves shall be lug style.

2. All valves 2-1/2 inches and smaller shall be ball valves:


a. Ball valves 1 inch and smaller shall have NPT threaded connections. Bodies andballs shall be 316 stainless steel. Packing or seats will be PTFE.

b. Ball valves 1-1/2 inches and larger shall have 150# flanged connections. Bodies andballs shall be 316 stainless steel. Packing or seats will be PTFE.

3. Check valves 2 inch and smaller shall be ball type, stainless steel and have NPTthreaded connections. Check valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be spring loaded,stainless steel, with a Viton seat. Valves shall be inserted in the pipeline between twoflanges.

J. Skid Base:

1. All components except the H2S Removal System, Siloxane Removal System, chiller, andelectrical control panel shall be mounted on a single skid.

K. All components mounted, piped and wired on skid:

1. Electrical components pre-wired to one of two junction boxes on edge of skid, seeDrawings for orientation.

2. Conduit to be rigid aluminum.3. Common skid base shall be constructed of satin black powder coated carbon steel.4. Condensate drains from Filter Moisture Separators shall be piped to common connection

on edge of skid. Condensate drain for heat exchanger shall be individually piped to edgeof skid.

2.04 SILOXANE REMOVAL SYSTEM

A. The siloxane removal system shall include two stand-a-lone siloxane media vessels.B. Siloxane Removal Media Vessel: (510-M-3821, -3822)

1. Vessel Dimensions:

a. 42 inch diameterb. 8-ft straight sidec. Elliptical top manwayd. Skirted bottom

2. Rated for 15 psi pressure.3. 304 stainless steel.4. Inlet and outlet connections shall be 4 inch 150-lb ANSI flanges.5. Fasteners shall be 304 stainless steel.6. Provide internal septas for even gas distribution through media.7. Flanged manway on the top of each vessel.8. Vessel(s) shall be free-standing on four 304 stainless steel legs, bottom of legs shall

have plates for being bolted to the concrete.9. Provide ½” top vent on each vessel. Each vent shall include a stainless steel ball valve

and pressure/vacuum relief valve to be sized by the Manufacturer.10. Provide ½” connection on the bottom of the vessel for connection to the condensate

drain.11. Test/purge ports with valves on common inlet, and exit of each vessel.

C. Siloxane Removal Media:

1. Provide activated carbon media for each vessel. The media shall be specificallyengineered for removal of siloxanes and similar contaminants from digester gas.


2. System shall be designed to allow for easy removal and refilling of the vessels andwithout the need to remove vessels from connected piping.

2.05 CONDENSATE NO-GAS-LOSS DRAIN

A. Provide no-gas-loss drain to meet 10-States Standards and constructed of 304 stainlesssteel.

B. Each condensate no-gas-loss drain shall consist of a minimum of 2-gallon capacitycondensate holding tank, 1/2-inch vent with a stainless steel ball valve, high and low levelswitches, 1-inch stainless steel inlet and discharge solenoid valves, and mounting bracket.

C. Provide no-gas-loss drains at the following locations:

1. At each condensate drain located on the Gas Compression and Moisture RemovalSystem. If System Suppliers pressure loss calculations determine a negative pressurewithin the gas suction piping systems which may result in vapor locking of thecondensate drainage, System Supplier shall provide a condensate pump, power andcontrolled from the system control panel, as required to remove condensate from thesystem.

2.06 CONTROLS

A. Provide Gas Compression / Moisture Removal Control Panel (510-LCP-3811) in accordancewith Section 11990.

B. The Gas Conditioning System shall be provided with a remotely located unclassifiedNEMA 12, UL 508A listed control panel, unless otherwise specified.

C. System shall be wired to receive a 480VAC, 60 Hz, 3 phase and a 120VAC, 60Hz, 1 phasefeeds to the Gas Compression / Moisture Removal Control Panel to provide power for allcomponents of the system. Maximum full load amp rating of 55 amps. The size of the feedswill be as required by the system manufacturer. No transformers required. Gas Compression/ Moisture Removal Control Panel to have main cable operated fused disconnect.

D. Contractor will be responsible for wiring between the Gas Compression / Moisture RemovalControl Panel and the Gas Compression and Moisture Removal System. 480VAC devicesshall be wired directly to the Gas Compression / Moisture Removal Control Panel.120/240VAC and 24VDC devices on the skid will be pre-wired to NEMA 7, UL listed junctionboxes that are rated for Class I, Division 1, Group D areas. Separate junction boxes shall beused for 120/240VAC and 24VDC wiring. Seal offs shall be placed in conduits whenentering/exiting classified area. The Gas Compression / Moisture Removal Control Panelshall accept customer inputs from Owner’s PLC and have monitoring function via Ethernetconnection.

E. The control system shall be based on an Allen Bradley PLC. The manufacturer shallprogram the PLC to control the functions of the Gas Compression and Moisture RemovalSystem. Local user interface shall be by HMI.

F. The glycol chiller system shall be internally controlled by a self contained control system.The Gas Compression / Moisture Removal Control Panel shall monitor the operation of theglycol chiller and shall supply it with an on/off signal. The glycol chiller control panel shall berated for outdoor usage and shall be UL listed. 480VAC supply power will be fed from GasCompression / Moisture Removal Control Panel.


2.07 MOTORS

A. Motors shall be in accordance with Section 16150.

2.08 FASTENERS

A. All bolts and fasteners shall be Type 304 stainless steel.

2.09 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish all spare parts, moisture/particulate filter media, and lubricants required to maintainequipment per manufacturer’s recommended maintenance schedule for two years undernormal operating conditions.

B. No spare media required.

2.10 COATINGS

A. Coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09960.

B. Manufacturer responsible for surface preparation, priming and finish painting or coating ofequipment in plant.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for field touch-up painting.

D. Stainless steel components shall not be coated.

E. Surface Treatment of Stainless Steel Components:

1. Electro-chemically clean or acid passivate all welds in stainless steel subassemblies.2. After passivation, thoroughly rinse weldments with clean water and allow to air dry.3. Heat tint or carbon steel contamination shall not be evident. If contamination is evident,

clean by method specified above, rinse and recheck.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittals.CONTRACTOR shall review manufacturer’s access clearances and shall not install ancillaryitems or equipment within that area.

B. Contractor responsible for installation of all power and control wiring and conduit requiredbetween 510-LCP-3811 and the Blower, Chiller, and junction box located on the GasCompression and Moisture Removal System in accordance with Drawings and Division 16.

C. Contactor shall provide interconnecting glycol piping between chiller and gas skid as depictedon the Drawings. ½-in drain valves shall be provided on the glycol piping between the chillerisolation valves and the chiller and at the low point of the hydronic piping system at theconnection to the skid terminations. Contractor shall insulate all field installed and factory skidmounted glycol piping in accordance with Section 15083.

D. Digester gas vent and pressure relief valve terminations on the skid shall be piped to theoutdoors through an adjacent wall and provided with a Flame Check meeting therequirements of Section 11388 at a location within 2’-0” of wall penetration.




1. Representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at the job site orclassroom designed by Owner for minimum workdays specified below, travel timeexcluded, for assistance during construction, startup, and post-startup Include minimumof:

a. 1 workday for Installation Services. (1 trip)b. 1 workday for Instructional Services. (1 trip)c. 3 workdays for Startup Services. (1 trip)d. 1 workday for Services during Systems Demonstration. (1 trip)

2. Supplier or Manufacturer shall take a gas sample and submit a report identifying themethane, hydrogen sulfide and siloxane concentrations of the biogas the followingminimum times:

a. Untreated gas prior to shop drawing submittal.b. Untreated and treated gas at system start-up.c. Untreated and treated gas 2 months after system start-up.d. Untreated and treated gas 6 months after system start-up.

3. Supplier or Manufacturer shall direct services specific to system and equipmentoperation, maintenance, and troubleshooting. See Section 01615.

4. In addition to services specified above, provide Manufacturer’s services as required tosuccessfully complete system demonstration as specified in Section 01820.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. BIOGAS SAFETY EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11388-1

SECTION 11388BIOGAS SAFETY EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Low Pressure Drip Trap2. Automatic Low Pressure Drip Trap3. Flame Arrester and Banks4. Thermal Shut-off Valve5. Combination Pressure Relief /Vacuum Relief Valve Assembly6. Condensate / Sediment Trap7. Foam Separator8. Back Pressure Check Valve



1. Combined design gas flow range from Anaerobic Digesters is 12,500 ft3/hr.2. Biogas Safety Equipment submittal shall be reviewed in conjunction with Digester Cover

submittals specified in Section 11395 and 11396 Submittal to coordinate and verify allrelief pressure settings for Biogas Safety Equipment. All relief pressures shall beverified during shop drawing review.

1.03 SUBMITTALS




a. Coating systems. Submit in accordance with Section 09960.b. Manufacturer’s specification data and descriptive literature.c. Performance data.d. Installation drawings and specifically prepared technical data, including design

capacities, dimensions and pressure drop curves.e. Manufacturer’s recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation

and start-up.f. Detailed layout of equipment, piping, etc., whenever the Drawings are diagrammatic

in nature or the equipment to be provided differs from that indicated on theDrawings.

g. Anchor bolt layouts and details, support and bracket details, and other drawingsrequired for proper installation.

h. Manufacturer’s guarantee.i. Information about quantity and type of spare parts supplied. Spare parts list shall be

that needed to maintain equipment in service for 10-year period. Include a list ofspecial tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.

j. Information regarding location of parts supply facilities, service crews and repairfacilities.

BIOGAS SAFETY EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11388-2 Project No. 12026

k. Product Data:

1) Catalog cuts and product specifications for each product specified in Part 2 ofthis Section.

2) Standard wiring diagrams unless wiring diagrams are specially prepared andsubmitted with shop drawings.






A. System Responsibility: To ensure proper operating system, same manufacturer shall provideall products specified in this Section.




PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 LOW PRESSURE DRIP TRAP

A. Manufacturers

1. Varec Biogas, 246 Series.2. Groth Corporation, Model 8450.3. Shand & Jurs, 97100 Series.

B. Drip Trap Design Parameters:

1. Provide low pressure drip trap where shown on Drawings.2. Low pressure drip trap shall have 1 inch size NPT inlet and outlet connections.3. Drip trap shall be the rotating disc type. The escape of gas shall not be possible

regardless of the disc position. An air inlet port shall be provided to permit free flow ofcondensate from reservoir when draining. All ports shall be “O” ring sealed.

4. Storage capacity shall be 6 quarts.5. Maximum working pressure shall be 5 psig (34.5 kPa).6. Unit shall fit with dimensional space shown and scaled from Drawings.

C. Drip Trap Construction:

1. Construction shall be low copper cast aluminum body, cover plate, disc, and handle.2. Cover plate and disc shall be anodized cast aluminum.3. Internal working parts and fasteners shall be stainless steel.4. “O” rings shall be neoprene.


2.02 AUTOMATIC LOW PRESSURE DRIP TRAP (510-M-3706A, -3706B, -3761A, -3761B, -3771A, -3771B)

A. Manufacturers

1. Varec Biogas, 246AT Series.2. Groth Corporation, Model 8490.3. Shand & Jurs, 97100E Series.

B. Unit shall be a Low Pressure Drip Trap as specified above, furnished with an electricactuator.

C. Electric Actuator:

a. Capable of manual over-ride with electronic actuator disabled during manual operation.b. 120V/1-phase power.c. Power received through local control panel.d. NEMA 7 actuator enclosure.e. High torque reversible motor with built-in overload protection.f. Mounted to drip trap body with aluminum or stainless steel bracket and stainless steel

hardware.g. Provide with NEMA 7 limit switches for proof of open and closed position.

D. Local Control Panels:

a. Provide panels 510-LCP-3706, -3761, and -3771 in accordance with Section 11990.b. Panel 510-LCP-3706 shall be configured for control of three drip traps, 510-M-3706A, -

3706B, and a future drip trap.c. Panel 510-LCP-3761 shall be configured for control of two drip traps, 510-M-3761A and -

3761B.d. Panel 510-LCP-3771 shall be configured for control of two drip traps, 510-M-3771A and -

3771B.

2.03 FLAME ARRESTER

A. Manufacturers:


B. Design Parameters:

1. Flanged connections of sizes indicated on Plans.2. Flow capacity shall be not less than:

a. 4-in: 13,000 SCFH at 1.0” WC.b. 6-in: 24,000 SCFH at 1.0” WC.c. 8-in: 41,000 SCFH at 1.0” WC.

3. Stop propagation of flame by absorbing and dissipating heat through surface area offlame bank.

4. Flame arrester net free area through bank assembly shall be not less than three timescorresponding size standard pipe.


5. Removing or replacing bank assembly shall not require support for alignment, jackscrewfor extending housing, and shall not place strain on connecting piping.

6. Bank frame shall be extensible and shall be filled with corrugated rectangular shapedbank sheets.

7. Flame arrester for vertical installation shall be self draining.8. Flame arresters for horizontal service shall include offset housing with 1/2” NPT drip trap

connection at low point.

C. Construction:

1. Arrester housing construction shall be low copper cast aluminum.2. Bank assembly shall include low copper aluminum frame and stainless steel bank

sheets.3. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI 125 FF Flanged dimensions.4. Flame arrester shall be leak proof to 10 psig (70 kPa).

2.04 THERMAL SHUT-OFF VALVE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Varec Biogas, 430 Series.2. Shand & Jurs, 97130 Series.


1. Design as a fusible element released, spring operated pallet type shut-off valve.2. During normal operation, pallet is above valve seat to allow digester gas to pass through.3. Pallet shall be connected to a rod which sits atop a fusible element.4. Fusible element shall melt within 22 seconds upon reaching 260 F.5. Valve compression spring immediately forces pallet down against valve seat when

fusible element is melted.6. Design shall allow for determination of valve opened or closed without removing valve

from service or using manometer or pressure gauge. Provide sight glass located belowwinged inspection cap to view location of pallet rod.

7. Provide indicator rod connected to pallet.8. Flow capacity shall be not less than:

a. 4-in: 5,000 SCFH at 1.0” WC.b. 6-in: 13,000 SCFH at 1.0” WC.c. 8-in: 22,000 SCFH at 1.0” WC.

C. Valve Construction:

1. Valve body and cover construction shall be 356 T6 cast aluminum.2. Pallet assembly construction shall be low copper aluminum3. Compression spring shall be 304 stainless steel.4. Sight glass: acrylic isolated by Neoprene gaskets.5. Fusible element: antimony lead.6. 125 lb Flanged connections.

2.05 FLAME TRAP ASSEMBLY (FTA)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Varec Biogas, 450 Series.


2. Groth Corporation, Model 8530.3. Shand & Jurs, 97141 Series.

B. Unit shall be a factory assembled combination of a Flame Arrester and Thermal Shut-offValve described in Paragraphs 2.04 and 2.05.

C. Provide in sizes indicated on the Plans.

D. Flow capacity shall be not less than:

1. 4-in: 5,000 SCFH at 1.0” WC.2. 6-in: 11,000 SCFH at 1.0” WC.3. 8-in: 20,000 SCFH at 1.0” WC.

E. Insulating Jacket:

1. Provide when indicated on the Plans.2. Provide removable heat tracing around Flame Trap Assembly for cold weather

protection.3. Heat traced jackets shall fit around equipment and fasten with cinch straps.4. Suitable for outdoor installation.5. Suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group C & D Hazardous Location.6. Insulating jacket shall be constructed with a silicone impregnated woven glass cloth

lining with a 1-in thick, 6-lb density fiberglass insulating material.7. Provide through-cover quilting pins to provide firm support for insulation. Pins shall keep

insulation from shifting inside liner and jacket.

2.06 COMBINATION PRESSURE RELIEF / VACUUM RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY

A. Manufacturers:

1. Varec Biogas, 5811B Series.2. Groth Corporation, Model 8800A.3. Shand & Jurs, 97571 Series.

B. Equipment:1. 521-PSV-3711 and -3712.2. 522-PSV-3721 and -3722.3. 524-PSV-3741 and -3742.4.

C. Design Parameters:

1. Pressure relief shall be set at 10” WC with 20% allowable overpressure. Capacity shallnot be less than 27,000-CFH digester gas.

2. Vacuum relief shall be set at 2” WC with 50% allowable overpressure. Capacity shallnot be less than 24,000-CFH.

3. Safety selector valve shall have pressure drop through active device of not greater than3% of flow with pressure relief valve fully open.

4. Weights for both pressure side and vacuum side of pressure relief and vacuum breakervalve shall be factory weighed and individually stamped. Each plate shall be equal toeither 1” WC or ¼” WC. Valves shall be provided with an adequate supply of weights toallow operating setpoints of 15-in W.C. on the pressure relief and -4-in W.C. on thevacuum relief. A minimum of four plates for each valve for both pressure and vacuumshall be provided for ¼-in W.C. adjustment. All plates removed during final adjustmentof the relief settings shall be returned to the OWNER.


D. Construction:

1. Flanged Connection: pressure and vacuum relief valve with flame arrester shall bemanufactured to ANSI 150 FF flanged connections.

2. Relief valve and flame arrester shall be two independent items of equipment. Boltedand gasketed flange shall connect valve to flame arrester.

3. Relief Valve:

a. Valve pressure and vacuum ports shall be oversized to minimize overpressure.b. Valve pallets and seat rings shall be replaceable and interchangeable.c. Pallets shall be dead weight loaded, and center and side guided for stability.d. Pallets shall incorporate replaceable “air cushion” Teflon seat inserts.e. HDPE protective screens shall be provided at pressure and vacuum ports external of

pallets.f. Valve body and cover shall be low copper cast aluminum.g. Seat rings, pallet assemblies, and guideposts shall be stainless steel.

4. Flame Arrester:

a. Net free area through bank assembly shall be not less than three timescorresponding size standard pipe.

b. Entire bank assembly shall slide easily out of arrester housing to facilitate inspectionand cleaning.

c. Removing or replacing bank assembly on flame arrester shall not require removal ofvalve from installation; shall not require support for alignment, jackscrew forextending housing, shall not place strain on connecting piping.

d. Bank frame shall be extensible and shall be filled with corrugated rectangularshaped bank sheets. Spiral wound crimped ribbon design or alternating flat andcrimped ribbon plates are not acceptable.

e. Flame arrester shall be self-draining.f. Arrester housing shall be low copper cast aluminum. Bank assembly shall include a

low copper aluminum frame and stainless steel bank sheets.

5. Selector Valve:

a. Provide a selector valve for each set of two relief valve assemblies. Valve shall befull line size as relief valve inlet connection.

b. Valve body: Low copper cast aluminum.c. Retractor bushing, rotor and locking hasp: 304 stainless steel.d. Isolation disc (plug) and nozzle: Low copper cast aluminum.

6. Provide “All Weather” feature to protect Combination Pressure Relief / Vacuum ReliefValve Assembly in temperatures ranging from -25oF to +200oF (-32oC to +93oC).Provide anti-freeze coating applied to seat ring tip, pallet periphery and stem, and guideposts.

7. Provide insulating jacket constructed with silicone impregnated woven glass cloth lining.

a. 1” thick, 6-lb density fiber glass insulating material.b. Provide through-cover quilting pins to provide firm support for insulation. Pins shall

keep insulation from shifting inside liner and jacket for dimensional stability anduniform heat retention.

c. Silicon lining shall have inside seams and folded closing seams with two parallelrows of stitching.


d. Insulating jacket shall be attached to unit with combination of Velcro and cinch belts.e. Jacket shall allow access to flame arrester bank assembly during maintenance

without removing entire jacket.

2.07 FLAME CHECK

A. Manufacturers:


B. Construction:

1. Flame check shall be provided full line size of piping system in which it is installed.2. Housing shall be of “pipe union” design to permit disassembly.3. Element shall be replaceable and made of compressed 316 stainless steel woven wire.4. Housing shall be constructed of low copper, cast aluminum.5. Maximum working pressure rating of 25-psig.

2.08 CONDENSATE / SEDIMENT TRAP

A. Manufacturer:


A. Design Parameters:

1. 8 inch flange connections.2. Flow capacity shall be not less than 21,000 SCFH at 0.25-in WC.3. Operating principle for removing sediment from gas shall be centrifugal force developed

by a circular motion of gas passing through at high velocities and gravity at lowvelocities. Inlet elbow shall be specifically designed to swirl the gas inside the reservoir.An internal baffle shall be located at the base of the reservoir to provide efficientseparation of entrained droplets.

4. Storage capacity shall be a minimum of 6 gallons sediment and 6 gallons condensate.5. Maximum working pressure shall be 5 psig.

B. Construction:

1. Provide 2” NPT blowout connection2. Provide 1” NPT drain connection3. Provide two 1/2” NPT connections for a sightglass.4. Provide isolation valves and clear rigid plastic tube between valves to see liquid level

inside tank.5. Provide removable top cover for interior access with integral 3/4” NPT inspection pipe

for sediment level measurement.6. Construction shall be heavy welded steel.7. Unit shall have epoxy coated internals and primed exterior suitable for field applied final

coating system.8. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI 150# FF dimensions.

2.09 FOAM SEPARATOR (510-M-3751)


A. Manufacturer:



1. 8 inch flange connections.2. Flow capacity shall be not less than 20,000 SCFH at 0.11-in WC.3. Operating principle for removing foam from gas shall be two fold, first by causing two

vertical changes in direction around a central, internal baffle wall. Gas flowing throughthe vessel shall be subjected to a direct water spray to flush foam collected in the vesselto the drain system.

4. Maximum working pressure shall be 1 psig.

C. Construction:

1. 2 inch NPT blowout connection2. 1 incjh NPT drain connection3. Two ½ inch NPT connections for a sightglass.4. Provide isolation valves and clear rigid plastic tube between valves to see liquid level

inside tank.5. Provide removable top cover for interior access.6. Construction shall be heavy welded 316L stainless steel.7. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI 150 pound FF dimensions.

D. Accessories:

1. Drainage piping:

a. 4 inch 316 stainless steel, schedule 40 piping with:

1) Trap2) Flanged 4 inch drain piping connection3) Flanged cleanout4) 2 inch threaded NPT tap for vessel drain with stainless steel ball valve.

2. Water spray system:

a. Prepiped system of 316 stainless steel, schedule 40 piping with the followingminimum components:

1) Solenoid valve: stainless steel body, NEMA 7 explosion proof solenoid, 120 Voltpower.

2) Isolation and bypass valve: stainless steel ball valve.3) Inlet strainer: stainless steel body wye pattern strainer with threaded end

connections. Stainless steel internal element of mesh spacing recommended bysolenoid manufacturer.

4) Throttling valve: stainless steel globe valve to adjust water supply flow rate.5) Flow indicator.6) Spray nozzles: stainless steel of quantity and capacity required to fully wash gas

stream passing through vessel.

3. Controls:


a. High Level Switch (510-LSH-3751): Prewired to close solenoid valve when highwater level is detected.

b. Low Level Switch (510-LSL-3751): Wired to generate a remote alarm on low waterlevel in the vessel.

2.10 BACK PRESSURE CHECK VALVE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Varec Biogas 211 Series2. Groth Corporation Model 8110

B. Check Valve Design Parameters:

1. Provide back pressure check valves for installation in the biogas piping to preventreversal of flow.

2. Provide valves where shown on Drawings.3. Valve shall utilize a free swing (pendulum) pallet.4. Positive pressure shall force the pallet away from the valve seat permitting gas to flow

through the piping system.5. Reversal of flow or line pressure shall force the pallet to close against the valve seat

preventing back flow through the line.6. Horizontal installation only.7. Maximum working pressure: 5 psig.

C. Construction:

1. Valve body and cover shall be constructed of 356 T6 low copper cast aluminum.2. Provide removable top cover for access to valve internals.3. Pallet, pallet arm and removal seat ring are also constructed of low copper aluminum.4. Pallet arm shaft and all hardware shall be stainless steel.5. Seat ring shall be threaded into valve body.6. Threaded end connections.

2.11 SPARE PARTS

A. Flame Arrestors:

1. Provide (1) one spare bank for each size flame arrester in sealed package to preservelife from storage room environment. Deliver bank to Owner where directed by Owner.

B. Flame Trap Assemblies

1. Provide 2 fusible elements for each size flame trap assembly.

2.12 COATINGS

A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming and finish coating of non-stainless steel components of equipment in plant or field. System shall be compatible and inaccordance with System 8 of Section 09960. Color selected by OWNER.

B. Stainless steel components shall not be coated.

C. Surface Treatment of Fabricated Stainless Steel Components:

1. Electro-chemically clean or acid passivate all welds in stainless steel subassemblies.


2. After passivation, thoroughly rinse weldments with clean water and allow to air dry.3. Heat tint or carbon steel contamination shall not be evident. If contamination is evident,



3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittals.

B. Furnish and install a flame check where indicated on Plans and in all Biogas (BG) ventpipes, whether indicated or not. Flame check shall be installed on building interior, nearexterior wall penetration.



1. Supplier’s or manufacturer’s representative for equipment specified herein shall bepresent at job site for specified mandays, travel time excluded, for service during plantconstruction, plant startup, and training of OWNER’S personnel for plant operation.Include minimum of:

a. 1 manday for Installation Services.b. 2 mandays for Functional Testing with Instructional Services and Start-up. Start-up

includes setting weights for specified pressure and vacuum settings.

2. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation,maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system related areas other thanwastewater treatment process. See Section 01615.


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. WASTE GAS BURNERProject No. 12026 11390-1

SECTION 11390WASTE GAS BURNER

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Waste Gas Burner equipment including waste gas burner with automatic pilot ignitionsystem. (510-M-3706)

2. Waste Gas Pressure Switch (510-PSH-3773)3. Waste Gas Burner Control Panel (510-LCP-3705)4. Remote control ignition system.5. Heat tracing as recommended by manufacturer.


A. Summary:

1. Waste Gas Burner with biogas and natural Gas retention line and pilot light.

B. Design Requirements:

1. Estimated future gas production:

a. Estimated Minimum Design Digester Gas Production: 1,200 cf/hrb. Estimated Average Design Digester Gas Production: 5,400 cf/hrc. Estimated Maximum Design Digester Gas Production: 12,500cf/hr

2. Construct all components, including manufacturer supplied control panels, suitable foroutdoor installation and environment of location. Environment rating of area asdetermined by NFPA 820.

3. Flare shall able to withstand windloading of 150 mph and windspeeds of 110 mph.4. Baffles, downdraft preventers, vortex vanes and secondary stacks are not allowed.5. Pilot and retention nozzle mounted at burner tip shall be suitable for elevated pilot

temperature and H2S environment.6. Control panel shall be remotely located, stanchion mounted within 25-ft of the burner,

with spark generator located near located gas train as shown on Drawings.7. System shall be designed to operate as well in ambient temperatures below –20oF as in

ambient temperatures of 70oF.8. Ignition components, typical adjustments and maintenance shall be performed at ground

level, remote from the burner, away from the heat of combustion. Ignition components,control panels, typical adjustments and maintenance required equipment located within10-ft of the base of the flare are not acceptable.

9. Burners shall have “auto-start” feature. Call for ignition signal shall “auto-start” pilot.10. Provide Waste Gas Burner Pressure switch located in Gas Handling Room to initiate the

“auto-start” sequence.11. Replacement parts easily duplicated and attainable.12. All electrical components shall be suitable for location installed; ie NEMA 7 for Class I,

Division 1, Group D Hazardous Location or NEMA 4X for outdoor installation in a non-rated area. Environment rating of area as determined by NFPA 820.

WASTE GAS BURNER Donohue & Associates, Inc.11390-2 Project No. 12026

1.03 SUBMITTALS


1. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 in sufficient detail to confirm compliance withthe Drawings and this Section:

2. Submittal shall, at a minimum, include the items listed below

a. Manufacturer’s specification data and descriptive literature.b. Performance data for the waste gas burner equipment.c. Manufacturer’s recommendation if different than specified.d. Waste Gas Burner Assembly:

1) Installation drawings and specifically prepared technical data, including designcapacities, dimensions and headloss curves.

2) Provide estimated system headlosses at design flows listed above from theexisting wastegas burner location to flame of new waste gas burner.

e. Shop Drawings for Control Equipment.f. Manufacturer’s recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation

and start-up.g. Detailed layout of equipment, piping, etc., whenever Drawings are diagrammatic in

nature or equipment to be provided differs from that indicated on the Drawings.h. Anchor bolt layouts and details, support and bracket details, and other drawings

required for proper installation.i. Manufacturer’s guarantee.j. Information about quantity and type of spare parts supplied. Spare parts list shall be

that needed to maintain equipment in service for 10-year period. Include a list ofspecial tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.

k. Information regarding location of parts supply facilities, service crews and repairfacilities.

l. Product Data:

1) Catalog cuts and product specifications for each product specified in Part 2 ofthis Section.

2) Standard wiring diagrams unless wiring diagrams are specially prepared andsubmitted with shop drawings.

m. Proposed coating system. Submittal information for coating system shall be inaccordance with Section 09960.






A. System Responsibility: To ensure proper operating system, Waste Gas Burner manufacturershall provide all products specified in this Section including waste gas burner with automaticpilot ignition system, special equipment and spare parts.

1.06 WARRANTY


A. Provide warranty in accordance with the special warranty requirements in SC-13.07.1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 WASTE GAS BURNER WITH AUTOMATIC PILOT IGNITION SYSTEM

A. Manufacturer:

1. Anderson Greenwood Varec, Inc. Model: Varec 244WG Series.2. Groth Corporation, Inc.

B. Quantity: one (1) 4” waste gas burner with automatic pilot ignition system.

C. Design Parameters:

1. Burners shall be designed for waste gas composed primarily of methane.2. Burning capacity shall be not less than 22,250 SCFH gas of 0.8 specific gravity at 1/2”

WC (13 mm) pressure drop to attain the required maximum gas exit velocity for digestergas having approximately 550 BTU/cu ft.

3. Burner shall be self-supporting on 150# ANSI raised face flange able to withstandminimum windloading of 150 mph, minimum windspeeds of 110 mph and shall meetSeismic Zone 4 requirements.

4. Waste gas burner shall have a 4-inch size flanged waste gas connection.5. Burner and pilot shall be “auto-start.” Control panel shall receive signal from pressure

switch.6. Valve and regulator package and venturi shall be suitable for outdoor installation,

including enclosure, heater or ventilation as recommended by manufacturer.7. Spark generator and venturi of pilot ignition system shall be located no more than 10

feet horizontally from continuous flame nozzle.8. Continuous flame nozzle shall be mounted integral to the burner and shall have a long

profile flame.9. Unprotected pilot shall withstand winds up to 110 mph.10. Pilot shall burn at an elevated temperature to assist in the conversion of hydrogen

sulfide.11. Pilot shall be capable of operating on Natural Gas supplied to the venturi at less than 10

psig; approximately 2-psig.12. Gas consumption shall not exceed 47 scfh at 2-psi pilot gas pressure.13. Pilot gas shall only be consumed when there is a demand to combust digester gas,

otherwise, the pilot gas if off and burner in standby mode.14. Provide pressure regulator(s) and full-port isolation valves as necessary to regulate

natural gas supply pressure to manufacturer’s requirements for retention and pilot linegas pressure.

D. Construction:

1. Burner shall be constructed with 304 stainless steel shroud and upper 24” (610 mm) ofstack and pilot piping.

2. Pilot nozzles and thermocouple shall be 316 stainless steel. Thermowell shall be ininconel.


3. Pilot shall be inclined 30 degrees off vertical.4. Pilot flame shall extend through waste gas flow profile to ensure ignition of waste gas

regardless of the flow rate.5. All tubing shall be stainless steel with stainless steel fittings.

E. Auto-Start Construction:

1. Heavy wall continuous pilot nozzle that shall burn a stoichiometric air/gas mixture.2. Heavy wall flame retention nozzle that shall flow gas upon demand during the ignition

cycle.3. Heavy wall thermowell with type K thermocouple (510-TE-3783) installed in the

continuous pilot nozzle.4. 2” NPT inspirating venturi for delivery of combustible air/gas mixture to continuous

nozzle. Venturi shall include combustion chamber, spark plug, and backflash preventer.5. Valve and regulator package for controlling the pilot fuel gas. Package shall include

isolation valves, pressure regulators, pressure gauges, and explosion-proof solenoidvalves.

6. All components shall be copper-free and shall be installed on a mounting panel.7. Gas inlet connection shall be 1/2” NPT.8. Gas outlet connections shall be 2” NPT to the continuous flame line and 1/2” NPT to the

flame retention line.9. Solid state automatic ignition controller or control panel, spark generator, adjustable time

delay relay, and a pressure switch by-pass mounted in a NEMA 4X enclosure.Components shall be FM, UL, or CSA approved. Control panel and valve/regulatorassemblies shall be located on same mounting stand.

10. Provide 316 stainless steel weatherhood over remote spark panel and valve/regulatorassembly.

11. Controller shall include the following features:

a. Pilot flame monitoring.b. Status lights inside panel for Solenoid Valve Position, Ignition/Spark On, Pilot

On/Off.c. Adjustable thermocouple set point.d. Manual ignition button.e. SPDT contacts for remote indication of Pilot On/Off and Pilot Flame Failure

functions.f. Capability for repeated ignition cycle.g. Provision for remote start from pressure switch.

D. Pilot Flame Check:

1. Flame Check Design Parameters:

a. Install flame check on the ½” pilot line between the valve and regulator panel andthe burner stack connection.

b. Housing shall be of “pipe union” design to permit easy disassembly for inspectionand cleaning.

c. Maximum working pressure shall be 25 psig.

2. Flame Check Construction:

a. Element shall be replaceable and be made of compressed 316 stainless steel wovenwire. Housing shall be constructed of low copper cast aluminum.

b. Element shall be installed minimum distance above slab as recommended bymanufacturer.

3. Pilot gas flame check shall be Varec Model 5200.



2.06 CONTROL

A. Provide standard Waste Gas Burner and Ignition System.

B. 115/120 VAC, 60 Hz

C. Provide Manufacturer’s Control Panel (510-LCP-3705) in accordance with Section 11990,remotely stanchion mounted 15-ft from burner in location as shown on Drawings.

D. Provide Manufacturer’s Valve Control Station (510-M-3705) remotely mounted from controlpanel as shown on Drawings.

1. Provide NEMA 7 remote spark-generator enclosure.2. Panel shall be suitable for outdoor installation, including panel interior temperature

control equipment as required by manufacturer ie. heaters, air conditioners, filters, etc.Heaters shall be placed within control panel where radiant heat will not deform or meltadjacent control or panel components.

3. Control Station shall be stand mounted as detailed on Drawings.4. Provide pressure regulators and pressure gauges for burner to adjust Natural Gas pilot

supply pressures as required by manufacturer. Equipment shall be suitable for outdoorinstallation i.e. protected from freezing or overheating temperatures, and weather relatedconditions in a Class 1, Division I, Hazardous location.

5. Equipment in enclosures. Enclosures may be NEMA 4X, however, equipment includingheaters, thermostats, wiring, etc within must rated for Class 1, Division I, HazardousLocations.

6. Heat traced equipment. Equipment that is heat traced shall use heat trace, thermostatsand connections suitable for Class 1, Division I, Hazardous Locations. Heat tracedvalves shall be insulated and jacketed minimum 6-in either direction from valve.

7. Natural Gas pilot supply is 2 psi.8. Provide panel in accordance with Section 13431 and 13441.

E. Provide NEMA 7, Explosion Proof pressure switch (510-PSH-3773) to be located upstreamof the Pressure Control Valve located in the Gas Handling Room of the Digester Complex.

1. Operating range: 4-in to 20-in2. Deadband: 0.5-in WC or less.

2.07 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide spare parts necessary to maintain the equipment in service for a period of two years,including but not limited to the items listed below.

1. One Spark Plug.



D. Provide an adequate quantity of Manufacturer-approved lubricants to conform with theManufacturer-defined preventative maintenance practices through the warranty period asdefined in the special warranty requirements in SC-13.07.

2.08 COATING


A. Manufacturer is responsible for surface preparation, priming and finish coating of non-stainless steel components of equipment in plant or field. System shall be compatible and inaccordance with Section 09960. Color selected by OWNER.

B. Stainless steel components shall not be coated.

C. Surface Treatment of Stainless Steel Components:

1. Electro-chemically clean or acid passivate all welds in stainless steel subassemblies.2. After passivation, thoroughly rinse weldments with clean water and allow to air dry.3. Heat tint or carbon steel contamination shall not be evident. If contamination is evident,



3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittals.B. Flame Arrestor: Orientate flame arrestor with removable cover plate to bank assembly easily

accessible by plant personnel. Coordinate with OWNER.



1. Representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at the job site orclassroom designed by OWNER for minimum workdays specified below, travel timeexcluded, for assistance during construction, startup, and post-startup Include minimumof:

a. 1 person day for Installation Services and Functional Testing.b. 1/2 person day for Classroom and Field Instructional Services.

2. After installation is complete, test and demonstrate operation of equipment inaccordance with Section 01820. In addition to services specified above, provideSupplier’s or Manufacturer’s field services as required to successfully complete systemsdemonstrations in accordance with Section 01820

3. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation,maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system related areas other thanwastewater treatment process. See Section 01615.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. REFRIGERATED WASTEWATER SAMPLING EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 11391-1

SECTION 11391REFRIGERATED WASTEWATER SAMPLING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. RWW Sampler (411-M-0621)2. Filtrate Equalization Sampler (455-M-5641)3. Filtrate Sampler (455-M-5631)

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller

B. CFC: Chlorofluorocarbon

C. F: Fahrenheit

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association

B. IP: Ingress Protection

C. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

D. ANSI: American National Standards Institute



1. Automatic refrigerated wastewater sampler for sequential and composite samplingapplications, suitable for indoor and outdoor installation without additional weather protection.

2. Capable of collecting samples from combined wastewater and shall route the samples to astorage container for collection and analysis.

3. Sampler shall be suited to collect priority pollutant or general purpose samples in multiplebottles.

4. Operate from 115 volt, single-phase power supply.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for refrigerated wastewater sampling equipmentspecified.

REFRIGERATED WASTEWATER SAMPLING EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.11391-2 Project No. 12026

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for refrigeratedwastewater sampling equipment.


D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofrefrigerated wastewater sampling equipment with referenced standards.





2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of refrigerated wastewater samplingequipment in service.







B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain Refrigerated Wastewater Sampling Equipment from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.


A. Deliver Refrigerated Wastewater Sampling Equipment to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.

B. Store Refrigerated Wastewater Sampling Equipment in clean, dry location.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:



a. Provide spare parts necessary to maintain the equipment in service for a period of twoyears, including but not limited to the items listed below:

1) 18 pump tubes (shall be stored in plastic bags out of sunlight)2) 3/8-inch x 100-feet vinyl suction line3) 10 feet discharge tubing4) One (1) pump assembly

b. Provide special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.

c. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged and labeled with the name and number of theequipment to which they belong.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Teledyne Isco- Model 5800

2.02 AUTOMATIC SAMPLER

A. Sample Pump:

1. Peristaltic pump typically producing a line velocity of 3.0 feet per second in a 3/8 inch insidediameter suction line at 3 feet of head and capable of producing 28 feet of lift.

2. Body of pump shall be constructed of high strength Noryl® plastic and designed for corrosionresistance.

3. Body of pump shall be housed in a separate pocket of the sampler’s frame.4. Before and after each sample is collected, the pump shall air purge the suction line. Pre-

purges and post-purges shall be automatically controlled and shall not require pre-calibrationadjustments.

5. The sample stream shall be a direct tubing path from sample source to sample bottle.6. Pump shall contain a latched cover and thumbscrew opening for the replacement of pump

tubing.7. Pump shall contain a built-in magnetic safety interlock where the opening of the latch would

remove power to the pump motor.8. The pump shall be equipped with a 115 volt heater, housed beneath the pump cover, for the

prevention of liquid freezing inside the pump under extremely cold conditions.

B. Refrigerator

1. Materials:

a. The shell of the refrigerator shall be constructed of rotationally molded ultra-violetresistant polyethylene with molded-in-place thermal insulation, providing corrosion andweather resistance.

b. Refrigerant used shall be non-CFC with an ozone depletion potential of zero, HFC-134a.c. Copper refrigeration lines, condenser coil, and evaporator plate shall be powder coated

with heat-treated polyester for additional corrosion resistance.d. Other exposed metal components shall be either plated aluminum or stainless steel.

2. Construction:

a. The top of the refrigerator door shall be recessed and the bottle rack shall slide out foreasy accessibility.

b. Refrigerator’s door shall have hasps capable of accepting a padlock to prevent


unauthorized tampering with the sample compartment.c. A compression gasket shall be used to seal the refrigerator door.d. Power supply and solid-state thermostat shall be contained in an epoxy-potted enclosure

housed in a separate pocket of the sampler’s molded frame.e. Shall include long-life electronic temperature sensing devices that shall measure the

refrigeration compartment and evaporator plate temperatures. A microprocessor shallutilize this to control operation of the compressor, built-in heaters, and self-defrostingcycle.

f. Compressor shall have a high-temperature safety cutout.g. Built-in heaters to prevent sample from freezing. Shall not require a separate heater for

controls.h. Condensing coil with forced air cooling.i. Current unit temperature shall be displayed on display and stored for sampling reports.

3. Performance:

a. Maintain a sample temperature of 39 degrees +/- 1.8 degree F in ambient temperaturesfrom -20 degrees to 120 degrees F.

b. Refrigerator shall have a 5-minute recovery time to return to 39 degrees F once the doorhas been opened for 1-minute in 75 degrees F ambient temperatures

C. Enclosures

1. Top section housing the control panel, pump, distributor electronics, and power supply boxshall be NEMA 4X, 6, and IP 67.

2. Sampler shall be designed to operate, indoors and outdoors, without the need for a secondaryenclosure.

D. Controller:

1. Controller shall be housed in separate pocket of the sampler’s molded frame beneath flipcover.

2. Controller shall use a 2 row, 20 column, 40 total character display to show sampler status andprogram information.

3. 18-position keypad shall be used for all program entries, manual control of the sampler, anddata transfer functions.

4. Sampler’s memory shall maintain the program settings, stored programs, and the results ofthe last sampling sequence when the sampler is turned off or an external power interruptionoccurs.

5. User initiated diagnostics routine shall determine the operational status of the sampler, anyerrors detected shall be displayed to the user.

6. Sampler shall have four standard digital alarm outputs capable of direct wiring to the PLC ordata logger (5 volt, 100 milliamps).

7. Sampler shall output an event mark of 12 volts DC for the duration of the sample fill, from theflowmeter connector

8. Sampler shall not take samples while a remote dry 2 amp contact is open. Sampling shall beenabled when that contact is closed.

E. Sampler Delivery System

1. Sampler program shall allow the user to select from three types of sample distribution:

a. Samples per bottle: minimum of 15 samples shall be capable of being deposited in eachsample container.

b. Bottles per sample: all sample bottles shall be capable of being filled with a singeinitiation.


c. Multiple bottle compositing: allow user to simultaneously create a pair of set of bottlescontaining multiple samples.

d. Sampler shall deliver repeatable sample volumes accurate to +/- 10ml or +/- 10% of theprogrammed value.

e. User can select sample volumes from 10 to 9,990 ml in 1-ml increments.f. Sampler shall be able to be programmed to rinse the suction line with source liquid up to

three times.g. Liquid Detector:

1) Sampler shall use a non-wetted, non-conductive detector to sense the presence ofthe liquid and shall not be dependent on, or affected by any compositional, chemical, orphysical property of the liquid and require no routine maintenance or cleaning.2) Liquid detection system shall minimize the effects of changing head, intermittent flowin the suction line, or variable battery conditions on sample volume.3) After initial detection of liquid, the sensor shall monitor for the presence of liquidduring the sample collection sequence.4) Liquid detector shall also monitor for anomalies in the sample collection process, if noliquid is detected the sampler shall be capable of retrying the sampling sequence up tothree times.

h. Pump Revolution Counter:

1) After liquid detection, the pump revolution counter shall count actual pump revolutionsto determine sample volume delivery to the storage containers.2) If liquid flow is interrupted during the sample collection sequence, the detector shallinhibit the pump revolution counter from incrementing the counter until liquid flow isrestored.3) Automatic compensations for air slugs in the sample shall be made by the deliverysystem.4) The pump revolution counter shall monitor the total number of pump revolutions andalert the user when a pre-selected number of counts have been reached.5) A tubing life indicator shall alert the user to the need for pump tubing replacement onthe sampler display screen.

F. Flow Pacing of Samples:

1. User can program the sampler to collect sequential or composite samples at user-definableintervals.

2. A delay to first sample collection shall be programmable in minutes from 1 to 9,999 or by thereal time clock..

3. Time Pacing of Samples:

a. Sampler shall use an internal real-time clock to provide both time and date information.b. Uniform time paced samples shall be collected at regular time intervals from 1 minute to

9,999 minutes.c. Sample volumes may be equal or proportional to flow.

4. Flow Pacing of Samples:

a. Analog Input

1) Sampler shall have a standard 4-20mA flow proportional input compatible with mostflow meters without additional interfacing.

2) Samples shall be equal in volume and taken at variable times proportional to flow.

5. Flow-Weighted Volumes:


a. Analog Input

1) Sampler shall have a standard 4-20mA flow proportional input compatible with mostflow meters without additional interfacing.

2) Samples shall be equal taken at equal time intervals and variable volumesproportional to cumulative flow.

6. Distributor

a. Distributor shall be housed in separate pocket of the refrigerator’s molded frameb. Belt-driven by a stepper motor.c. Optical sensor shall be used for positive location of the distributor arm.d. A single adjustable distributor arm shall be used for a bottle configurations and sampler

mounting possibilities.e. Distributor arm shall be movable by hand for ease of sample recovery and will relocate

itself before the next sample is taken.

7. Sampler Data Storage:

a. Sampler shall be capable of storing key information for each sampling routine.b. Information shall be accessible at any time during or after a sampling routine on the

sampler’s display.c. Sampler shall also create and store two reports: program settings and a sampling results

report.d. Sampling results report shall list the sample number, if error occurred, time of the sample,

and the sample temperature.e. Error codes used in the report shall be listed and defined at the end of the report.f. Report shall verify correct operation, indicate regulatory compliance, or used as an

enforcement document.g. Program settings shall allow the sampler programming to be verified.h. Report shall include the sampling mode, enable time or mode, delay to fist sample, and

the intervals between samples and other programmed parameters.

G. Suction Lines and Strainers:

1. Provide suction line as shown on the drawings.2. Suction line shall be made of 3/8 inch ID Vinyl.3. Strainer shall be made of stainless steel.

H. Sample Collection Containers:

1. Sampler shall be provided with a 5-gallon polyethylene sample containers with lid andpolypropylene screw cap.

2. Sample container shall have a wide mouth and contain no inaccessible corners to aid incleaning.

I. Electrical:

1. Provide sampler with single 120 volt, single phase power connection.2. Provide sampler with cord and plug for 120 volt, single phase, 20 amp receptacle.

J. Accessories:

1. Provide a PVC flow-through sample chamber with a PVC “stinger” probe.


2. Provide 100% stainless steel weight strainer to be attached to end of each sampler suction lineexcept samplers installed with a flow-through sample chamber.

3. Fasten hose to strainer using stainless steel or plastic retainers or clamps without protrudingedges to collect rags.


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. The Refrigerated Wastewater Sampling Equipment shall be factory assembled and factory runtested prior to shipment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install Refrigerated Wastewater Sampling Equipment in accordance with manufacturer's writteninstructions.

3.03 IDENTIFICATION








END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. DIGESTER GAS HOLDER COVERProject No. 12026 11395-1

SECTION 11395DIGESTER GAS HOLDER COVER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the furnishing and installation of one arched beam or radial truss type,vertical or spiral guided gas holder cover suitable for installation in an existing concrete digestiontank, 100 Ft. in diameter x 35 Ft. SWD.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. The gas holder cover shall be of the non-scum submergence type whereby a sufficient quantity ofgas will be trapped beneath the steel roof plate such that the gas holder will ride on gas without thepossibility of digester liquor covering any part of the roof plate. The gas holder shall have asubmerged concrete ballast ring designed to increase gas pressure when the gas holder becomesfull

B. The gas holder cover shall be furnished in accordance with the detail drawings and specifications.


A. The following standards apply to the work and products specified herein.

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).

a. Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.b. AISC Quality Certification Program.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

a. ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Structural Steel.b. ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc Coated

Welded and Seamless.

3. Steel Structural Painting Council (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications.

B. Digester cover fabricator shall possess a Quality Certification Program Certificate from theAmerican Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) for Category (Sbd), Conventional Steel Buildings.

C. Equipment Manufacturer shall have not less than ten (10) years of experience in the application,design, and manufacture of anaerobic digester gas holder covers in wastewater treatment plants.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


DIGESTER GAS HOLDER COVER Donohue & Associates, Inc.11395-2 Project No. 12026

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions and include the following:

a. Complete assembly and installation drawings.b. Descriptive information on material and equipment furnished.c. Stress analysis for cover design based upon the following:

i. Gas holder resting on corbels with tank empty.ii. Gas holder floating on gas with ballast ring exposed.

d. Total cover weight with appurtenances and derivation of ballast requirements to meetspecified gas pressure conditions.

e. Location of all appurtenances.f. Location of support corbels.g. Location of roller assemblies.

C. Submit O&M manual in accordance with Section 01785 on Operation and Maintenance Data.”

D. At the engineer's request, submit certification that the Equipment Manufacturer has not less thanten (10) years of experience in the application, design, and manufacture of anaerobic digester gasholder covers in wastewater treatment plants and submit a list of not less than twenty-five (25)operating installations as evidence of meeting the experience requirement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. WesTech

B. Ovivo.

C. Siemens Water Technologies, of Waukesha, Wisconsin.

2.02 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Specific design requirements related to this project include:

1. Design operating pressure: 10.0" w.c.2. Ballast ring pressure increase: 1.0" w.c.3. Pressure/vacuum relief valve settings: 13" w.c. press.

2.0" w.c. vac.4. Cover roof slope: 1-3/4" per foot maximum5. Side sheet length: 10 ft. 0 inches.6. Gas dome dimensions: 8.5 dia. x 3.0 high.7. Effective gas storage capacity: 45,000 ft.3

8. Allowable sludge level variation: 5 ft.6 inches.9. Distance from top of corbels to HWL: 16 ft. 0 inches.10. Distance from top of corbels to top of wall: 20 ft. 6 inches.

B. The gas holder shall be designed so that 100% of the effective gas storage volume can bewithdrawn at all normal digester operating liquid levels without causing a drop in gas pressure. Thedomed portion of the gas holder, the cylindrical portion enclosed within the upper most 12 inchesof the skirt and the cylindrical portion enclosed within the bottom skirt section occupied by theconcrete ballast ring shall not be included in the effective gas holder storage capacity.


C. Gas holder design shall maintain the specified operating pressure on digester gas throughout thespecified ranges for gas storage and digester liquid level variation.

D. Gas holder shall be equipped with guides, either recessed in the cover rim plate and engagingrollers mounted on the digester wall or with guides attached to the concrete walls of the digesterwith slides attached to the cover at the top and bottom of the side sheet, for maintenance of coverstability at all normal conditions.

E. The guidance system shall permit free travel of the gas holder from a position at rest on thecorbels to a maximum high water level (plugged overflow) condition with a fully exposed ballastring (plugged relief valve) without contacting the end of the guide or any other form of cover travelstop.

F. The guidance system and rim plate shall be arranged to maintain a nominal clearance betweenthe digester wall and the gas holder rim plate as required to ensure no contact between cover antank over full course of travel.

G. Gas holder design shall maintain a minimum 6 inch freeboard between the top outer edge of thecover and the digester liquid at all normal operating conditions including zero gas pressure.

H. Final location of rollers or slides shall be confirmed by equipment supplier. Actual location of newcorbels to be defined by Manufacturer.

2.03 LOADS AND STRESSES

A. Design loads:

1. Uniform live, snow and vacuum load of 50 lbs./ft.2.2. Wind load of 90 miles per hour.3. Uniform design dead and roof load of 35 lbs./ft.2 or to meet specified gas pressure, whichever

is greater.

B. Gas holder shall be completely self-supporting under specified design dead and live loadconditions when resting on corbels in an empty tank.

C. Structural design shall take into consideration live load plus dead load, including weight of cover,ballast, and other appurtenances.

D. Maximum allowable stresses shall not exceed the limiting stresses set forth in the AISCspecifications for structural steel having a yield strength of 36 KSI.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Cover and framework including trusses or arched beams, purlins, roof plate, rim plate, gas dome,manway, guides, and roller supports shall be fabricated of structural steel.

B. All structural steel used in the digester cover and appurtenances shall meet the requirements ofASTM A36.

C. All steel plate utilized in cover construction shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch.

2.05 FABRICATION – GENERAL

A. Gas holder shall be made up of prefabricated subassemblies, set up and assembled in the shop tothe degree necessary to insure proper field fit up, then piece marked, disassembled, and shipped


to the site for field erection. Subassemblies shall be prefabricated in units as large as shipping andhandling restrictions will allow.

B. All openings for appurtenances protruding through the cover roof plates shall be located andprecut in the factory and designed to allow field installation of the appurtenances with gas tightwelds at the roof plates.

2.06 FABRICATION – ARCHED BEAM WITH VERTICAL SLIDES

A. Roof Plates: The cover framework shall be covered with 1/4" steel plates. The cover plates shallbe welded to the top of the erection beams, side sheets, and center ring to form a gas-tight cover.There shall be no bolt holes in the plates. The radial joints between cover plates shall be centeredon the erection beams. All exterior seams and joints between the cover plates and the erectionmembers shall be seal welded. Circumferential joints between cover plates shall be lap welded.Roof plates shall not span more than 8 feet between radial beams.

B. Beam Supports: The cover framework shall consist of arched radial ribs having a roof radius of1.5 times the tank diameter held in position by a tension ring, and a compression ring. The tensionring shall be continuously welded with full penetration welds using AWS procedures to insure thatthe full strength of the tension ring is developed.

C. Side Sheets: The side sheets for the cover shall extend from the roof plates to [a point sufficient tostore the specified gas volume][the specified depth]. The side sheet sections shall consist of 1/4"plates with reinforcing members adequate to support the weight of the cover and live, snow, andvacuum loads. Side sheets are to be welded to the tension ring and each other to form water-tightjoints.

D. Ballast: After completion of erection and painting, concrete ballast blocks shall be placed aroundthe bottom portion of the side sheets to produce the specified operating and gas relief pressureswhen the cover is floating free on the digester gas.

E. Center Dome: 84-inch diameter dome shall be supplied as specified with pipe connections andnozzles as located on the plans. The compression ring shall be an integral part of the centerdome. The center dome cover shall be equipped with lifting bars for easy removal. The centerdome cover shall be bolted to the center dome providing a gas tight seal by using a neoprenegasket.

F. Slide Assemblies and Vertical Slide Guides: Slide assemblies shall be mounted to the top andbottom of the side sheets in line with the radial beams. The slide assemblies shall be so designedas to prevent binding of the cover during upward or downward travel under any of the specifiedloading conditions or under an unbalanced snow load on 1/4 of the digester cover area. The slideassemblies shall have Ultra High Molecular Weight Polyethylene (UHMW) slide plates and shallbear against a steel plate on the tank wall and track in vertical guides to prevent rotation of thecover. Slide guide extensions shall be furnished above the tank wall for support over the maximumtravel range of the cover.

2.07 FABRICATION – TRUSS STYLE WITH SPRIAL GUIDES

A. Each truss shall comprise an upper and lower chord from the gas dome to the rim plate and shallinclude the required supporting interconnecting members in the vertical plane. To assure properalignment and to aid erection, trusses shall have bolted connections at the gas dome, rim plates,and purlins.

B. The gas dome shall be of the size specified and shall be designed to provide a suitable collectionpoint for digester gas. The gas dome shall include a connection for the pressure/vacuum relief


valve assembly. The dome shall be fitted with a bolted and gasketed cover plate. The cover plateshall accommodate a 24" dia. gas pipe housing, which shall extend a minimum of 6 inches abovethe top of the gas pipes when the cover is resting on the corbels.

C. The roof plate sections shall be precut at the factory and shall be designed for all downhand filletor overlap welding in the field. Framing shall be provided under the roof plate for manways.Purlins shall be provided between the top chords of the trusses for support of the outer roof platesections.

D. Guide rollers shall be grease lubricated and shall be designed for mounting to a structural steelframe set on the digester wall. Rollers shall be of cast iron construction with all rounded cornersand shall be 11 inches in diameter and 6 inches wide. The roller shaft shall be 3 inch diameter.Rollers shall be field adjustable for final clearance adjustment prior to final field welding.

E. Spiral Guides shall be designed to be recessed in the cover rim plate. Guides shall be equallyspaced around periphery of cover and shall be at a 45o angle to engage rollers. Guide extensionsshall be provided above or below the rim plate as required to meet specified cover travel. Guidesshall be designed to provide a minimum 5 inch engagement of the rollers and to have a clearanceof one inch between roller face and back of guide.

F. Gas holder design shall include a formed in place concrete ballast ring around the bottom edge ofthe rim plate. The ballast ring shall be normally submerged at the specified design operating gaspressure and throughout the specified effective gas storage volume. Raising the ballast ring out ofthe liquid shall increase gas pressure by the amount specified. Any additional ballast needed toobtain the specified gas operating pressure shall also be included in the submerged ballast ring.No ballast material will be allowed on top of the cover.

2.08 APPURTENANCES

A. One (1) 24 inch diameter manway permitting access to the digester tank shall be provided in thecover. The manway shall be equipped with rungs for access and shall be fitted with a gas tightbolted and gasketed cover.

B. One (1) 24 inch diameter emergency pressure relief manway permitting access to the digestertank shall be provided in the cover. Hinged cover with weight attachment stud to adjust reliefpressure setting. Stainless steel body with PTFE seats. Varec Series 400W, or equal.

C. Two (2) 8 inch diameter sampling wells shall be provided in the cover. The wells shall beconstructed of Schedule 40 steel pipe and shall extend to bottom of rim plate. Sampling wellsshall be fitted with gas tight, hinged, quick opening covers.

D. One (1) 8 inch diameter flanged connection for level instrumentation. Coordinate size withequipment furnished under Division 13.

E. One (1) 8 inch diameter flanged connection on the top of the Gas Dome for installation ofpressure/vacuum relief equipment.

2.09 PAINTING

A. The gas holder shall be shipped unpainted from the manufacturer.

B. Field surface preparation and painting shall be in accordance with Section 09900. Coat interior,exterior, and side skirt of cover.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The gas holder shall be erected and installed in strict conformance with the approved shopdrawings and manufacturer's recommendations.

B. The cover shall not be painted until field testing of welds and any necessary re-welding has beencompleted.

C. Field welding procedures and qualifications shall be in accordance with the latest standards of theAmerican Welding Society.

D. Install ballast of the type and in the locations recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Top surface of cover shall be insulated in accordance with Section 07532. Insulation system shallnot extend up along the sidewall of any roof mounted flange connection.

3.02 FIELD TESTING

A. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer.

B. After erection, the gas holder shall be tested for gas tightness by filling the tank with liquid andtrapping air beneath the dome plate. All vertical and horizontal welded seams shall be checkedfor leaks by means of a soapsuds solution and any leaks re-welded. Maintain level for a minimumof two hours.

C. After gas tightness test, MANUFACTURER shall determine operating weight of cover. Thepressure relief valve shall be adjusted based on cover operating weight.

D. Demonstrate proper cover travel by increasing and decreasing the digester liquid level, beginningwith cover on corbels, and allowing cover to travel to high water level and back again to corbels.One (1) full cycle must be completed, unassisted, without any binding, scraping, tilting or any othercharacteristic not consistent with the manufacturer's intended operation.

E. Water for testing cover shall be provided by the Owner and properly disposed of by the Contractor.



1. Representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at Project Site or classroomdesigned by OWNER for minimum workdays specified below, travel time excluded, forassistance during construction, startup, and post-startup Include minimum of:

a. 4 workdays for Installation Services.b. 2 workdays for Instructional Services.c. 1 workday for Post-Startup Services.

2. Supplier of manufacturer shall direct services specific to system and equipment operation,maintenance, and troubleshooting. See Section 01615.


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. FIXED STEEL DIGESTER COVERProject No. 12026 11396-1

SECTION 11396FIXED STEEL DIGESTER COVER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the furnishing and installation of two arched beam or radial truss type, fixedsteel cover suitable for installation in existing concrete digestion tanks, 60 Foot in diameter x 26 Ft.SWD.

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. The fixed covers shall be of the arched beam or truss type designed to be attached to the top ofthe existing digester concrete walls.

B. The covers shall be furnished in accordance with the detail drawings and specifications.


A. The following standards apply to the work and products specified herein.

1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).

a. Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.b. AISC Quality Certification Program.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

a. ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Structural Steel.b. ASTM A53 Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc Coated

Welded and Seamless.

3. Steel Structural Painting Council (SSPC) Surface Preparation Specifications.

B. Digester cover fabricator shall possess a Quality Certification Program Certificate from theAmerican Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) for Category (Sbd), Conventional Steel Buildings.

C. Equipment Manufacturer shall have not less than ten (10) years of experience in the application,design, and manufacture of anaerobic digester covers in wastewater treatment plants.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit shop drawings in accordance with General Conditions and include the following:

a. Complete assembly and installation drawings.

FIXED STEEL DIGESTER COVER Donohue & Associates, Inc.11396-2 Project No. 12026

b. Descriptive information on material and equipment furnished.c. Stress analysis for cover design.d. Total cover weight with appurtenances.e. Location of all appurtenances.f. Location of support corbels.g. Location of roller assemblies.

C. Submit O&M manual in accordance with Section 01785 on Operation and Maintenance Data.”

D. At the engineer's request, submit certification that the Equipment Manufacturer has not less thanten (10) years of experience in the application, design, and manufacture of anaerobic digestercovers in wastewater treatment plants and submit a list of not less than twenty-five (25) operatinginstallations as evidence of meeting the experience requirement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. WesTech

B. Ovivo.

C. Siemens Water Technologies, of Waukesha, Wisconsin.

D. Walker Process.


A. Specific design requirements related to this project include:

1. Design operating pressure: 10.0" w.c.2. Pressure/vacuum relief valve settings: 13" w.c. press.

2.0" w.c. vac.3. Side sheet length: 8 foot, 9 inches.4. Center dome dimensions: 8.5 foot diameter x 2 foot high.5. Allowable sludge level variation: 2 foot, 6 inches.6. Top of wall elevation: 788.337. High water elevation: 783.758. Low water elevation: 781.25

2.03 LOADS AND STRESSES

A. Design loads:

1. Uniform live, snow and vacuum load of 50 lbs./ft.2.2. Wind load of 90 miles per hour.3. Uniform design dead and roof load of 35 lbs./ft.2 or to meet specified gas pressure, whichever

is greater.

B. Cover shall be completely self-supporting under specified design dead and live load conditionswhen resting on tank walls.

C. Structural design shall take into consideration live load plus dead load, including weight of cover,mixer applied loads, and other appurtenances.


D. Loads associated with mixer are estimated to be 5,150 pounds of static load and 2,626 pound ofdynamic load. Actual loads shall be confirm with Manufacturer of mixer systems providingequipment as part of Section 11382.

E. Maximum allowable stresses shall not exceed the limiting stresses set forth in the AISCspecifications for structural steel having a yield strength of 36 KSI.

2.04 MATERIALS

A. Cover and framework including trusses or arched beams, purlins, roof plate, rim plate, centerdome, and manway shall be fabricated of structural steel.

B. All structural steel used in the digester cover and appurtenances shall meet the requirements ofASTM A36.

C. All steel plate utilized in cover construction shall have a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch.

2.05 FABRICATION – GENERAL

A. Cover shall be made up of prefabricated subassemblies, set up and assembled in the shop to thedegree necessary to insure proper field fit up, then piece marked, disassembled, and shipped tothe site for field erection. Subassemblies shall be prefabricated in units as large as shipping andhandling restrictions will allow.

B. All openings for appurtenances protruding through the cover roof plates shall be located andprecut in the factory and designed to allow field installation of the appurtenances with gas tightwelds at the roof plates.

C. Side Sheets: The side sheets for the cover shall extend from the roof plates specified depth. Theside sheet sections shall consist of 1/4" plates with reinforcing members adequate to support theweight of the cover and live, snow, and vacuum loads. Side sheets are to be welded to the tensionring and each other to form water-tight joints.

D. Wall Supports: The entire weight of the cover and the specified loadings shall be carried by evenlyspaced wall supports. The wall supports shall be fabricated from closed steel sections and shallbear on the top of the digester wall. The supports shall be so designed as to prevent any radialloads from being transmitted to the digester wall. The wall support brackets shall be designed todistribute the vertical loads evenly over each of the support bracket anchor bolts.Seal Plate: A seal plate shall be furnished for permanent attachment on the bottom of the sidesheet after the cover has been erected. The seal plates shall conform to the radius of the tank tominimize gaps between the seal plate and the tank walls.

2.06 FABRICATION – ARCHED BEAM WITH VERTICAL SLIDES

A. Roof Plates: The cover framework shall be covered with 1/4" steel plates. The cover plates shallbe welded to the top of the erection beams, side sheets, and center ring to form a gas-tight cover.There shall be no bolt holes in the plates. The radial joints between cover plates shall be centeredon the erection beams. All exterior seams and joints between the cover plates and the erectionmembers shall be seal welded. Circumferential joints between cover plates shall be lap welded.Roof plates shall not span more than 8 feet between radial beams.

B. Beam Supports: The cover framework shall consist of arched radial ribs having a roof radius of1.5 times the tank diameter held in position by a tension ring, and a compression ring. The tensionring shall be continuously welded with full penetration welds using AWS procedures to insure thatthe full strength of the tension ring is developed.


C. Digester Seal: A seal shall be provided in the 3" annular space between the digester cover andtank wall. Seal and seal installation shall be provided by the contractor.

D. Center Dome: 8 foot, 6 inch diameter dome shall be supplied and coordinate with equipmentfurnished under Section 11382. Bolting pattern and support requirements to be coordinatedbetween mixer Manufacturer and cover Manufacturer prior to shop drawing submittal. Thecompression ring shall be an integral part of the center dome. The center dome cover shall beequipped with lifting bars for easy removal. The center dome cover shall be bolted to the centerdome providing a gas tight seal by using a neoprene gasket.

2.07 FABRICATION – TRUSS STYLE WITH SPRIAL GUIDES

A. Each truss shall comprise an upper and lower chord from the gas dome to the rim plate and shallinclude the required supporting interconnecting members in the vertical plane. To assure properalignment and to aid erection, trusses shall have bolted connections at the gas dome, rim plates,and purlins.

B. The gas dome shall be of the size specified and shall be designed to provide a suitable collectionpoint for digester gas. The gas dome shall include a connection for the pressure/vacuum reliefvalve assembly. The dome shall be fitted with a bolted and gasketed cover plate. The cover plateshall accommodate a 24" dia. gas pipe housing, which shall extend a minimum of 6 inches abovethe top of the gas pipes when the cover is resting on the corbels.

C. The roof plate sections shall be precut at the factory and shall be designed for all downhand filletor overlap welding in the field. Framing shall be provided under the roof plate for manways.Purlins shall be provided between the top chords of the trusses for support of the outer roof platesections.

2.08 APPURTENANCES

A. One (1) 24 inch diameter manway permitting access to the digester tank shall be provided in thecover. The manway shall be equipped with rungs for access and shall be fitted with a gas tightbolted and gasketed cover.

B. One (1) 24 inch diameter emergency pressure relief manway permitting access to the digestertank shall be provided in the cover. Hinged cover with weight attachment stud to adjust reliefpressure setting. Stainless steel body with PTFE seats. Varec Series 400W, or equal.

C. Two (2) 8 inch diameter sampling wells shall be provided in the cover. The wells shall beconstructed of Schedule 40 steel pipe and shall extend to bottom of rim plate. Sampling wellsshall be fitted with gas tight, hinged, quick opening covers.

D. One (1) 8 inch diameter flanged connection for level instrumentation. Coordinate size withequipment furnished under Division 13.

E. One (1) 6 inch diameter flanged connection for installation of pressure/vacuum relief equipment.

F. One (1) 6 inch diameter flanged connection for biogas take-off piping.

2.09 PAINTING

A. The cover shall be shipped unpainted from the manufacturer.

B. Field surface preparation and painting shall be in accordance with Section 09900. Coat interior,exterior, and side skirt of cover.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The cover shall be erected and installed in strict conformance with the approved shop drawingsand manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Annular space between sidewall and concrete tank shall be sealed with sealant, grout and sand asrecommended by cover Manufacturer.

C. The cover shall not be painted until field testing of welds and any necessary re-welding has beencompleted.

D. Field welding procedures and qualifications shall be in accordance with the latest standards of theAmerican Welding Society.

E. Install ballast of the type and in the locations recommended by the manufacturer.

F. Top surface of cover shall be insulated in accordance with Section 07532. Insulation system shallnot extend up along the sidewall of any roof mounted flange connection.

3.02 FIELD TESTING

A. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer.

B. After erection, the gas holder shall be tested for gas tightness by filling the tank with liquid andtrapping air beneath the dome plate. All vertical and horizontal welded seams shall be checkedfor leaks by means of a soapsuds solution and any leaks re-welded. Maintain level for a minimumof two hours.

C. After gas tightness test, MANUFACTURER shall determine operating weight of cover. Thepressure relief valve shall be adjusted based on cover operating weight.

D. Demonstrate proper cover travel by increasing and decreasing the digester liquid level, beginningwith cover on corbels, and allowing cover to travel to high water level and back again to corbels.One (1) full cycle must be completed, unassisted, without any binding, scraping, tilting or any othercharacteristic not consistent with the manufacturer's intended operation.

E. Water for testing cover shall be provided by the Owner and properly disposed of by the Contractor.



1. Representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at Project Site or classroomdesigned by OWNER for minimum workdays specified below, travel time excluded, forassistance during construction, startup, and post-startup Include minimum of:

a. 4 workdays for Installation Services.b. 2 workdays for Instructional Services.c. 1 workday for Post-Startup Services.

2. Supplier of manufacturer shall direct services specific to system and equipment operation,maintenance, and troubleshooting. See Section 01615.



END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. ACTIVATED CARBON SYSTEMProject No. 12026 11800-1

SECTION 11800ACTIVATED CARBON SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section identifies the Activated Carbon System to be furnished and installed as shown ondrawings and as specified herein. The Activated Carbon System required for this projectincludes:

1. Carbon Adsorber Vessel.2. Activated Carbon.3. Accessories as noted.4. Manufacturer's Services.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. A certificate from the resin manufacturer listing the nomenclature, composition, andcharacteristics of the resin shall be furnished with the vessel.

B. Drawings and Calculations:

1. All Structural drawings and calculations shall be signed and sealed by a professionalengineer.

2. Provide detailed structural and mechanical layout drawings showing system fabrication,dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work and fully describing systemoperation.

3. Provide complete process and mechanical design calculations for odor control system,which shall include but not be limited to the following:

a. Estimated annual utility and carbon usage.b. Carbon vessel pressure drop calculations.c. Calculations showing that the media(s) as provided will meet the required performance

criteria. Anticipated carbon replacement frequency based upon design airflow andhydrogen sulfide inlet concentrations of 2 ppmv (365 days/year).

4. Provide structural calculations and drawings for vessels:

a. Calculations shall include, but not be limited to consideration of the following:

(i) Dead loads.(ii) Live loads.(iii) Environmental loads (wind, snow, seismic)(iv) Anchor lug attachment to shell.(v) Anchor bolt size and embedment requirements.(vi) Consideration of effect of all cutouts and openings into the vessel wall.(vii) Attachment lugs for piping, structural members, and other appurtenances.(viii) Carbon support design.(ix) Steel base frame design(x) Deflection of the vessel at the point of connection with the ductwork.

b. All material property values used for structural calculations shall be verified by actualphysical tests on similar type laminates.

ACTIVATED CARBON SYSTEM Donohue & Associates, Inc.11800-2 Project No. 12026

5. Manufacturer’s catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identificationof materials of construction.

6. Vessel data indicating equipment number, pressure rating, diameter, straight lengths,overall lengths, and wall thickness.

7. Manufacturer’s Information on the activated carbon media:

a. Air pressure drop data through media, measured at design airflow rate and proposedmedia radial depth and height.

b. Media physical Characteristics, Including:

(i) Media volume (cubic feet)(ii) Media depth: radial depth (feet) and height (feet)(iii) Bulk density of packed media (pounds per cubic foot).(iv) Media surface area/volume (square feet per cubic foot).

c. Activated carbon manufacturer’s certificate.d. Delivered carbon specification sheets documenting compliance with all performance

specifications listed in paragraph, activated carbon media.e. Information on expected settling rates of the media.f. Operating data from previous installations to substantiate media performance claims.

8. Fabricator’s detailed requirements for odor control system foundations.9. Shop and field painting systems: Include manufacturers descriptive technical catalog

literature and specifications.

C. Information Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data as specified in Section 01785, Operation andMaintenance Data.

2. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation.3. Detailed Performance Testing Plan which includes:

a. Test Equipment and apparatus.b. Calibration and setup procedures.c. The specific testing methodology to be usedd. The sampling and analysis procedures.

4. Final Report:

a. Narrative of the sampling activities, a copy of the original sampling log, photographsshowing locations of velocity and pressure measurements, tabular summary ofvelocity, airflow rates, pressure, H2S and odor removal data, calculated results, andconclusions of these results.

b. Revise the report according to the Engineer’s written comments, and resubmit.

5. All deviations of exceptions to this section shall be detailed and explained with the reasonfor the deviation and the affect of the deviation on the operation and performance of theequipment.

6. Manufacturer’s Training Program.7. Equipment Testing and Field Startup Report.8. Installation list showing experience with similar installations, as requested by Article,

Quality, Assurance.9. Statement of Warranty.10. A copy of the fiberglass fabrication Quality Assurance procedures intended to be used.

Manufacturer’s Inspector qualifications, as described in Article, Source Quality Control.


D. Grounding Requirements - Submit manufacturer's recommended grounding requirements,including wire and rod sizes and connection points.

E. FRP Fabricator QA/QC Documentation – The written QA/QC program documentation of theproposed FRP fabricator shall be submitted with the shop drawings. These documents shallbe accompanied by the name and street address of the facility where the vessel will befabricated. A fabrication schedule for the vessel and ductwork shall be submitted with the shopdrawings.

F. Maintenance Data - Submit maintenance data and parts list for equipment item. Include thisdata and product data in maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

G. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.


A. This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install, complete, the activated carbonodor control system shown on the drawings.

B. Vessel Design:

1. Vessel design and airflow configuration shall be of radial design type.2. The basis of design for this system has been developed using an outside-to-inside airflow

pattern, however, inside-to-outside flow type is acceptable pending submission andapproval of design details during submittal review process.

3. Deep bed activated carbon system designs are not acceptable.4. Vessel made of plastic (HDPE or PPL) are not acceptable.

C. Like items of equipment specified herein shall be the products of one manufacturer in order toachieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, andmanufacturer’s services.

D. Refer to Contract Drawings for additional information to supplement this section.E. The structural aspects of the vessel shall be sufficient to meet Code recommended

requirements, including relevant seismic requirements for all conditions during the design life;requirements shall be in accordance with local seismic and regulatory codes.

F. Equipment Materials:

1. All components of the system shall be compatible with the conditions and chemicals towhich they will be subjected to during normal operation.

2. Compounds on which the materials of construction shall be compatible include, but are notlimited to:

a. Hydrogen sulfide.b. Sulfuric acid.c. Dimethyl sulfide.d. Dimethyl disulfide.e. Ammonia


A. Qualifications:

1. Designer: Registered Professional engineer.2. The Manufacturer shall be recognized in the design, production and operation of activated

carbon air treatment systems in the United States.3. The Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years’ experience in design and fabrication of FRP

odor control systems similar to the type specified for this Project.


4. Similar Projects:

a. Upon request, the Manufacturer shall provide a list of five activated carbon airtreatment installations where radial flow carbon equipment by the manufacturer iscurrently in service associated with the removal of hydrogen sulfide and /or othertypical organic municipal wastewater odors.

b. The list shall include:

i. Contact names, telephone numbers, mailing address, and length of service.ii. Copies of shop Drawings.iii. The names of the Engineer, owner, and installation contractor.iv. Installation shall be of comparable size to the type specified for this project (5,000

cfm per vessel or greater.).

B. The manufacturer’s place of business shall be open for inspection.

C. The manufacturer must be able to provide the Owner with training and monitoring supportservice during the first year of operation.

D. Additional monitoring support to be available on a renewable annual basis, upon requested byOwner.

1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Valves and gauges specified herein shall be shipped separate from vessels to be installed atthe site.

B. The manufacturer’s recommendations on shipping and handling shall be followed.

C. The shipping and handling procedures, as recommend by SP1 “Recommended Practice forShipping and Installation of Reinforced Plastic Tanks. “and as described in NBS PS15 andASTM D4097 shall be adhered to.

1.06 SPARE PARTS

A. Provide one complete set of vessel manway gaskets.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. System shall be designed for 99% removal efficiency of Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S) from an odorousair stream with average H2S concentrations of 1-ppm and peak concentrations of 10-ppm andpeak concentration of ammonia of 5-ppm. System shall be designed for an airflow rate of 4,000cfm. System design shall have a maximum 50-fpm face velocity across the media bed.

B. System shall include carbon vessel, odor control media, and inlet damper.

2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. The odor control system shall be designed to remove the odorous constituents from processair stream under the following operating conditions:


Process Parameter Value

Duty ContinuousElevation above Sea Level 700 FeetLocation OutdoorsInlet Air Temperature 40 to 110 degrees FAverage Inlet RH 60 % to 100 %Type of Contaminant H2S, reduced sulfur organic compounds

ammonia and other odors typicallyassociated with digested sludge

H2S at Inlet Average: 1 ppmvRemoval required H2S: 99% removal

B. The carbon vessel design shall conform to the following parameters:

Design Parameter Value

Vessel Type Radial Flow, VerticalMaterial of Construction FRPAirflow 4,000 acfmAir Pressure Drop (Maximum) Vessel (Inlet to Outlet) 4.0 in. WC

Media Only: 3.0 in. WCMedia Type Two layers,

First layer:Activated carbon, virgin, granular.Calgon Centaur, or equal.

Second Layer:Steam activated carbon.Ammoniasorb, or equal.

Media Dimensions (Minimum) Volume: 200 cubic feet (100 each media)Bed Depth (Vertical): 7 feet

Media Average Bed Velocity (Maximum) 50 fpmVessel Dimensions Diameter: 7 feet

Height: 8.0 FeetWeight (empty): 2,000 poundsWeight (operating): 10,000 pounds

Pressure Rating (Maximum) Plus/minus 15.0 in WCConnection Sizes Air inlet: 20 in diameter

Air Outlet: 20 in diameterDrain: 2 inch diameter

Basis of Design ECS VX series

2.03 ACTIVATED CARBON VESSELS

A. Manufacturers:

1. ECS Environmental Solutions.2. Seimens.3. Enduro Composites

B. General:

1. FRP Construction, manufactured in accordance with NBS PS 15, ASTM D3299 Grade 1,and ASTM D4097.


2. Vessel shall have an average glass content of 55% +/- 5% by weight per ASTM D25843. Contact molded accessories shall be manufactured in accordance with NBS PS 15. All

metal parts shall be Type 316SS with no metallic parts contacting the carbon except forgrounding purposes.

C. Vessel Construction:

1. General:

a. Radial path configuration, flat bottom with gasketed flat top, furnished to accommodateactivated carbon beds.

b. Tie down lugs and lifting integrally molded into walls of vessel.c. Top shall be flanged removable with stainless steel hardware and EPDM gasket.

2. Carbon Support:

a. Beds of activated carbon material supported on a polypropylene screen liner and FRPannulus lattice structure with minimum open area of 60%.

b. Polypropylene Liner, for carbon retention with 0.125 inch thick wall and 0.125 indiameter perforated screen openings for the inner and outer columns.

c. Both inner and outer media support columns shall be free standing, able to be freelyremoved through the top of the vessel without affecting the internals of the vessel.

3. Drain:

a. System shall have a ¼” per vessel diameter foot sloped bottom to drain to allow forcomplete drainage of liquid due to condensation.

4. Vessel Connections:

a. Air Inlet: Round, flanged.b. Air Outlet: Round, flanged.c. Manways shall be provided for media access.

i. Manways shall be PPL spin-off type.

d. Gasket material shall be suitable for use in a corrosive environment.e. Drain and fill 2 in FNPT coupling with PVC ball valve.f. Overflow 2 in FNPT coupling with PVC ball valve.g. Pressure ports: Two 1in FNPT FRP couplings.

5. Tank Wall Nozzle Cutouts:

a. Cutouts shall be labeled in accordance with the submittal Drawings.b. All cutouts shall be reinforced as required by service conditions.c. Press molded or compression molded flanged nozzles are not acceptable.

6. Miscellaneous Ports:

a. Differential Pressure Ports:

i. Provide two 1/8 in pipe threads to tube adapters, and ¼ in Type 316 stainless steelor CPVC ball valves.


b. Sampling Ports:

i. Each adsorption unit shall have one 1 in. diameter sample port which extendshorizontally across the entire carbon bed, suitable for extracting carbon samples.

ii. Manufacturer shall provide a carbon sample device for extracting carbon samplesfor analysis.

iii. Ports shall be adequate to provide suitable extraction of air sample from thecarbon bed and be nonblinding.

iv. Each port nozzle shall extend outside the vessel wall and be blocked off with a 1in. ball valve.

v. Ball valve shall be CPVC true union type.

7. Electrical Grounding:

a. Each activated Carbon bed shall be grounded with a Type 316SS rod to prevent staticelectricity from accumulating.

b. A predrilled and tapped copper grounding pad shall be located on external vesselwalls.

D. FRP Material:

1. General :

a. Laminate consisting of a corrosion barrier, a structural layer, and exterior finish.b. Meet requirements of the mechanical properties and visual acceptance criteria in

ASTM D2563, Level 1.

2. Resin:

a. Premium grade corrosion resistant vinyl ester resin, suitable for continuous exposure tosaturated water vapor, hydrogen sulfide gas, and their associated acidic products.

b. Corrosion Barrier Resin: Vipel F010, or approved equal.c. Structural Layer and Surfacing Layer Resin:

i. Vipel F701, or approved equal.ii. Use the same resin throughout the structural layeriii. Structural layer resin shall contain a minimum of 3% antimony trioxide to achieve

required flame spread index.

3. Add ultraviolet absorbers to surfacing resin to improve weather resistance.4. No dyes, pigments, or colorants except in exterior gel coat.5. No fillers or thixotropic agents.6. Resin Curing system:

a. Use resin manufacturer’s currently recommended cure system.b. Cure products to a minimum of 90% of the minimum Barcol hardness specified by

resin manufacturer.c. Measure Barcol hardness according to ASTM D2583.d. Post-cure the tank and appurtenances in accordance with resin manufacturer’s

recommendation for time and temperature.

7. Post curing shall be completed with warm-to-hot dry air, free of combustion products. Hotspots shall be avoided.

8. Reinforcement:

a. Corrosion Barrier:


i. Resin rich interior surface of nominal 100 to 120 mils.ii. Reinforce inner surface with a resin rich surfacing veil of 10 to 20 mils.iii. Use at least two plies of chopped strand mat to back the veil.iv. Use no additive in the corrosion barrier.v. The resin content of the inner surface shall be a minimum of 80% by weight.vi. Glass content of combined inner surface and interior layer shall be 27% plus or

minus 5%.

b. Structural Layer:

i. The structural layer shall be filament wound.ii. Filament winding shall be with continuous strand roving to provide a glass content

of 50 to 80 %.

c. Exterior Finish: No reinforcement required.d. Reinforcing materials:

i. Veil: Electrically conductive material, carbon fiber veil, 12 to 16 mils thick, with afinish and a binder compatible lay-up resin.

ii. Chopped strand Mat: Type E glass, minimum 1 ½ ounces per square foot, withsilence finish and styrene soluble binder.

iii. Continuous Roving:

a. Type E glass.b. Type E Glass with silane type finish, with a nominal yield of at least 110 strand

yards per pound; used for a filament winding.

iv. Woven Roving: Type E glass, nominal 24 ounces per square yard, 4 by 5 weave,with silane type finish.

9. Laminate:

a. The inner corrosion layer shall be resin rich, not to exceed 20% +/- 5% glass by weight,and a minimum thickness of 10 to 15 mils.

b. The inner corrosion layer shall be followed by at least two layers of chopped strandmat or two passes of chopped roving to a total of 3 ounces per square foot.

c. Should be chopped roving technique be employed, the chopped fibers shall be ½ to 2in. in length.

d. The total corrosion barrier shall total 100 mils minimum and be 27% +/- 5% glass byweight.

e. Exterior: Finish with gray gel coat.

10. Workmanship:

a. Visual defects, per ASTM D2563, shall not exceed Level II on the vessel interior andLevel III on the vessel exterior.

b. Finished vessel wall shall be free, as commercially practicable, of visual defects suchas foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pinholes, pimples, crazing, cracking, anddelaminations that will impair the serviceability of the vessel.

c. All cut edges where openings are cut into the tanks shall be trimmed smooth.

11. Dimensions and Tolerances:

a. The minimum required wall thickness for the cylinder straight shell shall be sufficient tosupport its own weight in an upright position without any external support.


b. Flat areas shall be provided to allow locating large fittings on the cylinder straight shell.c. All dimensions will be taken with the tank in the vertical position, unfilled.d. Tank dimensions will represent the exterior measurements.e. The tolerance for the outside diameter, including out-of-roundness, shall be per ASTM

D1998.f. The tolerance for fitting placements shall be plus or minus 0.5 in. in elevation and 2

degrees radial ambient temperature.

12. Marking:

a. Identify each tank with the fabricator’s name, capacity in gallons, maximumtemperature, design pressure/vacuum, specific gravity, pH, resin, minimum thickness,vessel number, vessel name, and date of manufacture.

b. Seal decals, labels, etc. into the laminate exterior with clear resin.

13. Regeneration Provisions: Regeneration of media not required, but vessel shall beconfigured to allow easy future addition of media regeneration equipment.

2.04 ACTIVATED CARBON MEDIA

A. Activated carbon shall be virgin, granular, derived from coconut shell, vapor phase typeactivated with high temperature steam, suitable for control of wastewater related odors.

B. Impregnated carbon is not acceptable.C. The system supplier is responsible for selecting carbon that meets or exceeds all performance

requirements in these specifications.D. The system manufacturer shall be responsible for any infringement of any claim of any patent

due to the supply, manufacture, use, or regeneration of any carbon, equipment items,technologies, etc. in this Section.

E. The First stage carbon shall have the following performance specifications:

1. Total Quantity Pounds each Vessel (1) 3,500 min2. Maximum Moisture Content, percent by weight 2 max3. Hardness No. (per ASTM D3802) 97 min4. Apparent Density, g/cc ( per ASTM D2854) 0.56 min5. Max Pressure Drop, in. WC/ft Bed, at 50-fpm (2) 2.0 max6. Typical H2S Capacity, g H2S/cc carbon (2,3) 0.18 min

(1) Based on an assumed density of 35 pounds per cubic foot (per ASTM D2854). Thequantity in pounds shown is only approximate. The carbon manufacturer shall providesufficient carbon to fill the carbon vessels to the levels shown on the Drawings.

(2) Pressure drop shall be determined by passing dry air at 70 F and 1 atmospherepressure through a 2 in. diameter by 12 in. deep bed of carbon placed in a densepacked arrangement per ASTM D2854

(3) The determination of H2S breakthrough capacity shall be made by passing a moist(85% R. H.) airstream containing 0.1% H2S at a rate of 1.450 cc/min through a 0.725 indiameter by 9 in deep bed of uniformity packed activated carbon and monitored to 50ppm breakthrough, per ASTM D6646. Results are expressed in grams H2S removedper cubic centimeter of carbon.

F. The Second stage carbon shall have the following performance specifications:

1. Total Quantity Pounds each Vessel (1) 5,000 min2. Maximum Moisture Content, percent by weight 2 max3. Hardness No. (per ASTM D3802) 97 min4. Apparent Density, g/cc ( per ASTM D2854) 0.80 min5. Max Pressure Drop, in. WC/ft Bed, at 50-fpm (2) 2.0 max


6. Typical Ammonia Capacity, percent by weight 15 min

(1) Based on an assumed density of 50 pounds per cubic foot (per ASTM D2854). Thequantity in pounds shown is only approximate. The carbon manufacturer shall providesufficient carbon to fill the carbon vessels to the levels shown on the Drawings.

(2) Pressure drop shall be determined by passing dry air at 70 F and 1 atmospherepressure through a 2 in. diameter by 12 in. deep bed of carbon placed in a densepacked arrangement per ASTM D2854

2.05 DAMPERS

A. Furnish and Install, where indicated on the Drawings, butterfly dampers. Dampers shall befabricated from materials similar to associated ductwork except that a BPO/DMA cure systemshall be utilized for the damper body and blade to extend the service life. In addition to butterflydamper, provide a blind flange of the same materials of construction as the ductwork andsame flange diameter as the damper and carbon vessel inlet to be inserted into the ductworkfor isolation during regeneration. Provide matched filler flange to occupy space of blind flangewhen unit is in operation.

B. Rating Conditions:

1. Velocity through Damper 6000 FPM.2. Pressure Rating 15-inches water column3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: - 0 – CFM at 16” W.C.

C. Materials:

1. Cure system: BPO/DMA Cure system.2. Bearings: Graphite filled Teflon.3. Blade : FRP Reinforced with a Corrosion Barrier on all Exposed surfaces.4. Body: FRP, Fire retardant vinyl ester resin with a 100-mil internal corrosion barrier.5. Shaft: Stainless Steel.6. Blade and Shaft Seals: Blade seal should be a PTFE encapsulated O-ring. Non – PTFE

seals are NOT acceptable. Shaft seal should be a Viton Quad-ring.

D. Finish: Exterior coating to match the adjoining FRP equipment.E. Operator: Epoxy coated aluminum worm gear operator.F. Fasteners: 316 Stainless Steel.G. Flanges: Thickness, OD and Drilling to match Duct Flanges.H. Construction:

1. Damper shall be manufactured in accordance with ASME RTP-1, ASTM 3982 and NBSPS 1569 standards. Allowable visual defects shall not exceed ASME RTP-1 table 2.

2. Dimension: Dampers 6” to (and including) 12” in diameter shall have a face to face lengthof 6”.

a. Dampers larger than 12” shall have a face to face dimension of 12”.

2.06 SYSTEM ACCESSORIES

A. Discharge Stack: No-loss style stack fabricated of same material as vessel.B. CARBON SAMPLING DEVICE: One grain thief sampling device shall be supplied. Device shall

be a Fisher Scientific model 14-208 or equal.C. Equipment Identification Plates:


a. A 16-guage Type 316 Stainless Steel identification plate shall be securely mounted on theequipment in a readily visible location.

b. The plate shall bear the ¼ inch die-stamped equipment number indicated in thisSpecification.

D. Lifting Lugs: Equipment over 100 pounds in weight and shall be provided with lifting lugs.E. Anchor Bolts and Tie Down Lugs:

a. All anchor bolts shall be provided. Anchor bolts and tie down lugs shall be ASTM Type316 stainless steel.

b. Coordinate required size with final Shop Drawings.


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which the activated carbon system is to be installed. Donot proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 GENERAL

A. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, industrystandards, State of Illinois Laws, and as indicated in this section and on the Drawings.

B. Coordinate installation with electrical work for power wiring to each piece of poweredequipment.

C. All components, piping, and wiring connected to the vessel shall be provided with a means ofdisconnection at the unit connection, located a maximum of 7’-0” above finished floor elevationto allow for disassembly of the joint for removal of the vessel from the space.

3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

A. A manufacturer's trained specialist, experienced in the installation of odor control systems, andwith at least five (5) years of field experience shall be present at the job - site and / orclassroom designated by the Owner / Contractor for a maximum of 5 mandays for the followingservices:

1. Inspection of the installed equipment.2. Supervision of carbon loading.3. Start-up assistance.4. Trouble shooting.5. Operator training.6. Functional testing.

3.04 SHOP QUALITY CONTROL

A. All cut-outs from the vessel shall be marked and identified by vessel number and original cut-out location, and retained by the FRP fabricator for 12 months.

B. The FRP fabricator shall accommodate unannounced shop inspection of the FRP vessel andductwork during normal working hours by the owner, engineer, and/or their representatives.The fabricator shall notify the engineer 5 business days prior to shipping the vessel or ductworkto the site.



A. Upon completion of installation, start-up and test each system component to demonstratecapabilities and compliance with requirements, Provide Field Quality Control Tests inAccordance with this Section.

B. System Startup:

1. Performed by manufacturers.2. Start shall commence following a visual inspection and check out of the system by the

manufacturer’s technical representative.

C. Performance Testing:

1. General:

a. To demonstrate that the System furnished hereunder is installed and performs inaccordance with the provisions of these Specifications, the manufacturer shall conducta performance test in accordance with an approved testing protocol.

b. The manufacturer shall provide, install and maintain, if required, all temporarymetering and analytical equipment necessary to measure the various performanceparameters.

c. The manufacturer shall provide for all sampling and laboratory analysis. Laboratoryanalysis shall be done by an independent testing laboratory and paid for by themanufacturer.

d. The manufacturer shall inform the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the start of anyperformance testing. The Engineer shall have the right to observe, sample, and makeany parallel determination s during the performance test.

e. Within 30 days after the conclusion of the test period, the manufacturer shall submit aPerformance test report, including all laboratory and field test data, stating heconclusions of the test with regard to the performance criteria.

2. Sampling and Data Measurement: During the test period, as a minimum, the following dataand measurements shall be taken at the frequency specified above:

a. Overall system airflow rate (cfm)b. Fan discharge pressure (inches WC).c. Hydrogen sulfide inlet concentrations (ppbv/ppmv): H2S measurements to be

performed by hand-held instrument previously approved by Engineer, i.e. Jerome631X, Inlet H2S concentrations during each sampling period shall first be screenedusing gas-phase H2S adsorbent tubes, e.g. GAS-TEC.

d. Hydrogen Sulfide (ppbv) Outlet Concentrations: H2S measurements to be performedby hand-held instrument previously approved by Engineer, i.e. Jerome 631X.

e. Individual sampling event performance results will then be calculated by:

i. Percent Removal = (Inlet – Outlet) / Inlet.ii. Note: Individual hourly removal rates shall be averaged to determine system

average removal rates for hydrogen sulfide.

f. Sampling Log: A sampling log shall be maintained that will include:

i. Date, time, location, sampler, and results of each sample.ii. Weather conditions for the sampling day.iii. A qualitative description of the operation of the wastewater and wastewater

treatment processes.iv. A description of exceptions from the sampling plan.


g. Carbon Bed Pressure Drop: Pressure differential measurements shall demonstratethat differential pressure (pressure drop) across the carbon bed does not exceedpressure limits specified.

h. Hydrogen Sulfide sampling and Analysis:

i. Hydrogen sulfide sampling shall be completed using a Jerome model 631 XAnalyzer or approved equal with a detection limit of 1 ppbv

ii. The analyzer shall be operated in compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions.iii. A copy of the instructions shall be submitted with the final report.iv. The results of the hydrogen sulfide sampling shall be recorded in the sampling

bag.

3. Retesting:

a. In the even the system fails to meet the performance requirements, the manufacturershall immediately make the necessary modifications, adjustments, or facilityexpansions to meet these requirements.

b. The steps taken by the manufacturer shall include, as necessary, design, andconstruction of additional system capacity, upgrades to the air distribution system, andreplacements of the media at no additional cost to the Owner.

c. Additional performance tests will be conducted by manufacturer until the performancerequirements are met, at no additional cost to the Owner.

d. If after two retests the performance requirements are still not met, the Owner will havethe option, at the Owner’s sole discretion, to accept the system as is or obtain areplacement at the expense of the manufacturer.

e. The maximum time between each retest shall be 30 days.

4. Warranty Period:

a. During the warranty period following an acceptable system performance test, theOwner may, at their cost, inspect or retest the system for conformance to theseSpecifications.

b. The manufacturer will be notified of these tests, and may witness the test andinspections.

c. If the system fails to meet the performance requirements, the Manufacturer shall correctdeficiencies and retest system.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer'stouch-up paint.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS Project No. 12026 11990-1

SECTION 11990EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Equipment Control Panels and associated field devices shall be furnished by the Supplierwith the Equipment specified under other Division 11 sections.

B. Specifications and associated Drawings are intended to describe overall system functions.Provide equipment necessary to provide complete and operable system whether specificallyidentified or not.

C. Inspect and test control panels at factory prior to shipment.

D. Related Sections:

1. Section 13400 - Process Instrumentation and Control.2. Section 13429 - Miscellaneous Field Devices.3. Section 13431 - Control Panel Construction.4. Section 13441 - Miscellaneous Control Panel Devices.5. Section 13450 - Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC).6. Section 13451 - Small Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC).7. Section 13453 – Operator Interface Units.8. Section 13455 - Plant Communications Equipment.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).

C. Underwriters Laboratory (UL).

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).


A. Unless otherwise specified, “running” signals shall be derived from equipment motor starteror VFD normally open auxiliary contacts.

B. Electrical wiring and controls shall conform to Division 16.

C. Equipment on panels shall be identified as follows:

1. Equipment in Operation: Indicating Light Green2. Equipment in Alarm Condition: Indicating Light Red3. Equipment Status Information: Indicating Light Amber4. Control Power On: Indicating Light White

D. Failure of equipment, after having been “called to run”, shall generate a Fault alarm. Typicalpoints of failure are motor overload, motor overcurrent, fail-to-start and power fail. In additionto loss of control power, power fail shall include tripping of equipment circuit breaker ordisconnect while equipment is called to run. Provide necessary logic to sense discrepancybetween “called to run” and “running” signals and activate Fault Alarm signal after adjustable

EQUIPMENT CONTROL PANELS Donohue & Associates, Inc.11990-2 Project No. 12026

time delay. Unless otherwise noted, all faults of a particular piece of equipment shall becombined into a Common Fault Alarm.

E. References to “selector switch” refer to maintained contact type functions. Loss and returnof control power to circuit does not change control mode or requirement as dictated by switchposition.

F. References to “pushbutton” refer to momentary contact type functions. Loss and return ofcontrol power to circuit reverts control mode or requirement to default condition. Initiatingpushbutton is required to reestablish control mode or requirement.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit with process equipment systems specified in other sections. Submit in booklet formfor each panel.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit with process equipment Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 01330.2. Panel fabrication and dimensions drawings.3. Front of panel layout drawings.4. Interior panel layout drawings.5. Nameplate legend.6. Ladder logic type internal wiring and piping diagrams. Include reference numbers on

each line for cross-referencing. Each device on ladder to be cross-referenced with linenumbers indicating wherever else the device or part of the device is located.

7. Terminal to terminal interconnection schematic showing connections between panel andexternal panels / MCCs and field devices.

8. Component specification sheets.9. Instruction manuals including detailed sequence descriptions.10. Parts list.11. Recommended spare parts list.12. Include Engineer tag number when available on each drawing, specification sheet, and

manufacturer’s catalog cut in submittal for each component included in system.13. Submit all indicating and control parameters in English Engineering Units.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data (O&M):

1. Submit in accordance with Section 01785 – Operating and Maintenance Data.2. Operation and maintenance manual submittal shall be complete in one comprehensive

submittal. Individual submittals for components of systems will not be reviewed.3. Systems Demonstrations shall not be permitted until O&M Data has been submitted and

approved by Engineer. The submittal shall include any field modifications.

D. Submit with process equipment systems specified in other sections.

E. Record drawings:

1. Provide record type drawings of all controls shop drawings updated to as-installedconditions.

2. Provide list of parameter settings for devices provided which have programmable oradjustable settings. Parameter list shall be updated to as-installed conditions.

1.05 WORK FOR HIRE

A. Any and all configuration, programming, setup or other software functions performed on allintelligent devices provided as part of this Project is to be considered “Work for Hire” under


the 1976 Copyright Act as amended (title 17 of the United States Code). The Software shallbe owned by Owner and shall be turned over to Owner fully documented and capable offuture modification by Owner as the work is completed.

B. Owner intends to obtain the Software for its own use only.

C. Owner will not prevent the Software supplier from reuse of the Software concepts and ideasfor other projects. Any reuse of the Software concepts and ideas generated under thisProject is solely the responsibility of the Software supplier. The Software supplier shalldefend, indemnify and hold harmless Owner from all claims, damages and expenses(including reasonable litigation costs), arising out of any use, misuse or misapplication ofSoftware concepts and ideas.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 405-LCP-2201 & -2202 SLUDGE SCREEN NO. 1 & 2 CONTROL PANEL (Ref. Dwg 009-N-22)

A. Panel:

1. NEMA 4X, Type 304L stainless steel.2. Wall Mount.3. Lockable door latch.4. 480 vac/3 phase/60Hz power supply.5. Door-interlocked disconnect and circuit breaker in accordance with Division 16.6. PLC in accordance with Section 13451.7. NEMA reversing motor starter in accordance with Division 16.8. Control power transformer with 120vac transient voltage surge compressor, and fused

primary and secondary in accordance with Division 16.9. Fixed Ethernet Switch in accordance with Section 13455.10. OIU in accordance with Section 13453.11. Provide in accordance to Section 13441, 13431, and 13455.12. Provide with Equipment in Section 11350.13. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.

B. Front of Panel Mounted Devices:

Tag Device Description InterfaceOIU Operator Interface Unit Ethernet capable PLCII Current Display Motor percent amp draw PLCHS Estop Shut-off Sludge Screen Motor Starter (MS) Coil

HS 2-Position Switch (Normal/Bypass) Moisture Probe Bypass

HS 2-Position Switch (Normal/Bypass) Inlet Pressure Bypass

YL Indicating Light – White Control Power On 120vac Transformer

YL Indicating Light – Green Sludge Screen Running Motor Starter AuxContact

YL Indicating Light – Amber Sludge Screen High Pressure PLC

YL Indicating Light – Red Sludge Screen Fault Motor Overload Relay(MOR)

YL Indicating Light - Red Sludge Break Through Moisture probeYL Indicating Light - Red Air Pressure LowYL Alarm Light Alarm Light PLCYX Alarm Horn Horn PLCHS Pushbutton Horn Silence PLC


Tag Device Description InterfaceHS Pushbutton System Reset PLCHS Switch Disconnect and circuit breaker

C. Rear of Panel Mounted Devices:

D. Functional Description:

1. System shall be controlled to provide fully automatic or manual operation.2. Controls shall provide system shut down and send signal when fault is detected.3. When Local Control Station (405-CS-2201 & -2202) is in Hand, associated sludge screen

motor shall energize, and motor current shall be displayed at both Local Control Station(405-CS-2201 & -2202) and on OIU in Sludge Screen No. 1 & 2 Control Panel (405-LCP-2201&-2202).

4. When Local Control Station (405-CS-2201 & -2202) is in Off, associated sludge screenmotor shall be off.

5. When Local Control Station (405-CS-2201 & -2202) is in Auto, following control optionsshall be available from associated Sludge Screen No. 1 & 2 Control Panel (405-LCP-2201&-2202):

a. Headworks PLC Panel (405-PLC-1) shall send Enable signal to associated SludgeScreen Control Panel.

b. Enabled Sludge Screen(s) Control Panel PLC shall ready associated sludge screenfor operation.

c. Sludge Screen Control Panel PLC shall monitor sludge screen inlet pressure.d. Sludge Screen Control Panel shall display inlet pressure on OIU and shall send

associated inlet pressure signal to Headworks PLC Panel (405-PLC-1) for monitoringat PCS HMI.

e. When Sludge Screen inlet pressure exceeds Sludge Screen Clean Inlet Pressuresetpoint, adjustable at PCS HMI, Sludge Screen Control Panel PLC shall energizeassociated Sludge Screen motor.

f. When Sludge Screen inlet pressure drops below Sludge Screen Clean Inlet Pressuresetpoint, system shall being automatic shutdown sequence.

g. During shutdown sequence, screen shall run for preset run-down time (initially set forone (1) minute) before shutting off. If inlet pressure increases above Sludge ScreenClean Inlet Pressure setpoint during shutdown sequence, screen shall continue tooperate and run-down time shall be reset. Running light on front of panel shall flashto indicate system is in run-down mode.

Qty Device Description Interface

1 Programmable LogicController Allen Bradley PLC

1 Ethernet Switch Industrial Ethernet Switch1 Surge Protector PLC1 Current Monitoring Screen Motor MMU

1 Transformer with SurgeCompressor

480VAC to 120VACtransformer

AR Control Relays Sufficient Relays to performFunctionality

AR Terminal Blocks Sufficient to provide 20% Spare1 Motor Overload Relay Motor Starter (MS) Coil1 Motor Starter Reversing Full voltage Motor


h. Sludge Screen Motor run-down time shall be operator adjustable at associatedSludge Screen Control Panel OIU.

i. Monitor Sludge Screen Motor current and display on OIU, at associated LocalControl Station display and sent to Headworks PLC Panel (405-PLC-1) for display atHMI.

j. Air pressure shall be supplied to pneumatic rams which shall be continually adjustedbased on drive load of screen motor.

k. If air inlet pressure drops below manufacturer’s setpoint, system shall send alarmand begin automatic shutdown sequence.

l. Monitor Moisture Probe located in Compaction Zone Discharge. If moisture isdetected Sludge Screen Control Panel PLC shall send signal to Headworks PLCPanel (405-PLC-1), and Sludge Screen Control Panel PLC shall de-energize sceenmotor, and continue to maintain pressure on Compression Zone Cone untilassociated Sludge Screen Inlet Valve is confirmed closed, after which timeassociated sludge screen shall shut down.

m. If discharge inspection hatch is opened, system shall alarm, but not shut down.n. Moisture Probe Bypass Switch shall allow operator to turn off probe and still operate

associated sludge screen.o. Inlet Pressure Bypass Switch shall allow operator to turn off signal from pressure

transmitter and still operate associated sludge screen.

2.02 405-LCP-2211 & -2212 SLUDGE SCREEN NO. 1 & 2 PNEUMATIC PANEL (Ref. Dwg 009-N-22)

A. Panel:

1. NEMA 4X, Type 304L stainless steel.2. Wall Mount.3. Lockable door latch.4. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.




Quantity Device Description Interface

1 Cylinder PressureGauge

1 Control Pressure Gauge


2 Pressure ReducingValves

1 Pressure Switch PLC1 Microfilter1 Pressure Gauge1 Manual Valve

1 Electro-pneumaticTransducer PLC


AR Terminal Blocks Sufficient to provide 20% Spare


1. Pneumatic control panel shall contain all appurtenances to monitor and controlcompressed air supply to discharge cone rams, including, but not limited to;

a. Fittings and hosesb. Air reservoirc. Pressure regulatorsd. Solenoid valves.e. Pressure switches.f. Check valves.

2. Whenever sludge screen system is operational, plant air system shall continuouslysupply air to pneumatic control panel.

3. Air pressure supplied to pneumatic rams shall be continuously adjusted based on driveload of screen motor.

2.03 436-MCP-1401 AERATION BLOWER MASTER CONTROL PANEL (Ref. Dwg 009-N-14 and -15)

A. Vendor Coordination:

1. Blower Master Control Panel specifications defined herein are based upon informationknown at time of design. Vendor for system chosen shall coordinate any changes inwiring, I/O and terminations required with Engineer prior to Submittal

2. Coordinate and provide equipment necessary to communicate between Vendor andOwner-based equipment.

B. Panel:

1. NEMA 122. Wall Mount.3. 120 vac/1 phase/60hz, 30 amp power.4. Main Circuit Breaker Disconnect in accordance with Section 16050.5. PLC in accordance with Section 13450.6. Fixed Ethernet Switch in accordance with Section 13455.7. OIU in accordance with Section 13453.8. Provide I/O as defined on PID’s.9. Provide in accordance to Section 13441, 13431, 13450 and 13455.10. Provide with Equipment in Section 11370.11. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.

C. Blower Master Control Panel (436-MCP-1401):

1. 436-MCP-1401 shall be standalone Allen-Bradley ControlLogix platform used to controlcompressors feeding into common air header. 436-MCP-1401 shall control group ofcompressors as a system to maintain their operation at optimal efficiency at varyingprocess demands.

2. 436-MCP-1401 shall be provided with Ethernet Switch and be compatible with siteSCADA/PLC network. Configuration, setup and IP addressing of all Ethernet devices inentire Blower Control System shall be coordinated with Computer and Network Supplier.

3. 436-MCP-1401 shall have PLC modules that monitor I/O points as defined on PID’s. AllPLC data registers will be coordinated with System Integrator and Engineer to insureintegration with rest of PCS.

4. OIU shall be used to provide operator interface.5. 436-MCP-1401 shall monitor pressure transmitter 436-PIT-1401 in common air header

line.


6. Ethernet communications link to plant PLC network shall allow network to monitor eachcompressor status, reset alarms, and change set points.


7. 436-MCP-1401 shall provide air header pressure control over range of 0 to 30 psig withany or all compressors in service. 436-MCP-1401 PLC shall receive main air headerpressure 4-20 mA signal, and increase/decrease on-line compressor capacity to maintainair header pressure at set point.

a. 436-MCP-1401 shall provide air header pressure control in which set point ismanually adjusted via controls on front of control panel or from remote Ethernetinput provided by others.

8. 436-MCP-1401 shall bring compressors on and off-line and increase/decrease on-linecompressor capacity based on cascade control logic. Result being gradualincrease/decrease of air throughout entire range of one (1) to two (2) compressors ((3)compressors in future) on-line. In event of compressor failure, next compressor in pre-selected start sequence shall come on-line.

9. 436-MCP-1401 shall provide surge control of entire on-line compressor system bymodulating blow-off valves as system pressure rises approaching surge condition.System surge shall be automatically controlled via dynamic algorithm based oncompressor performance curves, ambient temperature, and main air header dischargepressure or manually via blow-off set point from 436-MCP-1401. 436-MCP-1401 shallalso alert 436-PLC-1 Panel via Ethernet message that surge control is impending.

10. Programmable electronic Operator Interface Unit shall have multiple color screens todisplay operating variables, valve positions, and other relevant data. Operating screensshall have touch sensitive screen point to select start sequence of compressors, touchsensitive screen point for pressure set point adjustment and local/remote touch sensitivescreen point for local or remote pressure. Operation shall be programmed to be userfriendly by providing sufficient prompting that operator can intuitively follow throughcommands to operate compressor system.

Displays and controls shall be provided to monitor all process variable input for mastercontrol and to monitor and modify set points, as required.

Monitor shall display screens identifying compressors on-line including lead compressorand ability to modify lead compressor selection.

Monitor shall provide options for control of compressors as manual function or air headerpressure controlled via manual set point.

11. 436-MCP-1401 shall have, at minimum, status indicators for each compressor asfollows:

a. Compressor in remoteb. Compressor ready for startc. Compressor ond. Common alarm

12. External signals from 436-MCP-1401 to each compressor LCP shall, at minimum includefollowing:

a. Compressor start/stop signalb. Increase air flowc. Decrease air flow

13. Closed network between 436-MCP-1401 and each compressor LCP identified belowshall be communication protocol selected by compressor manufacturer. Compressormanufacturer shall provide module in 436-MCP-1401 to communicate via Ethernet/IPwith 436-PLC-1 panel.


14. 436-MCP-1401 shall be provided with 24 vdc power supply for field and panelinstrumentation.

D. Associated Field Instrumentation:

1. Provide following field instrumentation. Instrumentation listed below shall conform to thefollowing Sections:

a. Pressure Instrumentation (P Series): Section 13426.b. Temperature Instrumentation (T Series): Section 13427.c. Vibration Instrumentation (V Series):

Tag DeviceType

Location/Description

P&IDReference

436-PDT-1501 (P3) Blower No.1 Inlet Filter DifferentialPressure 009-N-15

436-TE/TT-1501 (T3) Blower No.1 Suction Temperature 009-N-15436-PIT-1511 (P9) Blower No.1 Discharge Pressure 009-N-15436-TE/TT-1511 Blower No.1 Discharge Temperature 009-N-15436-TE/TT-1521 Blower No.1 Motor Windings Temperature 009-N-15436-TE/TT-1531 Blower No.1 Bearing Temperature 009-N-15436-TE/TT-1541 Blower No.1 VFD Temperature 009-N-15436-VE/VT-1501 Blower No.1 009-N-15





2.04 436-LCP-1501,-1502 & -1503 AERATION BLOWER NO. 1, 2 & 3 LOCAL CONTROL PANEL(Ref. Dwg 009-N-17)

A. Vendor Coordination:

1. Local Control Panel specifications defined herein are based upon information known attime of design. Vendor for system chosen shall coordinate any changes in wiring, I/Oand terminations required with Engineer prior to Submittal

2. Coordinate and provide equipment necessary to communicate between Vendor andOwner-based equipment.

B. Panel:


1. NEMA 12.2. Skid Mount.3. 480 VAC, 3 phase power supply.4. Main Circuit Breaker Disconnect in accordance with Section 16050.5. Provide Allen Bradley PLC (Ethernet capable).6. Fixed Ethernet Switch in accordance with Section 13455.7. OIU in accordance with Section 13453.8. Provide I/O as defined on PID’s.9. Provide with Equipment in Section 11370.10. Provide in accordance to Section 13441, 13431, 13451 and 13455.11. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.

C. Control Enclosure

1. Control enclosure shall be front access only, minimum 12 gauge, with two continuousmetal hinged doors each equipped with 3-point lockable latches. Quick opening haspsmay be substituted for rotating lockable handle latch where approved by Engineer.Painting shall include, as minimum requirements, phosphate treatment, zinc chromateiron oxide primer, baked rust-inhibiting enamel, and white interior. All louvers shall befitted with forced air cooling as needed by supplier for conditions where installed.Enclosure shall be minimum NEMA 12 with Forced Air Cooling design.

2. Equipment mounted within control cabinet enclosure shall be mounted on enclosureback panel and neatly organized.

3. Control enclosure shall be integral part of compressor. It shall have two doors withgaskets. One side shall access power input cables, disconnect switch, RFI and electricalfilters, and other side shall access variable frequency drive (VFD), magnetic bearingcontroller (MBC), I/O terminal strips, fuses and ancillary components.

4. Each LCP shall contain main power disconnect, which interlocks enclosure door.5. Provide transformer with 120V secondary and separate 24V DC regulated power supply.

Isolate all low voltage variable power signals entering LCP.6. Lightning arrestors and surge suppressors shall be provided for 120V control power.7. Surge suppressors shall be provided for “noise” protection and to remove transient peaks

across all inductive loads.8. Isolation amplifiers, R/I transmitters, RTD transmitters, and other controls shall be

supplied, as required, for complete system control.9. Identify each end of each wire by unique wire number printed on heat shrunk sleeve

marker.10. Provide PanelView Plus Operator Interface touch sensitive, color monitor screen that

incorporates all controls, alarms, and meters in easy-to-interpret screens. OperatorInterface shall be manufactured by Allen Bradley.

11. Additional selector switches, pushbuttons, and indicators shall include:

a. Service/Normal/Test – Located on Operator Interface. This touch sensitive screenpoint allows permissive start of compressor components only in Service Mode.When in Test Mode, this diverts MCC start signal to test logic that simulates motorstart to facilitate testing of system without starting drive motor.

b. Emergency stop mushroom button on panel doorc. Separate, non-resettable hour meter on panel door

D. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

1. Provide built-in VFD located in control cabinet, providing optimal compressor efficiencyat all operational conditions shall control compressor speed. VFD software shall providefor compressor control based on signals from 436-MCP-1401 or LCP (keypad oncompressor door).


2. VFD shall control compressor operation according to performance references set. Thesereferences can be from local control panel (keypad on compressor door) or from plantautomation controls as mA message.

3. The VFD shall be provided by Blower Vendor.4. 480 vac/60 Hz/3 ph.5. Factory installed and located on Blower Skid.

E. Local Control Panel

1. Local Control Panel shall be mounted on door of compressor control cabinet and shallcontain a switch, a push-button, and a display/keypad unit. Local Control Panel shallperform functions as defined below.

2. PLC shall start and shut down compressor in permissive sequence, receive input,monitor and control operating variables. PLC shall also contain program for continuousoptimization of compressor efficiency with respect to changes in capacity, inlettemperature, and differential pressure across compressor.

3. Surge detection system shall sense unbalanced/surge conditions by use of pressuresensing devices. Detection of surge conditions shall trip compressor off-line.

4. Motor overload protection software shall be provided to control the maximum settings oncompressor, so that motor current does not exceed pre-set level.

5. There shall be three means of shutting down compressor:

a. Normal Stop - Initiated by pushing stop button or remote stop. Unit normally stopssuch that no surging occurs.

b. Soft Stop – Initiated by:

i. High inlet air temperature (recirculation/surge)ii. High motor winding temperatureiii. High bearing temperatureiv. High discharge pressurev. Surge

Soft stop shall de-energize the main drive motor eight (8) seconds after alarminitiation to allow blow-off valve to partially open. Normal post-lube and othernormal stop functions follow.

c. Emergency Stop – Initiated by:

i. Pushing emergency stop buttonii. High vibrationiii. Sequence failure during start-upiv. Failure of 436-MCP-1401

6. Provide manufacturer selected data communication link between LCP’s and 436-MCP-1401.

7. Data communication to/from each LCP shall be as follows via 436-MCP-1401 interface:

a. To Plant Control System (PCS) for compressor monitoring purposes:

i. Compressor onii. Compressor offiii. Common alarmiv. Control status – Local or remote/autov. All available analog signals

b. To 436-MCP-1401:


i. Compressor ready for startii. Compressor oniii. Maximum air flowiv. Minimum air flowv. Common alarmvi. Compressor in remote/auto

F. Display Screens for Compressor Operation

1. Compressor functions shall be monitored continuously during operation by means ofcontrol panel default display. Basic display during monitoring shall show actual flowvolume (code n1). Other displays shall be:

Code To Be Checked Unitn1 Actual Flow Volume %n2 Output pressure psin3 Inlet pressure psin4 Operating time in hours HH,hhn5 Operating time in days PP,ppn6 MWh counter MWhn7 Differential pressure at motor cooling air filter psin8 Reference flow volume %n9 Compressor type xn10 Program version xxn11 Motor supply frequency Hzn12 Current An13 Inverter temperature ºFn14 Motor temperature ºFn15 Inlet temperature ºF

2. Operating screens (pages) shall be custom tailored to provide not only start-stop andoperational mode interface, but also alarm status, help messages, and diagnostics. Topof all screens (pages) shall have lines dedicated to listing of alarms, plus alarm hornsilence pad and cancel touchpad for alarm.

3. Operator Interface scales, graphs, and chart scaling shall be reset without using personalcomputer.

4. Screens may be accessed via one-touch screen point selection.5. All control functions shall require two touch screen point selection.6. Bar charts, alarm, and trip set points shall use monochrome graphs for ease of display

and clarity.7. Following Operator Interface screens shall be provided, generally as described, and

incorporating state-of-the-art upgrades available at time of engineering design andsubmittal for Engineer’s review. As a minimum, provide following:

a. Local Control Panel Menu – Master screen lists all operating screens as touch-sensitive screen points, for selection.

b. Main Compressor Operations – Touch-sensitive screen points for compressor start,compressor stop, increase or decrease capacity, local or remote selection. Thisscreen shall display bar chart of compressor capacity (in percent) and numericalamp draw. A 1 x 3 inch message center shall display appropriate messagesincluding troubleshooting guide, upon alarm.

c. Service Operations – Shall display all electric operating components. When inservice mode, touching identified screen point will display on-off (open-close) screenpoints to exercise that item. Normal or service/test screen point shall also bedisplayed to change operation status.


d. Miscellaneous Compressor Temperature Monitor – Shall display followingtemperatures values and alarm/trip set-points:

i. Inlet air temperatureii. Discharge air temperature

e. Main Motor Monitor – Shall display following temperature and amperage values andalarm/trip set-points:

i. Amperage

f. Transmitter Display – Shall list all analog signals in raw value, engineering unit, andconverted milliamps.

g. Transmitter Scaling Set-Up – Lists calibration range of all analog signals. Passwordaccess shall be required to change any value.

h. Miscellaneous Set-Up – Shall have display and set point for pulsing blow-off valveon-off, and display for default on power-up in local/remote mode.

8. Provide touch sensitive screen point control via Operator Interface screens, statusindication, and readout for following functions.

a. Starter compressorb. Stop compressorc. Local controld. Remote/Auto controle. Surge control indicatorf. Inlet air high temperature (recirculation surge) indicatorg. Inlet air filter high differential pressure indicator, first stageh. Inlet air filter high differential pressure indicator, second stagei. Discharge air high temperature indicatorj. High RTD bearing/winding temperature indicatork. High vibration indicatorl. General alarm indicatorm. Global alarm reset

9. Monitor and indication of all analog signals shall be displayed on Operator Interface,including, but not limited to:

a. Motor ampsb. Temperature signalsc. Pressure signals

10. Output air flow in scfm shall be displayed on operator interface. Calculation of this flowshall utilize dynamic field inputs of differential pressure across compressor, inlettemperature, and shaft power derived from motor wire power or current, in conjunctionwith performance test stand data. Multi variant algorithm based on test stand data anddefined inputs of air temperature, pressure, and motor power draw shall be used todetermine flow throughout operating range of compressor.

11. Fault and Alarm Messages

a. If control system detects malfunction during compressor operation, compressor shallstop and fault message appears in control panel display. If fault does not requirestopping compressor, alarm is displayed until acknowledged or reason for alarm iscorrected or cleared.

b. System shall automatically monitor following conditions:


i. Over voltage in main supplyii. Under voltage in main supplyiii. One phase missingiv. Over/under voltage in auxiliary supplyv. Blockage in the inlet or outlet air pipingvi. Overpressurevii. Inlet air temperature too high (surge)viii. Blockage in the inlet or outlet air pipingix. Cooling air over temperature via motor/VFD over temperature monitoring.x. Motor temperaturexi. VFD temperaturexii. Magnetic bearing controller temperature

c. When alarm occurs, it is displayed at top of all screens, and message screenappears to identify problem. A “help” screen can be accessed to suggesttroubleshooting procedure.

d. First trip alarm, only, is displayed on operating screen and must be corrected andcleared before next or supplemental problems are displayed. (All alarms and nonshutdown indications are displayed on “alarm/trip counter” screen).

e. Screens shall have touch sensitive screen point functions along right side, including:

I. Silence Alarm HornII. View or Acknowledge Alarms

III. Get Page

f. All alarm and trip set points shall have security access codes.

G. Flow Control

1. Reference flow volume shall be registered as PERCENT OF MAX FLOW. System shallallow adjustment with compressor either running or stopped only when FLOW SET lightis on (in local mode). If compressor is running, any change of reference flow volumesetting shall take effect immediately.

2. Flow volume control of turbo compressor shall be based on indirect flow volumemeasurement via internal load-proportional signals of VFD. Limits for these signals shallbe programmed in application software (surge limit, max pressure ratio limit, power limitand speed limit). Effect of inlet air temperature shall be taken into account whendetermining limits.

3. 110% (20mAdc) flow corresponds to turbo compressors maximum volume flow atexisting ambient conditions.

4. Speed and power limits shall be selected for protection of motor and VFD.

H. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) for Magnetic Bearing Controller:

1. Each turbocompressor shall be supplied with uninterruptible power supply (UPS) systemthat provides secondary source of power for magnetic bearings and MBC. This systemshall be backup to power generation mode feature that is first line of safety if poweroutage occurs assuring that turbocompressor will spin down without damaging highspeed unit.

2. UPS shall have batteries sufficiently sized to provide safe spin down and monitoringpanel that will indicate condition of batteries.

2.05 455-LCP-2801 and -2902 WAS GRAVITY BELT THICKENER CONTROL PANEL NO. 1 & 2(Ref. Dwg. 009-N-28 and -29)


Note: WAS Gravity Belt Thickener No. 1 is existing relocated equipment with new Control Panelthat shall meet all requirements of this specification.

A. Panel:

1. NEMA 12.2. 480vac, 3-phase power supply.3. Main Circuit Breaker Disconnect and circuit breaker in accordance with Division 16.4. Motor starter and circuit breaker for Hydraulic system in accordance with Division 16.5. Provide thermal overload relay with integral heater elements and with external reset

pushbutton for motor starter in accordance with Division 16.6. Provide 120vac control power transformer, with one secondary lead fused, other

grounded with capacity for simultaneous controls and alarms in accordance with Division16.

7. Provide circuit breaker for 120vac control power in accordance with Division 16.8. PLC shall be Allen Bradley in accordance with either Section 13450 or 13451 (Ethernet

capable with no substitutes allowed).9. PLC shall interface with process network via Ethernet using Ether/IP protocol.10. Fixed Ethernet Switch in accordance with Section 13455.11. OIU in accordance with Section 13453.12. Provide I/O as defined on PID’s.13. Provide with equipment specified in Section 11352.14. Provide in accordance to Section 13441, 13431, and 13451.15. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.

B. Front of Panel Mounted Devices.

Tag Device Description InterfaceOIU Operator Interface Unit Ethernet capable PLCHS Switch Disconnect and circuit breakerHS EStop Pushbutton “ESTOP” ESR

HIK MultifunctionDisplay/Keypad Belt Drive – “VFD” MC

HS Pushbutton “Motor Overload Relay Reset” Hydraulic System MORYA Alarm AnnunciatorHS Pushbutton "Alarm Silence"


Tag Device Description Initial Setting/ RangePLC Programmable Logic

ControllerAllen Bradley with EthernetCommunication

1 Ethernet Switch Industrial Ethernet Switch1 Surge Protector PLCESR Control Relay ESTOP RelaySDR Control Relay Shutdown RelayVFD Variable Frequency

DriveGBT – Belt Drive

MS Motor Starter Hydraulic SystemMOR Motor Overload Relay Hydraulic System

Control PowerTransformer

480 Vac to 120 Vac powerconverter

AR Terminal Blocks Sufficient to provide 20%Spare


D. 455-LCP-2801 and -2902 shall be standalone Allen-Bradley platform used to control GravityBelt Thickener (GBT) and Hydraulic Power Unit in association with GBT Feed Pumps andPolymer System.

E. 455-LCP-2801 and -2902 shall be provided with Ethernet switch and be compatible with siteSCADA/PLC network. Configuration, setup and IP addressing of all Ethernet devices in GBTcontrol system shall be coordinated with Computer and Network Supplier.

F. 455-LCP-2801 and -2902 shall have PLC modules that monitor I/O points as defined onP&ID’s. All PLC data registers shall be coordinated with System Integrator and Engineer toinsure integration with rest of PLCs.

G. Programmable electronic Operator Interface shall have multiple color screens to displayoperating variables, status and other relevant data. Operating screens shall have touchsensitive screen point to select various screens, menus, GBT operating modes, set pointadjustments, operational parameter adjustments and select alarm resets. Operation shall beprogrammed to be user friendly by providing sufficient prompting that operator can intuitivelyfollow through commands to operate sludge thickening system.

Displays and controls shall be provided to monitor all process variable input for mastercontrol, and to monitor and modify set points, as required.

H. Functional Description. Following control options shall be available at WAS Gravity BeltThickener Control Panel OIU:

1. Control Power On/Off pushbuttons.2. Hand/Off/Auto selector switch.

a. With Local Control Panel in Hand, provide local control to independently start/stopBelt Drive Motor, Hydraulic System, selected GBT Feed Pump and Polymer System.

b. With Local Control Panel in Off, all available system motors shall be off.c. With Local Control Panel in Auto, for automatic operation of GBT System, operator

must manually initiate auto startup by depressing GBT System Auto Startpushbuttons. Provide Secondary Sludge Wasting Selector Switch at OIU. Selectionof wasting mode and associated operator inputs for each wasting mode shall berecognized on both WAS Gravity Belt Thickener Control Panel OIUs; whatever isselected or input on one OIU shall automatically be displayed on other OIU. PLCs inboth WAS Gravity Belt Thickener Control Panels shall also work in conjunctionconcerning wasting mode operation. Secondary Sludge Wasting Selector Switchshall allow operator to select duration of WAS Thickening operation based onVolume or Time:

i. If Volume is selected, OIU shall allow operator to input Total Number of Gallonsto be processed. Control Panel PLCs shall sum volume of sludge processed byeach unit and Auto Shutdown all WAS GBT units simultaneously when totalnumber of gallons has been achieved.

ii. If Time is selected, OIU shall allow operator to input Total Amount of OperatingTime (minutes). Control Panel PLCs shall sum total run time of GBT FeedPumps in operation and Auto Shutdown all WAS GBT units simultaneously whentotal amount of operating time has been achieved.

3. Following describes sequence of operation for Startup in both Automatic and Hand(Manual) modes:

a. Turn System Control Power On.


b. Start Hydraulic System and allow time to reach operating pressure.c. Open WAS GBT Washwater Valve.d. Load top/bottom belt tensione. Reset alarms and reset system control power by Start pushbutton.f. After delay to allow belts to become tensioned, start Belt Drive.g. After delay to allow belts to become wetted, start Polymer System.h. Start WAS GBT Feed Pump.

4. Following describes sequence of operation for Shutdown in both Automatic and Hand(Manual) modes:

a. Stop Sludge Feed Pump and Polymer System.b. After delay to allow for sludge discharge and washdown of belts, close WAS GBT

Washwater Valve.c. Stop Belt Drive.d. Stop Hydraulic System.

5. Provide adjustable Delay Timers initially set as required for manufacturer’srecommended operation of GBTs.

6. Provide GBT Feed Pump selector at OIU.7. Provide for transmission of following signals to 455-PLC-1 via Ethernet communications

link.

a. GBT System ESTOP.b. GBT System Manual.c. GBT System Auto.d. Belt Drive Running.e. Belt Drive Fail.f. Belt Drive Speed Feedback.g. Belt Misalignment.h. Belt Broken.i. Belt Motor Overtemp.j. Belt Sludge Level High.k. WAS GBT Pump Selection.l. Start GBT Feed Pump.m. Stop GBT Feed Pump.n. Start Polymer System.o. Stop Polymer System.p. Washwater Pressure Lowq. Hydraulic System Running.r. Hydraulic System Fail.s. Oil Pressure Low/High.

8. Provide circuitry to accommodate following interlocking and monitoring signals from 455-PLC-1 via Ethernet communications link or direct field wiring to Control Panel to allowWAS GBT operation:

a. Enable/Disable. Shall initiate Shutdown of all equipment. Washdown cycle isbypassed and Hand mode is inhibited. Manual Reset shall be initiated to reestablishboth Hand and Auto Modes.

b. GBT Feed Pump Available.c. GBT Washwater Valve Open.d. Polymer Feed System Available.e. Filtrate Wetwell Level (below LSHH).f. TWAS Hopper Level (below LSHH).


9. Following faults shall alarm and initiate Auto Shutdown sequence (normal Washdownand Stop). Hand Mode is not inhibited. Manual Reset must be initiated to reestablishAuto Mode.

a. High Level Sludge on Belt.b. LSHH in TWAS Hopper.c. Sludge Feed Pump Fail.d. Polymer System Fail.

10. Following faults shall alarm and initiate Shutdown of all equipment. Washdown cycle isbypassed and Hand mode is inhibited. Manual Reset must be initiated to reestablish bothHand and Auto Modes.

a. Any one of three ESTOP switches (two in field, one on panel).b. Washwater Pressure Low.c. Belt Broken.d. Belt Misalignment.e. Motor Overload.f. LSHH in Filtrate Wetwell.g. Low Hydraulic Pressure for Belt Tensioning System.h. Hydraulic System Fail.

I. Additional Requirements:

"Overload” signals shall be included as part of fault sense circuitry to cutout equipment onmalfunction. Equipment shall require Clearing of Fault and manual Reset before operationcan be resumed. Refer to article 1.03.D in this section for definition of Fault signal.

J. Non-Critical Alarms:

1. Motor Over Temperature2. Motor Over Current3. Motor Overload4. Fail to Start5. Broken Belt6. Belt Misalignment7. Low Hydraulic Pressure for Belt Tensioning System

K. Critical Alarms:

1. Belt Limit.2. Low Pressure Washwater.3. Polymer Feed System Not Operating.4. LSHH in TWAS Hopper.

2.06 455-CS-2801 & -2902 GRAVITY BELT THICKENER LOCAL CONTROL STATION NO. 1 & 2(Ref. Dwg. 009-N-28 and -29)

A. Panel:

1. NEMA 4X.2. Handrail Mount.3. Powered from PLC.4. Provide I/O as defined on PID’s5. Provide with equipment specified in Section 11352.6. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.



Tag Device Description Interface

SHK Speed Controller0-100% = 4-20mAdc Output “Feed Pump”

SI Speed Indicator4-20mAdc Input = 0-100% “Feed Pump”

SHK Speed Controller0-100% = 4-20mAdc Output “Polymer Rate”

SI Speed Indicator4-20mAdc Input = 0-100% “Polymer % Output”

SHK Speed Controller0-100% = 4-20mAdc Output “Belt Drive”

SI Speed Indicator4-20mAdc Input = 0-100% “Belt Drive”

C. Additional Requirements:

1. Devices above shall be powered from 455-PLC-1.

2.07 500-LCP-2301 & -2302 TPSD PUMP NO. 1 & 2 CONTROL STATION (Ref. Dwg 009-N-23)

A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure.2. NEMA 4X.3. Wall Mount.4. 120 vac, 1-phase, 60Hz power supply.5. Provide with equipment specified in Section 11314.6. Provide I/O as defined on PID’s.7. Provide in accordance with Section 13441 and 13431.8. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.



HS 2-Position Switch (On/Off) Panel Power

YL Indicating Light – Green Power On

HS 3-Position Switch (Local/Off/Remote) Pump Control

KC Input Enter Stroke CycleQI Display Pump Strokes

PI Display Pump SuctionVacuum/Pressure

PI Display Pump Discharge PressureYL Indicating Light – Red Diaphragm Fail Moisture ProbeHS Pushbutton Panel Reset




1. Pump shall operate via constant flow and automatic air pressure adjustment scheme.2. Automatic pressure adjustment controller and air header shall accommodate either

stroke rate signal from Thickener Building RIO Panel (500-RIO-1) or manual rate entry inkeypad of controller, and adjust air pressure required to fully stroke as sludge viscositieschange.

3. With TPSD Pump Local Control Station HOA switch in Hand, pump shall beginoperation. Provide operator adjustable input at front of panel to control pump strokerate; enter strokes per minute. If entered stroke rate is greater than manufacturer’sallowable rate, controller shall automatically adjust stroke rate to highest stroke rateallowable.

4. With TPSD Pump Local Control Station HOA switch in Off, pump shall be off.5. With TPSD Pump Local Control Station HOA switch in Auto, Thickener Building RIO

Panel shall send stroke rate signal to TPSD Pump Local Control Stations. If stroke rateis greater than manufacturer’s allowable rate, TPSD Pump Local Control Stationscontroller shall automatically adjust stroke rate to highest stroke rate allowable and shallsend signal with adjusted rate back to Thickener Building RIO Panel.

6. TPSD Pump controller shall monitor pump stroke and automatically adjust air pressureto achieve full stroke lengths at required stroke rate to accommodate changing sludgeconditions.

7. If Moisture Sensor switch is activated, stop operating pump, and send alarm signal toThickener Building RIO Panel.

2.08 500-M-3101, -3102 & -3103 POLYMER SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL (Ref. Dwg. 009-N-31)

A. Panel:

1. NEMA 4.2. Skid Mount3. 120 vac power supply.4. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.5. Provide as part of equipment package specified in Section 11354.

B. Front Panel Mounted Devices:

Tag Device Description InterfaceHS Selector Switch - 3 Pos. “On Off Remote” ---YL Indicating Light - Green “Power On”HS Selector Switch - 2 Pos. "Mixer Off Auto”HS Selector Switch - 2 Pos. “Pump Local Remote”SI Speed Indicator “Polymer Pump GPH”HS Potentiometer “Manual Speed Pot”


1

PLC or Controller Programmable Logic Controllerin accordance with Section13450 or 13451, orManufacturer’s Controller

1 Control PowerTransformer



YL Indicating Light - Red “Loss of Water”HS Selector Switch - 2 Pos. "Pump Main/Aux”

C. Additional Panel Equipment:

1. Provide main circuit breaker for 120-vac.2. Coordinate incoming power lugs with electrical plans.3. Provide Adjustable Speed Drive for Polymer Pump Motor4. Provide circuit breaker for the motor starter.5. Provide circuit breaker for the Adjustable Speed Drive6. Provide thermal overload relay with integral heater elements and with reset pushbutton

for each motor starter.


D. Send Information (Interface Information to the Main PLC)

1. Polymer Low Flow2. System Running3. Loss of Water4. System in Hand5. Mixer Overload (Fail)6. Pump Speed Feedback

E. Receive Information (Interface Information from the Main PLC)

1. System Required to Run.2. Speed Feedback (Polymer Flow).

2.09 510-LCP-3614 TRANSFER PUMP NO. 2 CONTROL STATION(Ref. Dwg 009-N-36)

A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure.2. NEMA 4X.3. Wall Mount.4. 120 vac, 1-phase, 60Hz power supply.5. Provide with equipment specified in Section 11314.6. Provide I/O as defined on PID’s.7. Provide in accordance with Section 13441 and 13431.8. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.



HS 2-Position Switch (On/Off) Panel Power

YL Indicating Light – Green Power On

HS 3-Position Switch (Local/Off/Remote) Pump Control

KC Input Enter Stroke CycleQI Display Pump Strokes

PI Display Pump SuctionVacuum/Pressure

PI Display Pump Discharge PressureYL Indicating Light – Red Diaphragm Fail Moisture ProbeHS Pushbutton Panel Reset




1. Pump shall operate via constant flow and automatic air pressure adjustment scheme.2. Automatic pressure adjustment controller and air header shall accommodate either

stroke rate signal from 510-PLC-1 or manual rate entry in keypad of controller, andadjust air pressure required to fully stroke as sludge viscosities change.

2.10 510-LCP-3705 WASTE GAS BURNER CONTROL PANEL (Ref. Dwg 009-N-37)

A. Panel:

1. Outdoor Enclosure.2. NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel.3. Stanchion Mounted; mount to back of Waste Gas Burner Manufacturer’s Valve Control

Station.4. 120 vac, 1-phase, 60Hz power supply.5. Provide panel interior temperature control equipment as required by manufacturer, ie.

heaters, air conditioners, filters, etc. Heaters shall be placed within control panel whereradiant heat will not deform or melt adjacent control or panel components.

6. Provide with equipment specified in Section 11390.7. Provide in accordance with Section 13441 and 13431.8. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.

B. Front of Panel Devices:


HS 3-Position Switch(Standby/Auto/Manual) Burner Control Controller

HS Pushbutton Manual IgnitionYL Indicating Light – Green Pilot Lit

C. Back of Panel Devices:

Tag Device Description InterfaceYL Indicating Light – Green Pilot LitYL Indicating Light – Red Pilot OutYL Indicating Light – Amber SparkYL Indicating Light – Green Ignition Retention Valve OpenKC Input Adjustable thermocouple set ptAR Terminal Blocks



1

PLC or Controller Programmable Logic Controllerin accordance with Section13450 or 13451, orManufacturer’s Controller

1 Control PowerTransformer



1. Either start signal from 510-PLC-1 or pressure switch (510-PSH-3773) shall initiate start-up sequence on controller through remote start contacts.

2. Contact closure shall energize Remote-start time delay relay.3. Start-up sequence shall open continuous pilot solenoid valve and ignition retention

solenoid valve.4. Continuous and ignition retention line shall receive constant air/gas supply from

inspiriting venturis.5. System shall purge for “spark interval set time” (minutes).6. Controller shall send signal to controller to fire spark plug which ignites air/gas mixture

on ignition line.7. This flame front shall ignite gas from continuous flame nozzle.8. When thermocouple located inside continuous flame nozzle exceeds temperature set

point, send signal to controller to change red status light to green. This sequence shallclose ignition retention solenoid valve.

9. Controller timer shall stop cycling and ignition stops.10. All Alarms shall clear.11. Local Start Operation:

a. If Manual Ignition button is pushed, burner and pilot shall remain lit and attempt re-ignition in case pilot is lost, until thermocouple heats up to temperature set pointsignaling Pilot On indication. Re-ignition attempts shall stop.

12. Remote Start Operation:

a. If Remote Ignition initiates pilot, burner and pilot shall remain lit unless there is nocontact change-over in panel via 510-PLC-1 or pressure switch (510-PSH-3773)permissive.

b. Remote Start time delay relay to prevent nuisance switching.c. If thermocouple cools below temperature set point, controller shall send alarm status

and attempt to re-ignite if 501-PLC-1 or 510-PSH-3773 permissives are present, inwhich following occurs:

i. Thermocouple alarm relay shall signal “Pilot off”.ii. System shall alarm pilot flame failure if thermocouple does not meet set point

temperature.iii. Pilot flame failure shall require manual re-set if controller has expired pre-set re-

ignition attempts.

d. If digester gas manifold pressure falls below setting on pressure switch:

i. Controller mode shall change from continuous operation in automatic mode tostandby mode.

ii. “Regulator Panel Gas Supply” solenoid valve shall close on pilot gas controlcomponents panel and extinguish pilot.

iii. Once thermocouple temperature drops below set point, pilot light shall switchstatus.

iv. Thermocouple alarm relay shall switch contacts.v. System alarm really shall not activate because in standby mode.vi. System shall remain in standby mode until there is remote start signal to initiate

burner.

13. Control panel shall open and close solenoid valve on sensing line based on pressureswitch. Solenoid valve shall assist in fully closing pressure relief valve in absence ofpressure switch permissive.

2.11 510-LCP-3706 DRIP TRAP LOCAL CONTROL PANEL (Ref. Dwg 009-N-37)


A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure.2. NEMA 7.3. Wall Mounted.4. 120Vac, 1-phase, 60Hz power supply.5. Provide with equipment specified in Section 11388.6. Provide in accordance with Section 13441 and 13431.7. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.


B. Front of Panel Mounted Devices (X4):


HS 3-Position Switch (Hand/Off/Auto) BG Drip Trap Control

HS 2-Position Switch (Open/Close)

Drip Trap Drain ValveManual Control

KC Adjustable Timer Drain Valve Auto ControlYL Indicating Light – Green Draining - Valve Open Drip Trap Limit switch

YL Indicating Light – RedIndicating Light – FlashingRed

Filling – Valve ClosedAlarm – Valve Not Closed Drip Trap Limit switch

C. Rear of Panel Devices (X4):


1. When Local Control Panel HOA switch is in Hand, operator may manually open or closeassociated drip trap drain valve using 2-position switch, and valve position status shalldisplay on front of panel.

2. When Local Control Panel HOA switch is in Off, drain valves will not operate.3. When Local Control Panel HOA switch is in Auto, when time has expired on adjustable

timer associated drip trap drain valve shall open for adjustable amount of time.4. When valve open adjustable timer expires, valve shall close and both timers reset.5. If drip trap valve is called to open or close, and associated limit switch is not met within

manufacturer set timer, control panel shall display associated alarm (flashing red light)and send alarm signal to 510-PLC-1.

2.12 510-LCP-3761 DRIP TRAP LOCAL CONTROL PANEL (Ref. Dwg 009-N-37)

A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure.2. NEMA 7.3. Wall Mounted.4. 120 vac, 1-phase, 60Hz power supply.5. Provide with equipment specified in Section 11388.6. Provide in accordance with Section 13441 and 13431.7. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.




AR Remote Output Contacts Status (each valve) - In AutoStatus (each valve) - Alarm 510-PLC-1

AR Remote Outputs Drip Trap valve operation(each valve) Drip Trap

AR Input Contacts Valve position (each valve) Drip Trap



HS 3-Position Switch (Hand/Off/Auto) BG Drip Trap Control

HS 2-Position Switch (Open/Close)

Drip Trap Drain ValveManual Control

KC Adjustable Timer Drain Valve Auto ControlYL Indicating Light – Green Draining - Valve Open Drip Trap Limit switch

YLIndicating Light – RedIndicating Light – FlashingRed

Filling – Valve ClosedAlarm – Valve Not Closed Drip Trap Limit switch

C. Rear of Panel Devices:


1. When Local Control Panel HOA switch is in Hand, operator may manually open or closeassociated drip trap drain valve using 2-position switch, and valve position status shalldisplay on front of panel.

2. When Local Control Panel HOA switch is in Off, drain valves will not operate.3. When Local Control Panel HOA switch is in Auto, when time has expired on adjustable

timer associated drip trap drain valve shall open for adjustable amount of time.4. When valve open adjustable timer expires, valve shall close and both timers reset.5. If drip trap valve is called to open or close, and associated limit switch is not met within

manufacturer set timer, control panel shall display associated alarm (flashing red light)and send alarm signal to 510-PLC-1.

2.13 510-LCP-3811 GAS COMPRESSION / MOISTURE REMOVAL CONTROL PANEL(Ref. Dwg. 009-N-38)

A. Panel:

1. NEMA 12.2. Floor mounted with feet.3. 480 Vac 3-phase power supply (100 amp).4. 120 Vac 1-phase power supply (40 amp).5. Main Circuit Breaker Disconnect6. Provide I/O as defined on P&ID’s7. Provide with equipment specified in Section 11387.8. Provide in accordance to Section 13431 and 13441.9. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.10. Panel shall be a maximum width of 49”.11. Panel shall have a maximum depth of 18”.



AR Remote Output Contacts Status (each valve) - In AutoStatus (each valve) - Alarm 510-PLC-1

AR Remote Outputs Drip Trap valve operation(each valve) Drip Trap

AR Input Contacts Valve position (each valve) Drip Trap


Tag Device Description InterfaceOIU Proface 7.5” Color Touchscreen Operator Interface PLCYL Indicating Light – Green Control Power On Control PowerYL Indicating Light – Red Fault PLCYL Indicating Light – Green Run PLCYL Indicating Light – White Ground Connected PLCYL Indicating Light – Amber Warning PLCKI Hour Meter Blower Run Time PLCJI Power Meter Blower Motor Amp Draw PLC

HS Reset Reset Pushbutton - Yellow PLCHS Start Start Pushbutton - Green PLCHS Stop Stop Pushbutton - Red PLC


Quantity Device Description Interface1 PLC A/B CompactLogix with 1769-L32E minimum PLC2 VFD Variable Frequency Drive for motor control Motors/PLC1 ENET Ethernet Switch HMI

N/A All Control Devices Per Manufacturer Per Mfg.


1. Purpose of digester gas conditioning and treatment system is to remove moisture,hydrogen sulfide (H2S), and siloxanes as well as compress gas prior to utilization.

2. Control - Digester Gas Conditioning and Treatment system shall have control panel,provided by manufacturer containing PLC to control complete system. Only monitoringand alarms capabilities (over Ethernet) shall be provided at Plant HMI’s.

3. When Local Control Panel is in Hand, local control of skid equipment is available onOIU.

4. Auto – Following control operations are available from control panel:

a. With Manual/Auto selector in Auto, Digester Gas Conditioning and Treatmentsystem shall be called to run when generator is called to operate.

b. When called to run, condensate accumulation points shall drain. Chiller and glycolpumps shall start, once glycol temperatures have reached desired temperature,compression system shall start. PLC (in manufacturer’s control panel) shall controlcompressor speed and bypass control valve to maintain setpoint discharge pressure. After compressor start-up procedure is complete, generator shall be called to run.

c. PLC shall monitor heat exchanger condensate drain system and shall drain it uponindication of “full”. PLC shall monitor duration of opening drain valve. If low level isnot reached in adjustable amount of time, valve shall close. If indication of “full” stilloccurs, then it shall alarm.


5. Monitoring and Set-points:

a. System Runb. System Discharge Pressure Set-pointc. Filter Differential Pressured. System Outlet Pressuree. System Outlet Temperaturef. On/Offg. System Failh. Chiller Faili. Filter Warningj. Elapsed Time Meter

6. Non-Critical Alarms:

a. High condensate level (after draining)b. System failc. Chiller faild. High filter differential pressuree. Low discharge pressure

2.14 510-LCP-5921/5922 W3 STRAINER CONTROL STATION (Ref. Dwg 009-N-59)

A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure.2. NEMA 4X.3. Wall Mount.4. 480Vac, 3-phase, 60Hz power supply.5. Provide with equipment specified in Section 11245.6. Provide in accordance with Section 13441 and 13431.7. Provide disconnect in accordance with Section 16414.8. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.



HS 3-Position Switch (Hand/Off/Auto) Strainer Control Motor Starter/Timer

YL Indicating Light – Green Strainer Running Motor Starter AuxContact

HS 2-Position Switch (Open/Close) Backwash Valve Control Valve Actuator

YL Indicating Light – Green Backwash Valve Open Valve ActuatorYL Indicating Light – Red Backwash Valve Closed Valve ActuatorHS Pushbutton System Reset MORHS Switch Disconnect




1. When repeat cycle timer expires strainer shall automatically backflush and drain filteredmaterial.

2. When high differential pressure set point across strainer is meet send alarm signal andoverride repeat cycle timer to start backflushing continuously until high differentialpressure switch opens back up.

2.15 701-LCP-0711 BIOFILTER CONTROL PANEL

A. Panel:

1. Outdoor Enclosure.2. NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel.3. Wall Mounted.4. 120Vac, 1-phase, 60Hz power supply.5. Provide thermostatically controlled panel heaters.6. OIU in accordance with Section 13453.7. Provide with equipment specified in Section 13200.8. Provide in accordance with Section 13441 and 13431.9. All Parameters shall indicate and control in English Engineering Units.



HS 3-Position Switch (Hand/Off/Auto)

OIU Operator Interface UnitYL Indicating Light – Green Recirculation Pump Running

YL Indicating Light – Red Recirculation Sump High HighAlarm

YL Indicating Light – Red Recirculation Sump Low LowAlarm

YL Indicating Light – Red Recirculation Low Flow AlarmHS Pushbutton System Reset


Quantity Device Description Interface1 Repeat Cycle Timer 0.1 sec – 100 hrs

1 Transformer with SurgeArrestor

480VAC to 120VACtransformer


AR Terminal Blocks Sufficient to provide 20% Spare1 Motor Overload Relay Motor Starter (MS) Coil1 Motor Starter Full voltage Motor



1. Biofilter Control Panel shall receive Enable signal from Headworks PLC Panel (405-PLC-1) whenever Odorous Air Blower is energized.

2. Enable signal shall require Recirculation Pump to energize and remain in operation untilOdorous Air Blower is de-energized. Biofilter Control Panel shall send RecirculationPump Running signal to Headworks PLC Panel.

3. Biofilter Control Panel shall continuously monitor Recirculation Sump liquid levels.4. Biofilter Control Panel OIU shall allow operator to input following liquid level set point

conditions. Level inputs shall be based on bottom of sump being elevation 0-ft:

a. Level Low Low: When liquid level drops to this set point, send alarm signal toHeadworks PLC Panel and de-energize Recirculation Pump. Level initially set at topof pump volute.

b. Level Low: When liquid level drops to this set point, Biofilter Control Panel shallopen Make-up Water Valve (701-FCV-0711) until Level High set point is achieved.

c. Level High: When liquid level reaches this set point, Biofilter Control Panel shall shutMake-up Water Valve (701-FCV-0711).

d. Level High High: When liquid level reaches this set point, Biofilter Control Panelshall send alarm signal to Headworks Control Panel, but Recirculation Pump shallcontinue to operate. Level shall be initially set at invert of Recirculation SumpOverflow.

5. Biofilter Control Panel shall continually monitor Recirculation Pump flow with Low FlowIndicating Switch. If recirculation flow drops below Low Flow Indicating Switch set point,Biofilter Control Panel shall send alarm signal to Headworks PLC Panel and de-energizeRecirculation Pump.

6. Biofilter Control Panel shall continually monitor recirculation flow temperature (701-TIT-0721). Biofilter Control Panel OIU shall allow operator to input following liquidtemperature set point conditions:

a. Low Liquid Temperature: When recirculation liquid temperature drops to this setpoint, send “call for heat” signal to Headworks PLC Panel, and open Hot WaterControl Valve (701-TCV-0713).

b. High Liquid Temperature: When recirculation liquid temperature reaches this setpoint, close Hot Water Control Valve (701-TCV-0713) and discontinue “call for heat”signal to Headworks PLC Panel.

7. Biofilter Control Panel shall operate Irrigation Control Valve (701-FCV-0712) based oninterval/duration control whenever Recirculation Pump is energized. Biofilter ControlPanel OIU shall allow operator to input following set points for timer:

a. Interval: Enter number of cycles per week. Biofilter Control Panel controller shalltake number entered and evenly space cycles entered over 7 day period.

Quantity Device Description Interface1 PLC or Controller Programmable Logic Controller

in accordance with Section13450 or 13451, orManufacturer’s Controller

1 Ethernet Switch Industrial Ethernet Switch HMI1 Surge Protector Per Mfg.

Control PowerTransformer

480 Vac to 120 Vac powerconverter



b. Duration: Enter number of minutes irrigation valve is to open during each cycle.c. If number of cycles and cycle duration are greater than 7 days, pop up window to

notify operator to re-enter inputs.

8. Biofilter Control Panel shall receive and monitor differential pressure signals (701-DPIT-0721 and -0722) from Headworks PLC Panel. Biofilter Control Panel OIU shall allowoperator to input following set points:

a. Differential Pressure High: If pressure differential reaches set point, send alarmsignal to Headworks PLC Panel, but not further action.

9. Provide Reset pushbutton on front of panel to reset system alarm(s) once cleared.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Parts and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the Supplier installationinstructions and in compliance with OSHA, local, state and federal codes and regulations..

END OF SECTION

LOCATION DRAWING TAG EQUIPMENT FUNCTION QTY I/OTYPE

SIGNALTYPE DATA 1 DATA 2

436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-PIT-1511C BLOWER NO. 1 DSCH PRESSURE (3) AI 4-20mAdc ----- PSIG436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-VT-1501 BLOWER NO. 1 VIBRATION (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-10 LBS436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-TT-1541 BLOWER NO. 1 VFD TEMP (3) AI 4-20mAdc ----- °F436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-TT-1531A BLOWER NO. 1 MOTOR WINDING TEMP (3) AI 4-20mAdc ----- °F436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-TT-1521B BLOWER NO. 1 MOTOR BEARING CONTR TEMP (3) AI 4-20mAdc ----- °F436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-TT-1511D BLOWER NO. 1 DSCH TEMP (3) AI 4-20mAdc ----- °F436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-SI-1401 BLOWER NO. 1 SPEED FEEDBACK (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-SC-1401 BLOWER NO. 1 SPEED REFERENCE (3) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-ZCO/ZCC-1510E BLOW OFF VALVE OPEN/CLOSE (3) DI 120VAC NOT OPEN/NOT CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-MS-1401 BLOWER NO. 1 VFD RUNNING (3) DI 120VAC STOPPED RUNNING436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-YA-1401 BLOWER NO. 1 VFD FAULT (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAULT436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-VFD-1401 BLOWER NO. 1 RESET (3) RO 120VAC NOT RESET RESET436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-MC/MC_2-1401 BLOWER NO. 1 REMOTE START/STOP (3) RO 120VAC NOT START/NOT STOP START/STOP436-LCP-1501 009-N-15 436-MC_1-1401 BLOWER NO. 1 ENABLE (3) RO 120VAC INHIBIT ENABLE436-MCP-1401 009-N-14 436-PIT-1401 BLOWER HEADER PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-15 PSIG436-MCP-1401 009-N-15 436-PT-1501 BLOWER NO. 1 INLET PRESSURE (3) AI 4-20mAdc ----- PSIA436-MCP-1401 009-N-15 436-PDISH-1501A INLET FILTER DIRTY (3) DI 120VAC DIRTY CLEAN436-MCP-1401 009-N-15 436-TT-1501 BLOWER NO. 1 INLET TEMP (3) RTD 4-20mAdc °F

440-LCP-4804 009-N-48 440-LSH-4801 FLOOD HIGH LEVEL DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM440-LCP-4805 009-N-48 440-LSH-4731 FLOOD HIGH LEVEL DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM440-LCP-4805 009-N-48 440-AE-4801 CONTAINMENT AREA SMOKE DETECTOR DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM440-LCP-4805 009-N-48 440-LSH-4801 FLOOD HIGH LEVEL DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM

Eau Claire WWTPProject No. 12026 Page 1 of 1

11990 Schedule 1I/O List

DIVISION 12

FURNISHINGS

Donohue & Associates, Inc. MANUFACTURED STEEL LABORATORYCASEWORK

Project No. 12026 12345-1

SECTION 12345 MANUFACTURED STEEL LABORATORY CASEWORK

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

Section Includes:

Steel casework.Table frames.Metal finishesWork surfaces.Pegboard drying racksSinks drains and traps.Service fittingsChemical fume hoodsAccessory equipment.

1.02 REFERENCES

OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration

ACGIH: American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists

SEFA 8: Laboratory Furniture – Casework, Shelving and Table GuidelinesScience Equipment and Furniture Association (SEFA)

1.03 CASEWORK DESIGN REQURIEMENTS

A. Flush construction: Surfaces of doors, drawers, and panel faces shall align with cabinet frontswithout overlap of case ends. Vertical case shell members shall meet in the same plane withoutoverlap, cracks or crevices. Doors and drawer heads shall overlap top rails, intermediate rails andbottom rails.

B. Slimline styling: Maximum front width of end panels 3/4 inch and maximum front height of top andbottom members 1 inch.

C. Self supporting units: Completely welded shell assembly without applied panels at ends, backs orbottoms, so that cases can be used interchangeably or as a single, stand-alone unit.

D. Interior of case units: Easily cleanable, flush interior. Base cabinets, 30 inch and wider, with doubleswinging doors shall provide full access to complete interior without center vertical post.

E. Drawers: Sized on a modular basis for interchange to meet varying storage needs, and designedto be easily removable in field without the use of special tools.

F. Case openings: Rabbeted-like joints all four sides of case opening for hinged doors and two sidesfor sliding doors in order to provide dust resistant case.

G. Framed glazed doors: Identical in construction, hardware, and installation to solid panel doors.Design frame glazed doors to be removable for glass replacement.

H. All wall cabinets and wall shelves to be of a modular casework design.

MANUFACTURED STEEL LABORATORYCASEWORK


12345-2 Project No. 12026

I. Provide fillers and scribes as necessary for a complete project.

1.04 CASEWORK PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Structural performance requirements: Casework components shall withstand the followingminimum loads without damage to the component or to the casework operation:

1. Steel base unit load capacity: 500 pounds per lineal foot.2. Suspended units: 300 pounds.3. Drawers in a cabinet: 150 pounds.4. Utility tables (4 legged): 300 pounds.5. Hanging wall cases: 300 pounds.6. Load capacity for shelves of base units, wall cases and tall cases: 100 pounds.

A. Metal Finish Performance Requirements:

1. Abrasion resistance: Maximum weight loss of 5.5 milligram per 100 cycle when tested on aTaber Abrasion Tester #E40101 with 1000 gram wheel pressure and Calibrase #CS10 wheel.

2. Hardness: Surface hardness equivalent to 4H or 5H pencil.3. Humidity resistance: Withstand 1000 hour exposure in saturated humidity at 100°F.4. Moisture resistance:

a. No visible effect to surface finish after boiling water trickled over test panel inclined at 45degrees for five minutes.

b. No visible effect to surface finish following 100 hour continuous application of a watersoaked cellulose sponge, maintained in a wet condition throughout the test period.

5. Adhesion: Score finish surface of test panel with razor blade into 100 squares, 1/16 x 1/16inch, cutting completely through the finish but with minimum penetration of the substrate, andbrush away particles with soft brush. Minimum 95 squares shall maintain their finish.

6. Salt spray: Withstand minimum 200 hour salt spray test.7. The finish shall meet SEFA chemical resistant performance standards.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Provide 3/4 inch = 1 foot - 0 inch scale elevations of individual and battery ofcasework units, cross sections, rough-in and anchor placements, tolerances and clearances.Indicate relation of units to surrounding walls, windows, doors and other building components.Provide 1/4 inch = 1 foot - 0 inch rough-in plan drawings for coordination with trades. Rough-inshall show free area.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for each component and item of laboratory equipmentspecified. Include component dimensions, configurations, construction details, joint details, andattachments, utility and service requirements and locations.

B. Samples:

1. Top Sample.2. Finish Sample: 3 inch X 5 inch Painted Steel.3. Color Samples: 3 inch X 5 inch samples of standard colors of finish for casework, work

surfaces and for other prefinished equipment and accessories.



Project No. 12026 12345-3


A. Single source responsibility: Casework, work surfaces, laboratory equipment and accessoriesshall be manufactured or furnished by a single laboratory furniture company.

B. Manufacturer's qualifications: Modern plant with proper tools, dies, fixtures and skilled workmen toproduced high quality laboratory casework and equipment, and shall meet the following minimumrequirements:

1. Five years or more experience in manufacture of laboratory casework and equipment of typespecified.

2. Ten installations of equal or larger size and requirements.

C. Installer's qualifications: Factory trained and/or certified by the manufacturer.

D. Cabinet identification: Cabinets are identified on drawings by manufacturer's catalog numbers.Unless otherwise modified on drawings or in specifications, catalog description constitutes specificrequirements for each type of cabinet.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Schedule delivery of casework and equipment so that spaces are sufficiently complete thatmaterial can be installed immediately following delivery.

B. Protect finished surfaces from soiling or damage during handling and installation. Keep coveredwith polyethylene film or other protective coating.

C. Protect all work surfaces throughout construction period with 1/4 inch corrugated cardboardcompletely covering the top and securely taped to edges. Mark cardboard in large lettering "NoStanding".

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not deliver or install equipment until the following conditions have been met:

1. Windows and doors are installed and the building is secure and weathertight.2. Ceiling, overhead ductwork and lighting are installed.3. All painting is completed and floor finish is complete.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Casework and equipment manufacturer: Mott Manufacturing, 452 Hardy Road, Brantford ON,Canada N3T 5L8.

B. Kewaunee Scientific Corporation 2700 West Front Street, Statesville, NC 28677-2927.

2.02 CASEWORK MATERIALS

A. Sheet steel: Mild, cold rolled and leveled unfinished steel.



12345-4 Project No. 12026

B. Minimum gauges:

1. 20 gauge: Solid door interior panels, drawer fronts, scribing strips, filler panels, enclosures,drawer bodies, shelves, security panels and sloping tops.

2. 18 gauge: Case tops, ends, bottoms, bases, backs, vertical posts, uprights, glazed doormembers, door exterior panels and access panels.

3. 16 gauge: Top front rails, top rear gussets, intermediate horizontal rails, table legs and frames,leg rails and stretchers.

4. 14 gauge: Drawer suspensions, door and case hinge reinforcements and front cornerreinforcements.

5. 11 gauge: Table leg corner brackets and gussets for leveling screws.

C. Glass for glazed doors: minimum 7/32 inch thick, clear laminated safety glass.

2.03 CASEWORK FABRICATION

A. Base Units and Cases:

1. Conform to the sizes shown on the Drawings.2. Base units and 24 inches, 30 inches, and 36 inches high wall cases: End panels and back

reinforced with internal reinforcing front and rear posts.3. 48 inches and 84 inches high cases: Formed end panels with front and rear reinforcing post

channels; back shall be formed steel panel, recessed 3/4 inch for mounting purposes.4. Posts: Front post fully closed with full height reinforcing upright. Shelf adjustment holes in

front and rear posts shall be perfectly aligned for level setting, adjustable to 1/2 inch on center.5. Secure intersection of case members with spot and arc welds. Provide gusset reinforcement

at front corners.6. Base unit backs: Provide drawer units without backs and cupboard units with removable

backs.7. Non-sink cabinet bottoms: Base units and 24 inches, 30 inches, 36 inches and 48 inches

high wall cases shall have one piece bottom with front edge formed into front rail, rabbeted asrequired for swinging doors and drawers and flush design for sliding doors. Access levelingholes shall be capped with PVC plugs for leveling screw access.

8. Sink cabinet bottoms shall be constructed with galvanized sheet steel and finished to matchthe balance of the cabinet. Cold rolled steel bottoms are not acceptable.

9. Top rail for base units: Interlock with end panels, flush with front of unit.10. Horizontal intermediate rails: Recessed behind doors and drawer fronts; removable for later

revision in cabinet configuration.11. Base for base units: 4 inches high x 3 inches deep with formed steel base and 11 Ga. die

formed steel gussets at corners Provide 3/8 inch diameter leveling screw with integral bottomflange of minimum 0.56 square inch area at each corner, accessible through openings in toespace.

12. Tops of wall cases: One piece, with front edge formed into front rail.13. Backs of wall cases: One piece, with two u-shaped members welded to back designed to fit on

adjustable height Sigma Flex wall hanger rail, allowing for 1 inch vertical height adjustmentand/or cabinet removal without tools.

C. Drawers:

1. Drawer fronts: 3/4 inches thick, double wall construction, prepainted prior to assembly andsound deadened; top front corners welded and ground smooth.

2. Drawer bodies: Bottom and sides formed into one-piece center section with bottom and sidescoved and formed top edges. Front and back panels spot welded to center section.

3. Drawer suspension: Heavy duty coved raceways for both case and drawer with nylon tired,ball bearing rollers; self-centering and self-closing when open to within 6 inches of the closed


Project No. 12026 12345-5

position.4. Provide drawer with rubber bumpers. Friction centering devices are not acceptable.5. File drawers: Provide with full extension slides for full access and operation.

D. Doors:

1. Solid panel doors: 3/4 inches thick, double wall, telescoping box steel construction with interiorprepainted and sound deadened, all outer corners welded and ground smooth. Reinforceinterior of front panel with welded steel hat channels. Hinges with screws to internal 14 gaugereinforcing in case and door. Hinges shall be removable; welding of hinges not acceptable.Doors shall close against rubber bumpers.

2. Frame glazed doors: Outer head to be one piece construction. Inner head to consist of top,bottom and side framing members which are removable for installation or replacement ofglass. Provide continuous vinyl glazing retainer to receive glass. In all other respects, framedglazed door construction and quality shall match solid panel doors.

3. Sliding doors - solid or framed glazed: Design for tilt-out removal after removal of bottomguide. Doors shall be hung with nylon tired sleeve bearing rollers in formed steel top hungtrack and shall close against rubber bumpers.

4. Unframed sliding glass doors: Glass with edges ground set in extruded aluminum shoe withintegral pulls, wheel assemblies and top and bottom extruded aluminum track. Provide rubberbumpers at fully opened and closed door position.

E. Shelves:

1. Form front and back edges down and back 1 inch. Form ends down 1 inch.2. Reinforce shelves over 36 inches long with welded hat channel reinforcement the full width of

shelf.3. Pull out shelves shall have full extension drawer slides with a 100# dynamic rating.

E. Base molding: 4 inches high, black rubber or vinyl; inside corners mitered and outside cornerswrapped. Base molding should be supplied and installed by the Specification Section 09671flooring contractor. All casework components coming within 1 inch of the finished flooring shouldhave molding applied to them.

F. Hardware:

1. Drawer and hinged door pulls: Stainless Steel Wire Type2. Sliding door pulls: Manufacturer's standard plastic pulls, Chameleon color.3. Hinges: Institutional type, five knuckle projecting barrel hinges, minimum 2-1/2 inches long,

type 304 stainless steel. Provide two hinges for doors up to 36" high; three hinges for doorsover 36 inches high.

4. Door catches: Adjustable type, spring actuated nylon roller catches.5. Elbow catches: Spring type of cadmium plated steel, with strike of suitable design.6. Label holders: Formed steel with satin chrome finish, 1 inch x 1-1/2 inch, screw installed.

Provide holders for each casework door and drawer. Location to be determined by Owner.7. Shelf clips: Die formed steel, zinc plated, designed to engage in shelf adjustment holes.8. File drawer hanger rods shall be provided at all file drawer locations and be adjustable to

accommodate legal or letter sized files.

2.04 TABLE FRAMES

A. Table frames: 3-3/4 inches high shall be fabricated from a single metal channel-shaped skirtingpanel in modular widths to match base cabinets. Channel ends shall be turned to fit into endmounting brackets.

B. Table drawers: Provide front and back rails; drawer unit, hardware and suspension same as



12345-6 Project No. 12026

specified for base unit drawers.

C. Legs: 2 inch x 2 inch steel tube legs with welded leg bracket. Attach legs with two bolts to front andback aprons and weld to end rails. Each leg shall have a recessed leveling screw and a black,coved vinyl or rubber leg shoe, two inches in height.

2.05 METAL FINISH

A. Preparation: Spray clean metal with a heated cleaner/phosphate solution, pretreat with ironphosphate spray, water rinse, and neutral final seal. Immediately dry in heated ovens, graduallycooled, prior to application of finish.

B. Application: Electrostatically apply powder coat of selected color and bake in controlled hightemperature oven to assure a smooth, hard satin finish. Surfaces shall have a chemical resistant,high grade laboratory furniture quality finish of the following thicknesses:

1. Exterior and interior surfaces exposed to view: 1.5 mil average and 1.2 mil minimum.2. Backs of cabinets and other surfaces not exposed to view: 1.0 mil average.

C. Finish drawer bodies in matching or harmonizing color and apply corrosion-resistant treatment toselected, concealed interior parts.

D. Provide chemical/acid storage cabinets where noted with chemical resistant polyethylene interiorlining and shelf surfaces. Hardboard liners are not acceptable.

2.06 IMPERIAL STONE WORK SURACES

A. Material: Chemical and abrasion resistant, durable top of one inch thick natural stone; free ofveins, stratifications and laminations with a uniform finish. Color to be black. The stone shallbe impregnated throughout the vacuum process with a chemically resistant thermosettingpolymerizing resin and be baked. Tops should be manufactured by Waller Bros. StoneCompany, McDermott, Ohio. Epoxy resin counters are not acceptable.

B. Backsplash curb: Same material as top, 4" high, butt jointed and cemented to top. Providewhere indicated on drawings. Include end curb where top abuts end wall.

C. Reagent ledges to be the same material as the countertop.

2.07 EPOXY WORK SURFACES

A. Material: Chemical and abrasion resistant, durable top of one inch thick cast material ofepoxy resins and inert products, cast flat, with a uniform low-sheen black surface.

B. Backsplash curb: Same material as top, 4 inches high, butt jointed and cemented to top.Provide where indicated on drawings. Include end curb where top abuts end wall.

C. Reagent ledges to be the same material as the countertop.

2.08 PEGBOARD DRYING RACKS

A. Material: Chemical and abrasion resistant, durable top of one inch thick cast material ofepoxy resins and inert products, cast flat, with a uniform low-sheen black surface.

B. Epoxy resin board fabricated of 1 inch thick black epoxy resin with white polypropylene pegs


Project No. 12026 12345-7

in 5 inches, 6½ inches, and 8 inch lengths and 5 inches deep full width stainless steel driptrough with outlet. Base of pegs to be two-prong style for mechanical attachment. Do notbond pegs to board. Pegs to protrude at 45 angle. Pegboard to have finished face andedges.

2.09 SINKS, DRAINS AND TRAPS

A. Epoxy resin sinks: Integrally molded from modified thermosetting black epoxy resin,specially compounded and oven cured. Cove inside corners and pitch bottom to threadeddrain outlet.

B. Sink supports:

1. Cabinet sinks: Support sinks on 11 gauge, adjustable, 1 inch x 2 inch x 1 inch channelwith reagent resistant finish. Provide two channels across width of cabinet, attached to3/8 inch diameter threaded hanger rods.

2. Caulk joint between top and sink with non-hardening mastic.

C. Epoxy resin cupsinks: Integrally molded from modified thermosetting black epoxy resin,specially compounded and oven cured. Cove inside corners and pitch bottom to threadeddrain outlet.

2.10 SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Fixtures coming in contact with the laboratory counters, should be provided by thiscontractor to better coordinate the location and size of counter holes and cutouts.

1. Water service:a. Water service faucets and valves shall have renewable unit containing all working

parts subject to wear, including replaceable stainless steel seat. Unit shall haveserrations for position locking into valve body. Water Saver #411-8. Provide at all sinklocations with the indicated gooseneck spread shown on drawings.

b. ADA fixture to be Water Saver #L2211BH-8 with soft flow aerator tip.c. Dual check outlet vacuum breakers: Brass forgings, with renewable seat and special

design valve member for fine flow control meeting Wisconsin plumbing codes. WaterSaver #L110. To be supplied with all water fixtures.

d. Goosenecks shall have separate 3/8" IPS coupling securely brazed to gooseneck toprovide full thread for attachment of anti-splash outlet fittings, serrated tips and filterpumps.

2. Air and vacuum services:a. Ball valves: Provide units with a forged brass body with removable serrated hose end

and oversize lever-type handle. Valves shall have a chrome plated ball with integralstem and molded TFE seals. Ball valves shall be individually factory tested at 125 PSIair pressure and shall be certified by the American Gas Association (AGA) to ½ PSIworking pressure. Provide as shown on drawings.

b. Turrets for air, vacuum, steam or water fixtures: "Round" type design, provided withbrass shanks, locknuts and washers as shown on drawings.

c. Handles for service cocks shall be provided with removable screw-on type coloredplastic discs with letter stamped on disc in contrasting color.

3. Electrical boxes a. Electric pedestal boxes shall be duplex and mounted on the table top as shown on the

drawings. The boxes shall be cast aluminum with an integral base and shall have apolished aluminum finish with clear epoxy Pedestal boxes shall be machined for bothstandard and ground fault receptacles, and shall be furnished complete with grounding



12345-8 Project No. 12026

screw(s), mounting shank, locknut and washer. Electric pedestal boxes shall be listedby Underwriters Laboratories (UL) under Standard UL514A. Receptacles shall becommercial or specification grade. Face plates and receptacles shall be furnished inaccordance with 16140 by Electrical Contractor.

b. Electrical receptacles from the Uninterruptible Power Supply shall have a red faceplate in accordance with Section 16140 furnished by Electrical Contractor and asshown on the drawings.

c. Reagent rack boxes and receptacles shall be in accordance with Section 16140 andsupplied by Electrical Contractor.

2.11 CHEMICAL FUME HOODS

A. General requirements:

1. Fume hoods is to be Mott Manufacturing Pro Series constant volume bypass type,factory prepiped and prewired. Provide color match plugs in holes at front of hood forservices not required.

2. Fume hoods shall function as ventilated, enclosed work spaces, designed to capture,confine, and exhaust fumes, vapors, and particulate matter produced or generatedwithin the enclosure.

3. Fume hoods shall provide safe operation when properly installed and connected to anexhaust system that provides the proper exhaust air volume to permit the fume hood tooperate at the specified face velocity.

4. Fume hoods shall be provided with a prewired electronic safety monitor (AFA 0500).This system shall monitor the face velocity if face velocity drops below 70 feet perminute. The monitor shall have audible and visual alarm signals, solid state construction,thermistor-based sensing system.

B. Fume hood liner material:

1. Fume hood interior liner surfaces, including both baffle surfaces, shall be fabricated ofFRP; fiberglass reinforced polyester.

C. Construction and design:

1. Fume hood sash pull and airfoil shall be constructed of stainless steel .2. The sash shall operate on a chain and sprocket system. Cable and pulley systems are

not acceptable.3. Baffle adjustment shall comply with OSHA recommendations.4. Vertical sash stop to provide capture efficiencies 50 times safer than ACGIH guidelines.5. Front mounted remote control fixtures.6. Metal free interior hood interior shall have no metal brackets, angles, or screwheads.7. Round exhaust collar reducing static pressure to conserve energy and decrease

noise levels of exhauster air shall be constructed with Type 316 stainless steel.8. Safety monitor factory calibrated electronic safety monitor activates alarm under low

flow, high flow, and blockage conditions.9. Fume hoods shall be prepiped and prewired per State codes. Proper exposed exterior

top, front vacuum breaker must be included for all cold and hot water valves.10. Provide Owner with safety video tape for OSHA compliance.

D. Performance:

1. Fume hood shall have a static pressure reading of 0.25 or lower.


Project No. 12026 12345-9

2.12 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT

A. Cylinder tank restraint system to be provided by casework contractor. See drawings forspecific configuration and construction.

B. Magnetic task lights shall be provided under wallcases and shelves, as called for ondrawings. Each light should have its own power cord. Each light should have a housingmounted power switch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Casework installation:

1. Set casework components plumb, square, and straight with no distortion and securelyanchored to building structure. Shim as required using concealed shims.

2. Bolt continuous cabinets together with joints flush, tight and uniform, and with alignment ofadjacent units within 1/16 inch tolerance.

3. Secure wall cabinets to solid supporting material, not to plaster, lath or gypsum board.4. Abut top edge surfaces in one true plane. Provide flush joints not to exceed 1/8 inch between

top units.

B. Work surface installation:

1. Where required due to field conditions, scribe to abutting surfaces.2. Only factory prepared field joints, located per approved shop drawings, shall be permitted.

Secure joints in field, where practicable, in the same manner as in factory, with dowels,splines, adhesive or fasteners recommended by manufacturer.

3. Secure work surfaces to casework and equipment components with material and proceduresrecommended by the manufacturer.

C. Sink installation: Sinks which were not factory installed shall be set in chemical resistant sealingcompound and secured and supported per manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Accessory installation: Install accessories and fittings in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations. Turn screws to seat flat; do not drive.

3.02 ADJUSTING

A. Repair or remove and replace defective work, as directed by Engineer upon completion ofinstallation.

B. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean shop finished casework, touch up as required.

B. Clean counter tops with diluted dishwashing liquid and water leaving tops free of all grease andstreaks. Use no wax or oils.

3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Provide all necessary protective measures to prevent exposure of casework and equipment from



12345-10 Project No. 12026

exposure to other construction activity.

B. Advise contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of material, installed laboratorycasework and fixtures from damage by work of other trades.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. CONTROL ROOM CONSOLEProject No. 12026 12510-1

SECTION 12510 CONTROL ROOM CONSOLES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. One Operator Console for Control Room in Administrative Center (structure 300).2. One Workstation Console for Control Room in Administrative Center (structure 300).3. Two credenza’s for Control Room in Administrative Center (structure 300).4. One Dual Workstation Console for Electrical Room in Blower Building (structure 436).

1.02 CONSOLE DESIGN REQURIEMENTS

A. The contractor shall supply a system capable of supporting specified electronics hardware.

B. The system shall be modular with steel frame structure and decorative end panels.

C. Design shall facilitate future equipment retrofits.

D. The system shall include efficient ventilation and wire management systems.

E. The system shall include rigid mounting system for 24” LCD monitor arrays described below.

F. All exterior and frame steel components including doors, rack turrets, duct covers, and shelvingshall be zinc oxide wash primer with a black powder-coat textured finish.

G. All components within the system shall be:

1. Of a pre-engineered modular construction, i.e.: constructed from a series of independentsectional compartments.

2. Available from a pre-defined set of manufacturers model numbers.3. Free from alterations to the design either prior to or following installation. The assembly of the

console shall be accomplished without the need for either welding or carpentry work.4. Constructed of a steel superstructure framework consisting of intermediate and end frames

connected by horizontal stringers. External decorative side panels shall be finished surface.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Provide five sets of scaled drawings for each console assembly showing thelocation of all specified electronics in isometric, plan (top), and front views.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for each component of console.



A. Single source responsibility: Casework, work surfaces, and accessories shall be manufactured orfurnished by a single furniture company.

B. Manufacturer's qualifications: Modern plant with proper tools, dies, fixtures and skilled workmen toproduce high quality casework and equipment, and shall meet the following minimumrequirements:

CONTROL ROOM CONSOLE Donohue & Associates, Inc.12510-2 Project No. 12026

1. Ten years or more experience in design and fabrication of consoles.

C. Manufacturer shall assemble consoles prior to shipment to ensure quality of fit and finish.

D. Manufacturer shall provide pictures of assembled consoles before shipment of consoles to projectsite. Coordinate with Owner.


A. Schedule delivery of consoles so that spaces are sufficiently complete that consoles can beinstalled immediately following delivery. Coordinate with Owner.

B. Protect finished surfaces from soiling or damage during handling and installation. Keep coveredwith polyethylene film or other protective coating.

C. Protect all work surfaces throughout construction period with 1/4 inch corrugated cardboardcompletely covering the top and securely taped to edges. Mark cardboard in large lettering "NoStanding".

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not deliver or install consoles until the following conditions have been met:

1. Renovations to Control Room are complete.

1.07 WARRANTEES

A. Provide lifetime warranty on all fixed steel structure frame components.

B. Provide minimum of ten year warranty on adjustable, sliding or hinged components as well asfinished surfaces.

C. Provide minimum of two year warranty on all electrical components.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Winsted CorporationB. EVANS ConsolesC. No substitutes.

1. Contact Information:

a. Winsted Corporation10901 Hampshire Avenue SouthMinneapolis, MN. 55438(888) 946-1546 x164Steve [email protected]

b. EVANS Consoles1577 Spring Hill Road, Suite 450Vienna, VA 22182(815) 347-6786 or (855) 284-1129


Ellie [email protected]

2.02 CONSOLE CONSTRUCTION

A. General:

1. The design of the consoles shall address the functional, ergonomic and aestheticrequirements of the particular working environment while complying with accepted humanfactor design and ergonomic standards for viewing distance, angle, keyboard height, andknee-well space.

2. The consoles must be of modular design, facilitating future equipment retrofits and fullreconfigurations without requiring any major modification to the structure or exterior elements.

3. The console structure, sub structure and frame must form a freestanding unit independent ofthe exterior cladding.

4. The consoles must be manufactured to industry recognized ISO 9001:2008 quality standards.5. Intermediate and End Frames shall be capable of supporting the fully loaded console.

Intermediate and End Frame shall incorporate 3/8" (10mm) diameter threaded adjustableglides and 2" (51mm) vertical slots for mounting two and four gang electrical boxes. EndFrame shall feature an anti-tip extension. Intermediate Frame shall feature four grommetholes.

6. Horizontal Stringers shall be 12-gauge (.104”) formed sheet metal with an Insta-Lockfastening system, be 2” (51mm) high, and be available in 24” (609mm), 48” (1218mm), and72” (1827mm) widths.

7. Bottom Shelf shall have a load capacity of 200 pounds.8. Lower Doors shall be able to accept an optional CPU shelf or file/storage bin for convenient

swing-out access.9. Data/Power Rail shall include cable grommets and openings for a universal data mounting

plate and/or duplex power box. Data/Power Rail shall support work surface electricalequipment.

10. Consoles shall be capable of supporting a wide variety of monitor arrays while providing forsimple vertical adjustment. System shall be of steel or extruded aluminum construction.Monitor array support posts shall be included.

11. Work surface shall not less than 20” (508mm) deep overall, and include beveled edgecovering the entire front length of the work surface.

12. Work surfaces of all furniture shall be of like color and manufacture.

B. System Components:

1. One Operator Console for Control Room located in Administrative Center (structure 300).

a. Operator Console to be stationary (not sit/stand).b. One 72-inch triple bay chase including finished surface.c. Two radial credenza including finished surface (placed/mounted on either end of triple bay

chase).d. Two pencil drawers.e. Two 6-outlet electrical assembly.f. Two RJ-45 connectors for connection to 300-SW1.g. Two RJ-45 connectors for connection to 300-SW2.h. Two RJ-11 connectors for telephone.i. Three CPU shelves.j. Six vented doors.k. Monitor mounting array capable of holding four 24” LCD monitors (mounted horizontally

adjacent to one another) as specified in Section 13452.

CONTROL ROOM CONSOLE Donohue & Associates, Inc.12510-4 Project No. 12026

2. One Workstation Console for Control Room located in Administrative Center (structure 300).

a. Workstation Console to be stationary (not sit/stand).b. One 24-inch single bay chase including finished surface.c. One pencil drawer.d. One 6-outlet electrical assembly.e. One CPU shelf.f. Two vented doors.g. Monitor mounting array capable of holding one 24” LCD monitors as specified in Section

13452.

3. One Bookshelf Credenza for west wall located in Control Room in Administrative Center(structure 300).

a. Bookshelf Credenza with finished surface and storage compartment with dual slidingdoors and adjustable interior shelf.

b. Dual 12-inch by 29-1/8-inch wide openings.c. Overall 31-inch high by 72-inch wide by 20-inch deep (nominal).

4. One Dual-file Credenza for west wall located in Control Room in Administrative Center(structure 300).

a. Dual-file Credenza with finished surface and storage compartment with dual hinged doorsand adjustable interior shelf.

b. One file cabinet consists of two standard file drawers and one file cabinet consists of twobox drawers with one standard file drawer

c. Overall 31-inch high by 72-inch wide by 20-inch deep (nominal).

5. One Dual Workstation Console for Electrical Room located in Blower Building (structure 436).

a. Dual Workstation Console to be stationary (not sit/stand).b. One 48-inch double bay chase including finished surface.c. One pencil drawer.d. One 6-outlet electrical assembly.e. Two CPU shelves.f. Four vented doors.g. Monitor mounting array capable of holding two 24” LCD monitors (mounted horizontally

adjacent to one another) as specified in Section 13452.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Supplier shall coordinate color scheme with Owner prior to manufacture.

B. Contractor shall verify LCD monitor mounting configuration with Engineer and console supplierprior to ordering.

C. Modules shall be able to be assembled using standard tools without any site cutting or drilling.The console supplier shall provide a set of hand tools. Each module shall be rigid and self-supporting to permit individual removal, relocation or modification of adjacent modules.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean consoles after installation is complete.


3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Provide all necessary protective measures to prevent exposure of consoles from exposure to otherconstruction activity.

B. Advise Contractor of procedures and precautions for protection of installed consoles from damageby work of other trades.

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 13

SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. METAL WALL & ROOF PANELSProject No. 12026 13121-1

SECTION 13121METAL WALL AND ROOF PANELS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Prefinished metal roofing and siding panels; metal flashings and trim; fasteners; and othercomponents and material required for complete installation.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's specifications and descriptive literature.

B. Samples:

1. Roof and wall panel color samples and charts.

C. Miscellaneous Submittals:

1. Specimen copy of roof and wall panel guarantees clearly stating conditions under whichguarantee is valid.



A. Protect stored materials from damage.

B. Protect panel faces during transit, storage and erection with removable plastic film.

C. Replace damaged material if repair or corrections cannot be made in field.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard 20-year paint finish warranty and manufacturer'sstandard 20-year no-perforation warranty.

B. Wall Panels: Manufacturer's standard 20-year paint finish warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Butler Rib II by Butler Manufacturing Co.

B. Or equal.

METAL WALL & ROOF PANELS Donohue & Associates, Inc.13121-2 Project No. 12026

2.03 ROOFING AND SIDING

A. Ribbed Roof Panel:

1. Precision roll-formed to provide 36-inch net coverage, 26 gauge minimum, 80,000pounds per square inch minimum yield steel.

2. 1-1/2-inch high major ribs at 12 inch on center with 2 minor ribs symmetrically spacedbetween major ribs.

3. Panel sidelaps shall be formed by lapping major ribs at panel edges.4. Underlapping rib shall have full bearing legs to support sidelap.5. Provide perimeter trim and transition flashing as required to complete roof assembly.6. Provide closures, sealants and fasteners as required for weathertight installation.

B. Ribbed Wall Panel:

1. Precision roll-formed to provide 36-inch net coverage from 26 gauge minimum, 50,000pounds per square inch minimum yield steel.

2. 1-1/2-inch high major ribs 12 inch on center with 2 minor ribs symmetrically spacedbetween major ribs.

3. Form panel sidelaps by lapping major ribs at panel edges.4. Provide corner trim, base trim and transition flashings to complete wall assembly.5. Provide closures and fasteners for weathertight installation.6. Fastener spacing and type to be manufacturer's standard.

C. Panel Finishes:

a. Manufacturer's standard G-90 galvanized coating with full 70% polyvinylidenefluoride (Kynar) finish.

b. Color as selected by Engineer.

D. Fasteners:

1. Panel to Structure:

a. Hilti Kwik-pro HWH with bonded neoprene washer, Or Equal.b. Kwik-Cote treated number 12 (minimum) self drilling carbon steel screws.

2. Panel to Panel: number 14 (minimum) galvanized hex head self drilling screws withneoprene washer.

3. Trim Fasteners: Galvanized and coated number 8 (minimum) self-drilling screw with ¼inch hex washer head.

E. Sealant:

1. Roof Panel Sealant: Non-shrinking, nondrying butyl-based sealant, specificallyformulated for roof application at temperatures from 20°F to 120°F.

F. Accessories:

1. Flashing and Trim: minimum 28 gauge steel. G-90 galvanized coating with full 70%polyvinylidene fluoride (Kynar) finish on both faces. Color as selected by Engineer.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. METAL WALL & ROOF PANELSProject No. 12026 13121-3


3.01 ROOFING AND SIDING PANELS

A. General:

1. Install roof panels to permit drainage to eaves of building, with panel ends square toeave.

2. Install wall panels with vertical edges plumb.3. Arrange and nest sidelap joints away from prevailing winds when possible.4. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure.5. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to grid lines.6. Protect factory finishes from mechanical damage or abrasions.7. Install approved type closures to exclude weather.

a. Flash and seal roof panels at eave and perimeter.b. Flash or seal wall panels at perimeter of openings, under eaves, along lower panel

edges, and elsewhere as shown on Drawings, as applicable.

8. Remove fastener or cutting shavings from roof and wall as erection is completed.

B. Wall Panels:

1. Install wall panels on exterior side of metal framing in locations shown on Drawings.2. Align bottoms of panels to proper coverage and fasten as noted.3. Cut and fasten flashing and trims with approved type fasteners.4. Install fasteners with power tool having adequate torque and proper rpm adjusted to seat

fastener without damage to heads, washers or panels.5. Install panel sidelap away from prevailing wind or view direction when possible,

maintaining proper lap without fastener dimpling or excessive overlap.

3.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Install flashings, trim, closure strips, and other accessories and sheet metal items inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations for positive attachment to building andprovide weathertight mounting.

3.07 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Touch up defects such as mars and abrasions to panels and framing, weld burrs in field.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC BUILDINGSProject No. 12026 13124-1

SECTION 13124FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC BUILDINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Freestanding, shop fabricated and assembled Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) insulatedcomposite buildings.

2. Include fasteners, anchors, doors and frames, and HVAC.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. IBC: International Building Code

C. BOCA: Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc.

D. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials



1. Buildings shall conform to dimensions shown on Drawings.2. Buildings shall be completely waterproof, air and watertight, corrosion and chemical resistant,

lightweight, and environmentally aesthetic.3. Design to sustain superimposed loads for load combinations in accordance with ASCE 7.4. Building shall conform to the requirements of the IBC.

a. Design loads:

(1) Dead load of building. (2) Live (snow) load, 44 pounds per square foot. (3) Wind load, 20 pounds per square foot.

(4) Mechanical equipment.

b. During installation of the composite FRP structure a concentrated load not exceeding250 pounds may be placed on any portion of the roof. The concentrated load shall notbe applied to the roof if other loads are present.

6. Stresses produced by specified load conditions shall be determined consistent with recognizedmethods of analysis.

7. Average R-value of assembled building shall be minimum of 14.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Resin and glass manufacturers material specifications.

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC BUILDINGS Donohue & Associates, Inc.13124-2 Project No. 12026

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans and elevations, fabrication details indicating laminate thicknesses and sectiondepths and widths, location of openings and equipment supports, size and location of anchorbolts, and gasketing details.



A. Buildings provided shall be end product of one manufacturer to achieve standardization forappearance.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Building shall be manufactured and erected by firm with minimum of5 years experience in structures of size and character specified.


A. Store and protect on manufacturer's site, project site and during shipment and installation toprevent warping and fracturing.

B. Shrink-wrap the completed structure with protective plastic for shipment and storage at the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. MEKCO Manufacturing, Inc.

2.02 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Resins:

1. Resins used shall be orthophthalic polyesters.2. Resins shall be suitable for service in temperature range from -30°F to +140°F.

B. Gel Coat: Isophthalic NPG, UV- stable, chalk resistant, highgloss, color as selected by theOwner.

C. Glass Reinforcing: Glass fiber reinforcement shall be Type E glass and shall be treated with afinish compatible to the resin being used. The glass fiber reinforcement shall be of thefollowing compositions:

1. Chopped Roving: Glass fiber roving manufactured by PPG, Owens Corning, or equal andshall be used for the purposes of making random fibers 1 1/4 inch in length.

2. Stitch Mat: Type CM-2415 or CDM-2415 manufactured by BTI, Knytex, or equal.

D. Insulation: 2 -inch thick ridged polyisocyanurate urethane foam system designed forpermanent thermal insulation properties at temperature ranges of -300°F to +300 °F.

E. FRP Composition:

1. Building Panels: Wall and roof panels shall be highgloss molded of the followingcomposition:


a. A combination of two (2), minimum 1/8-inch thick, FRP laminate skins consisting of 18mils minimum isophthalic NPG exterior gel coat, 1 1/4 inch random fiber - choppedroving (minimum glass content to be 35% by weight), and polyester structurallaminating resin sandwiching a solid polyisocyanurate urethane insulation core.

b. Panel Flanges: Minimum 1/4 inch FRP laminate.c. Perimeter Anchoring Flanges: The anchoring flanges shall be minimum 1/4 inch thick

FRP laminates. In addition one layer of stitch mat shall be used. The stitch mat shallbe laminated within the anchoring flange.

2. Physical Properties: Fiberglass reinforced plastic shall have a minimum Barcol Hardnessof 35.

3. Mechanical Properties: Fiberglass reinforced plastic shall have the following properties:

a. For laminates with stitch mat and random chopped fibers warp direction:

Strength Modulus(pounds per square inch) (medium-scale integration)

Minimum tensile properties 61,400 2.98 Minimum compressive properties 44,500 2.28 Minimum flexural properties 73,700 2.35

b. For laminates with random chopped fibers only:

Strength Modulus(pounds per square inch) (medium-scale integration)

Minimum tensile properties 12,500 1.10 Minimum compressive properties 22,700 1.04 Minimum flexural properties 23,800 0.97

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Concrete Anchors: Anchor bolts shall be minimum 3/8-inch diameter stainless steelconforming to requirements of Section 05500, with oversized stainless steel plate washers toprevent localized stressing of the base flange.

B. Metals: Any structural steel used on composite FRP structure shall conform to ASTM A36,

C. Doors:

1. Doors and frames shall be industrial grade aluminum frame construction, insulatedbetween two FRP door panel skins.

2. Hardware shall be heavy-duty stainless steel. Key cylinder for lockset to match Owner’smaster key.

3. Provide 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches triple butt hinges, locking hardware, pneumaticclosure/hold open devices complete weather stripping, threshold and header seals, andrain drip edge.

D. Base Gasket:

1. Soft, closed cell, neoprene foam gasket material.2. Suitable for exposure to exterior.3. Thickness shall be as indicated, but not less than 3/8-inch.

FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC BUILDINGS Donohue & Associates, Inc.13124-4 Project No. 12026

E. HVAC:

1. 1-kW radiant type electric heater with integral thermostat.2. 120V/1-phase.3. 304 stainless steel element.4. King Utility Heater – Model U12100, or equal.

[NTU: SPECIFY LIGHTING, HVAC, ETC. IF IT IS TO BE PROVIDED BY BUILDING MANUFACTURER. SEESECTION 13125 FOR EXAMPLES.]

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Form individual segments on highgloss molds ensuring consistent dimensions of finished parts.Cast each segment in one piece.

B. Laminate shall consist of alternating layers of stitch mat and/or chopped roving impregnated withresin.

C. Form panel flanges and perimeter anchoring flanges to the interior of the building.

D. Insulation shall be bonded to the interior and exterior laminate with resin.

E. Loss of bond between insulation and laminate may cause reduction in panel strength and,therefore, is cause for rejection.

F. The interior finish shall be white corrosion resistant FRP.

G. The exterior finish shall be highgloss molded gel coat FRP. Color as selected by the Owner.

2.05 ASSEMBLY

A. Shop assemble complete building.

B. Flanges between adjacent panels shall be factory bonded together with structural adhesive.

C. Seal exterior edges of adjacent panels with color matched silicon sealant.

D. Fit and bond appurtenances, formed separately, into openings cut in finished panel or integrallymold to panel. Bond attachments with glass fibers and resin from interior of panel.

E. Resin seal cut or drilled edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surface to receive building for acceptable installation conditions.

B. Do not start installation unless acceptable conditions are provided.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals.


B. Install continuous neoprene gasket between perimeter anchoring flange and where panels rest onsupporting structure.

C. Resin seal cut or drilled edges.

D. Repair damaged panels.

E. Minimum spacing and edge distances of concrete anchors shall conform to requirements ofSection 05500.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. FLAT ALUMINUM COVER SYSTEMProject No. 12026 13128-1

SECTION 13128EXTRUDED FLAT ALUMINUM COVER SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Design, fabrication, and installation of a fully engineered substantially airtight flat aluminumcover system as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings.

B. The cover system shall consist of the following principal components: framing, cover panels,structural supports, hatches, miscellaneous pipe risers, and attached hardware.

C. The cover system shall be furnished complete with all accessories, gaskets, mountings,anchor bolts, flanges, rubber couplings, and other appurtenances as specified or as requiredfor installation.

D. The cover manufacturer shall coordinate all openings, risers, flanges, attachments, drillingpatterns and the like with all other equipment vendors and installers so that the cover systemis complete in all respects.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

C. AWS: American Welding Society


A. All covers shall be designed close fitting nominally called substantially airtight with amaximum allowable leakage rate of 0.2 cubic feet per minute per square foot at an appliednegative pressure of 0.2 inches of water column for 5-minute duration and watertight notallowing air or water from below the covers to escape.

B. The flat panel cover shall be a relatively flat top mounted or flush mounted, per plan,structure conforming to the specified dimensions. The flat panel cover shall consist ofindividual, interlocking panels made up of reinforced extruded aluminum planks assemblededge to edge with a tongue and grove detail. Planks shall have extrusions to allow panels tobe interlocked and sealed to each other. The panels shall be supported at the perimeter ofthe tank by the tank wall.

C. All panels shall be designed to be installed in an interlocking manner to prevent slipping ordisengagement under all load and temperature conditions. The entire cover system shall befully gasketed including permanent gaskets mounted in a continuous tract at all panel jointsand a 3/16” minimum thick continuous gasket between panel end extrusion pieces and allconcrete bearing walls. The covers shall provide an effective seal for the design conditionsspecified below.

D. The aluminum cover shall be composed of extruded panels supported by a structuralaluminum or stainless steel beam system. Locate beams adjacent to access hatches,penetrations, or other obstructions.

FLAT ALUMINUM COVER SYSTEM Donohue & Associates, Inc.13128-2 Project No. 12026

E. Cover panel system shall be designed for full dead load plus a uniform live load of 60pounds per square foot full area with a deflection under total load not exceeding L/240 or aconcentrated load of 300 pounds over a one square foot area at any location.

F. All allowable design stresses in structural aluminum shall be in accordance with the“Specifications for Aluminum Structures” for building-type structures by the AluminumAssociation.

G. The weight of each cover panel shall not exceed 150 pounds and with a maximum width ofapproximately 48 inches.

H. The covers panels shall be designed to permit the removal of a single panel, without needingto remove more than two adjacent panels.

I. Where noted, individual panels shall be fabricated to be removable on a repeated basiswithout having to disconnect it from adjacent panels or the structural support frame. Thesepanels shall be designed to permit the removal of a single panel, without the necessity ofremoving any adjacent cover panels. Upon removal of these panels, the area beneath theindividual panel shall be exposed and no substructure shall infringe into the space.

J. Each cover panel shall have an integral handle or at least two lifting handles withoutpenetration of the cover, at both ends suitable for manual installation/removal. Handles shallnot extend above the cover walking surface.

K. Penetrations through the cover system for proposed pipes, gate and gate operators andframes, and hatches, etc. shall be closed off and/or enclosed to provide a relatively airtightclosure.

L. The covers shall have a permanent and integral non-skid surface throughout. The non-skiddecking surface shall be achieved via use of special extrusions incorporating integraltextured ribs to provide an aggressively non-skid surface. The use of paint, abrasive blastingor adhesive tapes is not acceptable.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Complete fabrication and installation drawings in plan, profile, and with sufficient detailsto show the cover systems and all appurtenances including pipe penetrations andframing, anchoring locations and details, lifting handles, hatches, joint interlockingdetails, and coverage of all special areas, etc.

2. Design calculations, signed and sealed by a registered Professional Engineer licensed inthe State of Wisconsin confirming that the proposed cover system will meet the specifieddesign criteria.

3. Complete manufacturer’s literature, illustrations, specifications, performance andtechnical data including dimensions, materials, size, weight, and dynamic forcesimposed on structures. Submittals shall contain complete information for the coversystem and all appurtenances including those items supplied by manufacturers otherthan the cover panel manufacturer.

4. Detailed procedures to be used for installing the tank covers, hatches, pressure, andvacuum relief vents and accessories including each manufacturer’s written instructions.

5. Certificates attesting to the compliance of all materials with the requirements of allspecifications. All deviations from the detailed specifications shall be listed.

B. Samples:


1. Cover Panel: Typical full panel width by 12 inches long, finished as specified.2. Fasteners: Two of each type to be used with a statement and drawing regarding intended

use.3. Closures: One metal closure with gasket seal.4. Gaskets and sealants: one sample of each type of gasket and sealant with a statement

regarding intended use.5. Other finished products as requested by the Engineer.6. Pipe penetration sample.


C. Operations and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Two (2) copies of a preliminary O&M manual shall be included in the shop drawingsubmittal. Without inclusion of these manuals, the submittal will be consideredincomplete and will be returned without review.

2. Final O&M manual shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01785.


A. The cover system vendor shall have experience in the design, fabrication, matching ofcomponents, quality assurance program wherein components and products are regularlytested, shop assembly and final inspection facilities, fabrication, and operation and shall beregularly engaged in manufacturing, installing, and servicing cover systems of the materials,type, and character required by this Specification.

B. The cover panels shall be furnished by a manufacturer with a minimum of five (5) yearsexperience in producing similar cover systems. The Contractor shall submit manufacturer’scredentials with complete descriptions of five (5) similar installations along with any availableservice/maintenance performed by the manufacturer and current name, title, telephonenumber, and address of contact person. As a condition of acceptance of a non-specifiedcover system vendor, a complete witnessed shop test (3 panel minimum) shall be performedto demonstrate that the proposed cover system will comply with the specified design criteria.All costs for witness testing by Engineer shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. The erector shall have been regularly engaged for at least five (5) years in the erection ofaluminum covers for wastewater treatment tanks.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER’S

A. CST Covers – Flat Panel Covers.

B. Hallsten Corporation – Lite-Span Covers.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cover panels shall be 6061-T6 aluminum, mill finish.

B. Covers shall be of extruded construction and air/water sealed by elastomeric joint sealant.

C. Panel edge extrusion, beams and other structural members shall be 6061-T6 aluminumshapes or plates.

FLAT ALUMINUM COVER SYSTEM Donohue & Associates, Inc.13128-4 Project No. 12026

D. Gaskets shall be Neoprene/Santoprene rubber gasket. The use of sponge Neoprene is notacceptable.

E. All fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel complying with ASTM A167.

F. All extrusions and stiffener angles shall be 6061-T6 aluminum.

G. All penetration boots shall be flexible EPDM rubber, weatherproof boot as manufactured byITW Buildex, “Standard Dektite” and “Retrofit Dektite Series 800”, or approved equal.

H. All seals shall be replaceable and mechanical. No caulking of any kind will be allowed.

2.03 ALUMINUM ACCESS HATCHES

A. Provide access hatches in the locations and sizes shown on the Drawings.

B. Design Criteria:

1. Access under the cover shall be gained through integral gear hinged access hatches orapproved equal. The Access Hatch panels shall have the identical properties as the restof the aluminum cover including loads, deflection, and slip resistance specifications. Theaccess-hinged panel width shall be the minimum as shown on the drawings. Hingedpanel components to include hinges, decking, and lifting handles shall be extruded 6061-T6. While in the closed position the hatches will be completely flush therefore posing notripping hazard. In the open position the panel shall lie flat on the cover and will not needa hold open device.

2. Door shall be designed such that any leaf can be opened by one man with a completelysmooth and easy motion throughout the entire arc of operation. Required opening andclosing force shall not exceed 50 pounds.

C. Materials and Fabrication:

1. Provide manufacturer’s standard aluminum fabricated units, modified as necessary, tocomply with the requirements. Where standard units are not available for the sizes andtypes required, custom fabricate units to match manufacturer’s similar units.

2. Fabricate each unit in the shop, complete with anchors, gaskets, hardware, andaccessory items as required.

D. Hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Field verify all dimensions prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication of the coversystems and ancillary components.

B. The quality of workmanship shall be equal to the best general practice in modern structuralfabrication shops. Workmanship, fabrication, and shop connections shall be in accordancewith ANSI/AWS D 1.2 “Structural Welding Code – Aluminum” Latest Edition.

C. All components to be welded shall be free of dirt, grease, and other contaminants, and shallfit up properly for sound welding. Surfaces to be welded may not be cut with oxygen. Sawing,shearing, or machining may be used.


D. All welding shall be with an inert gas shield arc process. Machine settings shall be developedwith test welds of the same material, alloy, and geometry as the work pieces and thesamples shall be tested destructively.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The cover system including covers, hatches, attachments, pipe passes, and appurtenancesshall be field erected under the direct, continuous supervision of the manufacturer and instrict accordance with the manufacturer’s written installation manuals by workmenexperienced and skilled in the erection of aluminum. Each cover panel and ancillary itemsspecified in this Section shall be properly erected and aligned as shown on the Drawings,and as required for a complete, operable, airtight and watertight system, to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.

B. Covers, anchors, and other components of the Work shall be secured in place withprovisions for thermal and structural movement.

C. The installation shall allow easy removal and reinstallation of the covers and othercomponents of the system.

D. Scrap shall be removed and working surfaces shall be kept free from debris on a daily basis.Filings caused by drilling or cutting shall be removed immediately from finished surfaces.

E. All structural members, covers, and other components of the cover system damaged duringfabrication, shipment, handling, or erection shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.

F. Cover panel units shall be plumb, level, and aligned within an installed tolerance of 1/4 inchin 20 feet and within 1/8 inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

G. Gaskets and sealants shall be installed where required for airtight and watertightperformance of the cover panel system.

H. The cover panels shall be anchored to the concrete decks and other components of thecover systems shall be attached to the covers in accordance with the details shown on theDrawings and in accordance with the vendor’s instructions and recommendations. All anchorbolts and fasteners shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. All cover panel bolts shall be coatedwith an anti-seize compound to permit easy removal.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. GEODESIC STRUCTURESProject No. 12026 13129-1

SECTION 13129GEODESIC STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Design, fabrication, and erection of dome structure, fasteners, anchors, tension rings, hatches,and gasketing.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. AWS: American Welding Society

B. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

C. API: Application Programming Interface

D. ASCE: American Society of Civil Engineers



1. Dome(s) shall be spherical structure(s) conforming to Drawing dimensions. Structure shall befully triangulated space truss complete with noncorrugated closure panels.

2. Dome shall be clear-span, designed to be self-supporting from periphery structure withprimary horizontal thrust contained by integral tension ring

3. Allow for thermal expansion and contraction. 4. Surface paneling shall be watertight under design load conditions. 5. Design of welded components shall be in accordance with AWS D1.2. 6. Vertical loads transferred from the dome to support structure shall be in line with support wall.

Transfer of horizontal loads to structure shall be minimized by means of low friction slidesupports. Radial forces applied to structure shall not exceed 10% of the vertical reactions.

7. Design to sustain superimposed loads for load combinations in accordance with ASCE 7.

a. Dome frame design loads:

1) Dead Load of Cover.2) Ground (snow) Load: 50 pounds per square foot.3) Wind Load: 90 miles per hour4) Mechanical equipment.5) Unbalanced loads over 50% of the area.

b. Panel Design Loads:

1) 250 pound load concentrated on 2 separate 1 square foot at any point.2) 60 pound per square foot distributed over total panel area.3) Panel design loads are not to be considered as acting simultaneously.

8. Stresses produced by specified load conditions shall be determined consistent with recognizedmethods of analysis.

GEODESIC STRUCTURES Donohue & Associates, Inc.13129-2 Project No. 12026


1. Design entire structure as watertight system under design load conditions. 2. Design shall prevent water pooling at joints. 3. Attach aluminum closure panels continuously along their edges to structural members by

means of clamping bars which engage panels in interlocking joint. 4. Clamping bar shall secure weather seal along panel edge under all temperature and load

conditions.5. Use of panel attachment fasteners which penetrate both panel and flange of structural

member is not acceptable.6. Provide aluminum counter flashing and rubber membrane seal between dome and top of wall

to provide weather tight closure.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings:

1. Drawings showing dimensions, sizes, thicknesses, gauges, materials, finishes, jointattachment, gasketing, size and location of anchor bolts, design loads, and erectionprocedure.

2. Stamped by Professional Engineer registered in State of Wisconsin.

B. Submit in accordance with Section 01330.

1.05 QUAILTY ASSURANCE

A. Except as modified or supplemented herein, materials and construction methods shall comply withapplicable provisions of -30.

B. Applicator Qualifications:

1. Dome shall be manufactured and erected by firm with minimum of 5 years experience instructures of size and character specified.

C. Structures provided shall be end products of one manufacturer to achieve standardization forappearance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. CST Industries.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Truss Members and Tension Ring: 6061-T6 or 6351-T5 aluminum.

B. Closure Panels: Minimum 16 gauge (0.050 inches), 3003-H16 aluminum sheet.

C. Fasteners: 7075-T73 aluminum clear anodized or Series 300 stainless steel.

D. Sealant: Silicone meeting ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS or meeting F.S.TT-S-00230C, and resistant to ozone and ultra violet light.

F. Concrete Anchors: Stainless steel in accordance with Section 05500.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. GEODESIC STRUCTURESProject No. 12026 13129-3

G. Bearing Pads: Teflon faced neoprene and stainless steel.

H. Hatches: 4’-0”x4’0” or largest size available 6061-T6, 5052-H32, 5086-H34, or 3003-H16aluminum.

I. Panel Clamping Bars: 6061-T6 Aluminum.

J. Weather Seals: Neoprene conforming to ASTM C509 or sealant as specified above.

K. Non-skid tape: 3M Safety-Walk Heavy Duty Tread tape12 inches long by 4 inches wide spaced 12in on center.

L. Safety Cable: 3/8” stainless steel safety cable with safety loops at top and bottom. Cable to besecurely fastened to cover at both ends of non-skid walkway.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate components to dimensions indicated on approved submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surface to receive cover for acceptable installation conditions.

B. Do not start installation unless acceptable conditions are provided.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Erect dome plumb and level and in accordance with approved submittals, and in accordance withmanufacturers recommendations.

B. Field refabrication of structural components or panels will not be accepted. Forcing of the structureto achieve fit-up during construction is expressly forbidden.

C. Tool slightly concave sealant joints after sealant is installed. Care shall be taken to keep sealantconfined to joint area, and any outside of joint shall be removed so that panels will be free frommisplaced sealant.

D. Gasket materials shall be continuous; splices will not be allowed.

E. On completion, test dome for water leaks according to procedure detailed in API-650, Appendix G.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. BIOFILTER SYSTEMProject No. 12026 13200-1

SECTION 13200BIOFILTER SYSTEM

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work required under this specification consists of furnishing all components specified below fora complete two stage biofiltration system for the control of gaseous hydrogen sulfide and otherwaste water treatment odors. System components requires are as follows and whereotherwise specified:

1. Biofilter media.2. Biofilter media retaining system.3. Media irrigation system.4. Biotrickling filter media.5. Biotrickling filter media retaining system.6. Biotrickling filter recirculation system.7. Instrumentation.

B. All other system appurtenances, including but not limited to, concrete structure, blower, blowercontrols and other system controls, ducting and the installation thereof shall be furnished bythe Contractor per the plans and specifications.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data - Submit manufacturer's technical data for Biofilter System including all majorsystem components and as follows:

1. Equipment specifications.2. Capacity ratings including pressure drop at specified air flows.3. Technical data for all supplied equipment.4. Certified documentation of the media supplied.5. Dimensional plan and sectional drawings of concrete required for media support as well as

design loadings.6. Layout of all piping systems provided.7. Detailed drawings of irrigation piping, humidification, and steam injection system

assemblies.8. Component weights.9. Materials of construction.10. Accessories furnished.11. Utility requirements.12. Calculations indicating detention time and irrigation/humidification flow rates required.13. Installation instructions.14. Statement of warranty.15. Reference list of at least five (5) similar installations operating for a minimum of three (3)

years.

B. Shop Drawings - Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, constructiondetails, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details. Shop drawingsshall specifically note all grounding connections and grounding installation requirements.


BIOFILTER SYSTEM Donohue & Associates, Inc.13200-2 Project No. 12026

D. Operation and Maintenance Data:



A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: A single manufacturer who shall have sole-source responsibilityfor the design of the system shall provide all internal components including media for thebiofilter system. The system designer shall have at least five (5) successful years of experiencein the design, construction and operation of equipment of the type specified and a minimum of(10) installations in the United States.


1. All electrical equipment shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the latestedition and revision of applicable codes and regulations, including the following:

a. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)c. National Electrical Code (NEC)

2. All mechanical components shall be designed and constructed in accordance with thelatest edition and revision of applicable codes and regulations, including the following:

a. National Bureau of Standards (NBS).b. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).c. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).d. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).e. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver, store and handle all equipment and materials in a manner to ensure installation in a soundand undamaged condition. Sensitive equipment shall be stored in a manner that will preventexposure to the elements.

B. Biologically active media should preferably be delivered and placed directly into the biofilter toavoid storage and rehandling. If the media must be stored for a period of time, consult themanufacturer for proper storage procedures.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Manufacturer:

1. Biorem Technologies, Inc. (Contact: Richard Hussey, Lay and Associates, 847-392-0990)

B. The system shall be capable of removing hydrogen sulfide and other sewer odor causingcompounds from the air stream by the use of biofiltration. The biofilter system shall consist of abiotrickling filter section followed by a biofiltration media compartment installed in a concretestructure.

C. The system shall be sized to allow for continuous, 24-hour/day, 365 day/year operation.


D. The air to be treated shall be forced by a centrifugal blower into the biotrickling filter sectionwhere the airflow will be washed by a recirculated solution. The air will then pass into thebiofilter chamber. After treatment, the air shall pass through louvers in the cover, to theatmosphere.

E. Design criteria:

1. System Design Capacity: 19,700 SCFM2. H2S Loading: 10

100ppmv (average)ppmv (maximum)

3. Discharge H2S Concentration: 0.1 ppmv4. Raw Air Inlet Relative Humidity: 10 at 55°F % (minimum)5. Design Raw Air Inlet Temperature: 50-105°F oF (range)6. Biotrickling Media Volume 1,680 Cubic feet7. Nominal Media Depth: 6 Feet8. Empty Bed Retention Time: 5 Seconds9. Biofilter Media Volume: 5,647 Cubic feet10. Nominal Media Depth: 5.5 Feet11. Empty Bed Retention Time: 17 Seconds12. Maximum Initial System Pressure Drop: 4 IN. W.C.

F. All components of the biofilter shall be compatible with the conditions and chemicals to which theywill be subjected during normal operation of the system. Compounds with which the materialsmust be compatible include, but are not limited to:

1. Hydrogen Sulfide.2. Other Reduced-sulfur Compounds.

G. The system shall be capable of simultaneously removing hydrogen sulfide and other sewerodors.

H. The equipment manufacturer and the contractor shall be responsible for any license fees thatmay apply to this system.

I. All components specified shall be furnished by the Manufacturer to be installed by the Contractor.

2.02 BIOTRICKLING FITLER INTERNALS

A. All metals exposed to the airstream or liquid streams shall be of 316 stainless steel construction.

B. Quantity of media supports to be provided shall be as required to cover the full area of biofilterinternals as dimensioned on the PLANS.

C. Media support system shall consist of FRP grating reinforced with FRP angle beams runningperpendicular to the direction of airflow.

D. Grating system shall be capable of supporting a minimum loading of 80-lb/Ft2.

E. Media retaining mat shall be polypropylene screen designed to be placed on the FRP grating toprevent the biotrickling filter media from falling through the grating openings.

F. Full system fill of Manufacturer recommended non-metallic packing media.

G. Recirculation Nozzles and Distribution Manifold: Provide a quantity of nozzles required to ensurecomplete coverage and wetting of biotrickling filter media. Nozzles shall be of PVC constructionwith a maximum pressure drop of 25-psi at the design flow rate. Distribution manifold shall be


fabricated of schedule 80 PVC.

2.03 BIOFILTER INTERNALS

A. All metals exposed to the airstream or liquid streams shall be of 316 stainless steel construction.

B. Quantity of media supports to be provided shall be as required to cover the full area of biofilterinternals as dimensioned on the PLANS.

C. Media support grating shall be preformed concrete grating system with coating system resistant tohydrogen sulphide and sulfuric acid.

D. Media retaining mat shall be ¼-in. mesh polypropylene screen designed to be placed on theconcrete media supports to prevent the biofilter media from falling through the slots.

E. Media Irrigation System: Provide a series of surface water sprays capable of saturating the entiresurface of the biofilter media. The system shall be fabricated from schedule 80 PVC pipeanchored to the concrete vessel. The system shall be sloped to drain from the biofilter if taken outof service. This system shall be piped to the exterior of the biofilter. The design and piping of theMedia Irrigation System and the spray nozzles shall be provided by the Biofilter Manufacturer. TheBiofilter Manufacturer shall provide spray nozzles and piping.

2.04 BIOFILTER MEDIA

A. Media shall consist of inorganic, inert hydrophilic cores in uniform shape.

B. Media size shall be ¼-in. to ¾-in.

C. Media shall not shrink or swell with varying moisture contents.

D. Media shall be formulated with nutrients, buffering agents, and adsorbents.

E. Media pressure drop shall not exceed 0.5-in. W.C. per foot of media depth at system start-up.

F. Media shall be warranted for a period of ten years from the date of substantial completion.

2.05 RECIRCULATION SYSTEM:

A. Recirculation Pump: (701-P-0711)

1. Fybroc series 5500, or equal.2. FRP construction, vertical style pump.3. Vertical length as required to match operating liquids levels indicated on Plans.4. 460V/3-phase/60-Hz electrical characteristics.5. Maximum 20-hp.6. Explosion proof motor, meeting the requirement of Section 16150.7. Powered from starter contained within the Biofilter Control Panel.8. Provide with FRP suction strainer and clean water seal/bearing lubrication system.

B. Heat Exchanger

1. Alfa Laval TA Heat Exchanger, or equal.2. Plate and frame type with Tantaline fusion bonded plates.3. Capable of transferring 150,000-btu/Hr from a 175°F 50% proplylene glycol solution to a

15-gpm sidestream flow of the recirculated liquid.


4. Maximum pressure drop of 3.5-psi on the process side and 4-psi on the hot side.

C. All valves and components shown on Drawing 701-M-4, not including piping:

1. Strainers:

a. PVC construction.b. Provide form main recirculated piping and water supply piping.

2. Isolation ball valves:

a. Type V355 in accordance with Section 15280.

3. Isolation and flow adjusting diaphragm valves:

a. Type V875 in accordance with Section 15280.

4. PVC unions.5. Water supply pressure reducing valve:

a. Capable of reducing pressure from 125-psig to system required pressure.

6. Instrumentation identified in Instrumentation Paragraph.

2.06 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Manufacturer shall provide the following instrumentation/control components to be shippedloose and installed by installing Contractor. Components shall be of materials suitable forapplication.

1. Biofilter Control Panel (701-LCP-0711):

a. Provide in accordance with Section 11990.b. Panel shall include the following outputs via Ethernet cable to Plant PLC:

(1) Pump Run.(2) Pump Fail.(3) High-High Liquid Level.(4) Low-Low Liquid Level.(5) System Fail.(6) Call for Heat.

c. Panel shall include the following inputs via Ethernet cable from Plant PLC:

(1) System required.

2. Temperature Indicating Transmitter: (701-TIT-0721):

a. Provide in accordance with Section 13427.b. Materials suitable for pumped fluid.

3. Hot Water Control Valve: (701-TCV-0713)

a. Open-close bronze body control valve, Belimo or equal.

4. Irrigation Control Valve: (701-FCV-0712)


a. Stainless steel solenoid valve.

5. Make-Up Water Valve: (701-FCV-0711)

a. Stainless steel solenoid valve.

6. Sump Level Measurement: (701-LE/LIT-0711)

a. Provide radar level transmitter meeting the requirements of Section 13425.

7. Irrigation Water Flow Totalizer:

a. Insertion type.b. Element material suitable for the pumped liquid.c. Local digital display.d. Provide with tee type insertion component.

8. Flow Indicating Switch:

a. Insertion type.b. Element material suitable for the pumped liquid.c. Local digital display.d. Adjustable switch setting.e. Provide with saddle type insertion component.

9. Flow Indicators:

a. Variable area type.b. Fully non-metallic.

10. Pressure Indicators:

a. Provide in accordance with Section 13426.b. Provide diagram isolation for each indicator.

11. Temperature Indicators:

a. Provide in accordance with Section 13427.b. Thermowell material shall be suitable for pumped liquid.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. All Biofilter components shall be installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s installationinstructions.

B. Contractor responsible for installation of all Manufacturer furnished components and media.

C. All drain piping exiting biofilter shall be provided with a minimum 1’-6” trap to prevent pressurizationof plant sanitary drain system.

3.02 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

A. A representative from the Manufacturer shall be present to inspect the final installation and


supervise the start-up and training of operations personnel. This will consist of a minimum of 4 tripswith 8 eight- (8) hour days allocated including time required for testing described below.

B. The performance of the biofiltration system shall reduce the hydrogen sulfide as set forth in DesignCriteria of this Specification.

C. After initial system start-up, a period of up to four (4) weeks will be allowed for the media toacclimate. At this time a performance test (delineated below) to demonstrate the ability of thesystem to meet the Design Criteria of this Specification shall be performed by the Manufacturer.

D. Performance Test: Completely installed unit shall be run for a minimum of 4-hours at maximumand minimum airflows. All equipment shall be tested to confirm that designed capacities are meet. Airside differential pressure across system shall be measured and confirmed to be less thanspecified maximum.

E. Odor Testing: OWNER reserves the right to test odor removal efficiency at anytime over thewarranty period of the equipment. Removal efficiency shall be based on removal of hydrogensulfide odors in comparison to specified removal efficiency. Costs to be paid by the Owner. Iftesting indicates failure of the equipment to meet specified design parameters, all requiredsubsequent testing to prove compliance shall be paid by Manufacturer.

F. Instructional Services. Prior to systems demonstration (Section 01820) and after PLC/HMIprogramming and integration is complete, provide one 8 hour day for manufacturer’s instructionalservices. Provide training outline and resume to be submitted to ENGINEER at least 30 days priorto training for approval by OWNER and ENGINEER.

3.03 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall warrantee the whole system, both in material and workmanship for a period ofone year from the day of final acceptance. This period shall not extend beyond 18 months afterdelivery of equipment to job site. The Contractor shall warrantee the media and media supportsystem for 10 years from the day of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. FUEL TANKSProject No. 12026 13205-1

SECTION 13205FUEL TANKS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Primary fuel tank providing fuel for emergency generators in event of normal sourceelectrical service failure (436-FT-1).

2. Tank gauging and leak detection system.3. Fuel Tank Control Panel (436-LCP-1)

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, capacity ratings, connection sizes,weights, dimensions, materials, details of construction and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Complete description and summary of fuel tank components and accessories includingdimensions and material specifications.

2. Operating characteristics.3. Installation drawings showing equipment sizing and layout.4. Detailed drawing of proposed equipment foundation based on certified prints.5. Wiring Diagrams: Manufacturer's wiring diagrams for electronic level indication and leak

detection, interconnection wiring diagrams and control schematics. Identify locations ofsensors, readout panels and power supply wiring. Differentiate between factory-installedwiring and field installed wiring.

6. Product brochures for control panel components.7. Submit scaled layout drawing showing tank location, pipe, pipe fittings and equipment.

Provide connection details, pipe slopes, wall and floor penetrations and interface with fuel-burning equipment.

C. Miscellaneous:

1. Describe reaction to each alarm condition.2. Extended warranty.


E. Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Data:

1. Maintenance data and parts list for fuel tank, control, and accessory. Includetroubleshooting maintenance guide.



A. Qualifications: System Supplier shall have a minimum of 5-years of experience packagingsimilar systems. Manufacturers of tank and tank monitoring systems shall have a minimum of5-year of experience in the fabrication of the specified components.

FUEL TANKS Donohue & Associates, Inc.13205-2 Project No. 12026


1. NFPA Compliance - Tank construction and installation shall comply with NFPA No. 30.2. EPA Compliance: EPA regulations associated with 40 CFR112 - Oil Pollution Control Act.3. AWS Standard: Welding for interior steel tank shall be in accordance with AWS Standard

for continuous welds.4. State and Local Codes.


A. Handle tanks to prevent damage, breaking, cracking and scoring of tanks and protectivecoatings. Do not install damaged tanks; replace with new.

B. Store tanks and tank accessories in safe place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, constructiondebris and physical damage to tanks and protective coatings.

C. Rig tanks to final location with minimum handling.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide 30-year manufacturer's warranty against defect or leakage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM SUPPLIER

A. Suppliers:

1. Core Engineered Solutions, Inc.2. Earthsafe.

B. System Supplier shall be responsible for providing all components identified in thisSpecification Section and as required for installation to meet all local, state, and federal codes.

C. System Supplier shall coordinate all Manufacturer required services and training as defined inthis section.

2.02 TANKS

A. Manufacturer:

1. ConVault.2. Armor Cast.

B. Construction:

1. General:

a. Tanks shall be concrete encased steel tank with steel tank and concrete shell separatedby insulation and high performance membrane. The integral secondary containmentspace shall provide at minimum 100% containment of the primary storage tank. Theinterstitial space shall allow liquid to migrate through it to a monitoring point. A leakdetection access tube shall be located in the interstitial space between the inner tank andthe secondary barrier.

2. Steel Primary Tank:

a. Listed and tested to UL 142 and meeting the requirements of NFPA 30.


b. Rectangular shape.c. Minimum 10-gauge carbon steel construction.d. When tank indicated to be of multi-compartment tank configuration, each interior steel

tank shall be individually fabricated. Use of same component for shared/common wall willnot be accepted.

e. Welds shall be continuous on all sides, conforming to the American Welding SocietyStandard for continuous welds.

3. Concrete Shell:

a. Minimum 6 inch thick with steel reinforcement and integral fiber mesh.b. 2 hour fire rating in accordance with UL 1709.c. Concrete encasement shall be minimum 6-in thick with a minimum design strength of

4000-psi.d. Concrete enclosure shall encase and protect both the primary steel tank and the

secondary containment.e. Concrete design shall include the following for long-term durability:

1) Less than 3% air entrainment.2) Water-reducing admixture.3) Steel reinforcing bars.

f. Concrete placement shall be monolithic (without seams) and placement methods shallensure the absence of voids on all sides and beneath the steel tank. An exterior steeljacket covering the concrete vault will NOT be permitted.

g. The steel tank shall be prestressed at factory by pressurizing the primary steel tank to 5-psi during concrete encasement to allow for expansion and contraction of the primarysteel tank.

h. Vault enclosure shall have concrete support legs of unitized monolithic constructionraising the concrete enclosure a minimum of 3-in above the ground to meet visualinspection requirements.

i. A mid-level seam or other joint construction which could compromise the liquid tightness(secondary containment) and fire protection capability of the vault is not permitted.

4. Fire Resistance:

a. Tank system shall be designed and tested to provide 2 hour fire protection for the primarytank as per UL 2085 2-hour furnace fire test and 2 hour simulated pool fire test.

b. No steel members shall penetrate the walls or floor of the concrete encasement to assureisolation from pool fire heat.

5. Thermal and Corrosion Protection:

a. Tank construction shall include thermal insulation equivalent to 0.25 inches of polystyreneto protect against temperature extremes, and to protect against corrosion by isolating thesteel tank from the concrete or other corrosive material.

b. All steel exterior to the concrete encasement shall be anti-oxidant powder coated to inhibitcorrosion and meet ASTM B117. 5.

6. Secondary Containment with Leak Monitoring:

a. Tank system shall include an impervious barrier of 30 mil high-density polyethylene tocontain leaks from the primary tank.

b. A monitoring tube shall be located between the inner tank and secondary barrier.


7. Spill/Overfill Containment:

a. Tank system shall include a UL listed 7-gallon spill/overfill container manufactured as anintegral part of the primary tank, surrounding the fill pipe, and protected by 2 hour firerating of the enclosure.

b. Spill/overfill container shall include a stick port and normally closed valve to releasespilled product into the main tank.

c. Exterior steel shall be anti-oxidant powder coated to inhibit rust.

8. Overfill Protection:

a. Overfill protection shall be provided by the following methods:

1) Direct reading level gauge in aluminum housing, visible from fill pipe access. Gaugeshall be tank mounted in such a fashion to allow level to be read from the ground.

2) Valve rated for pressurized delivery located within fill pipe to close automatically at95% full level.

9. Exterior Finish:

a. Tank system shall be a low maintenance exposed aggregate or architectural (STO,Permacrete, Thorocoat) exterior concrete finish. Final finish to be selected by Owner.

b. Fiber clad steel, or painted steel vault tanks are not acceptable.

10. Signage:

a. Tanks shall be marked on all sides as per state and local codes.b. Signs shall be recessed in concrete exterior to insure against damage during off-loading,

refilling or general functions.

11. Venting:

a. Tank system shall include a 2” atmospheric vent and emergency venting in accordancewith NFPA 30.

C. Accessories:

1. Standard Vent: Provide 2" vent pipe of length required to install termination cap a minimum of12’-0” above finished grade. Provide aluminum updraft vent cap with wire screen.

2. Emergency Vent: Provide aluminum emergency vent cap sized to open at 1/2 oz. Pressure toprovide the required capacity.

3. Access Steps: Provide manufacturer's standard access steps for the tank size provided. Stepsshall conform to OSHA requirements. Provide when indicated in Tank Design Parameters.

D. Provide tanks with the following openings:

1. 4-in. for level gauge.2. 2-in. for fuel suction.3. 2-in. for main vent.4. Emergency vent sized as required for fuel storage volume.5. 4-in. for spare access.6. 2-in. for leak detection tube.7. 2-in for high level alarm.8. 4-in. for fill.9. Communication port.


E. Tank Design Parameters:

1. 436-FT-1:

a. Nominal Capacity: 2,000 gallonsb. Dimensions: 11’-0”x8’-0”x5’-6” tallc. Monitoring Panel: 436-LCP-1d. Fuel: Diesel fuel oil grade DF-2, Winter Blende. Provide with access steps.f. Provide anti siphon valve on fuel suction connection.

2.03 TANK MONITORING PANELS

A. Manufacturer:

1. OMNTEC: OEL8000II2. Veeder-Root: Guardian.3. Pneumercator: E700-1.4. Or Equal.

B. Panel Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel 316.C. Quality Assurance:

1. Tank Monitoring Systems include sensors, probes, leak detectors and all accessories shallmeet the requirements of EPA Regulations 40 CFR Sub Part D. Certification shall be by anIndependent Laboratory using EPA Protocol (#EPA/530/UST-90/006)

D. Controller:

1. 20 oil tight tactile switches for alphanumeric programming.2. 4x40 LCD LED backlit display.3. Three L.E.D. indicators for alarm, fault and OK status.4. Battery back-up for programming memory.5. Capability to communicate with remote computers.6. UL listed.7. Shall be installed per UL and NEC code for intrinsic safety.8. Intrinsically safe inputs.9. Equipped with a locking mechanism.10. Shall have conduit knockouts.11. Wall mountable.12. All internal power will be supplied by off board switching regulated power supply.13. Site programmable for specific tank specifications.14. Offer numeric security code.15. Capable of providing site location information.16. Product Inventory:

a. The tank monitoring system shall have the capability of reporting all deliveries, a minimumof three shift reports per day, and real time tank volume; tank volume; tank temperatureand product height in inches.

b. Capable of automatically producing inventory reports.c. Capable of storing 32 deliveries.

17. Inventory Management Reports:


a. The system shall monitor inventory in either U.S. or Metric units in up to eight tanks andproduce a combination of automatic and manual reports for each tank. The reportsshould include the following information:

1) Shift reports2) Leak tests (Volumetric)3) Alarm report & history4) High-Low level status5) Drop reports6) Alarm status7) System configuration8) Water level / volume9) Product volume / height10) Environmental compliance reports

b. All inventory reports will be generated automatically or on demand.c. The system will be capable of generating automatic drop reports.d. The system will be capable of displaying all information via LCD display.

18. Interstitial Leak Detection:

a. The system will be capable of detecting a breach in the inner or outer wall by performingcontinuous leak sensing in the dry interstitial space.

b. Capable of distinguishing between water or hydrocarbons and annunciating the specificalarm.

c. Leak sensor shall be designed for ease of installation or removal.d. System shall detect probe or leak sensor failure.e. Leak sensor shall be installed without leader cable.

19. Sump Monitoring:

a. The system shall perform automatic, continuous leak detection in all sumps.b. Capable of distinguishing between water or hydrocarbons and annunciating the specific

alarm.c. All sensors shall be self-diagnostic.

20. Alarms:

a. Tank monitoring system shall be capable of audible and visual indication on all alarms.b. Alarms:

1) High product2) Caution (visual only)3) Low product4) High water5) Any leak alarm

c. Capable of remotely communicating all alarm conditions.d. Capable of silencing all audible alarms.e. All visual alarm conditions must remain until alarm condition is removed.f. Capable of accepting up to eight low voltage audio/visual high level remote annunciators

with acknowledge switches.g. Capable of storing a minimum of 148 alarm conditions.

21. Reports:


a. The system shall be able to generate reports through the communication interface in adisplay. All reports may be retrieved locally.

b. Capable of running all reports native to the ATG it is monitoring, and generate them ondemand.

22. Test Features:

a. The system will have a test button capable of testing:

1) RAM2) PROM3) Leak sensors4) Gauging probes5) Audible / visual6) LCD display7) Internal electronic diagnostics8) Test feature shall allow for sensor remote testing as per Third Party Certification.

E. Leak Sensors:

1. Sensors must utilize electro-optic technology with four wire buss networking capability.2. Sensors will be wired with 4 conductor 22AWG shielded cable with drain(OMNTEC EC-4) or

equivalent.3. The system shall be capable of monitoring up to 44 leak sensors.4. Sensors shall be able to be tested without removal from location.5. Discriminating Sump Sensor:

a. Shall utilize electro-optic technology to detect the presence of liquid and use a conductiveelectrode to determine whether the liquid is water or hydrocarbon, and provide an alarm tonotify the user of the situation.

b. Sensor shall not be sacrificial.c. Shall provide an indication of fluid when liquid reaches approximately 0.5-in in height.d. Supplied with a twelve-foot cable to connect the sensors to field wiring in the sensor

junction box.e. Supplied with watertight installation splice kit.

6. Discriminating Interstitial Sensor:

a. Designed to fit in a 2” droptube.b. Equipped with 20ft of cable.c. The sensor shall utilize electro-optic technology to detect the presence of liquid and use a

conductive electrode to determine whether the liquid is water or hydrocarbon, and shallprovide an alarm to notify the end user.

d. Supplied with cord grip and water tight installation splice kit.

F. Gauging Probes:

1. Probe shall not be placed in excess of 1000-ft from controller2. Capable of performing a 0.1-gph and 0.2-gph tightness test per EPA protocol.3. Capable of measuring fuel tank level to the nearest 0.125-in.4. Must be third party certified.5. Suitable for above ground storage tank installations.6. Capable of being installed in 2”, 3” or 4” openings and must be field adjustable.7. Minimum of six temperature-sensing devices.8. Constructed of 316 grade stainless steel all welded construction.


9. Supplied with cathodic boot, minimum of six inches in length.10. The probe must have striker plate protective end cap.

G. Remote Annunciators:

1. NEMA 4X enclosure.2. UL listed.3. Require no external power. All power shall be from associated controller.4. Audible and visual high tank level alarm indication. Audible alarm shall be 95-dB pulsing horn.

Visual alarm shall be red pilot light. Units serving Multi-compartment tanks shall have visualindication for each interior tank.

H. Tank Monitoring Design Parameters:

1. 436-LCP-1:

a. Tank served: 436-FT-1.b. Monitor tank level, interstitial space leak detection, sump leak detection.c. Provide remote annunciator.d. 120 vac power supply.e. Capable of outputting the following signals to the Plant PLC via dry contact closures:

1) Alarm condition for high fuel level.2) Alarm condition for low fuel level.3) Alarm condition for tank leak.4) Alarm condition for pipe leak (via sump sensor).

f. Capable of outputting the following signals as a 4-20mA signal to the Plant PLC:

1) Tank volume in gallons.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Tank Installation:

1. Provide concrete foundation pad meeting the requirements of the Drawings andManufacturers recommendations.

2. Obtain state and local permits as required before starting installation.3. Install tank system and accessories in accordance with manufacturers written installation

instructions and all applicable state, local, fire and environmental codes.4. Tank shall be clearly marked on all sides with warning signs: "FLAMMABLE" or

"COMBUSTIBLE", "NO SMOKING", tank volume, product identification and other signs asrequired by applicable codes.

5. Electrical work shall be in accordance with applicable codes and shall be rated for hazardousarea as required. Electric feed for dispensing pumps shall include an emergency shutoffswitch located per code requirements. Tanks shall be electrically grounded in accordance withNFPA 78.

B. Tank Level and Monitoring System Installation:

1. Install monitoring panel in locations indicated on the Drawings.2. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions, NFPA 30A and

Division 16.3. Install remote annunciator (overfill alarm and acknowledgement switch) in a location that is

clearly visible from the filling position. Unit shall be stanchion mounted at a height of 4’-6”


above finished grade. Stanchion shall be supported by a minimum 24-in diameter, 4’-0” deepconcrete base.

C. Initial Fill:

1. System Supplier shall arrange for and supply initial full filling of each tank. Timing of initial fillshall be coordinated with Owner and Contractor.


A. CONTRACTOR shall visually inspect tank for cracks and signs of leakage after installation. Ifcracks or leaks are detected, replace tank with new tank.

B. The system installation shall be inspected and approved by the System Supplier or its certifiedcontractor. The System Supplier shall submit a comprehensive checklist of quality and safety itemscritical to the system and verify that the installation has been in accordance with these standardsand applicable fire and environmental codes.

C. System Supplier Field Services:

1. Representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at the job site or classroomdesignated by Owner a minimum of three separate occasions for the minimum workdaysspecified below, travel time excluded.

a. 1 workdays for Installation Servicesb. 1 workdays for Instructional Servicesc. 1 workday for Post-Startup Services

2. After installation is complete, test and demonstrate operation of equipment in accordance withSection 01820. In addition to services specified above, provide Supplier’s or Manufacturer’sfield services as required to successfully complete systems demonstrations in accordance withSection 01820.


3.03 DEMONSTRATION TEST

A. Demonstrate operation of leak monitoring system for fuel tanks and piping sump.

B. Demonstrate operation of fuel monitoring system upon completion of leak inspection. Includecopies of field wired diagrams with O&M manuals.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKSProject No. 12026 13215-1

SECTION 13215CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Sodium Hypochlorite Tank Nos. 1, 2, and 3 (455-T-1901, -1902, and -1903).2. Flex Connectors.3. Chemical Storage Tank pads.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI: American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI B16.5: Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

B. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials:

1. ASTM D638: Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.2. ASTM D746: Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact.3. ASTM D790: Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and

Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.4. ASTM D883: Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Plastics.5. ASTM D1505: Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique6. ASTM D1525: Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics.7. ASTM D1693: ESCR Spec. Thickness 0.125” F50 – 10% lgepal.8. ASTM D1998: Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tank: Section 11.3:

Low Temperature Impact Test and Section 11.4: Oxylene-Insoluble Fraction(Gel Test)

C. References above shall be most recent revision in effect.


A. Provide storage tanks constructed of materials suitable for chemical contained.

B. Tanks shall have sufficient sidewall and hoop strength to minimize tank deflections between fulland empty conditions.

C. Tanks shall have one integrally molded full bottom drain outlet.

D. All tank fittings not integrally molded shall be leak tight.

E. Hardware used for flanged bulkhead fittings shall be suitable for chemical contained.

F. Provide chemical tank equipment pad construction shall be as recommended by manufacturer inaddition to accommodating isolation pinch valve, valve supports and sloped tank pad for IMFO.

G. Provide flex connectors suitable for connection to chemical storage tank, compatible with mediastored within tank, with vertical and horizontal movement characteristics per chemical tankmanufacturer’s recommendations

CHEMICAL STORAGE TANKS Donohue & Associates, Inc.13215-2 Project No. 12026

H. Flanges shall be protected from damage. All openings shall be covered to prevent entrance of dirtand debris.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for chemical storage equipment specified.2. Wall thickness calculations per ASTM D1998-97 using 600 pounds per square inch design

hoop stress at 100 degrees Fahrenheit (F). Provide representative sample of tank wall.3. Weight of Tanks.4. Resin used and chemical resistance chart verifying materials of construction are suitable for

intended service.5. Fitting hardware and gasket material suitable for stored chemical resistance.6. Proposed coating systems and/or liners and compatibility with associated chemical stored.7. Statement that fabrication is in accordance with these Specifications.8. Statement that materials and resin used are suitable for chemicals being stored in tank.9. Certification of Compliance from tank manufacturer stating:

a. All fittings have been installed by tank manufacturer.b. Hydrostatic tests have been performed by manufacturer and all fittings were installed prior

to tests.

10. Recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation, and start-up.11. Detailed layout and other drawings required for proper installation.12. Procedures for proper installation.13. Quantity and type of spare parts being supplied. Spare parts shall be those needed to maintain

the equipment in service for a period of 2 years. Include a list of special tools required forchecking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance.

14. Location of parts-supply facilities, service crews, and repair facilities.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for chemicalstorage equipment.


3. Tank capacity and dimensions as specified in Table(s).4. Fitting and attachment locations as specified in Table(s) and shown on Drawings.5. Tank Pad dimensions accommodating isolation pinch valve support.

D. Test Results:

1. Certified reports of manufacturers' factory production and final tests indicating compliance ofchemical storage equipment with referenced standards.






2. Manufacturer's written instructions for periodic tests of chemical storage equipment in service.3. Submit in accordance with Section 01785.



B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chemical storage equipment system components from singlemanufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built fromcomponents that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit asevidenced by records of prototype testing.

1.06 SHOP TESTING

A. Tank manufacturer shall have quality control procedures adequate to ensure that all fabricationscomply with specifications herein.

B. Quality control shall include written record of process and final inspections for each tank availableupon request by Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall be contingent on satisfactoryinspection upon arrival, the delivery, and installation at project site.

C. Tank manufacturer shall perform tests described below prior to shipping. Test samples shall betaken from cut out areas where fittings are inserted in each tank.

1. Impact Test: ASTM 1998-Section 11.3 shall be used. Sample shall not shatter at 120 footpounds with sample at minus 20 degrees F for a ½ inch wall thickness.

2. Degree of Crosslinking Test: ASTM 1998-Section 11.4 shall be used. Minimum 70 percentGel shall be obtained.

3. Hydrostatic Test: Each tank shall be filled with water and checked for leaks no less than onehour after filling.

4. Wall Thickness: Each tank shall have an actual wall thickness measurement taken at every 90degrees, at each one foot elevation, up to three feet from bottom of tank.

D. Engineer or Owner shall have option of witnessing these factory tests.


A. Deliver chemical storage equipment and system components to their final locations in protectivewrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damagefrom construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from suchhazards.

B. Store chemical storage equipment in clean, dry location.


D. Carefully follow Manufacturer’s instructions for moving tanks into final position. Remove all rocksand debris from path of travel and final tank resting place.

E. Tanks damaged beyond repair shall be replaced with undamaged tanks.


F. Store tanks in manner to minimize exposure to ultraviolet radiation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Poly Processing Co.

B. Snyder Industries

C. Assmann Corporation of America

2.02 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Design Conditions:

1. Tank shall be suitable for indoor storage of the following liquid chemicals:

Item Normal ConcentrationPercent by Weight

NominalSpecific Gravity

Sodium Hypochlorite 12.5 1.175

2. Tank(s) shall conform to requirements listed in Table(s) in Section 13215.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Plastic:

1. Tanks shall be molded from high density crosslinked polyethylene.2. Resin shall be Paxon 7000 series as manufactured by Paxon, Inc. or of resins of equal

physical and chemical properties.

B. Fillers and Pigments:

1. Plastics shall not contain any fillers.2. All plastics shall contain minimum 0.25 percent UV stabilizer and maximum 0.60 percent.

C. Provide flange and gasket material suitable for contained chemical:

1. Provide Titanimum Bolts and Viton Gaskets for Sodium Hypochlorite applications.2. Provide polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) chemically resistant bolts (Ryton by PolyProcessing) and

Viton Gaskets. Bolts shall have maximum torque value of 25 foot-pounds. without breaking.Dimension shall be suitable for bolt pattern application.

3. Fittings shall be PVC.4. Bolts shall be stainless steel, hastelloy, or titanium.5. Gaskets shall be EPDM or viton

2.04 HIGH DENSITY CROSSLINKED POLYETHYLENE TANKS

A. Tanks shall be designed as specified in Table(s).

B. Design, manufacturing and testing requirements shall be in accordance with ASTM D1998.

C. High density crosslinked polyethylene tanks shall be constructed by rotational molding process.


D. Tanks shall be capable of storing specified chemicals at temperatures up to 130 degrees F.

E. Nominal properties for molded parts shall be as follows:

Property ASTMSpecification Value Units

Density (Resin) D1505 0.940 – 0.947 g / ccSpecific Gravity 1.9Tensile(Yield Stress 2 in / minute)

D638 Type IVSpec 2,830 psi

Elongation at Break (2 in / minute) D638 700 %ESCR(10% lgepal, Condition A; 0.125 inchThickness, F50)

D1693>1,000 hours

Vicat Softening Temperature D1525 250 degrees FFlexural Modulus D790 100,000 – 110,000 psiBrittleness Temperature D746 -130 degrees Fg = grampsi = pounds per square inch% = percentF = Fahrenheit

F. Tanks shall be designed with a hoop stress of no greater than 600 pounds per square inch at 100degrees F, with a safety factor of no less than 2.

G. Top head shall be integrally molded with cylinder shell.

H. Minimum top head thickness shall be equal to top of straight wall.

I. Provide integrally molded lifting lugs at top head.

J. Provide minimum 1,300 square inch flat area on top head for fitting locations.

K. Finished tank wall shall be free of visual defects such as foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pinholes,pimples, crazing, cracking and de-lamination.

L. All cut edges for openings shall be trimmed smooth.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide flange and gasket material suitable for contained chemical.

1. Provide polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) chemically resistant bolts (Ryton by PolyProcessing) andViton Gaskets. Bolts shall have maximum torque value of 25 foot-pounds without breaking.Dimension shall be suitable for bolt pattern application.

B. Manways:

1. Provide 24 inch clear opening manways.2. Manway cover shall be bolt on or screw on lid type manufactured out of crosslink

polyethylene.3. Manway bolts shall be polyethylene, nylon or a compatible plastic material.


C. Integrally Molded Flanged Outlets (PolyProcessing - IMFO) (Snyder – SUMO)

1. IMFO shall be located at bottom of sidewall and allow tank to be fully drained.2. IMFO shall be integrally molded into tank during rotational molding process.3. Shall be seamless, flanged and manufactured from same material as tank. Inserts are not

acceptable.4. Provide PVC companion flange assembly with split backing ring, bolts, and gasket suitable for

contained chemical.5. Provide polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) chemically resistant bolts (Ryton by PolyProcessing) and

Viton Gaskets. Bolts shall have maximum torque value of 25 foot-pounds without breaking.Dimension shall be suitable for bolt pattern application.

6. Provide Titanium bolts and Viton Gaskets for Sodium Hypochlorite.

D. Chemical Storage Tank Pads:

1. Provide chemical tank pad for each tank with IMFO(s).2. Pad shall be constructed to accommodate IMFO.3. Materials of construction per chemical tank manufacturer’s recommendations suitable for

media stored within tank and strength to support tank.

E. Side Wall Fittings

1. All fittings below liquid level shall be two-flange style, PVC bulk head style.2. Provide flange and gasket material suitable for contained chemical.

a. Provide polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) chemically resistant bolts (Ryton by PolyProcessing)and Viton Gaskets. Bolts shall have maximum torque value of 25 foot-pounds withoutbreaking. Dimension shall be suitable for bolt pattern application.

3. Threaded Bulkhead:

a. Suitable for below liquid level installation up to 2 inches.b. Shall be constructed of PVC or materials applicable for media stored in tank.c. Gaskets shall be minimum ¼ inch thick and suitable for media stored in tank.d. Size, number and location as specified in tables below and/or shown on Drawings.

4. Bolted Double 150 Pound Flanges:

a. Required for below liquid level installation of sizes larger than 2 inches.b. ANSI/ASME B16.5, 150 pound flanges shall be suitable for contact with media stored in

tank.c. Gasket shall be minimum ¼ inch thick and suitable for media stored in tank.d. Minimum four full threaded bolts per installation.e. Bolts and gaskets shall be suitable for contact with media stored in tank.f. Provide polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) chemically resistant bolts (Ryton by PolyProcessing)

and Viton Gaskets. Bolts shall have maximum torque value of 25 foot-pounds withoutbreaking. Dimension shall be suitable for bolt pattern application.

g. Provide a gasket for each bolt to provide a sealing surface against inner flange.h. Size, number and locations as specified in Table(s) below and/or shown on Drawings.

5. Dome Fittings:

a. All dome fittings 1 inch and smaller shall be bulkhead universal ball style.b. The gasket material shall be suitable for media stored in vessel.


c. All dome fittings larger than 1 inch shall be two-flange universal ball dome style. Flangeattached to the tank wall shall be PVC 150 pound ANSI.

d. Provide polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) chemically resistant bolts (Ryton by PolyProcessing)and Viton Gaskets. Bolts shall have maximum torque value of 25 foot-pounds withoutbreaking. Dimension shall be suitable for bolt pattern application.

e. Each bolt shall have a gasket on the inside of the tank, and each flange shall have agasket on the outside of the tank. Gaskets shall be suitable for media stored insidevessel.

f. Sized as specified in Table(s) below.

F. Fill Pipe:

1. Provide fill piping, diameter as specified in Table(s) below, to extend down into tank within 1foot of tank bottom.

2. Pipe shall be supported maximum 5 foot intervals with support structures.

G. Flex Connectors:

1. Provide Ultra High Molecular Weight (UHMWPE) hose with two King nipples (barbed) andmechanically attached with double stainless steel bands securing hose to nipples.

2. Flex connector size per tank IMFO.3. Provide hose-type flex connectors for tank fittings/nozzle openings connecting to chemical

feed equipment. Size according to fitting/nozzle size.4. Flanged connections.5. Connector shall be suitable for conveyance of stored media. Material shall be abrasion

resistant, yet flexible enough to accommodate tank manufacturer’s horizontal and verticalmoment requirements.

6. Fasteners shall be suitable for media stored in tank.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical storage equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.








3.03 DEMONSTRATION

A. Testing:

1. After completion of field installation, fill tanks with water and allow to stand full for 48 hours.During testing, nozzles may be plugged by installation of temporary blind flanges on outside oftank.

2. Leaks or indications of leaks in tank or accessory connections may be repaired wherepermitted by Engineer, in manner recommended by manufacturer. Evidence of leakage canbe cause for rejecting tank.

3. Repeat test after leaks repaired.

TABLE 1SECTION 13215

TagNumber

TankDesignation

Nominal Capacity(Gallons) Maximum Diameter Maximum Overall

Height

455-T-1901455-T-1902455-T-1903

SHC Tanks 3,000 7 feet 6 inches 12 feet

TABLE 2SECTION 13215

Fitting / NozzleSize

Fitting / NozzleMaterial ofConstruction

Connection Quantity Location on Tank

3-inch Stainless Steel LE/LIT One Top2-inch PVC Discharge Flange One Bottom2-inch PVC Fill Flange One Top6-inch PVC Vent Flange One Top

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. CHEMICAL CONTAINMENT PALLETSProject No. 12026 13216-1

SECTION 13216CHEMICAL CONTAINMENT PALLETS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Chemical containment pallets.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for chemical containment pallets specified.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for chemicalcontainment pallets.









1. 40 CFR 264.175: Hazardous waste containment systems must be free of structural cracks orgaps, be designed to keep spilled liquids from remining in contact with the container, preventrun-on and “have sufficient capacity to contain 10% of the volume of the containers, or thevolume of the largest container, whichever is greater.”

2. 40 CFR 122.26: When applying for a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES) permit, facilities must have a plan in place that describes actions, procedures,control techniques, management practices and equipment available to prevednt illigaldischarge of pollutants into waterways.

CHEMICAL CONTAINMENT PALLETS Donohue & Associates, Inc.13216-2 Project No. 12026

3. 40 CFR 112.7: SPCC planning requirements state that facilities subject to these regulationsmust have written plans in place discussing the products, countermeasures and proceduresthat are in place, or will be taken by the facility to prevent discharge of oil into waters of theUnited States.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chemical containment pallets from single manufacturer withresponsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built from components thathave proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit as evidenced byrecords of prototype testing.


A. Deliver chemical containment pallets to their final locations in protective wrappings, containers,and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from constructionoperations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B. Store chemical containment pallets in clean, dry location.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Denios

2.02 CONTAINMENT PALLETS

A. Modular design.

B. Provide containment for chemical totes as shown on Drawings.

C. Uniformly distribute load capacity up to 9,000 pounds.

D. Each section shall contain 75 gallons.

E. Flow-through connectsions allow components to share sump capacity.

F. Construct of polyethylene materials.

G. Provide each section with 4-way forklift pockets.

H. Non-slip grates lift out for sump access.

I. Low profile.

J. Provide expansion tank with hatch lid for additional containment.

K. Provide tool kit for assembling components,


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical containment pallets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. TOTE STORAGE RACKSProject No. 12026 13217-1

SECTION 13217TOTE STORAGE RACKS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Storage rack with containment area for chemical totes.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. General:


B. Product Data:

1. Catalog cuts and product specifications for tote storage rack(s) specified.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Installation and assembly drawings and specifically prepared technical data for tote storageracks.


E. Regulatory Requirements:

1. 40 CFR 264.175 Hazardous waste containment systems must be free of structuralcracks or gaps, be designed to keep spilled liquids from remaining incontact with container, prevent run-on and “have sufficient capacityto contain 10% of the volume of the containers, or volume of thelargest container, whichever is greater.”

2. 40 CFR 122.26 When applying for a National Pollutant Discharge EliminationSystem (NPDES) permit, facilities must have a plan in place thatdescribes actions, procedures, control techniques, managementpractices and equipment available to prevent illegal discharge ofpollutants into waterways.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Denios

2.02 TOTE STORAGE RACK

A. General:

1. Powder-coated steel racking.2. Two-level storage until for up to 4 chemical totes.3. 10,000 pound load capacity

TOTE STORAGE RACKS Donohue & Associates, Inc.13217-2 Project No. 12026

B. Sump:

1. Sump capacity shall be 385 gallons.2. Provide removable grating over sump area.

C. Shelf:

1. Provide removable splash guards on back and side of shelving.2. Provide pallet stops for forklift guidance.3. One adjustable, one non-adjustable shelf.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install tote storage rack(s) in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.



1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be present atjobsite for man-days indicated, travel time excluded, for assistance during plant construction.Include:

a. 1/2 man-day for Installation Services.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLProject No. 12026 13400-1

SECTION 13400PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers general provisions and requirements for all work necessary forengineering, furnishing, adjusting, testing, documenting, programming, and start-up ofcomplete Process Control System.

B. Unless noted, System Integrator shall assume responsibility for Specification Sections 13400through 13495.

C. Contract Documents, including Drawings and Specifications, are complementary parts andwhat is called for by one part shall be binding as if called for by all parts.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NFPA: National Fire Protection Agency

B. UL: Underwriters Laboratory

C. NEMA: National Electrical Manufacturers Association

D. ISA: Instrument Society of America

E. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

F. ANSI: American National Standards Institute

1.03 SELECTED ABBREVIATIONS

HMI Human-Machine-InterfaceI/O Input / OutputISA Instrumentation, Systems and Automation SocietyLOS Line of sightNEC National Electrical CodeNEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' AssociationOIU Operator Interface UnitPC Personal ComputerPCS Process Control SystemPCN Process Control NetworkPLC Programmable Logic ControllerSCADA Supervisory Control and Data AcquisitionUL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.UPS Uninterruptible Power SupplySSRV Soft Start Reduced VoltageMCC Motor Control CenterVFD Variable Frequency DriveAC Alternating CurrentDC Direct CurrentFOB Keyless Door Entry System

1.04 DEFINITIONS

PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL Donohue & Associates, Inc.13400-2 Project No. 12026

A. Process Instrumentation and Control Equipment (Equipment): Control and monitoringcomponents such as field elements, panels, process control systems and associatedelectrical and electronic accessories.

B. Process Control System (System): a complete, integrated system of PLC, HMI, instruments,devices, wireless and wired Ethernet networks, software, application engineering, andancillary equipment for monitoring and control of wastewater collection and treatmentfacilities.

C. Instrument Manufacturer: Manufacturer of Process Instrumentation and Control Equipment.

D. System Integrator: Organization, whose principle function is design, configuration,programming, manufacture, installation and service of Process Control System. Anorganization, under direction of Contractor, who shall assume complete responsibility for:engineering, manufacture, installation, configuration, technically advising on and certifyingcorrectness of installation, testing and adjusting, documenting and starting-up, of completeProcess Control System.

E. Security Access Control System Supplier (SACSS): Organization, whose principle function isdesign, configuration, programming, manufacture, installation and service of Plant SecuritySystem. An organization, under direction of the Systems Integrator, shall assume completeresponsibility for: engineering, manufacture, installation, configuration, technically advisingon and certifying correctness of installation, testing and adjusting, documenting and starting-up, of complete Plant Security System (Reference Specification Sections: 16770, 16780,and 16827).

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to requirements of Section 01330 – Submittals, following information shall beprovided in tabbed, booklet format:

B. Master Index Sheet referencing:

1. Tabs under which all field mounted components and control panels provided in thissection are located.

2. Tabs under which associated Instrument Manufacturer’s catalog information and productdata sheets are located.

3. Tabs under which associated drawings, schematics, installation details and parts lists arelocated.

4. In addition to Master Index Sheet, each tab section shall be individually indexed.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Panel Layout Drawings - Drawings shall show all panel mounted devices to scale anddimensioned and shall include legend. Drawings shall include ancillary devices such asadditional terminal strips, relays, fuses, utility lights and receptacles, fans, heaters, etc.

2. Typical drawings for multiple circuits or systems are not acceptable.3. Loop Diagrams - Drawings shall consist of wiring diagrams for each analog and discrete

loop showing all PLC input/output module terminations, terminal numbers, location of dcpower supplies, location of current boosting and interposing relays, and commondropping resistors. Loop diagrams shall meet minimum requirements of ISA S5.4.

4. PLC Equipment Layout Drawing including processing equipment, I/O components, powersupplies, and peripheral devices.

5. PLC data base list with I/O module cross reference identification for each PLCprocessor.

6. PLC documentation describing memory type, size and structure; listing of I/O; data tablememory and size of memory available for all programs.


7. SCADA Equipment Layout Drawings including detailed switch layout andcommunications systems with overall dimensions and equipment bill of materials.

8. SCADA software user manuals for all applications, including operating system,describing programming methods and procedures, utilities, diagnostics, documentation,and system support functions. Documentation covering all custom software orprogramming proposed or required for this Project including reports.

9. Network information including detailed block diagram showing system hardware andcomponents; software; format, protocol and procedures for data highwaycommunications; on-line and off-line capabilities for programming, system utilities anddiagnostics; recommended test equipment.

10. Communication Connection Drawings - Drawings shall show connections betweenSwitches, HMI’s, Motor Monitoring Units, MCC’s, VFD’s, Vendor furnished panels, Radioequipment, and PLC’s.

11. Drawings shall be segregated by PLC Panels (Example: if there are 5 PLC’s there shallbe 5 individual sets of Drawings).

12. Detailed fiber optic system layout drawings including patch panel connections, cable IDand color code, and equipment bill of materials.

13. Electrical power, UPS, Grounding, and DC Power Schematics for all equipment.14. Heat dissipation calculations for all enclosures.15. UPS sizing calculations.16. Electrical distribution diagrams identifying Motor Control Center equipment, Power and

Lighting Panels associated with each new electrical connection.17. Test reports.18. All drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD 2008 or later and shall be submitted in

11-inch by 17-inch format. All final drawings shall be submitted on CD.

D. Product Data:

1. Catalog Information - Provide catalog information and descriptive literature on allEquipment associated with System.

2. Product Data (Specification) Sheets – Provide product data sheets for each componentprovided under this Section. Purpose of data sheets is to supplement generalizedcatalog information provided by citing all specific features for each specific component(e.g.: scale range, materials of construction, special options included, etc.). Eachcomponent product data sheet shall bear component name and Engineer’s tag numberdesignation as shown on Plans and in Specifications. Product Data Sheets shall followISA S20 format.

3. List of special tools (including software) required for instrument calibration, startup,checking, testing, parts replacement, troubleshooting, and maintenance of allcomponents of Process Control System. Identify any special tools specially designedor adapted for use on parts of this system.

E. Test Outline and Procedure Submittal

1. Detailed description of each specified test procedure and demonstration shall besubmitted for approval. Decision of Engineer upon acceptability of procedure shall befinal.

2. It is required that this be a two-step submittal: outlines first followed, upon receipt ofEngineer’s approval, by specific test descriptions.

3. Test descriptions shall be in sufficient detail to fully describe specific tests to beconducted to demonstrate conformance with these Specifications.

4. Provide detailed step-by-step in-factory and field test procedure at least 8 weeks inadvance of scheduled test date. Include proposed test documentation and sign-offsheets and punch list forms.

5. Identify complete inventory of equipment to be tested at factory including make, model,and serial number. Label each piece of equipment.


F. Spare and Expendable Items Submittal

1. Contractor shall provide a list of recommended spares and expendable items asrecommended by System Integrator in sufficient quantities to sustain the ProcessControl System for a period of 3 year after acceptance (excluding software).

2. Total purchase cost for recommended list shall be provided in addition to unit cost foreach item. Cost of spare and expendable items selected by Owner will be addressed asa Change Order.

3. In addition to Spares and Expendables List, Contractor shall provide Component PartList as recommended by Systems Integrator. Component Part List shall be completeparts list for entire Process Control System, and shall have following features:

a. All components shall be grouped by component type, with component typesidentified in similar manner to component identification code used in theseSpecifications.

b. All components shall be listed with their exact and complete manufacturer's partnumber, including all options or accessories.

c. All components shall be identified with their complete tag number as shown in theseSpecifications, or as modified or assigned by Contractor and approved by Engineer.

d. All components without tag numbers shall be grouped within component types bymanufacturer's part number. Exact quantities shall be listed for each part number.

G. Prepare In-Factory Inspection and Testing, and Field Wiring and Testing Sign-Offdocuments. Documents shall be submitted during course of project to Engineer for approval.

H. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:

1. Process Control System - Submit in accordance with Section 13495 – O&M Data.2. Fully document copy of all application programs including PLC, PC and Server-based

applications. See Section 13495 - O&M Data for requirements.

I. Record Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 13495 – O&M Data.


A. Contractor shall engage services of qualified System Integrator for purposes of providingProcess Instrumentation and Control System, providing Field Services on installation ofSystem and certifying correctness of said installation.

B. Contractor shall engage services of qualified Security Access Control System Supplier(SACSS) for purposes of providing plant security, CCTV’s, and telephone/paging systems,providing Field Services on installation of these Systems and certifying correctness of saidinstallation.

C. Equipment shall be latest and most modern design at time of Notice to Proceed.

D. All software and firmware used in this Project shall be latest version that is fully compatiblewith each other, as of Notice to Proceed.

E. Like items of Equipment shall be end products of single manufacturer to achievestandardization for maintenance, spare parts, operation, and service.

F. Process Control System components shall be grounded in accordance with National ElectricCode (NEC) requirements.

G. Coordination - In order to insure timely performance of Contract and System's conformancewith Specifications, coordination meetings shall be held during course of project.


1. Within 45 days of date of Contract Time commencement, submit Progress Meetingschedule for final coordination by Owner/Engineer, Contractor and Systems Integrator.Submit also Submittal Schedule and Project Activity Schedule for final review.

2. Progress Meetings shall be held at project site and designated by Owner withOwner/Engineer, Contractor and System Integrator representatives in attendance.

3. Purpose of Progress Meetings is to obtain Owner/Engineer clarification on intent ofContract Documents during Submittal preparation and prior to HMI and PLC softwareconfiguration at no additional cost to Owner. Progress Meeting(s) shall cover following:

a. Review of functional descriptions describing equipment operation.b. Owner/Engineer selection of options.c. Owner/Engineer review of documentation.

4. Prepare and submit Startup Schedule, coordinated with overall Construction Schedule,including following:

a. Factory Acceptance Test(s).b. Review of Wiring Sign-Off forms by Owner/Engineer.c. I/O checkout by System Integrator.d. Plant startup.e. Training.f. Post startup services.

1.07 RESPONSIBILITY

A. System Integrator shall inspect Equipment provided under this Section prior to shipment toProject sites.

B. System Integrator shall coordinate work with Contractor to insure that:

1. All components provided under this Section are properly installed.2. All components provided under this Section are properly configured.3. Proper type, size, and number of control wires with conduits are furnished and installed.4. Proper electric power circuits are provided for all components and systems.

C. System Integrator shall be responsible for coordination of voltage levels and signal types forsignals connected to Process Control System. Provide relays, signal isolators, termination orpull-up resistors, signal conditioners or other devices only as required for proper interfacingand operation of non-compatible devices.

D. Process Instrumentation, Control Equipment and Control System shall remain property andresponsibility of System Integrator during programming, downloading and testing of PLCapplication software until Systems Demonstrations specified in Section 01820 – SystemDemonstrations have been successfully completed.

E. Contractor and System Integrator shall immediately correct incomplete or deficient ProcessInstrumentation and Control Equipment and Control System Work discovered duringapplication software programming, downloading, and testing.

F. System Integrator shall be responsible for installation and setup of vendor supplied motorprotection/monitoring/communications devices (MPRs, Motor Monitoring Systems, IE/ISHs,Ethernet switches) within MCCs. Setup of said devices shall be in accordance with devicemanufacturers’ written instructions. All IP addressing shall be coordinated with Owner.


G. System Integrator shall provide interlocking relays/amplifiers in MCCs as shown onInterconnect Diagrams. Interlocking relays/amplifiers shall be in addition to standard MCCmotor controller equipment as specified in Division 16 – Electrical. System Integrator shallcoordinate wiring between field mounted sensors/control stations and MCC mountedinterlocking relays/amplifiers.

H. System Integrator shall be responsible for setup and configuration of soft-start motorcontrollers located within MCC’s.

I. System Integrator and shall supply all HMI software fully configured, specific to processfunctions described herein.

J. Specific application engineering tasks to be performed by System Integrator shall include,but not be limited to:

1. All PLC application engineering programming.2. All HMI application engineering programming.3. Operational Testing of 1-2 above.4. Load all software and/or licenses.5. All Historian configuration programming, including configuring up to ten (10) reports

desired by Owner. All draft reports to be approved by Owner prior to implementation.6. Administer factory testing of PLC panels for verification of PLC programs and HMI

configuration.7. Server failover.8. Alarming setup and dial out configuration.9. Adhere to construction sequencing schedule.10. Attend meetings as requested by Owner or Engineer.11. Train the Owner’s staff:

a. Operator training for how to navigate HMI, include O&M manuals.

12. Conduct factory testing of the PLC panels for verification of PLC programs and HMIconfiguration.

13. Conduct field testing.

K. System Integrator shall be responsible for establishing proper communication of all controlsystem equipment as shown on Drawings and specified, including existing Radiocommunications with remote lift station(s) and level recording sites.

L. Systems Integrator shall be responsible for providing to Owner one (1) SCADA ProgrammingPackage (this includes programming packages for each component of the SCADA package,including HMI, Historian, Portal and Change Management, provided as part of Section 13454– SCADA Software, if these components require separate programming packages) properlyinstalled and configured.

M. Systems Integrator shall coordinate TCP/IP addressing schemes with Owner (City IT) andincorporate agreed upon scheme.

N. Systems Integrator shall coordinate WIN-911 notification of critical alarms with Owner andincorporate agreed upon scheme of either voice or text based alarming notification.

O. Systems Integrator shall coordinate secure remote access communications with outsideentities for:

1. Providing river levels from two locations showing hourly and daily level trendingaccessible to DPW and National Weather Service.

2. System Integrator Startup services.


3. Plant monitoring and off-hour access to SCADA.4. City hall access.5. Engineer to offer technical assistance.6. Approved outside vendors for startup or monitoring.

P. Systems Integrator shall be responsible for configuration and setup of Variable FrequencyDrive parameters that allow for speed control locally or via Process Control System.

1. If Rockwell Automation is selected as VFD manufacturer, then System Integrator shallincorporate use of integrated architecture platform scheme between VFD’s and PLC -storing drive parameters in PLC for seamless VFD replacement.

2. VFD’s shall incorporate use of 1783-ETAP EtherNet devices (regardless of VFDmanufacturer) for communication of select drive parameters to respective PLC via ringtopology network configuration.

3. VFD’s shall be programmed for auto-restart enabled.4. VFD’s shall be programmed such that a voltage dip is not considered a fault.5. High temperature and/or leakage detection inputs wired to VFD’s shall be programmed

for “enable” and not “fault”.6. Include any custom wiring and/or communications necessary for a complete and

operable system.

Q. Systems Integrator shall be responsible for configuration and setup of Power MonitoringDevices provided as part of Div 16. Setup shall include data access via standard browseracross network.

R. Modifications to existing control equipment.

1. Provide equipment necessary to affect changes to existing control equipment as shownon Drawings and specified.

2. Provide interposing relays and current-to-current isolation relays only as required toaffect signal interfacing with non-compatible devices.

3. Modify documents of existing control equipment to reflect new as-built conditions.4. Remove existing control wiring and conduit to extent of providing new as shown on

Drawings.

S. Contractor shall furnish Owner with copy of all configured PLC application programs afterOn-Site Acceptance Test.

1. Copy of each PLC program shall be loaded on respective SCADA node computer.2. Copy of all PLC programs used on project shall be loaded on Development Workstation

(300-WS-1) located in Control Room of Administration Building (Structure 300).

T. All field located conduits, wiring and cables shall be provided under Division 16 – Electrical.

1.08 APPLICATION ENGINEERING PROGRAMMING

A. Include within service time, 12 days total of workshops for PLC programming and SCADAHMI screen critique to be held at jobsite (see section 13491). Coordinate days withContractor which accommodate Owner’s schedule. Workshop attendees shall includeOwner and System Integrator. System Integrator shall submit screen captures of HMIscreens to be critiqued to Owner and Engineer 3 days prior to workshop.

1. Equipment Functional Descriptions shall be fully understood for PLC programmingincorporation.

1.09 WORK FOR HIRE


A. Any and all configuration, programming, setup or other software functions (Software)performed on all intelligent devices provided as part of this Project is to be considered “Workfor Hire” under the 1976 Copyright Act as amended (title 17 of the United States Code).Software shall be owned and licensed to Owner and shall be turned over to Owner fullydocumented and capable of future modification by Owner as work is completed.

B. Owner intends to obtain Software for its own use only.

C. Owner will not prevent Software supplier from reuse of Software concepts and ideas forother projects. Any reuse of Software concepts and ideas generated under this Project issolely responsibility of Software supplier. Software supplier shall defend, indemnify and holdharmless Owner from all claims, damages and expenses (including reasonable litigationcosts), arising out of any use, misuse or misapplication of Software concepts and ideas.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty in accordance with General Conditions 13.07.

B. Furnish copy of warranty together with operating instructions and maintenance data forcomplete System.

C. System defects and deficiencies shall be corrected by Contractor within 24 hours ofnotification if Owner does not have necessary replacement parts in stock and within 4 hoursof notification if Owner has necessary replacement parts in stock.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM INTEGRATOR

A. Energenecs Inc.W59 N249 Cardinal Ave.Cedarburg, WI. [email protected]

B. ICS Healy-Ruff13005 16th Avenue North, Suite 100Plymouth, MN. [email protected]

2.02 SYSTEM INTEGRATOR EXPERIENCE REQUIREMENT

A. Contractor shall utilize System Integrator having experience and knowledge, as definedherein, to undertake Work specified in this Section. System Integrator shall be organizationhaving the following organizational and individual experience, knowledge, and capability:

1. System Integrator shall be regularly engaged in design, installation, and servicing ofwastewater treatment Process Control Systems.

2. System Integrator shall demonstrate ability to produce electrical and control logicdiagrams in level of detail required by this specification.

3. System Integrator shall have previously executed minimum of five (5) wastewatertreatment Process Control System projects of similar size and complexity to this Projectand incorporating PLCs and HMI platforms included in this Project.

4. Systems Integrator shall have previously successfully executed Ethernet wireless and

mailto:[email protected]

http://www.energenecs.com/


http://www.icshealyruff.com/


wired networked projects of comparable size and complexity to this Project.5. Person(s) performing field I&C work as required by Contact Documents shall have

minimum of five (5) years experience on PLC-based systems.6. System Integrator shall provide, on-site, Control Systems Engineer to commission

functional testing, start-up and training as required by Contract Documents. Individualshall have authored and commissioned control logic for no fewer than three (3) projectsof similar or greater complexity, and shall have demonstrated proficiency in authoringlogic in PLC ladder and function block formats

7. Upon request of Owner and in addition to other specified requirements, Contractor shallprovide minimum of five (5) System Integrator references to confirm compliance withthese requirements.

2.03 EQUIPMENT, SYSTEMS AND SERVICES

A. Equipment, Systems and Services provided under this Section shall conform to the followingrequirements.

1. UL 508A - Standards for Safety, Industrial Control Equipment.2. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems.3. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies.4. NEMA ICS 3 - Industrial Systems.5. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.6. NEMA ICS 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.7. UL 698A Intrinsic Safe Circuits.

B. Equipment, Systems and Services provided under this Section includes the following.

1. Process Control System (PCS): Section 134022. Analysis Instrumentation Section 134233. Flow Instrumentation Section 134244. Level Instrumentation Section 134255. Pressure Instrumentation Section 134266. Temperature Instrumentation Section 134277. Misc. Field Devices Section 134298. Control Panel Construction Section 134319. Miscellaneous Control Panel Devices Section 1344110. Modular Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Section 1345011. Small Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) Section 1345112. Computer Equipment Section 1345213. Operator Interface Unit Section 1345314. SCADA Software Suite Section 1345415. Network Equipment Section 1345516. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Section 1345617. Field Instrumentation Section 1348118. Process Control System – I/O Listing Section 1348219. Process Control System – Equipment Section 1348320. Process Control System – Configuration Services Section 1349121. Process Control System – Testing Section 1349222. Process Control System – Training Section 1349423. Process Control System – O&M Data Section 1349524. Security Access Control System Section 1677025. CCTV System Section 1678026. Paging System Section 16827


3.01 INSTALLATION


A. Contractor shall install and wire Process Control System equipment in accordance withSystem Integrator, Security Access Control System Supplier, and instrument manufacturer’swritten instructions and approved submittals.

3.02 PLC INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL POWER SOURCE

A. Except for 4-wire instruments, all analog loops shall be powered from respective processcontrol panel.

B. 120V ac and dc shall be sourced from respective process control panel.



A. Protection During Construction.

1. Throughout Contract, Contractor shall provide protection for materials and Equipmentagainst loss or damage and effects of weather. Prior to installation, store items inindoor, dry locations. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosionunder damp conditions. Specific storage requirements shall be in accordance withEngineer-reviewed System Integrator's recommendations.

B. Cleaning and Touch-up Painting.

1. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish. Upon completion ofwork, remove materials, scraps, and debris from premises and from interior and exteriorof all devices and equipment. Touch-up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior andexterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possibletype, color, consistency, and type of surface of original finish.

C. Panels and Panel-Mounted Equipment.

1. Panels and panel-mounted devices shall be assembled as completely as possible atSystem Integrator's factory. No work, other than correction of minor defects or minortransit damage, shall be done on panels at job site.

D. Inspections.

1. System Integrator shall provide services of qualified service engineer to supervise andinspect Equipment installation to ensure System is installed in accordance with SystemIntegrator 's recommendations.

2. All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to observation at any timeby Engineer’s representatives. Correct any work, materials or equipment not inaccordance with these Contract Documents or found to be deficient or defective. Makecorrections in manner satisfactory to Engineer at no additional cost to Owner.

3. System Integrator shall supervise final power and signal connections to all Equipmentprovided under this Section. For all Equipment provided under this Section and all otherEquipment interfaced by System, System Integrator shall verify and certify by writtennotice to Engineer, correctness of final signal connections and correctness ofadjustment.

4. System Integrator shall field calibrate Equipment at request of Engineer at time ofcomplete plant startup on loop-by-loop basis. Submit calibration certification to Engineerfor each piece of Equipment. Make adjustments necessary to place Equipment insatisfactory operation.

5. During this startup period, Contractor’s personnel are to thoroughly check all equipmentand perform on-site tests specified above.

E. System Integrator’s Field Services

1. System Integrator's engineer shall direct services to system and equipment operation,maintenance, troubleshooting. See Section 01615.

2. Training shall be provided in accordance with 01810, 13494, and Section 13491.3. In addition to services specified above, provide manufacturer’s services as required to

successfully complete system demonstration as specified in Section 01820.

3.04 RECORD DRAWINGS


A. System Integrator shall prepare complete and comprehensive as-built electrical drawingsincluding terminal-to-terminal wiring for equipment such as in-line metering devices,transmitters and associated sensors, and remote interlocking with motor control equipment.


3.05 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. In addition to requirements identified in other parts of Contract Documents, SubstantialCompletion shall require the following process instrumentation and control work issuccessfully completed:

1. Owner receipt of required site documentation including required O&M materials.2. Completion of specified training associated with equipment provided.3. Successful completion of the specified demonstration period.4. Owner receipt of required tools.5. Owner receipt of spare parts.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PCS)Project No. 12026 13402-1

SECTION 13402PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PCS)

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Requirements for Process Control System (PCS):

1. Provide Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) based data acquisition and control panelsas specified below.

2. Provide software as required to affect communication between Human/MachineInterface Unit (HMI) computer and remote I/O communication modules.

3. Communicate over single-mode fiber optic based Process Control Network (PCN).


A. Design requirements:

1. System shall consist of Personal Computers (PCs), including automation software,serving as an HMI working in conjunction with PLC based control panels.

2. All System components shall be housed within control panel enclosures.3. System shall use PLC form factor I/O subsystems to connect local and remote

Equipment.4. System shall provide separate 24Vdc regulated power supplies to power I/O subsystem

and to power analog instrumentation loops as required.5. Data highway components shall be provided to interconnect PLC to data highway-

enabled field devices (ie. Motor Monitoring Units (MMUs) located at MCCs, soft startstarters, adjustable speed drives and feeder breakers), and PLCs to PCS.

6. System shall provide peer-to-peer communication between PLC, HMI computers andother devices connected to System.

7. Isolation and surge protection shall be provided for all incoming and out-going power andsignal lines.

8. System shall be provided with quantity and type of I/O as specified in Section 13482 –Process Control System - I/O List.

9. System shall have a minimum of 20% prewired spare points of each type of I/O pointused.

10. System shall be expandable, at future date, to accommodate additional I/O.

B. Performance requirements:

1. HMI shall serve only as operator interface to PLC and shall not contain automatic controlfunctions. Automatic control functions shall be programmed into the PLC.

2. System shall perform process monitoring and supervisory control using PLC and HMIcomputers.

3. PLC shall send/receive process data to/from field Equipment and be capable of followingwhen configured:

a. Receive analog data from primary control elements, convert to engineering units,process for alarms and responsibility checks, and store.

b. Receive digital data from primary control elements, check for alarm and statuschange, and store.

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PCS) Donohue & Associates, Inc.13402-2 Project No. 12026

c. Perform control and arithmetic calculations, including software PID and otherregulatory control functions, based on system parameters and real-time data andoutput the properly conditioned control commands to final control elements.

d. Perform sequential control functions.e. Perform messaging between PLC’s for sharing of data.f. Communicate with HMI computer over EtherNet data highway.g. Respond to operator requests for data and to control commands from HMI.h. Respond to inhibit, enable and interlock signals from other sources.i. Respond to supervisory requests for data, to control commands and to process

parameter setting changes from PCS.

4. HMI computers shall receive/send process data from/to PLC’s, maintain database andbe capable of following when configured.

a. Real-time data collection. Receive and store process data from PLC’s.b. Receive and store manually entered data from keyboard or pointing device such as

operator changes and process parameter setting changes.c. Send operator and process parameter setting changes to PLC.d. Display plant activity with alphanumeric and color graphic displays of I/O associated

with PLC.e. Data collection for maintenance management. Provide operating information from

which to generate reports and logs.f. Real-time data collection.g. Data transfer to the Historical data storage, trending and reporting package

(‘Historian’).h. Provide overall plant alarm and status monitoring with visual and audible alarming.

Provide dial-out functionality for those alarms so designated in alarm matrixdescribed below.

i. Record alarms and events on screen and store to file.j. Allow operator input of data not collected by System.

5. “Hand” mode of field mounted Hand/Off/Auto selector switches shall enable field controlof equipment. PLC control shall be inhibited in “Hand” mode. “Auto” mode shall enablePLC based Manual or Automatic control. Field control shall be inhibited in “Auto” mode.

6. Control logic for “Automatic” mode shall be programmed functions of the PLC.7. Field mounted Hand/Off/Auto selector switches shall be provided with extra contact

blocks for monitoring of “Hand” and “Auto” modes at the PLC.8. All plant alarms shall be identified on an HMI screen matrix that shall allow the operator

to select one of three modes for any alarm: Non-Critical, Critical and Dial-out.9. All Restart Delay timer functions shall be identified on an HMI screen matrix that shall

allow the operator to program restart delay times.

C. Control Panel Requirements:

1. Unless otherwise specified, “running” signals shall be derived from equipment motorstarter or VFD normally open auxiliary contacts.

2. Electrical wiring and controls shall conform to Division 16 - Electrical.3. Equipment on panels shall be identified as follows:

a. Indicating Light Off: Equipment Not Running.b. Indicating Light Green: Equipment in Operation.c. Indicating Light Red: Equipment in Alarm Condition.d. Indicating Light White: Power Supply Energized.

4. Fail Logic: Failure of equipment, after having been “called to run”, shall generate a Failalarm. Typical points of failure are motor overload (over current), motor undercurrent


(blower surge), motor under voltage, fail-to-start and power fail. Power fail shall include,in addition to loss of control power, the tripping of equipment circuit breakers whileequipment is called to run. Provide necessary logic to sense discrepancy between“called to run” and “running” signals and activate Fail Alarm signal after adjustable timedelay.

5. References to “selector switch” refer to maintained contact type functions. Loss andreturn of control power to circuit does not change control mode or requirement asdictated by switch position.

6. References to “pushbutton” refer to momentary contact type functions. Loss and returnof control power to circuit reverts control mode or requirement to default condition.Initiating pushbutton is required to re-establish control mode or requirement.


A. Process Control System shall be provided and integrated by single System Integrator.

B. Provide System hardware required to meet function of Specifications. Configure hardware tomaximize System availability. Provide fully operational System.

C. Label hardware revision numbers on Equipment and spares installed.

1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule and perform Work to minimize adverse effects on operation of Owner facilities.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 SUMMARY

A. Equipment and materials provided for Process Control System shall conform to following:

1. Control Panel Construction: Section 13431.2. Miscellaneous Control Panel Devices: Section 13441.3. Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC): Section 13450.4. Small Programmable Logic Controllers: Section 13451.5. Operator Interface Unit (OIU): Section 13453.6. Plant Communications: Section 13455.7. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Section 13456.8. Process Control System – I/O List: Section 13482.9. Process Control System Equipment Section 13483.

2.02 PLC-BASED CONTROL PANELS – GENERAL

A. PLC-Based Control Panels shall be provided with the following common features:

1. Free standing enclosure without feet unless noted otherwise.2. NEMA rating as dictated in Section 13431 – Control Panel Construction for Indoor or

Outdoor Enclosures.3. Do not exceed dimensions as shown on floor plans without approval of the Engineer..4. 120Vac supply.5. 24Vdc power supply for loop powered Equipment.6. Allen Bradley ControlLogix series PLCs (MicroLogix for Lift stations).7. Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS).


8. PLC enclosures designated as Free Standing shall be provided with managed switchesas specified in Section 13455 to interface between the PLCs and the PCN (switchessupplied by Owner).

9. All fiberoptic strands shall be terminated in every panel and tested. Submit results offield testing to Engineer.

10. Install Motor Protection Relays (MPRs) where shown on drawings. MPRs furnished bypump manufacturer. Coordinate receipt of MPRs with pump manufacturer. Resetting ofdevices shall be made available to Operator at SCADA.

11. Provide intrinsically safe barriers/relays for field components located in Class I, Division1, Group D Hazardous (Classified) Locations as shown on drawings and/or listed inSection 13481 – Field Instrumentation as Explosion-Proof or NEMA 7 rated. Install inaccordance with NFPA 70: NEC Articles 500 and 501.

12. Provide single-mode fiber optic connector assemblies, patch panels and patch cords inaccordance with Section 13455 – Plant Communications.

13. Provide Industrial Data Outlets wired to the switches. Mount outlets on fronts of panels.Provide in accordance with Section 13455 – Plant Communications.

14. Communicate with PCS devices over fiber-optic based data highway system. Each PLC-Based Control Panel shall tie into the PCS via EtherNet switch.

a. EtherNet switches shall be provided by Owner.

B. PLC-Based Control Panel Functional Descriptions - General:

1. Functional Descriptions for PLC-based control panels that follow pertain to “Auto” modesrequiring supervisory control with interactive logic.

2. Passive monitoring and trending functions are not included in Functional Descriptionnarratives. Programming/Configuration of passive monitoring and trending functionsshall be as specified in Section 13491 – Configuration Services.

3. “Local”, “Manual”, "On", "Off", “Open” and “Close” modes are intended for maintenancepurposes and individual exercising of component parts and shall operate independentlyof the PLC. Safety interlock signals shall be wired into all modes of operation.

4. PLC control of equipment shall require “Hand/Off/Auto” control stations to be in the“Auto” position. Equipment not in “Auto” shall be considered to be in “Hand” mode andshall be controlled manually at the equipment.

5. All major pieces of equipment shall be programmed with Restart Delay timer functions.The restart timer functions shall be arrayed in a matrix to allow the Operator to selectindividual restart times to balance reloading of the electrical system on restoration ofnormal power and to select whether a piece of equipment should be designated to restartor not. Restart Delay timer functions are shown on the P&IDs for those pieces ofequipment initially deemed to require it. Equipment not shown with Restart Delay timerfunctions shall have the function available but shall have the function disabled, meaningthey shall not automatically restart but require Operator reactivation.

6. Pump stations shall be equipped with redundant level sensors/transmitters. Transmittersshall operate in Primary/Secondary roles, operator selectable. Fail-down/Fail-up of thesensor/transmitter designated as Primary shall cause the PLC to automatically switch tothe Secondary sensor/transmitter and generate an alarm. Floats are considered asecondary system.

7. All fault signals shall be interlocked with control circuitry to cutout respective piece ofequipment on malfunction. Equipment shall automatically return to service on clearing offail and depression of a reset pushbutton. Refer to article 1.02.C in this section fordefinition of Fail signal.

8. PLC’s shall communicate via Ether/IP with each new MCC lineup.

2.03 ADMINISTRATION BUILDING CONTROL ROOM PLC PANEL 300-PLC-1 (Reference Drawings:008-I-2 and 3, 009-N-8 and 61).


A. Panel:

1. Existing Enclosure.2. Free Standing Multiple Door.3. 120 VAC Power Supply (supplied by 300UPS-1).

B. Cosmetic additions:

1. Two sides and rear of existing enclosure shall be finished with 5/8” sheetrock, textured,and painted.

C. Front of Panel Devices:

Tag Device Description Type300-RECT-1 Electrical Outlet 120 VAC300-DATA-1 Ethernet Jack SW1 (PCN) RJ-45300-DATA-2 Ethernet Jack SW2 (BIN) RJ-45

D. Rear of Panel Devices:

Tag Device Description Initial Setting300-PLC-1 PLC Section 13450300-SW1 Ethernet Switch Provided by Owner 10/100/1000Mbps300-SW2 Ethernet Switch Provided by Owner 10/100/1000Mbps300-RAD-1 Ethernet Radio Existing - relocate300-SRG-1 Surge Protector Section 13441300-PTCH-1 Patch Panel Section 13455 24 strand Single-mode300-FAN-1 Fan Cooling fan

E. Exterior Mounted Devices:

Tag Device Description Type

300-MON-1 SCADA Monitor Section 13452 46” Wall Mount –rear of monitor bracket

300-MON-6 BIN/CCTV Monitor Section 13452 46” Wall Mount –rear of monitor bracket

F. Functional Description – Primary Effluent Sampler:

1. Existing Sampler (300-M-0831) shall be given a form “C” contact closure for samplingPrimary Plant Effluent which is sampled at end of Primary Settling Tanks (Structure420).

1. Sampling signal shall be controlled by either time (minutes per pulse) or flow total(gallons per pulse) which shall be Operator Settable and adjustable.

i. Flow total shall be derived from Plant influent as measured by 405-LE/LIT-0321located in Headworks (Structure 405).

G. Functional Description – Paging Alarm System:


1. The Plant has an existing telephone and paging speaker system whose functionalityshall be maintained and expanded under the scope of this project.

2. An alarm matrix shall be developed for SCADA expanding upon basic Wonderwarealarming features which allow the Operator to select which alarms shall transmit a toneover the Plant speaker system when active.

3. One alarm matrix shall be developed for in-plant alarms, and one alarm matrix for liftstation alarms. Two distinct tones are available at the existing paging system.

4. The Operator shall have the ability to silence alarm tones during off hours or weekendsautomatically using a 7-day 24-hour selection matrix.

5. The alarm silence feature shall also have a manual override.

H. Functional Description – Gate Control:

1. Operator shall have ability to open/close Plant Gate and Main Gate from Control Room.2. Operator shall have the ability to control Gates using time of day and day of week matrix

allowing gates to remain open during regular business hours, etc.3. Operator shall have ability to communicate using intercom system with Plant and Main

Gates from Control Room (controls specified in Specification 16770 – Security AccessControl System).

4. Call buttons at Main Gate and Plant Gate shall transmit tone over paging system whenrespective gates are not open during regular plant hours.

5. Gates shall open and remain open until reset by Operator when a fire alarm conditionhas been observed.

I. Functional Description – Door Intrusion:

1. FOB Operated doors shall have proximity switch alerting Operator to structure intrusion.2. Operator shall have ability to silence door alarms during business hours using time of

day/day of week matrix.

2.04 HEADWORKS BUILDING PLC PANEL (405-PLC-1) (Reference Drawings: 008-I-1 and 3, 009-N-3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 22, 57 and 61).

A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure2. NEMA 123. Free Standing Double Door4. 120 VAC Power Supply




Tag Device Description Initial Setting405-PLC-1 PLC Section 13450405-SW1 Ethernet Switch Provided by Owner 10/100/1000Mbps405-SW2 Ethernet Switch Provided by Owner 10/100/1000Mbps


405UPS-1 UPS Section 13456 2 hours405-SRG-1 Surge Protector Section 13441405-PTCH-1 Patch Panel Section 13455 24 strand Single-mode405-FAN-1 Fan Cooling fan405-LC-1 Float Mode* Level Controller Lead405-LC-2 Float Mode* Level Controller Lag

*Float Mode Controllers shall be back of panel mounted hardwired mechanically latchingrelays which energize/de-energize associated equipment as described in FunctionalDescriptions below.

D. Functional Description – Door Intrusion:



E. Functional Description – RWW / Process Pumping

1. All areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Screw Pumps and Lube Pumps shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility

power fails.3. Three Screw Pumps operate in Lead/Lag/Standby configuration.4. Pump Sequencer at HMI shall be Lead/Lag/Standby (1-2-3, 2-3-1, 3-1-2) configuration.5. 30 second restart delay timer shall be implemented for ALL modes of operation

preventing Screw Pump restarting prior to that time after power loss, switching to FloatMode, etc. This allows each Screw to fully empty prior to restart preventing equipmentdamage.

6. One Screw Pump shall remain running at ALL times. This includes float mode controland Auto.

7. When Screw Pump is called to operate, associated Lube Pump shall be called to operatein parallel. Lube Pump has integral centrifugal switch which shall close within 30seconds or associated Screw Pump shall stop. If Lube Pump motor fails or stopsopening centrifugal switch, associated Screw Pump drive motor shall de-energize. Thisfunctionality is included in existing lube Pump Control Station and shall be maintained.

8. When Screw Pump is called to operate, associated gear box oil pump flow switch(existing) shall close within 30 seconds or associated Screw Pump shall stop. If the gearbox oil pump flow switch fails and the switch opens, the associated Screw Pump drivemotor will de-energize. This functionality is included in the existing lube Pump ControlStation and shall be maintained.

9. Centrifugal switch and flow switch functionality shall be maintained at HMI level when inAuto, and inhibited in Hand.

10. Control of Screw Pumps shall be based upon RWW Influent Channel level, or by RWWInfluent flow (Operator selectable), and controlled by the PLC. A float-mode backupsystem will be the tertiary method of Pump control.

11. Float switches will be hardwired to stand-alone level controllers as means of backupcontrol if the primary level or flow elements fail, or if the PLC fails. Screw Pump No. 1,and Lube Pump No. 1 shall energize and remain on until Operator intervention. LSHshall turn on Screw Pump No. 2, and Lube Pump No. 2 and they shall remain on for apredefined Operator time (initially set at 4 hours), and then shut off if LSH is no longertripped. LSH shall remain satisfied for a period of 5 minutes prior to Screw Pump No. 2and Lube Pump No. 2 energizing (de-bounce timer, Operator adjustable). LSHH floatshall send a critical alarm to the Operator regardless of conditions.

12. Wet Well level shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from Local Control Stations.


13. With Local Control Station in Hand, Screw Pump is energized. Hand is intended formaintenance purposes only.

14. With Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Auto at HMI:

a. Screw Pumps shall operate based on water elevation in Raw Wastewater InfluentChannel.

b. Lead Pump shall run without regard to wetwell level. Level sensing device located inRWW Influent Channel shall turn Lag Pump on based upon Operator settable level.PLC shall automatically rotate Lead and Lag operating pumps from predeterminedselection list (1-2-3, 2-3-1, 3-1-2) based on adjustable duration setting along withWinter/Summer Selector (see below).

c. Operator shall have capability to alternate Lead/Lag/Standby manually. If Leadpump fails, is off, or has been taken out-of-service, then Lag Pump shall becomeLead Pump and Standby Pump shall serve as Lag Pump. Once failed Pump isbrought back into service, it shall be Standby in sequencer unless Operator manuallychanges.

d. Provide Winter/Summer selector switch. In winter, duration between pumpalternation and operation is expected to be lower than summer setting to preventpotential freezing. Duration times for each seasonal selection shall be Operatoradjustable.

e. Provide selector switch to turn Pump alternation on or off.f. Provide Level/Flow selector switch. In Level Mode, RWW Influent Channel level

element shall control Screw Pump operation. In Flow Mode, RWW Influent Flowelement shall control Screw Pump operation.

g. When Lag Pump is called to run, it shall remain running for Operator settable timeperiod (4 hours initially) regardless of level or flow conditions. Timer is reset byrecurring high level condition.

15. With Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Manual at HMI:

a. Winter/Summer selector, Level/Flow selector, and Pump Alternator are inhibited inManual.

b. If Manual/Auto selector switch on HMI is switched to Auto while pumps are runningin Manual, and Lead Pump from predetermined selection list is operating, respectivePump shall continue to operate as Lead in Auto mode and remaining Pumps shallde-energize, unless water level or flow require Lag to operate. If only one Pump isoperating which is not predetermined Lead, current pump operating shall serve asLead until next pump alternation cycle. If two Pumps are operating and neither areLead from predetermined list, first Pump in sequential order (1-2-3) shall serve asLead and other as Lag if required, until next pump alternation cycle.

c. Start shall energize Lube Pump and Screw Pump selected by Operator.d. Stop shall de-energize Lube Pump and Screw Pump selected by Operator.

16. Float Mode shall be activated when either of following conditions are true:

a. Primary level element failure (as determined by PLC).b. PLC failure.c. PLC shall signal Float Mode Controllers when either of the above conditions are true

(by removal of PLC signal/interposing relay). Float mode controller shall delay startof Screw Pump No. 1 (and Lube Pump No. 1) for 30 seconds, then start and runcontinuously. Lag Screw Pump No. 2 (and Lube Pump No. 2) shall be controlled byLSH float, and shall have minimum run time of 4 hours unless Operator intervention.LSH shall remain satisfied for period of 5 minutes prior to Screw Pump No. 2 andLube Pump No. 2 energizing (de-bounce timer, Operator adjustable).

17. Critical Alarms for this process are as follows:


a. LSHH float switch activatedb. Backup float controlc. Level element faild. Flow element faile. PLC failf. Screw Pump failg. Lube Pump failh. Two Screw Pumps running simultaneouslyi. Three Screw Pumps not running for one minutej. Parshall Flume high flow event (Operator adjustable)k. Parshall Flume low flow event (Operator adjustable)

18. Influent Gates isolate influent flow from each Pump. Gates are controlled manually.Gates are open for everyday operation, and closed for Pump maintenance.

F. Functional Description – RWW Sampling

1. RWW Sampler (411-M-0621) shall be flow paced from Total Plant RWW Influent flow asdetermined by Parshall Flume measurement in Headworks. Sampler shall also becapable of sampling by timed interval as set by Operator. Selector switch at HMI shalldetermine which method shall be used to sample RWW entering plant, and interval atwhich sampling shall be taken.

2. RWW Sampler shall alert Operator of internal failure.3. RWW Sampler is located atop Grit Tanks east of Headworks structure.

G. Functional Description – RWW Screening

1. All areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Equipment shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.3. Two existing Bar Screens provide mechanical screening of raw wastewater, removing

debris larger than bar opening from influent flow stream which could create obstructionsin downstream facilities, or which might negatively affect efficiency of later treatmentprocesses.

4. High float switch located upstream of each Bar Screen shall maintain their existingfunction of sending Bar Screen rake to its home position and stopping – avoiding motorsubmergence in Screen Channel.

5. Parshall Flume flow signal will be used as signal for Bar Screens to operate incontinuous mode. Signal shall be Operator settable (initially set at 8 MGD).

6. Bar Screens shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from Local Control Station.7. HMI shall have Lead/Lag sequencer allowing switching by event, ETM, or Operator

selection.8. With Local Control Station in Hand, Bar Screen is energized and operates continuously.

Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

a. For/Off/Rev – Direction control for Bar Screen. Available in Hand mode only.


a. Each Bar Screen shall run a cycle every time as determined by Run Cycle Timerand then stop rake at its home position.

b. Timer shall be reset when; completely timed out, LAH alarm, manually by Operator,or by switching modes of Operation for Bar Screen.

c. If water level upstream of Bar Screen triggers High Level Float, LAH alarm shall begenerated and Bar Screen shall send rake to its home position and stop until water


level decreases below High Level Float. Time delays shall be incorporated to reducecyclical operation.

d. Both Bar Screens shall run continuously if high flow condition is present asdetermined by Parshall Flume high flow event (Operator adjustable).

e. Both Bar Screens to run continuously if Lead and Lag Screw Pumps are operatingsimultaneously.

10. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Manual at HMI:

a. Operator shall be able to Start/Stop the Bar Screen for continuous operation.b. Start – Turns Screen On for continuous operation.c. Stop – Turns Screen Off and sends the rake to home position.

11. Critical Alarms for this process are as follows:

a. Bar Screen Failb. Motor Overloadc. High Level Float (405-LSH-0401/0402)

12. Each Bar Screen has respective influent and effluent Gates that isolate influent flowfrom each Bar Screen. Gates are controlled manually. Gates are open for everydayoperation, and closed for Bar Screen maintenance.

H. Functional Description – Screenings Conveyor

1. All areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Equipment shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.3. Purpose of Screenings Conveyor System is to convey raw screening debris to

Screenings Washer/Compactor. Screenings Conveyor is a cyclical process whosetimers are Operator adjustable. Screenings Conveyor shall have E-stop pull ropeslocated such that Operator can stop Conveyor at any point along its length. Zero SpeedSwitch shall alarm Operator when motor is running, but conveyor belt has stopped.

4. Screenings Conveyor shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from Local ControlStation.

5. With Local Control Station in Hand, Screenings Conveyor is energized and operatescontinuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.


a. Conveyor will run for Operator set On Time (initially set at 2 minutes) and then stopfor Cycle Time set by Operator (initially set at 60 minutes). Timer is reset whencompletely timed out, manually by Operator, or by high flow event (initially set at14MGD) at which time Conveyor shall run continuously until high flow event hasabated for 15 minutes.

b. Set Points - HMI shall allow operator to define parameters or set-points listed below.

i. On Timerii. Cycle Timeriii. High Flow Set-point

c. Interlocks:

a. Motor Overloadb. On Timerc. Cycle Timerd. E-stope. E-stop pull rope(s)


f. Washer/Compactor Fail shall stop conveyorg. Washer/Compactor E-stop shall stop conveyor


a. Start shall energize the Conveyor and run continuously.b. Stop shall de-energize the Conveyor.c. Timers are inhibited in this mode.

8. Critical Alarms for this equipment as follows:

a. E-stopsb. Conveyor Fail

I. Functional Description – Screenings Washer/Compactor

1. All areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Equipment shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.3. Screenings removed from flow stream and discharged from raw wastewater Bar Screens

will be conveyed to Screenings Washer/Compactor via Screenings Conveyor System.Screenings washing process reduces amount of fecal and organic matter collected byBar Screens along with non-organic material, and returns wash water back to flowstream. Once screenings have been washed, they are compacted to minimize amountof water remaining in screenings. Compaction process not only reduces volume ofmaterial to be landfilled, but also weight of material to be hauled. Washed andcompacted screenings will be discharged into existing lugger box. Continuous baggerflange will be installed at end of discharge chute for connection of future continuousbagger, if necessary.

4. Screenings Washer/Compactor shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from LocalControl Station.

5. With Local Control Station in Hand, screw motor is energized which shall only operatescrew in forward direction. No washwater valves will be energized. Hand is intended formaintenance purposes only.

6. With Local Control Station in Off the motor is off.7. As part of Local Control Station, momentary Jog Reverse push button shall be provided.

When Jog Reverse is pushed, screw motor shall energize in reverse direction untilreleased. Provide timer, in addition to momentary relay, for Reverse function such thatscrew does not reverse continuously for more than 10 seconds. Releasing momentaryswitch shall reset timer.

8. With Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Auto at HMI thefollowing shall be available from HMI.

a. Provide BATCH / CONTINUOUS selector switch as controlling device to triggerwashing process. In BATCH mode, operator shall input as Counter value number ofScreenings Conveyor cycles before Screenings Washer/Compactor shall beginbatch washing process. Counter input value shall be a whole number, initially set to3.

b. CONTINUOUS mode shall allow operator to run screenings compactor continuously.Typically, this feature will not be used, however, does provide operational flexibility.

c. During washing process, Screenings Washer/Compactor screw shall run in forwardand reverse directions as directed by PLC. Wash water solenoid valves shall becycled On and Off as required by program in PLC. After washing cycle, Wash Pressscrew shall operate in forward direction for amount of time directed by PLC toadvance screenings in discharge pipe and stop.

d. The following mode of operation shall commence when Batch wash cycle is initiated,all set points (in seconds) will be adjustable at HMI:


i. (Huber and Vulcan) Washwater Valve No. 1 and 2 energized (initially set at 10seconds)

ii. (Huber and Vulcan) Screw forward, Washwater Valve No. 1 and 2 energized(initially set at 12 seconds)

iii. a. (Huber) Screw stop, Washwater Valve No. 1 and 2 energized (initially set at 8seconds)

iv. b. (Vulcan) Screw stop, Washwater Valve No. 1 and 3 energized (initially set at 8seconds)

v. a. (Huber) Screw reverse, Washwater Valve No. 1 and 2 energized (initially setat 6 seconds)

vi. b. (Vulcan) Screw reverse, Washwater Valve No. 1 and 3 energized (initially setat 6 seconds)

vii. a. (Huber) Screw stop, Washwater Valve No. 2 energized (initially set at 6seconds)

viii. b. (Vulcan) Screw stop, Washwater Valve No. 3 energized (initially set at 6seconds)

ix. (Huber and Vulcan) Screw forward, Washwater Valve No. 1 energized (initiallyset at 4 seconds)

x. Provide adjustable Wash Cycle counter, which will repeat Steps i through vi forthe pre-set number of cycles (initially set for 4 cycles)

xi. (Huber and Vulcan) Screw forward, Washwater Valve No. 1 energized (initiallyset at 10 seconds)

xii. (Huber and Vulcan) Screw forward, No Washwater Valves energized (initially setat 10 seconds)

xiii. a. (Huber) Screw stop, Washwater Valve No. 3 energized (initially set at 20seconds)

xiv. b. (Vulcan) Screw stop, Washwater Valve No. 4 energized (initially set at 20seconds)

e. In CONTINUOUS Mode, Screenings Washer/Compactor shall run mainly in forwarddirection, reversing only occasionally. All wash water valves will be energized open.The following mode of operation shall commence when STORM Mode wash cycle isinitiated, all set points (in seconds) shall be adjustable at HMI:

i. (Huber and Vulcan) Screw forward, all Washwater Valves energized (initially setat 45 seconds)

ii. (Huber and Vulcan) Screw stop, all Washwater Valves energized (initially set at2 seconds to allow screw to stop)

iii. (Huber and Vulcan) Screw reverse, all Washwater Valves energized (initially setat 3 seconds)

iv. (Huber and Vulcan) Screw stop, all Washwater Valves energized (initially set at2 seconds to all screw to stop)

v. Steps 1 and 4 will repeat until STORM Mode condition is cleared.

f. In either BATCH or CONTINUOUS Mode, PLC shall initiate jam clearing sequencein event screenings compactor experiences adjustable High Current Fault foradjustable amount of time as follows:

i. Screenings Compactor screw Forward direction shall Stop(initially set at 2 seconds)

ii. Screw shall run in Reverseiii. (initially set at 2 seconds)iv. Screw shall stopv. (initially set at 2 seconds)vi. Resume operation Forward.


vii. If High Current Fault persists, Forward/Reverse, Steps 1-4, shall continue foradjustable number of attempts (initially set at 3) before compactor shallshutdown and alarm.

viii. If Over Current Fault set point is exceeded, Screenings Compactor shallshutdown and alarm.

9. Initiate push button shall be provided on Local Control Station which shall override PLCAuto and start one Batch cycle. Upon completion, PLC counters and timers shall bereset. Initiate can be operated when in Auto only.


a. Initiate – Screenings Compactor shall complete one Batch washing cycle and stop.

i. Provide Non-critical alarm if Screenings Conveyor is in Auto and ScreeningsCompactor remains in Manual mode more than half Screenings ConveyorCounter input value. Failure to return Screening Compactor to Auto shall notresult in any screening process shut down.

ii. By switching from BATCH to CONTINUOUS mode, ScreeningsWasher/Compactor shall operate continuously until switched back into BATCHmode.

10. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopsb. Motor Over Currentc. Motor High Temperatured. Flush Water Valvese. Screenings Conveyor Cycle Counterf. It is acceptable for Screenings Conveyor to be running during a Batch Washing

Cycle.g. Screenings Conveyor E-Stop will also stop Screenings Washer/Compactor


a. E-stopsb. Motor overtemp/overload

J. Functional Description - Grit Removal System

1. Select areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. The purpose of Grit Removal System is to remove heavy inorganic material from the

waste stream before it can accumulate in downstream processes increasing wear onequipment. The Grit Removal System consists of three separate processes. Heavy gritparticles in the flow stream will settle in Aerated Grit Tanks. Settled grit from the bottomof the Tanks is extracted using two Grit Pumps located in the container room of theHeadworks Building – Structure 405. The pumps discharge to a Grit Cyclone located inthe Headworks Building Screen Room – Structure 405. Organics overflow the Cycloneand return to the liquid treatment train and the settled grit material enters the GritClassifier where it is augured up a discharge tube, then gravity dropped to a wastecontainer for disposal. The Grit Classifier is interlocked to work in parallel with either ofthe two Grit Pumps.

3. The Grit Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control Station.4. With the Grit Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the select Grit Pump is energized and

will run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.5. With the Grit Pump Local Control Station in Off, the select Grit Pump is off.


6. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMIthe following shall be available from the HMI.

a. Grit Pumps run in parallel for the time as set by the Operator (initially set at 10minutes), and then turn off for the time set by the Operator (initially set at 20minutes). On/Off operation continues indefinitely.

7. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Manual at theHMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the selected Grit Pump.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Grit Pump.

8. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overload

9. The Grit Blowers shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local ControlStation.

10. With the Grit Blower Local Control Station in Hand, the select Grit Blower is energizedand will run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

11. With the Grit Blower Local Control Station in Off, the select Grit Blower is off.12. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI

the following shall be available from the HMI.

a. Grit Blowers operate in a Lead/Standby configuration controlled by a standardsequencer that cycles the Lead/Standby configuration based on Operator selection:

i. Manuallyii. Dailyiii. Weeklyiv. Runtime hours


a. Start – This selection energizes the selected Grit Blower.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Grit Blower.

14. Interlocks:


15. The Grit Classifier shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local ControlStation.

16. With the Grit Classifier Local Control Station in Hand, the Grit Classifier is energized andwill run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

17. With the Grit Classifier Local Control Station in Off, the select Grit Classifier is off.18. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. Grit Classifier shall run whenever either of the Grit Pumps are running and shallremain running for a timeout period (off delay) set by the Operator (initially set at 5minutes), after the Grit Pumps have stopped.



a. Start – This selection energizes the selected Grit Classifier.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Grit Classifier.

20. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. Grit Pump Running



a. E-stopsb. Grit Pump Failc. Grit Classifier Faild. Capacitance probe (405-LSH-0601) alarm

K. Functional Description – Odor Control System

1. Select areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Purpose of odor control system is to collect air from odor generating sources at head end

of plant to prevent odors from escaping to atmosphere. Collected odorous air will betreated with two stage bio-filtration system to remove odors, predominantly hydrogensulfide along with other compounds. Treated air stream will then be discharged toatmosphere.

3. Odor control system will collect odorous air from multiple locations at head end of plant,including:

a. Headworks Building: Screen Room and Container Roomb. Screw Pump enclosuresc. Aerated Grit Tanks, including effluent weirsd. Primary Clarifier distribution channele. Primary Clarifier effluent weirs (if Owner selects alternate 3)f. Aeration Basin splitter box (if Owner selects alternate 3)

4. All odorous air will be collected with a common odorous air blower which will dischargeinto first stage of Biofilter. First stage is designed to remove a large portion of hydrogensulfide components as well providing humidification for second stage of system. Thisstage consists of a chamber filled with plastic packing material. Water shall becontinuously circulated over packing material with vertical, corrosion resistant pumpwhich draws water from a sump in the first stage. Odorous air is blown through wetpacking where highly water soluble hydrogen sulfide is stripped and treated by biologicalmass formed on packing. Liquid level measurement within sump will control water supplyto system to ensure adequate water is available within sump for pump to circulate.Continuous blowdown of sump water from recirculation pump discharge shall beemployed to remove concentrations of minerals left behind from evaporated water andto allow for pH control. Operating pH will be checked quarterly and blowdown flow ratesmanually adjusted to zero in on target pH.

5. Air flows through first stage in top to bottom direction. Air leaves first stage saturatedwith moisture and is directed to second stage through openings in bottom of commonwall. Within second stage, air is blown through engineered media designed to supportbiomass population. Biomass colonies shall remove hydrogen sulfide as well as morecomplex odorous compounds in air stream. Second stage media shall be kept moist withtimer based irrigation system. Treated air is then discharged to atmosphere. Secondstage of system will be covered to reduce maintenance associated with leaves anddebris falling into the vessel.

6. Draining of vessel is accomplished by routing recirculation pump to blow-down drainpiping through manual valving until minimum pump level is reached. Evacuatingremaining water shall be done manually through access hatch using vactor truck or othermeans.


7. Motor operated damper will be installed in cold air branch (downstream of HeadworksBuilding) of system. Upon fall of biofilter supply air temperature below setpoint, motoroperated damper will close to minimize amount of cold air entering system.

8. Functionality of bio-filter Odor Control System shall be as described in Section 11990 –Equipment Control Panels.

9. Odorous Air Blower shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from Local Control Station.10. With Odorous Air Blower Local Control Station in Hand, Odorous Air Blower is energized

and will run continuously. Local speed potentiometer shall be used to change speed ofOdorous Air Blower. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

11. With Odorous Air Blower Local Control Station in Off, Odorous Air Blower is off.12. With Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Auto at HMI, following

control shall be available from HMI:

a. PLC shall monitor supply air temperature to Odorous Air Blower (701-TE-0701).Upon fall in temperature below adjustable set-point initially set at 50°F, motoroperated damper (405-FCV-0701) shall close. Damper shall not reopen unlessoutside ambient air temperature (405-TE-0781) has risen above ambient airtemperature for operator adjustable amount of time at which time damper shallopen, or operator may manually open damper.

13. With Odorous Air Blower Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector inManual at HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes Odorous Air Blower.b. Speed – Operator has ability to adjust speed of Odorous Air Blower.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes Odorous Air Blower.

14. Headworks PLC Panel shall send Enable signal to Biofilter Control Panel (701-LCP-0711) whenever Odorous Air Blower is energized; whether in Auto or Hand.

15. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. VFD Fail


a. E-stopsb. Odorous Air Blower Failc. Odorous Air Blower VFD Fail

L. Functional Description – Sludge Screening

1. Select areas of this process carry Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Functionality of Sludge Screen operation shall be as described in Section 11990 –

Equipment Control Panels.3. Sludge Screen Inlet Valves (405-FV-2201/2202) work in conjunction with operation of

Sludge Screening Equipment.4. With Local Control Station in Auto, following control options are available at HMI:

a. Provide selector switch to allow operator to determine where primary sludge will bepumped:


i. Sludge Screen 1ii. Sludge Screen 2 (if Owner selects Alternate 2)iii. Digester Complex

b. If either Sludge Screen is selected, Headworks PLC Panel shall send Enable signalto associated Sludge Screen Control Panel. Headworks PLC panel shall openassociated Sludge Screen Inlet Valve and confirm Open. Sludge Screen BypassValve shall be confirmed Closed, and Filtrate Pump Station shall not be in high highalarm. If all conditions are meet, Headworks PLC Panel shall enable PrimarySludge Pumping as described herein.

c. If Digester Complex is selected, Sludge Screen Inlet Valves shall be confirmedclosed.

d. If either condition is not satisfied, alarm signal shall be generated.

5. Provide operator adjustable Sludge Screen Inlet Pressure High and High High Alarm setpoints at HMI. Headworks PLC Panel shall send set point signals to both Sludge ScreenControl Panels.

6. If Owner selects Alternate 2 and second sludge screen is installed, if High High Alarmcondition is met, send alarm, send Enable signal to associated redundant Sludge ScreenControl Panel and open redundant Sludge Screen Inlet Valve. Once valve is confirmedopen, close failed Sludge Screen Inlet Valve.

7. If High High Alarm condition is met for redundant Sludge Screen and issued associatedwith first Sludge Screen failure has not been cleared, send critical alarm, and openSludge Screen Bypass Valve. Once Bypass Valve has been confirmed open, closefailed Sludge Screen Inlet Valve.

8. When Sludge Screen Bypass Valve (420-FV-2111) is open, then the Sludge Screen InletValve(s) shall be closed, and the Sludge Screen Equipment shall be idle.

9. Headworks PLC Panel shall monitor supply air pressure to Sludge Screen ControlPanels. Provide operator adjustable Low and Low Low set points at HMI. When Lowpressure set point is met, send alarm signal. When Low Low set point is met, sendcritical alarm signal, open Sludge Screen Bypass Valve, and simultaneously closeSludge Screen Inlet Valves.

10. If Headworks PLC Panel receives Moisture Probe alarm signal from either SludgeScreen Control Panel, immediately being opening redundant Sludge Screen Inlet Valveand simultaneously close Lead Sludge Screen Inlet Valve. If moisture alarm is receivedfrom redundant Sludge Screen Control Panel and alarm has not been cleared on otherSludge Screen, immediately being opening Sludge Screen Bypass Valve andsimultaneously closing Sludge Screen Inlet Valves.

11. If Sludge Screen Inlet Valve(s) are in manual at HMI, valves may be opened or closedmanually from HMI.

12. Sludge Screen Equipment shall auto restart.13. Plant air pressure shall be above Low Pressure set point Headworks PLC Panel sends

Enable signal to Sludge Screen Control Panels.14. Interlocks:

a. Plant Air Pressureb. For Primary Sludge Pumps, at least one of the following must be confirmed Open for

Primary Sludge Pumps to energize:

Sludge Screen Inlet Valve(s) Sludge Screen Bypass Valve.

c. 455-LSHH-5622; No High High level in Filtrate Pump Station.



a. Moisture Probe non-critical alarm and associated Sludge Screen Inlet Valve doesnot confirm Closed after PLC adjustable amount of time.

b. Sludge Screen Fail Alarm.c. Sludge Screen Bypass Valve failure to open or sludge pump high pressure alarm.

2.05 LUBE PUMP CONTROL STATION (400-CS-0311) (Reference Drawing: 009-N-3)

A. Existing panel requiring modifications. See Drawing Plan Notes in addition to requirementsspecified herein.

B. Panel:

1. Existing Indoor Enclosure2. NEMA 7


1. Remove existing enclosure label “LCP-1”2. Provide new enclosure label “LUBE PUMP

CONTROL STATION400-CS-0311”.


1. Remove existing wiring as noted on Drawings.2. Add I/O as required by P&ID.3. Provide functionality per Drawings and specified herein.

2.06 BAR SCREEN NO. 1 CONTROL PANEL (405-LCP-0401) (Reference Drawing: 009-N-4)


B. Panel:

1. Existing Indoor Enclosure2. NEMA 7.


1. Remove existing enclosure label “LCP 2”.2. Remove existing enclosure label “BAR SCREEN CONTROL PANEL”3. Provide new enclosure label: “BAR SCREEN NO. 1

LOCAL CONTROL PANEL 405-LCP-0401”

4. Remove existing “CONVEYOR” label above HOA switch, and provide new “SPARE”label in its place. HOA switch to remain.

5. Remove existing “CONVEYOR RUNNING” label above pilot light, and provide new“SPARE” label in its place. Pilot light to remain.


1. Remove existing wiring as noted on Drawings.2. Add I/O as required by P&ID.


3. Provide functionality per Drawings and specified herein.

2.07 BAR SCREEN NO. 2 CONTROL PANEL (405-LCP-0402) (Reference Drawing: 009-N-4)


B. Panel:

1. Existing Indoor Enclosure2. NEMA 7.


1. Remove existing enclosure label “LCP 3”.2. Remove existing enclosure labeled “BAR SCREEN CONTROL PANEL”3. Provide new enclosure label: “BAR SCREEN NO. 2

LOCAL CONTROL PANEL 405-LCP-0402”


1. Remove existing wiring as noted on Drawings.2. Add I/O as required by P&ID.3. Provide functionality per Drawings and specified herein.

2.08 BLOWER BUILDING PLC PANEL (436-PLC-1) (Reference Drawings: 008-I-1 and 3, 009-N-8, 9,10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 21, 61 and 63).

A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure2. NEMA 123. Free Standing Multiple Door4. 120 VAC Power Supply




Tag Device Description Initial Setting436-PLC-1 PLC Section 13450436-SW1 Ethernet Switch Provided by Owner 10/100/1000Mbps436-SW2 Ethernet Switch Provided by Owner 10/100/1000Mbps436UPS-1 UPS Section 13456 2 hours436-SRG-1 Surge Protector Section 13441436-PTCH-1 Patch Panel Section 13455 24 strand Single-mode


436-FAN-1 Fan Cooling fan436-MPR-x* Protection Relay Denite Pumps Qty = 4

*Motor Protection Relays provided by Pump Manufacturer - installed and wired in PLCPanel.




E. Functional Description – Primary Settling

1. Select areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Primary Settling shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.3. The purpose of the Primary Settling is to separate the solids from the clear water. Solids

will be pumped to primary sludge screens, gravity thickener, or digesters. Each PrimarySettling Tank will have a selector switch at the HMI indicating whether it is in service ornot.

4. The Drive Mechanism shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local ControlStation.

5. With the Drive Mechanism Local Control Station in Hand, the Drive Mechanism isenergized and will run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

6. With the Drive Mechanism Local Control Station in Off, the select Drive Mechanism isoff.


a. Each Drive Mechanism [that is in service] runs for 45 minutes (Operator settable),and the associated Primary Sludge Pump starts after 30 minutes and runs for 15minutes (Operator settable), after which the Drive Mechanism and Primary SludgePump both time out and stop. After 15 minutes, the cycle is repeated for thesubsequent Drive Mechanism/Pump combination and shall continue sequencingindefinitely (each Primary runs every 4 hours).

b. See Primary Sludge Pumping functional description (paragraph S below).

8. With the Drive Mechanism Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selectorin Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Drive Mechanism.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Drive Mechanism.

9. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. Electronic Shear Pin


a. E-stopb. Drive Mechanism Fail


11. An electronic shear pin shall be employed to estimate an over-torque condition and shutdown the Drive Mechanism and alert Operator.

a. Calculated using motor current and/or motor power.

12. Outdoor air temperature shall be monitored (405-TE-0781) and (510-TE-3781).

a. When outdoor air temperature falls to an adjustable set-point (initially set at 30°F) anOperator alert shall be indicated at the HMI.

b. The cold temperature alert will inform the Operator when to manually plug in heatersfor the Drive Mechanism housing to protect from freezing.

F. Functional Description – Primary Scum Removal

1. Select areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Primary Scum Removal shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power

fails.3. Scum is transferred to Scum Pit by motorized Scum Dippers via hand/off/auto controls.

Scum is removed from Scum Pit manually with vactor truck. Scum Pump has localhand/off/auto control and can pump liquid to either the Digester Complex or re-circulateit to Primary Settling Tank No. 4 (recirculation is generally used to dewater scum prior topumping). Selector switch in Primary Scum Pump Control Station located near top ofScum Pit, controls 3-way valve located at Scum Pump discharge. Scum Pump lowerswater level in Scum Pit to allow additional scum to flow through scum trough into ScumPit for removal.

4. Scum Dippers and Scum Pumping are generally considered manual operation with localoperator control and observation necessary. Exception to this being in winter whenoutside air temperature falls below Operator adjustable set-point (initially set at 30°F),and at least one Scum Dipper is in Auto, and Primary Scum Pump is also in Auto.Conditions being met, Scum Dipper(s) shall run for duration (operator adjustable –initially set for 2 minutes) and then stop at their “up” position with aid of existing position(limit) switch. Sequence shall be Scum Dipper No. 4, 3, 2, and then 1 with operatoradjustable “rest” time between each Scum Dipper in sequence. Cycle time duration(operator adjustable – initially set for 2 hours) shall initiate next sequence. PrimaryScum Pump shall run during entire Scum Dipper sequence including rest times, and isalso operator adjustable in both interval and duration.

5. Scum Dippers shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from Local Control Station.6. With Scum Dipper Local Control Station in Hand, Scum Dipper is energized and will run

continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.7. With Scum Dipper Local Control Station in Off, select Scum Dipper is off.8. With Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at HMI the

following shall be available from HMI.

a. See item 4 above.

9. With Scum Dipper Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Manual atHMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes Scum Dipper.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes Scum Dipper.

10. Interlocks:




a. E-stopb. Scum Dipper Fail (Motor Overload)

12. Outdoor air temperature shall be monitored (405-TE-0781) and (510-TE-3781).


13. Primary Scum Pump shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from Local ControlStation.

14. With Primary Scum Pump Local Control Station in Hand, Primary Scum Pump isenergized and shall run continuously. Hand is intended as primary method of operationfor this equipment.

15. With Primary Scum Pump Local Control Station in Off, Primary Scum Pump is off.16. With Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Auto at HMI the

following shall be available from HMI.


17. With Primary Scum Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector inManual at HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes Primary Scum Pump.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes Primary Scum Pump.

18. Selector switch controls 3-way valve located at Primary Scum Pump discharge.

a. Digester – This selection sends pumped scum to Gravity Thickener and TPSDPumping.

b. Mixing – This selection sends scum pit filtrate water back into Primary Settling TankNo. 4.

19. Interlocks:



a. E-stopb. Primary Scum Pump Fail (Motor Overload)

G. Functional Description – Primary Effluent Splitter Box

1. The purpose of the Primary Effluent Splitter Box is to split flow to the Aeration Trains.Influent flow comes predominantly from the Primary Clarifiers with contributing flowsfrom the Basin Drain Pump Station and the Filtrate Pump Station.

2. The Primary Effluent Splitter Box includes two raise to open gates for Train 1, and tworaise to open gates for Train 2.

3. The gates for each Aeration Train are for isolation only and are manually actuatedopened and closed locally.

4. Fixed weirs on the downstream side of the isolation gates will split flow equally when twoAeration Trains are in service. With both Trains in service, the operator is able to pass30mgd.


5. If only one Train is in service, it may be necessary during peak rainfall events to divert aportion of flow to the Aeration Basin Diversion Channel. A lower to open modulatinggate for the Aeration Basin Diversion Channel shall be electrically actuated andcontinuously modulate allowing flow above an Operator adjustable set point (initially setat 20mgd) to be diverted from the Selector Zones and step fed at the effluent end of theAeration Basin to Aeration Zone 1E.

6. The level sensor (431-LE/LIT-091E1) upstream of the Aeration Basin Diversion Gate willmeasure and control the amount of flow over the gate.

7. Diverted flow shall be a calculated value based upon gate level (as determined byposition feedback) and water level flowing over the gate (as measured by level sensor431-LE/LIT-091E1). Gate is modulated based on calculated flow over the gate andbypass flow set-point.

8. An Operator settable flow de-bounce timer shall be available at HMI where the high flowset-point (see above) will need to be exceeded before the Diversion Gate is opened.This allows for short duration flow increases to be absorbed - such as occurs when asecond Screw Pump is enabled in Headworks. Initial setting of the flow de-bounce timershall be 3 minutes, and shall be reset when flow drops below the high flow set-point.

9. Interlocks:

a. Gate Fail


a. Diversion Gate Fail to Openb. Diversion Gate Fail to Closec. High-High water level

11. Primary Effluent Splitter Gates shall be provided with Emergency Power when utilitypower fails.

H. Functional Description – Aeration Basins (Aeration Control in Selector Zones)

1. The purpose of the Aeration Diffusers is to provide mixing air and sufficient oxygentransfer for the activated sludge process.

2. There are two design criteria for sizing aeration required for the biological process:mixing air and process air. Mixing air is required to keep the microorganisms insuspension for access to food while process air is required to allow the microorganismsto uptake food in the mixed liquor. Depending on what the flows and loadings are eitherthe mixing air or the process air requirements will dictate the minimum amount ofaeration for the biological process.

3. For the six selector zones of the aeration basins that contain diffusers (Selector 1D-1Fand Selector 2D-2F), air will be supplied at the mixing air requirements to provide aminimal amount of air when needed based on operational observations of nutrientremoval performance.

4. Aeration to the selector zones will be controlled by manually operated butterfly valves toproduce sufficient mixing to keep mixed liquor suspended solids in suspension.

I. Functional Description – Aeration Basins (Aeration Control in Aerobic Zones 1A-1C and 2A-2C)

1. The purpose of the Aeration Diffusers is to provide mixing air and sufficient oxygentransfer for the activated sludge process.

2. There are two design criteria for sizing aeration required for the biological process:mixing air and process air. Mixing air is required to keep the microorganisms insuspension for access to food while process air is required to allow the microorganisms


to uptake food in the mixed liquor. Depending on what the flows and loadings are eitherthe mixing air or the process air requirements will dictate the minimum amount ofaeration for the biological process.

3. For the aerobic zones of the aeration basins (zones Aeration 1A-1C and Aeration 2A-2C), air will be supplied at the process air requirements, unless those requirements areless than the mixing air or minimum diffuser air requirements.

4. The HMI shall have a selector switch that shall determine whether ammonia D.O. controlor set-point D.O. control is being used to control air requirements to the diffusers.

a. Ammonia D.O. control – The Operator inputs a desired effluent ammoniaconcentration bandwidth for the aeration basin effluent. The effluent ammoniabandwidth will specify a minimum target ammonia concentration of 1 to 3 mg/L(adjustable at supervisor level), and a maximum effluent ammonia concentrationof 3 to 10 mg/L (adjustable at supervisor level). The effluent ammoniaconcentration will be based on the ammonia reading taken by the ammoniaprobe located at the effluent of Aerobic Zone 1F. The D.O. setpoint for eachaeration zone will be set at either the baseline D.O. setpoint or a minimum D.O.setpoint, with all D.O. setpoints adjustable at the supervisor level. The goal is tomaintain some residual ammonia in the effluent to minimize alkalinity addition.The baseline D.O. setpoints in the aeration zones, which will be adjustable at thesupervisor level, will initially be set as:

i. Aeration 1A and 2A: 1.0 mg/Lii. Aeration 1B and 2B: 2.0 mg/Liii. Aeration 1C and 2C: 3.0 mg/L

b. If the effluent ammonia drops below the minimum ammonia concentration of 1to 3 mg/L, the following D.O. setpoint modifications will occur:

i. Aeration 1A and 2A: decrease D.O. setpoint to 0.5 mg/L. Hold for 5 to 60minutes, with an initial hold time of 45 minutes (adjustable at supervisorlevel). If effluent ammonia remains below setpoint, proceed to second step.

ii. Aeration 1B and 2B: decrease D.O. setpoint to 0.5 mg/L. Hold for 5 to 60minutes, with an initial hold time of 45 minutes (adjustable at supervisorlevel). If effluent ammonia remains below setpoint, proceed to third step.

iii. Aeration 1C and 2C: decrease D.O. setpoint to 1.0 mg/L. Hold for 5 to 60minutes, with an initial hold time of 45 minutes (adjustable at supervisorlevel). If effluent ammonia remains below setpoint, continue to hold D.O.setpoints at minimum setpoints.

c. As the effluent ammonia concentration increases, the following D.O. setpointmodifications will occur as the ammonia exceeds the maximum ammoniaconcentration setpoint:

i. Aeration 1C and 2C: increase D.O. setpoint to 3.0 mg/L. Hold for 5 to 60minutes, with an initial hold time of 45 minutes (adjustable at supervisorlevel). If effluent ammonia continues to rise above maximum ammoniasetpoint, proceed to second step.

ii. Aeration 1B and 2B: increase D.O. setpoint to 2.0 mg/L. Hold for 5 to 60minutes, with an initial hold time of 45 minutes (adjustable at supervisorlevel). If effluent ammonia continues to rise above maximum setpoint,proceed to third step.

iii. Aeration 1A and 2A: increase D.O. setpoint to 1.0 mg/L. Hold for 5 to 60minutes, with an initial hold time of 45 minutes (adjustable at supervisorlevel). If effluent ammonia continues to rise above maximum setpoint,continue to hold D.O. setpoints at baseline setpoints.


d. Set-point D.O. control - The Operator inputs the desired D.O. set-points for eachof the six Aerobic Zones, Aeration 1A-1C and Aeration 2A-2C. Each of the sixzones (Aeration 1A-1C and Aeration 2A-2C) will have one DO control packageconsisting of a D.O. probe, electrically modulating valve, and thermal dispersionflow meter. The D.O. probes measure the basin D.O. concentration, and theairflow through the thermal dispersion flow meter is adjusted to meet the D.O.set-point through adjustment of the electrically modulating valves. Theelectrically actuated valves will then position based on a control loop until theD.O. probes reach the D.O. set-point or the minimum flow rate for mixingrequirements (consult with Engineer at time of startup for these values).

5. Interlocks:

a. Blower Control Loop (See Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels)

6. Critical Alarms for this process as follows:

a. Aeration Train No. 1 Low Low DO (3 locations).b. Aeration Train No. 2 Low Low DO (3 locations).

J. Functional Description – Aeration Basins (Aeration Control in Aerobic Zones 1D-1F)

1. The purpose of the Aeration Diffusers is to provide mixing air and/or sufficient oxygentransfer for the activated sludge process.

2. There are two design criteria for sizing aeration required for the biological process:mixing air and process air. Mixing air is required to keep the microorganisms insuspension for access to food while process air is required to allow the microorganismsto uptake food in the mixed liquor. Depending on what the flows and loadings are eitherthe mixing air or the process air requirements will dictate the minimum amount ofaeration for the biological process.

3. For the Aerobic Zones 1D-1F, air will be supplied for the mixing air requirements.4. Aeration to Aerobic Zones 1D-1F shall be controlled by manually operated butterfly

valves to produce sufficient mixing to keep mixed liquor suspended solids in suspension.

K. Functional Description – Aeration Basins (Selector Zone Mixing)

1. Mixers shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.2. The purpose of the Mixers is to provide a well mixed Selector Zone. Each Selector Zone

will have a Mixer that will operate any time the selected mode of Activated Sludgerequires the associated Aeration Train and Selector Zones within to be in service.

3. The Mixer shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control Station.4. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Hand, the Mixer is energized and will run

continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.5. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Off, the select Mixer is off.6. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. The Operator will be able to select which Mixers are required to be in service. It isrecommended by the Mixer manufacturer to provide minimum water submergencefor UV protection of the Mixer. Therefore, an adjustable minimum submergence setpoint at the HMI shall be available. Range: 0.00 – 20.00ft; initially set at 18.00ft.

b. If a Mixer is selected to be in service, it will remain energized as long as theminimum submergence set point is satisfied.

c. Level element in Selector Zone A will monitor minimum submergence for Mixer Aand F.


d. Level element in Selector Zone B will monitor minimum submergence for Mixer B,C, D and E.

e. If water level drops below minimum submergence for a particular level element, theassociated Mixers will de-energize and send a critical alarm to Operator.

f. If Aeration Train is taken out of service or mode of operation is changed which doesnot require operation of the mixer, mixer shall revert to the off state.

7. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Manual atthe HMI:a. Start – This selection energizes the Mixer.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Mixer.

8. Interlocks:

a. Selector Zone water level in Ab. Selector Zone water level in Bc. E-Stopd. Motor Overload


a. E-stopb. Mixer Failc. High-High water level in Ad. High-High water level in Be. Minimum Submergence breached in Af. Minimum Submergence breached in B

L. Functional Description – Aeration Basins (RAS Control)

1. This process works in conjunction with the RAS Pumping Process (see below).2. The purpose of RAS control at the Selector Zones is to proportionally distribute returned

solids to the Aeration Trains in service, based upon wastewater flow.3. The majority of the time the RAS will be split evenly if both Aeration Trains are in

service.4. Wastewater flow splits are available to the Operator to allow 1/3-2/3 split as well;

therefore the RAS split shall be set by the Operator at the HMI.5. RAS flow split will be monitored using flow meters (431-FE/FIT-1001 and 432-FE/FIT-

1202) in each Aeration Train RAS line used to modulate the downstream flow controlvalve (FCV).

6. The PLC will modulate the two flow control valves (431-FCV-1001 and 432-FCV-1202)to match flow rates to both Trains when they are both in service.

7. Flowmeters and FCV’s shall be located in the North Tunnel, south of the PrimaryClarifiers.

8. Individual RAS lines will extend from the tunnel underground to each Aeration Train.9. A drain line will allow each RAS line to be drained in the tunnel when a Train is taken out

of service, or when there is a freezing concern when the pipe is not flowing.10. The selector zone where the RAS is discharged will be controlled manually by the

Operator through adjustment of manual plug valves on the RAS discharge line, asfollows:

a. Operating in A2O mode, RAS will only be returned to near the influent end of thefirst Selector Zone (1A and 2A) along with the Primary Effluent flow.

b. Operating in the MUCT mode, RAS will only be returned to the influent end of thethird Selector Zone (1C and 2C). In this mode RAS is re-circulated to Selector Zone1A and 2A via the RAS Recirculation Pumps located in Selector Zone 1D and 2D.


11. The HMI shall have a selector switch to determine which Aeration Trains are in service,and open the associated RAS Flow Control Valves to start matching flow.

12. To minimize continuous hunting and seeking of the electric actuators, a RAS FlowAdjustment Timer will be operator adjustable at the HMI (range: 0.5 to 5 min., initialsetpoint 2 min).

13. When the timer expires, the PLC will read flowmeter flows, modulate the RAS ControlValves accordingly, and reset the RAS Flow Adjustment Timer.

14. Modulation of the RAS FCVs shall be made in a maximum of 5% position changeincrements, depending on how far out of balance they are.


a. Two FCV’s closed when RAS Pump(s) are in operation.b. FCV Failc. Flowmeter Fail

M. Functional Description – Aeration Basins (RAS De-nitrification)

1. The purpose of the RAS Denitrification Pumps is to transfer mixed liquor between zonesof the selector zones.

2. Denitrification of the RAS is accomplished in Selector Zones 1C-1D and Selector Zones2C-2D.

3. RAS is denitrified in these selector zones to provide a RAS mixed liquor with minimalnitrate in Selector Zones 1A-1B and Selector Zones 2A-2B.

4. Denitrified RAS is transferred from near the effluent end of Selector Zone 1D to theinfluent end of Selector Zone 1A and from near the effluent end of Selector Zone 2D tothe influent end of Selector Zone 2A via two separate submersible (mixer type) recyclepumps.

5. The flow rate of the RAS De-nitrification Pumps is dependent on maintaining appropriateanaerobic conditions in Selector Zone 1A and in Selector Zone 2A, as measured by theORP probes in those selector zones.

6. If the ORP probe indicates anoxic (nitrate present) conditions are present in SelectorZone 1A or Selector Zone 2A, the RAS Denitrification Pump flow rate to Selector Zone1A and Selector Zone 2A will be reduced to decrease the nitrate being recycled back tothe respective zone via a variable frequency drive (VFD).

7. Measurement of oxidation reduction potential (ORP) near the effluent end of SelectorZone 1A and Selector Zone 2A will be used as an indicator of whether proper anaerobicconditions are being achieved as required for Enhanced Biological PhosphorusRemoval, and the RAS Denitrification Pump flow rate will be adjusted based on theseORP readings.

8. The RAS Denitrification Pump shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the LocalControl Station.

9. With the RAS Denitrification Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the RASDenitrification Pump is energized and will run continuously. A local speed potentiometeris used to change speed of RAS Denitrification Pump. Hand is intended for maintenancepurposes only.

10. With the RAS Denitrification Pump Local Control Station in Off, the select RASDenitrification Pump is off.


a. The output signal from the ORP probe located in Selector Zone 1A and SelectorZone 2A shall be used to adjust the VFD for the associated RAS DenitrificationPump.

b. Each RAS Denitrification Pump will have a minimum and maximum flow rate.


c. The Operator will set a target ORP value and the RAS Denitrification Pumpassociated with that ORP probe pumps at the maximum rate it can while maintainingthe ORP at or below the target ORP value.

d. The control system will check ORP every 1-30 minutes (operator adjustable – initialvalue 5 minutes) to modulate the pump speed.

e. If ORP is more than (i.e., less negative than) the target value decrease pump rate by5% each increment until minimum pump rate is achieved.

f. If ORP is at target value (or if pump is at maximum and ORP is below target value)hold pump rate (speed) steady.

g. Selector Zone B liquid level must be above minimum level set point for pumps tooperate.

12. With the RAS Denitrification Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Autoselector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the RAS Denitrification Pump.b. Speed – Operator has the ability to adjust speed of RAS Denitrification Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the RAS Denitrification Pump.

13. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. Selector Zone B liquid level


a. E-stopsb. RAS Denitrification Pump Failc. RAS Denitrification Pump VFD Fail

N. Functional Description – Aeration Basins (Mixed Liquor De-nitrification)

1. The purpose of the Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pumps is to transfer mixed liquorbetween zones of the aeration basins and selector zones.

2. Denitrification of the Mixed Liquor is accomplished in Selector Zones 1E-1F and SelectorZones 2E-2F.

3. Nitrified mixed liquor is transferred from Aeration Zone 1B to Selector Zone 1E and fromAeration Zone 2B to Selector Zone 2E via two separate Mixed Liquor Denitrificationpumps.

4. The flow rate of these pumps is controlled based on the apparent amount of de-nitrification occurring in Selector Zones 1E-1F and in Selector Zones 2E-2F.

5. If the nitrified mixed liquor recycled by the Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pumps providesmore nitrate than can be denitrified in the selector zones, the mixed liquor pump flowrate will be reduced to lower the energy requirements of the system via a variablefrequency drive (VFD).

6. Measurement of oxidation reduction potential (ORP) near the effluent end of SelectorZone 1F and Selector Zone 2F will be used as an indicator for the amount ofdenitrification occurring in the selector zones, and the Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pumpflow rate will be adjusted based on those ORP readings.

7. The Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto fromthe Local Control Station.

8. With the Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the MixedLiquor Denitrification Pump is energized and will run continuously. A local speedpotentiometer is used to change speed of Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump. Hand isintended for maintenance purposes only.


9. With the Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump Local Control Station in Off, the select MixedLiquor Denitrification Pump is off.


a. The output signal from the ORP probe located in Selector Zone 1F and SelectorZone 2F shall be used to adjust the VFD for the associated Mixed LiquorDenitrification Pump.

b. Each Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump will have a minimum and maximum flowrate, based on the pump speed.

c. The Operator will set a target ORP value and the ML Denitrification Pumpassociated with that ORP probe pumps at the maximum rate it can while maintainthe ORP at or below the target ORP value.

d. The Control System will check ORP every 1-30 minutes (operator adjustable – initialvalue 5 minutes) to modulate the pump speed.

e. If ORP is less than (i.e., more negative than) the target value increase pump rate by5% each increment until maximum pump rate is achieved.

f. If ORP is at target value (or if pump is at maximum and ORP is below target value)hold pump rate where it is.

g. If ORP is above (i.e., less negative than) target value decrease pump rate 10% eachincrement until minimum flow rate is achieved.

h. Selector Zone B liquid level must be above minimum level set point for pumps tooperate.

11. With the Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and theManual/Auto selector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump.b. Speed – Operator has the ability to adjust speed of Mixed Liquor Denitrification

Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump.

12. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. Selector Zone B liquid level


a. E-stopsb. Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump Failc. Mixed Liquor Denitrification Pump VFD Fail

O. Functional Description – Aeration Basins (Gate Control)

1. Gates shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.2. The purpose of the gates in the Aeration Basin is to segregate zones for Operational

flexibility of each Aeration Train.3. The gates for each Aeration Train are manually controlled motor-actuated opened and

closed locally.4. Gates have local position indication only.

P. Functional Description – Aeration Basins (Aeration Blower Control)

1. Aeration Blowers shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.


2. The purpose of the Aeration Basin Blower System is to provide mixing air and sufficientoxygen transfer to the aerobic zones.

3. Aeration Basin Blower Control strategy shall be based on maintaining a constant blowerheader pressure as measured by 436-PIT-1401.

4. See Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels for operational functionality.

Q. Functional Description – Mixed Liquor Splitter Box (Gate Control)

1. Gates shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.2. The purpose of the gates in the Mixed Liquor Splitter Box is to split the flow to each Final

Settling Tank that is in service.3. The gates for the Mixed Liquor Splitter Box are manually controlled motor-actuated

opened and closed locally.4. Gates have local position indication only.

R. Functional Description – Primary Sludge Pumping

1. Primary Sludge Pumps shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.2. This process works in conjunction with Primary Settling (see paragraph 2.05 F above).3. This process works in conjunction with Primary Sludge Screening (see paragraph 2.04 M

above).4. Purpose of Primary Sludge Pumps is to convey primary sludge from Primary Clarifier

Sludge Wells to either Sludge Screen, or bypass Sludge Screens to be sent directly toGravity Thickener or Anaerobic Digester feed system.

5. If Primary Sludge is pumped directly to Gravity Thickener or Anaerobic Digester feedsystem, primary sludge will be directed through existing Primary Sludge Grinders (or itsassociated bypass).

6. Each pump is assigned one Primary Clarifier Sludge Well which collects sludge from twosets of tank flight and chain collectors.

7. Sludge Wells are arranged such that two draw-off pipes are on opposite sides of acommon wall. Close proximity allows for ease of cross connecting pump suction pipes.In the event one pump is out of service, adjacent pump can be manually valved to drawfrom adjacent Sludge Well. Valves that allow pump suction pipe crossover are knife gatevalves and not automated.

8. All Primary Sludge Pumps discharge into a common header.9. One magnetic flowmeter (420-FE/FIT-2111) on common primary sludge pump discharge

header shall monitor individual pump flow prior to downstream processes.10. Flowmeter shall allow for monitoring of individual pump performance, since pumps are

adjustable speed and shall allow for individual basin removal rates, and in the event ofscreening sludge through a Strain Press will allow for pump to adjust speed to providemore head as head-loss across screen increases.

11. Destination of sludge shall be determined at HMI or by local valve manual control:

a. Sludge Screensb. Digester Complex/Gravity Thickener

12. Following Primary Sludge flowmeter, electrically actuated plug valves (Sludge ScreenInlet Valve 1 and 2 and Sludge Screen Bypass Valve) will divert flow from commonheader to Sludge Screens or toward Digester Complex.

13. Manually actuated valves at Gravity Thickener will direct flow into Gravity Thickener orto digester feed system.

14. Primary Sludge Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from Local ControlStation.

15. With Primary Sludge Pump Local Control Station in Hand, Primary Sludge Pump isenergized and will run continuously. Operator has local control of speed usingpotentiometer. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.


16. With Primary Sludge Pump Local Control Station in Off, select Primary Sludge Pump isoff.


a. See Primary Settling functional description (paragraph 2.05 F above).b. Provide following adjustable operator inputs at HMI:

i. Flowrate: When Primary Sludge Pump is energized, PLC shall control pumpspeed to maintain flowrate set point through magnetic flow meter (420-FE/FIT-2111). Input flowrate in gallons per minute (gpm). Initially set to 100gpm.

ii. Cycles per Day: Number of times per day each Primary Sludge Pump shalloperate. Set number of cycles with whole numbers. Initially set at 6.

iii. Pumping Interval Timer: Amount of time each pump will operate per cycle. Settimer to whole numbers. Initially set at 15 min.

c. PLC will be set up to always sequence through pump line up; 1, 2, 3 and 4. Initially,one Primary Sludge Pump will operate every 15min with no lag time betweenpumping events, creating virtually a continuous flow to Sludge Screens or DigesterComplex.

d. Based on set points, PLC shall equally space pump cycles over 24 hour period. Ifnumber of cycles is selected with amount of run time per cycle exceeds an even splitover a 24 hour period, a pop window will inform operator to adjust either number ofCycles or Pumping Interval Timer.

18. With the Primary Sludge Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Autoselector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Primary Sludge Pump.b. Speed – Operator shall have ability to control speed of Primary Sludge Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Primary Sludge Pump.

19. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. Pump High Discharge Pressured. One of the following conditions must be met for pump operation:

i. Sludge Screen Bypass Valve Openii. Sludge Screen No. 1 Inlet Valve Openiii. Sludge Screen No. 2 Inlet Valve Open


a. E-stopb. Primary Sludge Pump Failc. Primary Sludge Pump VFD Fail

S. Functional Description – Sludge Grinding

1. Primary Sludge Grinders shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility powerfails.

2. This process works in conjunction with Primary Sludge Pumping (see paragraph 2.05 Sabove).


3. Sludge Grinders shall function in a Lead/Standby configuration with alternation being amanual operation as the valving is not automated.

4. Screen Sludge / Grinder Sludge selector switch shall be available at the HMI.5. With selector switch in Screen Sludge position (pumping to the sludge screens):

a. Sludge Screen Bypass Valve to divert primary sludge to Digester Complex shallbe closed

b. One Sludge Screen Inlet Valves shall be open.c. Primary Sludge Pumping will initiate.

6. If neither Screen is available for operation (either through alarms or the screen(s) is inOFF position for maintenance), this will initiate automatic switch to pump to DigesterComplex by:

a. Sludge Screen Bypass Valve shall open and Sludge Screen Inlet Valves shallclose.

b. Once Sludge Screen Bypass Valve is confirmed open, Lead Primary SludgeGrinder shall start.

7. With selector switch in Grinder Sludge position (pumping to the Digester Complex):

a. Sludge Screen Bypass Valve opens.b. Sludge Screen Inlet Valves close.c. Lead Primary Sludge Grinder shall start.

8. As currently piped, operator will have option to divert unscreened primary sludge flowthrough grinders when Sludge Screens are not available.

9. Since diverting flow to Digester Complex is not likely to happen without first beingscreened, valving to divert flow to grinders as well as valves to divert flow to eithergrinder will remain manually actuated.

10. Initially, valves will be set to route flow through Grinders in the event flow is diverted toDigester Complex.

11. Valves shall be set to route flow through Primary Sludge Grinder No. 1, with PrimarySludge Grinder No. 2 isolated.

12. Alternation of the Primary Sludge Grinders will be a manual operation, including abypass of both grinders.

13. Primary Sludge Grinder that will be ready when Grinder Sludge is selected shall bedetermined by which local control station is in Auto.

14. Lead Primary Sludge Grinder shall energize when Sludge Screen Bypass Valve is open.15. When Lead Primary Grinder fails (or pumping against a closed valve), this will cause

high pressure at sludge pump discharge and high pressure alarm condition from PrimarySludge Pumps. This alarm will stop Primary Sludge Pumping until:

a. Failed Sludge Grinder is reset.b. Standby Primary Sludge Grinder is switched to Auto position.

16. Once alarms have been reset and either option has been cleared, Grinder Sludgeselector will be reset and sludge pumping shall continue.

17. With respective Local Control Station in On; Grinder is energized. Hand is intended formaintenance purposed only.

18. If attempt is made at HMI to divert flow to new location by attempting to close openedaforementioned valve before new directed valve is confirmed open, pop up window willdisplay informing operator to open desired valve before closing currently open valve.

T. Functional Description – Alkalinity - Hydrated Lime System


1. The purpose of the Hydrated Lime Feed System is to add alkalinity to the activatedsludge process by chemical addition. This is required for the nitrification process.

2. Hydrated Lime slurry will be added to the end of pass A of each aeration train until thedesired alkalinity is measured by the pH probe (located in Pass B) in the system.

3. pH monitoring will be the main tool to control alkalinity addition.4. Hydrated Lime Feed System consists of one packaged system.5. A second packaged system shall be provided if Alternate No. 4 is selected.6. Each system includes: lime storage silo, lime feeder, slurry prep tank, slurry aging tank,

lime slurry pump, dosing assemblies, piping, and self-contained controls.7. A detailed operational description of the Hydrated Lime Feed System functionally is

located in Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels. General Auto operation isdescribed as follows:

a. Initial set-point of alkalinity addition shall be determined based on a grab sample ofmixed liquor in Aeration Zone 1E.

b. The sample shall be filtered and tested for alkalinity and pH.c. With alkalinity at or above 100 mg/L, determine the pH.d. Enter initial set-point of value 0.2 higher than determined pH in previous step.e. Initial pH setting should be greater than 7.0.f. In Auto, the amount of alkalinity to be added to the process is determined by the pH

probe. pH set-point shall be operator setable.g. Lime slurry is continuously produced.h. The dosing assembly meters and controls how much lime enters the process through

an electrically actuated pinch valve.i. The valve modulates based on the pH set-point in the aeration zone.j. The remaining lime re-circulates into the slurry aging tank.

8. The Operator shall have available at the HMI all data from the Hydrated Lime FeedSystem as described in Section 11240 – Lime System – Schedule 1.

9. All process piping shall be protected from freezing by heat tracing or other means.10. System interlocks as determined by System Manufacturer.11. Critical alarms as follows:

a. Slurry Tank LSLLb. Lime Silo Low-Low level.

2.09 FERRIC CHLORIDE CONTROL PANEL (440-LCP-4801, -4802, -4803, -4804, 4805)(Reference Drawing: 009-N-48)

A. Panel:

1. Existing Indoor Enclosure.

B. Back of Panel Devices:

1. Add I/O as required by P&ID.2. Provide functionality per Drawings and specified herein.

2.10 SOLIDS BUILDING PLC PANEL (455-PLC-1) (Reference Drawings: 008-I-1 and 3, 009-N-18,19, 20, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, 30, 44, 45, 56 and 62).

A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure2. NEMA 12


3. Free Standing Multiple Door4. 120 VAC Power Supply




Tag Device Description Initial Setting455-PLC-1 PLC Section 13450455-SW1 Ethernet Switch Provided by Owner 10/100/1000Mbps455-SW2 Ethernet Switch Provided by Owner 10/100/1000Mbps455UPS-1 UPS Section 13456 2 hours455-SRG-1 Surge Protector Section 13441455-PTCH-1 Patch Panel Section 13455 24 strand Single-mode455-FAN-1 Fan Cooling fan455-MPR-x* Protection Relay Pumps Qty = 4455-LC-x Float Mode** Level Controller Qty = 3

*Motor Protection Relays provided by Pump Manufacturer - installed and wired in PLCPanel.

**Float Mode Controllers shall be back of panel mounted hardwired mechanically latchingrelays which energize/ de-energize the associated equipment regardless to status requiredby PLC.


1. FOB Operated doors shall have proximity switch alerting Operator to structure intrusion.

a. Including one (1) proximity switch from Structure 475 (Chlorination Building).

2. Operator shall have ability to silence door alarms during business hours using time ofday/day of week matrix.

E. Functional Description – Final Settling

1. Final Settling shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.2. This process works in conjunction with RAS Pumping.3. A fourth Final Settling Tank shall be included as a future installation in all HMI/PLC

programming.4. The purpose of the Final Settling is to separate the solids from the clear water after the

Activated Sludge Process in order to return a portion of the solids back to the head of theActivated Sludge Process and/or waste a portion of the solids.

5. Scum removed from the Final Settling process shall flow by gravity to the existing FinalScum Lift Station

6. Clear water will flow by gravity to the Final Settling Tank Effluent Manhole.


7. Settled solids will be conveyed from the bottom of the clarifiers by a RAS/WAS PumpingSystem located in the lower level of the Solids Building.

8. The Final Settling Mechanisms are constant speed and operate continuously when inservice.

9. The Final Settling Mechanisms shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the LocalControl Station.

10. With the Final Settling Mechanism Local Control Station in Hand, the selected FinalSettling Mechanism is energized and will run continuously. Hand is intended formaintenance purposes only.

11. With the Final Settling Mechanism Local Control Station in Off, the select Final SettlingMechanism is off.

12. With the Final Settling Mechanism Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Autoselector in Auto at the HMI the following shall be available from the HMI.

a. The selected Final Settling Mechanism is energized and will run continuously.

13. With the Final Settling Mechanism Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Autoselector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the selected Final Settling Mechanism.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Final Settling Mechanism.

14. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. High Torque Cutout

15. Critical Alarms:

a. E-Stopb. High Torque Alarmc. High Torque Cutout

F. Functional Description – Disinfection (Sodium Hypochlorite)

1. Disinfection shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.2. Sodium Hypochlorite (SHC) is a chemical compound with formula NaClO.3. Purpose of Disinfection is to kill pathogenic organisms by introducing Sodium

HypoChlorite (SHC) into the treatment process.4. This is accomplished by pumping flow-paced dosing of SHC into Chlorine Contact Tank

inlet.5. Flow pacing shall be based on sum of influent flow signal plus product of operator

adjustable scaling factor.6. Three vertical tanks hold SHC until it is pumped by two metering pumps that operate in

Lead/Standby configuration which shall alternate sequence monthly or manually at HMI.7. Ultrasonic level sensors shall measure liquid level in each SHC Tank.8. All three SHC Tanks are connected by common discharge header.9. Tank filling is by truck and requires Tank manual header valves to be in open.10. Tank Level High, Tank Level High High and Tank Level Low Alarm set points shall be

operator adjustable inputs at HMI. Alarm signals shall be displayed on HMI and sent toSHC Tank Truck Fill Control Panel (455-LCP-1901) located at filling connection point.

11. Third metering pump is connected to SHC system for use during any potentialfilamentous breakout. This pump shall be dedicated to providing SHC injection into RASdischarge header.


12. Chlorinating RAS shall be accomplished by pumping flow-paced dosing of SHC into RASdischarge header.

13. Flow pacing shall be based on sum of RAS flow.14. Provide operator adjustable inputs for dosing rate at HMI for both disinfection and

filamentous control.15. System shall be controlled from PLC.

a. Manual – At HMI, the following control options are available from HMI.

Enable – This selection enables selected SHC Metering Pump.Disable – This selection disables selected SHC Metering Pump.


a. Pump Fail

G. Functional Description – Basin Drain Pump Station

1. Draining large basins in a reasonable amount of time requires a dedicated pump stationwith drains from each Aeration Basin and each Final settling Tank emptying into acommon basin drain line which enters the wetwell of the Basin Drain Pump Station.

2. The station will convey its flow to the Primary Clarifier Effluent Channel.3. Pressure transmitter 455-PIT-2011 located on the discharge of the Pump shall be used

to alarm Operator and stop Pump if pressure reaches an Operator adjustable set-pointlevel (PAH) initially set at 35psi. The high pressure alarm indicates that a downstreammanual valve is closed or has failed.

4. The high capacity pump installed in the station will be a submersible centrifugal pump.5. The pump is specified with an inverter duty motor that will closely match the inflow rate

when draining a basin by maintaining a constant wetwell level.6. The pump will be sized to drain a Final Settling Tank in about an 8 hr shift;

approximately 2000gpm depending on the driving head.7. A restart delay shall protect the pump from discharge pipe draining back through the

pump.8. Backup Float Control shall be provided in the event of an ultrasonic transducer failure.9. The Basin Drain Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control

Station.10. With the Basin Drain Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the Basin Drain Pump is

energized and will run continuously. Operator has local control of speed usingpotentiometer. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

11. With the Basin Drain Pump Local Control Station in Off, the Basin Drain Pump is off.12. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. The pump station will be operated with a varying wetwell level to allow the BasinDrain Pump to closely match the influent flow rate and to follow the inherenthead/flow characteristics of the pumping system.

b. An ultrasonic level sensor will monitor the Pump Station wetwell level and transmitlevel signals to the plant PLC.

c. The PLC will use the level signal for pump control.d. If the transmitter faults or the PLC fails, the PLC will alarm and switch to the backup

float system.e. Provide adjustable Pump On and Pump Off set points at HMI.f. Pump will start when Pump On set point is met.g. Pump speed at start will be pre-selected setting in VFD; initially set to 80%.h. Once Basin Drain Pump is called to run pump speed will vary to maintain the

adjustable wetwell level set point.


13. With the Basin Drain Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selectorin Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Basin Drain Pump.b. Speed – Operator shall have ability to control speed of Basin Drain Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Basin Drain Pump.

14. Backup Float Control

a. Auto – If Wetwell level rises to adjustable set point, or float, LSHH, pump control willswitch to Backup Float Control mode.

b. Basin Drain Pump will start at preset speed in VFD and continue to operate untilwetwell level drops to respective float switch LSLL in wetwell.

c. Basin Drain Pump will continue to operate in Backup Float Control mode untilsystem is reset by the operator.

d. Backup Float Control mode will be configured to operate independent of the PLC.

15. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. Pump High Discharge Pressure


a. E-stopb. Basin Drain Pump Failc. Basin Drain Pump VFD Faild. Float Mode activated.

H. Functional Description – Return Activated Sludge (RAS) Pumping

1. RAS Pumping shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.2. The purpose of the RAS Pumping System is to remove solids that have settled in the

Final Settling Tanks and either return them to the Selector Zones or waste them to theGravity Belt Thickeners (GBTs).

3. There are four RAS Pumps installed as part of this project; one dedicated to each FinalSettling Tank and one permanently installed redundant.

4. HMI/PLC programming shall include future RAS Pump No. 5.5. Four RAS lines will enter the lower level of the structure and tie into a common header.6. Each RAS Pump is connected to the common header with manual isolation valves.7. The valves allow plant staff to determine which of the two RAS pumps closest to the

incoming RAS line will convey the return sludge.8. Initially RAS Pump No. 1 will be selected to draw from Final Settling Tank No. 1, and so

on down the line where the fourth pump is redundant.9. To exercise the redundant pump, valves can be switched to include the redundant pump

in the aforementioned line-up.10. In addition to manual valve selection for a RAS Pump to pump return sludge from a

settling tank, plant staff will be required to manually energize the appropriate RASPumps at the HMI or locally.

11. Total RAS removal rate will be based on a percentage of the influent flow.12. An equal portion of the total RAS removal required will be withdrawn by the number of

RAS pumps in service.13. Flow meters on the discharge of each RAS Pump will control pump speed to maintain

desired removal rates.


14. All RAS Pumps discharge into a common header.15. The majority of the flow will be diverted to Selector Zones, while a portion of the flow will

be wasted as Waste Activated Sludge (WAS).16. WAS GBT Feed Pumps are connected to draw-off the common RAS Pump discharge

header.17. In the event of chlorinating the RAS, Sodium Hypochlorite would be injected into the

common RAS discharge header (see Disinfection functional description Paragraph 2.06G).

18. The RAS Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local ControlStation.

19. With the RAS Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the RAS Pump is energized and willrun continuously. Operator has local control of speed using potentiometer. Hand isintended for maintenance purposes only.

20. With the RAS Pump Local Control Station in Off, the RAS Pump is off.21. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. The operator inputs desired total RAS flow as a percent of Forward Flow at the HMI(range 70-150%, initial setpoint 75%).

b. Operator will manually select which RAS Pumps will be in service, to serve whichFinal Settling Tank is in service.

c. Knowing the required total RAS flow and the number of settling tanks in service, thePLC will calculate the desired RAS flow for respective RAS Pump VFDs to maintain.

d. To avoid continuous adjustment of RAS Pump speed an adjustable set point timer atthe HMI in which the PLC will check the influent flow and adjust the RAS Pumpspeed/flow rate accordingly (initially set Influent Flow Read Timer to 5 minutes(Range: 1 – 60 minutes, whole numbers only)).

e. WAS GBT Feed Pump flow is taken from common RAS Pump discharge header ata point downstream of the RAS Pump Flowmeters. Therefore, if WAS GBT FeedPumps are energized, PLC will monitor the WAS GBT Feed Pump Flow meters andtake the WAS flowrate into account by proportionally increasing the RAS pumpingrate for all RAS Pumps in service.

22. With the RAS Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector inManual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the RAS Pump.b. Speed – Operator shall have ability to control speed of RAS Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the RAS Pump.

23. Interlocks:

a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. Minimum of one RAS Flow Control Valve confirmed opend. RAS Pump discharge flow confirmed (30 sec. delay).


a. E-stopb. RAS Pump Failc. RAS Pump VFD Faild. RAS Pump running and no Flow detected at respective flowmeter.

I. Functional Description – Waste Activated Sludge (WAS) Gravity Belt Thickener (GBT)Pumping


1. The purpose of the WAS GBT Feed System is to pump waste activated sludge (WAS)and final scum (SSM) to the gravity belt thickeners in Structure 455.

2. This process works in conjunction with RAS Pumping (see paragraph 2.06 I).3. This process works in conjunction with Final Scum Lift Station (see paragraph 2.06 K).4. This process works in conjunction with WAS GBT operation (see Section 11990 –

Equipment Control Panels).5. This process works in conjunction with DSD GBT operation (see Section 11990 –

Equipment Control Panels).6. A WAS Flowmeter is located on each WAS GBT discharge line.7. WAS is sourced from the RAS discharge header.8. The GBT Feed Pumps are variable speed rotary lobe pumps which operate when called

to run by the GBT (see Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels for operation).9. Each pump is capable of serving any of the three GBTs (2-WAS, 1-DSD) by way of

manual valving.10. WAS pumps are arranged in the following manner:

a. WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 1 shall be primarily dedicated to WAS GBT No. 1b. WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 2 shall be primarily dedicated to WAS GBT No. 2c. WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 3 shall serve as a swing pump and may also serve the

DSD GBT if called to do so (see Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels foroperation).

11. The WAS Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local ControlStation.

12. With the WAS Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the WAS Pump is energized and willrun continuously. Operator has local control of speed using potentiometer. Hand isintended for maintenance purposes only.

13. With the WAS Pump Local Control Station in Off, the WAS Pump is off.14. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. In Batch mode, the Operator inputs Gallons/Batch waste activated sludge to bethickened at the GBT Control Panel.

b. GBT Control Panel shall have a selector switch to identify which WAS GBT FeedPump to run.

c. Pump shall be called to run by GBT cycle initiate push button.d. Pump speed shall be manually adjusted at GBT control panel.e. Pumped sludge flow shall be totalized. Upon summation of flow reaching

gallon/batch set-point, initiation of GBT stop cycle shall commence.f. Pumps shall also stop when dictated by GBT shutdown cycle.g. In Timer mode, the Operator inputs the length of time to operate the GBT.h. The selected WAS GBT Feed Pump will initiate at a pre-determined (operator

selectable) speed.i. Pump shall stop when the timer set-point is reached.j. See Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels for GBT detailed operation.

15. With the WAS Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector inManual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the WAS Pump.b. Speed – Operator shall have ability to control speed of WAS Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the WAS Pump.

16. Interlocks:


a. E-Stopb. Motor Overloadc. Minimum of one WAS Isolation Valve or corresponding WAS Flushing Valve

confirmed open.d. Minimum of one RAS Pump running.e. WAS Pump discharge flow confirmed (30 sec. delay).


a. E-stopb. WAS Pump Failc. WAS Pump VFD Faild. WAS Pump running and no Flow detected at respective flowmeter.

J. Functional Description – Final Scum Lift Station

1. The purpose of Final Scum Pumping is to pump scum from the Final Settling Tanks toeither the WAS GBTs or Gravity Thickener.

2. This process works in conjunction with WAS GBT Pumping (see paragraph 2.06. J).3. This process works in conjunction with Final Settling Tanks (see paragraph 2.06. F).4. The lift station consists of a wetwell and three centrifugal pumps.5. One pump will be assigned as the Final Scum Mixing Pump solely to circulate the

contents of the wet well.6. The other two pumps will be Final Scum Pump No. 1 and 2 to convey wet well contents

to either the WAS GBTs or the Gravity Thickener.7. Final Scum Pump No. 2 has the ability to be manually valved to serve as a redundant to

the Final Scum Mixing Pump.8. Submersible pressure transducer shall monitor wet well level.9. Backup LSLL float will serve a redundant pump shut off in the event of a transducer

failure.10. The Final Scum (or Mixing) Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the

Local Control Station.11. With the Final Scum (or Mixing) Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the Final Scum (or

Mixing) Pump is energized and will run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenancepurposes only.

12. With the Final Scum (or Mixing) Pump Local Control Station in Off, the Final Scum (orMixing) Pump is off.


a. Provide adjustable Duration/Timer for Final Scum Mixing Pump which allowsoperator to input duration between wet well circulation events, as well as the lengthof the wet well mixing event. (Duration Range: 0-24hrs, allow two decimals, TimerRange: 1-99mins, whole numbers). Initially set Duration at 1hr and Timer at 15mins.

b. Upon initiation of WAS GBT operation, Duration timer will be interrupted and FinalScum Mixing Pump will energize.

c. When Timer has expired, Final Scum Mixing Pump will de-energize and Lead FinalScum Pump will convey wet well contents to WAS GBT Feed Pump suction headeruntil Pump Off set point is achieved. Duration/Timer will reset once wet well PumpOff set point has been achieved.

d. Provide Final Scum Pump 1/2 Selector Switch at HMI to determine Lead Final ScumPump to pump contents to WAS GBTs or Digester Complex. Provide Final ScumMixing Pump/Pump 2 Selector Switch at HMI to determine which pump will serve atthe Final Scum Wet Well Mixing Pump.

e. If Final Scum Pump No. 2 is valved to serve as the wet well mixing pump, and FinalScum Pump No. 2 is already selected as Lead Final Scum Pump, when the operator


tries to select Final Scum Pump No. 2 as the Mixing Pump, a pop up window willappear indicating this is already the Lead Final Scum Pump, and that the operates isrequired to select Pump No. 1 as the Lead Final Scum Pump before Final ScumPump No. 2 can serve as the Mixing Pump.

f. Assigning Final Scum Pump No. 2 as the Mixing Pump requires a manual valvechange at the Lift Station.

g. Provide High Wet Well Water Level, Minimum Final Scum Wet Well Level, PumpOff, and LSLL set points at HMI.

14. With the Final Scum (or Mixing) Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and theManual/Auto selector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Final Scum (or Mixing) Pump.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Final Scum (or Mixing) Pump.

15. Interlocks:

a. Low-low water levelb. Motor overload


a. Pump Fail

K. Functional Description – WAS Thickening

1. The purpose of the WAS Thickening system is to thicken waste activated sludge andfinal scum using two gravity belt thickeners.

2. This process works in conjunction with WAS GBT Pumping (see paragraph 2.06. J).3. This process works in conjunction with Thickened WAS (TWAS) Pumping (see

paragraph 2.06. N).4. This process works in conjunction with High Pressure W3 System (see paragraph 2.07.

Z).5. This process works in conjunction with Polymer Feed System (see paragraph 2.08. H).6. The thickened product (approximately 5% solids), will be discharged into a chute directly

connected to a progressing cavity pump.7. TWAS will then be pumped to the Digester Complex.8. The WAS Thickening System consists of two Gravity Belt Thickeners (GBT),

accessories and hydraulic control system for the GBT and a washwater systemconsisting of a solenoid on off valve and accessories.

9. A CCTV is placed above each GBT for monitoring purposes only. Viewable in OperatorControl Room in Administration Building – Structure 300.

10. WAS GBT No. 1 is the existing relocated GBT from the Digester Complex.11. A new control panel will be provided for the existing (relocated) GBT.12. Digested sludge may be thickened using WAS GBT No. 2.13. For GBT Operation see Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels.14. Operator shall manually initiate GBT cycle.15. Operator shall manually initiate wash cycle for GBTs after power failure.16. Each GBT Control Station shall have the following functionality:

a. Feed Pump speed control.b. Feed Pump speed display feedback.c. Polymer Pump speed control.d. Polymer Pump speed display feedback.e. Belt drive speed control.f. Belt drive speed display feedback.


17. Interlocks:

a. GBT Washwater Valve Openb. Polymer Feed System Availablec. Filtrate Wetwell Level (below LSHH)d. Low Pressure Washwatere. Belt Brokenf. Belt Mis-Aligng. High Level Sludge on Belth. Motor Overloadi. LSHH in TWAS Chutej. Low Hydraulic Pressure for Belt Tensioning Systemk. LSHH in Filtrate Wetwell

L. Functional Description – DSD Thickening

1. The purpose of the DSD Thickening system is to thicken digested sludge and serve as abackup to the WAS GBT (waste activated sludge and secondary scum) using a gravitybelt thickener.

2. This process works in conjunction with Thickened Digested Sludge (TDSD) Pumping(see paragraph 2.06 O).

3. This process works in conjunction with DSD GBT Feed Pumps (see paragraph 2.07 M).This process works in conjunction with High Pressure W3 System (see paragraph 2.07.Z).

4. This process works in conjunction with Polymer Feed System (see paragraph 2.08 H).5. The thickened product (approximately 5% solids), will be discharged into a chute directly

connected to a progressing cavity pump.6. TDSD will then be pumped to Biosolid Storage/Load-out.7. The DSD Thickening System consists of a Gravity Belt Thickener (GBT), accessories

and hydraulic control system for the GBT and a washwater system consisting of asolenoid on off valve and accessories.

8. A CCTV is placed above the GBT for monitoring purposes only. Viewable in OperatorControl Room in Administration Building – Structure 300.

9. For GBT Operation see Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels.10. Operator shall manually initiate GBT cycle.11. Operator shall manually initiate wash cycle for GBTs after power failure.12. The DSD GBT Control Station shall have the following functionality:

a. Feed Pump speed control.b. Feed Pump speed display feedback.c. Polymer Pump speed control.d. Polymer Pump speed display feedback.e. Belt drive speed control.f. Belt drive speed display feedback.

13. Interlocks:

a. GBT Washwater Valve Openb. Polymer Feed System Availablec. Filtrate Wetwell Level (below LSHH)d. Low Pressure Washwatere. Belt Brokenf. Belt Mis-Aligng. High Level Sludge on Belth. Motor Overload


i. LSHH in TDSD Chutej. Low Hydraulic Pressure for Belt Tensioning Systemk. LSHH in Filtrate Wetwell

M. Functional Description – Thickened WAS (TWAS) Pumping

1. The purpose of the TWAS Pumping System is to transfer Waste Activated Sludge thathas been Thickened (TWAS) from the Gravity Belt Thickener to the AnaerobicDigesters.

2. This process works in conjunction with WAS Thickening (see paragraph 2.06 L).3. This process works in conjunction with High Pressure W3 System (see paragraph 2.07.

Z).4. This process works in conjunction with the generic process of anaerobic digestion as

described in paragraph 2.07 (multiple subparagraphs).5. The Gravity Belt Thickener will discharge TWAS into a hopper connected to a dedicated

progressing cavity pump.6. The TWAS Pump will begin pumping when the liquid level in the hopper reaches the

LSH setting.7. The TWAS Pump will de-energize when the LSL setting is reached.8. If the liquid level in the TWAS Hopper reaches a pre-determined LSHH level, the WAS

GBT Feed Pump and associated WAS Gravity Belt Thickener will de-energize andalarm.

9. TWAS flow to the Digester Complex will be monitored using a magnetic flowmeter withflow verification through revolution counters on each pump.

10. The revolution counter shall be used for comparison purposes to determine potentialstator wear.

11. The TWAS Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local ControlStation.

12. With the TWAS Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the TWAS Pump is energized andwill run continuously. Operator has local control of speed using potentiometer. Hand isintended for maintenance purposes only.

13. With the TWAS Pump Local Control Station in Off, the TWAS Pump is off.14. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. When the liquid level reaches the LSH setting in the TWAS Hopper, the TWASPump shall start.

b. The Pump will run until the liquid level reaches the LSL setting in the TWAS Hopper.c. Once the LSL setting has been reached and the GBT is in the shutdown sequence,

then a solenoid valve on the sludge hopper will open and fill the hopper with W3 tothe LSH setting then shut off the W3.

d. The pump will continue to operate and pump W3 through the discharge line until theLSL level is met. The Operator may also set a timer for the W3 flushing process.

e. Alternately, the pump speed shall vary to keep pace with sludge production. This willallow the pump to run continuously during GBT operation rather than on/offoperation of the pump.

15. With the TWAS Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector inManual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the TWAS Pump.b. Speed – Operator shall have ability to control speed of TWAS Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the TWAS Pump.

16. Interlocks:


a. TWAS Inlet Valve to Digesters Openb. TWAS Hopper LSL/LSHc. TWAS discharge pressure low/highd. Motor overloade. Motor overtemp


a. TWAS Hopper LSHHb. TWAS High discharge pressurec. TWAS Motor Faild. TWAS VFD Fail

N. Functional Description – Thickened Digested Sludge (TDSD) Pumping

1. The purpose of the TDSD Pumping System is to transfer Digested Sludge that has beenThickened (TDSD) from the Gravity Belt Thickener to either truck load-out or sludgestorage.

2. This process works in conjunction with DSD Thickening (see paragraph 2.06. M).3. This process works in conjunction with High Pressure W3 System (see paragraph 2.07.

Z).4. This process works in conjunction with Biosolid Storage/Loadout (see paragraph 2.07.

U).5. The Gravity Belt Thickener will discharge TDSD into a hopper connected to a dedicated

progressing cavity pump.6. The TDSD Pump will begin pumping when the liquid level in the hopper reaches the LSH

setting.7. The TDSD Pump will de-energize when the LSL setting is reached.8. If the liquid level in the TDSD Hopper reaches a pre-determined LSHH level, the DSD

GBT Feed Pump (located in the Digester Complex) and DSD Gravity Belt Thickener willde-energize and alarm.

9. The revolution counter shall be used for flow calculations.10. The TDSD Pump shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control

Station.11. With the TDSD Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the TDSD Pump is energized and

will run continuously. Operator has local control of speed using potentiometer. Hand isintended for maintenance purposes only.

12. With the TDSD Pump Local Control Station in Off, the TDSD Pump is off.13. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. When the liquid level reaches the LSH setting in the TDSD Hopper, the TDSD Pumpshall start.

b. The Pump will run until the liquid level reaches the LSL setting in the TDSD Hopper.c. Once the LSL setting has been reached and the GBT is in the shutdown sequence,

then a solenoid valve on the sludge hopper will open and fill the hopper with W3 tothe LSH setting then shut off the W3.

d. The pump will continue to operate and pump W3 through the discharge line until theLSL level is met. The Operator may also set a timer for the W3 flushing process.

e. Alternately, the pump speed shall vary to keep pace with sludge production. This willallow the pump to run continuously during GBT operation rather than on/offoperation of the pump.

14. With the TDSD Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector inManual at the HMI:


a. Start – This selection energizes the TDSD Pump.b. Speed – Operator shall have ability to control speed of TDSD Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the TDSD Pump.

15. Interlocks:

a. TDSD Hopper LSL/LSHb. TDSD discharge pressure low/highc. Motor overloadd. Motor overtemp


a. TDSD Hopper LSHHb. TDSD High discharge pressurec. TDSD Motor Faild. TDSD VFD Fail

O. Functional Description – Filtrate Equalization Pumping

1. The purpose of the Filtrate Equalization Pumping system is to provide a means ofcontrolling high ammonia and phosphorus concentrations sent back to the head of theplant from side-stream processes.

2. This process works in conjunction with Filtrate Equalization Mixing (see paragraph 2.06Q).

3. This process also allows for filtrate to be metered and sampled.4. Filtrate and washwater collected from the DSD GBT enters the Filtrate Equalization Tank

by gravity.5. The filtrate will be treated with ferric (flow paced to GBT feed) and a mixer will provide

complete mixing of the tank.6. A small dual-disc positive displacement pump will be used to gradually pump the

contents of the tank back to either the primary influent or effluent channel over thecourse of 24 hours (Operator settable) as needed.

7. The total filtrate flowrate (WAS and DSD GBTs) will be measured with a magneticflowmeter (455-FE/FIT-5601).

8. Equalized filtrate from the DSD GBT will be sampled with a dedicated compositesampler (455-M-5641).

9. In case of pump failure, a manual valve will be opened to allow contents from the FiltrateEqualization Tank to enter the Filtrate Wetwell and be pumped out. This allows thecontinued use of the DSD GBT while maintenance on the Filtrate Equalization Pump isperformed.

10. The Filtrate Equalization Pump shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the LocalControl Station.

11. With the Filtrate Equalization Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the FiltrateEqualization Pump is energized and will run continuously. Operator has local control ofspeed using potentiometer. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

12. With the Filtrate Equalization Pump Local Control Station in Off, the Filtrate EqualizationPump is off.


a. The Filtrate Equalization Pump shall operate based on a fill/draw operation.b. The wetwell will fill during the day while the DSD GBT is in operation.c. An ultrasonic level sensing device (455-LE/LIT-5611) in the wetwell shall determine

the presence of water and turn the pump on once the LSH setting is reached.d. The pump will de-energize when the LSL setting is reached.


e. Float switches shall be hardwired as a means of backup control.f. Alternately, the pump speed shall vary to maintain the LSH setting during GBT

operation.g. The wetwell will then operate on level switches over the off-peak hours.h. A time of day setting will be provided to allow an automatic switch to the level

operation when the plant is unmanned.

14. With the Filtrate Equalization Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Autoselector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Filtrate Equalization Pump.b. Speed – Operator shall have ability to control speed of Filtrate Equalization Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Filtrate Equalization Pump.

15. Interlocks:

a. Motor overload


a. Filtrate Equalization Pump Failb. Filtrate Equalization Pump VFD Failc. Filtrate Equalization Tank High-High level

P. Functional Description – Filtrate Equalization Mixing

1. The purpose of the Filtrate Equalization Mixing system is to provide complete mixing ofthe Filtrate Equalization Tank.

2. This process works in conjunction with Filtrate Equalization Pumping (see paragraph2.06 P).

3. The Filtrate Equalization Mixer shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the LocalControl Station.

4. With the Filtrate Equalization Mixer Local Control Station in Hand, the FiltrateEqualization Mixer is energized and will run continuously. Hand is intended formaintenance purposes only.

5. With the Filtrate Equalization Mixer Local Control Station in Off, the Filtrate EqualizationMixer is off.


a. Filtrate Equalization Mixer will start at the mixer on level setting in the FiltrateEqualization Tank and operate until the mixer off water level setting is reached.

b. The mixer on/off setting will be the same (36-inches above tank floor).c. The mixer off level will be different than the pump off setting as the mixer requires

greater depth to operate.

7. With the Filtrate Equalization Mixer Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Autoselector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Filtrate Equalization Mixer.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Filtrate Equalization Mixer.

8. Interlocks:

a. Motor overloadb. Mixer Seal Fail


c. Mixer overtempd. Filtrate Equalization Tank Low Level


a. Filtrate Equalization Mixer Failb. Filtrate Equalization Tank Low-Low level

Q. Functional Description – Filtrate Pumping

1. The purpose of the Filtrate Pumping system is to collect and transfer filtrate and beltwashwater from the WAS GBTs and overflow from the Gravity Thickener and send it tothe primary influent channel.

2. This removes the recycle streams from the raw wastewater influent.3. Filtrate and washwater collected from both WAS GBTs and the overflow from the gravity

thickener enters the Filtrate Wetwell by gravity.4. These flows, collectively referred to as filtrate, are instantaneously pumped out of the

wetwell by two submersible centrifugal pumps.5. The pumps shall operate in a lead/lag configuration alternating each cycle or manually

by the Operator.6. Filtrate collected from the WAS GBTs can also be sent to the gravity plant drain system

by manipulation of isolation valves.7. Provide a restart delay to protect the pump from discharge pipe draining back through

the pump.8. The total filtrate flowrate will be measured with a magnetic flowmeter (455-FE/FIT-5601).9. Filtrate will be sampled with a dedicated composite sampler (455-M-5631).10. The Filtrate Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control

Station.11. With the Filtrate Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the Filtrate Pump is energized and

will run continuously. Operator has local control of speed using potentiometer. Hand isintended for maintenance purposes only.

12. With the Filtrate Pump Local Control Station in Off, the Filtrate Pump is off.13. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. The Filtrate Pump shall operate based on the water level in the Filtrate Wetwell.b. An ultrasonic level sensing device (455-LE/LIT-5622) in the wetwell shall determine

the presence of water and turn the pump on (elevation 757.25).c. Level sensing equipment shall also turn the lag Pump on as water levels increases.d. Float switches shall be hardwired as a means of backup control.e. In float mode, two pumps will engage at 50% speed.

14. With the Filtrate Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector inManual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Filtrate Pump.b. Speed – Operator shall have ability to control speed of Filtrate Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Filtrate Pump.

15. Interlocks:

a. Motor overloadb. Seal Failc. Overtemp



a. Filtrate Pump Failb. Filtrate Pump VFD Failc. Filtrate Tank High-High level

i. This event shall shut down WAS GBT, primary Sludge Screens, and lowpressure W3 System.

R. Functional Description – Filtrate and Filtrate Equalization Samplers:

1. Samplers (455-M-5631/5641) shall be given pacing signal proportional to FiltrateFlowmeter (455-FE/FIT-5601).

2. Samplers shall only receive a pacing signal if the following conditions are met:

a. 455-M-5631 – Filtrate Pump(s) runningb. 455-M-5641 – Filtrate Equalization Mixer running

3. Samplers shall alert Operator of an internal problem that requires attention.

2.11 SHC TANK TRUCK FILL CONTROL PANEL (455-LCP-1901) (Reference Drawings: 009-N-19)

A. Panel:

1. Outdoor Enclosure2. NEMA 4X.3. Wall Mount, Single Door.4. Provide with Rain Hood.5. Power Supply.


Tag Device Description Interface RangeLI Process Indicator SHC Tank No.1 Level 455-PLC-1 0-12’YL Indicator Light SHC Tank No.1 Full 455-PLC-1 10’LI Process Indicator SHC Tank No.2 Level 455-PLC-1 0-12’YL Indicator Light SHC Tank No.2 Full 455-PLC-1 10’LI Process Indicator SHC Tank No.3 Level 455-PLC-1 0-12’YL Indicator Light SHC Tank No.3 Full 455-PLC-1 10’YA Alarm Horn Horn 455-PLC-1 ---HS Pushbutton Horn Silence 455-PLC-1 ---Coordinate alarm levels in field

C. Display HMI functions per P&ID.


1. Panel shall monitor and display Tank Levels, and pass levels through to 455-PLC-1.HMI shall monitor and display Tank Levels and alarms.

2. Tank Level High, Tank Level High High and Tank Level Low Alarm set points shall beoperator adjustable inputs at HMI. Alarm signals shall be received from 455-PLC-1.

3. Associated indicator light shall activate on reception of Tank High Level signal.4. Alarm Horn shall activate on reception of Tank High High Level signal.5. Tank fill operator shall be able to Silence alarm horn locally.


6. Indicator light shall require Clearing of the Tank Level High High, Tank Level High orTank Level Low signal at 455-PLC-1 for light to extinguish.

7. Provide Tank Out of Service selector switch at HMI which shall disable Tank Level LowAlarm to allow operator to maintain tank without setting off alarms.

E. Critical Alarm:

1. SHC Tank Low Level

2.12 DIGESTER COMPLEX PLC PANEL (510-PLC-1) (Reference Drawings: 008-I-1 and 3, 009-N-27,32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 46, 57, 58, 59, 60 and 62).

A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure2. NEMA 123. Free Standing Multiple Door4. 120 VAC Power Supply


Tag Device Description Type510-RECT-1 Electrical Outlet 120 VAC510-DATA-1 Ethernet Jack SW1 (PCN) RJ-45510-DATA-2 Ethernet Jack SW2 (BIN) RJ-45510-HS-1 Reset Pushbutton SR1 reset Section 13431


Tag Device Description Initial Setting510-PLC-1 PLC Section 13450

510-SW1 Ethernet Switch Provided byOwner 10/100/1000Mbps

510-SW2 Ethernet Switch Provided byOwner 10/100/1000Mbps

510UPS-1 UPS Section 13456 2 hours510-SRG-1 Surge Protector Section 13441510-PTCH-1 Patch Panel Section 13455 24 strand Single-mode510-FAN-1 Fan Cooling fan510-SR1* Protection Relay Safety Relay

*Boiler Room Safety Relay shall be wired as a dual channel device with manual pushbuttonreset. E-stop pushbuttons shall be wired in series back to SR1.




E. Functional Description – Dewatering Well Pumps:


1. There are seven existing Dewatering Wells located around the Digester Complex. Six ofthese Dewatering Wells (all but W-3) receive new VFD controlled Pumps and asubmersible analog level element.

2. Dewatering Wells W-4, W-5, W-6, and W-7 are hard-piped, while Wells W-1 and W-2require the Operator to manually connect a hose to the Pump discharge prior to Pumpstart sequence.

3. VFD and controls for each Pump are located in Structure 455 Solids Building ElectricalRoom, Structure 500 basement, or Structure 510 Digester Complex Electrical Roombased on tag number of equipment.

4. Each of the six Dewatering Wells shall have a hydrostatic submersible level element foralarm and control. The level element shall be located 12”-18” above the Dewatering WellPump intake which shall also act as low-level cutout for the respective Pump.

a. Each level sensor has a range of 0-10psi or approximately 23ft of head with acorresponding 4-20mA output. The PLC shall be programmed such that the 4-20mAsignal is linear between LSL (low level cutout) and LSH (turn on set-point) + 3ft.Values exceeding LSH+3ft (approximately 18mA) shall be interpreted by the PLC asa rogue reading resulting from a sensor failure and shall NOT start the Pump, rathershall alert the Operator of a sensor failure. This shall be inhibited in Manual mode ofOperation.

5. When an Operator adjustable high-level set-point (LSH) is reached, an alarm will bedisplayed at the VFD and also at HMI. This level also acts as Pump Start trigger whenthe Pump is in “automatic” mode of operation – as set by Operator at the respective VFDselector switch.

6. A “Manual-Off-Auto” switch is located on the front of each Pump VFD. HMI shall indicatewhen switch is in “automatic” mode of operation.

7. Running Light is illuminated when Pump is running. This signal shall be transmitted toHMI Operator.

8. Prior to starting W-1 and W-2 Pumps, plant personal shall connect hose to Pumpdischarge line.

9. A discrete high water alarm sensor shall be installed at the existing sight well located inthe basement of the Digester Complex. Alarm shall alert Operator at HMI that water ispresent in the sight well.

10. With the local “Manual-Off-Auto” 3-position selector switch at each Pump VFD in the“Manual” position the following shall be available:

a. Analog indication of Dewatering Well level (elevation).b. High level indication.c. Pump/VFD fault indication.d. Pump running indication.e. “Start” will energize Pump when water level is above the low level cutout in the

Dewatering Well. Local “Start” is inhibited when selector switch is in the “Off” or“Auto” positions.

f. “Stop” will de-energize the Pump without regard for Dewatering Well water level.g. “Speed” of the Pump is controlled locally by the keypad operator interface that is

standard on the face of the VFD. Local speed control is inhibited when the selectorswitch is in “Auto” mode of operation.

11. With the local “Manual-Off-Auto” 3-position selector switch at each Pump VFD in the“Auto” position, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI the following shall beavailable:

a. Pump shall start when an Operator adjustable high level set-point (LSH) is reached.b. Pump speed is regulated with PID loop in the PLC with Dewatering Well level as the

control element. Minimum clamp speed shall be determined during installation and


testing. Careful programming consideration shall be given to the significant andimmediate drop in water level in the Well casing where the water level is measuredas it is the center point of the suction cone of the Well.

c. Pump shall continue to run until an Operator adjustable low level cut-out set-point(LSL) is reached, and the Pump shall stop.

d. Volume of water pumped shall be available to the Operator as a calculated valuebased on Pump speed and Pump curves provided by Pump manufacturer.

12. With the local “Manual-Off-Auto” 3-position selector switch at each Pump VFD in the“Auto” position, and the Manual/Auto selector in Manual at the HMI the following shall beavailable:

a. Start – Shall energize the Dewatering Pump if the water level is above the low levelcutout in the Dewatering Well.

b. Stop will de-energize the Dewatering Pump without regard for Dewatering Well waterlevel.

c. Speed is manually controlled as a percentage of total Pump speed with a minimumclamp allowing smooth Pump operation.

d. Pump will automatically stop when the water level drops below low level cutoutelevation for the respective Dewatering Well.

e. For Dewatering Well Pumps W-1 and W-2, a pop-up warning shall prevent theOperator from starting the Pumps unless the Operator affirms the hose has beenmanually connected to discharge side of the Pump.

13. Interlocks:

a. Dewatering Well High/Low Levelsb. Motor Overload


a. Dewatering Well High Levelb. Pump/VFD Fault/Fail

15. Critical Alarms related to this process as follows:

a. Digester Complex sight well high water alarm

F. Functional Description – Digester Mixing System (Digester 1 and 2)

1. The purpose of the Digester Mixing System is to ensure feed sludge is equally dispersedwithin the Digester to allow full volume utilization of the digester for the biologicalprocess. Mixing also ensures consistent temperature throughout the digester.

2. All areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.3. The Mixers shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control Station.4. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Hand, the Mixer is energized and will run

continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.5. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Off, the Mixer is off.6. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. At the HMI, each Digester shall have an adjustable Interval/Duration timer to allowfor variable mixer runtime.

b. This timer will be initially set at 24-hr interval with 24-hr duration to allow continuousrun of the Mixer.

c. During the duration time period, mixer shall run continuously.


7. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Manual atthe HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Mixer.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Mixer.

8. Interlocks:

a. Low Digester liquid level (EL 783.00)


a. Mixer Fail

10. Level:

a. Digester level is measured utilizing pressure switches:

i. Digester 1 (521-PE/PIT-3201)ii. Digester 2 (522-PE/PIT-3202)

b. If Digester liquid falls below Low-Low level (EL 771.00) an alarm shall be sent toOperator at HMI.

G. Functional Description – Sludge Storage Tank No. 4 Mixing System

2. The purpose of the Sludge Storage Tank No. 4 Mixing System is to ensure sludge isequally dispersed within the vessel to minimize settling of solids within the tank.

3. The mixing pump is installed with variable speed control to adjust the amount of mixingenergy supplied to the tank.

4. The system is provided with manually operated valve and piping to allow for discharge ofsludge to the top of the liquid level of the tank to serve a “scum busting” function.

5. Select areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.6. The Mixer shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control Station.7. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Hand, the Mixer is energized and will run

continuously. A local speed potentiometer is used to change speed of the Mixer. Hand isintended for maintenance purposes only.

8. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Off, the Mixer is off.9. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. At the HMI, the Sludge Storage Tank shall have an adjustable Interval/Durationtimer to allow for variable mixer runtime.


c. During the duration time period, mixer shall run continuously.d. Operator shall have ability to adjust speed of Mixer.


a. Start – This selection energizes the Mixer.b. Speed – Operator has the ability to adjust speed of Mixer.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Mixer.


11. Interlocks:

a. Low-Low Sludge Storage Tank liquid level (EL 764.00)


a. Mixer Failb. Mixer VFD Fail

13. Level:

a. Sludge Storage Tank No. 4 level is measured utilizing radar:

i. Sludge Storage Tank (524-LE/LIT-3304C)

b. If Sludge Storage Tank liquid falls below Low-Low level (EL 764.00) an alarm shallbe sent to Operator at HMI.

H. Functional Description – Digester Mixing System (Digester 3)

1. The purpose of the Digester Mixing System is to ensure sludge is equally dispersedwithin the Digester to allow full volume utilization of the digester for the biologicalprocess.

2. Mixing also ensures consistent temperature throughout the digester.3. The mixing pump is installed with variable speed control to adjust the amount of mixing

energy supplied to the Digester.4. Select areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.5. The Mixer shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control Station.6. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Hand, the Mixer is energized and will run

continuously. A local speed potentiometer is used to change speed of the Mixer. Hand isintended for maintenance purposes only.

7. With the Mixer Local Control Station in Off, the Mixer is off.8. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. At the HMI, the Digester shall have an adjustable Interval/Duration timer to allow forvariable mixer runtime.


c. During the duration time period, mixer shall run continuously.d. Operator shall have ability to adjust speed of Mixer.


a. Start – This selection energizes the Mixer.b. Speed – Operator has the ability to adjust speed of Mixer.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Mixer.

10. Interlocks:

a. Low-Low Digester No. 3 liquid level (EL 764.00)


a. Mixer Fail


b. Mixer VFD Fail

12. Level:

a. Digester level is measured calculating the differential of two elements:

i. Cover (523-LE/LIT-3303C)ii. Liquid (523-PIT-3303)

b. An additional liquid/foam level sensor is employed and communicated by radio to510-PLC-1:

i. Liquid/Foam (523-LE/LIT-3303L)

c. If Digester liquid falls below Low level (EL 776.50) an alarm shall be sent to Operatorat HMI.

d. If Digester liquid falls below Low-Low level (EL 764.00) an alarm shall be sent toOperator at HMI.

I. Functional Description – Digester Feed System

1. This process works in conjunction with multiple processes.2. Digester Feed Valves shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.3. The purpose of the Digester Feed system is to feed TWAS, TPSD, SCM, and PSCM to

the Digesters for biodegration at an equal load per Digester volume basis.4. Under normal operation, feed sludge (TWAS and TPSD) will be volumetrically

proportionally divided between Digesters in service, normally Digesters No. 1 and 2.Sludge from Digesters No. 1 and 2 will overflow the fed digester and gravity flow toDigester 3. Controls will allow for the selection of a mode of operation where all threeDigesters are fed.

5. System consists of six open-close sludge feed valves

a. Digester No. 1 TWAS Feed Valve (510-FV-3401A)b. Digester No. 2 TWAS Feed Valve (510-FV-3402A)c. Digester No. 3 TWAS Feed Valve (510-FV-3503A)d. Digester No. 1 TPSD Feed Valve (510-FV-3401B)e. Digester No. 2 TPSD Feed Valve (510-FV-3402B)f. Digester No. 3 TPSD Feed Valve (510-FV-3503B)

6. System includes a TWAS flow meter located in Structure 455.

a. TWAS Flowmeter (455-FE/FIT-3031)

7. Each Valve shall be controlled in either Local or Remote from the Valve.8. With the Valve Control in Local, the Valve can be opened and closed. Local is intended

for maintenance purposes only.9. With the Valve Control in Off, the Valve shall be off.10. With the Valve Control in Remote, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI the

following shall be available from the HMI.

a. At the HMI, Digesters 1, 2, and 4 shall have a Feed/No Feed selector switch for bothTWAS and TPSD.

b. With digester Feed selector in the Feed position, Digester shall be included in thefeed rotation.

c. At the HMI, a Time/Volume based feed selector switch for the system shall beprovided.


d. With the Time/Volume switch in the Time position, Operator input shall determineduration for which each feed valve shall be open to each digester. First digesterselected for Feed shall be opened and held open until duration interval is expired.Upon expiration of duration interval, the next feed valve shall open, and close theprevious.

e. With the Time/Volume switch in the Volume position: the TPSD feed system shallhave an Operator set-point for quantity of feed sludge per rotational cycle. Based onsludge volume per stroke from TPSD Pumping Control a total stroke count requiredto satisfy the feed sludge per cycle can be determined. The volume of all digestersin Feed position shall be summed (500,000-gal each for Digesters 1 and 2,2,000,000-gal for Digester 3). Individual digester volume divided by total Feedposition digester volume times feed rotation cycle strokes will provide the strokecount to be fed to each digester per rotation cycle. Upon start of feed rotation cycle,first digester feed valve shall open and remain open until individual digester strokecount is satisfied. Upon reaching set-point stroke count, next feed valve shall openand active feed valve shall close, with cycle repeated for third digester if three are inFeed mode. Upon completion of a rotation cycle, cycle to be repeated again in sameorder. With the primary sludge screen bypass valve in the Open position, PLC shallmonitor primary sludge flow and include the metered volume in the feed to digestersummation.

f. The TWAS feed system shall have an Operator set-point for total gallons of feed perrotational cycle. The amount of TWAS fed to each digester per cycle shall bevolumetrically equalized as described for the TPSD. The first feed valve in the cycleshall be open and remain open until individual digester feed total is met, then nextvalve shall open and previous valve shall close until a cycle is completed. Uponcompletion of a cycle, cycle should restart.

g. Regardless of Time/Volume switch position, failure of a valve to reach the Openposition shall take the associated Digester out of the feed loop and next valve inseries shall open.

11. With the Valve Control in Remote, and the Manual/Auto selector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Open – This selection opens the Valve.b. Close – This selection closes the Valve.c. Stop – This selection Stops the Valve.


a. Valve Fail to Openb. Valve Fail to Close

J. Functional Description – Digested Sludge Recirculation

1. This process works in conjunction with Sludge Heating process (see paragraph 2.07 L).2. The purpose of the Digested Sludge Recirculation System is to re-circulate sludge from

each Digester through a dedicated hot water heat exchanger to maintain Digesteroperating temperature in the mosophelic operating range (90-100°F).

3. A secondary benefit of the system is to provide a small degree of mixing within theDigester.

4. Digester sludge feed (thickened waste activated sludge, thickened primary sludge,primary scum and secondary scum) are injected into the system downstream of the heatexchangers to blend the cooler sludge with the heated sludge to avoid a cold spot in theDigester.

5. System consists of four Recirculation Pumps, one dedicated to each Digester and onestandby pump (Digester ½ Recirc Pump).


6. The standby pump serves as a redundant pump for both Digester No. 1 and Digester No.2 Recirc Pumps.

7. Digesters No. 1, 2, and 3 each have a hot water to sludge heat exchanger in the systemto heat the sludge.

8. The recirculation pumps serving Digesters No. 1 and 2 are piped to allow the pumps toserve as a pumped transfer of sludge between the two digesters as well as to DigesterNo. 3. These pumps are also be piped to allow for sludge to be pumped to Bio-solidStorage/Loadout.

9. The recirculation pump serving Digester No. 3 is piped to allow Heat Exchanger No. 3 toheat the digester.

10. The Recirculation Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the LocalControl Station.

11. With the Recirculation Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the Recirculation Pump isenergized and will run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

12. With the Recirculation Pump Local Control Station in Off, the Recirculation Pump is off.13. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. At the HMI, Digesters No. 1 and 2 shall have a selector switch allowing the Operatorto select which Recirculation Pump is serving the Digester. Switch shall haveDigester No. 1 Recirc Pump, Digester No. 2 Recirc Pump, Digester 1/2 RecircPump, and a selection for Off.

b. The Recirculation Pump identified by the selector switch choice shall energize andrun continuously.

c. Liquid level of digester served by each pump shall be monitored and RecirculationPump shall be stopped if a low liquid level is detected.

d. Sludge temperature entering and leaving each heat exchanger is monitored by atemperature element and displayed at the HMI.

e. See Sludge Heating functional description for temperature control.

14. With the Recirculation Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selectorin Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Recirculation Pump.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Recirculation Pump.

15. Interlocks:

a. Digester Low levelb. Motor overload


a. Recirculation Pump Failb. Low sludge temperature exiting Heat Exchanger (90°F). See Sludge Heating

functional description (Paragraph 2.07. L) for temperature control.

K. Functional Description –Sludge Heating

1. This process works in conjunction with Digested Sludge Recirculation process (seeparagraph 2.07 K).

2. The purpose of the Sludge Heating System is to maintain temperatures of the Digesterswithin the mesophilic (95-100°F) operating range.

3. Sludge continuously flows through the heat exchanger with entrance and exittemperatures monitored.


4. Hot water is pumped from the plant heating loop through the Heat Exchangertransferring heat energy to the sludge in the process.

5. A three-way valve downstream of the Heat Exchanger will divert cool flow from the HeatExchanger back to the pump as required to maintain temperature entering the HeatExchanger below a maximum value.

6. The Heat Exchanger Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the LocalControl Station.

7. With the Heat Exchanger Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the Heat ExchangerPump is energized and will run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposesonly.

8. With the Heat Exchanger Pump Local Control Station in Off, the Heat Exchanger Pumpis off.


a. Heat Exchanger Pump shall energize and run continuously.b. HMI shall have Operator input for desired Digester operating temperature.c. PLC shall monitor Heat Exchanger entrance sludge temperature and adjust exit

sludge temperature set-point as required to maintain desired Heat Exchangerentrance temperature.

d. PLC shall monitor Heat Exchanger exit sludge temperature and modulate three-wayvalve as required to satisfy temperature.

e. PLC shall monitor hot water temperature entering Heat Exchanger. If thistemperature rises above an adjustable set-point (initially set at 155°F viaSupervisory control), control of three-way shall be to maintain entering watertemperature at the water set-point. Upon rise in sludge temperature above set-point,control shall revert back to sludge temperature control.

f. While sludge is being fed to a Digester, a feed forward offset in temperature shall beemployed in the PID loop starting with two degrees F. This will need adjustmentbased on real world data experienced with the System over time.

10. With the Heat Exchanger Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Autoselector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Heat Exchanger Pump.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Heat Exchanger Pump.c. 3-way bypass valves shall have manual override position control forcing it to a

percent open (bypass).

11. Interlocks:

a. Respective Digester Sludge Recirculation Pump running. See Digester SludgeRecirculation functional description (Paragraph 2.07. K).

b. Respective Digester in service.c. Motor overload


a. Heat Exchanger Pump Failb. Low sludge temperature exiting Heat Exchanger (90°F initially).c. High sludge temperature exiting Heat Exchanger (110°F initially).

L. Functional Description – Digested Sludge (DSD) GBT Feed Pumping

1. This process works in conjunction with DSD Thickening (see paragraph 2.06 N).


2. The purpose of the DSD GBT Feed Pumping System is to pump digested sludge to thegravity belt thickeners in Structure 455.

3. Sludge will normally be pumped from Digester No. 3, with the capability to pump fromDigesters No. 1, 2, and Sludge Storage Tank No. 4.

4. A DSD Flowmeter is on the DSD GBT feed line located in Structure 455 (455-FE/FIT-2541).

5. The DSD Feed Pumps operate when called to run by the GBT.6. A high pressure switch is installed in the discharge of each DSD Pump to stop the Pump

on high pressure as an indicator of a closed valve or line blockage. An Alarm shall alertthe Operator at the HMI of this condition.

7. The DSD Pumps are also capable of pumping digested sludge from Digester No. 3directly to Sludge Storage Tanks No. 4, 5 or 6 in a manual process.

8. The DSD Feed Pumps shall operate in a Lead/Standby configuration alternating aftereach cycle or manual alternation.

9. The DSD Feed Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local ControlStation.

10. With the DSD Feed Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the DSD Feed Pump isenergized and will run continuously. A local speed potentiometer is used to changespeed of the DSD Feed Pump. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

11. With the DSD Feed Pump Local Control Station in Off, the DSD Feed Pump is off.12. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. The Operator shall have a selector switch between GBT sludge feed and sludgetransfer.

b. When selector switch is in the sludge transfer mode, Operator shall have selector forwhich Digester the Pump is drawing from and an input for total volume to betransferred and percent Pump speed to be utilized. Volume transferred shall becalculated based on decrease in liquid level of the digester being transferred from.

c. When cycle initiated by Operator, the lead Pump shall energize and run at theselected speed until the transfer volume is met, at which time the Pump shall stop.

d. Low level in the selected Digester shall stop Pump prior to completion of cycle.e. With the selector switch in the GBT sludge feed position, Operator shall input

desired gallons/day digested sludge volume to be thickened.f. HMI shall have a Lead/Standby selector switch to identify which of the two pumps is

to be run with the GBT.g. HMI shall have a Digester No. 1-4 selector switch to indicate which Digester sludge

is being withdrawn from (note that this selector switch only determines the levelelement to monitor for pump protection and does not control system componentsensuring that valves are in the correct position to make this happen).

h. On call for Pump to run from command at the GBT control panel, Pump shallenergize.

i. Pump speed shall be manually adjusted at GBT control panel.j. Pumped sludge flow shall be totalized.k. Upon summation of flow reaching gallon/day or hours/day set-point, initiation of GBT

stop cycle shall commence.l. On call from GBT control panel, Pump shall stop when dictated by GBT stop cycle.m. PLC shall monitor discharge high pressure switch status.n. If high pressure indicated, lead Pump shall stop and alarm shall be generated.o. PLC shall monitor running Pump fail and VFD fail status, upon indication of failure,

lead Pump shall stop and alarm shall be generated.p. PLC shall monitor Digester sludge level in selected digester.q. Upon fall of level below set-point (EL 783.00 Dig No. 1 & 2 and EL 776.50 Dig No. 3)

Pump shall stop.


13. With the DSD Feed Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector inManual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the DSD Feed Pump.b. Speed – Operator has the ability to adjust speed of DSD Feed Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the DSD Feed Pump.d. HMI shall warn Operator when attempting to start DSD Pump in GBT Sludge feed

Mode and DSD GBT is not running.

14. Interlocks (some are mode dependent):

a. Low Digester liquid level (see elevations above).b. GBT Call to Runc. GBT Pump Speed Commandd. Motor overloade. High Discharge Pressure


a. DSD Feed Pump Failb. DSD Feed Pump VFD Fail

M. Functional Description – Digested Sludge (DSD) Transfer Pumping

1. This process works in conjunction with Plant Air System (see paragraph 2.07. AA).2. This process works in conjunction with Bio-solid Storage/Loadout (see paragraph 2.07.

U).3. The purpose of the DSD Transfer Pumping System is to pump digested sludge from

Sludge Storage Tank No. 4 to Sludge Storage Tanks No. 5 and 6 (Bio-solid SludgeStorage/Loadout).

4. The system also will be used when either Sludge Storage Tank No. 4 or Digester No. 3are to be dewatered to be taken out of service.

5. Piping configurations also allow for the manual pumping from any of the Digesters orStorage Tank No. 4 to any of the Digesters or Storage Tanks No. 4, 5 and 6.

6. The system includes two parallel Pumps.

a. Relocated Gorman-Rupp self priming centrifugal pump (510-P-3613)b. New air operated diaphragm pump (510-P-3614)

7. For operational functionality of the air operated diaphragm Transfer Pump (510-P-3614),see Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels.

8. The DSD Transfer Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the LocalControl Station.

9. With the DSD Transfer Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the DSD Transfer Pump isenergized and will run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

10. With the DSD Transfer Pump Local Control Station in Off, the DSD Transfer Pump isoff.


a. The Operator shall have the ability to automatically drawdown the level in SludgeStorage Tank No. 4 for transfer to the other Sludge Storage Tanks.

b. Operator shall have a finished sludge level input, Pump selection, and a cycleinitiate button.

c. For the air operated diaphragm Pump, the Operator shall also have a stroke ratesetting.


d. Upon initiation, the selected Pump shall run until the desired level is reached, atwhich time, Pump shall stop.

12. With the DSD Transfer Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Autoselector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the DSD Transfer Pump.b. Stroke – Operator has the ability to adjust stroke rate of air operated diaphragm DSD

Transfer Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the DSD Transfer Pump.

13. Interlocks:

a. Low liquid level in Sludge Storage Tank No. 4.b. Motor overloadc. High Discharge Pressured. Plant air pressure (when selecting air operated diaphragm Pump).


a. DSD Transfer Pump Fail

N. Functional Description – Biogas Collection

1. All areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Foam separator solenoid shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power

fails.3. This process works in conjunction with multiple biogas related processes.4. The purpose of the biogas collection system is to safely contain and collect the biogas

generated within the Digesters as part of the anaerobic digestion process.5. Sediment, condensate and foam are removed from the gas steam and the gas made

available for downstream use.6. Gas generated within Digesters No. 1 and No. 2 is contained within the vessels by fixed

covers.7. Gas generated within Digester No. 3 is contained and stored within the vessel by a

floating gas holder cover.8. All covers are protected from over pressurization and vacuum conditions by redundant

combination pressure/vacuum relief valves installed on each cover.9. Gas from the Digesters is routed through a foam separator and condensate/sediment

traps.10. Condensate collected in the condensate/sediment traps is removed from the system with

automatic drip traps.11. The foam separator is an enlarged condensate/sediment trap with a water spray and

baffle installed to knock down foam which may enter the gas piping and prevent it frommigrating further into the gas supply system. Water is continuously sprayed within theunit which is then discharged from the unit by gravity. A water seal is provided to preventgas from escaping through the drain line. A high water level switch is installed to stop thewater supply on a high level. A low water level switch is installed to warn of a potentialproblem with the water supply that may compromise the water seal.

12. Automated Drip Traps are functionally described in Section 11990 – Equipment ControlPanels.

13. Biogas Supply System pressure is monitored by 510-PIT-3771.14. Critical Alarms for this equipment as follows:

a. LSL-3751 in foam separator


O. Functional Description – Biogas Waste Gas Flare

1. All areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. Biogas Waste Gas Flare Local Control Panel (510-LCP-3705) shall be provided with

Emergency Power when utility power fails.3. This process works in conjunction with multiple biogas related processes.4. The purpose of the Biogas Waste Gas Flare is to safely remove unused biogas from the

system to avoid cover over pressurization and unregulated release through the pressurerelief valves.

5. The system is controlled by a local control panel which monitors gas system pressure.6. Upon rise in system pressure above set-point, high pressure switch is activated which

triggers lighting of pilot system and opens a solenoid valve in the pressure control valvesensing line.

7. Continued rise of gas pressure lifts the diaphragm in the pressure control valve andallows gas to flow to the flare and be ignited by the pilot.

8. Pilot gas system is plumbed to supply either natural or biogas.9. A detailed operational description of the Biogas Waste Gas Flare functionally is located

in Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels.10. The biogas supply line will be provided with an automatic drip trap to drain condensate

from the gas piping. See Biogas Collection Functional Description above.11. Waste Gas Supply System flow is monitored by 510-FE/FIT-3792.12. Boiler/Waste Gas Supply System pressure is monitored by 510-PIT-3772.13. Critical Alarms for this equipment as follows:

a. High Boiler/Waste Gas Supply System pressure (12+ inches water column).

P. Functional Description – Boilers

1. Select areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. This process works in conjunction with multiple biogas related processes.3. Boilers shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.4. The purpose of the Boiler System is to provide heat for process and building heating use

via a distributed hot water system.5. The system includes four boilers, two dual fuel (biogas and natural gas) and two only

natural gas.6. Each boiler has a dedicated hot water circulating pump.7. Each biogas boiler has a biogas flow meter (510-FE/FIT-3701/3702) and the dual fuel

Boilers have a three-way valve (510-TCV-4211/4212) on the hot water piping to ensureentrance water temperature does not fall below set-point of 155°F.

8. The natural gas boilers are supplied natural gas through the interruptible natural gassupply.

9. Boilers start-stop and exit water temperature set-point will be controlled by the PlantPLC.

10. Detailed operational description of Boiler functionally is located in Section 15626 –Packaged Firebox Boiler. General Auto operation is described as follows:

a. At HMI, Operator shall have selector for Heat/Electrical Generation priority (sameselection as provided for engine generators).

b. With selector switch in Heat Priority position:

i. At HMI, Operator shall have selection of which one of each type of boiler is inLead position.

ii. PLC will monitor supply water temperature, upon fall in temperature belowadjustable set-point (180°F) lead boiler system shall energize.

iii. PLC shall set leaving water temperature set-point of boiler to maintain supplywater temperature set-point and send signal to boiler.


iv. Boiler leaving water set-point shall be automatically ramped between 5 and 20°Fabove system water temperature set-point.

v. With lead boiler firing at 100% and continued fall in supply water temperatureadditional boilers shall be brought online.

vi. When boiler is called to run, associated pump shall be energized.vii. For each biogas boiler, PLC shall monitor entering water temperature. PLC shall

modulate position of hot water three-way valve as required to maintain minimumentering water temperature at adjustable set-point temperature, initially set at155°F.

viii. Each biogas boiler shall be provided an Auto/Natural/Biogas switch at HMI. InAuto, choice of fuel supply shall be PLC driven by biogas pressure as describedbelow. In Natural position, unit shall only be allowed to fire on natural gas and inBiogas position, unit shall only be allowed to fire on biogas.

ix. PLC shall monitor biogas pressure. If gas pressure is above adjustable set-point(6-in. w.c.) biogas boilers shall lead over natural gas boilers. If gas pressure isbelow set-point, natural gas boilers shall lead over biogas boilers. If gas pressureis below set-point, two natural gas boilers firing and call for third boiler, a biogasboiler shall be called to fire on natural gas supply.

c. With selector switch in Electrical Generation Priority position:

i. PLC shall prevent boilers from running on biogas unless cover position ofDigester No. 4 is above adjustable set-point of 90% full. When gas volume isabove this set-point, biogas fired boilers shall be allowed to run as describedabove for heat priority until cover position falls below 10% below permissivevalue. When gas storage volume is below allowable biogas operation, boilersshall only run on natural gas.

11. Boiler System contains Mushroom-head maintained contact emergency stop pushbuttonat all entrances to Boiler Room.

a. Shall be wired in series.b. Shall have redundant normally closed contacts.c. Shall be protected against accidental depression.d. Shall be wired to an industrial safety relay (Pilz or other) which in turn shall shut

down all firing Boilers when a pushbutton is pressed.e. Safety relay shall be manually reset (auto-reset not allowed) when all e-stops return

to their normal state.f. Shall alert Operator at HMI.

12. Biogas/Boiler Supply System pressure is monitored by 510-PIT-3772.13. Boiler Pumps (510-P-4201/4202/4203/4204) shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto

from Local Control Station.14. With Boiler Pump Local Control Station in Hand, Boiler Pump shall be energized and

shall run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.15. With Boiler Pump Local Control Station in Off, Boiler Pump is off.16. With Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Auto at HMI the

following shall be available from HMI:

a. Boiler Pumps shall operate when called by respective Boiler (see above).

17. With Boiler Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Manual atHMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes Boiler Pump.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes Boiler Pump.


18. Interlocks:

a. Biogas pressureb. Biogas volumec. Motor overload


a. Low-Low temperature in the hot water system (initially set at 100°F).b. Boiler Pump Fail.c. Emergency Stop.

Q. Functional Description – Biogas Conditioning and Compression

1. All areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. This process works in conjunction with multiple biogas related processes.3. Purpose of Biogas Conditioning and Compression System is to remove contaminants

from gas stream and compress gas prior to utilization in engine generators.4. Contaminants to be removed from gas stream include H2S, siloxanes, and moisture.5. H2S shall be removed to a maximum concentration of 50-ppm with replaceable media

system to protect engines and preserve life of more expensive siloxane removal media.6. Siloxane removal will be accomplished with replaceable media.7. Moisture removal will be by combination of moisture separators and chilling of gas to a

maximum temperature of 50°F by use of glycol chiller.8. Gas will first pass through H2S removal vessel.9. Gas will then be sent to skid mounted filter moisture separators to remove water droplets

and residual particulate from H2S removal media.10. Gas will then be compressed to 2-5-psig by a rotary lobe compressor with VFD drive.11. Two compressors will be installed with one being a standby unit.12. Pressurized gas will pass through dual core heat exchanger, first contacting cool gas

leaving heat exchanger and then cooled by re-circulated glycol solution.13. Cool gas leaving heat exchanger is reheated with incoming gas to lower relative

humidity.14. Gas leaves skid to enter a pair of series installed siloxane removal vessels and returned

to skid for final filtration before being sent to engine generators for consumption.15. System shall run to maintain constant supply pressure.16. Control for leaving pressure is twofold with first control mechanism being compressor

VFD and second control mechanism being electronic control valve which bypassespressurized flow back to blower suction.

17. Hydrogen sulfide vessel will have condensate drained from it by use of automatic driptrap.

18. System shall be fully self-controlled, only requiring run command from Plant PLC. Gasconditioning skid shall be provided with Ethernet connection to allow access to allinformation points on system and to allow for remote access by equipment manufacturerfor diagnostics.

19. Data from gas conditioning skid to be displayed on HMI are detailed on Drawing 009-N-38 and are considered minimum. Coordinate System data with System Supplier andOwner.

20. System shall remain in stand-by mode until run required signal is generated from PlantPLC.

21. Run required shall be initiated on command for Engine-Generator to run.22. All other control shall be through local control panel as described in Section 11990 –

Equipment Control Panels.23. When system has started and reached operating conditions, a ready signal shall be

returned to the Plant PLC.


24. Detailed operational description of Biogas Conditioning and Compression functionally islocated in Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels.

25. Automated Drip Traps are functionally described in Section 11990 – Equipment ControlPanels.

26. Owner will be required to monitor H2S and siloxane concentrations within gas streamand condition of media to determine proper change-out frequency. Interval for thisshould start at once per month and increase to once every 6 months as trends are betterdetermined.

R. Functional Description – Biogas Engine Generators and Heat Recovery

1. All areas of this process carry a Class 1, Division 1, Group D classification.2. This process works in conjunction with multiple biogas related processes.3. Purpose of Biogas Engine-Generators is to beneficially use available biogas to generate

electricity to offset electrical purchases and to provide heat for building and processsystems.

4. Each engine will be provided with flow meter (510-FE/FIT-3832/3833) to monitor biogasfuel consumption.

5. Engine-generators will be furnished suitable for a dual fuel supply (Biogas / Natural Gas).6. Use on Natural gas is intended for stand-by power use only.7. Engine-generators will be piped to the non-interruptible natural gas supply.8. System will be fully self-controlled, only requiring a run command and desired output

level from Plant PLC and/or synchronizing switchgear.9. Engine-generator will be provided with Ethernet connection to allow access to all

information points on system and to allow for remote access by equipment manufacturerfor diagnostics.

10. Data from Biogas Engine Generators to be displayed on HMI are detailed on Drawing009-N-39 and are considered minimum. Coordinate System data with System Supplierand Owner.

11. Detailed operational description of the Biogas Engine Generators functionally is locatedin Section 16900 – Digester Gas Cogeneration System. General Auto operation isdescribed as follows:

a. At HMI, Operator shall have selector for Heat/Electrical Generation priority (sameselection as provided for Boilers).

b. With selector switch in Electrical Priority position, system shall remain in stand-bymode until run required signal is generated from Plant PLC.

c. Lead selector switch shall be provided at HMI to manually select which unit is in leadposition.

d. PLC shall monitor biogas storage volume (cover position relative to liquid level).e. With volume above adjustable set-point (25% full) a run command shall be

generated for Gas Conditioning and Compression system.f. When Ready signal received from Gas Conditioning and Compression system, PLC

shall send run command to lead Engine.g. PLC shall monitor biogas volume and adjust engine output (50-100%) to maintain

adjustable volume set-point (initially set to 50% full).h. If lead Engine at 100% load and stored volume increases to above adjustable set-

point (initially set to 75% full), run command shall be given to lag Engine and bothunits should be dropped to 50% load and then ramped up equally to maintainvolume set-point.

i. With selector switch in Heat Priority position, system shall run as described abovewith cover position control point at a higher adjustable set-point (initially set to 85%full).

j. Upon loss of Utility electrical power, system will be controlled by Plant SynchronizingSwitchgear. Engines will be run on natural gas as required to meet desired portion ofplant load.


k. When engine is called to run, associated Generator Heat Exchanger Pump shall beenergized.

l. System shall monitor biogas pressure in piping system, upon fall in pressure belowset-point (2 inches water column), Engine Generators shall be stopped.

m. Manual start-stop shall be provided at HMI with adjustable percent load selection(50%) and Natural/Biogas selection. Operator shall have option to start an Engineand define output and fuel choice of unit. Interlocks as same as in Auto.

12. Purpose of Engine-Generators heat recovery system is to recovery waste heat fromengine and engine’s exhaust stream to be used for process and building heating.

13. System consists of three circulated water loops, one routed through engine jacket andexhaust stream, one routed through engine lube oil and intercooler system and otherdirectly connected to plant heating loop.

14. Engine jacket and plant loops interface at Engine-Generator Heat Exchanger to transferheat between loops.

15. Engine jacket loop is circulated through Engine followed by exhaust heat exchanger andthen routed to Engine Generator Heat Exchanger (EGHE) where heat is transferred toplant heating system.

16. Three-way valve is installed to bypass EGHE as required to ensure plant system doesnot overcool engine.

17. Flow is then routed through air cooled heat exchanger (radiator) to ensure adequateengine cooling is provided.

18. Three way valve is installed downstream of radiator to provide precise temperaturecontrol.

19. Flow from three way valve is then routed back to engine.20. Flow is driven through system by jacket water circulating pump.21. Lube oil cooling system consists of a pump flowing through lube oil cooler and up to

radiator for cooling.22. Plant loop consists of circulating pump which draws water from plant system and pushes

it through EGHE where heat is added to plant system.23. Water is then returned to plant heating system.24. Depending on manufacturer, engine loop components may or may not come factory

installed (radiator is shipped loose by all manufacturers). For systems factory installed,all controls on two engine loops come prewired and are controlled by local control panel.Systems that do not come factory installed shall to be wired in field.

25. Upon engine starting, jacket water and lube oil pumps shall energize. Radiator willoperate as required to maintain entering engine temperatures. Three-way valves shallmodulate to properly cool engine.

26. Generator Heat Exchanger Pumps (510-P-4001/4002) shall be controlled in either Handor Auto from Local Control Station.

27. With Generator Heat Exchanger Pump Local Control Station in Hand, Generator HeatExchanger Pump shall be energized and shall run continuously. Hand is intended formaintenance purposes only.

28. With Generator Heat Exchanger Pump Local Control Station in Off, Generator HeatExchanger Pump is off.

29. With Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Auto at HMI thefollowing shall be available from HMI:

a. Generator Heat Exchanger Pumps shall operate when called by respective EngineGenerator (see above).

30. With Generator Heat Exchanger Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Autoselector in Manual at HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes Generator Heat Exchanger Pump.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes Generator Heat Exchanger Pump.


31. Interlocks:

a. Biogas pressure set-point (2 inches water column).b. Biogas Volumec. Biogas Conditioning and Compression System ready.d. Utility Power Availablee. Motor overload


a. Engine Generator Failb. Generator Heat Exchanger Pump Fail.c. Emergency Stop.

S. Functional Description – Heating Pumps

1. Primary Hot Water and structure Heating Pumps shall be provided with EmergencyPower when utility power fails.

2. The purpose of the Heating Pump Systems is to distribute the thermal energy within theheating water system between the heat generators (boilers and engine generators) andthe heat users (buildings and digester heat exchangers).

3. There are five like pumping systems each working in a lead/standby configuration.4. The Primary Hot Water Pumps No. 1 and 2 (510-P-4321/4322) are the main distributors

of thermal energy by making hot water flow available to all heat users and heatgenerators.

5. One Primary Hot Water Pump will always be running with an alternator swapping outlead pump operation based on schedule.

6. The four other systems are building heating pumps with a system for the AdministrationBuilding (510-P-4307/4308), Headworks Building (510-P-4305/4306), Solids Building(510-P-4303/4304) and Digester Complex (510-P-4301/4302).

7. One of each system Pumps will run whenever outside air temperature (510-TE-3781)warrants the need for heat. The second Pump in each system will alternate on ascheduled basis.

8. Pumps controlled by the PLC.9. The Heating Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control

Station.10. With the Heating Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the Heating Pump is energized

and will run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.11. With the Heating Pump Local Control Station in Off, the Heating Pump is off.12. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI

the following shall be available from the HMI:

a. At the HMI, the Operator will have a Lead/Lag selector switch for each set of PrimaryHot Water Pumps and for each set of Building Heating Pumps.

b. The operator will have a set-point for outside air temperature which should energizethe system.

c. The lead Primary Hot Water Pump shall energize and run continuously.d. The PLC shall monitor differential pressure switch (510-DPSL-4321/4322) status

across the lead Pump.e. Upon loss of differential when pump called to run, an alarm shall be generated and

lag pump shall energize.f. Lead/lag position of each pump shall be automatically sequenced and be based on

adjustable scheduled interval, initially set to one week. Manual alternation is alsoallowed.


g. When outside air temperature is below the outside air temperature set-point for thecorresponding system (55°F process spaces, 75°F Administration Building) leadpump shall energize and run continuously.

h. Lead/lag position of each pump shall be automatically sequenced and be based onadjustable scheduled interval, initially set to one week. Manual alternation is alsoallowed.

13. With the Heating Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector inManual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Heating Pump.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Heating Pump.

14. Interlocks:

a. Temperature set-pointb. Motor overload


a. Heating Pump Fail.b. Emergency Stop.

T. Functional Description – Bio-solid Storage/Loadout

1. The purpose of the Bio-solid Storage/Loadout is to store sludge in storage tanks until thesludge can be removed by truck.

2. This system is manually initiated.3. Mixing Pumps are operated manually.4. The Mixing Pumps remain running continuously.5. When a Loadout procedure is required, the switching of valves using the Mixing Pumps

to load the truck is done locally and manually.6. Plant personal moves truck into loading position and the loadout valve is stroked to load

biosolids into the truck.7. An Operator adjustable timer closes the Loadout valve, returning the Pumps to operating

in mixing mode.8. There is only local manual control of this system.9. Operator shall monitor run status of Mixing Pumps and whether a Pump Failure has

occurred.

U. Functional Description – Ferric Chloride Feed System

1. Purpose of Ferric Chloride Feed System is to remove phosphorous from wastewater byfeeding liquid ferric chloride solution.

2. This solution shall provide phosphorus removal in the following areas: screened influentaddition, in filtrate streams, and addition to digesters to prevent struvite accumulation.For effluent polishing, Ferric Chloride is fed directly to aeration basin effluent channel,and dosing shall be based on measurement of orthophosphate by online orthophosphateanalyzer located downstream of final clarifiers. For filtrate phosphorus management,ferric chloride is dosed to filtrate underflow drain pipe located below digested sludgeGBT. For addition to digesters, ferric chloride can be added at a set dose to thickenedprimary sludge discharge piping.

3. Chemical feed system consists of three existing storage tanks, four existing chemicalfeed pumps with controls and multiple application points (as previously noted). Operatorshall determine which pump doses which ferric addition point by manually configuringflow path using valves available downstream of pump discharges. There is no indication


on HMI which pump is dosing which point, therefore, operator shall make consciouseffort to adjust dosing set point based on intended application point.

4. Feed Pump functionality shall be maintained. In addition, external flow pacing shall beemployed by Operator at HMI.

5. With Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector in Auto at HMI thefollowing shall be available from HMI:

a. Screened Influent Addition: Operator shall initiate feed to parshall flume channel.Feed control for addition of ferric chloride to this location shall be flow paced basedon influent flow rate.

b. Aeration Basin Addition: Chemical will be added to the liquid stream in AerationBasins in Aerobic Zone 1E or 1F. This addition will be to polish effluent phosphoruswhen biological phosphorus removal is not achieving removal goals. Dosing shallbe based on effluent orthophosphate target value bandwidth. Operator shall inputmaximum orthophosphate concentration and minimum orthophosphateconcentration. When maximum concentration is exceeded, chemical feed toaeration basins shall be initiated. When minimum concentration is achieved,chemical feed to aeration basins shall be stopped. Chemical dosing rate shall beflow paced to influent flow rate and trimmed based on online orthophosphateanalyzer located downstream of final clarifiers.

c. Filtrate Addition: Addition of ferric chloride to filtrate water shall be initiated whendigested sludge is being fed to digested sludge GBT. When digested sludge feedflowmeter registers a flow rate, signal shall initiate filtrate ferric chloride feed pumps.Filtrate ferric chloride feed pump initiation shall have 15 minute delay after digestedsludge flow to digested sludge GBT is initiated. Operator shall input desired chemicalflow rate (gallons per hour) and chemical feed pumps shall feed at constant rate untildigested sludge flow to digested sludge GBT stops.

d. Digester Addition: Addition of ferric chloride to Digesters will be achieved by additionto the thickened WAS line. This ferric chloride addition shall be initiated whenthickened WAS is being fed to Digester. When thickened WAS feed flowmeterregisters a flow rate, a signal shall initiate digester ferric chloride feed pumps.Digester ferric chloride feed pump initiation shall have 15 minute delay afterthickened WAS flow to digester is initiated. Operator shall input desired chemicalflow rate (gallons per hour) and chemical feed pumps shall feed at constant rate untilthickened WAS flow to Digester stops.

e. Existing Ferric Chloride Control Panel shall be modified allowing Operator at HMI tomonitor:

i. Ferric Tank Containment Floodii. Ferric Pump Containment Floodiii. Common Alarm

V. Functional Description – Effluent Make-Up Air Unit Preheating

1. The purpose of the effluent preheat system is to use available heat from within the planteffluent flow stream to preheat ventilation air entering the make-up air units serving theHeadworks Building and the Digester Complex.

2. The system will use effluent water (W3L) being supplied to the screened primary sludgepiping system since it is a continuously available source.

3. The water will be drawn from the supply piping system, routed through a solidsseparator/strainer, then pumped through a fine mesh wye strainer, through a plate andframe heat exchanger, and then back to the effluent distribution main.


4. Within the heat exchanger, the effluent will heat up a circulated propylene glycolsolution.

5. On the glycol side, a pump will draw the glycol solution through a strainer and through apreheat coil within the make-up air unit served, then returning it to the heat exchanger.

6. There is a separate system for each make-up air unit.7. The system will be locked out from running whenever outside air temperature is greater

than 60°F. This set-point shall be adjustable by authorized personnel.8. The system will run when outside air temperature is at least 5°F lower than effluent

temperature.9. When called to run, both pumps will energize and run continuously.10. The face and bypass dampers in the Make-up air units will modulate to ensure that

glycol solution leaving the coil does not fall below an adjustable set-point (initially set at32°F) to protect from overcooling the effluent.

11. Effluent temperature leaving the heat exchanger will be monitored and the glycol pumpstopped if temperature falls below adjustable set-point of 38°F.

12. The Effluent/Glycol Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the LocalControl Station.

13. With the Effluent/Glycol Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the Effluent/Glycol Pumpis energized and will run continuously. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

14. With the Effluent/Glycol Pump Local Control Station in Off, the Effluent/Glycol Pump isoff.

15. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMIthe following shall be available from the HMI:

a. At PLC will monitor outside air temperature (510-TE-3781) and effluent watertemperature.

b. When outside air temperature is greater than 60°F, the system will remain OFF.c. When outside air temperature is at least 5°F lower than effluent temperature, Glycol

Pump and Effluent Heating Pump shall energize and run continuously.d. PLC shall monitor temperature of effluent leaving heat exchanger.e. Upon fall in temperature below adjustable set-point of 38°F, Glycol Pump will stop

and an alarm signal sent to Make-up Air Unit controller.f. After an adjustable time delay, initially set at 30-minutes, system will restart.

16. With the Effluent/Glycol Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Autoselector in Manual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Effluent/Glycol Pump.b. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Effluent/Glycol Pump.

17. Interlocks:

a. Temperature set-pointsb. Motor overload


a. Effluent/Glycol Pump Fail.b. Emergency Stop.

W. Functional Description – Low Pressure W3 Pumping

1. Purpose of Low Pressure W3 Pumping System is to provide water to Gravity Thickenerand/or sludge discharge (SPSD/PSD) of Sludge Screen Nos. 1 and 2 on a continuousbasis.

2. W3 will be pumped from Chlorine Contact Tank.


3. Low Pressure W3 Pump discharge shall be metered (510-FE/FIT-5851) beforeproceeding to its destination.

4. Low Pressure W3 Pumps shall be configured in a Lead/Standby configuration alternatingweekly or manually as selected by Operator at HMI.

5. Low Pressure W3 Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from Local ControlStation.

6. With Low Pressure W3 Pump Local Control Station in Hand, Low Pressure W3 Pumpshall be energized and run continuously. Local speed potentiometer is used to changespeed of Low Pressure W3 Pump. Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

7. With Low Pressure W3 Pump Local Control Station in Off, Low Pressure W3 Pump isoff.


a. Pump speed is controlled by Operator setting minimum flow set-point based onequipment in service as measured by 510-FE/FIT-5851.

9. With Low Pressure W3 Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and Manual/Auto selector inManual at HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes Low Pressure W3 Pump at VFD default speed.b. Speed – Operator has ability to adjust speed of Low Pressure W3 Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes Low Pressure W3 Pump.

10. Provide operator adjustable set points for both low and high pressure alarms.

11. Interlocks:

a. Pressure Set-pointb. Motor overload


a. Low Pressure Alarmb. Low Pressure W3 Pump Failc. Low Pressure W3 Pump VFD Fail

X. Functional Description – Ortho Phosphate Analyzer

1. Purpose of Ortho Phosphate Analyzer is to use data to polish alkalinity by Lime addition(see Functional description for Alkalinity - Hydrated Lime System herein).

2. Analyzer (455-AE/AIT-5811) shall sample W3L effluent.3. Analyzer operation and maintenance shall follow manufacturer recommendations.4. Analyzer shall alert Operator of an internal problem that requires attention.

Y. Functional Description – W3 Pumping

1. The purpose of the W3 Pumping System is to distribute W3 to Plant processes asdemanded.

2. The W3 will be pumped from the existing Chlorine Contact Tank.3. The four W3 Pumps (510-P-5901/5902/5903/5904) will pump W3 into two motorized

automatic self-cleaning W3 strainers (510-M5921/5922), bladder tank (455-T-5941) andthrough a flow meter (510-FE/FIT-5951) before being distributed throughout the system.

4. The W3 will be further filtered within individual buildings that require fine filtration on theW3 such as the polymer system, seal water, and the GBT’s.


5. The W3 Pump discharge is metered (510-FE/FIT-5951) before proceeding to itsdestination.

6. The W3 Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local Control Station.7. With the W3 Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the W3 Pump is energized and will

run continuously. A local speed potentiometer is used to change speed of the W3 Pump.Hand is intended for maintenance purposes only.

8. With the W3 Pump Local Control Station in Off, the W3 Pump is off.9. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. W3 pumps shall be controlled by maintaining pressure as measured by 455-PIT-2801 located in Solids building at the GBT’s.

b. As pressure in the discharge line drops, an additional pump will be brought online.c. Pumps shall be controlled as follows:

i. High Pressure W3 Pump No. 3 and 4 are 100 gpm pumps and shall be operatedin a Lead/Standby configuration.

ii. The sequencer shall allow switching of pumps by event, ETM, or Operatorselection.

iii. Standby pump shall only energize if flow and pressure cannot be maintainedwhen all other available pumps are operating.

iv. High Pressure W3 Pump No.1 and 2 are 300 gpm pumps and shall be operatedin a Lag1/Lag2 configuration.

v. The sequencer shall allow switching of pumps by event, ETM, or Operatorselection.

vi. Pumps 1 and 2 shall be speed paced to maintain W3 header pressure and flowin the event Pumps No. 3 and 4 cannot maintain discharge flow or pressure atprescribed values.

d. Motorized W3 Strainers shall be equipped with Interval/Duration timers to allowbackflushing and draining of filtered material.

e. High differential pressure across the strainers shall alarm and cause strainers to gointo backflushing continuously.

f. Motorized W3 strainers are operationally detailed in Section 11990 – EquipmentControl Panels.

10. With the W3 Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector inManual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the W3 Pump.b. Speed – Operator has the ability to adjust speed of W3 Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the W3 Pump.

11. Interlocks:

a. Minimum Pressureb. Motor overload


a. W3 Pump Failb. W3 Pump VFD Fail

Z. Functional Description – Plant Air System


1. The purpose of the Plant Air System is to provide clean pressurized air to loadsthroughout the Plant.

2. Control of the compressor is independent and is located on the compressor itself.3. The compressor will automatically unload itself when necessary.4. Air Compressor No. 2 (510-M-6002) is connected by AHP piping to the existing receiver

tank that existing Air Compressor No. 1 (510-M-6001) is mounted on.5. Air Compressor No. 2 will be the main compressor and Compressor No. 1 will be the

standby unit.6. The two air compressors are followed by a Refrigerated Air Dryer (510-M-6011) and a

coalescing filter.7. Critical Alarms for this equipment as follows:

a. Low System Air Pressure (510-PSL-6001)b. High System Air Pressure (510-PSH-6001)

2.13 THICKENER BUILDING RIO PANEL (500-RIO-1) (Reference Drawings: 008-I-2, 009-N-23, 31,47, 48, and 62).

A. Panel:

1. Indoor Enclosure2. NEMA 123. Free Standing Double Door4. 120 VAC Power Supply


Tag Device Description Type500-RECT-1 Electrical Outlet 120 VAC500-DATA-1 Ethernet Jack SW1 (PCN) RJ-45


Tag Device Description Initial Setting500-RIO-1 Remote I/O Rack Section 13450500UPS-1 UPS Section 13456 2 hours500-SRG-1 Surge Protector Section 13441500-FAN-1 Fan Cooling fan




E. Functional Description – Gravity Thickener

1. See Thickened Primary Sludge (TPSD) Pumping functional description (paragraph 2.08.G below).

F. Functional Description – Thickened Primary Sludge (TPSD) Pumping


1. TPSD Pumping shall be provided with Emergency Power when utility power fails.2. The purpose of the Thickened Primary Sludge (TPSD) Pumping system is to transfer

TPSD from the gravity thickener directly to the digesters.3. The use of ODS or air operated diaphragm pumps allow the system to handle

approximately 5 to 7% solids.4. Sludge Blanket Detector (505-AE-2301) shall monitor sludge blanket level in Gravity

Thickener.5. Provide operator adjustable sludge blanket level setpoint at HMI. Initially set at 5-ft.6. Adjust pump stroke rate to maintain sludge blanket level setpoint.7. Send pump stroke rate signal to TPSD Pump Control Stations.8. If stroke rate signal to TPSD Pump Control Stations is greater than pump manufacturer’s

maximum allowable stroke rate, Thickener Building RIO Panel shall accept signal fromTPSD Pump Control Stations with adjusted stroke rate. Provide indication on HMI thatstroke length has been adjusted until stroke rate required signal sent to TPSD PumpControl Stations drops below manufacturer’s allowable stroke rate. This is for operator’sknowledge that pump is operating at capacity.

9. If sludge blanket level fails, Operator shall manually adjust stroke rate for desired sludgewithdrawal.

10. ODS pumps utilize stroke counter to determine flowrate.11. Pumps will operate in Lead/Standby configuration; alternating weekly or manually.12. This is considered a continuous operation.13. If Thickener Building RIO Panel receives Moisture Detection alarm signal from Lead

TPSD Pump Control Station, stop Lead pump and start Lag pump.14. TPSD Pumping operational functionality is described in Section 11990 – Equipment

Control Panels.15. Interlocks:

a. One TPSD Pump Stroking.b. Digester Inlet Valve Open.


a. Plant Air Pressure Low.

G. Functional Description – Polymer Feed System

1. The purpose of the polymer feed system is to prepare and distribute the polymer solutionto the mixing valve at the head end of the GBT’s.

2. This process works in conjunction with WAS Thickening (see paragraph 2.06 L).3. This process works in conjunction with DSD Thickening (see paragraph 2.06 M).4. This process works in conjunction with High Pressure W3 System (see paragraph 2.07.

Z).5. Inside the mixing valve, the polymer solution and WAS completely mix prior to entering

the GBT.6. The polymer conditions the sludge before entering the GBT to aid in the thickening

process.7. Polymer shall be pumped from the polymer tote into the polymer mixing system (into a

polymer mixing assembly, though a static mixer, and then into the mixing valve).8. W2 will be used for mixing water and W3 will be used for the carrier water.9. Polymer systems shall be arranged in the following manor:

a. WAS GBT Polymer Feed System No. 1 shall be dedicated to WAS GBT No. 1b. WAS GBT Polymer Feed System No. 2 shall be dedicated to WAS GBT No. 2c. DSD GBT Polymer Feed System shall be dedicated to DSD GBT.


10. The Polymer Pumps shall be controlled in either Hand or Auto from the Local ControlStation.

11. With the Polymer Pump Local Control Station in Hand, the Polymer Pump is energizedand will run continuously. Operator has local dosing control using potentiometer. Hand isintended for maintenance purposes only.

12. With the Polymer Pump Local Control Station in Off, the Polymer Pump is off.13. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI


a. The polymer feed system will activate when the respective GBT calls for it.b. The liquid polymer pump activates and the dilution water solenoid valve opens.c. Polymer is fed into the polymer mix chamber assembly where the polymer and

dilution water are mixed.d. Then flow goes through a static mixer and to the sludge mixing valve assembly.e. Polymer feed rate is defined manually by the Operator at the GBT.f. The polymer feed system will stop when dictated by GBT shutdown cycle.g. See Section 11990 – Equipment Control Panels for detailed GBT operation.

14. With the Polymer Pump Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector inManual at the HMI:

a. Start – This selection energizes the Polymer Pump.b. Speed – Operator shall have ability to control speed of Polymer Pump.c. Stop – This selection de-energizes the Polymer Pump.

15. Interlocks:

c. Respective GBT running (when in auto).d. Polymer low flow switch (500-FSL-3101/3102/3103)e. Low W2 pressuref. Low W3 pressure


c. Polymer System Faild. Polymer Pump VFD Faile. Polymer Pump running and low Flow detected at respective flow switch.f. Containment area flood switch (see paragraph 17.a below).

17. Flood switch:

b. A containment area flood switch (500-LSH-3131) shall detect small amounts of liquidspill and alarm Operator at HMI.

2.14 CHLORINATION BUILDING PLC PANEL (475-PLC-1) (Reference Drawings: 008-I-1, 009-N-49,51, 52, 53, and 54).

A. Panel:

1. Existing Enclosure2. NEMA 123. Double Door4. Additional I/O under the scope of this project may require additional modules be added

to the existing PLC enclosure.


B. Communications:

1. CAT6 cable shall be run to Solids Building (Structure 455) EtherNet switch (455-SW1)for communications with SCADA System.

C. Functional Description – Sodium Bisulfite:

1. The purpose of Sodium Bisulfite addition is for de-chlorination of the effluent water.2. The chemical feed system consists of two existing storage tanks and two existing

chemical feed pumps with controls.3. Feed Pump functionality shall be maintained. In addition, external flow pacing shall be

employed originated by the Operator at the HMI.4. With the Local Control Station in Auto, and the Manual/Auto selector in Auto at the HMI

the following shall be available from the HMI:

a. Chlorine Contact Tank Addition: The operator will initiate feed to this location. Feedcontrol for addition of Sodium Bisulfite to this location will be flow paced based onthe influent flow rate.

b. The existing Sodium Bisulfite Control Panel shall be modified allowing the Operatorat the HMI to monitor:

i. Sodium Bisulfite Pump Runningii. Sodium Bisulfite Pump fail

D. Functional Description – pH Adjustment:

1. Effluent pH adjustment allows the City to meet a variable daily maximum ammonialimits as establish by the State of Wisconsin.

2. This is an existing system whose functionality shall be maintained.3. An Ethernet connection from 475-PLC-1 allows the Operator to monitor pH adjustment

conditions. Coordinate which pH adjustment parameters Owner requires to be monitoredat the HMI.

2.15 SODIUM BISULFITE (NaHSO3) PUMP NO. 1 AND 2 CONTROL PANELS (Pump Tag: 475-P-4901 and -4902) (Reference Drawing: 009-N-49)

F. Existing Enclosure.G. Add I/O as required by P&ID.

2.16 MIXING PUMP CONTROL STATION (530-LCS-4605) (Reference Drawing: 009-N-46).

A. Panel:

1. Existing Enclosure.

B. Rear of Panel Devices:

1. Add I/O as required by P&ID.2. Provide functionality per Drawings and specified herein.

2.17 LIFT STATION PLC PANELS (001-PLC-1 through 028-PLC-1) (Reference Drawing: 008-I-7).

A. Panel:

1. Existing Enclosures


2. A small “relay replacer” PLC shall be installed at each lift station to communicate inputsto WWTP via existing EtherNet radio at each lift station.

a. Inputs for each lift station are enumerated in Section 13482 – Process ControlSystem – I/O List – Schedule 1.

b. Lift station electrical schematics can be obtained by written request of Owner orEngineer.

c. Otter Creek Lift Station has a CompactLogix PLC and shall only require additionalprogramming and accommodations for additional I/O.

2.18 ETHERNET/IP NETWORK

A. PCS shall include EtherNet network for monitor and control of motors (via MCC), UPS’s,VFD’s, and select vendor equipment panels as follows:

1. 300-SW12. 300UPS-13. 300-PLC-14. 300-PTR-15. 300-SERV-16. 300-WS-17. Existing Radio IN 300-PLC-18. 405-SW19. 405UPS-110. 405-PLC-111. 405-WS-112. 405-LCP-220113. 405-LCP-2202 (If Owner selects Alternate No. 2)14. 405MCC-115. 701-LCP-070116. 701-VFD-070117. 436-SW118. 436UPS-119. 436-PLC-120. 436-WS-121. 436-HIST-122. 436-MCP-140123. 436-LCP-550124. 436-LCP-5502 (If Owner selects Alternate No. 4)25. 436MCC-126. 436-SWGR-227. 436-VFD-101128. 436-VFD-102129. 436-VFD-121230. 436-VFD-122231. 436-VFD-210132. 436-VFD-210233. 436-VFD-210334. 436-VFD-210435. 455-SW136. 455UPS-137. 455-PLC-138. 475-PLC-139. 455-WS-140. 455-LCP-2801


41. 455-LCP-290242. 455-LCP-440343. 455MCC-144. 455-VFD-200145. 455-VFD-240146. 455-VFD-240247. 455-VFD-240348. 455-VFD-240449. 455-VFD-250150. 455-VFD-250251. 455-VFD-250352. 455-VFD-270253. 455-VFD-300154. 455-VFD-300255. 455-VFD-450156. 455-VFD-560157. 455-VFD-560158. 455-VFD-561159. 500-RIO-160. 500UPS-161. 500-VFD-270462. 500-VFD-270563. 510-SW164. 510UPS-165. 510-PLC-166. 510-WS-167. 510-LCP-381168. 510-LCP-390169. 510-LCP-3902 (If Owner selects Alternate 1)70. 510MCC-171. 510-SWGR-172. 510-VFD-270173. 510-VFD-270674. 510-VFD-270775. 510-VFD-330376. 510-VFD-330477. 510-VFD-360178. 510-VFD-360279. 510-VFD-580180. 510-VFD-580281. 510-VFD-590182. 510-VFD-590283. 510-VFD-590384. 510-VFD-5904

B. BIN shall include EtherNet network for monitor and control of CCTV’s, Plant Lighting, HVACand Plant Security as follows:

1. 300-LS-12. 300-SW23. 300-SW3 (Existing equipment)4. Select lab equipment5. 300-SEC-16. 300-FW-17. 300-CAM18. 300-CAM2


9. 300-CAM310. 405-SW211. 405-CAM112. 436-SW213. 436-CAM114. 436-CAM215. 436-CAM316. 455-SW217. 455-CAM118. 455-CAM219. 510-SW2

C. MCC’s shall be pre-wired for EtherNet communications. There shall be a single EtherNetconnection point on each structure MCC. It is System Integrator responsibility to make theconnection from the PLC Panel to the connection on the MCC’s.

D. All EtherNet cable between PLC’s and MCC’s shall be CAT6.

E. Systems Integrator is responsible for all address coordination and configuration.

F. Devices shall be configured to provide all parameter and data registers to the PLC’s.


A. Perform In-Factory inspection and testing of Process Control System control panel at site ofpanel fabrication. Test may be witnessed by Engineer and Owner. Notify Engineer andOwner three (3) weeks in advance of In-Factory testing to determine if either will be present.

B. Process Control System PLC shall pass In-Factory inspection and testing prior to shipmentto job site.

C. In-Factory testing shall conform to Section 13492 – Process Control System - Testing



A. Install and wire panel components in accordance with approved submittals, manufacturer’srecommendations, and any applicable federal, state, and local codes.

B. Perform field test of Process Control System upon completion of installation, wiring and fieldinspection.

C. Field testing shall conform to Section 13492 - Process Control System - Testing.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Additional System Integrator Services:

1. In addition to those services specified in Section 13400, provide the following services:

a. Testing specified in Section 13492 - Process Control System - Testing.b. Training specified in Section 13454 - SCADA Software.


B. Update PLC firmware to manufacturer's latest revision level during course of Work andWarranty period. Perform updating as revisions are issued by manufacturer.

C. Maintenance:

1. Properly maintain operational equipment at factory or on-site throughout course of Work.2. Perform preventative maintenance in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.3. Keep maintenance records with equipment and make them available for inspection at

any time during course of Work.

D. Provide coordination assistance necessary for calibration of overall Process Control Systemand for resolution of discrepancies between I/O subsystem, panels and Equipment. Whereconflicts exist, document conflicts in writing to Engineer. Provide terminal numbers, devicename, tests performed, and diagnosis of problem.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. ANALYSIS INSTRUMENTATIONProject No. 12026 13423-1

SECTION 13423ANALYSIS INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Items specified in this section shall conform to general requirements of Section 13400.

B. Section includes field mounted level transmitters and sensors for Process Instrumentationand Control.

C. Ranges and performance parameters are listed in Section 13481 – Instrument List.

D. Training in accordance with section 13494 – Process Control System – Training.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. WPCF: Water Pollution Control Federation

B. Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater, 15th Edition, 1980

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 (A5) ORP ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Xylem-YSI analyzer with IQ sensors.2. Endress+Hauser with Memosens technology.3. No Substitutes Allowed.

B. Probe-cable-converter/transmitter device to indicate/transmit oxidation-reduction potential ofprocess solution.

1. Probe shall contain glass and reference electrode, thermo-compensator, and pre-amplifier for electrode.

2. Converter/Transmitter: Solid state device accepting millivolt signal from probe andconverts to analog current signal.

C. Mounting:

1. Probe: Submersible with potted multi-conductor cable.2. Converter: Panel mount.

D. Connections:

1. Probe: STD NPT union mount.

E. Range: +2000 mV

F. Adjustments: Range, automatic-manual temperature compensator, manual temperatureadjust, zero adjust.

G. Probe: LCP case, platinum electrode, refillable reference electrode with ceramic plug.

ANALYSIS INSTRUMENTATION Donohue & Associates, Inc.13423-2 Project No. 12026

H. Output: 4-20 mAdc (isolated) into 600 ohms.

I. Cable: Multi-conductor.

1. Shall allow for 75 feet of lateral movement of sensor.

J. Accuracy: +0.5% of span.

K. Power: 120Vac, +10%, 60 Hz.

L. Special tools and equipment.

1. Furnish one platinum electrode, one reference electrode, and one thermo-compensationfor every ORP meter specified.

2. One wet calibration kit.

M. See special requirements in paragraph 3.01 for Aeration Basin application.

2.02 (A7) pH SENSOR and CONTROLLER

A. Description:

1. Sensor shall continuously measure pH in aqueous solution.2. Provide one (1) digital controller for each pH sensor.3. pH Sensor and Controller shall be supplied by same manufacturer.

B. pH Sensor

1. Manufacturer:

a. Xylem-YSI Sensolyt 700 IQb. Endress+Hauser with Memosens technology.c. No Substitutes Allowed.

2. Design Parameters:

a. Anticipated Measuring Range: 6.0 – 9.0b. Sensitivity: +/- 0.01 pHc. Stability: 0.03 pH per 24 hours, non-cumulatived. Operating Temperature: 32 to 122oFe. Maximum flow rate: 10 fpsf. Sensor Pressure/Temperature limit: 100psi at 158oFg. Transmission Distance: 328-fth. Integral Sensor Cable: shield and polyurethane jacket.

3. Construction:

a. Shall consist of:

i. Encapsulated sensor with digital signal processor, pre-amplifier, referenceelectrode, measuring electrode, ground electrode, and replaceable salt bridge.

ii. Integral 75 feet cable.iii. Wetted material: stainless steel for immersion installation.

b. Probe shall have built in Pt 1000 ohm RTD temperature compensator.


c. Provide titanium ground electrode to eliminate ground loop currents in measuringelectrodes.

d. Mounting style: 1-in NPT threads on both ends to mount into end of pipe forimmersion into basin.

e. Standard equipment:

i. Probe.ii. Salt bridgeiii. Integral cable, adequate length of cable required to extend from immersed

sensor to controller and allow sensor to be swiveled min. 90 deg out of basin.Loop excess cable under mounting assembly.

iv. O&M Manual

4. Mounting:

a. Provide manufacturers handrail mounting hardware which includes 1-1/2” diameterCPVC Sch 80 pipe and swivel/pivot/pipe clamp assembly with fasteners. Contractormay be required to provide new length of pipe to meet submergence requirements.Coordinate with manufacturer.

b. Assume min. 2’-0” sensor immersion; where centerline of top handrail is atapproximately 779.83-ft and Average Water Level is 775.00-ft. Contractor shallverify dimensions.

5. Accessories:

a. Standard cell solution, 500 ml, to replenish standard cell chamber in sensor whilereplacing salt bridge.

b. Provide two (2) spare salt bridges.

C. Controller

1. Manufacturer:

a. Xylem-YSIb. Endress+Hauser.c. No Substitutes Allowed.

2. Design Parameters:

a. Shall be microprocessor-based.b. Capable of receiving data from up to two sensors of different monitoring parameters;

pH and Ammonium.c. Connections between sensors and controller shall be “plug and play.”d. Shall operate using 90 to 130Vac, 10VA maximume. Shall use menu-driven operation system.f. Display: graphic dot matrix LCD with 128x64 pixels and LED backlightingg. Shall be equipped with temperature compensation.h. Provide data logger with capacity to store data on 15-min intervals for up to months

with two sensors. Provide data logger with RS-232 downloading capability.i. Provide three electromechanical SPDT relays (Form C)j. Provide user-configurable contacts rated 100 to 230Vac, 5 Amp at 30 Vdc resistive

maximum, UL rated.k. Provide two analog 4-20 mA outputs and selectable digital I/Ol. Provide the following alarms:

i. Low alarm point


ii. Low alarm point deadbandiii. High alarm pointiv. High alarm deadbandv. Off delayvi. On delay

m. Provide the following Controls:

i. High/low phasingii. Set pointiii. Deadbandiv. Overfeed timerv. Off delayvi. On delay

n. Communication: shall be coordinated during shop drawing review.o. All user settings shall be retained indefinitely in memory (non-volatile, EEPROM)p. Ambient Conditions Operation:

i. with less than 7W sensor load; -4 to 140oF; 0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing.

ii. with less than 25W sensor load; -4 to 104oF; 0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing.

3. Construction:

a. Components housed in NEMA 4X outdoor, heated, rated enclosureb. AC power supply shall be housed in interface unit.

4. Mounting:

a. Mount on top handrail, coordinate with sensing probe mounting.

5. Accessories:

a. Sun shieldb. O&M Manual

D. See special requirements in paragraph 3.01 for Aeration Basin application.

2.03 (A10) GAS DETECTION SYSTEM (COMB, O2)

A. Manufacturer:

1. Honeywell2. MSA3. GDS Corp.4. RKI Instruments5. No Substitutes Allowed.

B. Transmitter:

1. Electrical requirements:

a. Operating Voltage – The transmitter shall operate between 18VDC and 32VDC(24VDC Nominal).


b. The transmitter shall utilize removable terminals for sensor input, power and outputwiring. Terminals shall be labeled and provide a minimum of two inputs perpolarized wire connections to allow for daisy chain power configuration.

c. The transmitter shall allow for user configured transmitter output options as one ofthe following:

Three wire source 4-20mA Three wire sink 4-20mA Four wire isolated 4-20mA

d. The transmitter shall be capable of field upgradeable communication outputs. Thismust include Relays, Modbus® RTU or FoundationTM Fieldbus.

2. Mechanical Requirements:

a. The enclosure shall be constructed of either 316 Stainless Steel or LM25 Aluminumpainted with a 5-coat marine finishing process for corrosion protection, or anunpainted electro-polished 316 Stainless Steel

b. The enclosure shall have two standard integral mounting lugs:

The enclosure shall be capable of mounting to a standard 2” to 6” pipe utilizing apipe mounting kit.

The enclosure shall be capable of mounting to a ceiling utilizing a ceilingmounting kit.

The use of mounting straps or brackets shall not be used for standard wallinstallations.

c. The enclosure shall have a minimum of five ¾” NPT or M25 threaded conduit/cableentries to allow for expanded mounting options.

d. The enclosure shall include certified stopping plugs to close unused conduit/cableentries.

3. Transmitter Features:

a. The transmitter shall utilize a common local user interface for electrochemical (toxicand oxygen), catalytic bead (combustible) and point and open path (combustible)infrared sensing technology.

b. The transmitter shall be capable of providing at least two levels of passwordcontrolled access security to the menu structure for calibration, maintenance andconfiguration of the device.

c. The transmitter shall contain internal software diagnostics capable of reporting afault within 3 seconds of detection.

d. The transmitter shall store at least 1,280 alarm and fault events in a circular buffer.Events shall be capable to be sorted by order of occurrence, hour, all events by day,only the alarm events, and only the fault events.

e. The transmitter shall be capable of simulating the alarm events for validation ofproper system connection without the use of gas.

f. The transmitter shall be capable of producing a signal in the range of 4-20 mA to testwarning and notification devices without the use of calibration gas.

g. The transmitter shall be capable of inhibiting the output during maintenance to avoidfalse alarms.

h. The transmitter shall allow for a user configured calibration intervals reminder whichprovides an advance notification to the user that calibration is due.


i. The transmitter shall provide user configurable warning and fault milliampindications in the range of 1mA to 4mA and 20mA to 22mA. The transmitter mustprovide milliamp differentiation indication between a fault and warning signal.

4. Transmitter display:

a. The transmitter display shall be a backlight liquid crystal display (LCD).b. The LCD shall have a backlight for operation in limited visibility environments which

automatically illuminates during integration of the unit.c. The LCD shall have a heater actuated at temperatures below -20C to provide clear

resolution at -40C.d. The standard transmitter display shall provide both LED and LCD icon indication of

proper operation.e. The transmitter shall include three LEDs for indication of proper operation (Green

flashing), Fault (Amber) and Alarm (Red).f. The LEDs shall be viewable from a minimum of 50 feet.g. The display shall provide icons for normal operating condition, warning, alarm, and

fault states.h. The display must indicate the gas being monitored, status of the transmitter, sensor

full scale range, alarm 1 and 2 set points and measurement units on the LCD.i. The display shall indicate gas concentration both numerically, via a horizontal bar

graph, and with an alarm icon.j. Alarm set points shall be indicated as part of the horizontal bar graph for alarm 1 and

alarm 2.k. The transmitter menu structure must provide both alphanumeric and visual icons for

transmitter navigation.l. The transmitter display language shall include eight standard languages; that will be

selectable in the menu structure, including a minimum of following languages:English, Spanish, French, Portuguese, German, Italian, Russian, and Mandarin.

5. Non-Intrusive Calibration:

a. All sensor/transmitters shall be capable of being calibrated without opening anyenclosures.

b. Calibration shall be completed via the local display utilizing magnetic switches or aHART hand-held communicator.

c. Calibration of the sensor shall be so that only one person is required to completecalibration.

d. Successful calibration must be visually indicated via the LCD and / or HART handheld communicator.

6. Transmitter Outputs:

a. The standard transmitter output signal shall be 4 to 20mA with a HART digital signalsuperimposed on the traditional 4 to 20mA current loop.

b. The transmitter shall provide as an option an Intrinsically Safe port for connection ofa HART handheld device.

c. The transmitter shall have an HART enhance DD file.d. The transmitter shall provide for the addition of one of the following outputs:

Modbus® digital communication protocol via a pluggable terminal block on theModbus® interface circuit board. The Modbus® RTU protocol shall useASCII/Hex protocols for communication.

FoundationTM Fieldbus communication protocol via a pluggable terminal blockon the FoundationTM Fieldbus interface circuit board.

Three Form “C” Alarm and Fault relays.


o Relays shall be single-pole, double-throw rated at 5 amps at 240VAC.o Transmitter shall provide a remote reset for alarm silencingo The relays shall be capable of configuration for:

Latching / Non-Latching Energized / De-Energized Normally Open / Normally Closed Alarms rising / Alarms falling

e. The transmitter shall be capable of interchangeable communication outputs. Thismust include Relays, Modbus® RTU or FoundationTM Fieldbus.

Post-installation upgrades shall be completed without the requirement to:

o Upgrade firmwareo Disconnect the electrical connections to the enclosure.

7. Approvals:

a. The transmitter shall have the following hazardous area approvals:

UL Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C, and D; Class 1, Zone 1 (-40C to 65C) CSA Class 1, Div 1, Groups B, C and D; T5 Tamb (-40C to 65C) ATEX – EX II 2 (1) G Ex D[ia IIC] IIB + H2 T4 (Tamb -40C to 65C) IECEx - EX [ia] IIC Ga] + H2 T4 Gb IP66 Tamb (-40C to 65C)

b. The transmitter shall have the following performance approvals:

CSA 22.2 No. 152 FM 6310, 6320 ANSI/ ISA 92.0.01 IEC/EN 60079-29-1, EN 61779-4:2000 Toxic and Oxygen

c. The transmitter shall be “certified for use in a SIL 2 system” with approval to EN61508 Part 1, 2, and 3 component certification.

d. Manufacturer Capability Requirements - As a minimum, the Gas MonitoringEquipment manufacturer must meet the following requirements.

e. Manufacturer shall be capable of supplying all equipment necessary to check orcalibrate the sensor/transmitter.

f. The manufacturer must be capable of providing on-site service with factory trainedpersonnel.

8. The transmitter shall be a Honeywell Analytics XNX Universal Transmitter or equivalent.

C. Sensing technology:

1. The transmitter shall utilize a common local user interface for electrochemical (toxic andoxygen), catalytic bead (combustible) and point and open path (combustible) infraredsensing technology.

2. Electrochemical (Toxic and Oxygen) sensors:


a. Sensors shall be contained in sensor modules mounted external to the mainenclosure. All sensor modules shall have the capability of replacement while the unitis under power (hazardous areas) without the need for tools.

b. Sensor modules shall contain all relevant sensor information within the module. Thisinformation shall include sensor manufacturer date, gas type, gas range, calibrationdata, and default relay parameters.

c. Sensor module shall store all calibration data so that the module may be calibratedoff site and installed in the field without re-calibration. The sensor module shall notrequire a battery or power source to store this data.

d. The transmitter shall employ cell fault diagnosis routine to check for cell presence,cell dry out and cell open or short circuit. In the event of a cell failing this test, asensor fault is displayed. This fault diagnosis will be automatically initiated by thetransmitter at 8-hour intervals. It must also be initiated on power up, sensorexchange or sensor cell exchange.

e. Sensors shall employ a dual-reservoir design to increase performance in extremeenvironments. The sensor design must allow for electrolyte expansion in highhumidity environments to prevent cells from bursting.

3. Infrared point combustible sensors:

a. The sensor shall utilize a dual compensating optics to detect hydrocarbon gasses invarious concentration ranges through the means of an infrared absorption principle.

b. The optics shall contain a means of preventing the build-up of condensation on thewindows.

c. The detector shall operate in the presence of catalytic poisons without impact to theoperation of the sensor.

d. The detector shall be designed for use in potentially hazardous environments.e. The detector shall not require the presence of oxygen.f. The detector shall operate from a range of 0 – 100% LEL Methane as standard with

the capability of calibration to other hydrocarbon gasses.g. The certified accuracy shall be < +/- 1% LEL.h. The certified repeatability shall be < +/- 2% LEL.i. Response time:

The response time with the weather protection fitted shall be: T50 < 4.5 seconds;T90 < 6.5 seconds.

The response time of the device without any accessories shall be: T50 < 3seconds; T90 < 5 seconds.

j. The detector shall be Searchpoint Optima Plus or equivalent.

2.04 (A12) ORTHO PHOSPHATE ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER

A. Manufacturers:

1. ASA Analytics (Waukesha, WI.) Chem-Scan mini-oP2. Xylem-YSI3. No Substitutes Allowed.

B. Application - An automatic analyzer for rapid batch analysis of ortho-Phosphorous in water.

C. Range: (as oPO4-P) 0.03 – 3.0 mg/L (lo), 0.1 – 6.0 mg/L (hi)

D. Accuracy: 2% of range or 2x detection limit (whichever greater)

E. Cycle Time: 5 minutes to 9999 minutes (field programmable)


F. The analyzer shall automatically detect ortho-Phosphorous through a detection cell inpotable water or wastewater samples that contain less than 150 ppm of suspended solids,and less than 60 NTU turbidity. Sample flow shall be from a sample line able to deliver aminimum of one liter per minute sample flow to the analyzer at 3 to 10 psi pressureTheanalyzer shall also provide for automatic zeroing using analysis of a sample blank on everyanalysis cycle and shall provide for automatic cleaning of the flow cell using a cleaningsolution recommended by the manufacturer. The analyzer shall contain an internal pump forthe introduction of cleaning solutions and a manifold to interrupt sample flow and replace itwith a flow of cleaning solution, based on self-test results. Pump heads shall be easilyreplaceable and shall not require replacement at an interval more often than twice each yearunder normal operation. The internal pump shall not require replacement more often thanonce each year. Gravity feed of reagents or maintenance fluids and/or manual introductionof cleaning solutions and/or the use of external pumps for cleaning are not acceptable.

G. Internal sample flow shall not be restricted by capillary tubes, needle valves or other deviceswith small orifice size. No orifice in the sample flow path into or within the analyzer shall beless than 0.172 inches (4.36 mm).

H. The flow cell chamber shall be easily removed for cleaning without disconnection of power,sample lines, light source or detection optics. The flow cell windows shall be thermallyinsulated to protect from condensation. The flow cell body shall be constructed from CPVCand the cell windows shall be quartz. Light source output intensity shall be continuouslymonitored prior to light transmittance through the cell to eliminate measurement variations.Maximum drift during an 8 hour period under standard conditions shall not exceed 0.1% ofrange.

I. The analyzer shall provide an operator interface including a back lit LCD display. Theanalyzer shall have a multiple range capability, with the ranges selectable by the operator asa menu choice. Standard ranges shall be 0.03 to 3.00 mg/l as P and 0.10 to 6.00 mg/l as P.The analyzer shall not require the use calibration standards in normal operation. Analysis ofa sample blank shall be performed by the analyzer prior to every analysis. The analyzer shallallow the operator to select the desired interval between each analysis cycle, from aminimum of 5 minutes to a maximum of 99 hours, 99 minutes.

J. The analyzer shall not require change or replenishment of reagents more often than onceeach calendar quarter, if operated at 5 minute analysis cycles for low range analysis or ifoperated at 10 minute analysis cycles for high range analysis. Reagents and analysis ofsamples shall use a method based on the Vanadomolybdophosphoric Acid ColorimetricMethod found in “Standard Methods of Analysis” (4500-P, method C).

K. The analyzer shall provide a continuous, isolated 4-20mA analog output, RS-232 serial andMODBUS RTU output. The analyzer shall provide 6000 value internal memory log, drycontact alarms with a set point configurable for a high or low value on the analyzer menu.The analyzer shall have the capability to force 4-20 mA analog data outputs to set values foroutput calibration purposes. The analyzer shall have internal maintenance event logs, easilydownloadable to a laptop computer using MS Hyper Terminal software. The analyzer shallbe supplied in a NEMA-4X fiberglass enclosure. Power for the analyzer shall be 100 wattsmaximum at 100 to 240Vac, 50/60 Hz, 120Vac through a ½” conduit size hole for a field-wired option.

L. The analyzer shall be furnished with an Operation and Maintenance manual containinginstallation instructions, instructions for startup, instructions for adjustment during operation,plus instructions for periodic and routine maintenance. A startup kit consisting of 10 litercleaning solution container assembly, sample inlet assembly, drain tube assembly, injectorpriming tool and one year supply of reagents for low concentration analysis shall be


furnished. Reagents shall have a minimum 1 year shelf life under normal storage conditions.The analyzer shall carry a minimum warranty of one year from initial operation, not toexceed 18 months from the date of shipment, covering workmanship, materials andcomponents. Maintenance kit consisting of replacement pump, replacement pump head andone year supply of reagents shall be available from the analyzer manufacturer.

M. The analyzer shall carry a CSA-US or other approved NRTL and shall be designed tooperate in an ambient environment of 5-50°C.

2.05 (A21) DISSOLVED OXYGEN ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER, SUBMERSION TYPE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Xylem-YSI with FDO 700 IQ sensor.2. Endress+Hauser with Memosens technology.3. No Substitutes Allowed.

B. Probe-cable-converter device to indicate/transmit percent of DO in aqueous solution.

C. Mounting:

1. Probe: Submersible.2. Converter: Wall or handrail mount, NEMA 4X (See Section 13481 – Field

Instrumentation for transmitter cabinet specifications).

D. Range: as specified in Section 13481 – Field Instrumentation.

E. Output: 4-20 mAdc (isolated) into 600 ohms.

F. Probe:

1. Optical sensor.2. Photo diode sensor pickup incorporating time correlation technology.3. Housing: 316 Stainless Steel.

G. Cable: Multi-conductor.


H. Accuracy: +0.5% of full scale.

I. Power: 120Vac, +10%, 60 Hz.

J. Provide NEMA 4X overall enclosure for converter with viewing window and thermostaticallycontrolled heater to allow outdoor use in temperatures down to –25 degrees Fahrenheit.

K. See special requirements in paragraph 3.01 for Aeration Basin application.

2.06 (A28) AMMONIUM ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Xylem-YSI analyzer with AmmoLyt IQ sensor.2. Endress+Hauser with Memosens technology.3. No Substitutes Allowed.


B. Application – Sensor and analyzer for monitoring of Ammonium in aqueous solution.

C. Includes:

1. Reference electrode2. Measuring electrode3. Compensation electrode4. CH Cleaning head5. Housing: 316 Stainless Steel.

D. Mounting:

1. Probe: Submersible.2. Converter: Wall or handrail mount, coordinate with sensing probe mounting, NEMA 4X.

E. Range:

1. NH4+: 1-1290 mg/l with 1mg/l resolution, 0.1-129.0 mg/l with 0.1mg/l resolution2. K: 1-1000 mg/l with 1mg/l resolution

F. Output: 4-20 mAdc (isolated) into 600 ohms.

G. Cable: Multi-conductor.


H. Accuracy: +0.5% of full scale.

I. Power: 120vac, +10%, 60 Hz.

J. Accessories:

1. Sun shield2. O&M Manual

K. Provide NEMA 4X overall enclosure for converter with viewing window and thermostaticallycontrolled heater to allow outdoor use in temperatures down to -25°F.

L. See special requirements in paragraph 3.01 for Aeration Basin application.

2.07 (A29) SLUDGE BLANKET DETECTOR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Xylem-YSI2. Entech Design Inc.3. No Substitutes Allowed.

B. Controller – Graphical User Interface

1. Graphical backlit LCD.2. Soft keys and Navigation keys.3. 100-240Vac, 50/60 Hz – 1.5A4. Supply cable: 10-18 AWG, -40 to +140 F5. 65 W (fused) 1.25A 250V 5x20mm T-lag UL approved fuse6. 4-20 mA Current Loop: 9 – 15 VDC


7. Including Power Supply Unit

C. Installation of Sensor

1. The sensor must be fully submerged in the supernatant process liquid during operation.2. Mount the sensor using a rigid pipe or conduit to minimize excessive side-to-side sway

or other avoidable movement. If a surface skimmer is present, install using a sensormounting fixture that rotates the sensor out of the path of the skimmer.

3. Orient the sensor such that the trajectory of the transmit pulse is at 90° with respect tothe surface of the sludge blanket or other material that is to be measured.

2.08 SIGNAGE

A. Label (Sign) each Gas Detector Alarm Lamp with “GAS MONITOR ALARM”.

B. Sign shall be affixed to wall using wall anchors and bolts and reside beneath alarm lamp.

C. “GAS MONITOR ALARM” shall be printed on polyester film that is bonded to 0.110” thickfiberglass backing and over-laminated to protect the graphics.

D. Sign shall have rounded corners with 7/32” mounting holes.

E. Sign shall be of a color contrast and letter size such that it is readable from 50 feet.

2.09 TAGGING

A. Provide Type 316 stainless steel tag permanently affixed to each unit (where sensor andtransmitter separately mounted).

B. Engrave with process application as listed in Specifications.

C. Include Engineer tag number as listed in Specifications and on Drawings.


3.01 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR AERATION BASIN ANALYTICS

A. ORP, pH, DO and NH4 sensors for Aeration Basin shall be of one manufacturer.

B. Additional open port or module for connection of pH sensor (alternate location) located to thenorth - adjacent to the DO sensors.

C. Dedicated compressed air system and associated hardware for cleaning of Ammoniumsensor. Coordinate hardware location with Engineer and Owner.

D. Provided additional transmitter or docking station located in the Dosing Building atopAeration Basin to be used for sensor calibration in a controlled environment.

E. If networked, Train 1 and Train 2 of the Aeration Basin shall be separate networks withseparate power supplies for each network for redundancy.

F. If networked, all sensors on network must have individual surge protection.

3.02 INSTALLATION


A. Install and wire in accordance with System Integrator and/or Equipment manufacturer’swritten instructions and approved submittals, applicable requirements of the NEC, NECA“Standard of Installation”, and recognized industry practices.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. FLOW INSTRUMENTATIONProject No. 12026 13424-1

SECTION 13424FLOW INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section includes field mounted flow elements, sensors, transmitters and other devices forProcess Instrumentation and Control.

C. Ranges and performance parameters are listed in Section 13481 – Field Instrumentation.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 (F4) FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, MAGNETIC

A. Design is based on startup average velocity of 3 ft/sec through meter. Meters requiringgreater velocities to meet specified accuracy and proper performance are not acceptable.

B. Flowmeter system accuracy shall be ±0.50% of flow rate over 10:1 turndown minimum.Repeatability shall be ±0.1% and response time programmable from 1 sec to 100 sec.

C. Meters shall be furnished with NIST certification of calibration.

D. Manufacturers:

1. Endress+Hauser Proline Promag2. Krohne Optiflux3. Rosemount4. No Substitutes Allowed.

E. Flow Element:

1. Low frequency, electromagnetic induction type and shall produce dc pulse signal directlyproportional and linear to liquid flow rate.

2. Splashproof and weather-resistant NEMA 4 design housing with accidental submergencerating, 30 ft water for 48 hrs. Watertight external and internal electrical conduitconnections.

3. Provide power from signal converter.4. Flow meter liner, electrode materials, and electrode type shall comply with materials

listed in Section 13481.5. Use grounding rings or gaskets on each end of magnetic flow meter to provide ground

path and prevent interference with flow signal. Probes are not acceptable.6. Sensing head interchangeable with meter body of same manufacturer without

performing flow recalibration.7. High impedance device of not less than 1012 ohms to minimize span shift due to

electrode coating.8. Explosionproof sensor certified by Factory Mutual Research for Class I, Division I,

Groups C and D when sensor is located in hazardous area.9. Laying length of meters shall be minimum of 1-1/2 times nominal meter size.

FLOW INSTRUMENTATION Donohue & Associates, Inc.13424-2 Project No. 12026

F. Transmitter:

1. Remote or integrally mounted according to Drawings and Plans, microprocessorcontrolled.

2. Operate on 120 vac, 60 Hz power.3. Provide pulsed dc voltage to magnet coils of magnetic flow meter to establish magnetic

field.4. Convert flow signal from magnetic flow meter to analog and digital output signals, for

bidirectional flow.5. Span to be continuously adjustable between 2 and 31 ft/sec. Adjustment shall be by

keypad.6. Display shall have 2 rows of 16 alpha numeric characters minimum. Top row shall

indicate instantaneous flow rate in direct engineering units, field selectable.7. Converter interchangeable with magnetic flow meter of same manufacturer and requires

no additional flow calibration adjustment.8. 4-20 mAdc analog current output into 0 to 900 ohm load and 24 Vdc scaled, pulse output

software adjustable.9. Locate flow rate indicator within each converter. Indicator shall display flow rate in

engineering units as listed in Section 13481.10. House in cast aluminum enclosure to meet NEMA 4X requirements.11. Noise reduction feature to minimize effects of noise generating processes.12. Automatic empty pipe detection.13. Suitable for -5°F to +140°F ambient temperature (-40°F to +140°F for outdoor

applications).14. Provide thermostatically controlled condensate heater to allow use in condensate

environments.

G. Cable:

1. Provide sufficient length of signal cable as standard with manufacturer to connect meterand converter without splice.

2. Use single conduit run between converter and meter.

2.02 (F12) FLOW SWITCH, PADDLE

A. Manufacturer:

1. Flotect V6 series2. McDonnell and Miller3. Or Equal.

B. General:

1. Function: Sense fluid flow in the pipeline and switch a set of contacts when the flow ispositive.

2. Type: Paddle flow sensor with magnetically coupled switch.3. Parts: Unitized assembly of paddle type flow sensor and switch.

C. Performance:

1. Range (Maximum Trip Setting): As noted in specification 13481 – Field Instrumentation.2. Maximum Temperature, Operating: 300°F.3. Maximum Pressure, Operating: 160 psi.


D. Process Connections:

1. As noted in specification 13481 – Field Instrumentation.

E. Signal Interface:

1. Output: Single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) switch.2. Contact: 120V ac, 5 amps resistive, continuous.

F. Enclosure:

1. Type: Standard, NEMA 4X, unless rating is otherwise noted on Drawings.2. Mounting: Integral with switch assembly.

G. Element:

1. Paddle Size: Convertible paddle, trimmed to required length in field.2. Wetted Parts: Stainless steel, unless otherwise noted.

2.03 (F20) FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, ULTRASONIC, SURFACE LEVEL

A. Manufacturers:

1. Magnetrol

B. Sensor:

1. Design transducer to emit ultrasonic signal with time lapse between transmitted andreceived signal converted into usable voltage capable of driving totalizer, sample ratecounter, and flow rate meter or liquid level indicator. DC voltage produced shall beproportional to distance from detector to material being measured.

2. Operating temperatures: -20°F to +150°F.3. Impervious to damage from submersion in wastewater or concentrated ferric chloride or

alum, and have high resistance to corrosive and gaseous industrial atmosphere.4. Mounting shall be as shown on Drawings. Other methods of mounting will be considered

if recommended by detector manufacturer.5. Non-contact design detector with no moving parts or mechanical linkages.6. Explosion-proof certified by Factory Mutual Research (FM) for Class I, Division I,

Groups C and D when sensor is located in hazardous area.7. 3/4” NPT mounting8. 50kHz9. 12° cone angle10. Operating temperature: -40°F to 200°F11. FM Approved Class 1, Div. 1, Group D.12. Model 385

C. Transmitter:

1. Provide 16 character alphanumeric LCD with 16 button remote indicator/transmitter formonitoring unit.

2. Linear, isolated 4-20 mAdc, signal for remote indication from each monitoring unit.3. RS-232 Serial Communication port.

FLOW INSTRUMENTATION Donohue & Associates, Inc.13424-4 Project No. 12026

4. Enclosure: NEMA 12 for interior applications, NEMA 4X for exterior application or wetlocations wall mounted.

5. Temperature: -4°F to 160°F for indoor application, -40°F to 160°F for outdoorapplication.

6. Power: 120Vac, 60 Hz. (12 watts)7. Model 345

D. Mounting:

1. Provide sufficient length of cable as standard with manufacturer to connect level sensorto monitoring unit without splice.

2. Include wall mounting bracket for 3/4” NPT process connection.

E. Design Requirements:

1. Accuracy of system: +1% of full scale at any point in calibrated range.

2.04 (F23) FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, THERMAL DISPERSION

A. Manufacturers:

1. Fluid Components, Inc.2. KURZ3. Fox Thermal Instruments4. Endress Hauser t mass.5. No Substitutes Allowed.

B. General

1. System shall measure, indicate, and transmit flow conditions as specified in 13481 –Field Instrumentation.

2. System shall consist of integrated flow element and flow transmitter. See details onDrawings for mounting requirements.

C. Flow Conditioner (required if installation up/down pipe diameters do not exceedmanufacturer’s written specifications without using digital compensation technology).

1. Low head-loss insert between flanges to homogenize flow profile. Tube type flowconditioner with flanged ends are also acceptable.

2. Headloss through flow conditioner shall be less than 0.125-in W.C. at 12,000scfh.3. Provide process connection to match sensor if manufacturer elects to insert sensor into

tube type flow conditioner.4. Materials of Construction: Type 316 stainless steel.5. Provide one unit per transmitter.

D. Sensor:

1. Suitable for indoor and outdoor application, ambient temperature variation of -20°F to+120°F, and saturated digester gas.

2. Thermal Dispersion type using dual RTD’s.3. 316 stainless steel welded4. RTD’s housed in 316 stainless steel sheath. Thin wire type sensors not acceptable.5. Process connection ¾ inch male NPT adjustable compression fitting with Teflon ferrule.6. Suitable for operating pressure 0-150 psig.7. Provide with mounting hardware.


8. Mounting shall be as shown on Drawings. Other methods of mounting will be consideredif recommended by manufacturer.

9. Non-contact design detector with no moving parts or mechanical linkages.10. Explosion-proof certified by Factory Mutual Research (FM) for Class I, Division I,

Groups C and D Hazardous (when located in classified area).11. Sensor Body shall be provided with components necessary to enable installation and

removal from process line while in operation.12. Mounting configuration shall be in the 5 or 7 o’clock positions in the horizontal for

moisture runoff.

E. Transmitter:

1. 120 VAC, 60 Hz power supply.2. Provide with display in engineering units of flow rate, temperature and total flow.3. NEMA 4X or NEMA 7 enclosure (when located in classified area).4. Operating temperature 0°F to 140°F.5. Linear, isolated 4-20 mAdc, to 600 ohms minimum.6. Accuracy +/- 1% reading with minimum +/-0.5% on instrument full scale.7. Repeatability +/-0.5% of reading8. Non-volatile memory to store application data during power loss.9. Microprocessor-based signal linearization.

2.05 TAGGING



C. Include Engineer’s tag number as listed in Specifications and on Drawings.


3.01 INSTALLATION


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. LEVEL INSTRUMENTATIONProject No. 12026 13425-1

SECTION 13425LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section includes field mounted level transmitters, sensors and devices for ProcessInstrumentation and Control.

C. Ranges and performance parameters as listed in Section 13481 – Field Instrumentation.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 (L1) LEVEL SWITCH, RF ADMITTANCE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Drexelbrook - Point Line

B. RF Admittance technology

C. High and low level operationD. Repeatability: 2 mm (0.08 inch) conductive liquids.E. Response Time: Less than one second.F. Ambient Electronic Temperature: -40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F) FM, CSAG. Storage Temperature: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F).H. Indicators: LEDs: Green Power, Red Relay 1.I. Time Delay: 0-60 seconds, forward or reverse-acting.J. Supply Voltage: 19-250 VACK. Power Consumption: 4 watts maximum.L. Relay Contacts: DPDT dry contacts at 5A, 120Vac.M. Maximum Contact Load: 5A/30 VDC, 5A/250 VACN. Maximum Switching Capacity: 2000 VA/150 Watt.O. Minimum Contact Load (DC): 100 mA/12 VDCP. Housing: Powder-Coated aluminum.

1. Nema 4X (integral housing) when located in unclassified area.2. Nema 7 FM approved (remote housing) when located in classified area.

Q. Cable Entry: 3 4-inch NPTR. Application: corrosive liquids.S. Wetted parts: PFA

2.02 (L3) LEVEL SWITCH, FREQUENCY SHIFT TUNING FORK

A. Manufacturers:

3. Endress+Hauser Liquiphant M FTL 514. Or Approved Equal.

LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION Donohue & Associates, Inc.13425-2 Project No. 12026

B. Frequency shift tuning fork-type level switch using two-tine fork assembly and piezoelectricdetection system.

C. Switch shall introduce no electrical energy into the process being measured.

D. The fork assembly shall be approximately 1.5 inches in length with mounting extension tubeas specified.

E. Integral, field mountable, self-contained unit.

F. No calibration required.

G. Switch point accuracy shall be within ± .004”.

H. The switch shall reliably indicate liquid and slurry levels with viscosity's ranging from 0 to10000cP and density variations from 0.5 to 1.7 SGU. The switch shall reliably operate withhard build-up equivalent to 0.15 inches of Calcium Carbonate.

I. Fork assembly and extension tube shall be 316LSS with three-quarter inch NPT threadedboss process connection, or flange connection based on application.

J. The switch shall provide continuous self-monitoring of its sensing components and indicatewhen a failure or fork corrosion has been detected.

K. Operate with process temperatures ranging from -40 to 300°F and pressures ranging fromvacuum to 870 psi.

L. The switch shall have a single compartment housing and rated for the environment in whichit is mounted (Nema 4X or 7).

M. Cable entries will be through NPT conduit fittings.

N. Electronics shall be in the form of module inserts that can be field installed or interchangedwithout affect on switch performance and without removing the sensor from the process.

O. Electronics module shall be FEL54 19-250VAC/19-55 VDC universal power source with250V, 6 amp hermetically sealed DPDT relay.

P. Electronics shall have LEDs indicating switch state and power. Onboard toggle switch shallallow field selection of max or min detection.

Q. Shall be Factory Mutual approved when located in classified environment.

2.03 (L5) LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, ULTRASONIC

A. Manufacturers:

1. Magnetrol2. No Substitutes Allowed.

B. Sensor:

1. Design transducer to emit ultrasonic signal with time lapse between transmitted andreceived signal converted into usable voltage capable of driving totalizer, sample ratecounter, and flow rate meter or liquid level indicator. DC voltage produced shall beproportional to distance from detector to material being measured.


2. Operating temperatures: -20°F to +150°F.3. Impervious to damage from submersion in wastewater or concentrated ferric chloride or

alum, and have high resistance to corrosive and gaseous industrial atmosphere. Provideand install submersion cone.

4. Mounting shall be as shown on Drawings. Other methods of mounting will be consideredif recommended by detector manufacturer.


Groups C and D when sensor is located in hazardous area.7. Coordinate process connection with equipment manufacturers.8. 50kHz9. 12° cone angle10. Operating temperature: -40°F to 200°F11. Model 385

C. Transmitter:

1. Provide 16 character alphanumeric LCD with 16 button remote indicator/transmitter formonitoring unit.

2. Provide transmitter cabinet as described in Section 13431 for outdoor applications.3. Linear, isolated 4-20 mAdc, signal for remote indication from each monitoring unit.4. RS-232 Serial Communication port.5. Enclosure: NEMA 12 for interior applications, NEMA 4X for exterior application or wet

locations wall mounted.6. Temperature: -4°F to 160°F for indoor application, -40°F to 160°F for outdoor

application.7. Power: 120Vac, 60 Hz. (12 watts)8. Model 345

D. Mounting:

1. Provide sufficient length of cable as standard with manufacturer to connect level sensorto monitoring unit without splice.

2. Include bracket and/or flange mounting kit based on application.


1. Accuracy of system: +1% of full scale at any point in calibrated range.

2. Explosion-proof certified by Factory Mutual Research (FM) for Class I, Division I,Groups C and D when sensor is located in hazardous area.

F. Measurement Requirements:

1. Range of measurement as described in Section 13481 – Field Instrumentation.

2.04 (L8) LEVEL SWITCH, BALL FLOAT

A. Manufacturers:

1. Contegra FS 90.2. Or Equal.

B. Float: 316 Stainless Steel.

C. Provide sufficient length of PVC jacketed cable.


D. For Class 1, Divisions 1 or 2 hazardous (classified) locations, provide intrinsically safe relaysin corresponding control panel.

E. Mounting Hardware: 316 Stainless Steel on vertical mounting pipe or Stainless Steel cablewith anchor weight.

F. Switch: Non-Mercury tilt type 1A@150Vac/Vdc non-inductive.

2.05 (L10) ELECTRONIC FLANGE MOUNTED LEVEL TRANSMITTER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Rosemount Alphaline Series 3051LT.2. ABB/Fischer and Porter.3. No Substitutes Allowed.

B. Differential capacitance open loop principle device to produce analog current signal asfunction of liquid level input to it.

C. Mounting: 3”, 150-lb flange mount.

D. Housing: Threaded cover, NEMA 4.

E. Wetted Parts (Process Side): Flush mount, Type 316 stainless steel diaphragm.

F. Water Span Adjustment: 20 to 200 in., 160 to 785 in. water.

G. Provide elevation/suppression kit.

H. Output: 4-20 mAdc into 400 ohms (24 vdc power) or 1,000 ohms (45 vdc power).

I. Adjustments: Zero, span, and dampening.

J. Accuracy: ±0.25% of span.

K. Construction: NEMA 7 explosion proof, FM approved for Class I, Division 1 service whenlocated in classified area.

L. Accessories:

1. Weatherproof integral output indicator scaled 0% to 100% linear, with input. 316stainless steel flushing ring with two 1/2” NPT ports.

2. Provide 3 inch, 316 stainless steel transmitter isolation valve drilled and tapped with two1/4” NPT flushing ports. Valve shall be Wey Valve Incorporated Model TI3(TI3/316/316/S2/P2/UC/PPD2).

2.06 (L12) LEVEL ELEMENT/TRANSMITTER, SUBMERSIBLE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Endress+Hauser Waterpilot FMX.2. Contegra SLX.3. Approved Equal.


B. Level transmitter consisting of variable capacitance, hydrostatic head-pressure sensingassembly enclosed in submersible Type 316 stainless steel housing with Teflon pressuresensing diaphragm, special cable containing 1/8 in. breather tube and signal wiring, andsealed breather bag and transmitter assembly.

C. Provide intrinsically safe barriers when used in hazardous areas.

D. Transducer:

1. Designed for continuous submergence.2. Low movement Teflon-faced diaphragm, sized 3 in. dia. maximum.3. Protective, weighted, plate kit for diaphragm.4. Oil-filled.5. Barometrically compensated6. Temperature compensated.7. Variable capacitance type internal sensing element.

E. Cable Assembly:

1. 1/2 in. outside dia.2. Positive seal where entering transducer housing.3. Contains 1/8 in. breather tube.4. Length: Approximately 50 ft.

F. Breather and Transmitter Assembly:

1. Solid state electronics.2. Desiccant systems not allowed.3. 4-wire, 4-20 mAdc.4. Fused.5. Output loop resistance 0-1000 ohms.6. Span and off-set adjustable.7. Integral digital indicator, 3 ½ digit.8. Active transient protection.9. Repeatability: ± 0.25%.10. Accuracy: ± 0.50% of span.11. Power: 110 vac.

G. Outdoor applications: provide NEMA 4X overall enclosure with thermostatically controlledheater to allow use in temperatures down to -25° F.

2.07 (L19) LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, MICROWAVE RADAR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Siemens

B. Antenna:

1. Design transducer to emit radar signal with time lapse between transmitted and receivedsignal converted into usable voltage capable of driving totalizer, sample rate counter,and flow rate meter or liquid level indicator. DC voltage produced shall be proportionalto distance from detector to material being measured.

2. Operating temperatures: -40 degrees F to +392 degrees F.3. Impervious to damage from submersion in wastewater or concentrated ferric chloride or

alum, and have high resistance to corrosive and gaseous industrial atmosphere.


4. Mounting shall be as shown on Drawings. Other methods of mounting will be consideredif recommended by detector manufacturer.


Groups C and D when sensor is located in hazardous area.

C. Transmitter:

1. Provide remote indicator for monitoring unit.2. Linear, isolated 4-20 mAdc HART, signal for remote indication from each monitoring

unit.3. EIA RS-232C Serial Communication port.4. Enclosure: NEMA 12 for interior applications, NEMA 4X for exterior application or wet

locations. Wall mounted where noted, otherwise integral with sensor.5. Explosion-proof certified by Factory Mutual Research (FM) for Class I, Division I,

Groups C and D when transmitter is located in hazardous area.6. Temperature:

a. Ambient: -40°F to 176°F.b. Process: -40°F to 266°F.

6. Loop Power: 24VDC7. Provide two infrared intrinsically safe handheld programmers.

D. Cable:

1. Provide sufficient length of cable as standard with manufacturer to connect level sensorto monitoring unit without splicing.


1. Accuracy of system: +1% of full scale at any point in calibrated range.2. Based on Drawings, installation details, and Section 13481 radar manufacturer shall

select radar equipment; type of antenna, horn diameter and coordinate antenna length,or extensions required, with Contractor for each monitoring location.

3. Radar shall be configured and programmed by manufacturer’s representative on-site.4. Radar manufacturer shall determine and coordinate flanged pipe sizes required at each

location.5. For 701-LE/LIT-0711, provide PVDF or other antenna/horn material suitable for

installation in Biofilter Recirculation Pump sump which may contain sulfuric acidconcentrations up to 70%, and interior temperatures up to 110deg F.

6. For 523-LE/LIT-3303L, provide radio frequency network system built around a receiver(523-XX-3303R) and one intrinsically safe node (523-XX-3303T)assembly to transmit 4-20mA signal from top of floating digester cover to top of adjacent building roof:

a. Wireless industrial I/O devise with minimum one analog input.b. Suitable for use in Class I, Division 1 Group C hazardous location.c. Integrated lithium battery for up to five years of service.d. Battery shall be removable from access through threaded cover.e. Use Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum technology and Time Division Multiple

Access control architecture to ensure reliable data delivery within unlicensedIndustrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) bands.

f. Transceiver shall provide two-way communication between radio and receiverincluding full acknowledged data transmission.

g. Lost RF links shall be detectable.


h. Provide internal antenna on (523-XX-3303T and external antenna on (523-XX-3303R).

i. Receiver shall be Loop Powered.j. Receiver and components shall be assembled in NEMA 4X stainless steel cabinet.k. Mount antenna at height to see radio when Digester cover is seated on corbels.l. Mount radio to radar transmitter using Type 316 stainless steel close nipple.

2.08 TAGGING



C. Include Engineer’s tag number as listed in Specifications and on Drawings.


3.01 INSTALLATION


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATIONProject No. 12026 13426-1

SECTION 13426PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section includes field mounted pressure sensors for Process Instrumentation and Control.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 (P3) PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL TRANSMITTER, ELECTRONIC

A. Manufacturers:

1. Rosemount.

B. General:

1. Function: Measure differential pressure and transmit signal proportional to differentialpressure, flow, or level.

2. Type: Electronic Coplanar design, two-wire transmitter.3. Parts: Transmitter and three-valve manifold.

C. Performance:

1. Range: As noted.2. Maximum Adjustable Range: Such that the noted range shall be between 40 percent and

80 percent of the maximum adjustable range.3. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.075 percent of span between 10 and 100 percent of input

differential pressure.4. Temperature: Operating range -40° F to +185°F, minimum.

D. Features:

1. Square Root Extraction: Unless otherwise noted.2. Damping: Fluid or electronic type with adjustment.3. Indicator: When scale range is noted.4. Suppressed or Elevated Zero: When noted.5. Materials: Wetted parts including process flanges and drain/vent valves, 316 stainless steel,

unless otherwise noted.6. Wetted O-Rings: Glass-filled TFE, unless otherwise noted.7. Housing: Modular with separate compartments for electronics and field connections.8. Fill Fluid: Silicone, unless otherwise noted.

PRESSURE INSTRUMENTATION Donohue & Associates, Inc.13426-2 Project No. 12026

E. Signal Interface:

1. 4-20 mA dc output for load impedance of 0 to 500 ohms minimum without load adjustmentwith 24V dc supply.

F. Enclosure:

1. Type: NEMA 4X, unless otherwise noted.2. Mounting: Pipe or wall as noted. Provide brackets with Series 300 stainless steel bolts.

G. Three-Valve Manifold:

1. Provide unless otherwise noted.2. Materials: 316 stainless steel.

H. Mounting/Application considerations:

1. When sensing media is outdoors, heat trace sensor and capillaries that are exposed toambient temperatures below 40°F.

2.02 (P4) PRESSURE GAUGE/ INDICATOR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ashcroft.2. U.S. Gauge, Division of Ametek, Inc.

B. Gauge Housing Material: 316 Stainless Steel

C. Mounting: Stem

D. Dial Size: 3 1/2 inch

E. Units shall be bellows or Bourdon tube actuated pressure gauges. Gauges shall be stemmounting with 3-1/2-inch dial size, unless otherwise noted. Scale range shall be as notedand accuracy shall be plus or minus 1/2 percent of span.

F. The sensing element material shall be phosphor-bronze if coupled with diaphragm seal,otherwise provide stainless steel.

G. Element shall sense pressure or vacuum as specified in Section 13481 – FieldInstrumentation.

H. Element shall be suitable for temperatures of media monitored, and filled for alleviation ofvibration.

I. For pressure applications less than 15psi:

1. Provide bellows type gauge.2. Suitable for vacuum and pressure.3. Case Material: Phenolic.4. Dial Size: no greater than 4-1/2-in.5. Tube and Socket material: Type 316 stainless steel.6. Window: shatter proof glass.


2.03 (P5) PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Red Valves Series 40.2. RKL.

B. End Connections: 150 pound Flanged

C. Flange Construction: Carbon Steel

D. Flexible Cylinder: Buna-N

E. Filling Fluid: silicone

F. Unit shall be pressure-sensing, pipe spool type suitable for measuring dirty or corrosivefluids.

G. Unit shall consist of a carbon steel pipe spool and an elastomeric liner with a space betweenfilled with the noted fluid.

H. Unit shall be arranged and designed to directly transmit the process pressure by means ofthe fluid through an opening in the spool wall to a pressure-sensing device attached andsealed to the spool by a drilled and threaded boss.

I. Unit shall be sized as noted and have ANSI 150-pound flanges, unless otherwise noted.

J. Seal shall be suitable for fluid pressures to 200 psig and shall be furnished with a Buna-Nflexible cylinder, unless otherwise noted.

K. Unit shall have fill connections and other features required to permit refill of the seal volumeand calibration of unit in the field.

2.04 (P6) PRESSURE SEAL, DIAPHRAGM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ametek, Mansfield and Green Division, Type SG.2. Ashcroft Type 101.

B. Lower Housing Material: 316 Stainless Steel with flushing connections

C. Diaphragm Material: 316 Stainless Steel

D. Upper Housing Material: Steel with bleed screw

E. Connections: Threaded Female NPT

F. Filling Fluid: Silicone

G. Unit shall be pressure-sensing suitable for measuring dirty or corrosive fluids.

H. Unit shall be arranged and designed to directly transmit the process pressure by means ofthe fluid through an opening in the lower housing to a pressure-sensing device attached andsealed to the upper housing by a drilled and threaded boss.


I. Seal shall be suitable for fluid pressures to 200 psig.

J. Unit shall have fill connections and other features required permitting refill of the sealvolume and calibration of unit in the field.

K. Unit shall be suitable of for temperature of media monitored.

L. For pressure applications less than 15psi:

1. Diaphragm/frame size as required for specified pressures.2. Diaphragm Material: Viton or Kalrez.3. Filling Fluid: Silicone.4. Suitable for vacuum application.

M. For Biofilter differential pressure indicating transmitters (701-DPIT-0721 and -0722), providebottom housing material and diagram as suitable for sulfuric acid (0-75% concentration) withtemperatures up to 110deg F. Upper housing shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

2.05 (P7) DUAL PRESSURE SWITCH, FIXED DEAD BAND

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ashcroft2. United Electric

B. Dual adjustment pressure switches.

C. Output: SPDT snap action rated at 10 amps, 120 vac.

D. Pressure connection: ¼ in. NPT.

E. Type: Housed diaphragm type.

F. Diaphragm: Buna-N.

G. Housing: NEMA 4, stainless steel.

H. Adjustment: External tamperproof.

I. Include integral pressure gauge where specified by tag name in Section 13481 - FieldInstrumentation. Gauge shall comply with gauge this Section.

J. Include isolation valve to isolate from process when being serviced.

2.06 (P9) PRESSURE INDICATING TRANSMITTER, ELECTRONIC

A. Manufacturers:

1. Rosemount.2. Approved Equal.

B. Sense pressures as specified in 13481 – Field Instrumentation.

C. Transmitter: Electronic , two-wire, force transfer type.

D. Wetted parts: 316 stainless steel unless noted otherwise.


E. Process temperature range: -20°F to +120°F minimum.

F. Dampening: Fluid or electronically dampened with dampening adjustment.

G. Output: 4-20 mA dc signal into a load impedance of 0 to 750 ohms with 24V dc supply.

H. Range: Adjustable as noted with no suppressed or elevated zero unless noted otherwise.

I. Accuracy: +/- 0.5 percent of calibrated span.

J. Hysteresis and repeatability: 0.5 percent of calibrated span maximum.

K. Enclosure: NEMA 4X construction when located in unclassified area. NEMA 7 constructionwhen located in classified area.

L. Units shall be provided with brackets for pipe stand or wall mounting, as shown.

M. Units shall be provided with isolation valves for rigid calibration.

2.07 (P11) PRESSURE GAUGE/SWITCH, DIFFERENTIAL

A. Manufacturers:

1. Dieterich Standard, Series E.2. Ashcroft

B. Scale Range: As specified in 13481 – Field Instrumentation.

C. Pressure Differential at Maximum Scale Range: As specified in 13481 – FieldInstrumentation

D. Mounting: Pipe or Wall Mount

E. Unit shall be flow rate indicator with scale linear to flow rate over a 10:1 range.

F. Unit shall utilize a pressure differential signal that is proportional to the square of the flowrate and provide an indication that is linear with flow.

G. Unit shall contain built-in controls to adjust damping and zero, and a built-in valve toequalize the pressure.

H. Unit shall have low displacement diaphragm without fill fluid.

I. Accuracy shall be within plus or minus 1.5 percent of maximum scale range.

J. Unit shall be weatherproof and rated for static pressures to 300 psi.

K. Wetted parts shall be 316 stainless steel.

L. Where noted, unit shall have two built-in indicating set points, independently adjustable overthe full scale range. Contact outputs shall be SPDT rated for 15 amperes, continuous, at120V ac. Set points shall be repeatable to plus or minus 1.5 percent of full scale.

2.08 TAGGING






3.01 INSTALLATION


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATIONProject No. 12026 13427-1

SECTION 13427TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


B. Section includes field mounted temperature sensors, thermowells, extension fittings,connection heads and transmitters for Process Instrumentation and Control.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 (T3) TEMPERATURE ELEMENT, RTD

A. Manufacturers

1. Rosemont2. Foxboro

B. Temperature Element

1. Single-element, three-wire, RTD.2. Platinum, 100 ohm nominal resistance at 0 degrees C.3. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of reading, or, plus or minus 0.25°F,

whichever is greater. Conform to SAMA Standard RC 21-4-1966.4. Repeatability: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of span.5. Response Time: Less than 10 seconds (bare bulb test in agitated water).6. Diameter: 0.25 inch.7. Length Cut to accommodate immersion and extension lengths.8. Spring-loaded sensors when thermowells are used.9. 316 stainless steel sheath.

B. Thermowells

a. Inside Diameter: Sized to match sensor assembly for easy removal, to maximize heattransfer and to minimize vibration.

b. Materials: 316 stainless steel.c. Insertion Length: 3 inches, unless noted otherwise or as required to reach centerline

of pipe 4” or smaller.d. Extension Length: As noted.e. Process: 1 inch NPT connection, unless noted otherwise.

C. Extension Fittings and Connection Heads

1. Nipple Coupling.2. Materials: 316 stainless steel.3. Extension Length: As noted.4. Process: 1 inch NPT connection, unless noted otherwise.

TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION Donohue & Associates, Inc.13427-2 Project No. 12026

5. NEMA 4X Enclosure.6. Flat Cover type with threaded cover.7. Materials: Low-copper aluminum alloy.8. Electrical: 3/4 inch NPT connection, unless noted otherwise.

D. Transmitter

1. Transmitter Type:

a. Loop powered, 2-wire (powered by PLC Panel).

2. Enclosure:

a. Integrity: IP68b. Mounting: Wall

3. Performance:

a. Ambient Temp: -20 to +120F. Variations shall not affect accuracy by more thanplus or minus 0.25 percent of range per 50 degrees F.

2.02 (T4) TEMPERATURE ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER – RESISTANCE

A. Description: Outdoor ambient sensing application with housing for wall mount.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Endress and Hauser.2. Approved Equal.

C. Temperature Element:

1. Element Type:

a. Single-element, three-wire, RTD.b. Platinum, 100 ohm nominal resistance at 0 degrees C.

2. Performance:

a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.25 percent of reading, or, plus or minus 0.25degrees F, whichever is greater. Conform to SAMA Standard RC 21-4-1966.

b. Repeatability: Plus or minus 0.1 percent of span.c. Response Time: Less than 10 seconds (bare bulb test in agitated water).

3. Features:

a. Diameter: 8mm diameter with 20mm fins.b. Material: Anodized Aluminum

D. Transmitter

4. Transmitter Type:

b. Loop powered, 2-wire (powered by PLC Panel).

5. Enclosure:

Donohue & Associates, Inc. TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATIONProject No. 12026 13427-3

b. Integrity: IP68c. Mounting: Wall

6. Performance:

a. Ambient Temp: -30 to +120F. Variations shall not affect accuracy by more thanplus or minus 0.25 percent of range per 50 degrees F.

2.03 (T8) TEMPERATURE SWITCH W/WO. THERMOWELL

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ametek2. Honeywell3. Or Equal.


1. Unit shall be direct reading bi-metallic type snap-action switch with nominal 3-inchhousing.

2. Setpoint shall be adjustable over a range of 30 to 200 degrees F with scale range asspecified.

3. Unit shall have stem length as noted.4. Unit shall be supplied with a separable 3/4-inch NPT 316 Stainless Steel thermowell,

unless noted otherwise.5. Unit shall be provided with extension neck.

C. Thermowells

1. Features:

a. Inside Diameter: Sized to match sensor assembly for easy removal, to maximizeheat transfer and to minimize vibration.

b. Materials: 316 stainless steel.c. Insertion Length: 3 inches, unless noted otherwise.d. Extension Length: As noted.e. Process: 3/4 inch NPT connection, unless noted otherwise.

D. Extension Fittings

1. Extension Fitting Features:

a. Nipple Coupling.b. Materials: 316 stainless steel.c. Extension Length: As noted.d. Process: 1 inch NPT connection, unless noted otherwise.

2.04 (T9) THERMOMETER, ADJUSTABLE ANGLE

A. Manufacturers

1. Ametek.2. Approved Equal.


TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTATION Donohue & Associates, Inc.13427-4 Project No. 12026

1. Unit shall be direct reading bi-metallic type thermometer with nominal 3-inch housingand scale range as noted.

2. Unit shall have 2-1/2-inch stem length unless otherwise noted.3. Unit shall be supplied with a separable 3/4-inch NPT 316 Stainless Steel thermowell,

unless otherwise noted.4. Where noted, unit shall have an extension neck with length as noted.5. Case and stem angles shall be capable of being adjusted 90 degrees in either direction.

C. Thermowells

1. Features:

a. Inside Diameter: Sized to match sensor assembly for easy removal, to maximizeheat transfer and to minimize vibration.

b. Materials: 316 stainless steel.c. Insertion Length: 3 inches, unless noted otherwise.d. Extension Length: As noted.e. Process: 3/4 inch NPT connection, unless noted otherwise.

E. Extension Fittings

1. Extension Fitting Features:

a. Nipple Coupling.b. Materials: 316 stainless steel.c. Extension Length: As noted.d. Process: 1 inch NPT connection, unless noted otherwise.

2.05 TAGGING





3.01 INSTALLATION


END OF SECTION

Donohue and Associates MISCELLANEOUS FIELD DEVICESProject No. 12026 13429-1

SECTION 13429MISCELLANEOUS FIELD DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Pilot control devices for Process Instrumentation and Control Equipment.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

C. UL: Underwriters Laboratory


A. Standardization:

1. Instrumentation shall be latest and most modern design at time of bidding.2. As much as possible, instrumentation shall be products of one manufacturer to achieve

standardization for maintenance, spare parts, operation, and service.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 (M31) INTERIOR/EXTERIOR MOUNTED ALARM LIGHTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. RAB.2. Crouse Hinds.3. Appleton Electric Company.

B. 120 VAC.

C. Strobe style.

D. NEMA 4X: Suitable for use in wet locations, outdoors, corrosion resistant, gasketed, wherespecified.

E. NEMA 7: Suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group D Hazardous (Classified) Area, wherespecified.

F. Surface-mounted, provide mounting lugs. Body to include mounting lugs.

G. Ceiling mounted shall include stainless steel extension rod minimum of 6 inches.

H. Aluminum mounting hood.

I. Ruby Red glass globe with guard.

J. 3/4 in. conduit hubs.

MISCELLANEOUS FIELD DEVICES Donohue and Associates13429-2 Project No. 12026

2.02 (M33) LOSS OF MOTION SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Process Control Systems2. Electro Sensor

B. Self contained sensor and switch.

C. 5 amp relay contact outputs.

D. No mechanical connection or linkage to monitored equipment.

E. Dual adjustable setpoints.

F. Startup delay timer

G. Suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group D Hazardous Locations.

H. 120 VAC power.


3.01 INSTALLATION


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. CONTROL PANEL CONSTRUCTIONProject No. 12026 13431-1

SECTION 13431CONTROL PANEL CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Panel and enclosure requirements.

1.02 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:

1. Provide minimum of 5 or 10%, whichever greater, of each type fuse used on project.2. Provide minimum of 5 or 10%, whichever greater, of each type relay used on project.3. Provide minimum of 5 or 10%, whichever greater, of each type bulb for pilot lights used

on project.4. Provide minimum of 20% spare terminals, in addition to designated wired spares, to be

shown as such on panel drawings.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 ENCLOSURE MANUFACTURERS

A. Hoffman.B. Saginaw.C. Hammond.D. Rittal.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Panels shall be constructed using factory-fabricated enclosures.

B. Follow PLC manufacturer’s written installation requirements for layout of PLC-specificpanels.

C. Provide a minimum of 25% free back panel space for future expansion unhindered bycurrent devices, wiring, etc.

D. The panel builder shall be a current Underwriters laboratories listed UL-508A industrialcontrol panel builder and shall show its follow-up service procedure file number onsubmittals. All devices within the panel shall be UL listed and/or recognized where applicableand shall be mounted and wired in accordance with the most current edition of UL-508A andthe NEC. All conduit runs entering or leaving the pump station wet well shall have explosionproof conduit seals suitable for Class I, Division I, Group D environment. All conduits forintrinsically safe wiring shall enter the panel enclosure at the intrinsically safe section of thepanel.

E. Install instruments and devices, plumb, and wire panels at panel shop or other facility prior toshipment to job-site.

F. Standard Signal Interfaces:

1. Unless otherwise specified, discrete input and output signals shall conform to thefollowing:

CONTROL PANEL CONSTRUCTION Donohue & Associates, Inc.13431-2 Project No. 12026

a. Isolated non-powered (dry) contact closure.b. Dry contacts shall be powered from panel or device receiving signal.c. PLC based outputs shall be provided with an interposing relay when any of the

following conditions apply:

i. Potential in-rush current exceeds 75% of rated capacity of the I/O Module.ii. The current requirement of the driven device is insufficient to fully engage the

output module consistently.iii. The voltage required to drive the output is incompatible with the output module.

2. Unless otherwise specified, analog input and output signals shall conform to thefollowing:

a. 4-20 mAdc.b. For 2-wire, loop-powered transmitters, provide fused, isolated-type 24Vdc power

supply at panel for driving of devices. Size power supply for 30% spare capacity.c. Where isolation is required for interfacing with particular equipment supplied,

provide necessary I/I converters. Provide I/I converters where impedancecapabilities of new or existing signal transmitter will be exceeded by addition of PLCinput.

G. Wiring:

1. In addition to Division 16, NEC and NEMA requirements, wiring shall conform tofollowing:

a. Power: 12 AWG stranded minimum, type MTW, 600 V.b. Control: 14 AWG stranded minimum, type MTW, 300 V.c. Analog Signal: Twisted pair, 18 AWG, Beldon 8760 or equal.

2. Wire color code:

a. AC neutral conductor: White.b. AC hot conductor: Black.c. Grounding conductor: Green.d. AC control conductor, powered from within panel: Red.e. AC control conductor, powered from remote source: Yellow.f. DC (+) power conductor, discrete signal: Blue.g. DC (-) power conductor, discrete signal: Blue with white stripe.h. DC control conductor, discrete signal: Blue.i. Twisted pair cable (+) signal conductor, analog signal: White.j. Twisted pair cable (-) signal conductor, analog signal: Black.

3. Design control panels to keep 480-VAC power, 120-VAC power and discrete signals, andanalog and other low voltage signals separated.

a. Do not run 480-VAC power, 120-VAC power and discrete signals, or analog or otherlow voltage signals in the same conduit or wire-duct.

b. Where 480-VAC power, 120-VAC power and discrete signals, or analog or other lowvoltage signals must cross, they shall do so at right angles.

4. Wiring Within Wire Duct:

a. Wherever feasible plastic wire duct with cover shall be used for routing of wire withincontrol panel.


b. Size wire duct to be no more than 50% full.c. Maintain 2” clearance between wire duct and terminals.

5. Wiring outside of wire duct.

a. Wiring outside of ducts shall be restrained by use of plastic wire-ties.b. Restrain wiring a minimum of every six inches.c. Provide abrasion protection for wires passing through holes or across abrasive metal

edges.d. Adhesive type wire fasteners shall not be used. Hard screw type shall be employed.

6. Wiring of PLC I/O modules shall be through pre-wired cable assemblies. Cableassemblies shall have PLC I/O module-specific wiring arms on one end and cableconnectors specific to terminal blocks on the other.

H. Terminations:

1. Wiring within control panel shall be continuous and terminated only at terminal blocks orequipment terminals. Splices or butt connectors shall not be used within panel.

2. No more than one wire shall be terminated at any one terminal.3. Make external connections by way of numbered terminal blocks on numbered terminal

strips.4. When signals are powered from remote location, switched terminal blocks shall be used

where conductors enter or leave panel.5. When signals are powered from within panel, fused terminal blocks shall be used where

conductors enter or leave panel.6. Provide integral bussing system on terminal block array where more than two

terminations require common source or drain connection. Jumpered terminations shallnot be acceptable.

7. Provide knife disconnect-type terminal blocks with test sockets for all analog loops.8. Include provisions for grounding of shields on shielded twisted pair cables entering or

leaving panel. Cable shields shall be grounded at terminal block end only. Shields shallrun entire length of cable within panels. Running of twisted pairs without shields withinpanels is not permissible.

9. Provide separate terminal strips for each of the following types of signals.

a. 480-VAC power circuits.b. 120-VAC power circuits.c. 120-VAC discrete signals.d. 12/24 or 48 VDC discrete signals.e. Analog signals.f. Serial or parallel digital communication signals.g. Intrinsically safe circuits.

I. Power Distribution:

1. Panels having 480-VAC power supply:

a. Provide internal main circuit breaker to isolate power to panel.b. Provide circuit breakers for all motor starters provided.c. If panel includes separate 120-VAC control power supply, provide auxiliary contact

to isolate control power when main circuit breaker is opened.d. 480 / 120 control power transformer requirements:

1) Both primary leads shall be fused.2) First secondary lead shall be fused.


3) Second secondary lead shall be grounded.4) Provide single-phase surge suppression/line conditioner, sized for total panel

loadings (Benden Isotrol, or equal) between secondary leads and 120vac powerdistribution block.

2. Panels having 120-VAC power supply:

1) Provide circuit breaker on power supply entering panel.2) Provide single-phase surge suppression/line conditioner, sized for total panel

loadings (Benden, Isotrol) between circuit breaker and 120vac power distributionblock.

3. Provide separately fused power supply to each major panel component.4. Additional panel requirements.

a. Provide separately fused power circuits for panel powered devices entering panelfrom field. Provide separate circuit for each device. Devices may be 5-Amp fusedterminal blocks.

1) Solenoid actuated valves2) Loop powered transmitters3) 120VAC switched cord and receptacles4) Relays

b. Include digital transient surge suppressor/varistor installed in parallel with outputcontact at terminal strip for each PLC output signal driving an inductive loadincluding:

1) Relays.2) Solenoids.3) Motor starters.4) Motors.

J. Motor Protection Relays (MPR):

1. First named submersible pump manufacturer uses proprietary pump monitoring units,supplied by the pump manufacturer. Units shall be installed into control panels as shownon Drawings. One unit shall be supplied for each of the submersible pumps referenced.Coordinate size, mounting, and wiring requirements for monitoring units with Contractor.Units shall be the source of Motor Overtemp, and Seal Fail signals.

2. Other listed manufacturers utilize specifically designed relays manufactured by thirdparties for monitoring of pump alarm signals. Relays shall be installed into controlpanels as shown on Drawings. Relays may or may not be provided by pumpmanufacturer dependant upon manufacturer selected and signal being monitored.Coordinate relay provision, type, mounting requirements, and wiring requirements withContractor.

K. Labels and Nameplates:

1. Panel Designation:

a. Engraved with Engineer’s tag number and description shown on the P&IDs and inSpecifications.

b. Laminated white plastic with ½-in. high black characters.c. Fastened with stainless steel screws.


2. Front of panel mounted devices.

a. Provide nameplate for each front of panel device with descriptive phrase usingnomenclature as listed on Drawings and in Specifications.

b. Laminated white plastic with 3/16-in. high black characters.c. Fastened with stainless steel screws.

3. Rear of panel mounted devices.

a. Provide nametag for each rear of panel device with labels used on panel drawings.d. Thermo-embossed or laser printed with 1/8-in. high black characters on clear or

white background or laminated white plastic with 3/16-in. high black characters.b. Self-adhesive backing.c. Clean area with mineral spirits prior to affixing labels

4. Wiring.

a. Each conductor or twisted pair cable shall be labeled near its termination point.b. Color-coded multi-conductor cable or multi-pair cable shall be labeled on overall

jacket near its point of fan-out. Each pair of a multi-pair cable, when not color-coded,shall be labeled at its termination point in addition to the overall jacket.

c. Labels shall be machine-printed wrap-around types with tag visible from front withoutremoval of wire from termination.

L. Panel Finish:

1. Remove mill scale, grease, and oil.2. Primer thickness shall be 0.8 mil., minimum.3. Finish coat shall be two-part epoxy or baked dry powder, 3-mil., minimum dry film

thickness.4. Color: Standard manufacturer’s finish.

M. Conveniences:

1. Freestanding and floor mounted control panels shall be provided with door-activated,internal fluorescent panel lighting units. One unit shall be provided for every 3 feet ofpanel width and shall be mounted on the inside, top of the panel.

2. Freestanding and floor mounted control panels shall be provided with 120-volt, serviceoutlet circuits within the back-of-panel area. The circuits shall be provided with three-wire, 120-volt, 15-ampere duplex receptacles, one for every 3 feet of panel width andspaced evenly along the back-of-panel area.

2.03 PANEL CONSTRUCTION – INDOOR AND OUTDOOR ENCLOSURES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures shall conform to NEMA requirements as follows:

1. NEMA 7 for Indoor or Outdoor Enclosures in Class 1, Division 1 or 2 Hazardous(Classified) Locations.

2. NEMA 4X – Type 316 Stainless Steel for Indoor or Outdoor Enclosures in wet and/orcorrosion environment;

3. NEMA 12 for Indoor Enclosures not in Classified or corrosive environments.

B. In addition to NEMA standards, conform to the following requirements:

1. Minimum metal thickness: 14 Ga.


2. Indoor Enclosures: Equip with rubber-gasketed doors with continuous metal hinges.Equip doors with 3-point lockable latches.

3. Outdoor Enclosures: Equip with hinged dead-front inner doors and rubber-gasketed,continuous metal hinged outer weather doors. Equip weather doors with toggle style doorclamps.

4. Equip Outdoor Enclosures with thermostatically controlled heaters capable ofmaintaining internal panel temperature of 50 F with 20 mph wind at ambienttemperature of -20 F. Heater shall operate at 110Vac, 60 Hz power.

5. All Enclosures, NEMA 4X, shall be furnished with door gaskets.6. Size to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted in or on panel.

C. Prior to final fabrication of panels, verify layout of front-of-panel devices with respect to rear-of-panel devices. Maintain minimum of 3 inches clearance between door and sub-panelmounted devices.


A. In-Factory Inspection.

1. Verify following in accordance with approved submittals:

a. Panel dimensions.b. Equipment layout.c. Wiring.d. Wire and terminal identification.

2. Verify proper access to equipment for maintenance.3. Verify proper access to field wire and fiber optic termination points.4. Inspect for neatness of wiring and wire harness construction.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate housecleaning pad dimensions with enclosure dimensions.

B. Install control panels in locations indicated on Drawings and in accordance withmanufacturer’s written instructions and approved submittals.

C. Touch-up panel finish if marred during installation using manufacturer’s paint matchingenclosure.

D. Each PLC Panel shall have (3) sets of “as built” final circuit Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL PANEL DEVICESProject No. 12026 13441-1

SECTION 13441MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL PANEL DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Control panel devices for Process Instrumentation and Control Systems.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

C. UL: Underwriters Laboratory


A. Standardization:

1. Devices shall be latest and most modern design at time of bidding.2. As much as possible devices shall be products of one manufacturer to achieve

standardization for maintenance, spare parts, operation, and service.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PILOT DEVICES.

A. Manufacturers:

1. Allen Bradley 800T/800H.2. Square D Class 9001, Type K.

B. Construction:

1. Heavy duty.2. Watertight.3. Oil-tight.4. Flush panel mounting.5. Size to mount in 30.5-mm diameter cutout.6. Match NEMA rating of device with the installed location environmental classification.

C. Pushbuttons:

1. Flush head unless specified elsewhere.2. Contact Blocks:

a. Double break silver contacts.b. Ac Ratings: 7,200 va make, 720 va break.c. Single pole, single throw.d. Up to six tandem blocks.

3. Momentary contact unless specified elsewhere.

MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL PANELDEVICES


13441-2 Project No. 12026

4. Non-illuminated.5. Legend plates, as required, for type of operation or as specified elsewhere.

D. Emergency Stop:

1. Jumbo red mushroom head.2. Contact Blocks:

a. Double break silver contacts.b. Ac Ratings: 7,200 va make, 720 va break.c. Single pole, single throw.d. Up to six tandem blocks.

3. Push/pull.4. Maintained contact.5. Non-illuminated.6. Legend plates:

a. Extra large.b. Yellow.c. Round.

E. Selector Switches:

1. Maintained position unless specified elsewhere.2. Contact Blocks:

a. Double break silver contacts.b. Ac Ratings: 7,200 va make, 720 va break.c. Single pole, double throw or double pole, single throw.d. Up to six tandem blocks.

3. Operators:

a. Number of positions as specified elsewhere.b. Standard knob type unless specified elsewhere.

4. Legend plates as required for type of operation or specified elsewhere.

F. Pilot Lights:

1. LED Lamp.2. Transformer type.3. Bayonet, 6vac bulb.4. Colored lens as specified elsewhere.5. Interchangeable lenses.6. Transformer rated for 120Vac7. Push to test.8. Legend plates as specified elsewhere.

G. Potentiometers:

1. Three-terminal potentiometer.2. Resistance: 10 kOhm.3. Power Rating: 2 watt, 50V ac/dc.4. Resolution: 1 percent.


5. Linearity: +/- 5 percent.

H. Key Operated Switch:

1. 30mm2. 2-position3. Stay put – key withdraw left4. 1NO, 1NC5. Where more than one Key Switch is required, ALL Key Switches shall utilize the same

Key profile.6. Provide a minimum of 2 keys per Key Switch regardless of total quantity of installed Key

Switches

I. Nameplates:

1. Engraved laminated plastic.2. Letters 3/16 in. high.3. Black letters on white background.4. Identify per equipment controlled, using names found on Drawings.

J. Control Stations.

1. Describes enclosures used to house field pilot devices.2. NEMA ratings:

a. NEMA 7 in Class 1, Division 1 or 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations.b. NEMA 4X 316 Stainless Steel in indoor wet/corrosive locations or outdoors.c. NEMA 12 in other areas.

3. Nameplates:

a. Engraved laminated plastic.b. Letters 3/16 in. high.c. Black letters on white background.d. Identify per equipment controlled, using names found on Drawings.

2.02 MOTOR STARTER CONTROL RELAYS.

A. Manufacturers:

1. Square D.2. Cutler-Hammer.3. Or Equal.

B. Construction:

1. Industrial type.2. 300 v rated.3. Ac operation.4. Used for operation of large motor starter coils or other 120 vac loads whose current

requirements (continuos or inrush) exceed capacity of control relays listed below.

C. Operating data:

1. Pickup time: 11 ms maximum.2. Dropout time: 6 ms maximum.



13441-4 Project No. 12026

D. Coil:

1. Molded construction.2. 120 Vac, 60 Hz.3. Continuous rated.4. 155 va inrush, maximum.5. 22 va sealed, maximum.

E. Contacts:

1. Double break.2. Silver alloy.3. Convertible.4. Color-coded to indicate status.5. 60 amp make, 6 amp break (120 vac inductive).

F. DIN rail-mounting capability.

G. Accessories:

1. Add-on pole attachment.

a. 4 NO and 4 NC contacts.b. Add-on to 0 to 4-pole relay.

2. Latch attachment.

2.03 CONTROL RELAYS.

A. Manufacturers:

1. Allen Bradley.2. Potter and Brumfield.3. No Substitutes.

B. Operating Data:

1. Pickup Time: 13 ms maximum.2. Dropout Time: 10 ms maximum.3. Operating Temperature: -45 F to 150 F.

C. ac Coil:

1. 120 Vac.2. Continuous rated.3. 3.5 va inrush maximum.4. 1.2 va sealed, maximum.5. 50 to 60 Hz.6. Light to indicate energization.7. Minimum Dropout Voltage: 10% of coil rated voltage.

D. dc Coil:

1. 24 Vdc.2. Continuous rated.


3. Light to indicate energization.4. Minimum Coil Resistance:

a. 24 Vdc: 450 .

E. Contacts:

1. Gold flashed fine silver, gold diffused for 1 amp or less resistive load.2. Silver cadmium oxide.3. 3 form C.4. 300 vac.5. 10 amp make, 1.5 amp break, (inductive).

F. Rated at 10 million operations.

G. 11 pin, square socket.

H. DIN rail mountable.

I. Enclosed and protected by polycarbonate cover.

J. Provide relay-retaining clips.

2.04 BOILER ROOM E-STOP BREAK GLASS PUSHBUTTON STATION.

A. Manufacturer:

1. Pilla series ST120

B. Specifications:

1. Emergency break glass pushbutton station.2. Requires button to be depressed after glass has been broken.3. Maintained pushbutton.4. 10 Amp, 600Vac rated contacts5. 2 normally closed and 1 normally open sets of contacts minimum.6. Illuminated 120Vac when depressed.7. NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure.8. Stainless steel hammer and chain included.9. Shall read “Emergency Boiler Shutdown”.

2.05 BOILER ROOM E-STOP RELAY.

A. Manufacturer:

1. Pilz PNOZ-X3 – 120V

B. Specifications:

1. 120Vac supply2. Dual-channel3. Manual reset

2.06 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Manufacturers:



13441-6 Project No. 12026

1. Phoenix Contact.2. Weidmuller.3. Or equal.

B. 300 v rating for 120 v circuits and below, 600 v rating for 480 v circuits.

C. Clamping screw type.

D. Isolating end caps for each terminal.

E. Identification on both terminals.

F. Clip-mounted on DIN rail.

G. Accept AWG 12 to 22.

H. Feed-Through Terminals:

1. 20 Amp rating

I. Switched Terminals:

1. Knife disconnect with test sockets.2. 10 Amp rating.

J. Fused Terminals:

1. Hinged fuse removal/disconnect.2. 10 Amp rating.3. Include blown fuse indication.

2.05 PROCESS INDICATOR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Precision Digital, PD 6000 Series2. Red Lion

B. Input: 4-20 mAdcC. Output: 4-20 mAdcD. Two relays.E. Mounting Front of Panel

2.06 ELECTRONIC CURRENT ISOLATOR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Phoenix Contact Model MCR Series.2. PR Electronics.

B. Solid state instrument to electrically isolate one instrument loop from another instrumentloop. Converter to accept 4-20 mAdc input signal and provide equal but isolated andpower-boosted output.

C. Mounting: DIN Rail.


D. Temperature compensated, calibration-free.

E. Signals: Input: 4-20 mAdc into 50 ohms. Output: 4-20 mAdc into output load up to500 ohms.

F. Isolation: Common mode up to 700 vac between input and output.

G. Accuracy: 0.5% of span.

H. Provide power supply specific to isolator.

2.07 POWER AND DATA PORT

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell PR4X205E.2. Automation Direct ZP-PGA-32-201.3. GracePort

B. General

1. One Ethernet port.2. 120Vac GFCI Receptacle.3. Bulkhead style.4. Nema 4X.5. Mounted on PLC Panel.6. Wired to internal Ethernet switch.

2.08 SURGE PROTECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Islatrol - IE-100 series (size per application)

B. Application-Surge Protector shall be wired to protect the following:

1. PLC2. Ethernet Switches3. HMI4. Radio5. Any other computer equipment located in or powered from PLC Panel.

2.09 DC POWER SUPPLIES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Phoenix Contact2. Sola/Hevi-Duty3. Or equal.

B. General

1. Power supply shall be fully enclosed, and provide screw terminations. All wiring pointsand plug connections shall be "touch safe" with no live voltages that can make contact



13441-8 Project No. 12026

with a misplaced finger in accordance with IEC 529. Housing shall be at least IP20. Orequal.

2. Power Supplies shall have an efficiency of at least 80% with high efficiency models(~90%) available

3. The power shall have an MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures) greater than 500,000hours according to IEC 1709

4. The power supply shall be able to withstand shock of 30G in all space directionsaccording to IEC 68-2-27 and vibration up to 2.3G 90 min. (<15hz, amplitude = +/-2.5mm/15-150hz) according to IEC 68-2-6

5. Power supplies shall be UL-508A listed to allow the use of the power supply at full ratedoutput amperage with no "de-rating".

C. Mounting

1. All power supplies shall have integral metal mounting foot to attach to 35mm DIN-railconforming to DIN EN50022.

D. Wire Connections

1. Attach wires to the power supplies by means of a cable-clamping terminal blockactivated by a screw. Connections shall be gas-tight, and the terminal block shall befabricated with non-ferrous, non-corrosive materials.

2. Wire connection for currents less than 20A shall use pluggable terminals on both inputand output ends.

3. Pluggable terminals shall accept wire sizes 24 through 14 AWG.

E. Equipment

1. Nominal current rating to be based on an operating temperature of 60°C or higher2. Power supplies shall have a visible "DC Power OK" indicator. This indicator will flash

when the output drops below 10% of the adjusted output voltage.3. Ambient temperature range for operation shall be at least -25 C to +70 C4. Residual ripple shall not exceed 100 mV peak to peak at nominal current values5. Integral "fine" surge suppression shall be incorporated into the power supply6. Power supplies shall conform to CE electromagnetic compatibility as described in

EN61000-6-2 and EN 50081-2.7. Power supplies shall have means of limiting DC current in case of short circuit or an

overload and shall automatically reset themselves when the fault is corrected.8. Power supplies when wired in parallel will not require external circuitry.9. Power supplies shall have a voltage monitoring relay contact and signaling output.10. Input must auto-range between 85 to 264VAC and 90 to 350VDC for 1 phase power

supplies with no manual intervention.11. Input must auto-range between 320 to 575VAC and 450 to 800VDC for 3 phase power

supplies with no manual intervention.12. Power supplies shall have a power factor of at least 0.6, with higher power factor models

available as described by EN61000-3-2.

2.10 PANEL ANNUNCIATOR

A. Manufacturers:

1. Sonalert SC 1900.

B. Audible, front of panel device for signaling alarms.

C. Water-proof, molded plastic housing.


D. Screw-in neck with gasket and locking nut.

E. 2-wire, piezoelectric device.

F. Continuous pulse, dual mode audible tones rated for 80-95 dB at 10 feet.

G. 120vac power.


3.01 INSTALLATION


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC)Project 12026 13450-1

SECTION 13450PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit following Product Data:

1. Data sheets and catalog literature.2. Description of on-line diagnostic tests and off-line tests.3. Dimensional data on PLC equipment.4. Addressing system and card layout, including special configuration rules and limitations.5. Interface and cable data.6. Hardware manuals (4 sets).7. Software manuals (4 sets).8. Detailed bill of materials.

B. Submit in accordance with Section 13400 - Process Instrumentation and Control.

1.02 MAINTENANCE

A. Software:

1. PLC shall be programmed using RSLogix 5000 (latest edition).

B. Additional Materials:

1. Provide one shelf spare for each I/O module type used on project.2. Provide one shelf spare for each processor type used on project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Division 13 WWTP operations shall function utilizing Programmable Logic Controllers.Systems Integrator shall provide a complete and functioning Control and Communicationssystem.

B. Perform stand-alone monitoring and control and include following as minimum.

1. Microprocessor based controller (PLC processor) to execute program instructions, storedata, and control data transfer.

2. PLC memory.3. I/O subsystem interfaces.4. Power supply, including power conditioning and surge protection.5. Communication interfaces.6. Programming interface.

C. Must integrate with plant network of new and existing PLCs, HMI’s, and vendor suppliedequipment through Ethernet Switches located strategically throughout the Plant using Cat-6and singlemode fiber optic media.

D. Must fully integrate with WWTP SCADA System.

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC) Donohue & Associates, Inc.13450-2 Project 12026

2.02 MANUFACTURER

A. All equipment specified in this Section shall be the product of a single manufacturer unlessspecifically stated otherwise.

1. Rockwell Automation.

2.03 PROCESSOR

A. 1756-L74

B. Features:

1. 16 Mbytes user memory.2. 1 Gb non-volitile memory module (1784-SD1)3. USB port.4. Data Highway and Remote I/O link communication interfaces where indicated.5. Ladder, sequential function chart (SFC), structured text, and function block programming

ready.

C. Provide orderly shutdown on power failure, saving register contents with automatic restart onpower restoration.

2.04 POWER SUPPLY

A. 1756-PA75

B. 85-265Vac Power Supply.

2.05 PLC I/O MODULES

A. I/O modules specifically designed for interfacing of I/O signals to PLC processor.

B. Include sufficient I/O modules to accomodate I/O with provisions for 20% spare I/O prewiredto terminal strips. Where no I/O of a listed type (digital input, digital output, analog input,analog output) is shown, provide one spare prewired module.

C. I/O Modules shall be segregated by Process such that the failure of any single module shallNOT shut down all equipment in respective Process (ie: Each Pump for a given wet wellshall have it’s own set of DI, DO, AI, and AO modules exclusive from the other Pumps).

D. Each input shall be individually fused.

E. Digital Input:

1. 120 Vac as required by application.2. 16 points per module.3. Individually isolated.4. LED indication of on/off status of each point.5. 1756-IA16I

F. Relay Output:

1. 5-150Vdc, 10-265Vac individually isolated relay contact outputs.2. Contact Rating: 2 amps continuous at 125/240Vac.


3. Contact configuration: Normally open.4. 16 points per module.5. LED indication of on/off status of each point.6. 1756-OW16I

G. Analog Input:

1. 6 inputs per module.2. Differential or single ended, individually isolated.3. Accepts 4-20 mAdc.4. 1756-IF6I

H. Analog RTD Input:

1. 6 inputs per module.2. Individually isolated RTD.3. Accepts 3-wire RTD sensors.

a) 100, 200, 500, 1000 Platinum, alpha=385b) 100, 200, 500, 1000 Platinum, alpha=3916c) 120 Nickel, alpha=672d) 100, 120, 200, 500 Nickel, alpha=618e) 10 Copper

4. 1756-IR6I

I. Analog Output:

1. 6 outputs per module.2. Differential, individually isolated.3. Transmits 4-20 mAdc.4. 1756-OF6CI5. An analog voltage module may be used for facility lighting if a voltage output is required.

Coordinate facility lighting signals with Contractor.

2.06 CHASSIS

A. Redundant Racks:

1. 7-slot.2. 1756-A7

B. I/O Racks:

1. 17-slot.2. 1756-A173. 10-slot and 13-slot chassis are acceptable only if approved by Engineer.

C. Open I/O chassis slots:

1. All unused chassis slots shall be filled.2. 1756-N2

2.07 COMMUNICATION MODULES

PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS (PLC) Donohue & Associates, Inc.13450-4 Project 12026

A. EtherNet communication with network switches:

1. Copper.2. 10/100Mbps.3. 1756-EN2T

B. Media and VFD EtherNet/IP communication:

1. Ring topology.2. 1756-EN2TR3. 1783-ETAP

i. 1783-ETAP requires 24Vdc power.ii. 24Vdc shall be derived from respective PLC panel.

C. Modbus communication:

1. Prosoft Technologies MV156E-MCM.

D. Modbus TCP/IP communication:

1. Prosoft Technologies MV156E-MNET.

E. Processor Redundancy:

1. 1756-RM2. Connected via 1756-RCM1 cable.

2.08 WIRING AND TERMINATION SYSTEMS

A. Wiring of PLC I/O modules shall be through cable assemblies and termination modules.

B. Cable assemblies shall be pre-wired and shall have PLC I/O module-specific wiring arms onone end and cable connectors specific to an associated termination module on the other.

C. Termination modules shall be high-density terminal block assemblies connecting torespective PLC I/O module via pre-wired cable assemblies.

D. One termination module shall be dedicated to each PLC I/O module.

E. Termination modules shall be specific to the respective I/O module.

F. Termination modules shall be DIN rail mounted.

G. Provide sufficient terminations to accommodate active I/O points, spares, and futureexpansion.

2.09 PLC PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

A. PLC shall be programmed using RSLogix 5000 (latest edition).

B. Communication software and configuration shall meet monitoring and control requirementsof each process in accordance with functional descriptions.


C. Within each hardware unit communicating over data highway, include executive routines ortraffic controller to control and coordinate activities on communication links. Use integrated,standard products for communication software to manage transmission protocols, line errordetection, and message switching.

D. Interface software for transfer of data from one location to another.

E. Expandable systems shall accommodate addition of future equipment as specifiedelsewhere.

F. Diagnostic facilities to check performance of communication links and communicationsinterface portion of devices on data highway.

G. Include routines to detect transmission errors. Perform automatic reinterrogations andretransmissions before alarm is sounded. Generate system alarms.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install and wire in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions andapproved submittals, applicable requirements of of the NEC, NECA “Standard ofInstallation”, and recognized industry practices.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SMALL PROGRAMMABLE LOFIC CONTROLLERSProject No. 12026 13451-1

SECTION 13451SMALL PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUBMITTALS


1. Data sheets and catalog literature.2. Description of on-line diagnostic tests and off-line tests.3. Dimensional data on PLC equipment.4. Addressing system and card layout, including special configuration rules and limitations.5. Interface and cable data.6. Hardware manuals (4 sets).7. Detailed bill of materials.

B. Submit in accordance with Section 13400 - Process Instrumentation and Control.

1.03 MAINTENANCE

A. Additional Materials:

1. Provide one shelf spare for each I/O module type used on project.2. Provide one shelf spare for each processor type used on project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. All equipment specified in this Section shall be the product of a single manufacturer unlessspecifically stated otherwise.

1. Rockwell Automation.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Perform stand-alone monitoring and control and include the following as minimum.

1. Microprocessor based controller (PLC processor) to execute program instructions, storedata, and control data transfer.

2. PLC memory.3. I/O subsystem interfaces.4. Power supply, including power conditioning and surge protection.5. Communication interfaces.6. Programming interface.

B. PLC’s shall integrate with SCADA HMI system via existing ethernet radio as shown onDrawing 008-I-7.

C. PLC’s shall function as a “relay replacer” with limited I/O and functionality for each of the liftstations and level gauges as shown on Drawing 008-I-7 for transmission to the WWTP.

SMALL PROGRAMMABLE LOFIC CONTROLLERS Donohue & Associates, Inc.13451-2 Project No. 12026

1. Primary function of the PLC’s at the lift station sites is to replace the Autocon interfacebetween I/O and radio.

2. System Integrator shall coordinate the I/O for each station that shall be interrogated andtransmitted via radio to the WWTP with the Owner.

3. Schematic drawings showing existing I/O for each lift station are available per request toOwner or Engineer.

4. PLC shall be capable of accepting 25% additional I/O capacity for future I/O.

2.03 PLC PROCESSOR

A. Allen Bradley Bulletin 1766-L32 MicroLogix™ 1400 Controller System.

B. Features:

1. Battery Backed RAM: 20Kb.

a. 10Kb User program.b. 10Kb user data.

2. 120/240Vac.3. 10/100Mbps, RJ-45, Ethernet I/P Communication Interface (built into processor).4. Built in serial port.5. DIN rail or panel mounted.6. Ladder Logic Programming.

B. Include data file protection memory module.

C. Provide orderly shutdown on power failure, saving register contents with automatic restart onpower restoration.

D. Interface to programmer unit for maintenance and troubleshooting. Continually updatedisplay when data requested. Provide capability to monitor or change following.

1. Discrete I/O.2. Analog I/O.3. Pulsed I/O.4. Communication parameters.5. Configuration data.6. Internal program data values.

2.04 I/O MODULES

A. I/O modules specifically designed for interfacing of I/O signals to PLC processor.

B. Include sufficient I/O modules to accomodate I/O with provisions for:

1. 25% spare I/O for digital I/O minimum.2. 2 spares each for analog I/O minimum.

C. Digital Input Modules:

1. 120 Vac.2. 8 points per module.3. LED indication of on/off status of each point.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SMALL PROGRAMMABLE LOFIC CONTROLLERSProject No. 12026 13451-3

D. Digital Output Modules:

1. 100-240Vac.2. 8 points per module.

a. 4 points per group.

3. LED indication of on/off status of each point.

E. Digital Relay Output Modules:

1. 5-125VDC, 5-240VAC isolated relay contact outputs.2. Contact Rating: 2.0 amps continuous at 240vac.3. Contact configuration: Normally open contacts.4. 8 points per module.

a. 4 points per group.

5. LED indication of on/off status of each point.

F. Analog Input:

1. Differential (bipolar).2. 4 points per module.3. Accept 4-20 mAdc.

G. Analog Output:

1. Single-ended (unipolar).2. 4 points per module.3. Transmit 4-20 mAdc.

2.05 PLC PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE

A. PLC shall be programmed using RSLogix 500.


3.01 INSTALLATION


END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. COMPUTER EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 13452-1

SECTION 13452COMPUTER EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Description of Work:

1. Furnish server class and industrial class computers as shown on Drawings and asconforming to the requirements of this Specification.

2. Furnish HMI monitors conforming to the requirements of this specification.3. Furnish hardware cabling for a complete and functional computer system network.

B. Items specified in this section shall conform to general requirements of Section 13400 –Process Instrumentation and Control.

C. All like products shall be furnished from a single manufacturer.

D. City IT department shall have final authority on determining software versions and licenses.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


1. Data sheets and catalog literature.2. Description of on-line diagnostic tests and off-line tests.3. Dimensional data on computer equipment..4. Interface and cable data.5. Hardware manuals.6. Software manuals.


1.03 SOFTWARE UPGRADES

A. Provide software at time of delivery to site.

B. Provide all software updates and revisions at no additional cost to Owner for the duration ofproject.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 SERVERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Dell PowerEdge T610.

B. General:

1. The PCN servers shall work in redundant pairs that shall monitor each other’s health andfailover and switchback seamlessly. Servers shall be configured as Primary andSecondary units. The Historian Server shall be configured with dual hard drives, one to

COMPUTER EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.13452-2 Project No. 12026

serve the Historian function and one to serve the redundant/failover function for theprimary server.

2. Specifications shall be considered minimum requirements.

C. Processor & Memory:

1. Proessor: 2- 6 Core Intel Xeon E5649, 12MB Cache, 2.53 GHz, 5.86 GT/s QPI2. Memory 32GB (8X4GB), 1333 MHz Dual ranked LV 32LVR2A RDIMMs for 2 processors,

Advanced ECC

D. Power Supply:

1. Redundant 870W

E. Storage:

1. Hard Drive– 3- 300GB 10K RPM SAS 6Gbps 2.5in Hot plug Hard Drives2. Hard Drive Configuration - Raid 5 Configuration for H700 or PERC 6/I Controllers3. Taped Backup (for 40-Historian-1 server only)4. Internal Controller – PERC H700 Integrated RAID Controller, 512 MB Cache

F. Deployment:

1. Form Factor: Tower2. Remote Management: Integrated Lights-Out Standard (Advanced features available via

optional Integrated Lights-Out Advanced Pack); ROM-Based Setup Utility andRedundant ROM’s

3. Redundant Fans4. Warranty - year(s) (parts/labor/onsite): 3-3-3

G. Display

1. See 2.03 below for requirements.

H. Ethernet Adapter:

1. Broadcom 5709 Dual Port 1GbE NIC w/TOE iSCSI B5709I PCLe-4

I. Optical Drive

1. DVD-RW SATA Internal

J. Keyboard and Mouse

1. USB Keyboard2. USB – Wireless Mouse

K. Video Card

1. Shall support multiple monitors as shown on Drawings.2. Shall be supported by Wonderware InTouch.

L. Communications Software:

1. Communication software and configuration shall meet monitoring and controlrequirements of each process in accordance with functional descriptions.


M. Operating System:

1. Provide all software with media and minimum 5 pack CAL licenses to applicationengineer.

2. One Copy (per server) of Windows Server 2008 R2 with the latest service pack. ConfirmInTouch Historian 2012 is compatible with S1 before purchase all three copies with S1.

3. Non-OEM install with media included.4. 1 Copy of Windows 7 (x64) Professional.

N. Additional Software:

1. Microsoft Office Professional2. Microsoft Security Essentials3. Internet Explorer4. Adobe Acrobat Reader

2.02 DESKTOP WORKSTATION - CLIENT

A. Manufacturer:

1. Dell OptiPlex 790 Mini tower

B. System Components

1. Intel Core i32120 Processor (3.3 GHz, 3M)2. Memory: 4GB DDR3,Non-ECC,1333MHz Dual Channel SDRAM,2x2GB3. Hard Drive: 250 GB 7200 RPM 3.5” SATA, 6.0 GbPs with 8MB Cache4. Removable Media Options: 16x DVD +/- RW5. I/O 8 USB 3.0 ports, 10/100/1000 Ethernet port, 1 VGA port6. Operating System: Windows 7 (x64) Professional

C. Keyboard and Mouse

1. USB Keyboard2. USB – Wireless Mouse

D. Display

1. See 2.03 below for requirements.

E. Electrical

1. Input Voltage: 90…264V ac, autoranging2. Line Frequency: 47…63 Hz3. Power Consumption: 150 VA (1.5 A at 100 Vrms, 0.63 A at 240 Vrms)

F. Environmental

1. Operating Temperature: 0…50 °C (32…122 °F)2. Operating Humidity: 10…90% without condensation3. Operating Vibration: 1 g peak, 10…500 Hz4. Operating Shock: 15 g (1/2 sine, 11 ms)5. Rating: NEMA Type 1, 12, 4, IP66


6. Certifications: UL 60950 recognized component, c-UL 950 recognized component, orUL/c-UL listed when marked; CE marked, C-Tick

2.03 MONITORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Samsung.2. Dell.3. NEC (required for large Screen Displays)

a. Model P462 or X461Sb. Speakers includedc. Wall mount brackets included on rear of monitor. Mounting bracket attached to

monitor other than rear of monitor is not acceptable.d. Extended length cables to connect to server/computers located at Operator Control

Station desk.

B. General

1. Refurbished monitors are not acceptable.2. Flat panel LED-backlit LCD monitor / TFT active matrix3. EPA Energy Star.4. 24” diagonal viewable area for desktop HMI monitors, 46” diagonal viewing area for wall

mount display units.5. On-screen controls.6. 0.25mm screen pitch.7. Aspect ratio: 16:9

a. All monitors shall have same aspect ratio.

8. Unlimited display colors.9. Furnish with wall mounting brackets and desk stands if not provided for in Section

12510.10. 3-year warranty.

2.04 PRINTER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Dell.2. Hewlett Packard.

B. General:

1. Print technology

a. Laserb. Print quality, black: Up to 600 x 600 dpic. Print quality, color:: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

2. Speed

a. Print speed, black: Up to 30 ppmb. Print speed, color: Up to 15 ppm


c. Processor speed: 533 MHz

3. Paper Handling and Media

a. Paper trays: 2b. Input capacity: 350c. Output capacity: 200d. Duplex printinge. Media sizes: Letter, legal, 8.5 x 13 in, executive, statement, envelopesf. Media types: Paper (plain, preprinted, letterhead, prepunched, bond, recycled, color,

rough), transparencies, labels, envelopes, cardstock, user-defined

4. Memory / print languages

a. Memory: 128MBb. Print languages: HP PCL 6, HP PCL 5c, HP Postscript Level 3 emulation, direct PDF

printing v1.4 (with 128 MB or more memory)c. Typefaces: 80 built-in fonts available for both PCL and Postscript emulation, printer-

matching screen fonts in TrueType format available with the software solution

5. Connectivity

a. Connectivity: Gigabit Ethernet, 802.11b/g wireless LAN and other networkingaccessories.

6. Print drivers:

a. HP PCL 5c, HP PCL 6, HP Postscript emulation.b. Windows 7 Capable and server 2008 R2 capable.

2.05 HMI WORKSTATION CABINET

A. Manufacturers:

1. ITS Enclosures

B. General:

1. 60” Height, 30” Wide, 27” Deep (nominal).2. Type 12 Enclosure.3. Capable of containing 24” monitors as specified in paragraph 2.03 this Section.4. Built in fan with guard and filter.5. Clear plexiglass window in locking upper cabinet.6. Pull-out keyboard drawer.7. Locking lower cabinet.8. Painted steel construction.9. Coordinate color with Owner prior to submittal.

C. Locations as follows:

1. Headworks electrical room2. Solids Building electrical room3. Digester Complex electrical room


2.06 CONFIGURATION SERVICES

A. General

1. All hard drives shall be formatted as NTFS volumes

2. Identify and setup all SCADA Users with proper authorities and passwords.

3. Each computer shall have a unique name shall be part of a domain. The computer shallhave a static IP address, subnet mask and gateway addresses. Coordinate domainidentifications, IP addresses, subnet masks and gateway addresses with City IT.

4. Ensure that the network cards have the following properties enabled: “Client ForMicrosoft Networks”; “File and Print Sharing For Microsoft Networks” and “InternetProtocol (TCP/IP and “NWLink IPX/SPX/Net BIOS Compatible Transport Protocol”.

5. All computers shall be tested for correct configuration as well as correct response.

6. All computers on the network shall be setup for time synchronization.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install and wire in accordance with System Integrator and/or Equipment manufacturer’swritten instructions and approved submittals.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates Inc OPERATOR INTERFACE UNITProject No. 12026 13453-1

SECTION 13453OPERATOR INTERFACE UNIT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the following operator interface equipment (OIU) and softwarerequired for this Project.

1. General purpose OIU by Rockwell Automation

B. Provide operator interface units as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data sheets and catalog literature. Literature shall be marked to indicate specificcomponents and configuration provided.

B. Detailed bill of material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. All equipment specified in this Section shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer:

1. Rockwell Automation; Panelview Plus2. No substitutes.

2.02 GENERAL PURPOSE OIU

A. GENERAL

1. Microprocessor based graphical operator interface.

2. NEMA 12, front of panel mount.

3. 0 – 55 C operating range.

4. Membrane style keypad, function and numeric entry.

5. PLC peer to peer network, Ethernet or direct serial interface.

6. Application memory standard 32MB.

7. Battery Backup

8. 32 Function Keys

B. DISPLAY

1. 10.4 inch diagonal minimum.

OPERATOR INTERFACE UNIT Donohue & Associates Inc13453-2 Project No. 12026

2. 640 X 480 minimum resolution.

3. Color.

4. Active Matrix Thin Film Transistor.

5. Provide High-Bright display for outdoor installations.

C. DISPLAY FUNCTIONS

1. Pushbutton.

2. Pilot light.

3. Numeric data entry and display.

4. Alarm display.

5. Bar graph display.

6. Time display.

7. Selector switch.

8. Bit mapped graphics.


3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install and wire in accordance with System Integrator’s and/or Equipment manufacturer’swritten instructions and approved submittals.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SCADA SOFTWAREProject No. 12026 13454-1

SECTION 13454SCADA SOFTWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the SCADA Software Suite requirements.B. Training for SCADA Historian.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data sheets and catalog literature. Literature shall be marked to indicate specificcomponents and configuration provided.

B. Software/Hardware compatibility matrix (see 2.01 B.14 below).C. Detailed bill of material.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. PRIMARY SERVER - Server to be located in Structure 300 Control Room which shallcontain both the HMI and Terminal Services functions, as well as the WIN-911 software.

B. SECONDARY SERVER - Server to be located in Structure 436 which shall contain theredundant/failover software, as well as the WIN-911 software.

C. HISTORIAN – Shall be located on the Secondary Server located in Structure 436 which shallcontain Historian Software. This Server shall contain cartridge back-up for memory.

D. WORKSTATIONS - Desktop Computers located strategically through-out the plant allowingOperators to interface with the process.

1. Structure 300 Administration Control Room.2. Structure 405 Headworks Electrical Room.3. Structure 436 Blower Building Electrical Room.4. Structure 455 Solids Building Electrical Room.5. Structure 510 Digester Complex Electrical Room.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 WONDERWARE

A. Distributed by:

1. Wonderware Midwest175 North Patrick Blvd., Suite 110

Brookfield, WI. 53045 866-826-9725 Shannon Palumbo

[email protected]

B. The Owner currently owns a development license of Wonderware InTouch SCADA Software.The following products and services shall be provide as part of this contract. This includesbase setup of the packages. Application Engineering is not part of this Specification.Contractor shall provide the following:

1. Qty. (1) P/N 12-11169 Upgrade Development Studio 2012 Unlimited/60K/500.

http://www.wonderwaremidwest.com/


SCADA SOFTWARE Donohue & Associates, Inc.13454-2 Project No. 12026

a. Serial Number 466337 currently registered to Eau Claire Water Treatment Plantb. ArchestrA IDE Unlimited Galaxy I/O size.c. InTouch Development and Runtime supporting 60K tags and remote references.d. MS SQL Server 2008.e. Wonderware Information Server, Active Factory 9.2, Historian Client 10.0, InControl,

InControl Objects, InControl IO Drivers 7.11.f. Extensions for InTouch Compact edition 10.1

2. Qty. (1) P/N 06-7062 Development Studio 2012 Media.

3. Qty. (1) P/N 01-2553T/TP Functional Upgrade to InTouch 2012 Runtime 60K tag with I/OTSE per session per device.

a. Serial Number 466338 currently registered to Eau Claire Water Treatment Plant.

4. Qty (1) P/N 01-2553TF/TPF InTouch 2012 Runtime 60K tag with I/O TSE Failover persession per device.

5. Qty. (4) P/N 01-2554T/TP InTouch 2012 Runtime 60K tag without I/O TSE per sessionper device.

6. Qty. (4) P/N 01-2554T/TPF InTouch 2012 Runtime 60K tag without I/O TSE Failover persession per device.

7. Qty. (1) P/N 17-0516 Wonderware Historian 2012 Standard 5K tags.

a. Historian Server 5,000 tags v10.0.b. Information Server Portal v4.5.

8. Qty. (1) P/N 09-0190 Information Server Portal 2012.

9. Qty. (1) P/N 17-1125 Historian Client Per Named Device 5-Pack v10.0.

10. Qty. (1) P/N 17-0238 WW Basic CAL with MS CAL 5-Pack v2008.

11. Qty. (5) P/N 17-1124 Historian Client Per Named Device v10.0.

12. Qty. (5) P/N 17-0237 WW Basic CAL with MS CAL Single v2008.

13. Qty. (2 year) P/N 10-7001 Wonderware Customer First Standard + Level Agreement

a. Agreement expires two years after installation services are complete.

14. Software shall be latest version that is fully compatible with Operating System, otherloaded software, and computer hardware. A compatibility matrix is required with thesubmittal.

C. WIN-911 ALARM SOFTWARE

1. Qty. (1) P/N WIN-911/PRO-BD (latest version)

a. This includes the Dialogic Board.b. Shall be installed on Primary Server.

2. Qty. (2) P/N WIN-911/CDMA/V Cellular Modem for Verizon.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. SCADA SOFTWAREProject No. 12026 13454-3

a. Shall be installed on Primary and Secondary Servers.b. Confirm and coordinate Verizon plan selection with Owner prior to submittal.

3. Qty. (1) P/N WIN-911/PRO-HB for redundant applications (latest version).

a. Shall be installed on Secondary Server.b. Shall include Dialogic Board.

4. Qty. (1) WIN-911/D4PCI/U Dialogic telephony card with PCI interface.

a. Shall be installed on Secondary Server.


3.01 TRAINING

A. Manufacture’s training shall be provided on-site prior to Substantial Completion of project.Training shall be tailored to the needs of Eau Claire WWTP. Coordinate training needs anddesires with Owner prior to start of classes to formulate class outline acceptable to Owner.

Course No. Course Description Class Size Duration11-GM-10029 Historian Client 2012 6 Students 2 Days

B. The Wonderware Historian Client 2012 Software course is a 2-day, instructor-led class that isdesigned to provide fundamental understanding of the Wonderware Historian Client suite ofthe Wonderware Historian Client tools. The Wonderware Historian Client trending, analysis,and reporting software offers a suite of data analysis and reporting clients that maximize thevalue of data stored on Wonderware Historian. The Wonderware Historian Client softwareenables individuals at all levels of an organization to easily access plant and process relateddata through simple point-and-click dialogs.

C. Upon completion of this course, attendees will be able to:

1. Retrieve Wonderware Historian data with the help of the Wonderware Historian Clientsoftware.

2. Use the data in its appropriate context, including historical and real-time trendmanipulation, and production-related reporting within Microsoft Excel and Word.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PLANT COMMUNICATIONSProject No. 12026 13455-1

SECTION 13455PLANT COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Requirements of Plant-Wide Data Highway and associated equipment.

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to requirements of Section 13400 – Process Instrumentation and Control, providefollowing:

B. Product data sheets and catalog literature. Literature shall be marked to indicate specificcomponents and configuration provided.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Cable routing drawings for PLC Data Highway.2. Cable termination detail drawings.3. Location and function of all communications module types.

D. Detailed bill of material.



1. PLC Data Highway:

a. Provide high speed link between PLCs and Process Control Network to allow sharingof real-time data.

b. Provide expandable system to accommodate addition of future equipment asspecified elsewhere.

c. Provide couplers, terminators, junction boxes, and other associated cableconnectors.

d. Provide cabling suitable for conduit routing as shown elsewhere.e. Provide data highway as shown on Drawings.f. PLC data highway between buildings shall be Singlemode Fiber Optic (1000Base-

FX). Provide interface modules within PLC panels for fiber optic interface.g. PLC data highway within buildings shall be Cat 6 UTP (100Base-TX).h. Maximum distance between building nodes 2000 meters.i. Maximum distance intra-building nodes is 100 meters.j. Up to 32 nodes allowed on network, minimum.

1.03 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials:

1. 5 of each type of coupler, terminator, junction box, and connector.

PLANT COMMUNICATIONS Donohue & Associates, Inc.13455-2 Project No. 12026

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCHES

A. Ethernet Switches shall be provided by Owner.

1. Coordinate IP Addressing scheme with City IT.2. Coordinate port configuration with City IT.3. Coordinate copper POE and fiber requirements with City IT.4. Coordinate Switch form factor with City IT for each installation.5. Installed by System Integrator.

B. Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) or mini-GBIC’s shall be provided by System Integratorand be fully compatible with Ethernet Switches provided by Owner above.

C. Shall be configured as follows:

1. Each PLC panel has two ethernet switches (SW1 controlling Process Control Networktraffic, and SW2 controlling BIN traffic).

2. Each switch shall serve as redundancy for the other within the same PLC panel.

a. SW1 shall reserve open ports that are the inverse of those open on SW2 and vice-versa.

b. This configuration allows a connected device to be inserted into either Switch usingthe same port number allowing the traffic to VLAN keeping each network separate atall times regardless of which Switch is being used.

c. Each Ethernet Switch within a given PLC Panel shall have ports reserved for eachrespective network. Coordinate with City IT.

D. City IT Contact Information:

1. John LeBrunInformation Services ManagerCity of Eau Claire203 South Farwell StreetEau Claire, WI 54701phone: (715)839-5044fax: (715)[email protected]

2.02 FIXED ETHERNET SWITCHES (Supplied in Vendor Furnished Panels)

A. Manufacturers:

1. N Tron 300 Series.2. Phoenix Contact.

B. Features:

1. Unmanaged Industrial Ethernet switch.2. IP protocol.3. IEEE 802.3 and 1613 Compliance.4. NEMA TS1/TS2 Compliance5. Eight (8) 10/100 Base TX RJ-45 Ports6. Shall support full/half duplex operation.



7. LED Link/Activity status indication.8. Store-and-Forward technology9. Auto senses speed and flow control10. Up to 1.6 Gb/s maximum throughput11. Industrial DIN-RAIL enclosure12. Redundant Power Inputs (10-30Vdc)13. Shock test in accordance with IEC 60068-2-27.14. Operation: 200 g @ 11 ms duration.15. Ambient temperature (operation) – 40 °C to 70 °C.16. Humidity: 10% to 95% non-condensing.

2.03 FIREWALL

A. Existing and is currently located in Control Room in Administration.

1. Coordinate IP Addressing scheme with City IT.2. Coordinate port configuration with City IT.3. Installed by System Supplier in existing Control Room PLC Panel as shown on

Drawings.

a. Verify form factor prior to installation.

4. Coordinate construction sequencing with Owner and City IT to minimize networkdowntime.

B. City IT Contact Information:

1. John LeBrunInformation Services ManagerCity of Eau Claire203 South Farwell StreetEau Claire, WI 54701phone: (715)839-5044fax: (715)[email protected]

2.04 SINGLE-MODE OPTICAL FIBER CABLES

A. Manufacturer:

1. Corning2. Approved Equal.

B. Fiber Characteristics

1. General Fiber Specifications:

a. All fibers in the cable must be usable and meet required specifications. Fiber shallbe suitable for indoor and outdoor use and protected:

i. Within stated temperature ratingsii. Against UV raysiii. From rodents

b. Each optical fiber shall be sufficiently free of surface imperfections and



inclusions to meet the optical, mechanical, and environmental requirements of thisspecification.

c. Fiber optic cable shall not utilize “gel” type cladding.d. Each optical fiber shall consist of a germania-doped silica core surrounded by a

concentric glass cladding. The fiber shall be a matched clad design.e. Each optical fiber shall be proof tested by the fiber manufacturer at a minimum of

100 kpsi (0.7 GN/m2).f. The fiber shall be coated with a dual layer acrylate protective coating. The coating shall be in physical contact with the cladding surface.g. The attenuation specification shall be a maximum value for each cabled fiber at

23dB ± 5dB per °C on the original shipping reel.

CorningFiber

FiberType

CoreDia.(µm)

Cladding

Diameter(µm)

Attenuation Mode FieldDiameter (MFD)

1310nm 1550nm 1310nm 1550nm

SMF-28e

StandardSingleMode

8.2 125.0 0.35 0.20 9.2 ±0.4 10.4 ± 0.5

C. Fiber Optic Cable Installation:

1. Do not exceed cable manufacturers minimum bend radius under tension or finalinstallation.

2. Cable tension:

a. Do not exceed cable manufacturer’s maximum tensile rating during cableinstallation.

b. No residual tension shall remain on cable after installation except that which is dueto cable's weight in vertical rise.

c. Cable tension shall be monitored during installation if winch is used for installation.Hand pulls do not require monitoring.

3. Vertical Rises:

a. Secure vertical cable at top of run.b. Attachment point shall comply with cable's minimum bend radius.c. Provide intermediate support when manufacturer specified maximum cable rise has

been reached.

4. Cable Splicing and Termination:

a. All fiber strands shall be terminated at both ends.b. Use of splices shall not cause attenuation of signal exceeding allowable attenuation

budget.c. Make no splices within conduit or duct banks. Make splices within pull boxes or

process control system equipment enclosures.

5. Fiber optic cable identification

a. Labels shall meet the legibility, defacement, exposure and adhesion requirements ofUL 969

b. Labeling shall conform to the requirements specified within ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A orto the requirements specified by the Owner.


2.05 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES

A. All fiber optic connector assemblies shall use high quality SC connectors installed withanaerobic adhesive on jacketed pigtails.

B. Assemblies shall be provided with control panels for field splicing to Plant-Wide DataHighway Cable upon installation of control panels.

C. Assemblies shall utilize a PC finish on the tip of the fiber to provide high yield duringsplicing, and to meet EIA and IEC standards for repeatability.

D. All connectors that are metallic in nature shall be corrosion proof and shall withstandminimum of 0.75 microns of corrosion per year.

2.06 FIBER DISTRIBUTION UNITS (PATCH PANELS)

A. Provide frame mounted One-Unit Combination Shelves for terminations, cross connection,interconnection, splicing and fiber identification for 24 strand singlemode fiber. Provideprotection from mechanical stress on the cable and fibers and from macro-bending losses.

B. Accessible from the front and rear and slide out to allow access from the top.

C. Provide fiber patch cords.

D. The connector panels will accommodate SC simplex and duplex connectors. The unit mustbe UL approved. The manufacturer must be ISO 9001 certified.

1. Lucent Technologies.2. Panduit OPTICOM

2.07 ENHANCED CAT 6 UTP CABLE

A. 4 pair Category 6 cables to conform to TIA/EIA 568A Commercial BuildingTelecommunications Cabling Standard, Horizontal Cable Section, and UL LANCertification and Follow-up Program. Cables shall be marked as UL verified Category 6.Applications standards supported should include, but be not limited to, IEEE 802.3, 1Base5,10BASE-T; IEEE 802.5, 4 Mbps, 16Mbps (328 ft [100m], 104 Workstations) and TP-PMD. Inaddition, these cables shall be capable of supporting evolving high-end applications such as100 Base -T and 52/155 Mbps ATM plus the added application of 1000 BASE-T GigabitEthernet.

B. Cable shall be round, and shall meet the following electrical requirements:

Attenuation (Guaranteed).

Frequency(MHz)

Attenuation(dB/100m)

1 2.04 4.010 6.4020 9.225 10.3

31.25 11.662.5 16.8100 21.7150 27.7


200 32.0310 41.3350 44.3

Near End Cross Talk (NEXT) (Guaranteed)

Frequency(MHz)

+ NEXT (dB)

1 624 5310 4720 4225 41

31.25 4062.5 35100 32150 30200 28310 25350 24

Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio (Guaranteed)

Frequency(MHz)

ACR (dB/90m)

0.772 72.41 70.64 59.88 53.810 51.716 47.120 44.825 42.4

31.25 39.862.5 30.8100 23.6155 15.7200 10.4255 4.8300 0.7

Structural Return Loss (Guaranteed)

Frequency(MHz)

SRL (dB)

1 23.04 23.010 23.020 23.025 22.0

31.25 21.062.5 21.0100 21.0150 19.0


200 19.0310 17.0350 16.0

2.08 UTP PATCH CORDS FOR EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES

A. Provide Category 6 Modular Patch Cords as follows:

1. Power sum rated.2. Patch cords shall not exceed 3 feet in length unless specifically required for application.3. Conform to the requirements of EIA/TIA 568B Commercial Building Telecommunications

Cabling Standard, Horizontal Cabling Section, and UL LAN Certification and Follow-upProgram.

4. Equipped with molded 8 pin modular connector (RJ45, 8x8) on each end and conform to thelength(s) specified on the detailed drawing.

5. Round, and 24-AWG copper, stranded conductors, tightly twisted into individual pairs.6. Built-in exclusion features to prevent accidental polarity reversals and split pairs.

B. UL Verified for EIA/TIA 568B Electrical Performance

C. UL and c (UL ) Listed for Fire Safety

D. ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer

E. Austel Approved

F. FCC Compliant

G. Lucent Technologies Patch Cord D8SA, Panduit, or equal.

2.09 DATA OUTLET – FRONT OF PANEL

A. Manufacturers

1. Grace Port2. Hubbel

B. Data Outlets shall provide the following features:

1. Flush Mount on Front of Panel.2. Polycarbonate cover.3. Data Jacks – RJ-45. Connect to Process VLAN4. 120VAC GFI receptacle powered from panel5. USB Port – connect to HMI computer6. NEMA rating (as specified for panel).

2.10 RACK ENCLOSURE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Middle Atlantic Products Inc.2. Belkin3. Dell

B. General:

1. 4-post, 29U Enclosure.


2. 20” Rack depth.3. 19” Rack Mounting Rails4. Sufficient Fan Capacity for Heat Load5. Capacity 400 lbs min.6. Leveling Feet or Wall Mount

C. Rack enclosure shall be mounted internal to existing 300-PLC-1 panel in the Control Room.

1. Coordinate installed devices in rack assuring proper clearances as the depth dimensionis a non-standard dimension due to its location within the PLC Panel.


3.01 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all labor, materials, tools, field-test instruments and equipment required for thecomplete testing, identification and administration of the work called for in the ContractDocuments.

B. In addition to the tests detailed in this document, the Contractor shall notify Owner of anyadditional testing that is deemed necessary to guarantee a fully functional system.

C. Testing procedure shall include testing the attenuation and polarity of the installed cable runswith an Optical Loss Test Set (OLTS) and the installed condition of the cabling system andits components with an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). The condition of thefiber endfaces shall also be verified.

D. Testing shall be performed on each cabling link (connector to connector).

E. Testing shall be performed on each cabling channel (equipment to equipment) that isidentified by the Owner. Testing shall not include any active devices or passive deviceswithin the link or channel other than cable, connectors, and splices, i.e. link attenutation doesnot include devices such as optical bypass switches, couplers, repeaters, or opticalamplifiers.

F. All tests shall be documented including OLTS dual wavelength attenuation measurementsfor multimode and singlemode links and channels and OTDR traces and event tables formultimode and singlemode links and channels.

G. Owner witness and/or review field testing.

H. Owner shall be notified of the start date of the testing phase five (5) business days beforetesting commences.

I. Owner may require a parallel random sample of 5% of the installed links. The results of thisparallel testing shall be stored in accordance with Part 3 of this document. The resultsobtained shall be compared to the data provided by the Contract. If more than 2% of theparallel test results differ in terms of the pass/fail determination, Contractor shall repeat100% testing at no cost to the Owner.

3.02 FIBER OPTIC CABLE ACCEPTANCE PARAMETERS AND TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Unless otherwise specified by Owner, each cabling link shall be in compliance with thefollowing test limits.

1. Optical Loss Testing Singlemode Links


a. The link attenuation shall be calculated by the following formulas as specified inANSI/TIA-568-C.0.

b. Link Attenuation(dB) = Cable_Attn(dB) + Connector_Attn(dB) +Splice_Attn(dB)

c. Cable_Attn(dB) = Attenuation_Coefficient (dB/km) * Length (km)

d. Connector_Attn(dB) = #_of_connector_pairs * connector_loss (dB)

e. Maximum allowable connector_loss = 0.75 dB

f. Splice_Attn(dB) = #_of_Splices * Splice_loss (dB)

g. Maximum allowable splice_loss = 0.3 dB

h. The values for the Attenuation_Coefficient (dB/km) are listed in the table table below.

Type of Optical Fiber Wavelength(nm)

Attenuationcoefficient(dB/km)

Wavelength(nm)

Attenuationcoefficient(dB/km)

Single-mode 9/125 µm 1310 0.4 1550 0.3

2. ODTR Testing Parameters

a. Reflective events (connections) shall not exceed 0.75 b. Non-Reflective events (splices) shall not exceed 0.3 dB

3. Magnified endface inspection

a. Fiber connections shall be visually inspected for endface qualityb. Scratched, pitted, or dirty connectors shall be diagnosed and corrected.

B. Any link or channel that fails the test requirements shall be diagnosed and corrected. Anycorrective action that must take place shall be documented and followed with a new test toprove that the corrected link or channel meets performance requirements. The final andpassing result of the tests for all links and channels shall be provided in the test resultsdocumentation as specified herein.

C. If one (1) pair of strands for each fiber optic cable are found to be broken the entire cableshall be abandoned, or removed, and a new cable shall be installed at no additional cost toOwner.

3.05 ADDITIONAL OPTICAL FIBER CABLE TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Link and channel test results from the OLTS and OTDR shall be recorded in the testinstrument upon completion of each test for subsequent uploading to a PC in which theadministrative documentation (reports) may be generated.

B. Fiber endfaces shall be inspected at 200X or 400X magnification. 200X magnification issuitable for inspecting multimode fibers. 400X magnification shall be used for examination ofsinglemode fibers. Scratched, pitted, or dirty connectors shall be corrected. Endface images


shall be recorded in the memory of the test instrument for subsequent uploading to a PC andreporting.

C. Testing of the cabling shall be performed using high quality test cords of the same fiber typeas the cabling being tested. The test cords for OLTS testing shall be between 1m and 5m inlength. The test cords for the OTDR testing shall be approximately 100m for the launchcable and at least 25m for the receive cable.

D. Optical loss testing on backbone links.

1. Multimode backbone links shall be tested at 850nm and 1300nm in accordance withANSI/EIA/TIA-526-14A, Method B, One Reference Jumper or the equivalent method.

2. Singlemode backbone links shall be tested at 1310nm and 1550nm in accordance withANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1, One Reference Jumper or the equivalent method.

3. Use the One Reference Jumper Method specified by ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-14A, Method B,and ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7, Method A.1 or the equivalent method. CONTRACTOR shallfollow the procedures established by these standards or application notes to accuratelyconduct performance testing.

E. OTDR Testing

1. Fiber links shall be tested at the appropriate operating wavelengths for anomalies and toensure uniformity of cable attenutation and connector insertion loss.

a. Singlemode: 1310nm and 1550nm

2. Each fiber link and channel shall be tested in both directions

3. A launch cable shall be installed between the OTDR and the first link connection.

4. A receive cable shall be installed after the last link connection.

F. Length Measurement

1. The length of each fiber shall be recorded.

2. It is preferable that the optical length be measured using an OLTS or OTDR.

G. Polarity Testing.

1. Paired duplex fibers in multi-fiber cables shall be tested to verify polarity in accordancewith clause E.5.3 of ANSI/TIA-568-C.0. The polarity of the paired duplex fibers shall beverified using an OLTS.

3.06 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TEST DOCUMENTATION

A. Test results documentation

1. Test results saved within the field test instrument shall be transferred into a Windows-based database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of thetest records. These test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e. “as saved inthe field test instrument”. The file format, CSV (comma separated value) does notprovide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used.


2. The test results documentation shall be available for inspection by the Owner during theinstallation and shall be provided to the Owner within 5 working days of completion oftests.

3. Test results shall be provided in an electronic database for each tested optical fiber andshall contain the following information.

a. The identification of the customer site as specified by the end user.b. The name of the test limit selected to execute the stored test results.c. The name of the personnel performing the test.d. The date and time the test results were saved in the memory of the

tester.e. The manufacturer, model and serial number of the field test instrument.f. The version of the test software and the version of the test limit database held within

the test instrument.g. The fiber identification numberh. The length for each optical fiber.i. Test results to include OLTS attenuation link and channel measurements at the

appropriate wavelengths and margin (difference between the measured attenuationand the test limit value).

j. Test results to include OTDR link and channel traces and event tables at theappropriate wavelengths.

k. The length for each optical fiber as calculated by the OTDRl. The overall Pass/Fail evaluation of the link-under-test for OLTS and OTDR

measurements.

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install and wire in accordance with System Integrator’s and/or Equipment manufacturer’swritten instructions and approved submittals, applicable requirements of the NEC, NECA“Standard of Installation”, and recognized industry practices.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)Project No. 12026 13456-1

SECTION 13456UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: UPS equipment.

B. Items specified in this section shall conform to general requirements of Section 13400.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to submittal requirements of Section 13400, provide:

1. Load sizing data for equipment connected to UPS for each installation.2. Descriptive literature and catalog cut sheets.3. Installation details.

1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Input power: 120VAC utility grade power.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 UPS EQUIPMENT

A. MANUFACTURER

1. APC2. Emerson3. Alpha

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. UPS shall power all PLC Control Panel devices.

B. Provide true on-line non switching uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Double powerconversion on-line operation including rectifier and inverter, constantly conditioned ACoutput.

C. Provide make-before-break manually operated bypass switch or other means to bypass UPSto allow operation of system controls in event of UPS failure.

D. Each system shall consist of a static dc to ac sine wave inverter, a battery charger, sealedbatteries, a monitor and transfer switch, and accessories as listed below.

E. Size for 125% of connected electrical load.

F. Each system shall operate on a 120-volt, 60-Hz ac branch circuit. The input ac circuit shallsupply energy to the battery charger which shall supply energy to the inverter as well as tothe battery to maintain its charge. The output of the inverter shall supply energy to the load.If the input ac circuit is interrupted, the inverter shall continue to supply energy to the loadwithout interruption, drawing power from the battery. If the input ac circuit is restored prior todischarge of the battery, the charger shall resume the supply of energy to the inverter and

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) Donohue & Associates, Inc.13456-2 Project No. 12026

shall restore the battery to full charge. In the event of malfunction of the battery charger,battery or inverter that results in interruption of the output from the inverter, the monitor shalldetect this condition and shall automatically transfer the load to the system's ac input circuitwithin 25 milliseconds. After the malfunction is corrected, the load shall be retransferred tothe inverter manually.

G. System output voltage shall be regulated within plus or minus 5 percent of 120 volts andfrequency stability shall be plus or minus 1/2 percent of 60-Hz. The output characteristicshall be sinusoidal with not more than 5 percent total harmonic distortion at full load withinput ac circuit at 120 volts. For a 20 percent instantaneous load change, voltage overshootor undershoot shall be not more than plus or minus 10 percent. For a 10 to 90 percent loadchange, recovery time shall be not longer than 100 milliseconds.

H. Input protection shall be provided by a panel-mount circuit breaker. Each inverter shall bethe load current-limiting type and each shall have overload and short circuit protectionprovided by a circuit breaker. Efficiency shall be 75 percent for the inverter and 85 percentfor the battery charger minimum.

I. UPS shall supply power to PLC, HMI, Ethernet Switches, DC power supplies, fieldinstruments, and other low voltage control devices as specified and as shown on Drawingsand Plans.

J. UPS shall power the Motor Protection Relays used to protect submersible pumps.

K. UPS shall have enough capacity to power these devices for a period of 30 minutes after theutility power has failed. Provide with extended battery module(s) to meet this requirement.

L. UPS shall have Ethernet communications ability (RJ-45, 10/100 Base-T).

1. System Integrator shall coordinate UPS status signals that shall be transmitted to PLCand HMI for Operator interrogation with Owner and Engineer.

M. Minimum UPS size shall be 1000 VA.

N. Standard Tower Form Factor shall be used unless stated otherwise on Drawings orSpecifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Condition power as required to provide stable process control system operation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install and wire in accordance with System Integrator and/or Equipment manufacturer’swritten instructions.

B. Install internal to PLC Panel.

1. Additional batteries (if required based on load sizing above) may be installed external toPLC Panel upon Owner and Engineer approval.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. FIELD INSTRUMENTATIONProject No. 12026 13481-1

SECTION 13481FIELD INSTRUMENTATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Items specified in this section shall conform to general requirements of Section 13400 –Process Instrumentation and Control.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL (I&C) EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment provided in this section shall conform to following.

1. Analysis Instrumentation: Section 13423.2. Flow Instrumentation: Section 13424.3. Level Instrumentation: Section 13425.4. Pressure Instrumentation: Section 13426.5. Temperature Instrumentation: Section 13427.6. Miscellaneous Field Devices: Section 13429.7. Control Panel Construction: Section 13431.8. Miscellaneous Control Panel Devices: Section 13441.

B. Provide equipment as listed below and as shown on Drawings.

2.02 CONTROL STATIONS – DEFINITIONS, TYPES A - I (Ref. Section 13441)

A. HAND/OFF/AUTO, RUN, E-STOP: One 3-position selector switch with 3 contact blocks(XOO/OXO/OOX) for HOA functionality. One indicating light (green) to display equipmentrunning. One NC maintained contact mushroom-head pushbutton for e-stop.

B. HAND/OFF/AUTO, RUN, FAIL, E-STOP: One 3-position selector switch with 3 contactblocks (XOO/OXO/OOX) for HOA functionality. One indicating light (green) to displayequipment running. One indicating light (red) to display equipment fail. One NC maintainedcontact mushroom-head pushbutton for e-stop.

C. HAND/OFF/AUTO, RUN, E-STOP, POT: One 3-position selector switch with 3 contactblocks (XOO/OXO/OOX) for HOA functionality. One indicating light (green) to displayequipment running. One NC maintained contact mushroom-head pushbutton for e-stop. Onepotentiometer for local control of VFD.

D. HAND/OFF/AUTO, RUN, FAIL, E-STOP, POT: One 3-position selector switch with 3 contactblocks (XOO/OXO/OOX) for HOA functionality. One indicating light (green) to displayequipment running. One indicating light (red) to display equipment fail. One NC maintainedcontact mushroom-head pushbutton for e-stop. One potentiometer for local control of VFD.

E. HAND/OFF/AUTO, RUN, E-STOP, VALVE DIG/MIX: One 3-position selector switch with 3contact blocks (XOO/OXO/OOX) for HOA functionality. One indicating light (green) todisplay equipment running. One NC maintained contact mushroom-head pushbutton for e-stop. One 2-position selector switch with 2 contact blocks (XO/OX) for placing valve indesired position.

FIELD INSTRUMENTATION Donohue & Associates, Inc.13481-2 Project No. 12026

F. HAND/OFF/AUTO, FOR/OFF/REV, E-STOP, CURRENT INDICATOR: Two 3-positionselector switch with 3 contact blocks (XOO/OXO/OOX) for HOA and FOR functionality. OneNC maintained contact mushroom-head pushbutton for e-stop. One current indicator (looppowered), LED display for displaying motor current as a percent of total.

G. E-STOP: One NC maintained contact mushroom-head pushbutton for e-stop.

H. HAND/OFF/AUTO, RUN, E-STOP, GFCI-120V: One 3-position selector switch with 3contact blocks (XOO/OXO/OOX) for HOA functionality. One indicating light (green) todisplay equipment running. One NC maintained contact mushroom-head pushbutton for e-stop. One GFCI 120V weatherproof duplex outlet mounted on side of enclosure.

I. HAND/OFF/AUTO, FWD/OFF/REV, BATCH INITIATE, E-STOP: Two 3-position selectorswitch with 3 contact blocks (XOO/OXO/OOX) for HOA and FOR functionality. One normallyopen momentary pushbutton for Batch Initiate. One NC maintained contact mushroom-headpushbutton for e-stop.

J. BOILER ROOM E-STOP: One 2NC/1NO break glass maintained contact illuminatedpushbutton for e-stop.

2.03 CONTROL STATIONS (Ref. Section 13431)

A. Provide control stations as defined in CONTROL STATIONS – TYPES above. Mountoperators in common control station enclosures with specified rating.

Tag Equipment Type NEMARating

400-CS-0301 Screw Pump 1 Control Station A 7400-CS-0302 Screw Pump 2 Control Station A 7400-CS-0303 Screw Pump 3 Control Station A 7405-CS-0411 Conveyer Control Panel A 7*405-CS-0501 Screenings Washer/Compactor Control Station I 7405-HS-0503 Remote E-Stop G 7405-CS-0601 Grit Pump 1 Control Station A 7405-CS-0602 Grit Pump 2 Control Station A 7405-CS-0611 Grit Classifier Control Station A 7405-CS-0621 Grit Blower 1 Control Station A 7405-CS-0622 Grit Blower 2 Control Station A 7405-CS-2201 Sludge Screen No. 1 Control Station F 7405-CS-2202 Sludge Screen No. 2 Control Station F 7405-CS-5701 Effluent Heating Pump Control Station A 7405-CS-5702 Glycol Pump Control Station A 7420-CS-0801 Drive Mechanism 1 Control Station H 4X420-CS-0802 Drive Mechanism 2 Control Station H 4X420-CS-0803 Drive Mechanism 3 Control Station H 4X420-CS-0804 Drive Mechanism 4 Control Station H 4X420-CS-0811 Scum Dipper 1 Control Station A 4X420-CS-0812 Scum Dipper 2 Control Station A 4X


420-CS-0813 Scum Dipper 3 Control Station A 4X420-CS-0814 Scum Dipper 4 Control Station A 4X420-CS-0821 Primary Scum Pump Control Station E 4X420-CS-2101 Primary Sludge Pump 1 Control Station C 4X420-CS-2102 Primary Sludge Pump 2 Control Station C 4X420-CS-2103 Primary Sludge Pump 3 Control Station C 4X420-CS-2104 Primary Sludge Pump 4 Control Station C 4X431-CS-1001A Mixer 1A Control Station A 4X431-CS-1001B Mixer 1B Control Station A 4X431-CS-1001C Mixer 1C Control Station A 4X431-CS-1001D Mixer 1D Control Station A 4X431-CS-1001E Mixer 1EControl Station A 4X431-CS-1001F Mixer 1F Control Station A 4X431-CS-1011 RAS Denite Pump 1 Control Station C 4X431-CS-1012 ML Denite Pump 1 Control Station C 4X432-CS-1202A Mixer 2A Control Station A 4X432-CS-1202B Mixer 2B Control Station A 4X432-CS-1202C Mixer 2C Control Station A 4X432-CS-1202D Mixer 2D Control Station A 4X432-CS-1202E Mixer 2E Control Station A 4X432-CS-1202F Mixer 2F Control Station A 4X432-CS-1212 RAS Denite Pump 2 Control Station C 4X432-CS-1213 ML Denite Pump 2 Control Station C 4X451-CS-1801 Final Settling Tank 1 Control Station A 4X452-CS-1802 Final Settling Tank 2 Control Station A 4X453-CS-1803 Final Settling Tank 3 Control Station A 4X455-CS-2001 Basin Drain Pump Control Station C 4X455-CS-2401 RAS Pump 1 Control Station C 4X455-CS-2402 RAS Pump 2 Control Station C 4X455-CS-2403 RAS Pump 3 Control Station C 4X455-CS-2404 RAS Pump 4 Control Station C 4X455-CS-2501 WAS GBT Feed Pump 1 Control Station C 4X**455-CS-2502 WAS GBT Feed Pump 2 Control Station C 4X455-CS-2503 WAS GBT Feed Pump 3 Control Station C 4X455-CS-3001 TWAS Pump 1 Control Station C 4X**455-CS-3002 TWAS Pump 2 Control Station C 4X455-CS-4503 TDSD Pump Control Station C 4X455-CS-5601 Filtrate Pump 1 Control Station C 4X455-CS-5602 Filtrate Pump 2 Control Station C 4X455-CS-5611 Filtrate EQ Pump Control Station C 4X455-CS-5621 Filtrate Equalization Mixer Control Station A 4X


510-CS-3401 Digester 1 Recirc Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-3402 Digester 2 Recirc Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-3412 Digester ½ Recirc Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-3503 Digester 3 Recirc Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-3601 DSD GBT 1 Feed Pump Control Station C 4X510-CS-3602 DSD GBT 2 Feed Pump Control Station C 4X510-CS-3613 Sludge Transfer Pump No. 1 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4001 Generator No. 1 Hex Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-4002 Generator No. 2 Hex Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-4101 Digester No. 1 Hex Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-4102 Digester No. 2 Hex Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-4103 Digester No. 3 Hex Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-4201 Boiler Pump No. 1 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4202 Boiler Pump No. 2 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4203 Boiler Pump No. 3 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4204 Boiler Pump No. 4 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4301 Heating Pump 1 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4302 Heating Pump 2 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4303 Heating Pump 3 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4304 Heating Pump 4 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4305 Heating Pump 5 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4306 Heating Pump 6 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4307 Heating Pump 7 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4308 Heating Pump 8 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4321 Primary Hot Water Pump No. 1 Control Station A 4X510-CS-4322 Primary Hot Water Pump No. 2 Control Station A 4X510-CS-5701 Effluent Heating Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-5702 Glycol Pump Control Station A 4X510-CS-5801 Low Pressure W3 Pump No. 1 Control Station C 4X510-CS-5802 Low Pressure W3 Pump No. 2 Control Station C 4X510-CS-5901 W3 Pump No.1 Control Station C 4X510-CS-5902 W3 Pump No.2 Control Station C 4X510-CS-5903 W3 Pump No.3 Control Station C 4X510-CS-5904 W3 Pump No.4 Control Station C 4X

510-HS-3721 Boiler Room E-Stop J 4X





521-CS-3201 Digester Mixer No. 1 Control Station B 7522-CS-3202 Digester Mixer No. 2 Control Station B 7


523-CS-3303 Digester Mixer No. 3 Control Station D 4X524-CS-3304 Sludge Storage Tank Mixer No. 4 Control Station D 4X701-CS-0701 OA Blower Control Station C 4X* Provide if Owner selects Huber as Screenings Washer/Compactor manufacturer.** Provide if Owner selects Alternate 5.

2.04 (A5) ORP ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER (Ref. Section 13423)Tag Location Range (mV)

431-AE/AIT-1001A Selector Zone 1A +/- 2000431-AE/AIT-1001F Selector Zone 1F +/- 2000432-AE/AIT-1202A Selector Zone 2A +/- 2000432-AE/AIT-1202F Selector Zone 2F +/- 2000

2.05 (A7) pH ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER (Ref. Section 13423)Tag Location Range (pH)

431-AE/AIT-1101 Aerobic Zone 1B 0-14432-AE/AIT-1301 Aerobic Zone 2B 0-14

2.06 (A10) GAS DETECTION (Ref. Section 13423)

Tag Location Gas Sensed Range (% LEL)405-AE/AIT-6101 Headworks – Lower Level Combustible 0-100405-AE/AIT-6102 Headworks – Upper Level Combustible 0-100405-AE/AIT-6103 Headworks – Upper Level Combustible 0-100455-AE/AIT-6201 Solids Building – WAS Thickening Room Combustible 0-100455-AE/AIT-6202 Solids Building – DSD Thickening Room Combustible 0-100455-AE/AIT-6203 Solids Building – Solids Pump Gallery Combustible 0-100510-AE/AIT-6231 Digester Building – Lower Level Combustible 0-100510-AE/AIT-6232 Digester Building – H2S Removal Room Combustible 0-100510-AE/AIT-6233 Digester Building – Boiler Room Combustible 0-100510-AE/AIT-6234 Digester Building – Generator Room Combustible 0-100510-AE/AIT-6235 Digester Building – Boiler Room (south) Combustible 0-100510-AE/AIT-6236 Digester Building – Digester Gas Room Combustible 0-100

2.07 (A12) ORTHO-PHOSPHATE ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER (Ref. Section 13423)Tag Location Range (mg/L)

510-AE/AIT-5811 Plant Effluent Low Pressure W3 System 0.03-3 (lo)0.1-6.0 (hi)

2.08 (A21) DISSOLVED OXYGEN ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER (Ref. Section 13423)Tag Location Range (mg/L)

Tag Location Gas Sensed Range (% O2)405-AE/AIT-6111 Headworks Building – Lower Level Oxygen 0-25510-AE/AIT-6261 Digester Building – Lower Level Oxygen 0-25510-AE/AIT-6262 Digester Building – H2S Removal Room Oxygen 0-25510-AE/AIT-6263 Digester Building – Boiler Room Oxygen 0-25510-AE/AIT-6264 Digester Building – Generator Room Oxygen 0-25510-AE/AIT-6265 Digester Building – Boiler Room (south) Oxygen 0-25510-AE/AIT-6266 Digester Building – Digester Gas Room Oxygen 0-25


431-AE/AIT-1111 Aeration Basin 1 Aerobic Zone 1A 0-10 mg/L431-AE/AIT-1112 Aeration Basin 1 Aerobic Zone 1B 0-10 mg/L431-AE/AIT-1113 Aeration Basin 1 Aerobic Zone 1C 0-10 mg/L432-AE/AIT-1321 Aeration Basin 2 Aerobic Zone 2A 0-10 mg/L432-AE/AIT-1322 Aeration Basin 2 Aerobic Zone 2B 0-10 mg/L432-AE/AIT-1323 Aeration Basin 2 Aerobic Zone 2C 0-10 mg/L

2.09 (A28) AMMONIUM ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER (Ref. Section 13423)Tag Location Range (mg/L)

432-AE/AIT-1331 Aerobic Zone 1F 1-1290 (hi)0.1-129 (lo)

2.10 (A29) SLUDGE BLANKET ANALYZER/TRANSMITTER (Ref. Section 13423)Tag Location Range (Ft)

505-AE/AIT-2301 Gravity Thickener 0-23

2.11 (F4) MAGNETIC FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER (Ref. Section 13424)

Tag Description Service Pipe Dia.(in) Liner Range

431-FE/FIT-1001 RAS - Train 1 Flow Sludge 12 Hard Rubber 0-6 mgd432-FE/FIT-1202 RAS - Train 2 Flow Sludge 12 Hard Rubber 0-6 mgd420-FE/FIT-2111 Primary Sludge Flow Sludge 4 Hard Rubber 0-1.1 mgd455-FE/FIT-2411 RAS Pump No. 1 Flow Sludge 10 Hard Rubber 0-4 mgd455-FE/FIT-2412 RAS Pump No. 2 Flow Sludge 10 Hard Rubber 0-4 mgd455-FE/FIT-2413 RAS Pump No. 3 Flow Sludge 10 Hard Rubber 0-4 mgd455-FE/FIT-2414 RAS Pump No. 4 Flow Sludge 10 Hard Rubber 0-4 mgd

455-FE/FIT-2531WAS GBT Feed Pump 1Flow

Sludge 8 Hard Rubber 0-1.3 mgd

**455-FE/FIT-2532WAS GBT Feed Pump 2

Flow Sludge 8 Hard Rubber 0-1.3 mgd

455-FE/FIT-2533WAS GBT Feed Pump 3Flow

Sludge 8 Hard Rubber 0-1.3 mgd

455-FE/FIT-2541 DSD Flow Sludge 6 Hard Rubber 0-1.3 mgd455-FE/FIT-3031 TWAS Flow Sludge 6 Hard Rubber 0-300 gpm455-FE/FIT-5601 Filtrate Flow Filtrate 10 Hard Rubber 0-2.88 mgd510-FE/FIT-5851 W3L Flow W3 6 Polyurethane 0-1.0 mgd510-FE/FIT-5951 High Pressure W3 Flow W3 6 Polyurethane 0-1.0 mgd** Provide if Owner selects Alternate 5.

2.12 (F12) FLOW SWITCH, PADDLE (Ref. Section 13424)

Tag Description Service Pipe Dia.(in)

Setting(GPH)

455-FSL-1903 SHC Filamentous Low Flow SHC 2 1455-FSL-1912 SHC Low Flow SHC 2 10455-FS-1980 Eyewash Station Flow Switch W1 1-1/2 Minimum500-FSL-3101 Liquid Polymer Low Flow 1 Polymer 1 15**500-FSL-3102 Liquid Polymer Low Flow 2 Polymer 1 15500-FSL-3103 Liquid Polymer Low Flow 3 Polymer 1 15435-FS-5501 Eyewash Station Flow Switch W1 1/2 Minimum** Provide if Owner selects Alternate 5.


2.13 (F20) FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, ULTRASONIC (Ref. Section 13424)

Tag Description Setting(MGD)

405-LE/LIT-0321 Plant Influent Parshall Flume Flow 0-30

2.14 (F23) FLOW ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, THERMAL DISPERSION (Ref. Section13424)

Tag Description Class 1Div 1

Setting(SCFM)

431-FE/FIT-1111 Aerobic Zone 1A Air Flow No 0-5000431-FE/FIT-1112 Aerobic Zone 1B Air Flow No 0-3000431-FE/FIT-1113 Aerobic Zone 1C Air Flow No 0-2000432-FE/FIT-1321 Aerobic Zone 2A Air Flow No 0-5000432-FE/FIT-1322 Aerobic Zone 2B Air Flow No 0-3000432-FE/FIT-1323 Aerobic Zone 2C Air Flow No 0-2000510-FE/FIT-3701 Biogas/NG Boiler No. 1 BG Flow Yes 0-100510-FE/FIT-3702 Biogas/NG Boiler No. 2 BG Flow Yes 0-100510-FE/FIT-3791 Biogas Flow Yes 0-200510-FE/FIT-3792 Waste Gas Flow Yes 0-200

510-FE/FIT-3832 Biogas/NG Generator No. 1 BG SupplyFlow Yes 0-105

510-FE/FIT-3833* Biogas/NG Generator No. 2 BG SupplyFlow Yes 0-105

* If Owner selects Alternate 1, provide Biogas/NG Generator No. 2 and all associated equipment, piping,wiring and controls.

2.15 (L1) LEVEL SWITCH, RF ADMITTANCE (Ref. Section 13425)Tag Location Insertion (shaft) Length (IN)

455-LSH-1931 SHC Area Flood 36510-LSH-2799 Basement Sight Well Flood 36500-LSH-3131 Polymer Area Flood 36

2.16 (L3) LEVEL SWITCH, FREQUENCY SHIFT TUNING FORK (Ref. Section13425)

Tag Location405-LSH-0601 Grit Classifier Level High

2.17 (L5) LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, ULTRASONIC (Ref. Section13425)Tag Location Range (FT)

455-LE/LIT-5611 Filtrate EQ Level 0-20455-LE/LIT-5622 Filtrate Level 0-20455-LE/LT-1901 SHC Tank No. 1 Level 0-9455-LE/LT-1902 SHC Tank No. 2 Level 0-9455-LE/LT-1903 SHC Tank No. 3 Level 0-9455-LE/LT-2001 Basin Drain Wetwell Level 0-36

2.18 (L8) LEVEL SWITCH, BALL FLOAT (Ref. Section 13425)Tag Location Setting (Elev)

400-LSHH-0301 RWW Influent Channel Level High-High Alarm 758.00


400-LSH-0301 RWW Influent Channel Level High-High Lag On 756.00455-LSHH-2001 Basin Drain Wetwell High High 770.00455-LSH-2001 Basin Drain Wetwell Pump On 747.75455-LSL-2001 Basin Drain Wetwell Pump Off 741.00460-LSLL-2621 Final Scum Wetwell Low Level 762.00455-LSHH-5611 Filtrate EQ High High 770.00455-LSH-5611 Filtrate EQ Pump On 769.40455-LSL-5611 Filtrate EQ Mixer On/Off 754.00455-LSLL-5611 Filtrate EQ Pump Off 752.00455-LSL-5622 Filtrate Pumps Off 752.33455-LSH-5622 Filtrate Pumps On - 50% 758.58455-LSHH-5622 Filtrate High High 768.00

2.19 (L10) ELECTRONIC FLANGE MOUNTED LEVEL TRANSMITTER (Ref. Section 13425)Tag Location Range (FT)

455-LE/LIT-3001 TWAS Hopper No. 1 Level 0-16**455-LE/LIT-3002 TWAS Hopper No. 2 Level 0-16455-LE/LIT-4503 TDSD Hopper Level 0-16** Provide if Owner selects Alternate 5.

2.20 (L12) LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, SUBMERSIBLE (Ref. Section 13425)Tag Location Range (FT)

400-LE/LT-0301 RWW Influent Channel Level 0-10431-LE/LT-1001A Selector Zone 1A Level 0-25431-LE/LT-1001B Selector Zone 1B Level 0-25432-LE/LT-1202A Selector Zone 2A Level 0-25432-LE/LT-1202B Selector Zone 2B Level 0-25460-LE/LT-2621 Final Scum Wetwell Level 0-10510-LE/LT-2701 W-1 Dewatering Well Level 0-23455-LE/LT-2702 W-2 Dewatering Well Level 0-23500-LE/LT-2704 W-4 Dewatering Well Level 0-23500-LE/LT-2705 W-5 Dewatering Well Level 0-23455-LE/LT-2706 W-6 Dewatering Well Level 0-23455-LE/LT-2707 W-7 Dewatering Well Level 0-23

2.21 (L19) LEVEL ELEMENT AND TRANSMITTER, MICROWAVE RADAR (Ref. Section 13425)Tag Location Range (FT)

431-LE/LIT-09E1 PE Channel Weir Gate Level (volume) 0-4.75523-LE/LIT-3303L Digester No. 3 Foam Level – Provide Radio 0-55523-LE/LIT-3303C Digester No. 3 Cover Level 0-16524-LE/LIT-3304C Storage Tank No. 4 Level 0-75701-LE/LIT-0711 Bio-filter Sump Level – Provide PDVF Coated Antenna 0-7

2.22 (M31) INTERIOR/EXTERIOR MOUNTED ALARM LIGHTS (Ref. Section 13429)Tag Location Controlled By: NEMA

Rating405-YL-6101 Headworks – Upper Level – Screw Pump Room 405-AE/AIT-6102/6103 7405-YL-6102 Headworks – Upper Level Grit/Screening Room 405-AE/AIT-6102/6103 7405-YL-6103 Headworks – Upper Level NW Entrance 405-AE/AIT-6102/6103 7405-YL-6104 Headworks – Upper Level Pump Room Entrance 405-AE/AIT-6102/6103 7405-YL-6105 Headworks – Upper Level W Entrance 405-AE/AIT-6102/6103 7


405-YL-6111 Headworks – Lower Level Garage 405-AE/AIT-6101/6111 7405-YL-6112 Headworks – Lower Level SW Entrance 405-AE/AIT-6101/6111 7

455-YL-6211Solids Bldg – WAS Thickening Room NWEntrance

455-AE/AIT-6201/6202 4X

455-YL-6212Solids Bldg – WAS Thickening Room SWEntrance

455-AE/AIT-6201/6202 4X

455-YL-6213 Solids Bldg – WAS Thickening Room S Entrance 455-AE/AIT-6201/6202 4X455-YL-6214 Solids Bldg – DSD Thickening Room E Entrance 455-AE/AIT-6201/6202 4X455-YL-6215 Solids Bldg – DSD Thickening Room N Entrance 455-AE/AIT-6201/6202 4X455-YL-6216 Solids Bldg – WAS Thickening Room 455-AE/AIT-6201/6202 4X455-YL-6217 Solids Bldg – DSD thickening Room 455-AE/AIT-6201/6202 4X455-YL-6221 Solids Bldg – Solids Pump Gallery Center Column 455-AE/AIT-6203 4X455-YL-6222 Solids Bldg – Solids Pump Gallery South Wall 455-AE/AIT-6203 4X510-YL-6240 Dig. Complex – Digester Gas Room E Entrance 510-AE/AIT-6236/6266 7510-YL-6241 Dig. Complex – H2S Removal Room W Entrance 510-AE/AIT-6232/6262 7510-YL-6242 Dig. Complex – H2S Removal Room Wall 510-AE/AIT-6232/6262 7510-YL-6243 Dig. Complex – Boiler Room E Entrance 510-AE/AIT-6233/6263 4X510-YL-6244 Dig. Complex – Boiler Room Column 510-AE/AIT-6233/6263 4X510-YL-6245 Dig. Complex – Boiler Room W Entrance 510-AE/AIT-6233/6263 4X

510-YL-6246Dig. Complex – Boiler Room SupernatantEntrance

510-AE/AIT-6233/6263 4X

510-YL-6247 Dig. Complex – Boiler Room Column 510-AE/AIT-6233/6263 4X510-YL-6248 Dig. Complex – Generator Room Column 510-AE/AIT-6234/6264 4X510-YL-6249 Dig. Complex – Generator Room E Entrance 510-AE/AIT-6234/6264 4X510-YL-6250 Dig. Complex – Digester Gas Room Column 510-AE/AIT-6236/6266 7510-YL-6251 Dig. Complex – Lower Level Wall Corner 510-AE/AIT-6231/6261 4X510-YL-6252 Dig. Complex – Lower Level Heat Pump 2 Column 510-AE/AIT-6231/6261 4X

2.23 (M43) TRANSMITTER CABINETS (Ref. Section 13431)

A. Environmental protection for externally mounted transmitters.B. Transmitters specified elsewhere in Section 13481 - Field Instrumentation.C. Framed polycarbonate window in housing door or cover.D. 40 watt panel heater with adjustable thermostat.E. Circuit breakers (2) for transmitter and panel.F. Provide additional circuit breaker for heat trace if required.

Tag Equipment Transmitter(s) NEMA Rating

431-TX-1001A Selector Zone 1A/1F ORP 431-AIT-1001A 4X431-AIT-1001F431-TX-1101 Aerobic Zone 1B pH 431-AIT-1101 4X431-TX-1111 Aerobic Zone 1A DO 431-AIT-1111 4X431-TX-1112 Aerobic Zone 1B DO 431-AIT-1112 4X431-TX-1113 Aerobic Zone 1C DO 431-AIT-1113 4X

432-TX-1202A Selector Zone 2A/2F ORP 432-AIT-1202A 4X432-AIT-1202F432-TX-1301 Aerobic Zone 2B pH 432-AIT-1301 4X432-TX-1321 Aerobic Zone 2A DO 432-AIT-1311 4X432-TX-1322 Aerobic Zone 2B DO 432-AIT-1312 4X432-TX-1323 Aerobic Zone 2C DO 432-AIT-1313 4X432-TX-1331 Aeration Basin Effluent NH4 432-AIT-1331 4X


2.24 (P3) DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER (Ref. Section 13426)Tag Location Range

701-DPIT-0721 1st Stage Media Differential Pressure 0-10 inch WC701-DPIT-0722 2nd Stage Media Differential Pressure 0-10 inch WC510-DPIT-3801 H2S Removal Vessel 0-15 inch WC510-DPIT-3821 Siloxane Removal Vessel No. 1 0-5 psi510-DPIT-3822 Siloxane Removal Vessel No. 2 0-5 psi

2.25 (P4) PRESSURE GAUGE/INDICATOR (Ref. Section 13426)Tag Location Seal Type Range

*405-PI-0502 Washer Compactor W3 Supply Pressure Diaphragm 0-130 psi455-PI-1900 SHC Header Pressure Diaphragm 0-30 psi455-PI-1901 SHC Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-30 psi455-PI-1902 SHC Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-30 psi455-PI-1903 SHC Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-30 psi455-PI-2401S RAS Pump No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 psi455-PI-2402S RAS Pump No. 2 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 psi455-PI-2403S RAS Pump No. 3 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 psi455-PI-2404S RAS Pump No. 4 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 psi455-PI-2401D RAS Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi455-PI-2402D RAS Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi455-PI-2403D RAS Pump No. 3 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi455-PI-2404D RAS Pump No. 4 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi455-PI-2521 WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi**455-PI-2522 WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi455-PI-2523 WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 3 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi460-PI-2601S Final Scum Pump No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 30 in Hg–15 psi460-PI-2602S Final Scum Pump No. 2 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 30 in Hg–15 psi460-PI-2603S Final Scum Mixing Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 30 in Hg–15 psi460-PI-2601D Final Scum Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 psi460-PI-2602D Final Scum Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 psi460-PI-2603D Final Scum Mixing Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 psi510-PI-2701 W-1 Dewatering Well Pump Discharge Pressure None 0-15 psi455-PI-2702 W-2 Dewatering Well Pump Discharge Pressure None 0-15 psi500-PI-2704 W-4 Dewatering Well Pump Discharge Pressure None 0-15 psi500-PI-2705 W-5 Dewatering Well Pump Discharge Pressure None 0-15 psi455-PI-2706 W-6 Dewatering Well Pump Discharge Pressure None 0-15 psi455-PI-2707 W-7 Dewatering Well Pump Discharge Pressure None 0-15 psi455-PI-3021 TWAS Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Annular 0-200 psi**455-PI-3022 TWAS Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Annular 0-200 psi523-PI-3303S Digester Mixing Pump 3 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 30 in Hg–60 psi523-PI-3304S Sludge Storage Tank Mixing Pump 4 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 30 in Hg–60 psi523-PI-3303D Digester Tank Mixing Pump 3 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi

523-PI-3304DSludge Storage Tank Mixing Pump 4 OutletPressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi

510-PI-3401D PI Digester No. 1 Recirc Pump Diaphragm 30 in Hg–50 psi510-PI-3401S PI Digester No. 1 Recirc Pump Diaphragm 30 in Hg–50 psi510-PI-3402D PI Digester No. 2 Recirc Pump Diaphragm 30 in Hg–50 psi510-PI-3402S PI Digester No. 2 Recirc Pump Diaphragm 30 in Hg–50 psi510-PI-3411H PI Digester No. 1 HEX Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-3411C PI Digester No. 1 HEX Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-3412D PI Digester No. 1/2 Recirc Pump Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-3412S PI Digester No. 1/2 Recirc Pump Diaphragm 0-30 psi


510-PI-3412H PI Digester No. 2 HEX Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-3412C PI Digester No. 2 HEX Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-3503D Digester No. 3 Recirc Pump Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-3503S Digester No. 3 Recirc Pump Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-3533H PI Digester No. 3 HEX Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-3533C PI Digester No. 3 HEX Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-3601D DSD GBT Feed Pump No. 1 Discharge Annular 0-100 psi510-PI-3602D DSD GBT Feed Pump No. 2 Discharge Annular 0-100 psi

510-PI-3601S DSD GBT Feed Pump No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 30 in Hg–100psi

510-PI-3602S DSD GBT Feed Pump No. 2 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 30 in Hg–100psi

510-PI-3613D Sludge Transfer Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-50 psi510-PI-3613S Sludge Transfer Pump No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 30 in Hg-60 psi510-PI-3701B Boiler No. 1 Biogas Pressure Diaphragm 0-1 psi510-PI-3701N Boiler No. 1 Natural Gas Pressure Diaphragm 0-1 psi510-PI-3702B Boiler No. 2 Biogas Pressure Diaphragm 0-1 psi510-PI-3702N Boiler No. 2 Natural Gas Pressure Diaphragm 0-1 psi510-PI-3703 Natural Gas Boiler No. 3 Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-3704 Natural Gas Boiler No. 4 Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-3774 Waste Gas Burner Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 inch WC510-PI-3911 Biogas Generator No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-3912 Biogas Generator No. 2 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-4001S Generator No. 1 HEX Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4001D Generator No. 1 HEX Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4002S Generator No. 2 HEX Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4002D Generator No. 2 HEX Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4011S Generator No. 1 HEX Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4011D Generator No. 1 HEX Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4022S Generator No. 2 HEX Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4022D Generator No. 2 HEX Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4101D Digester No. 1 HEX Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4101S Digester No. 1 HEX Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4102D Digester No. 2 HEX Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4102S Digester No. 2 HEX Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4103D Digester No. 3 HEX Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4103S Digester No. 3 HEX Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4111 Digester No. 1 HEX Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4112 Digester No. 2 HEX Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4113 Digester No. 3 HEX Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4121 Digester No. 1 HEX Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4122 Digester No. 2 HEX Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4123 Digester No. 3 HEX Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4201D Boiler Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4201S Boiler Pump No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4202D Boiler Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4202S Boiler Pump No. 2 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4203D Boiler Pump No. 3 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4203S Boiler Pump No. 3 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4204D Boiler Pump No. 4 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4204S Boiler Pump No. 4 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4211D Biogas and Natural Gas Boiler 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4212D Biogas and Natural Gas Boiler 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4213D Natural Gas Boiler 3 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi


510-PI-4214D Natural Gas Boiler 4 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4301Q Heating Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4301D Heating Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4301S Heating Pump No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4302Q Heating Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4302D Heating Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4302S Heating Pump No. 2 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4303Q Heating Pump No. 3 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4303D Heating Pump No. 3 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4303S Heating Pump No. 3 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4304Q Heating Pump No. 4 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4304D Heating Pump No. 4 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4304S Heating Pump No. 4 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4305Q Heating Pump No. 5 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4305D Heating Pump No. 5 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4305S Heating Pump No. 5 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4306Q Heating Pump No. 6 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4306D Heating Pump No. 6 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4306S Heating Pump No. 6 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4307Q Heating Pump No. 7 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4307D Heating Pump No. 7 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4307S Heating Pump No. 7 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4308Q Heating Pump No. 8 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4308D Heating Pump No. 8 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4308S Heating Pump No. 8 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4321Q Primary Hot Water Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4321D Primary Hot Water Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4321S Primary Hot Water Pump No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4322Q Primary Hot Water Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4322D Primary Hot Water Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi510-PI-4322S Primary Hot Water Pump No. 2 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-100 psi455-PI-4513 TDSD Pump Outlet Pressure Annular 0-200 psi405-PI-5700 Effluent Heating Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi405-PI-5701 Effluent Heating Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi405-PI-5702 Effluent Heating Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi405-PI-5713 Glycol Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi405-PI-5721 Glycol Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi405-PI-5722 Glycol Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi405-PI-5731 Glycol HEX Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi405-PI-5741 Glycol HEX Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi510-PI-5700 Effluent Heating Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi510-PI-5701 Effluent Heating Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi510-PI-5702 Effluent Heating Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi510-PI-5713 Glycol Pump Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi510-PI-5721 Glycol Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi510-PI-5722 Glycol Pump Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi510-PI-5731 Glycol HEX Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi510-PI-5741 Glycol HEX Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 psi510-PI-5801S Low Pressure W3 Pump No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-5801D Low Pressure W3 Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-5802S Low Pressure W3 Pump No. 2 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-5802D Low Pressure W3 Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-30 psi510-PI-5811 OrthoP Sample Line Diaphragm 0-30 psi


510-PI-5901D W3 Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-150 psi510-PI-5901S W3 Pump No. 1 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-5902D W3 Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-150 psi510-PI-5902S W3 Pump No. 2 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-5903D W3 Pump No. 3 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-150 psi510-PI-5903S W3 Pump No. 3 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-5904D W3 Pump No. 4 Outlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-150 psi510-PI-5904S W3 Pump No. 4 Inlet Pressure Diaphragm 0-5 psi510-PI-6001 Refrigerated Air Dryer Inlet Pressure - 0-150 psi

* * Provide if Owner selects Huber as Washer/Compactor manufacturer.* Provide if Owner selects Alternate 5.

2.26 (P5) PRESSURE SEAL, ANNULAR (Ref. Section 13426)

Tag Description Pipe Dia.(in) Range (psig)

420-PE-2101 Primary Sludge Pump 1 Discharge Pressure 4 0-40420-PE-2102 Primary Sludge Pump 2 Discharge Pressure 4 0-40420-PE-2103 Primary Sludge Pump 3 Discharge Pressure 4 0-40420-PE-2104 Primary Sludge Pump 4 Discharge Pressure 4 0-40455-PE-3021 TWAS Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure 6 0-200**455-PE-3022 TWAS Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure 6 0-200510-PE-3601 DSD GBT Feed Pump No. 1 Discharge 6 0-100510-PE-3602 DSD GBT Feed Pump No. 2 Discharge 6 0-100455-PE-4513 TDSD Pump Outlet Pressure 6 0-200** Provide if Owner selects Alternate 5.

2.27 (P7) PRESSURE SWITCH, ADJUSTABLE DEAD BAND (Ref. Section13426)

Tag Location/Range SealType Settings

455-PSH/L-2521 WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 1 OutletPressure Diaphragm

Low Set: 1 PSILow Reset: 5 PSIHigh Set: 45 PSIHigh Reset: 40 PSI

**455-PSH/L-2522 WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 2 OutletPressure Diaphragm


455-PSH/L-2523 WAS GBT Feed Pump No. 3 OutletPressure Diaphragm


455-PSH/L-3021 TWAS Pump No. 1 Outlet Pressure Annular

Low Set: 1 PSILow Reset: 5 PSIHigh Set: 205 PSIHigh Reset: 200

PSI

**455-PSH/L-3022 TWAS Pump No. 2 Outlet Pressure Annular


PSI


510-PSH-3601 DSD GBT Feed Pump No. 1 HighPressure Annular High Set: 70 PSI

High Reset: 60 PSI

510-PSH-3602 DSD GBT Feed Pump No. 2 HighPressure Annular High Set: 70 PSI

High Reset: 60 PSI

455-PSH/L-4513 TDSD Pump DSCH Press Lo/Hi Annular


PSI

510-PSH/L-6001 Air Compressor High/Low Pressure

Low Set: 100 PSILow Reset: 110 PSIHigh Set: 150 PSIHigh Reset: 140PSI

** Provide if Owner selects Alternate 5.

2.28 (P9) PRESSURE INDICATING TRANSMITTER, ELECTRONIC (Ref. Section 13426)

Tag Location SealType Range

405-PIT-0501 Washer/Compactor W3 Supply Pressure Diaphragm 0-130 PSI405-PIT-0701 OA Supply Pressure - -5-0 inch WC436-PIT-1401 Blower Discharge Header Pressure - 0-15 PSI436-PIT-1501 Blower No. 1 Inlet Pressure - 0-15 PSI436-PIT-1502 Blower No. 2 Inlet Pressure - 0-15 PSI436-PIT-1503 Blower No. 3 Inlet Pressure - 0-15 PSI455-PIT-2011 Basin Drain Pump Discharge Pressure Diaphragm 0-60 PSI420-PIT-2101 Primary Sludge Pump 1 Discharge Pressure Annular 0-40 PSI420-PIT-2102 Primary Sludge Pump 2 Discharge Pressure Annular 0-40 PSI420-PIT-2103 Primary Sludge Pump 3 Discharge Pressure Annular 0-40 PSI420-PIT-2104 Primary Sludge Pump 4 Discharge Pressure Annular 0-40 PSI405-PIT-2221 Plant Air Pressure (Structure 405) - 0-160 PSI500-PIT-2301D TPSD Pump No. 1 Discharge Press Diaphragm 0-80 PSI500-PIT-2302D TPSD Pump No. 1 Discharge Press Diaphragm 0-80 PSI455-PIT-2801 W3 Pressure Diaphragm 0-120 PSI521-PIT-3201 Digester No. 1 Level Diaphragm 0-24 FT522-PIT-3202 Digester No. 2 Level Diaphragm 0-24 FT523-PIT-3303 Digester No. 3 Liquid Level Diaphragm 0-30 FT510-PIT-3614D Sludge Transfer Pump No. 2 Discharge Press Diaphragm 0-60 PSI510-PIT-3771 Biogas Supply Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 inch WC510-PIT-3772 Boiler BG Supply Pressure Diaphragm 0-15 inch WC510-PIT-5841 W3L Pressure Diaphragm 0-30 PSI

2.29 (P11) DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH (Ref. Section 13426)

Tag Location SealType Setting

405-PDI-4331 Air Separator Diaphragm 0-10 PSI510-DPSL-4321 Primary Hot water Pump 1 Low DP Diaphragm 0-2 PSI510-DPSL-4322 Primary Hot water Pump 2 Low DP Diaphragm 0-2 PSI510-DPI-5701 Air Separator Diaphragm 0-10 PSI

2.30 (T3) TEMPERATURE ELEMENT, RTD (Ref. Section 13427)Tag Location Range (°F)

405-TE-0321 Plant Influent Temperature 0-120


701-TE-0701 OA Supply Temperature 0-120701-TE-0722 Bio-filter Media Temperature -20-120510-TE-3411H Heat Exchanger No. 1 30-120510-TE-3411C Heat Exchanger No. 1 30-120510-TE-3412H Heat Exchanger No. 2 30-120510-TE-3412C Heat Exchanger No. 2 30-120510-TE-3533H Heat Exchanger No. 3 30-120510-TE-3533C Heat Exchanger No. 3 30-120510-TE-3831 Biogas Temperature 0-120510-TE-4031 Hex HWR Temperature 0-220510-TE-4032 Hex HWS Temperature 0-220510-TE-4111 Digester No. 1 Hex Temperature 0-220510-TE-4112 Digester No. 2 Hex Temperature 0-220510-TE-4113 Digester No. 3 Hex Temperature 0-220510-TE-4251 Boiler Pump No. 1 Suction Side Temperature 0-220510-TE-4252 Boiler Pump No. 2 Suction Side Temperature 0-220510-TE-4253 Natural Gas Boilers Temperature 0-220510-TE-4254 Biogas/NG Boiler No. 2 Discharge Temperature 0-220510-TE-4255 Biogas/NG Boiler No. 1 Discharge Temperature 0-220510-TE-4321 Primary HWS Temp 0-220405-TE-5700 W3 Temperature 0-120405-TE-5733 Glycol Hex Temperature 0-120405-TE-5743 W3L Hex Temperature 0-120510-TE-5700 W3 Temperature 0-120510-TE-5733 Glycol Hex Temperature 0-120510-TE-5743 W3L Hex Temperature 0-120

2.31 (T4) TEMPERATURE ELEMENT, RTD (Ref. Section 13427)Tag Location Range (°F)

405-TE-0781 Outside Air Temperature -20 to +120510-TE-3781 Outside Air Temperature -20 to +120

2.32 (T8) TEMPERATURE SWITCH W/WO THERMOWELL (Ref. Section13427)Tag Location Activation Point

436-TSH-6301 Generator Room High Temperature Alarm 105°F

2.33 (T9) THERMOMETER, ADJUSTABLE ANGLE (Ref. Section 13427)Tag Location Range (°F)

510-TI-3411H Heat Exchanger No. 1 30-120510-TI-3411C Heat Exchanger No. 1 30-120510-TI-3412H Heat Exchanger No. 2 30-120510-TI-3412C Heat Exchanger No. 2 30-120510-TI-3533H Heat Exchanger No. 3 30-120510-TI-3533C Heat Exchanger No. 3 30-120510-TI-4001 Generator No. 1 Heat Exchanger 0-220510-TI-4002 Generator No. 2 Heat Exchanger 0-220510-TI-4003 Generator No. 1 Heat Exchanger 0-220510-TI-4004 Generator No. 2 Heat Exchanger 0-220510-TI-4031 Hot Water Return Temperature 0-220510-TI-4032 Hot Water Supply Temperature 0-220510-TI-4111 Digester No. 1 HEX Inlet Temperature 0-220


510-TI-4112 Digester No. 2 HEX Inlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4113 Digester No. 3 HEX Inlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4121 Digester No. 1 HEX Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4122 Digester No. 2 HEX Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4123 Digester No. 3 HEX Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4211D Biogas and Natural Gas Boiler No. 1 Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4211S Biogas and Natural Gas Boiler No. 1 Inlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4212D Biogas and Natural Gas Boiler No. 2 Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4212S Biogas and Natural Gas Boiler No. 2 Inlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4213D Natural Gas Boiler No. 3 Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4213S Natural Gas Boiler No. 3 Inlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4214D Natural Gas Boiler No. 4 Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4214S Natural Gas Boiler No. 4 Inlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4251 Boiler Pump No. 1 Inlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4252 Boiler Pump No. 2 Inlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4253 Boiler No. 3&4 Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4254 Boiler No. 2 HWS Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4255 Boiler No. 1 HWS Outlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-4311 Heating Pumps 1/2 HWR Temperature 0-220510-TI-4312 Heating Pumps 1/2 HWS Temperature 0-220510-TI-4313 Heating Pumps 3/4 HWR Temperature 0-220510-TI-4314 Heating Pumps 3/4 HWS Temperature 0-220510-TI-4315 Heating Pumps 5/6 HWR Temperature 0-220510-TI-4316 Heating Pumps 5/6 HWS Temperature 0-220510-TI-4317 Heating Pumps 7/8 HWR Temperature 0-220510-TI-4318 Heating Pumps 7/8 HWS Temperature 0-220510-TI-4321 Primary Hot Water Pumps Inlet Temperature 0-220510-TI-5700 LPW3 Temperature (Structure 510) 0-100510-TI-5704 Glycol HEX Inlet Temperature 0-100510-TI-5711 Glycol HEX Outlet Temperature 0-100510-TI-5732 Glycol HEX Inlet Temperature 0-100510-TI-5742 Glycol HEX Outlet Temperature 0-100405-TI-5700 LPW3 Temperature (Structure 405) 0-100405-TI-5704 Glycol HEX Inlet Temperature 0-100405-TI-5711 Glycol HEX Outlet Temperature 0-100405-TI-5732 Glycol HEX Inlet Temperature 0-100405-TI-5742 Glycol HEX Outlet Temperature 0-100

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install and wire in accordance with Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, and approvedsubmittals.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - I/O LISTProject No. 12026 13482-1

SECTION 13482PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - I/O LIST

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Description of Process Control System (PCS) physical and programming requirements forI/O points. Section to be used in conjunction with following sections.

1. Section 13402, Process Control System (PCS)2. Section 13491, Process Control System – Configuration Services

B. Conform to Section 13400 - Process Instrumentation and Control.

C. This section includes:

1. Schedule 1 to Section 13482, I/O List.

PART 2 – SERVICES

2.01 SCHEDULE 1 – I/O LIST DEFINITIONS

A. I/O LIST as shown in Schedule 1 of this Section contains information to configure I/Osubsystem hardware and to indicate range conversion or signal function.

B. LOCATION is the tag number for the Programmable Controller the I/O point is interfaced to.

C. DRAWING is the Drawing number of Process and Instrumentation Diagram (P&ID) relating toI/O point.

D. TAG is the field tagname given to the I/O point.

1. This list is not to be considered a comprehensive list of PLC tagnames.

E. EQUIPMENTdescribes associated equipment.

1. Equipment in Schedule 1 table has been truncated and abreviated for space.2. Shop Submittals for PLC Drawings shall have Equipment names as described on 009-N-

x Drawings.

F. FUNCTION describes associated process parameter or programmable controller action.

G. QTY reflects the amount of similar signals for given equipment in a numeric tag series

H. I/O_TYPE is one of following:

1. AI Designates Analog Input.2. DI Designates Discrete Input.3. AO Designates Analog Output.4. RO Designates Discrete (Relay) Output; momentary, maintained or latched relay

contact output.5. RTD Designates 3-wire RTD Input.

I. SIGNAL TYPE Description:

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – I/O LIST Donohue & Associates, Inc.13482-2 Project No. 12026

1. Analog Input (AI):

a. DATA 1: Process parameter range.b. DATA 2: Process parameter engineering units.c. POLL TIME: 0.25 second.

2. Digital Input (DI):

a. DATA 1: Condition existing when field contact open.b. DATA 2: Condition existing when field contact closed.c. POLL TIME: Change-of-State, exception-based.

3. Analog Output (AO):

a. DATA 1: Process parameter range.b. DATA 2: Process parameter engineering units.

4. Digital Output (RO):

a. Relay outputs, using dry contact-closure type outputs, can be momentary, maintainedor latched.

b. DATA 1: Contact open function.c. DATA 2: Contact closed function.

J. DATA_1 and DATA_2 describe function or signal characteristics. These are further definedunder each signal type.

1. I/O point data fields are subject to review and modification by Engineer during ShopDrawing review phase. Incorporate modifications into entire system.

2. Limit total number of modifications to 20% of total number of I/O points.

K. I/O CONFIGURATION

1. In addition to the PLC Configuration Standards included in the Section 13491 – ProcessControl System – Configuration Services, I/O shall be configured such that any single I/Omodule failure shall not shut down all the process equipment for a given process. Theobjective of this configuration is to avoid a strategy failure because of a single I/O modulefailure. For example, if a treatment system includes 4 pumps, the I/O for each pumpshould be placed such that the failure of an I/O point or module will only affect one of thefour pumps, with the remaining pumps operating normally.

L. I/O Point Spares Utilization

1. Provide 20% prewired spare points per panel. Incorporate spare points into active pointdata base. Include changing point names, descriptions, ranges, or status from spare tonew point. Include related documentation changes. Spares utilization will be subject tofollowing limitations:

a. Incorporation shall not significantly alter control software functions. Minor change isaddition of device alarm input. Significant change is addition of control device.

b. Incorporation shall not significantly alter local area panels or field wiring to device.Minor alterations include additions of signals to terminations. Significant alterationsinclude addition of major equipment.

c. Additions shall not increase size of reports beyond that specified.d. Changes shall not be made subsequent to Submittal approval of given panel or

process area loop drawings.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - I/O LISTProject No. 12026 13482-3

e. Treat changing of active points to spare points in same manner as incorporation ofspares.

(See following pages for Schedule 1 to this Section)



300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-ZSC-MG2 PLANT GATE EXIT VERIFIED CLOSED DI 120VAC NOT VERIFIED VERIFIED CLOSED300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-ZSO-MG2 PLANT GATE EXIT VERIFIED OPEN DI 120VAC NOT VERIFIED VERIFIERD OPEN300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-ZSC-MG1 PLANT GATE ENTRANCE VERIFIED CLOSED DI 120VAC NOT VERIFIED VERIFIED CLOSED300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-ZSO-MG1 PLANT GATE ENTRANCE VERIFIED OPEN DI 120VAC NOT VERIFIED VERIFIERD OPEN300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-ZS-6181 FOB OPERATED DOOR INTRUSION (4) DI 120VAC NORMAL INTRUSION300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-TCP-1 PLANT HVAC CRITICAL ALARM DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-TCP-2 PLANT HVAC MAINTENANCE ALARM DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM300-PLC-1 009-N-08 300-SAM-0831 PRIMARY EFFLUENT SAMPLER PULSE SIGNAL RO 120VAC DO NOT SAMPLE SAMPLE300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-ZCO-MG2 PLANT GATE EXIT OPEN RO 120VAC CLOSE OPEN300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-ZCO-MG1 PLANT GATE ENTRANCE OPEN RO 120VAC CLOSE OPEN300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-PAG-TPA WWTP ALARMS TONE RO 120VAC NO TONE TONE300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-PAG-LSA LIFT STATION ALARMS TONE RO 120VAC NO TONE TONE300-PLC-1 009-N-61 300-PAG-GCB GATE CALL BUTTON TONE RO 120VAC NO TONE TONE

405-PLC-1 009-N-03 405-AE-0321 PLANT INFLUENT PH AI 4-20mAdc 0-14 PH405-PLC-1 009-N-03 405-LIT-0321 PLANT INFLUENT FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-30 MGD405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-LIT-0301 RWW INFLUENT CHANNEL LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-10 FEET405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-PIT-0501 W3 PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-130 PSIG405-PLC-1 009-N-07 701-PIT-0701 OA SUPPLY PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc -5 to 0 in W.C.405-PLC-1 009-N-07 701-DPT-0721 1ST STAGE MEDIA DIFF PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-10 in W.C.405-PLC-1 009-N-07 701-DPT-0722 2ND STAGE MEDIA DIFF PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-10 in W.C.405-PLC-1 009-N-22 405-PIT-2221 PLANT AIR PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-160 PSI405-PLC-1 009-N-61 405-OXY-6121 HEADWORKS-LOWER OXYGEN AI 4-20mAdc 0-25 %405-PLC-1 009-N-61 405-XP-6101 HEADWORKS COMBUSTIBLE GAS (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %LEL405-PLC-1 009-N-06 411-PACE-0621 RWW SAMPLER FLOW PACE AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %405-PLC-1 009-N-07 405-SC-0701 OA BLOWER SPEED COMMAND AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-ESTP-0301 SCREW PUMP E-STOP (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-YA-0311 LUBE PUMP FAIL (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-MOT-0311 SCREW PUMP OVERTEMP (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL OVERTEMP405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-YA-0301 SCREW PUMP FAIL (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-MAN-0301 SCREW PUMP HAND (3) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-AUT-0301 SCREW PUMP AUTO (3) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-MAN-0311 LUBE PUMP HAND (3) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-AUT-0311 LUBE PUMP AUTO (3) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-SSL-0411 CONVEYOR ZERO SPEED DI 120VAC ROTATION NO ROTATION405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-LSH-0402 SCREEN 2 FLOAT HIGH DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-LSH-0401 SCREEN 1 FLOAT HIGH DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-ESTP-0411 CONVEYOR E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-AUT-0411 CONVEYOR AUTO DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-AUT-0402 SCREEN NO. 2 AUTO DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-MAN-0402 SCREEN NO. 2 HAND DI 120VAC NOT IN HAND IN HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-MAN-0411 CONVEYOR HAND DI 120VAC NOT IN HAND IN HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-MAN-0401 SCREEN NO. 1 HAND DI 120VAC NOT IN HAND IN HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-AUT-0401 SCREEN NO. 1 AUTO DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-JOG-0501 SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR REVERSE SELECTED DI 120VAC FORWARD REVERSE405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-AUT-0501 SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-MC-0501 SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR BATCH INITIATE DI 120VAC NORMAL INITIATE405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-ESTP-0501 SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR ESTOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-MOT-0501 SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR MOTOR OVERTEMP DI 120VAC OVERTEMP NORMAL405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-MOC-0501 SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR MOTOR OVERCURRENT DI 120VAC OVERCURRENT NORMAL405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-MAN-0501 SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR HAND DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-MAN-0611 GRIT CLASSIFIER HAND DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-AUT-0611 GRIT CLASSIFIER AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-ESTP-0611 GRIT CLASSIFIER E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-LSH-0601 GRIT CLASSIFIER LEVEL HIGH DI 120VAC NORMAL LEVEL HIGH405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-MAN-0621 GRIT BLOWER NO. 1 HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-AUT-0621 GRIT BLOWER NO. 1 AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-ESTP-0621 GRIT BLOWER NO. 1 E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-MAN-0601 GRIT PUMP NO. 1 HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-AUT-0601 GRIT PUMP NO. 1 AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-ESTP-0601 GRIT PUMP NO. 1 E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-06 411-SAMP-0621 RWW SAMPLER ALARM DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-07 405-ZSO/C-0701A COLD AIR DAMPER OPENED/CLOSED (2) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED405-PLC-1 009-N-07 405-LR-0701A COLD AIR DAMPER LOCAL/REMOTE DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE405-PLC-1 009-N-07 701-ESTP-0701 OA BLOWER E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-07 701-MAN-0701 OA BLOWER HAND DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-07 701-AUT-0701 OA BLOWER AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-22 405-LR-2201 INLET VALVE LOCAL/REMOTE (2) DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE405-PLC-1 009-N-22 405-ZSO/C-2201A/B INLET VALVE OPENED/CLOSED (4) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED405-PLC-1 009-N-22 405-AUT-2201 SLUDGE SCREEN NO. 1 AUTO DI 120VAC PLC LOCAL

Donohue Associates, Inc.Project No. 12026 Page 1 of 10




405-PLC-1 009-N-22 405-AUT-2202 SLUDGE SCREEN NO. 2 AUTO DI 120VAC PLC LOCAL405-PLC-1 009-N-57 405-ESTP-5701 EFFLUENT/GLYCOL PUMP E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-57 405-MAN-5701 EFFLUENT/GLYCOL PUMP HAND (2) DI 120VAC NTO HAND HAND405-PLC-1 009-N-57 405-AUT-5701 EFFLUENT/GLYCOL PUMP AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO405-PLC-1 009-N-57 405-DPSH-5701 AUTO AIR W3 STRAINER HIGH DP DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH DP405-PLC-1 009-N-61 405-ZS-6171 FOB OPERATED DOOR INTRUSION (7) DI 120VAC NORMAL INTRUSION405-PLC-1 009-N-61 405-TCP-1 HEADWORKS LOSS OF AIR FLOW DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-FLT-0301 FLOAT MODE ENABLE RO 120VAC NOT ENABLED ENABLE405-PLC-1 009-N-03 405-MC-0311 LUBE PUMP REQUIRED (3) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-03 400-MC-0301 SCREW PUMP REQUIRED (3) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-MS-0411 CONVEYOR REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-MS-0402 SCREEN NO. 2 FWD REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-04 405-MS-0401 SCREEN NO. 1 FWD REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-MC-0501 SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR REV REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-FCO-0501A WASHWATER VALVE REMOTE OPEN (4) RO 120VAC NOT OPEN/CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE405-PLC-1 009-N-05 405-MC-0501 SCREENINGS WASHER/COMPACTOR FWD REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-MC-0601 GRIT PUMP NO. 1 REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-MC-0611 GRIT CLASSIFIER REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-06 405-MC-0621 GRIT BLOWER NO. 1 REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-07 405-ZCO/C-0701A COLD AIR DAMPER REMOTE CTO/CTC (2) RO 120VAC OPEN/NOT OPENING CLOSE/NOT CLOSING405-PLC-1 009-N-07 701-MC-0701 OA BLOWER REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-22 405-ZCO/C-2201A/B INLET VALVE REMOTE CTO/CTC (4) RO 120VAC OPEN/NOT OPENING CLOSE/NOT CLOSING405-PLC-1 009-N-22 405-MC-2201 SLUDGE SCREEN NO. 1 REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-22 405-MC-2202 SLUDGE SCREEN NO. 2 REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-57 405-MC-5701 EFFLUENT/GLYCOL PUMP REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED405-PLC-1 009-N-61 405-AAS-6111 LOWER GAS ALARM ALARM LAMP RO 120VAC NOT OPEN/NOT CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE405-PLC-1 009-N-61 405-AAS-6101 UPPER GAS ALARM ALARM LAMP RO 120VAC NOT OPEN/NOT CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE405-PLC-1 009-N-61 405-TCP-2 PREHEAT COIL BYPASS DI 120VAC NORMAL BYPASS405-PLC-1 009-N-03 405-TE-0321 PLANT INFLUENT TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-120 °F405-PLC-1 009-N-07 405-TE-0781 OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm -20 TO +120 °F405-PLC-1 009-N-07 701-TIT-0701 OA SUPPLY TEMP RTD Ohm 0-120 °F405-PLC-1 009-N-07 701-TIT-0722 BIOFILTER MEDIA TEMP RTD Ohm -20 to 120 °F405-PLC-1 009-N-57 405-TE-5743 W3L HEX TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-120 °F405-PLC-1 009-N-57 405-TE-5711 W3 TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-120 °F405-PLC-1 009-N-57 405-TE-5733 GLYCOL HEX TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-120 °F

435-LCP-5501 009-N-55 436-YA-5501 HTP FAULT DI 120VAC NORMAL FAULT

436-PLC-1 009-N-09 431-LIT-091E1 PE CHANNEL LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-4.75 FT436-PLC-1 009-N-09 431-ZIT-091E1 DIVERSION GATE POSITION FEEDBACK AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-AIT-1001A SELECTOR ZONE 1A ORP (2) AI 4-20mAdc +/- 2000 mg/L436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-ZIT-1001 RAS FCV TRAIN 1 POSITION FEEDBACK AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-FIT-1001 RAS - TRAIN 1 FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-15 MGD436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-LIT-1001A SELECTOR ZONE LEVEL (2) AI 4-20mAdc 0-25 FEET436-PLC-1 009-N-11 431-AIT-1101 AEROBIC ZONE 1B PH AI 4-20mAdc 0-14 PH436-PLC-1 009-N-11 431-ZIT-1111 AEROBIC ZONE VALVE POSITION FEEDBACK (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-PLC-1 009-N-11 431-AIT-1111 DISSOLVED OXYGEN DO (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-10 mg/L436-PLC-1 009-N-11 431-FIT-1111 AEROBIC ZONE FLOW (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-5000 SCFM436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-ZIT-1202 RAS FCV TRAIN 2 POSITION FEEDBACK AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 % OPEN436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-FIT-1202A SELECTOR ZONE 2B LEVEL (2) AI 4-20mAdc 0-25 FEET436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-FIT-1202 RAS - TRAIN 2 FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-15 MGD436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-AIT-1202A SELECTOR ZONE 2A ORP (2) AI 4-20mAdc +/- 2000 mg/L436-PLC-1 009-N-13 432-AIT-1331 AEROBIC ZONE IF NH4 AI 4-20mAdc 0-14 PH436-PLC-1 009-N-13 432-ZIT-1321 AEROBIC ZONE VALVE POSITION FEEDBACK (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-PLC-1 009-N-13 432-AIT-1321 DISSOLVED OXYGEN DO (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-10 mg/L436-PLC-1 009-N-13 432-FIT-1321 AEROBIC ZONE FLOW (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-5000 SCFM436-PLC-1 009-N-13 432-AIT-1301 AEROBIC ZONE 2C PH AI 4-20mAdc 0-14 PH436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-FIT-2101 PS PUMP NO. 1 DISCHARGE PRESSURE (4) AI 4-20mAdc 0-40 PSI436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-FIT-2111 PRIMARY SLUDGE FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-1.1 MGD436-PLC-1 009-N-09 431-ZC-091E1 DIVERSION GATE POSITION CONTROL AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-PLC-1 009-N-10 435-SC-1011 DENITE PUMP SPEED COMMAND (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-ZC-1001 RAS FCV TRAIN 1 POSITION CONTROL AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 % OPEN436-PLC-1 009-N-11 431-ZC-1111 AEROBIC ZONE VALVE POSITION CONTROL (3) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-ZC-1202 RAS FCV TRAIN 2 POSITION CONTROL AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 % OPEN436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-SC-1212 DENITE PUMP SPEED COMMAND (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-PLC-1 009-N-13 432-ZC-1321 AEROBIC ZONE VALVE POSITION CONTROL (3) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 % OPEN436-PLC-1 009-N-21 436-SC-2101 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP SPEED COMMAND (4) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %436-PLC-1 009-N-08 420-ESTP-0821 PRI SCUM PUMP E-STOP DI 120VAC ALARM NORMAL436-PLC-1 009-N-08 420-MAN-0821 PRI SCUM PUMP HAND DI 120VAC NOT IN HAND IN HAND436-PLC-1 009-N-08 420-AUT-0821 PRI SCUM PUMP AUTO DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO





436-PLC-1 009-N-08 420-ESTP-0811 SCUM DIPPER NO. 1 E-STOP (4) DI 120VAC ALARM NORMAL436-PLC-1 009-N-08 420-MAN-0811 SCUM DIPPER NO. 1 HAND (4) DI 120VAC NOT IN HAND IN HAND436-PLC-1 009-N-08 420-AUT-0811 SCUM DIPPER NO. 1 AUTO (4) DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO436-PLC-1 009-N-08 420-ESTP-0801 DRIVE MECHANISM NO. 1 E-STOP (4) DI 120VAC ALARM NORMAL436-PLC-1 009-N-08 420-MAN-0801 DRIVE MECHANISM NO. 1 HAND (4) DI 120VAC NOT IN HAND IN HAND436-PLC-1 009-N-08 420-AUT-0801 DRIVE MECHANISM NO. 1 AUTO (4) DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO436-PLC-1 009-N-09 431-ZSO/C-091E1 DIVERSION GATE OPENED/CLOSED (2) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED436-PLC-1 009-N-09 431-LR-091E1 DIVERSION GATE LOCAL/REMOTE DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE436-PLC-1 009-N-10 436-SF-1011 ML DEN PUMP SEAL FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL SEAL FAIL436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-AUT-1011 DENITE PUMP AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-AUT-1001A MIXER 1A AUTO (6) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-MOT-1001A MIXER 1A MOTOR OVERTEMP (6) DI 120VAC NORMAL OVERTEMP436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-ZSO/C-1001A/B RAS FCV TRAIN 1 OPENED/CLOSED (2) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-LR-1001 RAS FCV TRAIN 1 LOCAL/REMOTE DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-ESTP-1011 DENITE PUMP E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-MAN-1011 DENITE PUMP HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-ESTP-1001A MIXER 1A E-STOP (6) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM436-PLC-1 009-N-10 431-MAN-1001A MIXER 1A HAND (6) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND436-PLC-1 009-N-11 431ZSO/C-1111 AEROBIC ZONE VALVE OPENED/CLOSED (6) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED436-PLC-1 009-N-11 431-LR-1111 AEROBIC ZONE VALVE LOCAL/REMOTE (3) DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE436-PLC-1 009-N-12 436-SF-1211 ML DEN PUMP SEAL FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL SEAL FAIL436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-ZSO/C-1202 RAS FCV TRAIN 2 OPENED/CLOSED (2) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-LR-1202 RAS FCV TRAIN 2 LOCAL/REMOTE DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-ESTP-1212 DENITE PUMP E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-MAN-1212 DENITE PUMP HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-ESTP-1202A MIXER 2A E-STOP (6) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-MAN-1202A MIXER 2A HAND (6) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-AUT-1212 DENITE PUMP AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-AUT-1202A MIXER 2A AUTO (6) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-MOT-1202A MIXER 2A MOTOR OVERTEMP (6) DI 120VAC NORMAL OVERTEMP436-PLC-1 009-N-13 432-ZSO/C-1321 AEROBIC ZONE VALVE OPENED/CLOSED (6) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED436-PLC-1 009-N-13 432-LR-1321 AEROBIC ZONE VALVE LOCAL/REMOTE (3) DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-MAN-2101 PRIMARY SLUDGE GRINDER NO.1 IN REMOTE (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-MS-2121 PRIMARY SLUDGE GRINDER NO.1 RUNNING (2) DI 120VAC NOT RUNNING RUNNING436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-YA-2121 PRIMARY SLUDGE GRINDER NO.1 FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-ESTP-2101 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP E-STOP (4) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-MAN-2101 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP HAND (4) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-AUT-2101 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP AUTO (4) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-LR-2111 SLUDGE SCREEN BYPASS VALVE LOCAL/REMOTE DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-ZSO/C-2111 SLUDGE SCREEN BYPASS VALVE OPENED/CLOSED (2) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED436-PLC-1 009-N-61 436-ZSC-MG2 MAIN GATE EXIT VERIFIED CLOSED DI 120VAC NOT VERIFIED VERIFIED CLOSED436-PLC-1 009-N-61 436-ZSO-MG2 MAIN GATE EXIT VERIFIED OPEN DI 120VAC NOT VERIFIED VERIFIERD OPEN436-PLC-1 009-N-61 436-ZSC-MG1 MAIN GATE ENTRANCE VERIFIED CLOSED DI 120VAC NOT VERIFIED VERIFIED CLOSED436-PLC-1 009-N-61 436-ZSO-MG1 MAIN GATE ENTRANCE VERIFIED OPEN DI 120VAC NOT VERIFIED VERIFIERD OPEN436-PLC-1 009-N-61 435-ZS-6151 FOB OPERATED DOOR INTRUSION (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL INTRUSION436-PLC-1 009-N-61 436-ZS-6161 FOB OPERATED DOOR INTRUSION (6) DI 120VAC NORMAL INTRUSION436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-DT1-F DAY TANK 1 FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-EG1-RUN GENERATOR 1 RUNNING (2) DI 120VAC NOT RUNNING RUNNING436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-SWGR-CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITION CLOSED (8) DI 120VAC OPEN CLOSED436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-SWGR-LOAD SHED LOAD DI 120VAC DO NOT SHED SHED436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-SWGR-TST SWITCHGEAR TEST MODE DI 120VAC NORMAL TEST436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-SWGR-UTL UTILITY POWER AVAILABLE DI 120VAC NOT AVAILABLE AVAILABLE436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-EG1-LD GENERATOR 1 LOADED (2) DI 120VAC NOT LOADED LOADED436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-EG1-MAN GENERATOR 1 NOT IN AUTO (2) DI 120VAC AUTO MANUAL436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-EG1-ALM GENERATOR 1 COMMON ALARM (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-EG1-ES GENERATOR 1 EMERG STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL EMERG STOP436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-TSH-6301 HIGH TEMPERATURE ALARM DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-FT-LD FUEL/DAY TANK LEAK DETECT (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL LEAK436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-FT-LSL FUEL/DAY TANK LOW LEVEL (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL LOW LEVEL436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-FT-LSH FUEL/DAY TANK HIGH LEVEL (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH LEVEL436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-FT-ALM FUEL/DAY TANK SHUTDOWN (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL SHUTDOWN436-PLC-1 009-N-63 436-FT-FAIL FUEL/DAY TANK CONTROLLER FAIL (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL436-PLC-1 009-N-08 405-MC-0821 PRI SCUM PUMP REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED436-PLC-1 009-N-08 405-MC-0811 SCUM DIPPER REQUIRED (4) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED436-PLC-1 009-N-08 405-MC-0801 DRIVE MECHANISM NO1 REQUIRED (4) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED436-PLC-1 009-N-10 436-OTR-1011 ML DEN PUMP MPR RESET (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL RESET436-PLC-1 009-N-10 435-MC-1011 DENITE PUMP REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED436-PLC-1 009-N-10 435-MC-1001A MIXER 1A REQUIRED (6) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED436-PLC-1 009-N-12 436-OTR-1211 ML DEN PUMP MPR RESET (2) RO 120VAC NOT RESET RESET436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-MC-1202A MIXER 1A REQUIRED (6) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED





436-PLC-1 009-N-12 432-MC-1212 DENITE PUMP REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED436-PLC-1 009-N-15 436-VFD-1411 BLOWER NO. 1 REMOTE ENABLE (3) RO 120VAC NOT START/NOT STOP START/STOP436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-MC-2121 PRIMARY SLUDGE GRINDER NO.1 ENABLE (2) RO 120VAC NOT ENABLE ENABLE436-PLC-1 009-N-21 436-MC-2101 PRIMARY SLUDGE PUMP REQUIRED (4) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED436-PLC-1 009-N-21 420-ZCO/C-2111 SLUDGE SCREEN BYPASS VALVE REMOTE CTO/CTC (2) RO 120VAC NOT OPEN/NOT CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE436-PLC-1 009-N-61 436-ZCO-MG2 MAIN GATE EXIT OPEN RO 120VAC CLOSE OPEN436-PLC-1 009-N-61 436-ZCO-MG1 MAIN GATE ENTRANCE OPEN RO 120VAC CLOSE OPEN

455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-LE/LIT-1901 SHC TANK NO. 1 LEVEL (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-9 FT455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-LIT-2001 BASIN DRAIN WETWELL LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-36 FEET455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-PIT-2011 BASIN DRAIN PUMP DISCHARGE PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-60 PSIG455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-FIT-2412A RAS PUMP NO.2 FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-5 MGD455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-FIT-2413A RAS PUMP NO.3 FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-5 MGD455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-FIT-2414A RAS PUMP NO.4 FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-5 MGD455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-FIT-2411A RAS PUMP NO.1 FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-5 MGD455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-FIT-2541 DSD FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-.9 MGD455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-FIT-2531 WAS GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 FLOW (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-.9 MGD455-PLC-1 009-N-26 460-LIT-2621 FINAL SCUM WETWELL LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-10 FEET455-PLC-1 009-N-27 455-LE/LT-2702 W-2 DEWATERING WELL PUMP LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-23 FEET455-PLC-1 009-N-28 455-PIT-2801 W3 PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-120 PSIG455-PLC-1 009-N-28 455-SC-2801C BELT DRIVE SPEED REFERENCE AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-28 455-SC-2801B POLYMER SYSTEM SPEED REFERENCE AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-28 455-SC-2801A WAS GBT FEED PUMP SPEED REFERENCE AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-29 455-SC-2801C BELT DRIVE SPEED REFERENCE AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-29 455-SC-2801B POLYMER SYSTEM SPEED REFERENCE AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-29 455-SC-2801A WAS GBT FEED PUMP SPEED REFERENCE AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-QT-3001 TWAS PUMP NO. 1 ROTATION COUNTER AI 4-20mAdc 0-250 RPM455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-QT-3002 TWAS PUMP NO. 2 ROTATION COUNTER AI 4-20mAdc 0-250 RPM455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-LIT-3002 TWAS HOPPER NO. 2 LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-16 FEET455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-LIT-3001 TWAS HOPPER NO. 1 LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-16 FEET455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-FIT-3031 TWAS FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-300 GPM455-PLC-1 009-N-44 455-SC-4403C BELT DRIVE SPEED REFERENCE AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-44 455-SC-4403B POLYMER SYSTEM SPEED REFERENCE AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-44 455-SC-4403A THICK FEED PUMP SPEED REFERENCE AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-QT-4503 TDSD PUMP ROTATION COUNTER AI 4-20mAdc 0-250 RPM455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-LIT-4503 TDSD HOPPER LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-16 FEET455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-LIT-5611 FILTRATE EQ LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-20 FEET455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-LIT-5622 FILTRATE LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-20 FEET455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-FIT-5601 FILTRATE FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-2 MGD455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-XP-6201 SOLIDS BUILDING COMBUSTIBLE GAS (3) AI 4-20 mADC 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-FIP-1901 SHC PUMP FLOW PACE (3) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-SC-2001 BASIN DRAIN PUMP SPEED COMMAND AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-SC-2401 RAS PUMP NO.1 SPEED COMMAND (4) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-SC-2501 WAS GBT FEED PUMP SPEED COMMAND (3) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-27 455-SC-2702 W-2 DEWATERING WELL PUMP SPEED COMMAND AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-28 455-SI-2801C BELT DRIVE SPEED FEEDBACK AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-28 455-SI-2801B POLYMER SYSTEM SPEED FEEDBACK AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-28 455-SI-2801A WAS GBT FEED PUMP SPEED FEEDBACK AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-29 455-SI-2801C BELT DRIVE SPEED FEEDBACK AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-29 455-SI-2801B POLYMER SYSTEM SPEED FEEDBACK AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-29 455-SI-2801A WAS GBT FEED PUMP SPEED FEEDBACK AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-SC-3001A TWAS PUMP SPEED COMMAND (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-44 455-SI-4403C BELT DRIVE SPEED FEEDBACK AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-44 455-SI-4403B POLYMER SYSTEM SPEED FEEDBACK AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-44 455-SI-4403A THICK FEED PUMP SPEED FEEDBACK AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-SC-4503 TDSD PUMP SPEED COMMAND AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-SC-5611 FILTRATE EQUALIZATION PUMP SPEED COMMAND AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-FP-5631 PACING SIGNAL (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0- GPM455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-SC-5601 FILTRATE PUMP NO. 1 SPEED COMMAND (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %455-PLC-1 009-N-18 451-WSH-1801 FINAL SETTLING TANK NO. 1 OVERTORQUE ALARM (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-18 451-MAN-1801 FINAL SETTLING TANK NO. 1 HAND (3) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND455-PLC-1 009-N-18 451-AUT-1801 FINAL SETTLING TANK NO. 1 AUTO (3) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-18 451-ESTP-1801 FINAL SETTLING TANK NO. 1 E-STOP (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-AUT-1901 SHC PUMP IN AUTO (3) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-LCP-SIL HORN SILENCE DI 120VAC NORMAL SILENCE455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-LSH-1931 SHC AREA FLOOD DI 120VAC NORMAL FLOOD455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-FSL-1903 SHC FLOW LOW (2) DI 120VDC NORMAL LOW FLOW455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-YA-1901 SHC PUMP FAIL (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-MS-1901 SHC PUMP RUNNING (3) DI 120VAC NOT RUNNING RUNNING455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-FS-1980 SHC SHOWER/EYEWASH FLOW SWITCH DI 120VAC NO FLOW FLOW





455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-ESTP-2001 BASIN DRAIN PUMP E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-MAN-2001 BASIN DRAIN PUMP HAND DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-AUT-2001 BASIN DRAIN PUMP AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-LSHH-2001 BASIN DRAIN WETWELL HIGH HIGH DI 120VAC NORMAL LEVEL HIGH HIGH455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-OT-2001 BASIN DRAIN PUMP MOTOR OVERTEMP DI 120VAC NORMAL MOTOR OVERTEMP455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-SF-2001 BASIN DRAIN PUMP SEAL FAIL DI 120VAC NORMAL SEAL FAIL455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-MOT-2401 RAS PUMP NO.1 OVERTEMP (4) DI 120VAC NORMAL OVERTEMP455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-ESTP-2401 RAS PUMP NO.1 E-STOP (4) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-MAN-2401 RAS PUMP NO.1 HAND (4) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-AUT-2401 RAS PUMP NO.1 AUTO (4) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-MOT-2501 WAS GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 OVERTEMP (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL OVERTEMP455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-HS-2511 WAS FLUSH VALVE NO. 1 LOCAL/REMOTE (3) DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-ZSO/C-2511A WAS FLUSH VALVE NO. 1 OPENED/CLOSED (6) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-ESTP-2501 WAS GBT FEED PUMP E-STOP (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-MAN-2501 WAS GBT FEED PUMP HAND (3) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-AUT-2501 WAS GBT FEED PUMP AUTO (3) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-HS-2501 WAS ISOL VALVE NO. 1 LOCAL/REMOTE (3) DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-ZSO/C-2501A WAS ISOL VALVE NO. 1 OPENED/CLOSED (6) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-PSL/H-2521 WAS GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 DSCH PRESS LO/HI (6) DI 120VAC NORMAL/NORMAL PRESS LOW/PRESS HIGH455-PLC-1 009-N-26 460-LSLL-2621 FINAL SCUM WETWELL LOW LEVEL DI 120VAC NORMAL LOW LEVEL455-PLC-1 009-N-26 460-MS-2601 FINAL SCUM PUMP NO.1 RUNNING (3) DI 120VAC NOT RUNNING RUNNING455-PLC-1 009-N-27 455-AUT-2702 W-2 DEWATERING WELL PUMP IN AUTO DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-PSL-3011 TWAS PUMP NO. 1 SEAL WATER LOW PRESSURE DI 120VAC NORMAL PRESSURE LOW455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-PSL-3012 TWAS PUMP NO. 2 SEAL WATER LOW PRESSURE DI 120VAC NORMAL PRESSURE LOW455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-TSH-3002 TWAS PUMP NO. 2 MOTOR OVERTEMP DI 120VAC NORMAL OVERTEMP455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-TSH-3001 TWAS PUMP NO. 1 MOTOR OVERTEMP DI 120VAC NORMAL OVERTEMP455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-PSL/H-3022 TWAS PUMP NO. 2 DSCH PRESS LO/HI (2) DI 120VAC PSE LOW/PSE HIGH NORMAL/NORMAL455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-PSL/H-3021 TWAS PUMP NO. 1 DSCH PRESS LO/HI (2) DI 120VAC PSE LOW/PSE HIGH NORMAL/NORMAL455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-AUT-3001 TWAS PUMP AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-MAN-3001 TWAS PUMP HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-ESTP-3001 TWAS PUMP E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-PSL-4513 TDSD PUMP SEAL WATER LOW PRESSURE DI 120VAC NORMAL PRESSURE LOW455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-ESTP-4503 TDSD PUMP E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-MAN-4503 TDSD PUMP HAND DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-PSL/H-4513 TDSD PUMP DSCH PRESS LO/HI (2) DI 120VAC PSE LOW/PSE HIGH NORMAL/NORMAL455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-P-4503 TDSD PUMP MOTOR OVERTEMP DI 120VAC NORMAL OVERTEMP455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-AUT-4503 TDSD PUMP AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-MOT-5631 SAMPLE PUMP SEAL FAIL/OVERTEMP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL OVER TEMP455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-ALM-5631 SAMPLER ALARM (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-LSHH-5622 FILTRATE HIGH HIGH DI 120VAC NORMAL LEVEL HIGH HIGH455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-LSHH-5611 FILTRATE EQ HIGH HIGH DI 120VAC NORMAL LEVEL HIGH HIGH455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-ESTP-5611 FILTRATE EQUALIZATION PUMP E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-MAN-5611 FILTRATE EQUALIZATION PUMP HAND DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-AUT-5611 FILTRATE EQUALIZATION PUMP AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-PSH-5611 PRESSURE SWITCH HIGH DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-PSL-5611 PRESSURE SWITCH LOW DI 120VAC NORMAL LOW455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-SF-5601 FLT PUMP NO. 1 SEAL FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL SEAL FAIL455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-ESTP-5621 FILTRATE EQUALIZATION MIXER E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-MAN-5621 FILTRATE EQUALIZATION MIXER HAND DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-AUT-5621 FILTRATE EQUALIZATION MIXER AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-SF-5621 FILTRATE MIXER SEAL FAIL DI 120VAC NORMAL SEAL FAIL455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-MOT-5621 FILTRATE MIXER OVERTEMP DI 120VAC NORMAL OVER TEMP455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-MOT-5601 FLT PUMP NO. 1 OVERTEMP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL OVER TEMP455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-ESTP-5601 FILTRATE PUMP NO. 1 E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-MAN-5601 FILTRATE PUMP NO. 1 HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-AUT-5601 FILTRATE PUMP NO. 1 AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-SPCP-HH SUMP PUMP CONTROL PANEL HIGH HIGH ALARM DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH HIGH455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-SPCP-1F SUMP PUMP CONTROL PANEL FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL455-PLC-1 009-N-62 475-ZS-6271 FOB OPERATED DOOR INTRUSION (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL INTRUSION455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-ZS-6276 FOB OPERATED DOOR INTRUSION (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL INTRUSION455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-TCP-1 SOLIDS BUILDING LOSS OF AIR FLOW 1 DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-TCP-2 SOLIDS BUILDING LOSS OF AIR FLOW 2 DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-18 451-MC-1801 FINAL SETTLING TANK NO. 1 REQUIRED (3) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-LCP-YL1 TANK LEVEL FULL LIGHT (3) RO 120VAC LIGHT OFF LIGHT ON455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-LCP-HORN TANK LEVEL HIGH HORN RO 120VAC HORN OFF HORN ON455-PLC-1 009-N-19 455-MC-1901 SHC PUMP REQUIRED (3) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-FLT-2001 FLOAT MODE ENABLE RO 120VAC NOT ENABLED ENABLE455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-MC-2001 BASIN DRAIN PUMP REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-20 455-OTR-2001 BASIN DRAIN PUMP MPR RESET RO 120VAC NOT RESET RESET455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-RTZ-2412 RAS FLOWMETER NO.2 POS. RETURN TO ZERO RO 120VAC NOT POS. RETURN TO ZERO POS. RETURN TO ZERO





455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-RTZ-2413 RAS FLOWMETER NO.3 POS. RETURN TO ZERO RO 120VAC NOT POS. RETURN TO ZERO POS. RETURN TO ZERO455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-RTZ-2414 RAS FLOWMETER NO.4 POS. RETURN TO ZERO RO 120VAC NOT POS. RETURN TO ZERO POS. RETURN TO ZERO455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-RTZ-2411 RAS FLOWMETER NO.1 POS. RETURN TO ZERO RO 120VAC NOT POS. RETURN TO ZERO POS. RETURN TO ZERO455-PLC-1 009-N-24 455-MC-2401 RAS PUMP NO.1 REQUIRED (4) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-RTZ-2541 DSD POS. RETURN TO ZERO RO 120VAC NOT POS. RETURN TO ZERO POS. RETURN TO ZERO455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-RTZ-2531 WAS GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 POS. RETURN TO ZERO (3) RO 120VAC NOT POS. RETURN TO ZERO POS. RETURN TO ZERO455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-ZCO/C-2511A WAS FLUSH VALVE NO. 1 OPEN/CLOSE (6) RO 120VAC NOT OPEN/NOT CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-MC-2501 WAS GBT FEED PUMP REQUIRED (3) RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-25 455-ZCO/C-2501A WAS ISOL VALVE NO. 1 OPEN/CLOSE (6) RO 120VAC NOT OPEN/NOT CLOSE OPEN/CLOSE455-PLC-1 009-N-26 455-MC-2601 FINAL SCUM PUMP NO.1 REQUIRED (3) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-27 455-MC-2702 W-2 DEWATERING WELL PUMP REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-27 455-LSL-2702 W-2 DEWATERING WELL PUMP LOW LEVEL CUTOUT RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-27 455-LSH-2702 W-2 DEWATERING WELL PUMP HIGH LEVEL ALARM RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-FV-3031 W3 FLUSH OPEN/CLOSE RO 120VAC CLOSE OPEN455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-FV-3032 W3 FLUSH OPEN/CLOSE RO 120VAC CLOSE OPEN455-PLC-1 009-N-30 455-MC-3001C TWAS PUMP REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-FV-4533 W3 FLUSH OPEN/CLOSE RO 120VAC CLOSE OPEN455-PLC-1 009-N-45 455-MC-4503 TDSD PUMP REQUIRED RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-OTR-5631 SAMPLE PUMP MPR RESET (2) RO 120VAC NOT RESET RESET455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-FLT-5601 FLOAT MODE ENABLE RO 120VAC NOT ENABLED ENABLE455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-FLT-5611 FLOAT MODE ENABLE RO 120VAC NOT ENABLED ENABLE455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-OTR-5621 FILTRATE MIXER MPR RESET RO 120VAC NOT RESET RESET455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-OTR-5601 FLT PUMP NO. 1 MPR RESET (2) RO 120VAC NOT RESET RESET455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-MC-5621 FILTRATE EQUALIZATION PUMP REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-MC-5621 FILTRATE EQUALIZATION MIXER REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-56 455-MC-5601 FILTRATE PUMP NO. 1 REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-AAS-6221 LOWER GAS ALARM ALARM LAMP RO 120VAC LAMP OFF LAMP ON455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-AAS-6211 UPPER GAS ALARM ALARM LAMP RO 120VAC LAMP OFF LAMP ON455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-TCP-3 WAS GBT RUNNING RO 120VAC WAS GBT NOT RUNNING WAS GBT RUNNING455-PLC-1 009-N-62 455-TCP-4 COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTED RO 120VAC NORMAL GAS DETECTED

475-PLC-1 009-N-49 475-FP-4901 NaHSO3 PUMP FLOW PACE (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %475-PLC-1 009-N-49 475-YA-4901 NaHSO3 PUMP FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL475-PLC-1 009-N-49 475-MS-4901 NaHSO3 PUMP RUNNING (2) DI 120VAC NOT RUNNING RUNNING475-PLC-1 009-N-49 475-MC-4901 NaHSO3 PUMP REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED

500-RIO-1 009-N-23 500-PIT-2301D TPSD PUMP NO. 1 DISCHARGE PRESS (2) AI 4-20mAdc 0-80 PSI500-RIO-1 009-N-23 505-FIT-2301 SLUDGE BLANKET LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-23 FEET500-RIO-1 009-N-27 500-LE/LT-2704 W-4 DEWATERING WELL PUMP LEVEL (2) AI 4-20mAdc 0-23 FEET500-RIO-1 009-N-31 455-SI-3101 POLYMER SYSTEM SPEED FEEDBACK (3) AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %500-RIO-1 009-N-23 500-SC-2301 TPSD PUMP NO. 1 STROKE PACE (2) AO 4-20mAdc STROKES/HR STROKES500-RIO-1 009-N-27 500-SC-2704 W-4 DEWATERING WELL PUMP SPEED REFERENCE (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %500-RIO-1 009-N-31 455-SC-3101 POLYMER SYSTEM SPEED REFERENCE (3) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %500-RIO-1 009-N-48 440-LOOP-4801 FLOW PACE (4) AO 4-20mAdc 0- GPD500-RIO-1 009-N-23 500-MF-2301 TPSD PUMP NO. 1 FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NOT IN REMOTE IN REMOTE500-RIO-1 009-N-23 500-STK-2301E/R TPSD PUMP NO. 1 STROKES (4) DI 120VAC NOT STROKE COUNT STROKE COUNT500-RIO-1 009-N-23 500-LR-2301 TPSD PUMP NO. 1 REMOTE (2) DI 120VAC NOT IN REMOTE IN REMOTE500-RIO-1 009-N-27 500-AUT-2704 W-4 DEWATERING WELL PUMP IN AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO500-RIO-1 009-N-31 500-LSH-3131 POLYMER AREA FLOOD DI 120VAC NORMAL FLOOD500-RIO-1 009-N-31 455-AUT-3101 POLYMER SYSTEM AUTO (3) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO500-RIO-1 009-N-31 455-YA-3101 POLYMER SYSTEM FAIL (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL500-RIO-1 009-N-31 455-MS-3101 POLYMER SYSTEM RUNNING (3) DI 120VAC NOT RUNNING RUNNING500-RIO-1 009-N-31 455-LOW-3101 POLYMER SYSTEM LOSS OF WATER (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL LOSS OF WATER500-RIO-1 009-N-31 455-MAN-3101 POLYMER SYSTEM HAND (3) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND500-RIO-1 009-N-31 500-FSL-3101 LIQUID POLYMER LOW FLOW (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL LOW FLOW500-RIO-1 009-N-48 440-ALM-4805 COMMON ALARM DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM500-RIO-1 009-N-48 440-LSH-4801 FERRIC PUMPS FLOOD DI 120VAC NOT FLOOD FLOOD500-RIO-1 009-N-48 440-LSH-4701 FERRIC TANKS FLOOD DI 120VAC NOT FLOOD FLOOD500-RIO-1 009-N-62 500-ZS-6280 FOB OPERATED DOOR INTRUSION DI 120VAC NORMAL INTRUSION500-RIO-1 009-N-27 500-MC-2704 W-4 DEWATERING WELL PUMP REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED500-RIO-1 009-N-27 500-LSL-2704 W-4 DEWATERING WELL PUMP LOW LEVEL CUTOUT (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM500-RIO-1 009-N-27 500-LSH-2704 W-4 DEWATERING WELL PUMP HIGH LEVEL ALARM (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM500-RIO-1 009-N-31 455-MC-3101 POLYMER SYSTEM REQ'D (3) RO 120VAC STOP START

510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-LE/LT-2701 W-1 DEWATERING WELL PUMP LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-23 FEET510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-LE/LT-2706 W-6 DEWATERING WELL PUMP LEVEL (2) AI 4-20mAdc 0-23 FEET510-PLC-1 009-N-32 521-PIT-3201 DIGESTER NO. 1 LEVEL (2) AI 4-20mAdc 0-24 FT510-PLC-1 009-N-32 521-LIT-3203 DIGESTER NO. 1 LIQUID/FOAM LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-16 FT510-PLC-1 009-N-32 522-PIT-3202 DIGESTER NO. 2 LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-24 FT510-PLC-1 009-N-32 522-LIT-3204 DIGESTER NO. 2 LIQUID/FOAM LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-24 FT





510-PLC-1 009-N-33 523-LIT-3303C DIGESTER NO. 3 COVER LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-24 FT510-PLC-1 009-N-33 523-LIT-3303L DIGESTER NO. 3 LIQUID/FOAM LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-16 FT510-PLC-1 009-N-33 523-PIT-3303 DIGESTER NO. 3 LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-75 FT510-PLC-1 009-N-33 524-LIT-3304C STORAGE TANK NO. 4 LIQUID LEVEL AI 4-20mAdc 0-24 PSI510-PLC-1 009-N-36 500-PIT-3614D SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMP NO. 2 DISCHARGE PRESS AI 4-20mAdc 0-60 PSI510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-FIT-3702 BOILER NO. 2 DG FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 SCFM510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-FIT-3701 BOILER NO. 1 DG FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 SCFM510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-PIT-3772 BOILER BG SUPPLY PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-15 in W.C510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-FIT-3791 BIOGAS FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-200 SCFM510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-PIT-3771 BIOGAS SUPPLY PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-15 in W.C510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-FIT-3792 WASTE GAS FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-200 SCFM510-PLC-1 009-N-38 510-DPT-3801 H2S REMOVAL VESSEL DIFF PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-15 in W.C510-PLC-1 009-N-38 510-FIT-3832 BIOGAS SUPPLY FLOW (2) AI 4-20mAdc 0-105 SCFM510-PLC-1 009-N-38 510-DPT-3822 SILOXANE REM VES NO. 2 DIFF PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-5 PSI510-PLC-1 009-N-38 510-DPT-3821 SILOXANE REM VES NO. 1 DIFF PRESSURE AI 4-20mAdc 0-5 PSI510-PLC-1 009-N-58 510-AIT-5851 ORTHO P AI 4-20mAdc 0.03-6.00 mg/l510-PLC-1 009-N-58 510-PIT-5841 W3L PRESS AI 4-20mAdc 0-30 PSIG510-PLC-1 009-N-58 510-FIT-5851 W3L FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-1 MGD510-PLC-1 009-N-59 510-FIT-5951 HIGH PRESSURE W3 FLOWMETER FLOW AI 4-20mAdc 0-1 MGD510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-OXY-6261 DIGESTER BUILDING OXYGEN (6) AI 4-20mAdc 0-25 %510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-XP-6231 DIGESTER BUILDING COMBUSTIBLE GAS (6) AI 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-SC-2701 W-1 DEWATERING WELL PUMP SPEED COMMAND AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-SC-2706 W-6 DEWATERING WELL PUMP LEVEL (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-33 510-SC-3303 MIXING PUMP NO. 3 SPEED COMMAND (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-SC-3614 XFER PUMP 2 STROKE PACE AO 4-20mAdc STROKES/HR STROKES510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-SC-3601 DSD GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 SPEED COMMAND (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-TSP-3791 TEMPERATURE SETPOINT (4) AO 4-20mAdc 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-%LD-3901 % LOAD TO RUN (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-41 510-ZC-4101 DIGESTER NO. 1 HEX BYPASS VALVE POSITION CONTROL (3) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-42 510-ZC-4211 BOILER VALVE POSITION CONTROL (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-58 510-SC-5801 LOW PRESS W3 PUMP NO.1 SPEED COMMAND (2) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-59 510-SC-5901 W3 PUMP NO.1 SPEED COMMAND (4) AO 4-20mAdc 0-100 %510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-AUT-2701 W-1 DEWATERING WELL PUMP IN AUTO DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-AUT-2706 W-6 DEWATERING WELL PUMP IN AUTO DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-AUT-2707 W-7 DEWATERING WELL PUMP IN AUTO DI 120VAC NOT IN AUTO IN AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-LSH-2799 SIGHT WELL HIGH LEVEL ALARM DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-32 521-AUT-3201 DIGESTER MIXER NO. 1 AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-32 521-STOP-3201 DIGESTER MIXER NO. 1 E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-32 521-MAN-3201 DIGESTER MIXER NO. 1 HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT IN HAND IN HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-33 523-AUT-3303 MIXING PUMP NO. 3 AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-33 523-ESTP-3303 MIXING PUMP NO. 3 ESTOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-33 523-MAN-3303 MIXING PUMP NO. 3 HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT IN HAND IN HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-34 510-ZSO/C-3401A DIG FEED VALVE OPENED/CLOSED (8) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED510-PLC-1 009-N-34 510-LR-03401A DIG FEED VALVE LOCAL/REMOTE (4) DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE510-PLC-1 009-N-34 510-ESTP-3401 DIGESTER RECIRC PUMP E-STOP (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-34 510-MAN-3401 DIGESTER RECIRC PUMP HAND (3) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-34 510-AUT-3401 DIGESTER RECIRC PUMP AUTO (3) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-34 510-MOT-3401 DIGESTER RECIRC PUMP OVERTEMP (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL OVERTEMP510-PLC-1 009-N-35 510-ESTP-3503 DIGESTER NO. 3 RECIRC PUMP E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-35 510-MAN-3503 DIGESTER NO. 3 RECIRC PUMP HAND DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-35 510-AUT-3503 DIGESTER NO. 3 RECIRC PUMP AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-35 510-ZSO/C-3503A DIGESTER NO. 3 FEED VALVE OPENED/CLOSED (4) DI 120VAC NOT OPENED/NOT CLOSED OPENED/CLOSED510-PLC-1 009-N-35 510-LR-3503A DIGESTER NO. 3 FEED VALVE LOCAL/REMOTE (2) DI 120VAC LOCAL REMOTE510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-MF-3614 XFER PUMP 2 FAIL DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-STK-3614E/R XFER PUMP 2 STROKES (2) DI 120VAC NOT STROKE COUNT STROKE COUNT510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-LR-3614 XFER PUMP 2 REMOTE DI 120VAC NOT IN REMOTE IN REMOTE510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-ESTP-3613 SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMP NO. 1 E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-MAN-3613 SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMP NO. 1 HAND DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-AUT-3613 SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMP NO. 1 AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-PSH-3602 DSD GBT FEED PUMP NO. 2 HIGH PRESSURE DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH PRESSURE510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-PSH-3601 DSD GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 HIGH PRESSURE DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH PRESSURE510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-ESTP-3601 DSD GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-MAN-3601 DSD GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-AUT-3601 DSD GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-LSL-3751 FOAM SEPARATOR LSL DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-AUT-3706 AUTO DRIP TRAP (LOWER) IN AUTO (4) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-ALM-3706 AUTO DRIP TRAP (LOWER) ALARM (4) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-AUT-3761 AUTO DRIP TRAP (UPPER) IN AUTO DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-ALM-3761 AUTO DRIP TRAP (UPPER) ALARM DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-ESTP-3701 BOILER ROOM ENTRANCE E-STOP DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM





510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-YA-3701 BOILER ALARM (4) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-RU-3705 BURNER PILOT OUT DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-YA-3705 BURNER SYSTEM FAIL DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-38 510-LCP-3811 GAS COMPRESSION READY DI 120VAC NOT READY READY510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-MS-3901 GENERATOR RUNNING (2) DI 120VAC UNLOADED LOADED510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-ATS-CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER POSITIONS (8) DI 120VAC NORMAL IN TEST510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-ATS-SL SHED LOAD DI 120VAC NORMAL IN TEST510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-ATS-LD GENERATOR LOADED (2) DI 120VAC UNLOADED LOADED510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-ATS-AVAIL UTILITY POWER AVAILABLE DI 120VAC OFF ON510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-ATS-TEST SWITCHGEAR IN TEST MODE DI 120VAC NORMAL IN TEST510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-AUTO-3901 GENERATOR NO. 1 NOT IN AUTO (2) DI 120VAC IN AUTO NOT IN AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-ALM-3901 GEN SYSTEM COMMON ALARM (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-ESTP-3901 GENERATOR NO. 1 ESTOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-40 510-ESTP-4001 GENERATOR NO.1 HEX PUMP E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-40 510-MAN-4001 GENERATOR NO.1 HEX PUMP HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-40 510-AUT-4001 GENERATOR NO.1 HEX PUMP AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-41 510-ESTP-4101 DIGESTER NO.1 HEX PUMP E-STOP (3) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-41 510-MAN-4101 DIGESTER NO.1 HEX PUMP HAND (3) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-41 510-AUT-4101 DIGESTER NO.1 HEX PUMP AUTO (3) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-42 510-ESTP-4201 BOILER PUMP NO.1 E-STOP (4) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-42 510-MAN-4201 BOILER PUMP NO.1 HAND (4) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-42 510-AUT-4201 BOILER PUMP NO.1 AUTO (4) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-DPSL-4321 PRIMARY PUMPS LOW DP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL LOW DP510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-ESTP-4321 PRIMARY HOT WATER PUMP NO. 1 E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-MAN-4321 PRIMARY HOT WATER PUMP NO. 1 HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-AUT-4321 PRIMARY HOT WATER PUMP NO. 1 AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-ESTP-4301 STRUCTURE HEATING PUMP NO. 1 E-STOP (8) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-MAN-4301 STRUCTURE HEATING PUMP NO. 1 HAND (8) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-AUT-4301 STRUCTURE HEATING PUMP NO. 1 AUTO (8) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-46 530-MF-4605 MIXING PUMP FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL510-PLC-1 009-N-46 530-MS-4605 MIXING PUMP RUNNING (2) DI 120VAC NOT RUNNING RUNNING510-PLC-1 009-N-57 510-ESTP-5701 EFFLUENT/GLYCOL PUMP E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-57 510-MAN-5701 EFFLUENT/GLYCOL PUMP HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-57 510-AUT-5701 EFFLUENT/GLYCOL PUMP AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-DPSH-2701 AUTO AIR W3 STRAINER HIGH DP DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH DP510-PLC-1 009-N-58 510-ALM-5811 OP SAMPLER ALARM DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-58 510-ESTP-5801 LOW PRESS W3 PUMP NO.1 E-STOP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-58 510-MAN-5801 LOW PRESS W3 PUMP NO.1 HAND (2) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-58 510-AUT-5801 LOW PRESS W3 PUMP NO.1 AUTO (2) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-59 510-ESTP-5901 W3 PUMP NO.1 E-STOP (4) DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-59 510-MAN-5901 W3 PUMP NO.1 HAND (4) DI 120VAC NOT HAND HAND510-PLC-1 009-N-59 510-AUT-5901 W3 PUMP NO.1 AUTO (4) DI 120VAC NOT AUTO AUTO510-PLC-1 009-N-59 510-PDSH-5921 W3 STRAINER NO.1 HIGH DP (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL HIGH DP510-PLC-1 009-N-59 510-MS-5921 W3 STRAINER NO.1 RUNNING (2) DI 120VAC NOT RUNNING RUNNING510-PLC-1 009-N-59 510-EF-5921 W3 STRAINER NO.1 EQUIPMENT FAIL (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL FAIL510-PLC-1 009-N-60 510-PSL-6001 AIR COMPRESSOR LOW/HIGH PRESSURE (2) DI 120VAC NORMAL LOW/HIGH PRESSURE510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-ZS-6281 FOB OPERATED DOOR INTRUSION (6) DI 120VAC NORMAL INTRUSION510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-TCP-1 DIGESTER COMPLEX LOSS OF AIR FLOW 1 DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-TCP-2 DIGESTER COMPLEX LOSS OF AIR FLOW 2 DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-TCP-3 DIGESTER COMPLEX LOSS OF AIR FLOW 3 DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-TCP-4 DIGESTER GAS BOILERS COMBUSTION AIR TROUBLE DI 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-MC-2701 W-1 DEWATERING WELL PUMP REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-LSL-2701 W-1 DEWATERING WELL PUMP LOW LEVEL CUTOUT RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-LSH-2701 W-1 DEWATERING WELL PUMP HIGH LEVEL ALARM RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-MC-2706 W-6 DEWATERING WELL PUMP REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-LSL-2706 W-6 DEWATERING WELL PUMP LOW LEVEL CUTOUT (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-27 510-LSH-2706 W-6 DEWATERING WELL PUMP HIGH LEVEL ALARM (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-32 510-MC-3201 DIGESTER MIXER NO. 1 REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-33 510-MC-3303 MIXING PUMP NO. 3 REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-34 510-ZCO/C-3401A DIG FEED VALVE REMOTE CTO/CTC (8) RO 120VAC OPEN/NOT OPENING CLOSE/NOT CLOSING510-PLC-1 009-N-34 510-MC-3401 DIGESTER RECIRC PUMP REQUIRED (3) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-35 510-MC-3503 DIGESTER NO. 3 RECIRC PUMP REQUIRED RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-35 510-ZCO/C-3503A DIGESTER NO. 3 FEED VALVE REMOTE CTO/CTC (4) RO 120VAC OPEN/NOT OPENING CLOSE/NOT CLOSING510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-MC-3613 SLUDGE TRANSFER PUMP NO. 1 REQUIRED RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-36 510-MC-3601 DSD GBT FEED PUMP NO. 1 REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-HS-3701 BOILER BG/NG (2) RO 120VAC DG NG510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-MCA-3701 BOILER AUTO START (4) RO 120VAC SHUTDOWN START510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-MCA-3705 BURNER AUTO START RO 120VAC SHUTDOWN START510-PLC-1 009-N-38 510-MC-3811 GAS COMPRESSION REQUIRED RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-GAS-3901 BG/NG SELECTION (2) RO 120VAC BIOGAS SELECTED NATURAL GAS SLECTED





510-PLC-1 009-N-40 510-MC-4001 GENERATOR NO.1 HEX PUMP REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-41 510-MC-4101 DIGESTER NO.1 HEX PUMP REQUIRED (3) RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-42 510-MC-4201 BOILER PUMP NO.1 REQUIRED (4) RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-MC-4321 PRIMARY HOT WATER PUMP NO. 1 REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-MC-4301 STRUCTURE HEATING PUMP NO. 1 REQUIRED (8) RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-57 510-MC-2701 EFFLUENT/GLYCOL PUMP REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-58 510-MC-5801 LOW PRESS W3 PUMP NO.1 REQUIRED (2) RO 120VAC NORMAL REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-59 510-MC-5901 W3 PUMP NO.1 REQUIRED (4) RO 120VAC NOT REQUIRED REQUIRED510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-AAS-6251 LOWER GAS ALARM ALARM LAMP RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-AAS-6241 UPPER GAS ALARM ALARM LAMP (4) RO 120VAC NORMAL ALARM510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-TCP-5 BIOGAS GENERATOR RUNNING RO 120VAC NOT RUNNING GENERATOR RUNNING510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-TCP-6 PREHEAT COIL BYPASS RO 120VAC NORMAL BYPASS510-PLC-1 009-N-62 510-TCP-7 COMBUSTIBLE GAS DETECTED RO 120VAC NORMAL GAS DETECTED510-PLC-1 009-N-34 510-TE-3411H/C HEAT EXCHANGER NO. 1 TEMP (4) RTD Ohm 30-120 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-35 510-TE-3533H HEAT EXCHANGER 3 DISCH TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 30-120 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-35 510-TE-3533C HEAT EXCHANGER 3 INLET TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 30-120 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-37 510-TE-3781 OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm -20 TO +120 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-38 510-TE-3831 BIOGAS TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-120 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-TE-3941 WATER DISCH TEMPERATURE (2) RTD Ohm 0-120 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-39 510-TE-3931 WATER INLET TEMPERATURE (2) RTD Ohm 0-120 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-40 510-TE-4031 HEX HWS NO.2 TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-40 510-TE-4032 HEX HWS NO.1 TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-41 510-TE-4113 DIGESTER NO. 3 HEX TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-41 510-TE-4112 DIGESTER NO. 2 HEX TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-41 510-TE-4111 DIGESTER NO. 1 HEX TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-42 510-TE-4253 NATURAL GAS BOILERS TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-42 510-TE-4255 BOILER PUMP NO.4 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-42 510-TE-4254 BOILER PUMP NO.3 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-42 510-TE-4251 BOILER PUMP NO.3 SUCTION SIDE TEMPERATURE (2) RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-43 510-TE-4321 HWS STRAINER TEMP RTD Ohm 0-220 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-57 510-TE-5733 GLYCOL HEX TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-120 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-57 510-TIT-2711 W3 TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-120 °F510-PLC-1 009-N-57 510-TE-5743 W3L HEX TEMPERATURE RTD Ohm 0-120 °F

001-PLC-1 008-I-7 COMPRESSOR 1 RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNING001-PLC-1 008-I-7 COMPRESSOR 2 RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNING001-PLC-1 008-I-7 POT 1 FAIL DI NOT FAIL FAIL001-PLC-1 008-I-7 POT 2 FAIL DI NOT FAIL FAIL001-PLC-1 008-I-7 SPARE 1 DI001-PLC-1 008-I-7 SPARE 2 DI001-PLC-1 008-I-7 FLOOD ALARM DI NORMAL FLOOD001-PLC-1 008-I-7 CONTROL PANEL ENTRY DI NORMAL INTRUSION001-PLC-1 008-I-7 COMMUNICATIONS FAIL NORMAL COMM FAIL

LIFT PUMP 1 RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNINGLIFT PUMP 2 RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNINGLIFT PUMP 1 FAIL DI NOT FAIL FAILLIFT PUMP 2 FAIL DI NOT FAIL FAILHIGH WET WELL ALARM DI NORMAL ALARMLOW WET WELL ALARM DI NORMAL ALARMSPARE 1 (FUTURE) DISPARE 2 (FUTURE) DISPARE 3 (FUTURE) DISUMP FLOOD DI NORMAL FLOODCONTROL PANEL ENTRY DI NORMAL INTRUSIONCOMMUNICATIONS FAIL NORMAL COMM FAIL

LIFT PUMP 1 RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNINGLIFT PUMP 2 RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNINGLIFT PUMP 1 FAIL DI NOT FAIL FAILLIFT PUMP 2 FAIL DI NOT FAIL FAILHIGH WET WELL ALARM DI NORMAL ALARMLOW WET WELL ALARM DI NORMAL ALARMSPARE 1 (FUTURE) DISPARE 2 (FUTURE) DISPARE 3 (FUTURE) DI

THE I/O LIST AT RIGHT IS COMMON FOR THEFOLLOWING LIFT STATION PLC'S: 002-PLC-1/004-PLC-1/006-PLC-1/007-PLC-1/008-PLC-1/009-PLC-

1/011-PLC-1/013-PLC-1/016-PLC-1/018-PLC-1/022-PLC-1/023-PLC-1/027-PLC-1 (SEE DRAWING 008-I-

7)

THE I/O LIST AT RIGHT IS COMMON FOR THEFOLLOWING LIFT STATION PLC'S: 003-PLC-1/010-PLC-1/012-PLC-1/017-PLC-1/025-PLC-1/026-PLC-

1/028-PLC-1 (SEEDRAWING 008-I-7)





AIR TEMPERATURE LOW DI NORMAL TEMP LOWCONTROL PANEL ENTRY DI NORMAL INTRUSIONCOMMUNICATIONS FAIL NORMAL COMM FAIL

LIFT PUMP 1 RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNINGLIFT PUMP 2 RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNINGLIFT PUMP 3 RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNINGLIFT PUMP 1 FAIL DI NOT FAIL FAILLIFT PUMP 2 FAIL DI NOT FAIL FAILLIFT PUMP 3 FAIL DI NOT FAIL FAILHIGH WET WELL ALARM DI NORMAL ALARMLOW WET WELL ALARM DI NORMAL ALARMPOWER FAILURE DI NORMAL FAILUREGENERATOR RUNNING DI NOT RUNNING RUNNINGGENERATOR FAIL DI NORMAL FAILSPARE 1 (FUTURE) DISPARE 2 (FUTURE) DISPARE 3 (FUTURE) DISUMP FLOOD DI NORMAL FLOODCONTROL PANEL ENTRY DI NORMAL INTRUSIONCOMMUNICATIONS FAIL NORMAL COMM FAILINFLUENT FLOW AIWET WELL LEVEL AI FTSPARE 1 (FUTURE) AIPUMP 1 (FUTURE) SPEED AI 0-100 %PUMP 2 (FUTURE) SPEED AI 0-100 %PUMP 3 (FUTURE) SPEED AI 0-100 %

019-PLC-1 008-I-7 RIVER LEVEL AI 0-30 FT019-PLC-1 008-I-7 POWER FAILURE DI NORMAL FAILURE

021-PLC-1 008-I-7 RIVER LEVEL AI 0-30 FT021-PLC-1 008-I-7 POWER FAILURE DI NORMAL FAILURE

THE I/O LIST AT RIGHT IS COMMON FOR THEFOLLOWING LIFT STATION PLC: 015-PLC-1

(SEE DRAWING 008-I-7)

NOTE 2: I/O LIST ASSUMES OWNER SELECTS ANY AND ALL ALTERNATES ON THE PROJECT.

NOTE 1: I/O LIST ONLY ENUMERATES HARDWIRED POINTS. I/O COMMUNICATED OVER ETHERNET OR OTHER MEANS TO THE PLC'S ARE NOT SHOWN.



Donohue & Associates, Inc. PCS EQUIPMENTProject No. 12026 13483-1

SECTION 13483 PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM (PCS) EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment provided in this section shall conform to following.

1. HMI Computer Equipment: Section 13452.2. SCADA Software: Section 13454.3. Plant Communications: Section 13455.

B. Provide equipment listed below and as shown on Drawings.

Tag Description Equipment Type Ref. Section300-SERV-1 Server Class Machine Wonderware Primary Server 13452-2.01300-WS-1 Desktop Computer Wonderware Dev/Runtime Machine 13452-2.02300-SEC-1 Desktop Computer BIN/CCTV/Security Machine 13452-2.02300-MON-1 46” Monitor 300-SERV-1 Monitor 1 of 4 13452-2.03300-MON-2 24” Monitor 300-SERV-1 Monitor 2 of 4 13452-2.03300-MON-3 24” Monitor 300-SERV-1 Monitor 3 of 4 13452-2.03300-MON-4 24” Monitor 300-SERV-1 Monitor 4 of 4 13452-2.03300-MON-5 24” Monitor 300-WS-1 Monitor 13452-2.03300-MON-6 46” Monitor 300-SEC-1 Monitor 1 of 2 13452-2.03300-MON-7 24” Monitor 300-SEC-1 Monitor 2 of 2 13452-2.03*300-PTCH-1 Patch Panel FOC Patch Panel 13455-2.05*300-PTCH-2 Patch Panel FOC Patch Panel By Owner*300-SW-1 Network Switch Ethernet Switch By Owner*300-SW-2 Network Switch Ethernet Switch By Owner*300-SW-3 Network Switch Ethernet Switch By Owner300-PTR-1 Printer Network Printer 13452-2.04300-FW-1 Firewall Network Firewall By Owner

405-WS-1 Desktop Computer Wonderware Runtime Machine 13452-2.02405-MON-1 24” Monitor 405-WS-1 Monitor 13452-2.03*405-SW-1 Network Switch Ethernet Switch By Owner*405-SW-2 Network Switch Ethernet Switch By Owner*405-PTCH-1 Patch Panel FOC Patch Panel 13455-2.05

436-HIST-1 Server Class Machine Wonderware Historian/FailoverServer 13452-2.01

436-WS-1 Desktop Computer Wonderware Runtime Machine 13452-2.02436-MON-1 24” Monitor 436-HIST-1 Monitor 13452-2.03436-MON-2 26” Monitor 436-WS-1 Monitor 13452-2.03*436-PTCH-1 Patch Panel FOC Patch Panel 13455-2.05*436-SW-1 Network Switch Ethernet Switch By Owner

PCS EQUIPMENT Donohue & Associates, Inc.13483-2 Project No. 12026

*436-SW-2 Network Switch Ethernet Switch By Owner



* Devices also listed in Section 13402 – Process Control System.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install and wire in accordance with Drawings, manufacturer's written instructions, andapproved submittals.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – CONFIGURATION SERVICESProject No. 12026 13491-1

SECTION 13491PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - CONFIGURATION SERVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Configuration of Process Control System (PCS) in conjunction with following sections.

1. Section 13402 – Process Control System2. Section 13482 – Process Control System - I/O List

B. Conform to Section 13400 – Process Instrumentation and Control.

PART 2 – SERVICES

2.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide configuration services for Process Control System HMI computers, Control PanelPLCs, Lift Station PLC’s, and for Multifunction Display/Keypads (HKUs).

B. Graphic displays (screens) shall be formatted as schematic or symbolic representations ofequipment shown on drawings.

1. Where possible, maintain display (screens) of existing lift station application.

a) Existing lift station application screens may require modification due to resolution oraspect ratio changes due to new hardware.

C. Provide, as a minimum, one graphic display per major piece of process equipment.

2.02 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Configuration Services for Process Control System shall be provided by System Integrator.

1. PLC programming shall utilize RSLogix 500 and RSLogix 5000 Programming software(latest edition).

2. HMI programming shall utilize WonderWare In-Touch 2012 software.

2.03 PLC PROGRAMMING GUIDELINES

A. Setpoints, alarm values, timer values, control loop tuning parameters, and other numericvalues used within PLC and HMI programs shall be part of continuous common data tablewithin program. Parameter changes shall not require modification to instructions withinprogram. Parameter changes shall be adjustable by changing data table through operatorinput via HMI.

B. Unless specified otherwise, procedure for control power fail Restart for equipment shall be asfollows:

1. Equipment shall shut down on loss of control power.2. Upon restoration of power, previously running equipment shall be restarted using same

sequence of startup used for “Auto” control.3. Prior to Restart, Auxiliary equipment shall be placed in “Off” position.

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – CONFIGURATION SERVICES Donohue & Associates, Inc.13491-2 Project No. 12026

4. Equipment Restart shall be sequenced through use of timer functions to preventsimultaneous restart.

C. PLC shall not be Enabled to control equipment unless respective field Hand/Off/Auto,On/Off/Remote or Open/Close/Remote selector switch is in “Remote” or “Auto” position.Equipment status monitoring/ displaying and process parameter logging/ trending shallcontinue in all modes of control.

D. Determination of high (low) Off-Normal conditions shall be by Comparing an analog inputvalue to operator entered setpoint values. Off-Normal status bit shall be Set when rising(falling) input value is equal or greater (less) than entered setpoint value. Off-Normal statusbit shall be Reset when falling (rising) input value is equal or less (greater) than enteredsetpoint value minus (plus) entered deadband value. Operator entered high (low) setpointvalues are absolute values and deadband values are relative values. All values are enteredthrough HMI.

E. Setting of Off-Normal status bits shall cause status conditions to be displayed and/oralarmed at HMI.

F. Resetting Off-Normal status bits shall cause status conditions displayed and/or alarmed atHMI to be Cleared.

G. Adjustable delay timers on alarm points shall prevent nuisance Alarming or nuisanceClearing of alarms. Timer values shall be 0-30 seconds. Initial settings, unless otherwisespecified in Functional Descriptions, shall be 5 sec.

H. All status conditions alarmed at HMI shall also be Logged to data table.

I. Motor Running status shall be monitored and displayed at HMI continuously.

J. Setting of Motor Failed status bits:

1. If motor is required to run via PLC control (control station Hand/Off/Auto selector switchin “Auto”),

2. And If absence of Motor Running status causes Motor Fail watchdog timer to time out,3. Then Motor Failed status bit shall be Set.

M. Setting a Motor Failed status bit shall cause motor command output to be inhibited and shallcause Motor Failed status to be displayed and alarmed at HMI.

N. Resetting of Motor Failed status bits:

1. If control station Hand/Off/Auto selector switch is in “Auto” position,2. And if HMI On/Off/Auto control function is cycled to “Off” position from either “On” or

“Auto” positions,3. Then Motor Failed status bit shall be Reset.

O. Resetting a Motor Failed status bit shall cause motor command output to be re-enabled andshall cause Motor Failed status displayed and alarmed at HMI to be Cleared.

P. Unless otherwise specified in Functional Descriptions, following watchdog timer values shallcause equipment fail status bits to be Set:

1. Valve fail to open: 30 sec.2. Valve fail to close: 30 sec.3. Equipment fail to start: 30 sec.


Q. Adjustable filtering of analog inputs shall eliminate process upsets due to noise. Filteringshall be by running-average method.

R. Integration algorithm shall be included for “Totalizing” analog flow signals.

S. Integration algorithm shall be included for “Totalizing” Equipment Run times (Elapsed TimeMeter).

T. Proportional/Integral/Derivative (PID) control outputs shall utilize sample and hold algorithm.Intent is to allow slow reacting processes to stabilize before additional control output changesare made by maintaining constant output from PID control for adjustable time period. PIDcontrol shall utilize deviation setpoints to reactivate controller in event deviation is exceededduring controller Off time. Unless specified otherwise in Functional Descriptions, Off timeshall be adjustable 0-30 min.

U. PLC input coils shall be configured as non-latched unless specified otherwise.

V. PLC output contacts shall be configured as maintained unless specified otherwise.

2.04 HMI COMPUTER PROGRAMMING GUIDELINES

A. Screens:

1. Overview screens and reports shall be first screens configured. Coordinate layout andinformation requirements with Owner prior to development of screens.

2. Graphic screens for HMI shall be formatted to resemble P&IDs. As a minimum, onegraphic display per process loop shall be provided.

3. Screens shall be simplified representation of process flow stream and associatedequipment as shown on drawings. Only major devices shall be shown. Non-reportingequipment (isolation valves, check valves, indicators) shall not be shown.

4. In addition to process related display screens, the following shall also be provided:

a. Main Screen: Director for all other screens. Selection of any other screens shall beby cursor pick of description for that screen or function key identifier for that screen.

b. Utility Screen: Equipment status, Motor Run totalizer (hrs).c. Alarm Screens: Screen for points in alarm as selected by alarm selection matrix and

screen for equipment in off-normal state (ie. Out of Service).d. Data Screens: Listing of all Operator and Engineering entered values.e. Trend Screen: Operator selected points for trending.f. Report Screen: Operator initiated report generator.

4. Operator and Engineering screens shall be segregated to allow password protection ofenginering-entered values.

5. There shall be pick-fields on all screens that will allow for return to main menu or toadjacent process flow screen (continuation of all process flow paths, either entering orexisting).

6. Pick-fields shall be activated by placing mouse cursor on object or text and clicking leftmouse button, or by selection of associated function key (F1-F12).

B. External I/O Poll Times:

1. External I/O poll times shall be set initially as specified in section 13482 – ProcessControl System – I/O List.

C. Data Input:


1. Data entry areas shall be provided at HMI for adjustment of process and alarm setpoints.Data entry areas shall be password protected.

2. Upper and lower limits shall be provided for all data entry values. Entry of values outsideof limits shall not be accepted and shall generate appropriate error message on screen.Upper and lower limit values shall be adjustable at HMI and shall be password protected.

3. Upper and lower limits shall be provided for all logged analog input values. Loggedvalues outside of limits shall generate appropriate alarm. Upper and lower limit valuesshall be adjustable at HMI and shall be password protected.

4. Upper and lower limits shall determine range of analog input value. Value shall bescaled in standard Engineering Units.

5. Password protection shall consist of alpha-numeric sequence and shall be intended forPlant Supervisor and Head Operator entry only.

6. Unless otherwise specified in Functional Descriptions, process points shall be scannedas follows:

a. Critical Alarm points and analog input process points shall be scanned continuously.b. General Alarm points shall be scanned only on change of state into alarm condition.c. All other points scanned only when required for display at HMI.

7. All dynamic screen displays shall be updated every 2 seconds, minimum.

D. Display Obects – General

1. Process piping and pumps/fans/mixers may be animated with color to show active/non-active status.

2. Tankage shall be rendered in 3D.3. Use graphic symbology for rendering of objects.

E. Display Objects – Process Lines and Inline Device Symbology

1. Where inline devices are dynamic in nature, their equipment symbols shall be formattedas Display Objects to change color based upon feedback. Coordinate color use withOwner’s existing HMI configuration. Coordinate and confirm with Owner the followingcolor scheme:

a. Off – Blue.b. On – Green.c. Required (call to run) - Yellow.d. Warning/Status – Amber, Solid.e. Fail/Alarm (un-acknowledged) – Red, Flashing.f. Fail/Alarm (acknowledged) – Red, Solid.

2. Inline devices shall have alphanumeric tag identified near them, adjacent to associatedsymbol.

3. Arrow heads shall be used as pointers for flow direction at all points of entrance toequipment, at all points where process lines change direction and at points of merger.

4. Process lines entering or leaving screen shall have points of continuation identified byboxed text, indicating From/To screen. One end of box shall form arrow to showdirection of flow and act as pick-field for selection of screen of continuation. Color shallbe same as associated process line.

5. Process lines shall be identified with flow stream abbreviation as listed in standardsymbolic table and as shown on P&IDs, where convenient.

F. Display Objects – Large Equipment Symbology

1. Symbol shape shall be simple reflection of true shape of equipment being depicted.


2. Outline color shall be white.3. Equipment tag and description name shall be located within shape. If not practical,

locate near shape. Text shall be white and enclosed in white border box. For example:

a. Tank levels shall be displayed within tank symbol as vertical bar, with bar colorrepresentative of fluid within tank.

b. Tank level bar height shall be proportional to analog input value scaled from 0 to100%. 100% shall be equal to full vertical height of symbol.

G. Display Objects – Data Fields

1. Analog process data not conducive to graphic symbology shall be formatted asrectangular Data Fields:

2. Process values (i.e. Flow, pH, D.O., Elapsed Time) shall be displayed as Data Fieldsnear associated device symbol and shall consist of: alphanumeric tag, green in color;data value, white in color, right justified; engineering unit, green in color. Entire field shallbe grouped as one block.

3. Data Fields shall be configured with high and low limits as described above.

H. Display Objects – Status Displays

1. Status Displays shall be similar to Data Fields but shall be linked to discrete data pointsor status bits:

2. Discrete equipment parameters (i.e. Run, Fail, On/Off, Open/ Close) shall be indicatedas rectangular Status Displays and shall consist of: alphanumeric tag, green in color;single or dual-state equipment value, white in color, center justified. Entire field shall begrouped as one block.

3. Displays shall be classified as Alarms or Events (see below).

I. Control Objects

1. Control Objects shall reside on graphic screens as either visible objects or as pop-upobjects.

2. Visible Control Objects shall be restricted to simple functions. For example:

a. Single-State Pushbutton (i.e. Reset, Silence, Acknowledge, GoTo):

Display alphanumeric tag of equipment or function to be manipulated. Function shallbe independent of equipment control mode. There shall be graphic representation ofone pushbutton, black in color with white or green text, center justified. Button shallact as pick-field and when selected by cursor and activated by clicking left mousebutton, shall generate programmed output. Output shall not latch. Button, whenactivated, shall highlight with white border.

b. Dual-State Pushbutton (i.e. Open/Close, On/Off, Start/Stop):

Display alphanumeric tag of equipment or function to be manipulated. Function shallbe dependent upon equipment control mode. There shall be graphic representationof one pushbutton, black in color with white or green text, center justified. Buttonshall act as pick-field and when selected by cursor and activated by clicking leftmouse button, shall generate programmed output. Pick-field shall indicate change ofstate by changing text within object and/or changing color. Output shall latch,requiring mouse click to toggle back to original state. Button, when activated, shallhighlight with white border.

c. Data Entry Field:


Similar to Data Display Field described above. Allows operator entry of processvalues such as setpoints.

3. Pop-up activation for dynamic control of equipment shall be by pick-fields associatedwith symbol of device to be controlled. Pop-up shall be small window or graphic overlayon current screen in location that will not interfere with current operation. Pop-up willcontain necessary symbolism for dynamic control and worded prompts as necessary.Examples of pop-up Control Objects:

a. PID Controller Faceplate:

Display alphanumeric tag of final element being controlled. Mode of fieldHand/Off/Auto, On/Off/Remote or Open/Close/Remote selector switch shall bedisplayed. If in Auto, word "Auto" shall be displayed next to controller. If not in Auto,word "Hand" or “Off” shall be displayed – depending on field condition. Setpoint,Process Variable, and Control Variable shall be displayed in vertical bargraph anddigital formats. Bargraph shall be graduated scale equal to range of final element.Display bar shall be equal in length to graduated scale. Setpoint and ProcessVariables shall be scaled in engineering units. Control Variable shall be scaled inpercent of output. There shall be a graphic representation of a two-positionpushbutton set (see below) labeled as “Auto-Manual” and shall act as pick-field.When selected by cursor and activated by clicking left mouse button, selector shalltoggle between “Auto” and “Manual” modes of control.When selector is in “Auto”, PID controller calculates Control Variable. When selectoris in “Manual”, Control Variable output shall follow setting by operator. Control shallbe available only when selector switch is in “Auto”.

b. Flow Controller Faceplate:

Display alphanumeric tag of valve being controlled. Mode of field Hand/Off/Auto,On/Off/Remote or Open/Close/Remote selector switch shall be displayed. If in Auto,word "Auto" shall be displayed next to controller. If not in Auto, word "Hand" or “Off”shall be displayed – depending on field condition. Setpoint, Process Variable, andControl Variable shall be displayed in horizontal bargraph and digital formats.Bargraph shall be graduated scale equal to range of associated flow. Display barshall be equal in length to graduated scale. Setpoint and Process Variables shall bescaled in engineering units. Control Variable shall be scaled in percent of valveposition. There shall be a graphic representation of a two-position selector (seebelow) labeled as “Auto-Manual” and shall act as pick-field. When selected by cursorand activated by clicking left mouse button, selector shall toggle between “Auto” and“Manual” modes of control. When selector is in “Auto”, Flow Controller calculatesControl Variable. When selector is in “Manual”, Control Variable output shall followsetting by operator. Control shall be available only when selector switch is in “Auto”.

c. 2-Position Pushbutton Set (i.e. Manual/Auto, Start/Stop, Open/Close):

Operationally the same as Dual-state Pushbutton described above. Displayalphanumeric tag of equipment to be controlled. Mode of field Hand/Off/Auto,On/Off/Remote or Open/Close/Remote selector switch shall be displayed. If in Auto,word "Auto" shall be displayed next to controller. If not in Auto, word "Hand" or “Off”shall be displayed – depending on field condition. There shall be graphicrepresentation of two pushbuttons, one red in color, other green in color. Buttonsshall act as pick-fields and when selected by cursor and activated by clicking leftmouse button, shall indicate and generate programmed output. Output shall remain


latched until other button is activated. Button activated shall highlight with blackborder. Pick-fields shall be available only when selector switch is in “Auto”.

d. 3-Position Pushbutton Set (i.e. Hand/Off/Auto, Open/Stop/Close):

Display alphanumeric tag of equipment to be controlled. Mode of fieldHand/Off/Auto, On/Off/Remote or Open/Close/Remote selector switch shall bedisplayed. If in Auto, word "Auto" shall be displayed next to controller. If not in Auto,word "Hand" or “Off” shall be displayed – depending on field condition. There shallbe graphic representation of three pushbuttons, one red in color, one green in color,other white (amber) in color. Buttons shall act as pick-fields and when selected bycursor and activated by clicking left mouse button, shall indicate and generateprogrammed output. Output shall remain latched until another button is activated.Button activated shall highlight with black border. Pick-fields shall be available onlywhen selector switch is in “Remote”.

e. Analog Output Control (i.e. “Speed-Pot”, Process Setpoint Control):

Display alphanumeric tag of equipment to be controlled. Mode of fieldHand/Off/Auto, On/Off/Remote or Open/Close/Remote selector switch shall bedisplayed. If in Auto, word "Auto" shall be displayed next to controller. If not in Auto,word "Hand" or “Off” shall be displayed – depending on field condition. AnalogOutput Control shall be displayed in vertical (horizontal) bargraph and digitalformats. Bargraph shall be graduated scale equal to range of output. Display barshall be equal in length to graduated scale. Process Variable units shall be scaled inengineering units. Speed or Valve Position units shall be scaled in percent of output.Control shall be available only when selector switch is in “Auto”.

4. Pop-up Control Objects shall not be continually visible. Functions become complexdepending upon numbers and types of smaller objects grouped together to create them.For example, a valve control object might be created by grouping a 2-PositionPushbutton Set (Hand/Off/Auto), a 3-Position Position Pushbutton Set(Open/Stop/Close) and Status Display Objects (Open, Closed) together.

J. Alarming Requirements

1. Alarms and Events shall be logged to data file.2. Fire Alarm Control Panel alarming shall notify local fire department and law enforcement

agencies with local jurisdiction covering the WWTP.3. Alarms shall fall within one of following categories.

a. Critical:

Alarms displayed and annunciated at local HMI and broadcast to main plant, loggedto alarm printer, and broadcast over WIN 911 software after normal hours.

b. General:

Alarms displayed and annunciated at local HMI and logged to alarm printer.

4. Provide alarm summary screen(s) at HMI.5. Display only current alarms. Acknowledged alarms which are no longer active shall not

be displayed.6. Allow Operator to acknowledge alarms using single keystroke or cursor pick at alarm

summary screen.


7. Allow Supervisor level the ability to alter critical/general/dial-out functionality of eachalarm.

8. Alarm Display shall include following information:

a. Time and date alarm initially occurred.b. Alarm point identification.c. Alarm value and engineering units for alarms generated from analog process points.d. Description of alarm (up to 40 characters).

9. Events shall be logged to separate data file. Events shall not be displayed unless evokedand shall not be annunciated.

10. In addition to the above, an alarm matrix shall be developed for expanding upon basicWonderware alarming features which allow the Operator to select which alarms shalltransmit a tone over the Plant speaker system when active.

11. One alarm matrix shall be developed for in-plant alarms, and one alarm matrix for liftstation alarms. Two distinct tones are available at the existing paging system.

12. Plant Paging System shall also notify Operator when call button at either gate is pushed.Feature is inhibited when respective gate is in the open position (during normal workinghours).

13. The Operator shall have the ability to silence alarm tones during off hours or weekendsautomatically using a 7-day 24-hour selection matrix.

14. The alarm silence feature shall also have a manual override.

K. Data Logging requirements – Analog and Discrete

1. All input process points shall be logged to the hard disk of the HMI computer.2. Procedure for data collection and storage shall be as follows:

a. HMI I/O driver shall poll process points as specified on I/O list and transfer data toimage table.

b. HMI shall scan image table for analog process points once every second, and logvalue to data base.

c. HMI shall calculate minimum, maximum and average for each analog process pointand log to data base.

d. HMI shall scan image table for discrete process points on status change only, andlog value to data base.

L. Trend Display Requirements

1. Configure HMI computer to display logged data in graphical trend format.2. Trend Display Requirements:

a. Identification of process point being displayed. Use same nomenclature as used onHMI screens.

b. Start and end time of data being displayed.c. Display shall incorporate movable vertical cursor along time axis. Parameter values

at cursor date and time shall be displayed digitally.d. Initial configuration of displays shall display data from present time back to 72 hrs

prior to present time. Provide capability for operator to enter new start time for databeing displayed to view parameter trend more than 72 hrs old.

e. Displays shall include y-axis range identification, including values and engineeringunits.

f. Configure trend displays to use maximum of computer screen area possible forpurpose of increased resolution.

g. Trend displays shall be accessible, via single keystroke, from graphic screendisplaying trended point.


3. Organize graphics screens for trend displays into categories by process:

a. Provide separate graphic screen within each category to display each process pointtrend. Provide different color for each process point.

b. Provide separate category for manually entered data from HMI computer.

M. Site Lighting

1. Provide overall site map showing outdoor lighting fixture locations (with respect to facilitystructures) and their status (off/on/%on). The ability to changes states of zone lighting[zones are process areas designated by Owner] with dimmer control shall be included.

2. Coordinate shared data, locations, quantities and functionality of lighting/controls withLighting Package System Supplier.

3. Lighting shall be enabled to 100% at locations that have observed a fire alarm condition.


3.01 PERFORMANCE

A. Configure PLCs and HMI computers consistent with drawings and specifications.

B. Provide four 2-day HMI workshops with Owner covering HMI screen navigation, set-up,alarming, trending, historian, and reporting that shall provide Owner the opportunity for inputto the creative process of HMI screen development.

C. Provide two 3-day PLC workshops with Owner covering PLC programming with respect tofunctionality of processes and equipment that shall provide Owner the opportunity for inputto the creative process of PLC programming of the process systems.

1. Coordinate any changes effecting wiring and/or equipment with Contractor and Engineer.

D. Owner has the option of dividing the time in paragraphs B and C to best suit projectprogramming effort.

E. Refer to Section 13482 – Process Control System - I/O List for information on ranges, signalfunctions, setpoints, initial values and activation points.

F. Refer to Section 11240 – Lime Slury and Delivery System – Schedule 1 for Lime SystemSCADA Mapping information on ranges, signal functions, setpoints, initial values andactivation points.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - TESTINGProject No. 12026 13492-1

SECTION 13492PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - TESTING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. In-factory and field testing requirements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. In addition to submittal requirements of Section 13400, provide following.

1. Test Results:

a. Pass/fail status of all digital I/O.b. Results of analog I/O testing.

2. Miscellaneous:

a. Detailed step-by-step in-factory and field test procedure at least 6 wks in advance ofscheduled test date. Include sign-off sheets and punch list forms and description ofconfigurations to be tested.

b. Complete inventory of equipment to be tested at factory including make, model, andserial number. Label each piece of equipment.

c. Preventive maintenance schedule.d. Repair Report Forms.e. Spares and Consumables Report.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 PREPARATION

A. In-Factory Testing Aids and Equipment:

1. Provide following documents.

a. One copy of submittals applicable to equipment to be tested.b. One copy of Drawings and Specifications, with Addenda and Change Orders.c. One master copy of test procedure.d. Complete inventory of equipment to be tested including make, model, and serial

number.

B. Meet following criteria prior to start of test.

1. Complete submittals and resolve disputes, if any.2. Engineer review of test procedure.3. Include PLC processor, PLC network interface, and HMI computer in testing.4. Coordinate test date agreeable to each party.

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - TESTING Donohue & Associates, Inc.13492-2 Project No. 12026

C. Schedule:

1. At end of test, meet to review list of deficiencies. Engineer will indicate those itemswhich must be corrected prior to shipment.

2. Confirm, in writing, times and dates 2 weeks before tests.

2.02 IN-FACTORY INSPECTION AND PLC I/O TESTING

A. In-Factory inspection and testing shall be performed at site of panel fabrication.

B. Process Control System PLC shall pass in-factory inspection and testing prior to shipment tojob site.

C. In-Factory Inspection.

1. In-Factory inspection will verify following in accordance with approved submittals:

a. Panel dimensions.b. Equipment layout.c. Wiring.d. Wire and terminal identification.

2. Verify proper access to equipment for maintenance.3. Verify proper access to field wire termination points.4. Inspect for neatness of wiring and wire harness construction.

D. In-Factory Testing and Demonstration.

1. Install PLC programming software, furnished as part of the project, to permit following:

a. Diagnostic test of PLC processor to assure proper run mode operation.b. Diagnostic test of remote I/O to assure proper operation.c. Inspection of PLC data table to allow viewing of discrete input on/off status.d. Inspection of PLC data table to view register contents when inputs are tested at 0, 4,

12, and 20 mAdc.e. Forcing of all digital outputs.f. Generation of 4, 12, and 20 mAdc signals for all analog outputs.

2. Test as follows:

a. Verify equipment and manuals against inventory lists.b. Run hardware diagnostics.c. Testing of all input and output (I/O) signals at terminal strip used for field

terminations.

1) Test change of state for all discrete inputs.2) Test analog inputs at 0, 4, 12, and 20 mAdc.3) Manipulate PLC data table or use forces to test response of all discrete output

signals.4) Manipulate PLC data table to test response of all analog output signals at 4, 12,

and 20 mAdc.

3. Correct any deficiencies discovered prior to shipment to job-site.

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - TESTINGProject No. 12026 13492-3

E. Documentation

1. Prepare in-factory inspection and testing sign-off document. Document shall includefollowing as a minimum.

a. Project description and number.b. Company name for PLC supplier, Owner, and Engineer.c. Section labeled “In-Factory Inspection”, with listing of items to be inspected as

described above.

1) For each item, include area for initials of PLC supplier, Owner, and Engineerrepresentative indicating passing of inspection.

2) Include area for handwritten notes of any corrections required.

d. Section labeled “In-Factory Testing”, with listing of items to be tested as describedabove.

1) For each item, include area for initials of PLC supplier, Owner, and Engineerrepresentative indicating passing of inspection. Include separate line for I/Opoint to be tested.


2.03 FIELD I/O AND SOFTWARE TESTING

A. General:

1. Field testing is intended to check installation of the Process Control System PLC’s inaddition to providing a diagnostic check of field equipment and wiring.

2. Field testing shall make use of operator workstation provided in Section 13452. InstallPLC programming software onto operator workstation, and provide any configurationrequired to establish Ethernet communications with the Process Control System PLC.

3. Testing shall begin after Process Control System PLC has been installed and allterminations are complete.

4. Use PLC configuration utilized for In-Factory Testing.5. Test as follows:

a. Run hardware diagnostics.b. Testing of all input and output (I/O) signals by activation or injection of signal at field

device.1) Digital input signals:

a) For all equipment run signals, test by on/off operation of equipment. Ifoperation of equipment is deemed inadvisable by Owner or PLC supplierdue to potential process upset, inaccessibility of generating device, hazardto personel or other factors, test by jumpering of motor starter auxiallycontact or other source of run signal.

b) For all alarm or status signals, test by activation of device generating alarm.If generation of alarm is deemed inadvisable by Owner or PLC supplier dueto potential process upset, inaccessibility of generating device, hazard topersonel or other factors, test by jumpering of alarm contact at nearestaccessible location to generating device.

c) For signals designated as spare, test by jumpering of signal at ProcessControl System PLC panel field termination point.

d) Demonstrate change of state in PLC data table.

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - TESTING Donohue & Associates, Inc.13492-4 Project No. 12026

2) Analog input signals:

a) Verify impedance capabilities of transmitting device has not been exceededby installation of Process Control System PLC.

b) Disconnect transmitting device and inject 0, 4, 12, and 20 mAdc into loop.c) Demostrate proper response to various signals in PLC data table.d) Verify proper response of other devices in analog loop to various signals.e) For signals designated as spare, test by injection of signal at Process

Control System PLC panel field termination point.

3) Digital output signals:

a) Manipulate PLC data table or use forces to test response of all discreteoutput signals.

b) Verify proper response of other devices in loop to signals.c) For signals designated as spare, test by checking signal at Process Control

System PLC panel field termination point.

4) Analog output signals:

a) Verify impedance capabilities of analog output is not exceeded.b) Generate 4, 12, and 20 mAdc signals for all analog outputs through PLC

data table.c) Verify proper response of other devices in analog loop to various signals.

Verify proper loop current through measurement.d) For signals designated as spare, test by measureing of signal at Process

Control System PLC panel field termination point.

6. Documentation

a. Prepare field testing sign-off document. Document shall include following as aminimum:

1) Project description and number.2) Company name for Owner, PLC supplier, and Engineer.3) For each I/O point, include area for initials of PLC supplier, Owner, and Engineer

representative indicating passing of inspection. Include separate line for I/Opoint to be tested.


7. Problem field devices or wiring.

a. Provide written documentation of any problems encountered with Owner’s existingfield devices or wiring during testing. Correction of such problems are notconsidered part of this project unless specified.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - TRAININGProject No. 12026 13494-1

SECTION 13494PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - TRAINING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Training on-site.

1.02 TRAINING

A. System Integrator’s engineer shall direct services to system and equipment operation,maintenance, troubleshooting. See Section 01615.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Include following subjects in training:

1. Overview of equipment and how it interacts with equipment and processes.2. Operation and use of control programs residing at each PLC and HMI.3. Overview of equipment areas and how they interact with field panels and instruments

and other area equipment.4. Care--taking procedures for PLC.5. Care--taking procedures for UPS.


3.01 MAINTENANCE TRAINING

A. Cover following areas as a minimum.

1. Testing programs which can isolate faults to functional area.2. Theory, logic flow, physical hardware awareness, and interface connections and

assembly of each equipment item.3. Diagnostic procedures using special and general purpose test equipment. Theory,

testing, and troubleshooting procedures given for special test equipment.4. Operation of Float Mode Backup Controller.5. Programming routines and procedures to enable students to take advantage of on-line

and standby equipment for maintenance and performance verification.6. Present short operator's course to ensure students understand operator functions and

man/machine interfaces. Explain displays and printouts so students understand howinformation is derived, when it is presented incorrectly, and use of guidelines todifferentiate between software and hardware problems.

3.02 INSTRUMENT TRAINING

A. Cover following areas as a minimum.

1. General principle of operation2. Calibration schedule3. Calibration procedure4. Calibration equipment required (if needed)5. Recommended spare parts

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM - TRAINING Donohue & Associates, Inc.13494-2 Project No. 12026

6. Consumable part – recommended replacement schedule (eg. Reagents, filters, probetips) and procedure.

7. General care and maintenance with special consideration to all instruments that mayrequire cleaning such as level elements, etc.

3.03 HMI/OIU/PLC TRAINING

A. HMI functionality and operation.B. OIU functionality and operation.C. How key components work; shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Entering of set points.2. Using Dialer alarm matrix.3. Acknowledging and clearing alarms.

D. Block diagram of how PLC program works.

END OF SECTION

Donohue & Associates, Inc. PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – O&M DATAProject No. 12026 13495-1

SECTION 13495PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – O&M DATA

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Requirements for operations and maintenance (O&M) data for Process Control System.

B. Comply with requirements of:

1. Section 01330 Submittal Procedures.2. Section 01785 Operation and Maintenance Data.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 HARDWARE MANUALS

A. General:

1. Include equipment comprising system. Provide instructions for O&M of installed systemand for individual equipment units comprising system.

2. Provide level of comprehension so experienced electronics technician can understandthem. Convey understanding of how system operates and provide sufficient proceduresfor O&M. Use abbreviated tabular data such as charts, tables, checklists, and diagramswhenever practical, in lieu of written text. Make Drawings and tables integral part ofmanuals.

3. Standard hardware manuals are acceptable, if errata sheets included to reflect specificequipment provided.

B. Organization and Content:

1. Introduction Section: Brief explanation of function of equipment covered. Be conciseand do not include detailed descriptions. Provide quick orientation to use and purpose ofmanual and its relationship to system and equipment.

2. Safety Precautions: Major hazards to personnel and equipment peculiar to equipment orjobs covered. Intersperse specific hazard information, cautions or warning notes atappropriate points throughout other sections of manual.

3. Physical Description: Physical description (size, dimension, weight, special attachments,and physical orientation or clearances) for installation and operation. Identify specialenvironmental (cooling, exhausting or noise) constraints.

4. Functional Description: How various functions operate together to cause desired results.Include block diagrams and flow diagrams for clarification and understanding. Providetext and diagrams which mutually support each other.

5. Operating procedures: Include maintenance-oriented operating procedures for individualequipment so maintenance personnel will be able to verify proper operation.

a. Describe each equipment, unit, and assembly in detail with regard to technical ortheoretical operation. Include information to component level. Describe each circuitand mechanical mechanism. Cross-reference descriptions so functions of eachequipment are covered. Use schematic diagrams, sketches, equivalent diagrams,tables, and graphs to supplement text.

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – O&M DATA Donohue & Associates, Inc.13495-2 Project No. 12026

b. Applicable checkout, troubleshooting, servicing, removal and replacement, and in-place repair procedures which are performed on system basis. Provide writtenprocedures for every adjustment point of equipment.

6. Checkout Procedures: Verify satisfactory operation of system, subsystem or unit asapplicable. If checkout requires detailed step-by-step procedure include suchprocedures. Indicate why checkout is performed and what conditions are to be satisfied.

7. Troubleshooting Procedures: Isolate faulty components. Sequence troubleshootingprocedures in logical progression from malfunction indication to location of faulty compo-nent(s). Indicate special connections or test equipment required for troubleshooting.

8. Servicing Requirements: Cleaning, lubricating, replenish-ing, and other housekeepingand preventive maintenance procedures applying to particular equipment. Make refer-ence to applicable manuals which describe various servicing procedures.

9. Removal and Replacement Procedures: Step-by-step instruc-tions for removal andreplacement of items subject to frequent replacement. If special tools are required,identify by name and part number.

10. Diagrams: Schematic diagrams, logic diagrams, and associated data necessary formaintenance personnel to trace circuits, make continuity checks, and accomplishgeneral and specific troubleshooting on inoperative or malfunction-ing circuits. Providepin wiring diagrams and cabling and plug tables showing to-and-from wiring information.Provide symbol chart where necessary to explain graphic symbols appearing ondiagrams.

11. Tabular Listing: Special tools, equipment, and test equip-ment applicable to test,adjustment, and fault isolation procedures. Write systems maintenance instructions toenable correct use of test equipment.

12. Parts Lists: Provide clear traceability from equipment to replaceable component.Identify each component part with original manufacturer's name and part number.Identify component parts or assemblies modified for Project by part number. Parts listsmay be tabulated or supplied in form of engineering or manufacturing drawings.

2.02 SOFTWARE AND CONFIGURATION MANUALS

A. General:

1. Manufacturer's standard PLC programming and software manuals.2. Manufacturer's standard PLC data highway network programming and software manuals.

B. Provide complete, organized, and standardized documentation. Structure documentation soeach level develops different degree of detail. Begin with broad approach (SystemsManual), focus on smaller pieces of overall system (Subsystem Documentation), and finallypinpoint finest detail (Program Documentation).

C. Systems Manual: Describe overall content of systems software. Describe what is includedin software and not how components function. Provide global view of system and completedescription of interaction of various software subsystems. Include following.

1. Table of contents.2. Overall narrative of system including special techniques and general philosophies.3. Block diagram showing subsystem interaction.4. List of subsystems including brief discussion of purpose of each.5. List of programs included, categorized by subsystem, to which each belongs.6. Description of files or tables within system which are not unique to any particular

subsystem. Files or tables used uniquely within subsystem may be defined therein.


D. Cold Boot Manual and Boot Disks: Provide detailed instructions and bootstrap software forrestoring all configured equipment to normal operation in the event of an equipment crash.Document all soft and hard points used, both in programming code and in Excel format.

PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEM – O&M DATA Donohue & Associates, Inc.13495-4 Project No. 12026

2.03 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DRAWING AND MANUALS

A. System configuration drawing showing Process Control System Equipment including, but notlimited to PLC, HMI’s, OIUs, remote I/O controllers, and local area network hardware. Showcabling and interconnection between system components.

B. Configuration data manual describing how final system configured. Describe unique dataand system parameters.

2.04 DRAWINGS

A. Provide following for process control system elements.

1. Block Diagram: Diagram showing major process control system components. Identifycomponents by manufacturer and model number. Show interconnecting cablesdiagrammatically.

2. Power and Grounding Interconnection Diagrams:

a. Power diagrams shall detail interconnections from power source through powerconditioning equipment, to process control system equipment.

b. Grounding diagram shall illustrate grounding philosophy and implementation.

3. Interconnecting Wiring Diagrams: Show process control system elements,interconnecting cables and wiring terminations, and terminations to interacting elementsand subsystems. Number terminations. Label terminations for circuits extending outsidePLC assemblies.

a. Coordinate external circuit portion of diagram with Work specified under Division 16and bear CONTRACTOR'S mark showing Work is complete.

b. Nomenclature for external connections shall be in accord-ance with I/O lists in theseContract Documents and on Drawings.

4. Shop Drawings for specifically assembled process control system equipment such aspanels, consoles, and cabinets. Drawings shall include, but not be limited to, following.

a. Complete connection diagram.b. Bill of materials listing each major item of assembly. Provide data sheets for each

item, annotated as necessary to describe specific items/options furnished.c. Layout and fabrication drawings showing locations of components.d. Installation and mounting detail drawings.e. Anchor bolt size and location.f. Equipment weights.g. Cabinet details and location.

1) Exterior dimensions.2) Cable ingress and egress areas.3) Cable routing.4) Power termination location.5) Ground lug location.6) Cable termination points.7) Nameplate schedules.



3.01 USER LIST

A. Place Owner on user's mailing list to receive notices of hardware and software updates andrevisions to documentation for period of 1 yr after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION